The Use of the Letters and Figures, directing to the twenty four Tables, or Brass Cuts; and the hundred eighty four Figures in those Tables, representing the Parts of the Body. EVery Brass Cut, or Print, is called a Table; and the said Prints or Tables, are twenty four, and have their respective Numbers set at the Foot of the Table, or Print, on the corner that is outmost, and against the Readers right hand. Each particular Figure is also numbered, and the Number set over its Head, and the several parts of each Figure, are distinguished by Letters of the Alphabet, for the easier finding. To compare therefore, the Discourse with the Tables, I shall teach you by an Example or two. In Chap. 8. page 9 line 21. The word Coronalis, is marked with the Letter ᵃ; to which Letter, looking at the end of the said Chapter, you find ᵃ T. 15. f. 3. a a a. □ intimating that you must turn to Table 15. Figure 3. and that part of the Figure which is marked a a a. which represents the Coronal Suture of the Skull: The Mark □ shows that the former Citation is ended. Again, in the next line of page 9 by the word Lambdoides, you find Letter ᵇ, to which looking at the end of the said Chapter, you find ᵇ f. 4. b b.▪ to teach you that in the 15 Table foregoing, Figure 4. and on that part of the Figure marked b b. you shall find the Suture of the Skull called Lambdoides: and this mark □ after b b. shows again that the Citation is ended. Again, in the same line, by the word Sagittalis, you find Letter ᶜ, to which turning at the end of the Chapter, you shall there find ᶜ f. 3. b b. f. 4. a a. intimating that in Figure 3. of the forenamed Table 15. and in that part of the Figure which is marked b b. Also in Figure 4. of the same Table, on that part which is marked a a you shall find the Sagittal Suture described. The mark □ shows the Citation is ended. Note that where you find not among the Directory Letters, T. for Table, that Figure belongs to the forementioned Table. Also you are to take notice that between two Citations, you shall find this mark □. Finally. He that would make his most advantage by the use of this Book, should, having been present at some Anatomical Dissections of the whole Body; study the Tables first, with their Explanations on the opposite Pages; and then read the Discourse of Riolanus, and compare it all along with the Tables, which may be best done, if the Tables be bound up by themselves, so as to lie open always while he is reading the respective Chapters, referring to each Table. A SURE GUIDE OR, The BEST and NEAREST Way TO Physic and Chirurgery: That is to say, The Arts of Healing by Medicine, and MANUAL OPERATION. Being An Anatomical Description of the whole Body of Man, and its Parts, with their Respective Diseases, demonstrated from the Fabric and Use of the said Parts. In Six Books. VIZ. 1 Describing all, and every of the Bones of Man's Body, according to the Ancient Method. 2 Describing the Belly, and all its Parts and Bowels, with their respective Diseases. 3 Describing the Chest, and all its Parts and Contents, with their respective Diseases. 4 Describing the Head, and Face, with all their Parts Containing and Contained, and their respective Diseases. 5 Describing the Limbs of the Body, with the many Regiments of Muscles, and their Diseases. 6. Containing a new Description of the Bones, by a Method first invented by our Author, handling all the Diseases and Symptoms of the said Bones. At the End of the Six Books, are added twenty four Tables, cut in Brass, containing one hundred eighty four Figures, with an Explanation of them; which are referred to in above a thousand places in the Books, for the Help of young Artists. Written in Latin, by Johannes Riolanus, Junior; Doctor of Physic, Physician in ordinary to the Queen Mother of France many years together, and the last she had: And also the King's Professor of Anatomy and Herbarism, in the University of Paris. Englished by Nich. Culpeper, Gent. and W. R. Doctor of the Liberal Arts, and of Physic. London: Printed by Peter Cole, and are to be sold at his Shop, at the Sign of the Printing-Press in Cornhill, near the Royal Exchange. 1657. To the Right Honourable, HENRY LAURENCE, Esquire; Lord Precedent of the Council to his Highness, the Lord Protector. Right Honourable, IT being my hap some years since to find in the Stationer's shop at Amsterdam, your Lordship's Elegant Treatise of Baptism, and being upon Enquiry, informed touching the quality of the Author; I wondered what Gentleman it was, that having a stock of Honour & Repute in the world, had withal so much Christian Courage, as to venture it in that kind. For I judged (and I suppose rightly) that for a Gentleman of name and note, at that time to dare to vindicate the true Christian Baptism, contemning the clamorous censures of the weak Multitude of Pretenders to Religion and Learning, was an Act of more true and high Courage than to storm a Town. And I humbly conceive, Experience has evidenced the Truth hereof, since hundreds (not to say thousands) that have adventured their Lives to gain Honour and Riches in the Field, have in their hearts found it too hard an Adventure (however otherwise convinced in their understandings) to own and acknowledge the true Christian Baptism, and subject themselves to the scorned practice thereof, with the evident hazard of much of their acquired Honour, and of their future Repute, and the advacement depending there upon. That this action, nevertheless, of yours (my Lord) has not been attended, with all that Ignominy and Prejudice, which was only to be expected from Men; is the singular providence of God, giving Courage and Ingenuity, to many others of note, soon after (much animated doubtless by so noble and generous a Leader as your Lordship) to acknowledge and submit to the Divine verity, and beautiful, and most lovely Rationality of that solemn Institution of our Mr. Christ▪ and his eminent blessing that part of the soldiery, Characterised thereby. Much affected therefore with your Lordship's Christian Virtue in this kind, and desirous to commend the same to Posterity; It has not been since that time in my power to do it more effectually, than by prefixing your truly honourable Name in the Front of this excellent Anatomical Treatise, and best Foundation of the Art of Healing, commonly though corruptly called Physic. The fitness of which Dedication, I shall with your Honour's gentle Patience, thus demonstrate Seeing this book is nothing (for the most part) but a Declaration and Exposition of the stupendiously admirable wisdom of the Eternal our Maker, shining forth in the most curious Fabric of Man's body; to confirm and seal the belief of the Resurrection whereof (which is the very Foundation of 1 Cor. 13. 15, 16. 17. 18. 30. 31. 32. Christianity) baptism seems (by the Scripture) to have been chiefly ordained, by our great Mr. Christ; that as we had one solemn Ceremony to represent his sufferings and death, we might not want another to set forth and solemnize his burial and Resurrection (without which his own death and his Disciples Faith had been in vain) and to take possession in and by a Figure of our own Resurrection to come (For, we Colo. 2. 12. are, saith Paul, Buried with Christ, in our Baptism, and therein also risen with him; That is, in a figure, being through a solemn Ceremonious possession of our future Resurrection from the grave, instated into eternal life.) This being so (my Lord) to whom should this excellent Description of the body of Man in general, with all its parts, and their Respective Diseases, be dedicated, rather than to him that has vindicated to the Christian world, that excellent pledge of the Resurrection thereof; to wit, the Baptism of Christ rightly solemnised: whereby all true believers are mightily assured, that though this curiously built House of our Earthly Tabernacle, be sown in the dust, yet it shall not there abide for ever, as the beasts that perish. Accept therefore (Generous Sir) from your most humble servant, this Testimony of your Christian Courage and sincerity, and suffer this excelleut Treatise to shelter itself under your honourable Patronage. And though this testimony of your virtue so publicly given, may (I fear) afford some disgust to your Modesty, yet I beseech your Lordship to let it pass, for the glory of our great Mr. Christ, and the Edification of Christendom. And I have much reason to hope, it may be a Monument of your honourable Memory, when probably the royal and Magnificent combs at Westminster, shall pledge the Fate of them in Paul's, and be overwhelmed with Dust and Ruins. Such is the desire and Hopes (my Lord) of him that craves leave to subscribe himself, Your Honours, Most humble Servant, and true Admirer of your Christian Ingenuity, Sincerity, and Courage, WILLIAM RAND. From my House near Cripplegate in London. December, 22. 1656. Mrs. Culpepers' Information, Vindication, and Testimony, concerning her Husband's Books to be Published after his Death. SO great are the Afflictions wherewith our Heavenly Father hath been pleased to exercise me his poor Handmaid, that I have not only lived to see my dear Husband, (the Stay ●●d Solace of my Life) taken from me: but it hath been my hard hap also to see his Reputation, and Memory (which will be dear to all Posterity, for the Works he hath written for the Common Good of this Nation) blemished, and Eclipsed, by the covetous and unjust Forgeries of one, who, though he calls himself Nathaniel, is far from being an Israelite in whom there is no guile; who was not content to publish a Hodgpodg of undigested Collections, and Observations of my dear Husband deceased, under the Title of Culpeper's last Legacy; but to make the Deceit more taking, he steeled his Forehead so far, and brased it so hard, as not to be ashamed to forge two Epistles, one in mine, and the other in my Husband's Name; of the penning of which, he nor I, never so much as dreamt: And yet he impudently affirmeth in my Name, that my Husband Laid a severe Injunction on me to publish them for the general good, after his decease; and that they are his last Experiences in Physic and Chirurgery. And in the Title of his Book, he said, They are the choicest, and most profitable secrets, resolved never to be published till after his Death. All which Expressions in the Title and Epistles, are as falls as the Father of Lies; and every word in them, forged and feigned. And he knew well enough, that no discreet, honest man, that was a friend to my Husband, or me, would ever have agreed to such infamous and dishonest practices; and therefore I desire all courteous Readers of the Writings of my Husband, to take notice of this Deceit, and to assure themselves that it never entered into his head, to publish such an undigested Gallimoffery, under the promising and solemn Name of his Last Legacy, and that whereby he gained his Reputation in the World, as the Imposter makes him speak in his forged Epistle. And I desire any in different Reader, that hath observed my Husband's lofty, and Masculine manner of expressing himself in his Prefaces, and Epistles Dedicatory, whether in case he had been minded or disposed to take so solemn a farewell of the world, as the Forger makes him to do; whether, I say, he would have done it in such a whining fashion, and so in the Style of a Balade-maker, as to say, And now, if it please Heaven to put a period to my Life, and Studies, that I must bid all things under the Sun farewel: Farewell to my dear Wife and Child, farewel Arts and Sciences, farewel all worldly Glories, adieu Readers. Certainly my Husband would have been far more serious, and material, in such a case, as any discreet man will Judg. Neither can it be thought, that in such a solemn Valediction, he could possibly forget his wont respects to the College of Doctors, to whom he did so frequently address himself, in divers of his writings. Courteous Reader, I shall say no more touching the abuse of the Bookseller, only to prevent (as much as concerns me) thy being abused for the future, know, That my Husband left seventy-nine Books of his own making, or Translating, in my hand, and I have deposited them into the hands of his, and my much honoured Friend, Mr. Peter Cole, Bookseller, at the Printing-Press, near the Royal Exchange (for the good of my Child) from whom thou mayest expect to receive in print, such of them as shall be thought fit to serve thee in due season, without any Disguises or Forgeries, unto which I do hereby give my attestation. Also my Husband left seventeen Books completely perfected, in the hands of the said Mr. Cole, for which he paid my Husband in his life-time: And Mr. Cole is ready and willing (on any good occasion) to show any of the said seventy-nine Books, or the seventeen, to such as doubt thereof. And if any Person shall question the Truth of any part of this Vindication, or Epistle; if they will take pains to come to me, I will face to face, justify the truth of every word thereof, as I have subscribed my Hand thereunto in the presence of many witnesses. I profess in the presence of the great God, the searcher of all hearts, before whom Mr. Brooks and I must one day give an account of all our Actions: That I have not published this Epistle or Vindication, out of any disrespect to Mr. Brooks (for I much respite the man, and would be glad to serve him to my power) but only to clear my Husband from the folly and weakness cast upon him by the means above expressed. And out of tenderness to Mr. Brooks, I first tried other means of keeping, and afterwards of repairing my Husband's Credit, and then stayed long to see if he would repair (in any measure) the wrong done to my Husband, and myself. I desire to be. Your Servant (in, and for the Truth) Alice Culpeper. From my House, next door to the Red Lion in Spittle-fields, October, 18. 1655. Mrs. Culpeper did the 18. of October, subscribe this Epistle in Vindication of her Husband's Reputation, before Ten Witnesses, as she had done another Epistle on the ninth of October, almost in the same words with this, except near the Conclusion. THE CONTENTS OF The First Book. Of Osteology, or the History of the Bones. CHAP. 1. The Intent of the Author is declared. 1 Chap. 2. Why we begin our Anatomy with the Treatise of Bones 3 Chap. 3. The Division of Osteology, or the History of the Bones. 4 Chap. 4. Of the Composition, and Definition of a Bone. ibid. Chap. 5. Of the Qualities, or Natural Disposition of the Bones. 5 Chap. 6. Of the Conjunction of Bones. 6 Chap. 7. The Division of a Sceleton. 8 Chap. 8. Of the Head, being the first Part of the Sceleton. ibid. Chap. 9 Of the upper Jaw. 11 Chap. 10. Of the Orbitary Bone 12 Chap. 11. Of the inferior Jaw ibid. Chap. 12. Of the Os Hyois ibid. Chap. 13. Of the Teeth 13 Chap. 14. Of the Trunk, being the second Part of the Sceleton. ibid. Chap. 15. Of the Chest. 14 Chap. 16. Of the Limbs, being the third Part of the Sceleton: and first of the Scapula. 15 Chap. 17. Of the Shoulder. ibid. Chap. 18. Of the Cubitus, and Radius. 16 Chap. 19 Of the Hand. ibid. Chap. 20. Of the Bones of the Ilium 17 Chap. 21. Of the Bone of the Thigh. ibid. Chap. 22. Of the Leg. ibid. Chap. 23. Of the Foot 18 Chap. 24. In what Particulars the Bones of Men differ from those of Women. ib. Chap 25. Of the number of the Bones in a Man's Body. 19 Chap. 26. The History of an Infant's Bones, till the Age of seven years. ibid. Chap. 27. Of the Head 21 Chap. 28. Of the Back and Breast-bones. 23 Chap. 29. Of the upper Limbs 24 Chap. 30. Of the Inferior Limbs ibid. Chap. 31. Of the Number of Bones. 25 The Second Book. CHAP. 1. General Precepts, which he that would be an Anatomist, must be first acquainted with 26 Chap. 2. Of the Natural and Legitimate Conformation of the Body. 29 Chap. 3. The Division of Man's Body. 31 The Medicinal Consideration ibid. Chap. 4. Of the lower Ventricle. 32 The Situation of the parts of the Belly. ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 33 The Medicinal Consideration 34 Chap. 5. Of the Scarf Skin 34 The Medicinal Consideration ibid. Chap. 6. Of the Skin 35 The medicinal Consideration. 36 Chap. 7. Of the Fatty Membrane ibid. Chap. 8. Of the Fleshy membrane 37 The medicinal Consideration ibid. Chap. 9 Of the common membrane of the muscles 38 Chap. 10. Of a muscle in the general ibid. Chap. 11. Of a Tendon 40 Chap. 12 Of the muscles of the Belly. ibid. The medicinal Cosideration 42 Chap. 13. Of the Peritoneum ibid. The medicinal Consideration 43 Chap. 14. The Division of the Parts of the Belly 44 Chap. 15. Of the Navel ibid. The medicinal Consideration 45 Chap. 16. Of the Omentum, or Call ibid. The medicinal Consideration ibid. Chap. 17. Of the Guts 46 The medicinal Consideration 48 Chap. 18. Of the Mesenterium ibid. The medicinal Consideration 49 Chap. 19 Of the Sweetbread, or Pancreas. 50 Chap. 20. Of the Vena Porta ibid. Chap. 21. What is to be considered in the Vena Porta 51 Chap. 22. Of the Celiacal Artery 52 Chap. 23. Of the Stomach ibid. The medicinal Consideration 54 Chap. 24. Of the Liver. 57 The medicinal Consideration 58 Chap. 25. Of the Bladder of Gall 59 The medicinal Consideration 60 Chap. 26. Of the Spleen 61 The medicinal Consideration 63 Chap. 27. Of the Vena Cava, and Aorta, within the lower Belly 64 The medicinal Consideration 65 Of the Aorta descending 67 Of the Nerve of the lower Belly ibid. Chap. 28. Of the Kidneys ibid. The medicinal Consideration 68 Chap. 29. Of the ureters 70 Chap. 30. Of the Piss-Bladder ibid. The medicinal Consideration 71 Chap. 31. Of the Genitals of a Man; and first of the Yard 73 The Medicinal Consideration 74 Chap. 32. Of the groins 76 Chap. 33. Of the Fundament. ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 77 Chap. 34. Of the Cod, and Stones. ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 78 Chap. 35. Of the Vessels which carry the true Seed, of the Seed-Bladders, and the Prostatae or Auxiliaries. 79 The Medicinal Consideration. 80 Chap. 36. Of the Genital Parts of a Woman, and first of the External. ibid. The medicinal Consideration 82 Chap. 37. Of the internal Parts of a Woman which serve for Generation 83 The medicinal Consideration 85 Chap. 37. Of the Pains of the Loins. 90 The Third Book. CHAP. 1. Of the Chest 94 Chap. 2. Of the Dugs of Women. 95 The medicinal Consideration. ibid. Chap. 3. Of the external Parts of the Chest. 97 Chap. 4. Of the Pleura, Mediastinum, and Pericardium ibid. The medicinal consideration 98 Chap. 5. Of the Midrif, or Diaphragma. 101 The Medicinal Consideration 102 Chap. 6. Of the Lungs or Lights ibid. The medicinal consideration 103 Chap. 7. Of Respiration, or fetching of Breath. 105 Chap. 8. Of the Heart. 107 The medicinal consideration 110 Chap. 9 Of the Vessels, viz. Veins, Arteries, and Nerves contained within the Chest. 113 The Fourth Book. CHAP. 1. Of the Head. 118 The medicinal consideration. 119 Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 121 The medicinal consideration. 130 Chap. 3. Of the Eyes 136 The medicinal consideration 138 Eyelids Diseases. 139 Tear-Kernels Diseases. 140 Diseases of the Tunica Conjunctiva. ib. Diseases of the Cornea Tunica. 141 Diseases of the Wea Tunica ibid. Diseases of the Pupilla ibid. Diseases of the Crystalline and Glassy Humour 142 Diseases of the Optic Nerve ibid. Diseases and Symptoms of the Sight. ibid. Chap. 4. Of the Ear 191 The medicinal consideration 192 Chap. 5. Of the Face, and outside of the Mouth. 194 The Medicinal Consideration 195 Chap. 6. Of the Nose 197 The Medicinal Consideration 198 Chap. 7. Of the Neck 199 The Medicinal Consideration 201 Chap. 8. Of the Teeth and Gums. 202 The Medicinal Consideration ibid. Chap. 9 Of the Gums 204 Chap. 10. Of the palate ibid. Chap. 11. Of the Wula, and Isthmus. ib. The Medicinal Consideration 205 Of the Isthmus ibid. Chap. 12. Of the Tongue ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 206 Chap. 13. Of the Larynx, or Head of the Windpipe. 207 The Medicinal Consideration 208 Chap. 14. Of the Aspera Arteria, or Windpipe ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 209 Chap. 15. Of the Oesophagus, or Gullet. ibid. The Fift Book. CHAP. 1. Of the Limbs▪ 210 The Medicinal Consideration 211 Chap. 2. Of the Superior Limbs. ib. Of the Shoulderblade, and the Arm from the Shoulder to the Elbow. ib. Of the Cubit, or part of the Arm from the Elbow to the Hand 212 Of the Hand ibid. Of the Nails ibid. Chap. 3. Of the Inferior Limbs. 213 Chap. 4. In what places Issues are commonly made 214 Chap. 5. Of Veins usually opened 215 Chap. 6. Of the Arteries which are opened. 217 Chap. 7. Of the Muscles, and first of the Forehead Muscles. 218 Chap. 8. Muscles of the hinder part of the Head. ibid. Chap. 9 Muscles of the Eyelids ibid. Chap. 10. Muscles of the Eyes 219 Chap. 11. Muscles of the external Ear. ibid. Chap. 12. Muscles of the Nose 220 Chap. 13. Muscles of the Lips ibid. Chap. 14. Muscles of the lower Jaw 221 Chap. 15. Of the muscles of the Os Hyoides ibid. Chap. 16. Muscles of the Tongue 222 Chap. 17. Muscles of the Larynx ibid. Chap. 18. Muscles of the Pharynx ibid. Chap. 19 Muscles of the Gargareon, Wula, or Mouth palate. 223 Chap. 20. Muscles of the Head ibid. Chap. 21, Muscles of the Neck 224 Chap. 22. Muscles of the Shoulderblades ibid. Chap. 23. Muscles of the Arm 225 Chap. 24. Muscles of the Cubit. ibid. Chap. 25. Muscles of the Radius 226 Chap. 26. Muscles of the Wrist. 227 Chap. 27. Muscles of the Palm of the Hand ibid. Chap. 28. Muscles of the Fingers 228 Chap. 29. Muscles of the Thumb. 229 Chap. 30. Muscles of Chest 230 Chap. 31. Of the Midrif. 231 Chap. 32. Muscles of the Back and Loins, wherewith the Backbone is moved. ib. Chap. 33. Muscles of the Belly 232 Chap. 34. Of the motion of the Ilium Bones, and Os Sacrum joined together. ibid. Chap. 35. Muscles of the Testicles ibid. Chap. 36. The Bladders Muscle ibid. Chap. 37, Muscles of the Yard 233 Chap. 38. Muscles of the Clytoris ibid. Chap. 39 Muscles of the Fundament ib. Chap. 40. Muscles of the Thigh ibid. Chap. 41. Muscles of the Leg. 235 Chap. 42. Muscles of the Feet 236 Chap. 43, Muscles of the Toes 238 Chap. 44. Muscles of the great Toe 239 Chap. 45. An Introduction to the Art of Muscular Dissection, showing an accurate Method to cut up the Muscles of the whole Body. ibid. The Frontal Muscle 228 The Orbicular muscle of the Eyelids. ibid. Muscles of the Lips ibid. Muscles of the Nose ibid. The Temporal Muscle 241 The Masseter Muscle ibid. The Parotick Kernels ibid. The muscles of the Ears ibid. The muscles of the Eye ibid. ` Muscles seated in the Neck 242 Muscles of the Larynx, Pharynx, and Gargareon 243 The muscles of the hinder part of the Head and Neck 244 Muscles of the Arm 245 Next thereunto, is the Rotundus minor ibid. Muscles situate upon the Back and Loins ibid. Muscles of the Breast 246 Muscles of the Cubit ibid. Muscles of the Radius, the Wrists, the Fingers, and the Thumb 247 Muscles of the Abdomen, or Belly 248 Muscles of the Yard 250 Muscles of the Fundament ibid. The Bladder muscle 251 Muscles of the Clytoris ibid. Muscles of the Thigh ibid. Muscles of the Leg 253 Muscles of the Tarsus 254 Chap. 46. Of the Veins, Arteries, and Nerves, belonging to the Limbs ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 258 The sixth Book. A New Osteologia, or History of the Bones. Wherein he treats of the Bones, Ligaments, and Gristles of the whole Body, by which the Frame of the Body is compacted together, the Muscles being removed; handling all the Diseases and Symptoms which happen unto the Bones. 260 CHAP. 1. 260 Chap. 2. Of the great profit of this new Osteology, or Doctrine of the Bones 261 Chap. 3. What is to be observed in the bones of a dead Body not boiled 262 Chap. 4. Of the Nourishment, Sense, and and Marrow of the Bones 263 Chap. 5. Of Articulations, or jointings of the Bones ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 265 Chap. 6. Of the bones of the Skull 267 The Medicinal Consideration 270 Chap. 7. Of the inferior Jawbone ibid. Chap. 8. Of the Teeth ibid. Chap. 9 Of the Bone Hyoides, and of the Ligaments 271 Chap. 10. Of the Heads motion, and Ligaments 272 Chap. 11. Of the inside of the Ear ibid. Chap. 12. Of the Clavicula 273 Chap. 13. Of the Breastbone. ibid. Chap. 15. Of the Ribs 275 Chap. 16. Of the Backbone ibid. The Medicinal Consideration 277 Chap. 16. Of the Scapula 278 Chap. 17. Of the Humerus, Cubitus, and Radius. 280 Chap. 18. Of the Wrist. 281 Chap. 19 Of the Metacarpium, Fingers, and Sesamoidean Bones ibid. Chap. 20. Of the Os Ilium, and Thighbone 282 Chap. 21. Of the Patella 284 Chap. 22. Of the Tibia, and Fibula 285 Chap. 23. Of the Foot ibid. Chap. 24. The number of Bones for a Sceleton ibid. Chap. 25. Of breaking the bones ibid. Chap. 26. The Collection, and ordering of Bones for a Sceleton 287 THE FIRST BOOK OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIC, OF John Riolanus. Chap. 1. The Intent of the Author is declared. ANatomy, is considered and handled two ways, Philosophically, The Consideration of Anatomy is. Philosophical. and Physically, Galen, Lib. 1. Anat. The Philosopher searcheth out the structure of the Parts, their action, and use, that he may know himself, & that the * Workmaster may be admired in his (* Viz. God) work; and therefore the knowledge of the Parts alone does content him. But the Physician, besides the Physical, knowledge of this, brings all into a Practical way, and searcheth after the Natural dispositions of every Part, that so by viewing the Anatomy of the Carcases of sound and sick men, he may more easily know the accidents against Nature; which happen to those Parts, in such as are alive. By Dispositions against Nature, is to be understood Diseases, whose generation and end, whether it will be good or bad, the way and manner of Curing, he that would know exactly, must be skilled both in Philosophical, and Physical Both which are necessary. ●▪ Anatomy; and I dare boldly affirm, that he will be an abler, and more skilful Physician that is well skilled in this Anatomy, than he that contents himself, with the bare knowledge of the Parts. This manner of showing, and teaching Anatomy is new, but gives great light, & is wonderful necessary for a Physician, and I will lay it down intermixed with the order of Anatomy in all the Parts, and show particularly in every Part, what profit will thereby redound unto a Physician, in his Practice. And seeing the Natural Constitution of every Part which Hypocrates calls Euphuian, and is commonly called Health, is threefold, Similar, Organical, and common, The Preternatural Constitution of the Parts, called Sickness, must likewise be threefold and make three kinds of Diseases, Viz. A Disease of the Similar, a Disease of the Organical Parts, and a Disease common to both. The Similar Constitution, according to Nature, consists in Substance, and Temper; The Organical Constitution, which pertains to the construction of the Organ, is placed, in number, Magnitude, Situation, and shape or Conformation; which Conformation is again divided into Figure, Passage, Cavity, Roughness, and smoothness; The common Constitution of Similar, and Organical Parts, consists in Union and Connexion. This threefold Natural Constitution, I will declare in all the Parts; afterwards I will lay down in a few words, what may be gathered from this Sound Constitution, for the Knowledge, fore knowledge, and Cure of a Diseased Constitution; And Anatomy handled in this Method, will be the beginning, Middle, and end of the whole Art of Physic. This is a short, easy, and clear Method, Quickly, and rightly to learn the Art of Curing; which propounds the same, visible to the Eyes of such as are well versed in my Father's writings, or in the Institutions of Sennertus. for by this Method, I shall unlock, & display the treasures in Anatomy of Physic: But perhaps some Fool, that is unskilled, will reprove our Design, & Object, that we confound the whole Art of Medicine, seeing Anatomy is a Part of Physiology, distinct from the rest; and therefore aught to be taught apart, seeing Galen himself, in the beginning of his dissection of Muscles, reproves the Anatomical Book of Lycus; because in his Treatise of Muscles he inserted the Diseases of the Parts. If any prattle such things against us, they will quickly hold their peace, if they read Gal. Lib. 2 admin. Anatom. Relateing, That Ancient Physicians regarded Anatomy so much, that in all Hypocrates did in all his Books. Many are the Sorts of the Figures, both within, and without the Body, (saith Hypocrates, in Lib. de vet. Med.) Which have much different qualifications in the Sick, and the Sound; all which you must perfectly distinguish one from another, that you may rightly know, and observe the causes of every one of them. According to Aristotle, Health, and Sickness, are the Fundamental And Profitable in Medicine. Parts of Medicine: Both of them are contained in the Parts; and Sickness compared with Health is the better discerned. Ad to this, That Aristotle Writes, that he that would Cure the Eyes, must first know the Structure of the Eye. Again, Hypocrates held, that Diseases were distinguished according to the Parts they were in●ierent in; and the principal Curative indications, were taken from the Affect, and the Part affected; and Remedies both Medicinal, and Chyrurgical were Prescribed and administered diversely, according to the Parts Afflicted. Therefore Galen wrote his Therapeuticks of the composition of Medicines, according to the Parts afflicted: and Avicenna did wisely, when perceving that the Seats of Diseases could not be known without skill in Anatomy, Before the Diseases of the particular Parts he set down their Anatomy. And if we believe Galen in Lib. de Part med. The first Matter or Subject of Medicine, is the Body, as it is the Subject of Health and Sickness. Our intent then is by a short and easy Method, To deliver in writing, and The Intent of the Author. demonstrate in dead Bodies, of the seats of all Diseases, and Symptoms, both Internal, and External; and the particular way of Cure according to the order of Anatomy, which is publicly observed. A notable piece of Workmanship to learn Physic by, by which 'tis easy to manifest, and bring to light the Errors, in the Cures of Diseases and to instruct and inform such as are Studious in Physic, by that time they have been hearers and beholders two years, of two Anatomies in a year, with diligent reading of Books, and excercize of the knowing of Plants, and other Drugs, and visiting of the Sick with him that is their teacher. Excellently said Johannes Fernelius in the beginning of his Pathology, I shall never think any man well skilled in the knowledge of Diseases, unless he have been an Eye witness of the seats of them, in the Body of man, and know how they are affected against Nature; neither can be come to this unless he be skilful and exquisite in Anatomy, and whatsoever he reads or hears, let him seriously contemplate it in the Body of man, and settle the chief knowledge of things in his mind. Chap. 2. Why we begin our Anatomy with the Treatise of Bones. THat kind of stile is twofold, which is used in the explication of any thing, Gal. Com. ad Part. q. Lib. 1. de fract. et Cap. 1. Lib. The Method of teaching double. Synops. de Pulls. The first is called Synopticus, when the Matter is briefly laid down; The other Diexodicus, when it is Copiously unfolded, nothing being passed by which is profitable to be declared: The former helps the memory; the latter clears the matter to the understanding. For which Cause Galen divided his Books into Isagogical, and perfect; the first being fitted to young beginners, the other to proficients, as himself testifies. Lib. de libris Propriis. This is also confirmed by the authority of Hypocrates; Lib. de vet. Med. Where he adviseth Physicians to teach easy things to young students, and such as may be quickly learned; ad hereunto; That all men desire to learn apace, according to Aristor. Lib. 2 de Rhetor. Chap. 10. And the Method of brief teaching, is always grateful, both to young students, and to perfect Masters; for it teacheth the former what things must be learned; and in the latter calls back to their memory what they have learned before, and almost forgotten, Gal. Lib. 4. de diff. pulls. Wisely, and Elegantly, did the Emperor Justinian judge, That a compendium of the Laws was first to be propounded, to invite Novices to knowledge. Then are all things delivered most commodiously when they are first delivered by a plain and simple way, and then by an exact and diligent interpretation; for if we burden weak, though studious minds at beginning, with variety and Multiplicity of things, we either make them desert their studies, or else young Men to great labour and distrust, and bring them by a longer way to what might be learned with more speed, less labour, and no distrust. Therefore following the precepts of Galen, and Hypocrates, I will describe Why the Author wrote a Synopsis. a brief, and clear Manual of Anatomy, following the counsel of Galen, who had rather write a Synopsis of his Books of Pulses himself, then to leave the business to another, who by not understanding his mind, and sense, should pervert or confound his meaning. I begin with the Bones, because they are the foundation of all the Parts of the whole Body, which is substained, Included, Preserved, and moved by the Why he gins with the Bones. Bones; which, according to Hypocrates, give stability, and form to the Body. Therefore he that is studious in Physic, aught to be instructed in the perfect The necessity of writing of the Bones. knowledge of the Bones, before he come to behold the Anatomy of the whole Body: otherwise he will be ignorant in designing the original, and insertion of the Muscles, and the sticking of other Parts to certain Conceptacles of the Bones, unless he be skilled in the History of Bones; at which Anatomy is to begin, as Hypocrates taught, and after him, Galen. Chap. 3. The Division of Osteology, or the History of the Bones. THe History of the Bones is called. Osteology, of which are two Parts: The Parts of Osteology. Practice, and Theory. I call that the Theory, which is conversant in the knowledge of their conformation and use. The Practice is the manual operation which comprehends both Ossilegium, and Ossifragium; Ossilegium, is the manner of preparing Bones to make a Sceleton; Ossifragium is that which searches out the joining, and knitting together of the Bones, and Joints, by Ligaments, and Cartilages, and by breaking, and deviding them; searches out their internal, and hiden Parts. See Chap. 26. and 27. Lib. 6. Of this Book. Chap. 4. Of the Composition, and Definition of a Bone. THat the Nature of a Bone may be perfectly understood, there are four Four Considerations. things to be considered in it: The Matter, Efficient, Form, and End. The Matter of the Bone is Proper, or Divers. 1. Matter, Proper. Generation. Proper is considered Generally, or Specially. Proper Matter, taken Generally, is double; the one for Generation, the other for Nourishment; the Bones are made of the Seed by consent of all Physicians. The Seed consists of Humour, and Spirit: The Humours are of two Parts; the one thinner, of which the noble Parts are form; the other thicker, of which the Bones are engendered. The matter of Nourishment is also two fold; Remote, and Near: Remote, is Blood, by which all the Parts of our Body are nourished: Near, is the Marrow Nourishment. contained in the Cavity of the Bones, or a Marrowy Juice shut up in the Spongious Bones. The Proper Matter considered specially, regards the Bone already made, which is various in respect of substance, and quality; and so the substance of Constitution. one Bone is divers, by reason of the Epiphysis, which is Softer than the rest of the Bone; or the Apophysis, which is harder than the rest of the Bone: also the whole Bone, if it be Solid, is harder without, than it is within. If it be hollow, the Internal Superficies is hardest. As for what belongs to Quality, and Namely Color; the Bone, the more 〈◊〉 it is, the more White it is; that which is hollow, is pale or reddish. By the divers Matter of the Bone, understand that which compasseth it Matter divers. about; and it is a Membrane, and a Cartilege. The Membrane which compasseth about the Bone, is called Periostion, and sticks firmly to it. By benefit of which, it Obscurely feels. The extremities of the Bones are covered with a Cartilege, which Facilitaces the Motion of the Bone, and hinders its wearing. The Efficient Cause of the Bone, is the Implanted Generative Spirit, or 2. Efficient cause. rather heat, which ●orre●●es and dries the Matter of the Bone. Gal Lib. 1. ●e facel. natural. acknowledgeth the faculty which forms the Bones; to which Heat and Spirit, do administer. The form of a Bone is double; Essential, and accidental: That is called 3. Form, Essential. Essential, which makes it to be a Bone, Namely, the Vegetable Soul. The Face, saith Aristotle Lib. 2. de Generate. animal, is no Face, if it want the Soul; and so is the Flesh and Bone. But with Physicians, the form of Similar Parts, is nothing else then their temper. The temper of the Bone, is cold and dry; therefore Coldness and Dryness constitute the form of the Bone. The accidental form, is the Figure of them, which is Proper, and peculiar Accidental. to every Bone, and is most commonly round in all Bones, both in Longitude, and Latitude. The end of the Bones, is their Use; and this is general, and particular; 4. End. General. Special. That is called General, which serves for the whole Body; and that is three fold, 1. To establish, and make firm the soft Parts. 2. To give shape, and Figure to the Parts. 3. To help the Motion, and Progress of the Body. The Particular end, or use, is that which is Proper to every several Bone. From what hath been written, this Definition of a Bone, may be gathered; It is a Similar Part, most cold and dry, Form by heat of the thick and Fat Definition. substance of the Seed; for the form and settlement of the whole Body. Chap. 5. Of the Qualities, or Natural Disposition of the Bones. THe Doctrine of Bones, aught to be double; one which treats of the Doctrine of Bones Double, Of Infants and men grown up. Bones of infants, which from their Birth till seven years of Age, differ in many things from such as are grown up: the other of men of perfect Age, which we now handle. And seeing all Doctrine of Bones, is referred to Physical use, we must know the Condieions, and affections of Bones, well and Naturally affected, which are either common to all, or Proper to some. The common are nine which shall be Described, and Demonstrated, in our Affection of the ●…ones are. Common. new Osteology, at the latter end of this Manual. In dry Bones well Prepared, are five things showed. 1. Hardness and solidity. 2. They have holes outwardly, Especially toward the Extremities, by which is ingress given to the little Veins, and arteries, for Nourishment and life. 3. A cartilaginous Crust at the Extremities, and the Periostion, which compasseth about the whole Bone, the Cartilaginous extremities excepted. 4. Continuity, and Equality in its whole substance; wherefore the callous, by which broken Bones are united, is not Natural. 5. A fit and convenient joining of one Bone with another. The affections Proper to the several Bones, are twofold; either such as regard Proper, every Bone severally; or such as regard more Bones than one, joined together. 1. The affections of the first sort, are four; Hollowness, Prominence, 2. of Bones separated. Roughness, and Smoothness; which affections are considered in the extreme superficies of the Bone, in as much as Bones are referred to mutual conjunction because they cannot subsist alone by themselves. The Head of the a T. 21. f. 2. C. □ Omoplata is hollow; the b f. 1. a. □ Shoulder Bone sticks out; the c f. 4. B. □ Ischium, or Hucklebone, is hollow; the d f. 1. D. □ Bone of the Thigh sticks out; the Skull is rough behind for the e T. 15. f 4. C. □ insertion of Muscles, in other places 'tis smooth, and Polished: All which affections, if they are such as Nature made them, they are according to Nature; if otherwise, they are beside Nature. Also a Cavity is deep, or superficiary; that which is deep, is called f T. 21. f. 4. B. □ Cotyle; the superficiary g f. 4. F. f. 2. F c □ Glene. A Prominency, or Parts sticking out, is called Apophysis, or Epiphysis: Both of them are round, or long, or hollow: If it be round, it is called a Head; if it be large and long, it is absolutely Named a h f. 1. dd. f 4. a. □ Head; but if it be short, and depressed, it is called i f. 2. II. □ Condylu●. The Heads or Condyli of small Bones, are not Epiphysis, but Apiphy●is▪ as in the nether Jaw, and in the Ribs, and the Bones of the Fingers, and Toes. A long Apophysis, is either with a point, and called Corone; or simply long, and that according to the Figure of it, hath divers Names; or k T. 15. f. b. D. □ Styloides l T. 21. f. 2. d. □ Coracoides, m T. 13. f. 21. a. □ Odontoides; or else 'tis terminated in a Head, and then is called n T. 21. f. 2. c. □ Cervix or a Neck. It is not absurd, that some Apophysis should be hollow, Seeing all Cavities whether Apophyses have hollownesses. are, as it were, ingraved in the Apophysis; or else are made of two or three Apophyses, as in the Cavity of the Ischium, or Hucklebone: and although sometimes a Cavity make the Body of the Bone, yet it is form by a bony Circumference; which Seeing it sticks out obliquely, and orbicularly, without the plain superficies, it is worthily accounted an Apophysis; Gal. Lib. de Ossibus acknowledgeth the Omoplata to be an Apophyfis, which is a Cervix, the extremity of which, ends in the o ibid. □ Glene; therefore Cavities ought to be referred to Apophysis; and a Cavity if it be round and large, may be called a Head, for the Neck is always subjected to the Head Gal. Proem. Lib. de Ossib. In every Bone, which being joined to another makes a Joint, I observe the Body and the extremities, which are Adnata, or Enata; The body is The Body the principal Part, form of Nature, that it may be the foundation of the extreme Parts; for Nature evermore gins the formation of the Bones in the and middle, and produceth them towards the extremities. The extremities of the bones called Enata, are p T. 2. f. 1. aa. f. 2. b c d. T. 15. f. 3. M N d. □ Apophyses; Adnata are q T. 21. f. 1. 2. q. T. 13. f. 21. a. T. 15. f. 6. D. □ Epiphyses: the Extremities, which are Apophysis, and Epithysis. Treatise of the Epiphyses pertains to the Osteology of Infants, therefore we will not speak of it here. Yet this you may know, that Epiphyses belong to the extremity of the Joints of the bones; and that their Nature is to be sought out in Children; for in men grown up, they degenerate into Apophyses, no Footsteps of the ancient Division remaining; and yet inwardly they keep the condition of their Proper Nature, which ought to be like a pumice, and bloody; but the Apophyses are always harder. The second sort of Affections are, the Articulations of bones, one with another, 2. The Jointing of Bones. which in divers bones, are different; which now we come to speak of, in General. Chap. 6. Of the Conjunction of Bones. SEeing it is not safe, nor comely for man, that Divine Creature, to creep Why there are many Bones in man. along like Worms, and Serpents; Nature hath set his body bolt upright, with firm, and solid bones; not only three, or four in number, but very many various, and distinct, whereby he may bow, and move himself every way; And that this Workmanship might be the more Elegant, the Bones are so Joined together, that the extremity of one, enters into the Cavity of the other. This structure is called a Joint, the Nature of which, is much controverted amongst Anatomists; some contending that the touching of two bones one with another, makes a Joint; others, besides touching, ad motion. So that it is the movable touching of two bones, which makes a Joint. If Motion be removed from the Definition of a Joint, Galens Doctrine may easily be defended. He constitutes two kinds of Articulation; Diarthrosis, with mainfest Motion; Synarthrosis, with Obscure, or no Motion: and he assigns the differences of Synarthrosis, which are altogether immovable, to be Conjunction of Bones is either by Articulation the Differences of which are Diarthrosis & Synarthrosis. Sutura, Harmonia, and Gomphosis; with those which take away Motion in the Definition of Articulation, refer to the third speeys of Articulation, which they call Neutral, or mean, between Diarthrosis and Synarthrosis. Some give it a new Name, Amphiarthrosis, to wit, when the structure is so Obscure, and the Motion so hidden, that you know not whether it appertain to Diarthrosis, or Synarthrosis. But that place of Galen being il understood, deceives many Anatomists. This Doctrine of Galen seems more probable, thus. The bones are knit together by Articulations, and Symphyses: Articulation, is the knit, or touching of two bones; the differences of which are Diarthrosis, and Synarthrosis; the one hath evident Motion, the other Obscure, or none at all; and therefore the differences of each, are equal: but the one, for example sake, is called Enarthrosis Diarthrodes, with a manifest Motion; the other Enarthrosis Synarthrodes, with an Obscure Motion; The common species of which are. 1, Enarthrosis. Judge the like of the other differences. Enarthrosis, is when a large, and long Head, goes into a deep Cavity; which seeing it is common both to Diarthrosis, and Synarthrosis, we will give an example of them Both. The Motion of Enarthrosis Diarthrodes, is manifest in the Joint of the Ischium: the Motion of Enarthrosis Synarthrodes, is Obscure in the Articulation of the Ankle with the Scaphois. When a depressed, and plain Head, is received by a shallow and superficial 2. Arthrodia. Cavity, this Jointing is called Arthrodia. an exemple of Arthrodia Diarthrodes, is in the conjunction of the Shoulder with the Omoplata. An example of Arthrodia Synarthrodes, is in the Bones of the Wrist, with the Metacarpus. Ginglymos, is a mutual ingress of the bones, such as you shall usually see in 3. Ginglymus. the hinges of Doors and Windows; in which that Part of the Hinge which bears and that which circle's about, have a Mutual ingress one into another. The Motion of Ginglymus Diarthrodes, is manifest in the Elbow; the Motion of Ginglymus Synarthrades, is Obscure in the joining of the Ankle to the Heel. Modern writers add a fourth to those three, which they call Trochois, in which the Motion of conversion is apparent: such is the joining of the first Vertebra with the second, but it is to be referred to Arthrodia; As for what belongs to Ginglimus, and its various differences, we will thus Methodically handle them: Ginglimus is an Articulation of bones, by mutual reception; Which is Simple or Compound. and is simple, or compound: that is called simple, which is made of two bones, by one only and simple Articulation in the same Part, as in the juncture off the Elbow and Arm. Compound Ginglymus consists of a double Articulation, which is performed either in the same extremities, or in places distant, of two or three Bones, which by a double Articulation end in the same extremities. It is seen in the Vertebrae of the Neck. A compound Ginglymos by a double Articulation in places distant is seen in the Cubitus and Radius, in distant places of three bones is seen in all the Vertebrae of the Back and Loins. Besides Synarthrosis, contains under it, Harmonia, Sutura, and Gomphosis, Proper species of Synarthrosis. 1. Harmonia. which are without Motion. a T. 15. f. 3. R. etc. □ Harmonia, is a Conjunction of bones, by simple touching without mutual ingress; and is distinguished by a Line, either right, or obliqne, or many fold. b f. 4. a. b. □ Sutura, is the joining of bones: as though the Teeth of two Jaws, or two Combs were thrust one within the other, and is altogether of one and the same form. Gomphosis, is when one bone sticks fast, and immovably in another, like a Nail in a Post. Opposite to Articulation; is Symphysis, which is an immovable conjuntion 3. Gomphosis. Or by Symphysts whose differences are three. of bones, as though they were united, which Nature brings forth at first divided, yet afterward in process of time, they grow together. Some are united without any discernible c f. b. m. n. o. □ Medium, others with a Medium interposed. And therefore, the simple differences of Symphysis are three; Syssarcosis Syneurosis, Synchondrosis. A mixed or compound Symphysis; is only one, viz. By a Nerve and Cartilege, which Galen calls Neurochondrodis. d See ch. 5. Lib. 6. of this Book. Of these you may see more in. Com. at Gal. Lib. de Ossibus. According to Galen, I thus expound the Doctrine of Joints, Methodically. Galens Doctrine of Joints. The Conjunction of all Joints is made by the touching of their extremities: This touching is either Articulus or Symphysis: Articulus is a▪ Natural joining of Bones; which are divided amongst themselves, to the same use, for which they were form; this use is either for Motion, or perspiration, or passage of some substance, or distinguishing of parts, or to secure them from hurting, as appears by the Articulations, Harmonia, Sutura, and Gomphosis. Symphysis is a Natural Union of bones which were at first divided, which grow together either with, or without an apparent Medium, because it is Obliterated, as in the Sternum, Ossacrum, or Ischium, and the bony portions of the inferior Jaw: and therefore the Conjunction of bones is divided into Articulus, and Symphysis, as it were into two species. Otherwise if Symphysis, be taken according to the mind of Modern Anatomists, and not according to the mind of Galen, wheresoever Articulation is, there must Symphysis needs be; for the Collection of bones, and Galen had ridiculously opposed Symphysis, to Articulation. Chap. 7. The Division of a Sceleton. THe whole Fabric of the bones sticking together, is by Galen, called SCELETOES, It is vulgarly divided into the Head, the trunk and the limbs. Hypocrates, in his Book of the Nature of bones, constitutes six parts of the Sceleton; The Head, Neck, Breast, Backbone, Hands, and Feet. Galen, into five, the Head, Backbone, Breast, Hands, and Feet, as may easily be gathered from the series of his discourse, We follow the common division, and according to the example of Galen, begin at the Head, which is the first bone form by Nature; and as it were the foundation of all the rest: which are framed in respect of largeness, according to the proportion of the Head. Chap. 8. Of the Head, being the first Part of the Sceleton. THe Head is defined by Galen, to be that whole substance which is above What the Head is. It's Diviston. What the Skull is. the Neck, and the dwelling place of the Brain. It is divided into the Skull, and the Face, which latter comprehends both the Jaws. The Skull, is a globous, and round body; hollow within, but this roundness is not exactly, spoehircal, by Reason of those Eminencies, which stick out before, and behind, which make the Skull somewhat longish, and compressed on the sides towards the Temples. If the Skull be not somewhat longish, it is It's Natural ●igure. depraved and this depravation is fourfold. 1. When it sticks not out before, 2. When it sticks not out behind. 3. When both Prominencies, are deparved, and then it is exactly round, 4. When its Longitude is turned into Latitude, which is inconsistent with life, because the Structure of the Brain, is perverted. Not only one Bone, but many make the structure of the Skull, the number The number of the Bones of the Skull: of which is various in Authors, Galen Atributes seven thereto, and Silvius follows him: others hold 14. As Bauhinus, by adding the six bones, of each ear, which are Parts of the rocky bone, and included in the Cavities of the Ear, and add nothing at all to make the globe of the Skull. But more rightly Paraeus adds fourteen bones to the Skull, but distinguisheth them, into containing, and contained, the containing are eight, the contained are the six small bones, of the Ears. Hypocrates, Lib. de Oss. Constitutes the Skull o● eight bones, and yet he seems to comprehend some bones of the Face, this number the most excellent Anatomists follow; as Vesalius, Columbus, Fallopius, from whom we will not descent, because this number our Eyes can witness, in Dissections. The intervails, or connections of those bones; are called Suturae, which Sutura what. knit and unite the Bones together. Of Sutura's, some are Proper, others common: They are Proper, which How manysold. Proper are. Three true ones. 1. Coronalis. 2. Lamdoides. 3. Sagittalis. distinguish the bones of the Skull one from another: they are common, which distinguish the bones of the Skull from those of the uper Jaw. The Proper are divided into true, and fal●e: the true, are the Saw-like Conjunctions of the bones intertexed, like the Teach of a Comb. They are held by Anatomists, to be in number three. 1. a T. 15. f. 3. aaa. □ Coronalis is on the forepart of the Skull, which passeth transversly from one temple to the other. 2. opposite to this is, b f 4. bb. □ Lambdoides, placed in the hinder part of the Head. 3. c f 3. bb. f 4. aa. □ Sagittalis knits both these together, passing from the top of the Lambdois, by the longitude of the Skull, and sometimes comes even to the top of the Nose. The concourse of the sagittal and coronal suture, the Greeks call Bregma; commonly 'tis called Fontanella, to which we apply caustics. Above the Ears, are to Sutures not like others, and therefore they are called false, or Bastard; they are called d F 15. f. 3. cc. □ Squamosae, from their scaly likeness, and join the bones of the Two false ones. Common are three. 1. Frontalis. 2. Sphenoidea. 3. Ethmoidea. Temples, to the bones of the top of the Head. Modern Anatomists hold the common sutures to be three: The first is called e T. 15. f. 3. Supra K. □ Frontalis, beginning at the outward Angle of the Eye, and passing by the middle of the Orbita, even to the Eyebrow, and keeps the same way by the other Eye. The second is called f T. 15. f. 5. aa. f. 6. oo. □ Sphenoidea, which Circumscribes the Os-sphenois, beginning at the hinder par● of the Head, and ending at the furthermost Tooth of the upper Jaw. The third is called g f 4. AB. □ Ethmoidea, and compasseth about the Os Ethmois, on every side; it seems rather to be Proper than Common, and belongs rather to Harmonia than Sutura. The Sutures being well known, 'tis an easy matter to distinguish the bones The Eight Bones of the Skull. of the Skull; which are eight in number, and sometimes nine when the Sagittal Suture passeth to the Nostrils, and passeth through the middle of the Frontal bone; which is often seen in the Skulls of such as are grown up: all of them are Proper, none common, unless the Sphenois, according to Galen. 1. The bone of the h f. 3. D. □ Forehead distinguished by the first, Common, and coronal Os Frontis. Suture, which sometime is Cut into two part sbies the Sagittal Suture is that Eminent seat of the Eyebrows; it includes two Cavities derived into the Nostrils. The Second and third are called the bones of the i f. 6. cc. f 3. d. □ foot part of the Head, and Os Sintipitis. are separated from one another by the sagittal Suture; below, by the Scaly Suture; before by the coronal: behind by the Lambdois. Under these are the bones of the k f. 6. DD. □ Temples, which on the uper part ar● attenuated The Bones of the Temple. like a Scale, but the inferior Part is hard, and rough, and called rocky; therefore it is commonly divided into the Scaly, and Rocky Parts. In the Rocky part are four Apophyses; l l▪ f 6. EE. f 3. F. □ Mastoides m T. 15. f. 5. ●f. □ Styloides and n T. 20. f. 6. A. f 3. B. □ Lygomatica; Its Apophyses. and the fourth is placed in the basis of the Skull, and may be called o f. 6. B. C. □ Auricularis; in little Children it is an Epiphysis, and may easily be pulled off from the Rocky Bones. In this last Apophysis, are the three Cavities of the Ear contained: The The Cavities of the Eare. 1. passage of hearing. 2. Concha 3. Labyrinthus. 4. C●clea. Os Occipitale. first is external, and called the p f. 7. ABC. □ Passage of hearing, The second is called q f. 6. B. □ Concha, and contains the internal Air, and the three small bones called r f. 9 BB. □ Malleolus Incus and Stapes, as also a hole passing into the Cavity of the Mastois. The extremity of this Cavity is directly opposite to the Timpanum and hath two small holes; of which the greater is called the s f. 6. C. □ oval window and is the ingress into the third Cavity, which is called the t f. 9 AA. □ Labyrinth, by reason of its various Circulations and turn; the other hole is narrower, and is the Passage to the fourth v T. 15. f 4. C. □ Cavity which is called x f. 5. B. f. 6. F. □ Cochlea, from its rough and wreathed Figure. The sixth bone of the Skull is called y f. 5. Supra inferius B. □ Lambdoides and Occipitale, and is compassed about with the Suture Lambdois, the Extremities of which, are called Horns by the Ancients; but by Galen, Additions to the Lambdois. To these are Caustics sometimes applied. The seventh Bone is z f. 5. αα. f. 6. G. H. □ Sphenoides; in which we must consider the external, ●s-Spheneides. and internal table: In the internal table, are three Apophyses, which are called a T. 15. f. 6. G. H. □ Clinoides; between these is a Cavity interjected, which is b T. 15. f. 5. B. □ called Sella Its Apophyses. Sphenoidis. The external Table hath fo●… Apophyses; of which, two resembling the hollowness of a ship, are called c T. 15. f. 5. CC. □ Naviculares, by Galen they are called Pterigoides: the other pass under the Zygomata, to the Temples, and are called temporals. Between the two Tables, or Plates, is an empty d ibid. □ Cavity passable to the Nose by a double hole, and severed within by a Bridge in the midst; this is always wanting when the bone of the Forehead is solid. The eight bone is called Ethmoides, or according to Galen Spongides; it Os Ethmoides. consists of seven different portions, The first is pierced thorugh like a e T. 15. f. 6. I. □ Sieve: from which, within the Skull, ariseth an Apophysis, which is the second portion Tabula cribrosa. Crista galli. of the bone, and is like a f T. 15. f. 5. CC. □ Cock's Comb; without the Nostrils, from the same Sievelike Table, depends that bony substance, which makes the g f. 5. aa. □ bridge between the Nostrils; and this is accounted the third portion of the bone: To Septum Nas●. Two Spongy Bones. this Bridge of the Nose, stick two Spongy bones, which make the fourth; and fift part of the Ethmoides: The sixth, and seventh p●…ions of the Ethmoides, are thin Scales, plain, and smooth, as broad as a man's Thumb; which make the internal side of each Orbita, beside the great Canthus, and underneath they cover three, and sometimes four cells, disposed from the great Canthus, even to the lower-most Orbita. In the basis of the Skull, both internally and externally, certain Cavities are observed; of which some are called Sinus, others holes, others Fossa or pits; of which, see Silvius, who was the first that handled them Methodically: we give them here Names according to their places, and Natures. The Sinus are eight; two Maxillares in the uper Jaw, as many Frontals Eight Sinus. in the bone of the Forehead, so many Sphenoides in the bone Sphenois, and no fewer Maisioides in the Apophyses of the Mastois. Holes are internal, or external; Internal are twenty five commonly, sometimes Holes internal. 27. twenty seven; twelve or thirteen on each side, and one without a fellow; which gives Egress to the Marrow of the Back. The first, is h f. 5. αα. □ Ethmcides; the the second, i f. 5. bb. □ Sphenoideus; the third, k f. 5. cc. □ Opticus; the sourth, l f. 5. dd. □ Scissura Orbitalis; the fift, m f. 5. ee. □ Temporal, from the nerve of the third conjugation which passeth to the temporal muscle; the sixth, n f. 5. † † □ Gustativus; the seventh, Gustativus Secundus; the eight, o f. 5. hh. □ Cervical; the ninth, Caroticus; the tenth, p f. 5. ibid. □ Aridi●orium; the Eleventh, q T. 15. oo. □ Jugulare; the twelfth, r f. 16. BB. □ Motivum Linguae, or Linguosum; the thirteenth, and last, ˢ Impar, or Occipitale. The external External holes. 10. holes are ten on each side, according to Silvius; to which I add an eleventh, to wit, the external hole of the Ear; besides, a● the Root of the Stilois, in the extremity of the auricular Apophysis, on the external part, is a hole divided into two within, divided with a very thin Scale. Of the external holes the first is called, Superciliare: the second Lacrimale, the third, Orbitarium externum; the fourth, Orbitarium Ethmoideum; the fift, above the palate; the sixth in the extremity of the palate; the seventh, the cloven under the Zygoma; the eight, and ninth, Supra Pterigoides; the tenth Mastodes; the eleventh, the external hole of the Eare. The pits are internal, and external: six are in the internal basis of the Skull; Pi●s internal▪ External. two frontals, two temporals, and two occipitals. The external are seven on each side, to which I add an eight, to wit, the Cavity of the Nose: The first, Orbitaria; the second, Nasalia; the third, Zygomatica, the fourth, above the palate; the fift, under the palate; the sixth, Pterigoidea; the seventh, in the jointing of the inner jaw; the eight, in the hole of the sixth Conjugation. Chap. 9 Of the uper Jaw. THe other Parts of the Head, is called the Face; it comprehends both Jaws, The Fa●e what and is separated from the Skull, by the first common Suture. The uper Jaw consists of many bones, about the number of How many Bones in the uper Jaw. which is some controversy amongst Anatomists; but passing by the vain and foolish opinions of modern Authors, I admit only of Eleven, passing by those portions of the Ethmoides, which ●ome Anatomists reckon for several Bones: for those Bones only belong to the Jaw which are separated from the Bones of the Skull; neither are portions of them, but some of those bones contained within the Orbita, and form the Orbita of the Jaw; with other bones are portions of the bones of the head, as the productions of the Sphenois, the broad portion of the Ethmois; and therefore they are Childishly referred to the Jaw. If any object, That they do belong to the Jaw, because they are beneath the common Suture that divides the Skull from the Jaw; wherefore seeing they are placed Beneath the said Suture, they may be attributed to the Jaw. But if the Apophyses of the bones of the Skull, which stick out beyond the roundness of it, be referred to the Face; by the same rule the Apophyses, called Pterigodes, which stick out without the Globe, and rotundity of the Skull, and are placed in the Same plain with the Vomer, and the Angles which sustain the Jaw, are to be reduced to the Jaw itself. And when Galen reckons the Os Sphenois amongst the bones of the Jaw, he reckons it as a Supernumerary. And therefore we must reckon but Eleven bones of the Jaw. Five bones are placed on each side, and one without a fellow, which sustains The first Bone of the Jaw. the midst of the Pallat. The first, Galen Lib. de Oss. Calls a T. 15. f3. E. □ Melon: It may be called Zygomaticus, because it constitutes the greatest part of the Zygoma, and a great part of the Orbita, and Angles of the Eye: now Zygoma, is nothing else than a bony Semicircle made of two Apophyses, by the obliqne Suture; of which the one passeth from the rocky bone; the other from the bone of the Cheek. The Second is called b f. 3. G. □ Os unguis, or Ossiculum Lacrimale. The ●. The third is called the c f3. I. □ greatest bone, and contains the middle part 3. of the Teeth; and finisheth the inferior part of the Orbita, and the internal part of the Nose. The fourth bone forms the d f. 3. K. □ Nose, and so the Nose is form 4. of four bones, two are Proper, which we mentioned last; and two common. Modern Anatomists add the bone called e f. 6. j □ Vomer, which is placed under the Sphenois, and palate, which was not unknown to Hippocraces. It is like a Ploughshare, and holds up the bridge of the Nose, to which it is Joined by Sutura, or Harmonia. Chap. 10. Of the Orbitary Bone. THe orbitary bones, which Hypocrates Lib. de Ossibus calls Hypopia by The Orbitary Bones of the Eye how many. which the Eye holes are made, were first of all by Picolominus propounded to be five; but he ignorantly pretermitted a portion of the maxillar bone, which joined to the rest makes six, of which the hole of the Eye is made; but these bones are not Proper, excepting the ungular, or Lacrymal bone, but partly portions of the bones of the Skull, partly portions of the bones of the uper Jaw. The first is the a T. 15. f. 3. A. □ Frontal bone, which makes the furnace of The error of Picolominus, touching their number. this vault. The second is a portion of the Sphenois, situated in the deep external side of the Eye hole, even to the lesser corner. The third is b T. 15. f. 3. E. □ Lygomaticum, which makes the lesser corner, and the middle pavement of the Orbita, or Eye hole. The fourth is c T. 15. f. 3. j □ Maxillare. The fist d T. 15. f. 3. G. □ Lacrimale. The sixth the Scaly table, of the os Ethmois which makes the other side of the Orbita, and the greater Corner: these bones are to be discerned within the Orbita, with their Proper and common Sutures. Chap. 11. Of the inferior Jaw. THe inferior Jaw in such as are grown up, is but one bone; in which is to Its Parts. Basis. be noted, its basis, and its extremities. It's basis is the middle part of it, hollow within sticking out outwardly and is called the a T. 15. f. 3. L. □ Chin. The extremities are Angles, each extremity leads out two Apophyses, of which one is Apophyses. Sharp called b T. 15. f. 3. M. □ Corone, and receive the tendon of the temporal Muscle; the other is a c f. 3. N. □ Condyle, and may be called Articulatoria, because it serves for Articulation of the Jaw. Below these Apophyses is a Singular d f. 3. Infra M. □ hole by which Veins, Arteries, and Nerves pass to the Teeth; one portion of which passeth back again, near the c f. 3. L. l. Chin; and is dispersed to the Muscles of the Lips. Chap. 12. Of the Os Hyois: THe Os Hyois may be refered to the bones of the Head, because it is fastened Its parts. by Nervous bones to the Apophyses of the Stylois. It is Compounded of five small bones, of which that which is greatest and hollow is called the a T. 13. f. 11. 12. A A. □ basis, Basis. they which add a sixth and a seventh bone understand the Ligaments wherewith this bone is tied which as they are usually Nervous, so in some they are observed to be Cartilaginous. From the extreme parts of the greater and Fundamental bone, one Cartilaginous b T. 13. f. 11. 12. B B. Horn, which is seldom bony, springs on the top, Horn. on each side it is fastened to the Cartilege Tyrois, which two Horns are usually numbered for the eight and ninth bones. The Os Hyois is the foundation of the Larinx and Tongue and by the Judgement of all Anatomasts receives the Tongue in its Cavity, but if a man may believe his own Eror of Anatomists. Eyes, they will show him that the Epiglottis only is received in its Cavity, and that the Tongue resteth on the uper side of its Basis. Chap 13. Of the Teeth. THe Teeth, are the instruments of Chewing the Meat, and forming the voice. Their Nature They are bones although they differ in Nature from other bones. They consist of two parts, one of which sticks out without the Gum, and is called Parts, Basis and Root. the Basis. The other is hid within the Gum, and called the Root, the Root is not solid but hollow, and so hollow, that it receives a small Vein, a small artery, and a small Nerve. The Roots of the Teeth are various in number and disverse in figure. The Root The number of the Roots of the Teeth. of the Cutters is always simple and right, distinguished only with a small cleft for their firmer sticking. Also the Roots of the Dog-teeths are simple. The superior grinders have a threefold Root and Crooked, because they hang downwards, in the inferior grinders they are double and sometimes triple. The number of the Teeth is various in regard of Age. In Children from the The number of the Teeth. seventh Month even till they are two years Old and upwards; twenty of them usually come out by degrees one after another, and before they are well towards four years of Age, they have no more, afterwards eight, or twelve others come out: So that they have twenty eight, or thirty two in both Jaws. This number is distinguished into three orders by reason of their Situation and Their Orders. bigness, the first four Teeth are called a T. 15. f. 6. M. □ Cutters. Those two which are next these, one on each side, are called b T. 15. f. 6. n. □ Dog-teeths. The rest being eight, or ten, are called c T. 15. f. 6. oo. Grinders, They are placed in the Cavities of each Jaw, which Cavities are not continual but divided into Cells, and their conjunction, or Articulation is called Gomphosis. Chap. 14. Of the Trunk, being the Second Part of the Sceleton. THe Trunk comprehends the Backbone and such bones as are fastened thereunto. Of what is consists. It is compounded of the Backbone and the Chest. The Backbone is a bony Channel which gives passage to the Marrow of the Back, The Backbone what. and is stretched even from the Head, to the Os Coccyx. It consists of very many bones for its security and that it may not easily be hurt, as also that a man may bow himself, for necessity of action, these bones the Greeks call Spondils, and the latins Vertebrae. In every Vertebra you may observe two parts of which the one is internal, thick and Two parts of a Vertebra. round, and is called the body: the other external with various Apophyses and hath no Name, the differences of the Apophyses are three, right, Obliqne, and transverse, Difference of the Apophyses. the hindmost is sharp and is Properly called a T. 2. f. 2. d. □ Spina that which is b f. 2. bb. □ Lateral, and transverse is double, the c f. 2. c c c c. □ Obliqne fourfold by which they are joined together by Ginglymos in which three bones are required. In the Obliqne Apophyses two are above, and as many below; and therefore in all the Vertebrae, are seven Apophyses found. The whole Rachis or Backbone, is divided into four Parts. The Neck, Back, Loins and Os Sacrum: The Neck hath seven Vertebae, the Back twelve, the Loins five, the Os Sacrum is either one, or threefold in such as are grown up; in Children it is divided into five or six Parts: Wherefore the Backbone in such as are grown up, is composed of twenty four Vertebrae; to which, if you add the Os Sacrum, which is a great Vertebra, it makes twenty five or twenty seven. The crooked-streight Figure of the Backbone, which is admirably described by Hypocrates in Lib. 3. de Articulis, from verse 33. to 35. Cannot be noted in a Sceleton, though never so exactly made; but in a The Vertebrae of the Neck, Carcase the Flesh of the Back being taken away it may; in the Vertebrae oft lie Neck, this peculiar thing is to be noted, That all the transverse d T. 13. f. 20. bb. □ Apophyses are pierced through, that so they may give passage to the cervical Veins and Arteries; they have Cavities in the extremities, through which the Nerve being yet soft, is deduced: The e f. 21. b. □ hindermost Apophyses, are double, for the rise and insertion of Nerves; but the two superiors have another structure and conformation, by reason of the motion of the Head; for the first wants a f f. 20. □ Spina, and hath a thick round Body; the second sends out a g f. 21. ●. □ Tooth like Apophysis. All the Vertebrae of the Neck are strictly joined and implicated lest they should slip asunder in the vehement Motions of the Neck. The twelve h T. 10. f. 3. □ Vertebrae of the Back, are altogether one like the other: their Apophyses The vertebrae of the Back. are all solid, and continual, without any hole or division. The twelfth, or eleventh Vertebra, hath a different Articulation from the rest; all the rest are joined by Ginglymos; the eleventh, or twelfth, only by Arthrodia. And therefore the whole Motion of the Backbone, bowing, extending, and Obliquation, is performed by that Vertebra. The five Vertebrae of the Loins, differ in Apophyses from those of the Back; for The Vertebrae of the Loins. the hinder Apophyses, or i T. 2. f. 2. d. □ Spinae, do not descend as they do in the Back, but are strait, and broad: the k T. 2. f. 1. aa. □ transverse Apophyses are longer, and stand instead of Ribs. Under the Loins is the l T. 2. f. 5. 6. □ Os Sacrum, which though it Seem one simple bone at the Os Sacrum. first view, yet being boiled a long time in Oil, it is divided into five parts, and sometimes into six. To the extremity of the Os Sacrum, is another cartilaginous bone joined, which Coccyx. is divided into three, seldom into fo●… Parts and is called m T. 2. f. 5. bb. c. Coccyx, the Crupper-bone. Chap. 15. Of the Chest. THe Chest, together with the Backbone, make up the trunk of the The Breast what. Sceleton. The Chest is a bony Circumference, which holds the vital Parts, and is constituted It is fourfold. of a fourfold kind of bones; the Sternum before the Ribs on each side, the Claviculae at top, and the Backbone behind, to which the Ribs stick. The a T. 10. f. 2. A A. □ Sternum or Brest-bone, in such as are grown up, is one only continued The Sternum. bone, distinguished by three or four transverse lines, which are but the footsteps of the Ancient divisions; and these lines are more conspicuous on the inside, than on the out. On the extremity of this bone, depends the Cartilege or Gristles called The Cartilege called Sword-like. The Ribs. b f. 2. B. □ Xyphoides, or the sword-like Cartilege; it represents a Shield in bruits. The Ribs are twenty four, twelve on each side; of which, the seven uper most are called c f. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. □ True, because they are committed to the Sternum; the other five inferior are called d f. 2. 8. 9 10. 11. 12. □ Bastard, because they are never joined to the Breastbone, but are joined in a Cartilege, that they may the better give way to the swell of the Liver and Spleen, and yield to the Motions of the Diaphragma. The e f. 1. f. T. 21. f. 2. A. Claviculae are two, one on each side; whose Figure represents an Italica Clavicul●. S. They retain the Scapula in its Proper seat that it fall not upon the Breast. Chap. 16. Of the Limbs, being the Third Part of the Sceleton: and first, of the Scapula. SEeing the Scapula Omoplata, or shoulderblade, belongs nothing at all to the constitution of the Breast, I separate it from the Trunk, and set it at the beginning of the hands. In the Omoplata many Parts come to be noted for the original Its Parts. and Insertion of Muscles. A very Necessary Part of the Omoplata being stretched to the Longitude of the Back, is called the a T. 21. f. 2. hh. □ Basis, the extremities of which are Basis. Angles. called Angles; one is b f. 2. f. □ Superior, the other c f. 2. g. □ Inferior. The Basis is the sides of the Ribs; of which, the one is shorter and thinner, which is called the d f. 2. ab. f. ad. d. □ Superior Rib; the other longer, and thicker which is called the e f. 2. ag. ad. ●. □ Inferior Rib. The whole Ribs. Latitude of the Scapula is called the table; The external Part of which, is Gibbous; Process. the internal hollow, that so it may receive the Muscle. The famous process or Apophysis ascending upwards from the basis, is called f f. 2. e. □ Spina, the broad extremity of which, is called Acromium; which according to Galen and Hypocrates, is a distinct bone, and Cartilaginous in Children; but hard, and bony, in such as are grown up. Which after the twentieth year, and something sooner is turned into an Apophysis of the Spina. The pits on each side of the Spina are called Interscapulium; one pit is above it, the other below it, but the middle prominence of the Spina Pit●. which is bowed, is commonly called Pterygium or the christ. The other extremity of the Scapula, which is great, subject to the Acromium, and opposite to the Basis, is called the g f. 2. c. □ Neck; in it you shall note, that Apophyses called h f. 2. d. □ Coracoides, which was made for the security, and firmness of the Joint of the Shoulder, the Cavity of the Neck, is called Glenoides. Chap. 17. Of the Shoulder. THe Arm hangs upon the Omoplata or Scapula, which is divided into three The three Parts of the Hand. The Head of the Bones of the Shoulder. Parts; the Shoulder, the Cubit and the Hand. In the Shoulder are two extremities for the insertion of Muscles; the upermost is called the Head, which a membranous Ligament, bred from the Cavity of the Glenois, compasseth about, besides the four Muscles which it involves: a little below this, the Orbicular narrow place, is called the Neck: In the Head is a long Chink, by which the Nervous The Neck. Head of the Muscle Biceps ariseth. In the other extremity of the Arm, you may observe the Trochlea, about which the Cubit is turned: About the Trochlea are Troclea▪ Cavities. Apophyses' two a f. 2. f. Cavities, of which the external, is wider than the internal; in these are the Coronal Apophyses of the Cubit received: with the Trochlea are two Apophyses, which are called Condili the one inferior, and interior; the other superior, and exterior. Chap. 18. Of the Cubitus, and Radius. THe second Part of the hand is called Cubitus, & consists of two bones; of which the one which is superior and shorter, is called a f. 2. E. □ Radius; the other, which is Radius Cubitus why there are two bones. inferior, and subject to the former, is called by the Name of the whole b f. 2. D. □ Cubitus, and by some Vlna. Two bones are necessary in this Part of the Arm by reason of their double and contrary Motions, which could not be performed by one bone united by Ginglymus; for Ginglymus suffers only bowing and extending, and in no wise invertion; which the Radius being joined by Arthrodia performs. The Obliquation of the Radius cannot perfectly be discerned unless in a new carcase, all the Muscles being taken away; for with great admiration you shall see the Radius turned about, upward and downward, upon the Cubit, being unmoved and also moved together with the Cubitus, when it is bowed and extended. There is something worthy the noting in the extremity of the Cubitus: For in the uper extremity, is the Cavity, called Sygmoides, which embraceth the Trochlea of Cavity. Apophyses. the Arm; about this, are two Apophyses, called Corone; the lowermost is called c T. 21. f. 2. g. □ Olecranum: In the inferior Part the Cubitus, is an Apophysis, which is called d f. 2. e. regione. □ Styloides; the extremities of these bones alone, are joined together by that Ginglymus, which consisteth of two Bones, passing into one another, in divers, and distant places. Chap. 19 Of the Hand. THe Hand is divided into three Parts Carpus, Metacarpus, and the Fingers. Division. a f. 1. FF. f. 2. F. □ Carpus consists of eight bones, distributed into two orders, which are joined Carpus. amongst themselves by Symphysis, by a kind of Harmonia; because the bones of the Carpus are moved the one from the other, either obscurely, or not at all: the first order makes Arthrodia Diarthrodis, with the inferior Cubit; the same order is joined with the second order of the bones of the Wrist, or Carpus, by Arthrodia; which second order is joined with the Metacarpus, by Arthrodia Synarthrodis: So that this Motion, is either none at all, or insensible; but the first order with the second is moved obscurely. The b T. 21. f. 1. GG. f. 2. G. □ Metacarpus, succeeds the Carpus, and is framed of five bones, if we add Metacarpus. the first bone of the Thumb, which some reject, because it is Obliquely added to the Metacarpus, and endued with manifest Motion and contrary to the Nature of other bones of the Metacarpus, which make Arthrodia with the Wrist, and Enarthrosis with the Fingers; and yet the fourth bone of the Metacarpus, which sustains the Ring Finger, hath manifest Motion. From the several bones of the Metacarpus, are several c F. 8. f. 12. CDE. Fingers stretched; only Fingers. the Thumb excepted, the Fingers consist of three bones which are joined to one another by Ginglymos; and therefore they admit only of bowing, and extending; the obliqne Motion of them depends upon the Enarthrosis of the first bone with the Metacarpus. Chap. 20. Of the Bones of the Ilium. THe greatest and largest bones of the body, which being joined with the Os Sacrum, sustain and erect the whole Trunk, are by the greatest Part called Ossa Ilium: In such as are grown up, they are one bone▪ but in Children divided into a T. 8. f. 12. CDE. □ three parts; which yet hold their ancient appellations, though the very Footsteps Its Parts. of them be obliterated by Age. The broader Part of the bone which frames the latitude of it, and is stretched out to the middle of the funnnel; is called b T. 2. f. 3. A. □ Ilium; Ilium. Pubis. Ischium. the other half, and superior Part, is called c f. 3. C. □ Pubis; the other inferior Part d f. 3. BB. □ Ischium: Of these three portions, is made that great hole called the e T. 21. f. 4. B. □ the Funnel. In these bones some particular things are to be noted; for Anatomists call the external Face of the Os Ilium, the Back; the superior internal Cavity, they call the Belly; the extremity of which, is called the Reb; the brims of which, both external, Back. Rib. Lips. and internal, are called Lips, or Brows, so as one is external, the other internal. The extremity of the Rib, which sticks out, and is joined to the Os Sacrum, is called the hinder Spine. And the other f T2. f. 4. aa. extremity of the Rib towards the Funnel, Spines. is called the foremost, upermost Spine. There is under this, another called the former and nether Spine. In the Os Pubis, a Spine is observed near the Spmphysis, by its top: In the Ischium, a Spine, and a Bunch is noted; which Bunch is called Condylus. Chap. 21. Of the abone of the Thigh. THe Feet, as well as the Hands, are divided into three Parts; the Thigh, Leg, and Foot. The Bone of the Thigh is but one, and the greatest in all the Body. In the superior The Thigh Bone. Head. Neck. Apophyses. excremity, the a T. 21. f. 1. dd. f4. a. □ Head is round, to which a slender part is added, called the Neck: from the Neck are two Apophyses produced, to which, the Muscles called Rotatores, are fastened; and therefore they are called Trochanters; the foremost is called the lesser b f. 1. gg. f4. c. □ Trochanter; the upermost, on the side, the greater c f. 1. ff. f. 4. b. □ Trochanter. The other extremity of the Thigh, hath two d f. 1. hh. f. 4. ee. □ Condyli: a e f. 4. d. □ Cavity being left between, which admits the f f4. f. □ middle, and eminents Apophysis of the Leg; and in like manner the Condyli are received by the g f. 1. hh. f4. ee. □ Cavities of the Leg, by a lose h f. 8. cc. □ Ginglymus, the fore Part of which, is called the Knee, the hinder Part the Ham: this Knee. Ham. Knee-pan Articulation is strenghtned before, with a small bone, called the i f. 1. LL. f. 8. d. Knee-pan, which is Articulated to no bone. Chap. 22. Of the Leg. THe Leg is composed of two bones; of which, the greater, and internal, is Two Bones of the Leg. Tibia. Fibula. called a f. 1. M. f. 4. D. □ Tibia; The lesser, and external, b f. i M. f4. D. □ Fibula. The Fibia is Articuluted by Ginglymos to the Thigh; the Fibula sticks to the Tibia, and toucheth not the Thigh. The inferior, and bunchy Parts of them both, are called Ankles; of which, the Fibia makes the c f. 1. two. f4. gg. □ internal, and the Fibula, the d f. 1. KK. f4. h. external. Chap. 23. Of the Foot. THe Foot is divided into the Tarsus, Metatarsus, and Toes. The Tarsus Division. Tarsus. consists of seven Bones, which Ruffius Ephesius calls Ostracodea, by reason of their hardness: The first Bone Articulated with the Tibia, is called Astragalus, or a f. 5. A. □ Talus: The Bone under this, Pterna, or b f. 5. B. □ Calcaneum: The third joined to the Astragalus, Schaphoides: The fourth c f. 5. C. □ Naviculare; to which is joined the inner, and foremost portion of the Heel, which is called d f. 5. D. □ Cuboides; the other three have no Names, or Else are called e f. 5. eee. □ Calcoidea. The f f. 4. g. □ Metatarsus follows the Tarsus, and is form of five Bones, and answers to the Metacarpus of the Metatarsus. Toes. Hand. The Toes succeed the Metatarsus▪ coustituted of g f. 4. □ three Bones apiece, except the great Toe, which hath only two Bones: small Bones fill up and strengthen the internodes of the Fingers and Toes in such as are grown up, which are uncertain in number, and called h T. 21. f. 6. Sesamoidea. In the second Articulation of the great Toe, are two small Bones worth the noting, and indifferent big, which are always found in all Carcases, and two at the original of the two Muscles of the Feet, mentioned by Vessalius, which are but seldom found, and are to be numbered with the Sesamoidea. Chap. 24. In what Particulars the Bones of Men differ from those of Women. THe Bones of Men and Women, differ in some parts, which Platerus first noted, Those which differ are. and Bauhinus follows him; but by their leaves, they noted many differences which are not found, and omitted some that are: we shall speak of them both severally. It is true, all the bones of Women, are less than those in Men, both in weight, and In Substance. of the Bone. thickness, as also in length. Galen adds they are not so hard, but faith, that in all living Creatures, the Bones of the Females, are softer than those of the Males; and Aristotle held so before him. The bones of the Head, are altogether alik, having neither more, nor fewer Sutures; The Bones of the Head. although Aristotle thought otherwise; Namely, that Males had more Sutures than Females, Ch. 7. Lib. 1. de hist. animal. and 7. Lib. 3. ejusd, operis, and Chap. 7. Lib. 3. the part animal. Yet the a T. 15. f. 3. bb. □ Sagittal Suture, more often in Woman, passeth to the Nase, dividing the b f. 3. A. □ Bone of the Forehead in the middle. It is fal●e that Aristotle held, Viz. That Males have more c f. 6. mno. □ Teeth, than Females, Teeth. as is clear in Men, Sheep, Hogs, and Goats. The d T. 13. adf. 10. □ Larinx (if it may be numbered amongst the Bones) is less in Women, and Larynx. the Cartilege e f. 8. A. □ Thyroides, sticks out less. The f T. 10. □ Breast in Women is depressed in the fore part, and sticks not out as it doth Breast. in Men, for the more accommodation of the Dugs. The g T. 21. f. 1. R. □ Claviculae in Women are not so crooked, for the more comeliness of their Claviculae. Neck and Breast. The inferior Part of the h T. 10. f. 2. AA. □ Sternum, is broader than in Men, and many times hath Sternum. a manifest hole in it; and the lower Bone upon which the i f. 2. B. □ Sword-like Cartilige depends, is cleft like a crescent Moon and makes a large hole for the Egress of the Mammaria Interna. It is false that the k f. 2. CC. □ Cartilages, which in men become bony about the forty or Cartilages of the Ribs. fifty yearts of their Age, become bony in Women so soon as their Breasts grow; Though it be true in Women when they are old. In Women with great Breasts, Thorax is narrow, and almost pointed, by reason of the weight of their Breasts. That Part of the Back above the Loins, is no more bowed Backwards in Women, than it is in Men. Back. The l T. 2 f. 5. and 6. □ Os Sacrum is shorter, broader, and more bowed outwards in Women, Os Sacrun. than it is in Men. The Os m f. 5. and 6. b. c. □ Coccyx, or Crupper Bone, is more movable, and not so strongly knit, Coccix. and more bowed Backwards in Women; not according to the opinion of Galen, but of Later writers. Galen: Lib. 1. de Semine. The Buttocks of Women are broader and according to Aristotle, Lib. 4. de hist animal. Women are stronger in their lower Parts, and therefore the Os n f. 3. and 4. A. □ Ilium Buttocks. most commonly is larger, but that largeness bends more outward; by which means the Ossa Ilium are more hollowed outwardly. Os Ilium. Upon this largeness of the Bones, the Womb when it is great with Child leans as it were, upon Pillows, and sits as it were in a Saddle. Elegantly said Galen Lib. 14. deusu Partium, when he called the concourse of these Bones with the Os Sacrum, THE GREAT BONY VAULT or Arch. The oval hole is Smaller in Women that the portion of the Os Pubis, near the Symphysis, may be larger; but Os Pubis. the Spina of the Os Pubis is turned outwards. The inferior, or tuberous Parts, of the o f. 3. 4. b. □ Os Ischium, it fitted with a double Os Isehium. Cartilege, thicker softer; and this commissure is perfected by a short line, that in the travail, it being softened and loosed, the Bones of the Pubis may part. The space between the Os Sacrum, Ilium, and p f. 3. 4. C. Pubis, where they are joined together, is sarger in Women then in Men, lest the narrowness of the Passage should hinder the coming out of the Child. The rest of the structure of Bones in Women, is like those in Men. Chap. 25. Of the number of the Bones in a Man's Body. THe number of the Bones of man's Body amongst Anatomists is uncertain Vesalius held 307. Galen 242. But in the Sceleton of a perfect man, there are two hundred and fifty six necessary Bones for the structure of it; which are thus numbered. Of the Skull, eight; of the upper Jaw, eleven; of the nether Jaw, one; of the Os Hyois, three; Teeth, thirty two; Backbone, twenty four; Os Sacrum, three; Coccyx, three; Claviculae, two; Ribs, twenty four; of the Sternum, three; of each Hand, divided into four Parts, sixty two; Omoplata, two; Arms, two; Cubits, four; both Wrists, sixteen; both Metacarpus, eight; of all the Fingers, thirty; of each Foot, divided into four parts, sixty two; Namely the Bones of the Ilium, two; Thigh, two; Legs, four; Knee-pans, two; Tarsus, fourteen; Metatarsus, ten; Toes, twenty eight. Besides these Bones, where of the Sceleton is made, there are eighteen other manifest small Bones, In each great Toe four, Sesamoida; in the Head of the Muscles, called Gemeli, on each side, four. The rest of the Sesamoida are so small that they consume or vanish away in boiling the Bones to make a Sceleton. There is in each Ear three small Bones, which ought to be kept apart with the Sesamoida; neither come they into the structure of the Sceleton. So that if you add the first number to the second, you shall find two hundred and fifty six Bones. Chap. 26. The History of an Infant's Bones, till the Age of seven years. SEeing the Bones of Infants, from their Birth till seven years of Age, differ much from the Bones of such as are grown up, both in number, and figure, and especially in the Multitude of Epiphyses, and desectof Apophyses, therefore I thought it well worth the while, to add the Bones of Infants, to the Bones of men grown up, that the difference between them may appear more evidently, for this comparison makes much to take away the differences amongst Anatomists; and to untie the difficult knots, you shall find in Galens Doctrine of the Bones. That this Osteology, was known to Galen, is manifest by various places in him; in which he declares the Bones of Infants, in his Book of the formation of the Child Is Ancient. in the Womb, he describes the Head of the Infant, In the first book De semine, he treats of the Teeth of Infants, but before Galen, Hypocrates, was a diligent studier and observer of this Osteology; as his divine monuments of the Nature of Children, and of their breeding Teeth witness. And the profit of this Doctrine is very great: not only in the education of Children, And profitable. which are marred, by the unskilfulness either of the Midwife, or Nurse. We see divers Children at this day Borne, with great Heads, Bunches, Bow-Legs, great Ankles, Unseemly knees, and at last are Lame when they begin to go, which deformities in the beginning of their Age, whilst their Bones are soft, may be amended, and how can a man amend them rightly, unless he know the Bones at that time exactly? Excellently said Galen, in Lib. de causis Morborum Chap. 7. When he describeth the deformities of Bones, which are in Children. The Natural figure, (saith he) of the members, and of the whole Body, is changed either in the Womb, or at the Birth, or after the Birth; It is depraved in the Womb when the formation is vitiated, by reason of abounding, or unfit matter, It is depraved in the Birth, when the Midwife takes it not rightly, or binds it not up rightly, being born, after the birth the Nurse, in taking of it up laying it down, or carrying of it, or washing of it, or binding it up; in all these the Nature of every member is easily turned out of its course, and corrupted. These also happen in unfit Motions, whilst it is set to stand or walk, before its time, or exposed to vehement Motions. For unseasonable, and vehement motions weaken the Limbs, and the Legs, are turned inwards or outwards by the weight of the Body; and those Limbs which should be strait are made crooked, the Parts of the breast are usually inverted by Nurses, by binding them too bard, in their first education; this we see almost continually in Virgins, whilst Nurse's study to increase those parts, which are about the Hips and Bowels that, they may exceed the bigness of the Breast, they bind the Parts about the Breast so vehement heard, that the breast becomes sharp, and they look as though they were broken backed; and sometimes are crook Shouldered. You see by Galen, what miseries and deformities little Children are subject too; by reason of ill forming the Bones, which may be corrected whilst they are Young, and Flexible, and brought into what form you will. Hypocrates Lib. de Septimestri Partu, gives the reason, why Children are Born Blind, Lame, or other wile ill form▪ The Women that go with such Children are ill, or like to miscarry, in the eight month, for the maimed Embryo was greavous Sick, in the eight month; and the Disease, Caused, Impostumation, as it doth in men, but when the Embryo is main sick, at any other time it rather dies then suffers Apostumation: Hitherto Hypocrates, and Aristotle writes Sect. 10. Probl. 40. That Children may be hurt in the Womb, because their Legs are so tender. The greather Bones of Infants are hollow, and the Marrow Bloody. After six The Marrow of the Bones Bloody. Months, the Marrow waxeth white, they have a Periostion, and a Cartilege at the ends, the extremities of the Bones, are Epiphyses, some few Apophyses they have, but a great number of Epiphyses, that according to Ingrassias they amount to, three hundred twenty one. But I think 'tis no such matter, neither indeed, have I yet been very sollicitus about, the counting of the number. I never observed any Bone, of any bigness or length; which ended not in an Their Epiphyses. How they wax hard. Epiphyses; now all the Epiphyses of Infants are Cartilaginous, and grow hard and are turned into Bones by degrees: Their hardness gins not at the Bone, to which they are joined, but they take their bony substance first at the Centre beginning at the internal part and increasing by degrees to the external. Or from the Centre to the circumference, outwardly they grow dry and hard by heat which is stirred up by Motion and rubbing the Joints one against another in walking. Chap. 27. Of the Head. THe Sutures of the Head seem to be rather Harmonioe, distinguished by a The Sutures Line, and not joined together like Teeth of a Saw by mutual ingress. The joinings of the Skull are lose, so lose that they suffer the Dura Mater to pass Sagittal. out for the forming of the Pericranium. The Sagittal Suture always passeth to the extremities of the Nostrils, but very seldom descends by the hinder part of the Head to the hole of the Marrow of the Back. The coronal Suture hath a membranous gaping at which place the pulsation of the Brain may be both seen and felt, this place is vulgarly called a T. 15. f. 4. C. □ Fontanella Coronal. Fontanella. The temperal Bone seeing it is framed of two parts scaly and rocky, the parts of it are distinguished by Harmonia, which is not disannulled above the hole of the Ear, but beyond it, about the Apophysis Mastois. The Bones of the Skull are very thin, neither shall you find the two tables or plates Bones of the Skull. Their thickness. in them, before one year be Elapsed, between the Bones is some disparity because the Bones of the hinder Part of the Head are the thinnest, contrary to what they are in such as are grown up, at the concourse of the sagittal and coronal Suture is a cloven called Rhomboides, which a thick and hard membrane shuts and grows bony in process of time. The c T. 8. f. 4. A A. □ Frontal bone is always two without any sinuous Cavity, the bone of the Of the Forehead. hinder Part of the Head in Children new born; most commonly consists of four bones even till they are a year Old. The first is the whole and superior breadth of the bone which compasseth and embraceth the Cerebellum, this is rarely divided, and yet there is a certain cleft in the top, caused by the sagittal Suture produced thither. The Second and third portion make the sides of the hole of the Marrow of the Back, and the middle part of the Circle. The fourth bone is placed in the extremity of this, and makes a portion of the great hole, this as yet I never observed. A transverse Line intersects the circle as though it were two. The Bones of ᶜ Bregma, at Bregma. the concourses of the sagittal and coronal Suture, are imperfect by reason of the Fontanella. The Bones of the Temples are manifestly separated into two Parts, scaly and Bones of the Temples. rocky, neither the Epiphysis called Stylois not the Apophysis called Mastois appear in it, only the Zygomatica is seen, but that part of the rocky Bone subject to the hole of the Ear, makes the basis of the Skull, it is called next to the Sphenois and next to the Lithois by some, but may be called Auricularis, because it comprehends the whole structure of the Ear, in Children it is an Epiphysis which easily is severed, and this is often observed in the Skulls of bruit Beasts that are grown up, Passage of the Eare. in which not with standing it is other wise framed. In this auricular Epiphyses many things come to view, the passage of hearing is altogether Cartilaginous, about the fift or sixth month it gins to be bony, and yet it may be separated even to the seventh month, but in the basis it is hollowest; even to the third year and longer. But proceeding inwards to the extremity of this passage their is a bony d f. 4. B B. □ circle to Bony Circle. which the Timpanum is fastened, this also is easily severed, but when the passag of hearing grows hard, the bony circle is so strongly knit to it, that it is inseparable. The e T. 8. f. 5. □ Cavities are very strait, neither can the admirable structure of the Labyrinth be perceived in Boys, and yet that which is wonderful the three little Bones of the Ear f f. 7. and 8. □ Malleolus g f. 6. A. □ Incus and h f. 6. A. □ Stapes, are of the same substance, bigness and form, even from the birth to extrame Old Age. The Os Sphenois is divided into four Parts according to Fallopius of which the Os Sphenois. process called Pterigoides, constitute two; the seat which receives the Glandula Pituitaria, a third; The fourth part is subservient to the optic Nerves, which portions grow together, not long after the Nativity: but Fallopius very ill decribed these portions of the Sphenois; for the third comprehends the seat, or Saddle, and also is subservient to the optic Nerves: The fourth is stretched out below the Saddle, even to the Corone of the hinder part of the Head, and that division remains Conspicuous, even till three or four years be passed. In this Bone, are no winding Cavities; and the Os Ethmois, is totally Cartilaginous; the bridge of the Nose is bony at first, but grows hard along time after the other parts. In the Eye-hole of such as are grown up, are six bones noted, Zygomaticum, The Bones of the Eye-holes. Sphenoides, Frontal, Ethmoides, Lacrymal, and Maxillare: The portion of which makes the pavement in Children, and is severed with a kind of Suture, which remains even till three or four years of Age. The Lines, or Harmoniae of the upper Jaw, are like those, in such as are grown Upper Jaw. up, a certain cleft only appears in the brim of the Inferior Orbita. In the beginning of the palate is a transverse line espied, which is stretched from one of the Teeth, called Cutters, to the other; and comprehends the four Cutters. As for the bones they are like the bones of such as are grown up, both in figure, number, and Situation. The Jawbone is not hollow, and the cells of the Teeth are covered, and as it were stopped up with a membrane. The i f. T. 8. f. 6. C. □ Inferior Jaw in the midst, where the Chin is, is divided by Harmonia, and Inferior Jaw. so consists of two parts, so continuing till two years be past. The Teeth are engendered in the Womb, when the rest of the parts are engendered; Teeth. but within the holes of the Jaws: they are in number twenty, ten in each Jaw; of which, are four Cutters, two Dog Teeth, and six Grinders, they all want Roots. They begin to pass out of the Gums about the seventh Month, sometimes sooner if the Nurse's Milk be very hot. Some few have Teeth when they are borne as, Cneus Papyrius Carbo and M. Curtius. They do not break out altogether, but by degrees, in two years' space; and the At what time they appear. upper Teeth usually, come out sooner than the lower: first of all the Cutters, afterwards two Grinders, than the Dog Teeth; the breeding of which, is most painful to Children. When Children have twenty Teeth, than they usually say, they have all their Teeth; neither indeed have they more, before they are three or four years of Age. But when Anatomists say, that there is only twenty Teeth contained in the Gums, They do not tell you where the other Eight or twelve reside; neither doth Where the hinder Teethly. it seem like a truth, that new Teeth should be bred after the other are form, and lie hid in the Gums. In the upper Jaw I have observed the other four, or six, hid under the Zygoma; but those of the lower Jaw under the extremity of the same, where they lie hid like points. Under the coronal Apophyses, because the space of each, seems at the Narrowest, to comprehend twenty eight, or thirty two Teeth. Neither do these eight or twelve Teeth break out before the Jaws are made larger, When they break out. which happen about the fourth year of the Age: but contrary to the Nature of other Teeth, they continue as long as life continues: neither do they come out, as the other twenty teeth do; neither being plucked out, do they grow again. Their generation is twofold; one in the Womb, the other without the Womb; Their generation. for in the Womb the Teeth are form with the other parts, but are imperfect. Within each hole, is contained a Mucous, and hardish substance, concluded in a little white Membrane, which grows dry, and take a bony Nature by degrees, and to get out pierceth the Gum with its top; the Membrane compasseth the hole round, and like Glue retains the Tooth: The other portion, namely, the Root of the Tooth, remains still within the hole, being soft and Mucous, as the Feathers of Birds are; but it grows hard by degrees, and is parted in the middle, into three or, four Rots. Under these Teeth, in every hole, is subjected the Seminal matter of another Tooth, a Membrane passing between them; which whilst it is fermented by the formative faculty, and growing up, it expels the former. This second matter thus included with a membrane, hath deceived many Anatomists, which thought the Teeth consisted of two Parts; and that other Part of the Tooth, was an Epiphysis of the Root: therefore Vesalius, and Columbus, held the Teeth in Children, ought not to be pulled out by the Roots, but transversly to be broken off, as thinking that a new Tooth grew up from the same Root, which could never be, if the former were pulled up by the Root. But Celsus in my Judgement wrote more truly, that there was a new Tooth in Children, which did expel the former, and sometimes grew out besides it, either above, or below it. The middle part of the Hyois, being the basis of the whole bone, is Cartilaginous, Hyois. but soon becomes bony; and yet the sides remain Cartilaginous a good time. ᵇ T. 8. f. 4. G. □ ᵏ T. 8. f. 4. D. Chap. 28. Of the Back and Breast-bones. THe Backbone consists of twenty four Vertebrae, the Os Sacrum excepted! all The Vertebrae of them for one years' space, are divided into a T. 8. f. 9 A B C. □ three parts, the two first of the Neck excepted: the first part constitutes the Body; the other two make the sides of the hole, neither do they send out any process. Fallopius hath seen the first Fallopius his Observation. Vertebra of Children constituted of five parts; but the rest, of three only. The first part was where it was joined with the Tooth of the second. Vertebra, called Pyrenois; the second, and third parts, were on the sides, in which both the superior, and inferior Cavities of the Joints were; the fourth, and fifth parts perfected the rest of the hole. The second Vertebra of the Neck, besides the three parts common with the rest, hath a fourth eminent Epiphysis, called Pyrenois or the Tooth. In all the Vertebrae, the hinder part is b f. 11. □ Acute, and altogether Cartilaginous, and then grows bony, and like an Appendix is joined to the other parts. The transverse processes, are also Cartilaginous, but soon acquire a bony Nature. The Os Sacrum consists of c f. 12. B. □ five Vertebrae, with Cartilages between: So as they Os Sacrum. may easily be discerned the one from the other: the hinder sharpness is totally Cartilaginous. All the Vertebrae consist of three parts, as all the Spines of the Vertebrae. The Os Coccix is altogether Cartilaginous, and undivided; Age divides it into three Os Coccix. or four parts, which remain Cartilaginous till seven years be expired. The extremities of the Ribs that are d f. 10. 11. A. jointed to the Back, are altogether Cartilaginous, Ribs Sternum. yet they soon grow hard: the Sternum of Infants, is at first. Cartilaginous, and yet divided by no line, and yet the Superior are Sooner bony, than the inferior, and the middle parts of them before the extremities, whence it comes to pass that the bony part is compassed about with a Cartilege one each side, and resembles so many bony Knots in a board. So soon as the Child is born, the inferrior part of the Sternum is Cartilaginous, and hath no division; than it grows bony, as I shown you before; at last it is cut into six particulars, by a transverse line drawn from the Cartilages of the Ribs, to which you must number that which is by the Sword-like Cartilege. Fallopius in his Observations, notes eight bones in the Sternum of Children▪ which Falopius his Observations. afterwards are brought to seven, the two last being reduced into one: afterwards they are brought to fewer, six only apearing by that time the Child is seven years of Age; and though Fallopius think six always remain, yet I have always observed fewer. Fallopius thus describes the Union of the bones. After seven years the bones of the Sternum are joined together and become fewer by degrees, so that six only appear, one bone being made of the fourth and fifth and another of the sixth and seventh. Besides this Union increasing, there are only four found, the third fourth fifth sixth and seventh growing together. Of the Sternum of Infants Read Silvius, come. ad ch. 2. Lib. Gal. de Ossibus. Chap. 29. Of the upper Limbs. IN the Omoplata both Apophyses, and Epiphyses, are Cartilaginous, also Scapula. the Neck with the Cartilege Glenois are of the same Nature. The eminence called Coracoides is an Epiphysis, yet the bone Acromium doth not seem separated but it is an Apophysis incrusted and terminated with much Cartilege, which is dried after three or four years, and changed into a bony Epiphyses. called Acromium, as it is, described by Hypocraetes and Galen, at last that Epiphysis is turned into an Apophysis. a T. 8. f. 13. a b. □ The appendices of the shoulders in each extremity are Cartilaginous, and grow hard by degrees. Also the Trochlea is Cartilaginous, but is sooner turned into bone then the superior parts: the superior part of the Cubit called Olecramen, is an Epiphysis and after one years' time grows hard and is joined to the bone. The b T. 8. f. 13. c. □ bones of the Wrist when the Child is born: are composed of one Cartilege, Wrist. afterward they grow bony and are distinguished from one another. But first they are spongy as the rest of the bones are, which from Cartilages become bones. The eight bone of the Wrist, turns bony last of al. The extremities of the c f. 13. d. bones of the Metacarpus and Wrist are Cartilaginous, Metacarpus and Fingers. which are hardened within less than a year. Chap. 30. Of the Inferior Limbs. THe Ilium in Children is composed, of three bones even till they are seven years Ilium. of Age, to which the Ancients gave proper Names. a T. 8. f. 12. C C. □ The first bone comprehends that widness which passeth to the midst of the Funnel, the other part is equally divided into two parts, a line being drawn by that Cleft of the Funnel Cros the Oval hole, and makes the Symphysis of the Os Pubis, the superior Part of this division is called b T. 8. f. 12. D D. □ Os Pubis, the inferior c f. 12. E E. □ Os Ischium, the Lips of which are Pubis. Ischium. Cartilaginous. d f. 14. a. b. □ The Thigh on the superior part sends out three appendices; a Head, and two Thigh. Trochanters which remain Cartilaginous Epiphyses, a good time, the inferior part of the Thigh hath two knobs, the appendix in Cartilaginous. The Knee-pan at first is totally Cartilaginous; and is a long time ere it grow Patella. bony. The bones of the Tibia and Fibula, differ nothing from those that are grown up Tibia. Fibula. save only in their appendices, both above and below, which are Cartilaginous, then grow hard, and remain separated even to the tenth year and upwards. In the Foot all the bones of the e f. 14. c. Tarsus are Cartilaginous for some months, the Tarsus. bone of the Heel excepted which is Bony within, though covered with Cartilages, without. The Sesamoides remain Cartilaginous almost to consistent Age, two only excepted, Sesamoides. which are in the first Joint of the great Toe, for these grow bony presently after the Birth, Chap. 31. Of the Number of Bones. INgrassias, Propounds a fourfold number of the bones of Infants, the first contains The Number. two hundred thirty seven. The second three hundred forty five. The third two hundred fifty nine. The fourth one hundred ninety two. But this last Number I doubt is devised, or else I do not understand what Ingrassias means. These Numbers he thus composeth. In such Children as are grown up are found three hundred five bones, in the Head seventy, to wit, eight in the Skull, twelve of the upper Jaw, one of the lower Jaw, six of the Ears, thirty two Teeth, eleven small bones of the Os Hyois, which all joined together make seventy. The Trunk comprehends sixty seven, Vertebrae twenty four, Scapulae two, Ingulae two, Sternum three, Ilium two. These joined together make sixty seven. But if the Os Sacrum consist of five and the Coccyx of three, (as often it doth) then there will be only sixty six. In both hands, eighty four, (adding the twenty four Sesamoides) in both Feet eighty four, the twenty four Sesamoides being also added, the total Number of bones will be three hundred and five; form this Number if you take away thirty two Teeth which doth not appear in Infants, the result is two hundred seventy three, although the Teeth being form lie hid in the Gums, yet because there is no use of them, they are not reckoned amongst the bones. In reckoning the second Number he proceeds thus, the Vertebrae of the Backbone and Os Sacrum in Infants are divided into three Parts, the second excepted which is divided into four by reason of the Teeth, the Ilium is divided into three bones the Sternum into eight, the inferior Jaw of two, and the Frontal bone is double. These diligently considered you should find amount to seventy two, which added to two hundred seventy three make three hundred forty five, from which if you take away the bones which deserve rather the Names of Cartilages than bones, as the bones of the Wrist sixteen, of the Instep eight, of the Coccyx four, Sesamoides forty eight; each Knee-pan and Hyois eight (the three small bones remaining) which are in number eighty six, there remains two hundred fifty nine. In these Numbers the three hundred fitty one Appendices are not Numbered which if you add to three hunded forty five, the Body of the Infant will be composed of six hundred seventy Bones. The End of the First Book: THE SECOND BOOK OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIC, OF John Riolanus. Chap. 1. General Precepts, which he that would be an Anatomist, must be first Acquainted with. SEeing that according to Aristotle Chap. 1. Lib. 1. post. Analyt. Every Doctrine and discipline which consists in reason and intelligence, is perfected by foreknowledge, and Tullius Lib. 1. de nat. Deorum, saith that without foreknowledge, neither any thing can be understood nor studied, nor disputed. Before I set about my Anatomical work I thought good to premise certain general Precepts, which are the foundations of Anatomy, and will give great light to our proceeding. The Body of man is considered by Anatomists as composed of many How Anatomists Consider the Body of Man. Parts, which they examine Limb by Limb, and by a diligent Dissection, they divide the whole Body, into its smallest Parts. They divide it first into three grand Parts, Containing, Contained, and Impelling; that is into the Parts, humours, and Spirits. But in the Anatomical dissection of a dead Body, the Humours Its Parts. and Spirits, are not considered, the Speculation of which belongs to Physiology, only the Solid Parts are regarded, which are either such as make, or such Sollid Parts how many fold. as contain Humours and Spirits or the instruments of Motion, which is the Chief Action of a living Creature, for which it was made. The solid Parts are similar or dissimilar. They are called similar Parts because they are most simple, from Similar Parts what how many. which, as from a principle, the dissimilar Parts are composed. The similar Parts according to Anatomists are Bones, Cartilages, Ligaments, Membranes, Fibres, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Flesh, Fat. These are found almost in all Compound and dissimilar Parts, and the Corpulency of the Parts is form of them. The Hairs, and Naills are excrements of the external Parts: Therefore an Anatomist ought to be well instructed what these similar Parts are, that when he searcheth out the structure of the organical parts, Limb by Limb, he may know the Fundamentals of this structure. 1. A bone is a part of the Body, most cold and dry, Terrestrial; and therefore 1. A Bone. hardest, that so it may prop up the other parts of the body. 2. A Cartilege, or Gristle, is not so hard as a bone, which in Old Men sometimes 2. A Cartilege. degenerates into a bone: The Cartilages are placed about the extremities of the bone, to ease them in their Motion; some are found separated from the bones, as the Cartilages of the inferior Jaw, in the Articulation of the Claviculae, in the Sternum, in the Articulation of the Tibia to the Thigh; besides the Cartilages of the Larinx, Windpipe, and such as are placed to prop up other soft Parts, as the Nostrils, and Ears. 3. A Ligament, or bond, is a part which binds the bones together, being of a 3. Ligament. middle substance, between a Cartilege, and a Membrane; softer than a Cartilege, harder than a Membrane. 4. A Membrane, Skin, or Coat, is very soft, and subject to dilation. It is the 4. Membrane. covering of other parts, or the Receptacle of something; as the Stomach, Bladder of Gal: I● being a hollow body, it receiving something, it may be called Tunica, a Coat; If it Embrace and cover a solid body, it is propperly called Membrana. 5. A Fibrae is like a thread stretched over a Membrane, or Interwoven therewith, 5. Fibra. to strengthen it: and because of its various Situation, it is called Right, Obliqne, and Transverse; not only to help the Membrane, but also to strengthen it. Every sort of Fibres, is thought to perform a several action; as the Right, to draw to; the Transverse, to retain; and the Obliqne, to expel. Which Motions notwithstanding, absolutely depend upon the inbred faculty of the Part; which as it hath a violent dilation, so hath it a willing, and Natural contraction, and is helped in these by the Fibres. 6. A vein, is a Membranous Vessel, round and hollow, allotted to contain 6. A Vein. Blood, and distribute it for the Nourishment of the whole Body. 7. An Artery is a Membranous Channel of the same Nature, but something 7. Artery. harder, and thicker; ordained for the containing and Distributing of the Arterious blood: The original of both which, Aristotle thought was from the heart; but wiser Physicians, hold the beginning of the Veins to be in the liver; but of the Arteries in the heart. 8. A Nerve is a Channel made to carry animal Spirit; and because this spirit is 8. Nerve. most subtle, therefore the Cavity is so small, that it is not discernible. 9 The Flesh is the foundation of organical, and dissimilary Parts, where bone 9 Flesh. is wanting, and makes up the chief Part of our bulk. The flesh is in substance, soft and thick; made of blood alone, compacted together, and well concocted, if it be red; but of blood, and Seed, if it be white. A fourfold sort of flesh, is observed in the Parts; Viscerous, and Musculous, both of them very red; Membranous, and Glandulous, both of them white. For every substance of the bowels is called Flesh, or Parenchyma. The thicker substance of certain Membranes, which are the containers of something, which by dilating and contracting their bodies, they attract, retain, and expel, are also called Flesh, or a Flesh-like substance. The thick, and spongy substance of the Glandulae, is called Flesh; but especially the substance of the Muscles deserves the Name of Flesh. 10. The Fat although it appear not till the whole body be form, and when the 10. Fat. Child is big, and grows to the Parts; yet because in the composition of organical Parts, it often concurs to make up the bulk, it is Numbered amongst the similar Parts. Fat is the thinnest substance of blood, Fat, and Oily, sweeting out through the tender Coats of the Veins, and hardening between the Membranes: It is twofold, according to Aristotle; Soft, and external; Hard and internal. The one is Grease, The other Suet. These three similar Parts; Bones, Cartilages, and Ligaments, shall be treated of, as they are showed in a Carcase, from top to Toe, after we have showed the Muscles; because they are so joined together, that one cannot be showed without another. But I desire all such as are studious in Physic, first to be well acquainted in the Osteology or History of the dry bones in the Skeleton of a Man, before they come to the inspection of a Carcase; for so they will the better understand the whole anatomical discourse of the dissection, and find out the reason of my other Osteology in the bones of Carcases. The Rest of the similar Parts shall be showed severally in the explication of the dissimilar Parts, seeing of the similary Parts aforesaid, viz. Bones, Cartilages, Ligaments, Membranes, Fibres, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Flesh and Fat, the Bulk, or Material substance of the dissimilar Parts, is made up, and therefore you shall hear similary Parts often mentioned, in the explication of them; howbeit, in some places they exist apart, no ways joined, or united unto others, to constitute an Organ; but are considered with reference to their Particular uses. But they concur together, and are united one with another, in organical Parts, Organical Parts, what? that they may perform their various Offices: for the effect of which, they are divided into four orders: For in every Organ there is the principal Part by which the Action is performed: Another, without which the Action cannot be done: A third, by which the action is preserved. But in every Organ, the principal Part ought to be similar and proper to it, such as is not found in another Organ. But this similar Part cannot perform its action alone, unless it be helped by others; and therefore the concourse and Union of similary Parts is necessary. Wherefore, every Movable action, belongs truly, and poperly to an Organical Part; and none unless it be alteration, belongs to a similar Part; which out of the composition of the Organical, hath only use, which notwithstanding, it contributes to perfect the action of the Organical. More over, organical Parts according to the dignity of their action, are divided How many. into Principal, and Administering. They are called principal, which supply the whole body with matter and faculty: Physicians hold them to be three; the Liver, Heart, and Brain: Aristotle held but one principal Part of the body, viz. The Heart, which is King and Ruler of all others. The rest of the Parts Minister, and are subservient to the principal. According to the various composition of the Organical they are divided into compound, more compound, and most compound: For the Finger is compound; the Hand, or Foot, more compound; the Limbs, are most compound. But that we may seek out the structure of each Part exactly; we must observe What is to be observed in each Part. the Name, Substance, Temperature, Original, Situation, Quantity, Number, Figure, Color, Connexion, Communion, Action, and Use. Connection differs from communion; for Connexion is the sticking of one Part to another, of one or more Parts by which they depend; it is sometimes taken for the Original of the part itself, and yet the Original of some Parts is distinguished from Connexion: But communion is either universal, with Parts remote and near, which is done by Veins, Arteries, and Nerves, by intervening of which, all the Parts have community with one another; or Particular, when some Particular Part communitates its self to some near, or remote Parts, and so the Gall communicates itself by the Biliar passages to the Liver, and the Gut Duodenum: The Reins, and Bladder have communion by the ureters. In this Method you may comprehend whatsoever may be spoken, or demanded of any Part: But in the History of Parts we must begin first of all with those things that are common to the whole Organ, then with those things which are Proper to the same Organ: but in describing the Fabric of the body of Man, we will follow the common order of Dissection. Chap. 2. Of the Natural and Legitimate Conformation of the Body. SEeing my design and intent of handling Anatomy, doth not consist in a bear and The necessariness of it. simple comtemplation of the Parts of the Body, but is also referred to the use of Medicine; before we come to the dissection of the body of man, we will describe in a few words the Legitimate and natural conformation of the Body of Man when it is alive, which is the basis whereby we judge of the Sicknesses and imperfections of Men or Women: this was necessary of Old in buying of Servants, in joining Men and Women in Marriage that they might have Children, and in choosing select Men for Soldiers. And this knowledge is necessary even to this day; for in some Monasteries such as desire to lead a Religious life, the Physician views them Naked from the Crown of the Head, to the Sole of the foot; and notes their respiration, and pulse, and voice in singing. This is done in buying Slaves in divers Countries, and also in buying Horses; and also Nurses are exactly viewed by Physicians for the education of Children, I mean the Children of Princes. Therefore in Mankind, you may consider the difference of Sex: Substance of Considerations in a Man well form. Body, Temperature, Greatness, Color, form, or Figure; as they are convenient in a perfect and well form body, that so by this, the difference of a body not well form may be known. As for that which belongs to Sex, Mankind is twofold: Male and Female. The Latin 1. Sex. word Homo comprehends both: and a Women has been called Vira, and therefore a stout Women is called Virago: the differences of both I have Accurately expounded in my Anthopographiae. Lib. 2. The substance of the Boby in Man ought to be fleshy not Fat; firm and solid, not 2. Substance. soft: the Limbs meanly hairy, for smoothness in Men, such as is in Women, argues effeminate conditions. A healthful temper ought to be hot and moist, because life consists in, and is 3. Temper. preserved by such a temper, yet is there a peculiar temper in every person, which by Physicians is called Idiosyncrasia; which if Galen could exactly have known, he would have thought himself equal with Aesculapius: but we must reduce this to the General. But by what signs this may be known, Galen hath declared in his little book of Art of Physic, and other Authors. The Magnitude of the body is threefold, according to the threefold Dimension of 4. Magnitude. the body. We shall consider chiefly the Longitude and Latitude: The natural and decent Longitude of the body ought to be four Cubits, the Latitude one Cubit as Goropius Becanus teacheth: this also is confirmed by Vitruvius who defined the just Longitude of the body of man to be six Roman Feet. And Agellius Lib. 3. ex Varrone, Noted that the highest pitch of a Man's height was seven Foot: but more Men are shorter, than taller than this. Vegetius Writes that Soldiers ought to be choson six Foot high, yet by Reason of difference of sex, Region, and Diseases, Men are either taller or shorter, for each soil hath its Particular Nature: so the people of Asia are taller than those of Europe, and in Europe, those of the North parts, as Denmark, the Low-Countries and those of upper Germany are tallest. The various Mensuration of bodies Hypocrates hath described Leb. de aer. aq. et loc. Commonly men are taller than Women; whereas in some other living creatures, Foemales are greatest. The Latitude or thickness in a well Proportioned body ought to be, almost half the Longitude, so that if the Longitude be six Foot, the Latitude ought to be almost three: slenderness of body is subject to Consumptions, neither can the body be strong and fit for labour unless it be thick. In the bigness of the body is Magnanimity and beauty, quoth Aristotle, Ethic. Lib. 4. For a man of a little and small body cannot be fair; yet if you regard, understanding, there is little Wit commonly in those Tal bodies. Elegantly said Celsus, Lib. 2. Ch. 1. The best disposed body is well set, neither slender nor Fat, a tall stature is comely in youth but not so in Age, a slender body is weak, a Fat body dull. The Colour of the body is diligently to be marked, for such a Colour as flourisheth 5. Color. in the Skin and countenance, the same is predominant in the Humours, and therefore sanguine people are Red, Choleric Yellow, Melancholy Black or brown and dusky, Phlegmatic are pale: a brown and ruddy Color are preferred before pale, which argues softness of body. There is some difference in Authors about the Colour to be Chosen in a Nurse, Aristotle perfers brown, others a Mingled Colour of Red and white. Now the Natural and Legitimate form of the Head, Breast, Belly, and Limbs, is to 6. Form. of the Head. be considered. The Head ought to be round, and not Copped, unless the Neck be very thick: a great Head is preferred before a little one: from the Head ought the Nature of the Nerves, Veins, Flesh, and Humours to be collected. A great Head requires a great Neck, which gives indication of a great breast, by reason of the Parts contained in the Neck: a great breast makes a large belly, and therefore the proportion of the rest of the Cavities depends upon the Head. The Chest ought to be large, of an Oval Figure, and the Backbone strait, the Breast. breast ought to be somewhat convex, not sharp, nor flat, nor depressed. The Paps of Men, aught to be depressed, but in Women swelling round, and Glandulous, rather than Fatty, or Fleshy, because they are the Emunctories of the breast if the Woman give not Suck. If the Duggs be small the Women are sickly, and if the Nipples look pale the Womb is Diseased, according to Hypocrates. Whether are large breasts to be chosen in Nurses, or such as are mean in bigness? What Breasts are to be chosen in Nurses. Great breasts please not Moschio, because they are Fat, neither have they plenty of Milk; and therefore Fat Nurses are not to be preferred before such as are Lean, and Juicy; neither such as are tall, before such as are of a mean Stature: Aristotle Lib. 3. de hist. animal. White coloured Women, because they are Phlegmatic, have but bad Milk. From the breast, we pass to the belly, which ought to be round and sticking out: Belly. Women that have such bellies, the Poet's praise, and say Venus had such a one. Hipp. Lib. de ve● Med. Notes that long and round bellies, aught to be considered of Physicians, because by looking upon them, 'tis easy to know which are fit for strong Purgations; for such whose Parts in the Abdomen are strong, and well disposed, may easily Purge; but such as are slender, take strong Medicines with danger. Very Fat Women are hard to conceive with Child, Hippoc. Aph. 4. Lib. 5. As for what belongs to the Privities; Heliogabalus chose such for Soldiers as Privities. had large Privities, because he thought they were lusty, stout Men. A very long yard is not fit for Venery, either because the strength of the Seed passeth out, by reason of the length of the Yard, if you will believe Galen; or because the Muscles are tired, by erecting a great, and long Yard. A mean Yard is most fruitful, and Limbs. gives most & longest pleasure in the act of Copulation. A long Yard, though indeed it fill the Neck of the Womb, yet it makes it not so fruitful; and is hurtful to such Women as are subject to the fits of the Mother, by stretching the Genitals: Neither are the Testicles when they are great and Pendulous, to be commended. We pass to the Limbs, viz. The Hands and Feet, which ought to be equal in proportion to the rest of the Body: The Longitude of the Foot, from the Os Pubis, to the extremity of the Heel, aught to be equal to that of the Hand, from the Ala, to the top of the middle Finger. If the whole body be six Foot long, the Foot is three: both Hands and Feet, are somewhat fleshy in strong bodies; for although slenderness of Legs be commended in Horses, 'tis not so in Men. An example of a perfect and absolute body well form, is to be Read in Sidonius Apollinaris, Lib. 1. Epist. 2. de Theodorico rege, wherein is one remarkable fault to be amended, not Noted by interpreters, for Excrementa read Extrema. Inter Extrema Costarum spi●a discriminat. Chap. 3. The Division of Man's Body. BEfore we expose the whole Body of Man, to Anatomical dissection, it ought to be divided into its Parts, or principal regions, that the Number and order of the regions, and where they begin, may be known. A mongst the various divisions of the Body of Man, this in my mind seems the Division of the Body. best, and to be preferred before the rest. The body is divided into the Trunk, and the Limbs. The Trunk is divided into three Principal Regions; the Head, Breast, and Belly. The Head obtains the Superior place; The Breast, the middle: and the Belly, the lowermost. The Members or Limbs are four branches sticking out from the Body, two Arms, and two Legs. What are the bands of these Regions, I shall show, when I come to speak of each Region apart. The Medicinal Consideration. I will not stand here in rehearsing & designing the external Parts of the whole body, which are expounded in every Region of the same; but only consider the corporature, or fleshy habit, which is covered with the Skin, like a Garment; which though it look for the most part beautifully without, it looks ill favoredly within. This habit of the whole body, makes the third Region of the body, to which the Humours come from the deepest Parts; the ill effects of which, are clearly seen in the Diseases, and Symptoms which appear outwardly. The juice which is seen in the leaf and branch comes from the Root. I shall reckon up the chief Diseases which use to infest the outward habit of the body. Viz. Immoderate Fatness, or Leanness, Defluxions, Gouts, Dropsy, Cachexia, the whore's Pocks, Plenty, or defect of Sweat, by reason of the openness, or closeness of the pores, Palsy, Convulsion, Unquietness, and weariness and all kind of swell. The Flesh of man, because it's Nourished by purer Blood, is delicater than the flesh of other Creatures, and preferred before it by Cannibals, or Man-Eaters. Flesh, seeing it is Porous and Musculous, it hath empty spaces, which in men in health are filled with spirit and blood, but in such as are sick, with Water and wind; thence come Defluxions over the whole body, and other Diseases of the Skin. The Habit of the whole body, is Purged and emptied by sweeting, by Cupping-Glasses, Scarification, and Rubbing, according to the Doctrine of Galen, Lib. de Sanitate; by Bathe, Whip, and Beat, and blistering, and Rubifying, or Pimple-raising Applications. Therefore seeing the small Pocks and Measses, are but the scum of the whole habit of body, that is, of the Flesh, and solid parts, their coming out is to be furthered, either at the beginning, or at any other time, with Sweeting Medicamants, and such things as draw to the external Parts. Neither need you let blood so often, though the Patient be strong, twice if need be, is enough, because it hinders the Motion of Nature in expelling, unless either a dead sleep, or strangling with a Fever, or bloody Flux, which is for the most part deadly, draw us to that remedy; not neglecting young Pigeons Cut alive through the middle, laid to the Hands and Feet,: and sometimes to the Heart, and small Cupping-Glasses fastened all about the body, with light Scarification. And sometimes bathing the Body in Luke warm Water profits, if the season of the year be convenient, to make the Measses and small Packs come out the better. Chap. 4. Of the lower Ventricle. THe Dissection and Anatomical demonstration, must be begun at the belly, because Why the Disection gins a● the lower Ventriole. it is the sink and Kitchen of the body: and therefore soonnest Putrifies and stinks. It is called in Greek Coilia because it is coil that is hollow; in latin Venture, in English the Belly. It's substance is fleshy composed of various similar parts, which we shall propound It's Substance. in order hereafter. The belly seeing it is a most compound part, it's own temperature is none at all, but Temperature. it follows the temperament of the parts contained in it, and especially of the Liver. It hath its Original from the first comformation with the rest of the Parts. Original. Situation. Quantity. It is Situated in the inferior part of the Trunk of the Body. It's Quantity or widness is from the bastard Ribs, or Diaphragma to the Os Pubis or share Bone; and with these bounds it is Circumscribed above and below. The whole widness of the belly is distinguished into three Regions; the superior called a T. 1. f. 1. A. B. □ Stomacbal, the middle called b f. 1. C C. □ Vmbiliar, and the lower called c f. 1. E E. □ Hypogastrica. Again in every part, both the lateral and middle parts ought to be observed; the lateral parts of the stomachal Region are called d T. 1. f. 1. A B. □ Hypochondria, of the middle Region e f. 1. D D. □ Ilia. The middle is called the f infra. C C. □ Navel which is the centre both of the belly and of the whole body. The lateral parts of the Hypogastrick Region are called g f. 1. F F. □ groins, the middle h f. 1. g. f 2. D D. □ Pubis, the share which after the fourteenth year both in men and Women is adorned with Hair, as a natural covering for those parts, which the common Law of bashfulness commands us to conceal. In respect of number, the belly is but one; yet by the Peritonaeum it is divided into to Cavities; The greater holds the parts which prepare for nourishment. The lesser holds the bladder, and Genitals in men; and the Womb also in Women which never bear Children. It is divided into parts containing, and contained. Parts containing, are proper, Parts containing. Common. common, and divers: common are five; i f. 2. B B. □ Cuticula, or scarf Skin; k f. 2. C C. □ the Skin, l f. 2. D D. □ the Fatty Membrane, m T. 2. f. 8. 9 □ the Fleshy Membrane, and the Common Membrane of the Muscles. Proper are, the Muscles of the n T. 2. f. 3. and 4. □ Abdomen, and the o T. 10. f. 10. O O. □ Peritoneum. Proper. Divers. Divers are, partly Fleshy, partly bony: bony are the p T 23. f. 1. A. □ Vertebrae, and q T. 14. f. 2. L L. f. 3. B B. □ Pelvis, which are parts of the Os Sacrum, and Ilium. Fleshy are, the Muscles r T. 14. f. 1. C C. D D. □ Psoas, s f. 4. B B. □ Sacrolumbus t f. 3. D D. f. 4. A A. □ Latissimus, v f. 2. O O. □ Sacer x f. 4. C C. □ Semispinutus, y T. 10. f. 1. N N. Quadratus. I call them divers, because those bones and Muscles, being Scituared in the hinder part of the belly, do make something toward the constituting of the belly, though they are referred to another part, and pertain to another use. The parts contained, are manifold; which are divided into such as nourish, and Contained ● Parts. Figure. such as engender; such as nourish are such as make Chyle, and such as make blood. The Genitals are of men, and of Women. The Figure of the belly, is Oval, by reason of the parts contained; which if removed, it is hollow, that it may be the seat of the Vessels dedicated to nourishment, and Generation; and therefore the latins call it Abdomen, and the Greeks Epigastrion. The colour of the superficies of the belly, is like the colour of the rest of the body; Color. in men of ripe Age it is Hairy from the Pubis, up to the Navel. It is outwardly knit to the breast, and inferior limbs by the Skin; inwardly by Connexion. the Peritoneum. It communicats with the principal parts, by Veins Arteries, and Nerves. The use of the Belly is, to comprehend, and involve the parts of nourishment, Use. and generation; take it individually, it consists of Musculous Flesh. It hath action to compress the parts contained within its self, for the expultion Action. of excrements, upwards and downwards; and to force the Child out of the Womb. The Medicinal Consideration. From this discourse, a Physician collects many things, in his Practice, useful. 1. That the Belly is the Sink of the Body, in which the vices of our intemperance reside; the Mother of all mischiefs, and the Nurse of Physicians; in which condition 'tis called Collatibus Venture, an Alderman's Belly. He whose Belly grows to a great bigness, is called Ventrosus, Fat Guts. Some we read of, whose Bellies grew to a monstrous bigness, as Nichomachus Smyrnaeus, in Galen; in Athenaeus, Lib. 12. Deipnosophist, we read of a King that was choked with fatness. But famous is that History in Michael Neander, in Erot. Hebr. ex. Talmud. in Jona. Rabbi. Ishmael, and Rabbi Eliazer, had such great Bellies, that when they stood with their Faces together and their Bellies touched, two great Oxen might pass between them, and touch neither of them. By reason of the Fleshy, and fatty substance of the Belly, it is subject to divers Swelling in the Abdomen. swell, Especially Aposthemes, either from the liver by the Vmbilicar Vein; or else the matter is sent from the Suppuration of the Reins; which being shut up in the Doubling of the Peritonaeum, may send their impurities into the external parts of the Belly. This fleshy and fatty substance, aught to be mean; if it be greater, 'tis a discomdity It's Constitution what it should be. to life, if lesser it shows an ill Disposition of the Bowels: Therefore Hypocrates wrote, that in every Disease, the parts belonging to the Belly, had better be some what gross, then to slender; for if they consume, 'tis very evil: therefore Physicians were wont to handle the whole belly, especially the Hypochondria, which ought to be soft, equal, and fleshy. The Situation of the Parts in the Belly. The largeness of the Belly is considered, according to longitude and depth, that The Situation of the Parts in the lower Ventricle. so the Physician may know in pains and wounds in the belly, which part is afflicted, or wounded. According to depth, the parts are divided into upper, and lower; and therefore according to Hypocrates the pains in the upper part, are more light; those in the lower, more strong and dangerous. According to Longitude by the division of the places, you may understand by the Viz. bare looking upon them, or feeling them with the hand, what parts are afflicted, pained, or wounded. In the right Hypochondria is the liver, which passeth even to the Cartilege Xyphois; It passeth a finger's breadth beyond the bastard Ribs, on the sides forewards, two fingers. In the middle region, is the Stomach placed, Liver. Stomath. which incliness more to the left Hypochondrium, and descends four fingers breadth below the bastard Ribs. In the left Hypochondria, lies the Spleen, which▪ Naturally hangs under the Spleen. bastard Ribs, the breadth of a man's Thumb. The umbilicar Region, the Navel possesseth, above which, is the Gut called Colon. Colon, transversly seated; and in the whole compass of that Region, is the Gut called Jejunum, disposed: Toward the Backbone, are the Kidneys. The beginning Jejunum. of the Colon being bowed back from the right Kidney, under the Liver and Stomach, to the Spleen; afterwards passeth obliquely to the left Kidney: and Kidneies'. therefore the pains of the Colic, must diligently be distinguished from those of the stone. In the middle, and side-Region of the Hypogastrick, in the Gut called Ilium concontained; Ilium. Bladder. Right Gut. In the bottom of the belly, the bladder, under which lies the right Gut. In Women, the Womb lies between the bladder, and the right Gut: under the Womb. Guts, lies the Mesenterium, as the Sweat-bread doth under the Stomach. A little below the Navel, the Omentum is stretched about all the Guts, and divides all the internal parts with the Peritonaeum, from the external; those that lie deep, from those that lie at top. The Medicinal Consideration. In the Belly, are frequently all sortsof Tumours, Impostumes, Rumbling of the Diseases of the Abdomen. Guts, and Croaking; which proceed either from Tumours of the Parts contained, or from wind, or collection of Water. It is Cut on the sides towards the Hypogastrium, in the Caesarian dissection, to draw out the Child in a difficult labour. It is pricked near the Os Pubis, to draw out Urine, when a Catheter cannot be put in. It is pierced in the bottom of the Hypogastrium, near the Navel, to draw out Water in the Dropsy Ascites, which Operation is called Paracentesis. Chap. 5. Of the Scarf Skin. AMongst the parts which make the Abdomen, the first that comes to view, the Greeks call Epidermis, the Latins Cuticula and we the Scarf-Skin. Although, by its substance it seems to be Spermatical yet it differs much Substance. from it. It's Temperature is none at all, and therefore no more words about it, but for its Original. original, it is framed of the Excrementitious and Viscous Vapours of the Skin, which Sweeting, out grow dry by the coldness of the Air, and like a thin Skin, compasseth the Skin round, and therefore it sticks to the Skin firmly and universally, and hath no other bounds then the Skin hath. And although to the sight its substance appears simple, yet Fabricius ab Aquae pendente will have it double, one which is inseparably fixed to the pores of the Skin, the other separable, without any offence to the Skin itself, but the thickness of the Cuticula, be it more or less, doth not increase its number, for though in some places it may be divided into many small Skins, yet in no place can one be pulled off without another. It hath no Proper figure besides what it borrows from the Skin itself, from which Figure. it differs in this, that it is no way porous. It is thought to partake always of the same colour with the Skin, and yet in Black Color. Mores this being pulled of, the Skin itself is white. It sticks firmly to the true Skin, and is an Excrementitious part as the Hairs Connexion. are, and hath no communion with the principal parts, by Veins, Arteries, nor Nerves, because it wants them, and is insensible, as you may find, if you please to scrape it off from your hands, or any parts, or thrust a Pin or Needle under it. It hath no action, only use, which is to shut the pores of the Skin, to make it ●se. smooth, and beautiful, polished and even. The Medicinal Consideration. By these things thus considered, a Physician may see that the scarce Skin hath also its Diseases, though Hypocrates thought them to be only deformities, He makes a distinction whether they may be called Impostumes or diseases, at the end of Lib. 2. Prorrheticorum, because such as belong to the Scarfe-skin, pertain most of all to the dignotion and Cure of Affects. It is infected with divers Spots, both natural, and sickly; natural, are those many deformities of the Skin; Sickly, are the Measles, small Pocks, purple spots in Fevers, or any Spots of other Colour; sometimes without a Fever, when Nature sends any Wheyish substance of another Colour into the Scarf-Skin. Diseased spots of the Scarf-Skin may, and aught to be cured: but such as are Original from the birth, are very difficultly taken away, because they stick firmly to the Skin, as well as to the Scarf-Skin. This Scarf-Skin may be beautified; which Galen denies to be done, by an honest, It may be Beautified. and honourable Physician; but allows it to be done, by Court Physicians, and Bawds, and Chambermaid's that wait upon their Ladies. In Women, the Cuticula is thick, smooth, and many time stops the pores of the Skin, and hinders free perspiration. In men it's usually full of pores, that so the Hairs may pass out. Lastly, as the Scarf-Skin of the Body, being well looked after, and adorned, procures beauty and and comeliness to the Body; so being made rough with Spots, or burnt by the Sun, it unhandsoms a man. It is ridiculous to draw it off with blisters, that so it may come again the clearer, you lose your labour as much as though you washed a Black-more. The Scarf-Skin peels off in divers persons whilst it is dried or burnt, and the Skin itself in Leprosies, and divers that have the french pocks; The Skin itself comes off by fleakes in such as are Leprous, and in some that are troubled with the Whoremasters Pox. Chap. 6. Of the Skin. AFter the Scarf-Skin, follows the Skin called in Greek Derma; it hath a substance divers from other Membranes, the like of which you shall Its Names. never find in the whole Body, because it consists of Seed and Blood mixed together; Substance. yet so as that portion of Seed is predominant, which may be bowed, and distended: from which the Skin is accounted Spermatical. It's temperature is cold and dry, or more properly, exquisitely temperate, yet so Temperature. it may be the Judge of feeling. It is extended over the whole body, and on wraps it like a garment, and therefore its dimention is as the dimention of the Body is. Although it seem but one, both to sight and touching, yet some hold it to consist Number. of two Skins; but I could never find them to be separable, only it may be cut into many parts by reason of its thickness. It hath the same Figure which the body hath, that it clotheth. It's textur Figure. is 'Slight, and very full of small holes, for insensible transpiration, and the passing out of excrements: and in divers places, it hath visible great holes; as in the ears, Eyes, Nose, mouth, fundament, and privities of Men and Women. It takes its Colour from the predominant humour; for of what colour the Humour Color. predominant in the Body is, of that colour is the Skin, unless it be such from their birth, as in Ethiopia. It is straightly knit to the Parts under it, and therefore immovable, excepting the Connexion. Skin of the Forehead. It hath communion with the principal Parts, by innumerable veins, Arteries, Communion. and Nerves; the extremities of which, it takes on every side, for it hath neither of them all three peculiar to its self. Whether by reason of its feeling, it perform action, a man may make a doubt; Action. for otherwise the membranes, which are the instruments of inward feeling, perform action also; but what Author ever said that the Membranes performed action? We grant that it hath an excellent, and particular use, to defend and adorn the use. body, to receive the excrements of the third concoction to cleanse the Body of fil●h fuliginous Vapours, and Sweat. The Medicinal Consideration. Let us now reduce this same conformation of the Skin, to a Physical use. It's Actects in Substance. Temper. substance against Nature, consists in i●s over thickness. It's temperature is changed in divers disease's. It's number is vitiated, when the Cuticula is vitiated, or gnawn through; or the Number. Skin itself lost. Often times its smoothness, is turned into roughness; or it is disfigured by Figure. pustles. Sometimes its passages are stopped, or more open than they should be. It's connexion, is marred in wounds, and Ulcers. Connextion. use. Sometimes it's use is hurt, when it is insensible; or when it receives not only the excrements of the third concoction, but also of the whole Body. Therefore the Skin, seeing it is the breathing place of the whole body, is subject to an infinite number of Diseases; and if the pores be shut, the Body suffers great discommodities, by reason transpiration is hindered; for the Body ought to ease itself that way, according to Hypocrates, Lib. de Alimento: The motion of the Body, to perspiration, the w●der it is, the healthfuller are men; the less perspiration men have, the more sickly are they; they which have quick perspration, are weaker, though better in health, and soon recover when they are sick: such whose perspiration is bad, are strongest before they are sick; but when they are sick, their Cure is most difficult. Diseases proceeding from disorder of the Skin, are more dangerous in winter; and in malignant Fevers, by reason of the interception of the transpiration, the Native heat is choked. Breathing a Vein is a remedy for such. From the substance, and Colour of the Skin, Hypocrates propounded two prognostics: Lib. 5 Aph. 71. and Lib▪ proegn. Part. 7. and 8. Of the spots of the Skin, read Soranus, Chap. 38. The Skin is like in Color, to the predominate humours, in the Body Hippoc. de humoribus. Of divination by the Moles of the Skin, wrote Polemon, a Greek Author; and and amongst modern writers, Ludovicus ●eptalius, Mediolanensis, Wrote most accurately. Aristotle concluded the subtlety of a persons wit, from the subtlety and thinness of the Skin, rather than of the blood. The thinness of the Skin, is the cause why man alone is troubled with the Leprosy, according to Aristotle, Prol. 5. Sect. 10. It is certain that concagious Diseases, may be drawn in through the pores of the Skin. The Skin grows hard and dry, through burning Fevers, and sometimes it becomes Whether Skin l●st, can be regained. as thick as an Elephants Hid: especially about the Back, Limbs, and Thighs, as I have seen it in many, like a tanned Hide. The Skin lost, grows not again, but degenerates into a Scarre: For it is made by the first in●ention of Nature, but repaired by the second. Chap. 7. Of the Fatty Membrane. THe Greeks call it Steer, and ●imele▪ i● makes a common membrane, by reason Its Names. of its consistence: in 〈◊〉 is called 〈◊〉; and why not so then in men? ●●substance, although it be something 〈◊〉, yet is it soft, and Oily, as you may Substance. perceive if you handle it with your Fingers, or lay it by the Fire. It ariseth from the thinner portion of the Blood, distilling through the Veins Original. like dew, and congealing about the Flesh: this is the certain matter of the Fat; of the efficient cause only is the question made, Namely, Whether it obtain its consistence by heat, or cold. All acknowledge a moderate heat about the membranes, compelling, and applying this same fatty, and Oily Liquor. The Temperature then of the Fat, is moderately hot and moist. Temper. Situation. It is contained vuder the Skin, universally over the whole body; the Forehead, Cod, and yard, (where there is no Fat) excepted. Therefore the Fatty membrane, is large, as the Skin is. In Number it is only one, unless you connex the Fleshy membrane, internexed Number. with it, as Silvius doth. It hath no Proper Figure. Figure. Color. In Colour it is white; if at any time it be red, it is because blood, by reason of some Laceration, is mixed with it. It sticks firmly to the Skin, neither can it be divided from it without scraping; and so it doth to the Fleshy Membrane. The Fat cannot communicate with the principal Parts, because it is not truly nourished; nor yet lives, unless by apposition as stones do; neither yet is it sensible: therefore it wants both Veins, Arteries, and Nerves; and yet all three of them pass through the Fat, that so they may come at the Skin. As for the use of it; it warms the body in Winter like a Garment, and cools it use. in Summer, by hindering the penetrating of the heat: It is like a Cushion for men to sit on, and in long fasting, it is turned to Nourishment of the Fleshy Parts near to it, which Suck out its juice. Chap. 8. Of the Fleshy Membrane. THe Fleshy Membrane lies under the Fat, and sticks to it, and is conspicuous in young Children newly born, where it is not hid with Fat. It is more obscure in such as are grown up, and yet it retains it Fleshy substance, as is evident Substance. about the Loins, Cod, Forehead, and Neck. It's temperature, is like the rest of the Flesh, ho● and moist; and it hath its Temperature▪ original from the Blood. It is situated under the Fat, and stretched out over the whole body universally, Situation. and is the fourth covering of the body. In bruits it is next to the Skin, which often moves by the intervening of this Membrane. It is one single Membrane. Number. Figure. Color. It hath no proper Figure, unless the Figure of the body which it covers. It hath various colours in Disverse places; for it is more red in the Neck, Forehead, and Cod, than else where. It is joined to the Fat inseparably in some places; so that the 〈◊〉, and Connexion. Fatty Membrane, seem to make but one: in other places it may be separated. It communicates with the principal parts, by the extremities of the Ve●●s, Arteries, 〈◊〉. and Nerves. And that it is very Sensible, the rigour, and trembling of the body, which depends Action. upon this Membrane, witnesseth: besides it hath a peculiar Motion in the Neck, Forehead, and Cod, where it is Musculous, and endued with Nervous Fibres. It's use is to give foundation to the collecting and generating the Fat, to clothe Use. the Body, and cherish▪ the internal heat, and defend it from external injuries. The Medicinal Consideration. Although, Cutaneous Diseases seem to belong to the Skin; yet if they continue long they have their foundation in the fleshy and fatty Membrane; shivering, shaking and trembling, belong especially to the Fleshy Membrane. Chap. 9 Of the Common Membrane of the Muscles. THe Fleshy Membrane being taken away, the common Membrane of the Muscles of the Abdomen follows next, being the fi●t common covering of the body, which comprehends all the Muscles in the body, (besides the proper Membrane of every Muscle) lest in their Motion, they should pass out of their places. It's Substance is very strong, yet thin and Nervous. Substance. Temper. Original. Situation. Quantity. It is spermatical, cold and dry, in temperature. It hath its original, from the first formation. It immediately covers, and straight binds in the Muscles, over which it is stretched. It's wideness is thought to equal the dimension of the whole body; but in the Face, Neck, and superior Limbs, it is not easily found; and in the Legs, the Fascia Lata performs its Office. Seeing it is admirable thin, it cannot be divided into two Membranes. Number. Figure. Color. Connexion. It acquires its Figure, from the Parts it contains. In Color, it is whitish. It sticks stoutly to the Muscles, which it compasseth, neither can it be pulled off, but by a Skilful Dissector. It hath no peculiar Nerves, Veins, nor Arteries It is nourished, and is sensible, like the other common parts, Communion. Use. It is of admirable use, for it compasseth the Muscles like a girdle, and together with the Fleshy Membrane, is the foundation of the Fat; therefore, where it, or something like it, which performs its Office, is wanting, there the Fat also is wanting; as in the Forehead, Head, Face, and Cod, where the Fleshy Membrane immediately toucheth the Skin, without any Fat: between them. Chap. 10. Of a Muscle in the general. BEfore I treat of the Muscles of the Belly, I will premise the general Doctrine of the Muscles. A Muscle is an instrument of voluntary motion, which depends upon our own Definition. Substance. will, and because it governs the actions▪ It is a dissimila● part, compounded of many similar one's; but of those Parts, Flesh is predomina●te. So that the substance of the Muscle, is judged to be Fleshy: Yea and the Muscles are to be understood by the word Flesh in ancient Authors; as Hypocrates, and Aristotle. Besides, the Flesh, a Vein, an Artery, a Nerve, Fibres, a Membrane, a Ligament, or ●endon, help to make up the composition of a Muscle. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 they are Fleshy, their Temperature it hot and moist. Temperature. Original. and insertion. The true original of a Muscle, is from blood in the conformation of the first Parts; but by reason of its Connexion, in two extremes, It is said to arise from a stable Part, and to be inserted into a movable part, because it is ordained for motion, and all motion is caused by that which moves not. This original and insertion, is known by the ducture and series of the Fibres, by which you may Judge of the Situation of the Muscle, whether right, Obliqne, or transverse▪ for in these positions all the Muscles in the body of man, both internal, and external, lie. Their quantity and magnitude, is various, according to the variety of places, Quantity. and parts to be moved, which require either greater, or smaller Muscles. There are abundance of them in number, which according to my Observation Number. and computation, are four hundred thirty one: but because our body is double, the Muscles also are double; few their are without fellows, such as are the Sphincters; and the Diaphragma, or Midrif. Their Figure is various, a T. 10. f. 1. N N. T. 14. f. 2. O O. □ Square, b T. 10. f. 1. □ Triangular, c T. 22. f. 1. C D. □ round, d T. 14. f. 2. M M. T. 15. f. 18. A A. □ Long, e T. 14. f. 1. A A. □ Trapezia, Figure. Lozing fas●ond, f T. 22. f. 1. A. □ Deltois, like the Greek Delta Δ g T. 13. f. 18. B B. Scalena: usually they are round, whether you regard their Circumference, or bulk in long and thick Muscles: Therefore Hypocrates in Lib. de art. Defines a Muscle to be Flesh Circumducted in an orb: but the greatest Parts of the Muscles have a longish figure. For the most parts, you shall observe the middle Part swelled, the extremities Belly. Head▪ Tendon. narrow. The middle part is called the Belly; in the immovable extremity; the Head, the movable extremity, the Tendon, or Aponeurosis, which is the end, or insertion of the Muscle into the Part to be moved. Each extremity of the Muscle for the most Part, is Nervous; but the Tendon is Nervous in almost all the long Muscles: the Belly is fleshy, and Seldom Nervous. The Colour of a Muscle, for the most Part, is red; of a leaden Colour in some Color. few, by reason of their impure Situation, in some filthy place. The Connexion of the Muscles is twofold; in the two extremities, and in divers Connexion. Parts; the one of which stands still, the other moves: also the Muscles move the Parts to which they stick, though they were not appointed for that use. All the Muscles have communion with the Parts, by Veins, Arteries, and Nerves; Communion. which they admit above the Belly▪ or middle part of their Body, by which they obtain their motive power. The Action of the Muscles, is either universal, or particular. Universal action, Action▪ is that which agrees to all of them, Viz. Motion: particular action, is the motion of some one certain Part; this motion is performed by contraction of the Muscle▪ whilst it is drawn back, towards its beginning, made shorter, and swells outwardly; and this agrees withal the Muscles, those of the Abdomen excepted, which being drawn back, swell within, because they have no opposite bone to withhold them. Therefore the true action of a Muscle, is contraction, or conservation of what is drawn; which motion is called Tonicus, in one Muscle remaining long in on figure; or in more Muscles extended, and acting together, as when the whole hand is long held elevated, and extended. The motion of others Muscles, as extension and relaxation, are only by accident; from these motions depend the motions of the parts, which are not only distinguished by difference of place before, behind, upwards, downwards; but also by figure. Their Situation is either larger, and that right, and is called Exten●io; or Obliqne, Diversity. and that is either lateral, as the Abductor, and Adductor of the fingers; or with inversion, as the Pronatio, and Supinatio in the hand and Radius. Also the Muscles, by reason of their like motion, are called fellows, Or pairs; fellows are sometimes in divers & opposite places, & ●et perform the same actionas; the Muscles which bow the Arms: such Muscles as perform a contrary motion are called Antagonists, and so such as bow the Arm, are antagonists to those that extend it. Such as are fellows are alike▪ for the most Part▪ in Magnitude, Number, and strength; such as are antagonists differ according to the weight of the Part moved, or the vehemence of the action. The ducture of the Fibres, shows the manner of action in every Muscle; and by How it is known. them you may easily distinguish a right Muscle from a transverse, and Obliqne. The ducture of the Fibres is various also in the same Muscle, according to the diversity of its riseth or insertions; and therefore one Muscle performs divers actions, as the Tranpezium; for by the extremities of the Fibres, you may know the Head and Tendon. The Tendon is directly opposite to the Head. If the Muscle act but one action, or many; according to the variety of its originals, it obtains various Connexion's, to wit, Heads and Tendons. Chap. 11. Of a Tendon. A Tendon is the least Part of a Muscle, by which we bend and move the bones. It is thought to consist of a Nerve, and a Ligament mixed together; so as that a Tendon is not found, unless it be in that Part of the Muscle where it is affixed to the Parts moved. But a man's Eyes (if he will believe them) tells him, that they are from the first for Original. mation, and that they are the chiefest Part of the Muscle, and take their beginning where the Muscle gins, and are disseminated through its whole Body. if it be a Nervous Tendon in the beginning, such it is in the end; if it be like small strings at beginning, they are united to form the Tendon afterwards. Such Tendons those Muscles have which perform strong actions, in bowing and extending, and tonical motion; as in the superior and inferior Limbs, and in the back to uphold the Trunk of the body. The rest of the Muscles, as they are fibrous at the beginning, so they are at the end. The hard and stiff Tendons have much Fat about them to soften them, that they may the easier be moved; and therefore those Fibres dispersed amongst the Flesh, are nothing else but the Tendon divided, and the Tendon nothing else but the Fibres united; and therefore a Tendon is either compact and solid, or else divided into Fibres. Also Tendons are solid or plain, or Membranous or round, or short or long. If they are Nervous at the beginning of the Muscle, so they are at the end. Sometimes they are Nervous at the end of the Muscle, though the Head of it be Fleshy. The hardness of a Solid, long and Membranous Tendon, its thickness and Silver colour is excellent: So that Fallopius affirmed, nothing was more beautiful in the Body of man, than a Tendon, and the Crystalline Humour of the Eye. Wherefore a Tendon, seeing it is a Similary Part, is bred of Seed, and is of a peculiar substance, no where to be found out of a Muscle. It well deserves to be called the chiefest part of the Muscle, upon which the action of the Muscle depends; the other Parts work together with the Tendon in the same action. Chap. 12. Of the Muscles of the Belly. THe Flesh extended over the Belly, is Musculous, which being joined together, do make the Fleshy covering, which is Proper to it. They are divided into twelve Muscles, six on each side, which have names partly Number. from their Situation and rise, and partly from their Figure; of which Sort are Obliquus Descendens, Obliquus Ascendens, Rectus, Transversus, Pyramidalis, and Cremaster. Of these ten are ordained to compel the internal Parts, and some to move the Os Sacrum, and Ilium; the two Cremasters hold up the stones. Every one of them hath his proper Figure; the Obliqne ones, in regard of their Figure. Situation action and Fibres, are divided into ascending and descending; the ascending and Transverse, carry a plain Figure like a Membrane. Their largeness is as great as the Latitude and bigness of half the Belly, and yet Largeness. the descending Obliqne Muscle is larger than the Ascending, and the Ascending then the transverse: the length of the right Muscle, reacheth from the sword-like Cartilege to the Os Pubis. Although their Original be different, yet they all join so at the white line, that Original. The white line. they seem to be but one Muscle. The White Line passeth from the Sword-like Cartilege by the Navel, to the Os Pubis, and makes a difference between the Muscles. Although the Muscles of the Belly stick to divers parts, from which they are said Connexion. to arise, yet are they all inserted at the white line of the Belly; and at the Os Pubis, each of them receives peculiar Veins, Arteries, and Nervs. The action of the Belly, is common, or particular. That is common which all Action. Common. Particular. of them equally act, Namely, to compress the Belly on every Part; neither can they act asunder in this. The particular action is, when Muscles that are parrs act apart, viz. Ascending or descending Muscles; those compress the breast, these move the Os Pubis, Ilium, and Sacrum, being joined together, without any the least compression of the Abdomen; but these bones remain unmoved whilst the Abdomen is compressed. The use of the Muscles of the Abdomen, is whilst they lie still, to cover the internal Use. parts, and defend them from external injuries, to cherish and conserve the internal heat. Pass we now to a particular description of the Muscles of the Abdomen, then of the Muscles that move the Os Pubis, and Sacrum. Particular Description. Obliqne descending. The a T. 1. f. 2. G G. H H. I I □ Obliqne descending being situate Obliquely, by reason of its Fibres, Obliqne descending ariseth from the b T. 2. f. 2. G. H H. f. 8. a a. □ seven or eight inferior Ribs, by certain fleshy intersections or Fibres intertexed with the Fleshy Fibres of the Serratus Major, and sticking to the Os Ilium, and Pubis, it ends in a broad c T. 1. f. 2. I I I I. T. 2. f. 8. B B. □ Tendon in the white line, and together with its fellow, makes one individual Tendon. The Obliqne d T. 2. f. 8. B. □ Ascending, ariseth from the e T. 2. f. 8. c c c c. □ Os Pubis, and Ilium, and being Obliqne ascending. knit to the brims of all the bastard and true Ribs, even to the sword-like Cartilege, it ends in the f T. 2. f. 8. d d. □ white line die a broad Tendon. In this Muscle the late Anatomists observe a double Tendon embracing the right Muscle like a sheath; but the duplicity of the Tendon appears only above the Navel; for below, it is altogether inseparable. The right Muscle remains ᶠ fleshy from the Sternum, near the g T. 2. f. 8. e e. f. 9 B. □ Sword-like Cartilege, Right. and being extended along the longitude of the Belly, it is inserted with a Nervous end into the Os Pubis. In it you may observe three Nervous h T. 2. f. 9 c. □ Intersections which strengthen it, and Veins which run a long the longitude of it; and the i f. 9 c. □ Mammary descending, and the k f. 9 d d d d. □ Epigastrick ascending, meet about the l ●. 2. f. 9 d. □ middle of this Muscle. By this Anastomosis, Galen thought the consent of the Womb with the Dugs, was caused, and many modern Anatomists after him, which indeed is true. Upon the extremities of the right Muscles, lie two small Muscles, called m T. 2. f. 9 f. □ pyramidals, pyramidals. which sometimes are wanting, especial lie the right; but flesh makes up the defect. Their office is to compress the Bladder, and therefore they send their Tendons between the right Muscles, into that Part of the Peritoneum which includes the Bladder. And in the Child in the Womb, the n T. 2. f. 9 e. □ Vrachus is a production of the Pyramidal Tendons, which in Men of Age, makes but one string affixed to the bottom of the Bladder, and passing to the hole of the Navel, and remains still in such as are grown up. The o T. 2. f. 9 D D. □ transverse Muscle, arising from the p T. 8. f. 2. C. □ transverse Apophyses of the Vertebrae of Transverse. the loins, and being fixed to the Os Ilium, and the bastard Ribs, ends under the right Muscle, by a broad q f. 9 A. □ Tendon in the white line, and is strictly united with his fellow. Besides the Muscles which compress the Belly, near the Pubis, by the transversal Cremaster. Longitude of the groin, is the Muscle r f. 9 a a a. □ Cremaster, prepared for the holding up of the stones. It is distinguished from the flesh of the Obliqne ascending Muscle, because it hath red flesh, is thinner, and disjoined from it a singer's breadth; it is involved with the Peritoneum, even till it come to the Testicle, and makes the Tunicle called s ˢ f. 9 b. b. □ Erithrois. You shall perceive in the groin, the perforation of the Tendons of the Muscles of the Abdomen, that they may give passage 〈…〉 the Peritoneum, and the Cremasters: Seeing some of the Muscles of the Abdomen, conduce to the motion of the Os How the motion of the Os Ilinm and Sacrum is performed. Ilium, and Sacrum, I shall faithfully describe the motion of them, and the Muscles apppointed for that motion. These bones are closely joined by Symphysis, and lie above the Thigh-bones, and under the bones of the loins, for the procreation of man in the act of Copulation; in which action, the Thighs, and Backbone remaining immovable, only these bones move forewards, and backwards; the right and Obliqne descending Muscles move them forewards, the breast resting; or very lightly moving, and that by longer intervals; the Muscles, t b. f. 2. D D. □ Sacer, and v T. 14. f. 4. B B. f. 3. D D. f. 4. A A. Semispinatus, move them Backwards. And therefore sacred Scripture, constitutes the Seat of lust to be in the Loins, because by the motion of the Loins, the Reins wax hot, which provokes the Genitals to Ejaculation of Seed: Gen. 36. It is written, Kings shall come out of thy Loins; and Psal. 73. The Kingly Prophet complains, His loins were filled with delusions, that is, with lustful Concupiscence, as St. Jerom interprets it; and in Luke, Let your Loins be girded, that is, preserve your Chastity. The Medicinal Consideration. In the Muscles of the Belly, are often Inflammations, Imposthumes, and pains arising of wind; for according to Hypocrates, the pores of the flesh, and space between the Muscles, are filled with Blood and Spirit in such as are healthy; but with Wheyish substance, and wind in such as are Sick; and therefore Cramps happen in these Muscles, as is described by Sennertus Lib. 3. Part. 10. Chap. 8. Med Pract. And therefore these Muscles are sometimes troubled with a windy Spirit, arising from the Hypochondriacal Parts, being filled with Melancholy. Chap. 13. Of the Peritoneum. THe Museles of the Belly being taken away, the Peritoneum comes to view, which is a a T. 2. f. 9 g g. □ Membrane stretched out over all the Parts of the Bowels, or Guts; from which extension, it hath its Greek Name. Seeing it is spermatieal, Its temperature can be no other than cold and dry. Temperature. Substance. It's Substance is not simple, and uniform; but double, and unequal in thickness: for it is a double Membrane, joined in some places, and disjoined in other Some, to give passage to the Navel Vessels; and in the Hypogastrium, it is so doubled that it contains the Bladder and the Genitals, the Reins and ureters, the Vena Cava, and the great Artery, and the Seminal Vessels in its duobling. The inequality of the substance of it is observed in Women, to be thickest from the Navel to the Pubis, that in the conception it may be stretched as the Womb is. But in men it is thickest from the Navel to the Sword-like Cartilege, that in Gluttons it may stretch when their paunch is full. It takes its original from the first formation, unless, as some think, it take its original Original. from the Dura Mater, which as they produce the Pleura, so the Pleura should the Peritoneum; and so their should be a continuation of these Membranes throughout the Body, as their is of the Skin. It's Situation is immediately after the Muscles, and compasseth about all the Bowels Situation. of the Abdomen. It is the largest Membrane in the whole Body, and most capacious, and answers to Quantity. the inferior Ventricle both in Longitude and Latitude, It is double every where, because it consists of two Membranes; of which, ●●● internal is the shortest; not so much because it bestows a Membrans upon every Part of the Belly and produceth the Mesenterium; but b●cause it doth 〈…〉 accompany the external to the Testicles, but ends in the Cavi●●●● o● the Abdomen. The external passeth even to the Cod, and wraps the Testicles round and ●●●kes that tunicle called Erythrois, and in its progress makes a small Channel by when the Spermatick Vessels pass. The same production of the external tunicle, is observed in the groin of Women, and is deduced even to the c T. 7. f. 4. I I. K. f. 5. A. □ Clitoris, and the round and lower Ligament of the d T. 7. f. 2. S S. f. 4. F F. Womb. The Figure of the Peritoneum is Oval, and longish, by reason of the Belly, for Figure. of itself it hath no Figure at al. It's continuity is not pierced, it being an admirable piece of workmanship; for although Vessels pass into it, and out from it, yet all this is performed through the doubling of it, so that the internal Tunicle remains unpierced, which comprehends the Parts of the first Region, as the external doth the Parts of the second Region, which are placed within the Belly. The Colour of the Peritoneum is white, as the Colour of other Membranes i●. Color. Connexion. It is firmly knit to the Vertebrae of the loins, I mean the external Membrane, the internal hath no Connexion with them, but is disjoined to receive the Rein, and redoubled to make the Mesenterium; also it gives a covering to the Diaphragma, and the Liver, and produceth the Ligament which holds it, and depends upon the Sword-iike Cartilege. Besides the general communion it hath with the principal Parts, by Veins, Communion. Arteries, and Nerves; It hath a particular communion with all the Parts contained; to which it gives Membranes, either thick or thin; and therefore it may be called the Mother of all the Membranes in the Belly. It performs no action; but its use is great through out the Belly. Use. ᵇ T. 6. f. 2. C C. E E. □ The Medicinal Consideration. Let us now bring this contemplation of the Peritoneum, to a Physicaluse. By reason of its doubling, you shall perceive Serosus and sharp Choleric Humours ●o to get into those spaces, which make a bastard Colic, but have no foundation at all within the Guts, as a true Colic hath, but between the Peritoneum and the Guts; whence the Disease is bitter, and usually lasting: of which see Fernelius in his Pathology. Sometimes other Humours flowing from the Liver, or from the Reins, get within Colic. this Duplication, towards the Navel, or groin, or Os Sacrum, and there impostumate, unless they were turned into Quittor before they fell into this Part. Such Collical pains lie usually on the top of the Belly, and not deep; neither will they suffer the Belly to be handled never so gently. Sometimes they come up even to the Diaphragma, by reason of the continuation of the Peritoneum, and then the danger is the greater. Sometimes, by reason of those Productions of the Peritoneum which reach the Ruptures. Stones, Serosus Humours pass down to the Cod, and make a watery Rupture. You must diligently observe the production of the Peritoneum by the groin; which being dilated (for it is seldom broken) receiveth the Gut Ilium, or the Call, whence is bred that swelling in the Groin, called Entero-Cele, or that called Epiplocele; or when both the Gut and the Call do fall down, that other called Entero-Epiplo-Cele. Cham 14. The Division of the Parts of the Belly. THe Parts of the Paunch included within the Peritoneum, I thus divide. They Parts first. all pertain to the first Region, which are nourished by the branches of the Vena Porta; therefore the a T. 2. f. 10. E. □ Omentum, the Hollow b T. 4. f. 1. A. □ Part of the Liver, the c f. 1. C. □ Gall, d T. 2. f 10. C. □ Stomach, e T. 4. f. 1. ●. □ Spleen, f f. 1. E E. □ Sweetbread, g T. 3. f. 1. and 4. □ Bowels, h f. 1. A A. □ Mesenterium, and i T. 4. f. 1. F F. f. 6. A A. □ Vena Po●ta, and the k F. 5. K. □ Coeliacal Artery, make the First Region of the Body, contained within the Abdomen. The other Parts which are included within the doubling of the Peritoneum, are referred to the Second Region, which comprehends the l T. 5. f. 1. B C. □ Reins, Second. m f. 1. F F. G G. □ ureters, n f. 1. K. □ Bladder, o T. 6. tota. □ Genitals in Men; and the p t. 7. tota. □ Womb, with the Parts annexed, in Women. It is extended even to the upper Part of the Breast, and q T. 7. f. 1. II. f. 6. A A. F F. □ comprehends the Diaphragma, r f. 4. A A. □ Mediastinum, s t. 11. f. 2. B. f. 5. I. □ the Heart, and t f. 1. A. f. 2. A. □ Pericardium, v f. 1. B B. f. 2. K K. f. 7. F F. □ Lungs, x f. 7. E. f. 8. A B C. T. 13. f. 10. 9 □ Trachea Arteria, y T. 3. f. 2. E E. □ Oesophag●s, z T. 13. f. 14. A. □ Tongue, α T. 13. f. 9 10. □ Larinx, with the Trunks of the Vena Cava, and great Artery, even from the Throat to the groin, according to Fernelius: but I extend it farther, even to the Limbs; whither so ever the greater Channels of the Aorta or Cava, the β T. 12. f. 1. 4. B B. □ Axillars, and γ f. 1. 4. D D. □ Crurals pass. Chap. 15. Of the Navel. THe Navel from the birth, even to extreme Age, is a knotty a T. 8. f. 2. D. D. □ Coition of the What it is. four Navel b T. 8. f. 2. A B B C. □ Vessels; by which the Child is nourished in the Womb. That they should stick out on the outside of the Belly, is improfitable; therefore they are Cut off the c T. 9 f. 2. P. □ Child being born. The continuation of the Vessels within the Abdomen remains, which grows dry by degrees, being deprived of its ancient Office; and therefore it is to be considered u●der another Notion, in one that is grown up. We shall treat of the Umbilicar Vessels, as they are found in the Carcase of a man ●mbilicar Vessels. grown up; they are like Ligaments, included in the doubling of the Per●toneum; that which outwardly appears is the middle both of the Belly, and Body. The d T. 2. f. 8. G. T. 4. f. 1. α f. 6. a a. T. 8. f. 2. A. □ Umbilicar Vein passeth to the e T. 4. f. 5. C. □ cloven of the Liver, The Umbilicar f f. T. 8. f. 2. B B. f. 4. ε ●. □ A●teties are g T. 2. f. 10. □ two, and descend to the Iliack h f. 4. δδ. □ Arteries, Sometimes creeping along the sides of the Bladder to the i f. 4. ♀ ♀ vel. ζζ. □ Hypogastricks, between the Arteries lies the k T. 8. f. 2. C. T. 9 f. 2▪ O. □ Vrachus fixed to the sides of the Bladder, and this is the original and insertion of the Umbilical Vessels. The Vrachos is like a long and round Ligament, and its use is to hold up the Bladder. The Umbilicar Vein pulls the Liver forward, lest by its weight it should depress use. the Parts under it, The Umbilicar Artery upholds the l t. 2. f. 10. ●. I. Bladder that it fall not down, although it be included in the doubling of the Peritonum. The Medicinal Consideration. To reduce that is said to Medicinal use; this shows that the Cutting of the Navel Vein is dangerous, that the place of the Navel is very perspirable because it penetrates the containing Parts, Neither is there any thing▪ either within or without, that stops that passage, and therefore purging Medicines applied, to the Navel Purge, and sweet things applied to the Navel of Women penetrate to the Womb: The Water in Dropsies many times breaks out at the Navel▪ and the affects thereof are grievous, not so much by reason of the sensibility of the Part, but the sudden hu●ting of those Parts whose Office it is to nourish the whole Body. Therefore consider whether the Navel be the centre of the Belly or not, for otherwise, if the Parts below the Navel be longer than those above it, A multitude of Diseases are bred in the lower Part, because the Umbilicar Vein being shorter doth not sufficiently, pull back the Liver, which, by its weight, compresseth the Stomach and Parts under it. Chap. 16. Of the Omentum, or Call. BEfore you proceed to the Omentum or call you must view how it covers all the Parts of the Belly, than their Situation, which is of no small moment to the art of Physic. The a T. 2. f. 10. E. b c d. T. 3. f. 1. D D. □ Omentum, or Epiploon, or Cal, is a thin Membrane endued with much Number. Fat, neither is it single but double, and so disjoined in some places, that you may thrust your hand between, this you may see in that Part which is stretched out above the Guts, but about the Stomach and Spleen near the Diaphragma, the space is not so evident, but it hath certain hiding places as the Poet Lucan saith, which not appearing was a bad Omen. It was held to be an ill Omen also amongst the sooth saiers if it were not extended over the Guts. The portion of it which is subject to view, is Naturally stretched out even to the Situation. Navel, sometimes to the groin and Cod in Women between the Neck of the Womb and the Bladder, the greater portion is hidden in the left Hypocondrium. It may be divided into four Parts, the first is called b T. 2. f. 10. d d. □ Intestinal which is stretched out over the Guts; the Second c f. 10. b. □ Hepatical, which ariseth from the Cavity of the Liver, including the small Lobe of the Liver, and turns down to the deep Cavities thereof, the third is called d f. 10. c. □ Lienal, because it lies upon the Spleen, the fourth e T. 3. f. 1. T. 4. f. 1. Mesenterical, being a production of the Mesenterium to the external Parts, and Original. from it is its original to be fetched. The Medicinal Consideration. The Omentum hath its Diseases, both Similar, Organical, and Common, for Diseases. Similar. sometimes it is distempered and inflamed, and ye● but seldom, it is oftener troubled with Imposthumes or Aposthemes which you will, because it receives the filth of of the Liver and Spleen. Sometimes it's mightily increased with Phlegm gathered together, and grows to a huge bigness; neither is this swelling easily allayed either by internal, or external Medicines. If it be soft, Suppuration is to be sought, which seldom succeeds as i● should do, although you open the Part with a Caustic. Sometimes a dropsical Water is concluded in the Cavities of the Omentum▪ according Organical to the Judgement of Hypocrates, and this is worse than if it were within the Abdomen, because it is easier drunk up by the Meseraick Veins; or by the Spunginess of the Spleen, the passages being first opened, and those Parts stirred up to it by some convenient Medicine. The Omentum Falls down into the groin or Cod: and causeth those swell which are commonly called ●uptures: the Belly being wounded, the Omentum Common. breaks forth: and then a great portion of it may be tied with a string near the Belly and so cut of, because it soon putrisies, neither is it ●afe to put it back again. The first Concoction is made never the weaker by cuttings off Part of the Omentum, (though Galen thought otherwise) For the Concoction is made in the Stomach: and the Omentum doth not cover the Stomach, But is only knit to the bottom of it. Chap. 17. Of the Guts. THe Guts follow next according to the order of dissection, which are organical Use. Parts, hollow, appointed to carry the Chyle and to receive the Excrements. The thin Guts are appointed for the Chyle, the thick for the Excrements. Their substance is Membranous and full of strings, which may be divided into two Substance. Fl●shy. proper Membranes, of which, the a T. 2. f. b. R. □ Inner is Fleshy, the b f. 5. Q. □ outward Nervous. But the Inner is rugged, and as it were ●oulded that it may stay the Chyle in its wrinkles. that so the Mesaraick Veins may draw it the better, which like Horseleeches draw the thinner Part of the Chyle from the Guts. Besides the wrinkles, the Inside of the Guts is bedewed, And as it were descended Nervous. with a certa●●e Phlegmatic Slime, lest the Membrane should be hu●t by the passage of Choler. Besides these two proper Membranes there is a c T. 3. f. 5. P P. □ common one, added from the Peritoneum, Slimy. which it bestows upon a● the Parts it contains. The Guts are placed in the Abdomen and fill its whole Cavity without any confusion; Situation. the Hypochondria excepted; and are disposed in various turn by reason of the Connexion they have with the d f. 1. A A. □ Mesenterium. They are seven times as long as the Body, and something longer. Longitude. General Division. This Longitude is divided into e f. 4. ●rom B. to I. □ thin, and f f. 4. from 1. to ●. □ thick, not according to Situation, but in respect of the Membranes: The thin which is taken from the inferiore Orifice of the Stomach, is the first & supreme in order, it consists of thin Membranes, the thick, is the Inferior in order, But the superior and shorter in Situation, and more Capacious and hath thicker Membranes. Again, the thin is distinguished into three Parts, or three Guts; of which the first Special. is called g f. 4. F. □ Duodenum, the second h f. 4. G G. □ Jejunum, the third i f. 4. H H. □ Ilium. The thick Gut is also divided into so many Parts or Guts: The first k T. 2. f. 4. H H. □ Caecum: The second l f. 4. K. □ Colon. The third m f. 4. M. □ Rectum. All the Guts are hollow, that they may give passag to Chyle and Excrements. They Cavity. are ⁿ f. 6. R. □ ⁿ T. 3. f. 4. F. □ wrinkled round about within, all along their Longitude, even from the Stomach to the Fundament, that so they may stay the Chyle and Excrements of the first Conco●tion; but for expelling the Excrements, they have a kind of motion which presses downward by degrees. And thus much to wha● is common to all the Guts: It remains that we speak of them all severally. The first Gut is called o T. 4. f. 5. H H. □ Duodenum; because in length it is twelve Fingers 1. Duod●num. breadth. The finding of this Gut is hard, for towards the back bone it must be sought for under the Sweetbread with the beginning of the Jejunum; this position and Intertexture is diligently to be noted, because oftentimes the cause of obstructions & vomitings is without any failing of the Pylorus▪ but the choler flowing by the p f. 3. D D. □ Biliar Poor is hindered in his passage, and returning back into the Stomach causeth vomiting. In the very confines of the Duodenum and Jejunum, the passage of Choler Bi●iar Poor. pierceth the Gu●, and creeps downward a little way between the Membranes before i● pierceth the Inner Membrane, nee● which the q f. 3. C. f. 5. H H. □ Channel of the Sweetbread i● observed by Virs●ngus. Where the Guts begin to be turned toward the left side, their the r T. 3. f. 4. G G. □ Jejunum gins, 2. Jejunum. which is thought to be emptier than the Ilium, by reason of his nearness to the Liver, and its Multitude of Mesaraick Veins: It lies altogether in the umbilical Region, and is in length about a Cubit, and an half. The f. 3. E. □ Ilium follows, which is more slender, but in length surpasses all the rest 3. Ilium. of the Guts. It occupies the Ilium, and Hypogastrium, and compasseth about the Jejunum itself with its inferior Part. In this Gut is that Disease which is called the twisting of the Guts, and the Iliack passion. The fourth Gut in order, and the first of the thick Guts, is called f. 3. B B. □ Caecum by Thick Guts. 1. Caecum. Ancient Anatomists, and does retain this Name, although it is altogether unlike to the Ancient description of it. It is not large like a Sack, neither doth it perform the Office of a second Stomach to Concoct the Chyle, which was not perfected before: the Ingress and Egress, are by one hole. Now in its place, a Membranous Appendix is showed, which is larger in a Child new born, than in a man grown up: and thence Silvius took occasion to write, That many things were changed in ou● Bodies, both in regard of growth; and of the Guts, Duodenum and Caecum. The Gut v T. 3. f. 4. H H. □ Colon succeeds this; in which are many things worth our Consideration, 2. Colon. to wit, its Largeness, Situation, Use, S●utters▪ two Ligaments, Its fringes of Fa●, and its Connexion. Of all the Guts, none more large, and Capacious, than this. It gins at Largeness. the right Kidney near the x f. 4. I. □ Appendix; and being turned upwards, it lies under the Liver and Stomach, and passeth to the left Hypochondrium, where it is wreathed, and made ●arrower. In its Obliquation descending, it touches the left Kidney; and a little below, being Situation. bowed like a Roman S. it ends in the top of the Os Sacrum. In it, the Dung and filth of the Guts, is kept: as also the wind of the first Region. ●se. Lest it should be dilated too much by Multitude of Dung, and Violence of wind, Ligaments. Nature hath strengthened this Gut with two strong Ligaments; which being stretched along its Longitude, they make greater foldings, and wrinkles in this Gut, then in any other. Insomuch that they seem like Ce●s to retain the Dung and because it wants the bond of the Mesenterium, and consequently that Humour which proceeds from the Fat of it; Nature hath placed about it, here and there, Fat. certain fringes of Fat to Moisten it. That y f. 4. K K. □ Volve, or Shutter which Authors quarrel so much about, is not to be Shutter▪ s. passed by, being fastened to the beginning of the Colon, like a Membranous Circle, which hinders the flowing back of the Dung into the Ilium▪ and the ascending of a Glister to the same place. Therefore it opens towards the Inferior Parts; that it may let the Dung pass out, and hinder it from flowing back. It is knit to the Membrane of the Peritoneum, by a Membranous ●ye, whatsoever Connexion. Laurembergus wrote, accusing Riol●n●s of Ignorance▪ or dul-sightedness. The last of the Guts is called z f. 1. C C. □ right, because it passes strait from the top of the 3. Right Gut. O● Sacrum, to the Fundament. This Gut, contrary to the Nature of others, besides the Internal fleshy Membrane, hath also an external a f. 4. ●. fleshy Musculous covering, like a sheath; that so it may the more forceably expel the D●●g, which useth to clod in the extremity of the Colon, and right Gut. Therefore besides the compression of the Muscles of the Abdomen▪ and the Natural motion of the Colon, this same fleshy Sheath, crusheth the Dung; as it were with ones hand▪ that so it may pass out. The Medicinal Consideration. I pass now to the Diseases and Symptoms of the Guts. They suffer Diseases General Diseases of the Guts. boch Similar Organical and Common. For they are distempered by heat and cold, either with or without Humour. They are inflamed, wounded, Ulcerated, dried, bound, loosened, made smooth the wrinkles being taken away▪ as in fluxes and bloody fluxes. Sometimes they are so stopped that the Excrements are Vomited up. Besides these the common Diseases, the Guts severally considered, have their peculiar Peculiar Diseases. Of the Duodenum. Diseases. The Duodenum may be stopped by compression of the Sweetbread, and then the food is Vomited up again two or three hours after it is eaten; because the passage is stopped. The Ilium is subject to the Iliack passion, which is an Inflammation and not a Ilium. twisting of that Gut; Sometime it falls down into the groin, and sometimes into the Gods, which causeth Ruptures in those places. Sometimes the Peritoneum being loosed or broken near the Navel, the Disease called Jejunum. Omphalocele cometh, in which the Jejunum slips down. The Colon is subject to the Colic, which ariseth either through sharp Humours, Colon. or wind, or extreme cold Air. In it worms are bred, which sometimes creep up into the Stomach and are Vomited out; This Gut alone is subject to Ulcerations, which causeth Putrefaction: which many think, comes from the Mesenterium, and most unfortunately use purging Medicines and Glisters which increase the evil and no way help it: Because the extremity of the Colon which is joined to the right Gut is more fleshy, painful Impostums are bred there, which suppurate and are sooner cured than they would be, if they came from the Mesentery. Sometimes Melancholy hard swell are bred there which cause difficulty in going to the stool and hasten death. The right Gut hath its peculiar Diseases, Tenasmus, Inflammation, Impostumes, Right Gut●… which end in Ulcers and fistulas, which are difficult to be cured and require, the help of the Chirurgeon. The Peristalcick motion of the Guts is Sometimes so perverted, that the Dung flows upward, and Glisters are cast up at the Mouth. And so are suppositaries also, if you will believe some Practitioners, but then the shutter of the Colon must needs be broken. All the Symptoms of the Guts are to be referred to the Excrements when they are Symptoms. excessive, as in Fluxes, or deficient, as when men go not to stool unless they be provoked by Medicine, both which Symptoms impair the health. Fluxes are called Diarrhea, which is either Chylous or humoral: humoral is either Caeliacal, or Mesenterical, or Intestinal. When it comes with Ulceration▪ Paine and Blood, it is called a Bloody Flux. If it come without pain, and be like the Water in which raw flesh has been washed, it comes from the Liver, and is called Hepatica. If it come through smoothness of the Guts, It is called Lienteria: if it come with Quitter it is called Mesenterical. The causes of all these Diseases yea may find in all Practtioners, and therefore we will make no longer stay upon them. The internal Tunicle of the Guts Sometimes is severed & lost, which is thought to be turned into a long worm of two or three Cubits long, called Tania, of which you may read in Spigelius Lib. de Lumbrico lato. Chap. 18. Of the Mesenterium▪ THe a T. 3. f. 1. A A. T. 4. f. 1. H H. □ Mesenterium is the bond of the Guts, which keeps them in there places, ● What it is. that they pass not into confusion and be thereby deprived of there action and use. It is a double Membrane, between which, is Fat, and many b T. 3. f. 1. a a a a. □ Glandulae, or It's Structure. Kernels, and a fourfold kind of c f. 1. B B. □ Vessels. This is the structure of it. It is feared in the midst of the Belly, because it sticks to the transverse processes Situation▪ of the Vertebrae by Ligaments: thence is its original. It sticks so firmly to the d T. 9 f. 1. M M. □ Guts, that no division at all appears: between its two Vessels. Membraines, innumerable e T. 4. f. 1. a a a. T. 9 f. 1. c c c. □ Veins pass, which are called meseraick or Mesenterick. Also an infinite number of f f. 1. b b b b. □ Arteries from the Caeliacal Artery. Also it hath ᶠ Nerves from the Lumbals, or Nerves of the Loins. The fourth kind of Vessels, are called g f. 8. n n. □ Venae lacteae, by Aselbus, the first finder Vena Lactcae▪ of them out; of which we need not doubt, seeing it is now a common received truth. This one thing troubles many, Namely, the diversity of their distribution: For in a beast full fed, that is opened alive, these milky Veins are noted scattered about the Mesenterium; but some pass to the Sweetbread, others to the Liver, others to the Trunk of the Vena Cava, none of them to the Spleen; neither like other, veins are they gathered into one Head; they seem rather to have their Root, and Foundation in the Sweetbread, and from thence to be distributed this way, and that way. These Milky Veins being granted, all difficulties which were formerly about the Vs● distribution of Chyle and blood by the same Channel, cease. For the Milky Veins carry the Chyle to the Liver, and the Meseraick Veins carry back the Blood to the Nourishing of the Guts. Therefore both these Channels may be stopped severally; which is to be noted of a Physician, in curing of the Diseases of the Bowels. The Mesenterium, seeing it communicates with the Liver by the h t. 9 f. 1. a a a. b b b. □ Vena Porta; with the Spleen by the i T. 4. f. 1. F F. f. b. A A A. □ Caeliacal Arteries; and the Splenical k f. 5. K. etc. I I Vein; with the Guts by their Connexion's, and hath a fatty Glandulous substance fit to receive Humours, and to retain all the impurities of the first Region; Physicians well call it the Nurse of Diseases; for from that, as from a Fountain, do all the Diseases of the Bowels proceed: and all Physicians in prescribing Purges, and Remedies, have a special eye to that. The Medicinal Consideration. The Mesenterium labours under Diseases, both Simple, and Compound; it is Diseases of the Mesenterium. inflamed, and oftentimes uffers impostumes. It is Ulcerated, and by reason of its Vessels, often obstructed. By reason of his fatty and Glandulous substance, it often swells to a great hard swelling, and is the Foundation of all King's evil Swell; which seldom come in great Number, but the Foundation is here. It is subject to bastard colicks, which proceed of sharp Choler, and degenerate into Palsies in the inferior Limbs, and sometimes in the superior; and hence comes the Morbus Ructuosus, mentioned by Hypocrates, and Morbus Siccatorius. Of the Diseases of the Mesenterium, you may read Daniel Sennertus, and Matthews Martinius, who treats expressly of the Diseases thereof. Although the Mesaraick, and Milky Veins, which carry Chyle, are fastened to the Guts like Horseleeches, yet the matter is diversely drawn by those Channels, For the Liver draws Chyle by the Milky Veins from the Guts, but sends Blood by the Mesaraick Veins to the Guts; therefore both of them may be diversely obstructed. For the milky Veins may be obstructed either all along through the thickness of Chyle; or else in their Roots within the Liver. How the Milky Veins are affected. If the obstruction be in the whole passage all along, then there ariseth a Chylous Flux, either white, or tawny in Color. If in their Roots, either within, or near the Liver, the Chyle hath a light Tincture of Blood. If the Mesarick Veins be stopped within the Liver, the Liver cannot disburden it How the Meseraick. self of his Excrements, but they remain either in the Liver, or in the Mesaraick Veins, and make most terrible obstructions, by reason of the multitude of the Veins, both within, and without the Liver. The Milky Veins have no Trunk, but are separated when they enter the hollow Part of the Liver; and therefore they are not so easily obstructed. And therefore all Humoral Fluxes of the Belly flow from the Liver or from distempers of the Mesaraick Veins. Thick Fluxes proceed from the Milky Veins, by reason of corrupted Chyle. The Cure of both sort of Fluxes is the same, Namely, by such Medicines as cut, Cure. and purge out thick Humours: but in Liquid Fluxes of the Me●araick Veins, you must sometimes use strengthening Medicines, And sometimes bleeding and Vomiting is more proper for these Fluxes, than for those of the Milky Veins. Chap: 19 Of the Sweetbread, or Pancreas. THe a T. 4. f. 1. E E. □ Sweetbread is a body neither truly b f. 2. A A. f. 3. A A. □ fleshy, nor truly Glandulous, but Substance. in a middle between both: Yet it is very Syongy, that so it may receive the Excrements of the Spleen and Liver. It lies under the Stomach like a soft Cushion▪ and is stretched from the c f. 1. A. □ Liver to Situation. the d f. 1. D. □ Spleen; and if it have its Natural conformation, it is as broad as the Palm of the Hand. It receives the e T. 4. f. 1. F F. □ Trunk of the Vena Porta; the Milky Veins, and the f T. 9 f. 1. a a a. b b b. □ Splenical Vessels. Vein, passeth to the g f. 1. I. □ Spleen through its Cavity. Besides, Virsungus Discovered a new h f. 1. D. f. 3. E E. □ Channel in the Sweetbread, passing a A new Channel long the length of it; which is inferred into the i f. 3. B B. □ Jejunum, near the k f. 3. D D. passage of Cho●er: but for what end this was framed is yet uncertain, whether it be to cleanse the Excrements of the Sweetbread; or rather of the spleen, which are carried thither. So Fallopius found the Channels in the Sweetbread, no way to communicate It's Use. with the Veins, but that being filled with Choler, they empty themselves into the Bowels: o● whether rather, they carry a portion of Chyle to the Spleen, for a particular making of Blood: but if this Channel do not touch the Spleen, than this Office is void, and it must be to cleanse the Sweetbread of the Excrements it receives, either from the Liver or Spleen; o● to carry away the fi●th of the Chyle, which happily may remain there. It is observed, that this Part increaseth, when the Spleen decreaseth; so that it may well be called the Spleens deputy. There is the Seat of Hypochondriacal Melancholy, & it is the entertainer of many Diseases, as well as the ▪ Mesenterium▪ both of them breed Sicknesses to the Body, if they be filled with evil, and filthy Humours. Chap. 20. Of the Vena Porta. WIthin the Belly, are two notable Veins contained; both of them take Two Veins. Porta. their original from the Liver: The one is called a T. 4. f. 1. F F. □ Porta, which is subservient to the Places dedicated to nourishment, nether passeth it further. The and Cav●…▪ other is called b T. 5. f. 2. F. T. 12. f. 1. C. □ Cava, which nourisheth the whole Body, from the Crown of the Head to the sole of the Foot, and passeth out of the Peritoneum, and creeps along the Back and Loins, with the great c T. 5. f. 2. G. T. 12. f. 2. C. □ Artery: Some think it is produced from the Heart, and not from the Liver. The Vena Porta ariseth from the hollow. Part of the Liver, which it filleth, and is called the Gate of the Liver, or the Vein which is seated at the Gates of the Liver. The Trunk of the Vena Porta descending into the Belly, sends out a branch called Branches of the Vena Porta. Gastro Epiploon, which is distributed to the Stomach, and Omentum. The second d T. 4. f. 6. m. □ branch is called Intestinal, which is carried to the Duodenum: after that, Superior. it sends e f. 6. d d. □ two branches to the Gall, and the last f f. 6. B. □ branch it sends to the right side of the Stomach. These branches thus produced, the Trunk is divided into two famous branches; the g f. 6. g g. □ Splenical and h f. 6. C D. □ Mesenterical. This again, is divided into four branches, of Inferior. which, the greatest keeps the name Mesenterical: The second is called i f. 6. I I. □ Haemorrhoida, and passeth to the right Gut: The third is called C●calis, and passeth to the Gut Cae●um, or else to the beginning of the Colon: and the fourth passeth to, and nourisheth the remainder of the Colon. The splenical branch, when it hath passed through the Sweetbread, produceth four opposite Veins, above and below. The first is called k T. 4. f. 6. e e □ Gastrica Major, which ascends to the left side of the Stomach. Opposite to this is the right l f. 6. e. Epiploica, which is distributed to the Omentum. The Coronaria succeeds this, and is distributed to the Somach, and the left Epiploica, to the Omentum. Chap. 21. What is to be considered in the Vena Porta. MAny things come to be considered in the Vena Porta. 1. It makes the first Region of the Body, with those Parts which it nourisheth, and passeth with its Blood. 2. It contains a peculiar sort of blood, which is not circled, as the Blood of the Place. Vena Cava is; and yet it may with the branches of the Caeliacal Artery, have a Blood. have transflux, and transvasation. 3. That it carries only Blood, and not Chyle, which is done by the Milky Veins, as also the impurities of the Liver and Spleen, to the Mesenterium, Sweetbread, Office. and Guts. 4. That within the Liver, it hath either very small, or no Communion at all by its Roots, with the Roots of the Vena Cava; and therefore each Vein carries its Communion. peculiar Blood. The blood of the Vena Porta is thick, and nourisheth the parts of the first Region. The blood of the Vena Cava, is subtle, fit for circulation, which nourisheth the parts of the second, and third Region. 5. That the branches of the Vena Porta within the Liver, are larger than those of the Vena Cava, if that do arise from thence. Larg●…. 6. That in a Diseased body, it is usually filled with Caco-Chymia; which, whether it ought to be emptied by breathing a Vein, a man may well make a scruple, lest the Circulation of blood infect the whole Mass. 7. Whether the Vena Porta, after two or three Evacuations by the Arm, may not better be purged by the Hemorrhoids, or opening a Vein in one of the Evacuation. Feet? 8. That all impurities of the Belly, are contained in this Vein, from whence come terrible obstructions of the Spleen, and Mesenterium. Obstructions. 9 That there are no Shutters found in this Vein, as there are in the branches of the Vena Cava. 10. That the Vena Porta hath ways, whereby it disburdens itself, as the Veins of the Hemorrhoids: its reflux into the great Artery by the Caeliacal, and Vomiting of Blood against Nature, in Plethoric Bodies. Chap. 22. Of the Caeliacal Artery. THis is a branch of the great Artery descending, and accompanies the branches Original. of the VenaPorta: for look how many branches the Vena Porta is divided into, so many also, is the a T. 12. f. 2. p. q. r. □ Caeliacal Artery divided; which notwithstanding, hath Pulse from the heart, and follows the motion thereof, as other Arteries do: but seeing his blood enjoys not the benefit of circulation, as other Arteries do, so that it seems like a separated Artery, Sometimes his motion is hindered, when there Motion. is an Inflammation in the Abdomen; the rest of the Arteries gently moving, as is often observed in Hypocondriack Melancholy, and other inflammations of the Hypoc●ondrium. Notwithstanding it hath Communion with the Vena Porta by mutual conjunction Anastomosis. of their mouths; by which means there is a conflux of blood between them, whereby the vital Spirit of the Abdomen, is preserved. This Pulsation, or Palpitation, was known to Hypocrates, in Lib. 7. Epid. In that History of his, about the pulsation of the belly, near the Navel; and in his Prognostics he makes mention of the same; If the Veins about the Midrife ●eat, they foreshow either trouble of mind, or Madness. The Caeliacal Artery in Hypocrates Book of the Diseases of Women, is called, the breathing place of the inferior Belly: See Duretus in Coacis. Page, 183. The b f. 2. t. Splenical Artery, is notable; which is not brought by the Sweetbread, Doctrine of the Splenical Artery. but creeps along the Longitude of the Diaphragma, near the back bone: it is as big as the Splenical Vein, but Ambiguous in his progress, and gives no branches to the Parts near it. It is inserted into the Spleen by a double branch, as the Splenical Vein is; and therefore when the Caeliacal Artery is taken away, it is in vain to look for the Splenical; for there remains none, but two or three final Arteries, which pass to the Stomach. From the Splenical Artery, near the Spleen, pass two small Arteries to the Stomach. From this faithful and true relation, you may easily know how malignant Vapours are carried from the Spleen and Mesenterium, to the Heart; whence in Pla●tus, he complained, that he had a Splenitick Heart, it leapt, and beat his Breast. Chap. 23. Of the Stomach. THe Stomach is the Kitchen of the first Concoction; it consists of proper Membranes, Membranes of the Stomach. and one a T. 12. f. 2. t.▪ common, one which it receivs from the Peritoneum. The b T. 3. f. 4. C C.▪ internal is rugged, and hairy, like a piece of Silk: The c T. 3. f. 4. E.▪ External is fleshy, that it may receive the heat of the Bowels which lie upon it, to wit, of the Liver and Spleen which heat it. And that it may the more easily compress, and hold together the internal, it hath a threefold sort of strings, which strengthen it to that end; and also when it is slackened with store of Meat, they do contract it again, so soon as the digested Aliment is forced out of the Stomach. It's Situation. It is b T. 2. f. 10. C.▪ Scituate between the Liver, and the Spleen, as it were between two fires, bending a little towards the left Hypochondrium, if the Spleen hold its natural bigness; otherwise, when the Spleen is bigger than ordinary, it thrusts the Stomach Its Size. into the middle. The greatness of the Stomach cannot be exactly defined, because being empty, and exhaust, if strong, it is so contracted, that it is no bigger than a man's Fist. Being stretched and widened with store of Beily Chea●, it wi● contain six pints of Drink, with a Pound or two of Meat, as is daily seen in Gluttons, and Toss-Pots. There is but one Stomach in Mankind, which is sometimes divided according to Number. the Longitude into two Cavities; which have their Ingress and Egress, like the Stomachus, and Pylorus. And such persons do vomit with great difficulty; and when they do, they cast up Excrementitious Humours without that broth which they took the same moment. Shall we say the separating faculty can work so quick, or rather that the broth is slipped down into the Lower division of the Stomach from whence it cannot easily return, because of the narrowness of the upper Orifice. If the Stomach be single and rightly shaped, it is of a longish Spherical Figure, Figure. and is compared to the Belly of a Bagpipe, setting aside the Oesophagus and Guts. The Egress of the Stomach is equal in height unto its Ingress; that is to say, the Two Orifices. two Orifices thereof, are equal in height, lest the Meat and Drink should slip through, before they be digested; and then being digested by the strength of the Stomach Contracting itself, the Pylorus is opened, and the Chylus sent into the Gut. The Ingress, or upper a T. 3. f. 2. H. f. 4. A.▪ Orifice of the Stomach, is in a special manner termed The upper. Somachus, being the Seat of Hunger and Thirst, because it is crowned with two Nerves, called b f. 2. F G.▪ Stomachici Nervi; and is consequently of an Exquisite sense. The lower Orifice, is called c f. 2. K. f. 4. B.▪ Pylorus; in which you shall observe a Valve, The Lower▪ round in shape, and as visible and remarkable as the Valve in the Gut Colon. This Valve is to hinder the Chyle from returning back again into the Stomach. Besides these two Orifices in the Stomach, there is observable its d f. 2. III.▪ Bottom, or Its Bottom▪ Inferior Part, more fleshy than the rest; because therein the Meat is boiled or digested. The internal e f. 4. E. surface of the Stomach is wrinkled, and stored with fibres, that Inner Surface▪ it may thereby retain what is taken in for nourishment. The Action of the Stomach is the Coction of Aliments; which though they be Action. Digestion how Caused. many, and of divers kinds; yet the Stomach, by a propriety, or inbred faculty which it has, does dissolute and as it were melt them, and turn them into a substance like cream; which is 〈◊〉 Chylu●. How that is done, I have already examined in my Anthropographia; and in my Answer to Wallaeus, a very learned Physician of Leyden. The Stomach has Communion, by reason of neighbour hood, with the Liver, Communion with other parts. the Gall, the Spleen, the Sweetbread, the uppermost Guts, upper Part of the Mesentery; and also by the veins which it has from the Trunk of Vena Porta, and the Splenical Branch. It Communicates also with the Heart and Lungs, by the Stomachicat Nerves; of which some Part is Communicated to the Heart and Lungs: it Communicates also with the Brain, by the f T. 3. f. 2. F G. f. ●. III. □ Stomachical Nerves, which proceed from the sixth Conjugation. It does chief Sympathize with the Kidneys, when they are misaffected, either Great Sympathy with the Kidneys. by want of Appetite, or by frequent Vomiting, by reason of g T. 3. f. 8. ∨ □ a complication of the Costal and Stomachical Nerves, disposed between the two Kidneys. From whence are derived Nerves, that are dispersed into all Parts of the Belly. By reason of its Nervous substance, it has Communion with the whole Body; Communion with the whole Body. whence it is the in the Disease Cholera, the Ankles are contracted; & there is anxiety, and Unquietness of the whole Body, when the Stomach is disordered. The Medicinal Consideration. THe Stomach is afflicted with divers Diseases, Simi●ar, Organick, and Common. Stomaches Distemper. For it is troubled with a Simple, or Compound destemper, while it is over cooled, over heated, overdried, or overmoistned: of which, Galen discourses accurately, in the seventh of his Method. Also, it is Inflamed, Impostumated, and Ulcerated; and these three happen Inflammation. Apostumation. Ulcer. Incision of its Bottom. chiefly in the upper, or lower Orifices, because of their fleshyness: sometimes they may happen in the bottom, which is wounded, and healed, yea, and can bear incision, that any Iron, or other hard thing which hurts the Stomach may be taken out, when it cannot otherwise be voided, either upward or down ward: as we read in that story of a Prusian, who had swallowed a Knife. Hypocrates observed a burning Heat about the Stomach, in his Aphorisms: ●urning. which is dangerous, by reason of Choler shed between the Coats of the Stomach; or by reason of the neighbouring Parts burning, and Inflamed. Sometimes the Gall touches those Parts of the Stomach which are next it, and ●red by the Gall. scorches the same, as if it were burnt with a Fire brand red hot. It is also troubled with Diseases of Magnitude, Increased o● Diminished; Diseases in Situation, in Cavity, in Figure, and in Smoothness. The Magnitude of the Stomach, Augmented, and Widened, as in Gluttons, Distended. does over much stretch the Stomach, and loosen its Fibres. So that afterwards, it cannot be sufficiently contracted to embrace the Meat in such sort, as to turn the same into good Chylus: which is the Cause of crudity, and weakness in the Stomach. And when the Substance thereof is so streitghned, through dryness or Swelling of Straitened. the Membranes, that it cannot sufficiently widen itself to contain the Meat; then is it pained after Eating, though but a little Meat be taken. But the Stomach is more frequently Diseased by Dilatation, and Exolution, Widened and and slackened. or Flaggyness, and Slapness, both in persons otherwise in health, and such as are sick; while with Broths and plenty of cold drink the Tone or 〈◊〉 vigour of the Stomach, is so dissolved, that a looseness of the Belly is thereby caused: which is attributed to the Corruption of the Meat through an hot distemper of the Stomach; or to the Obstruction of the Mesaraick Veins: which Symptom, notwithstanding, is often Caused by the over great Laxity of the Stomach, which Fernelius calls Morbum Materiaea a Disease in the matter; and it must be Cured with strengthening and astringent things. This has been ●served in the opening of dead Bodies, where the Stomach is found so 〈◊〉, and so widened, that it would contain the Head of an Infant. And therefore it is very necessary for a Practitioner to observe the Diseases of the Matter, which are Cured with drying and astringent things, both given in, and applied outwardly. This was the Doctrine of that sect of Ancient Physicians, which were termed Methodici, who made Laxity, and Astriction, the Chief things observable in all Diseases. Sometime the Stomach changes its natural Situation, and is drawn back towards Changes po●●ure. the Midrife, which Causes shortness of Breath after Meals. Sometimes it hangs down as low as the Navel, as has been observed in Bodies dissected, which makes a bad life, and a bad Concoction. It is obstructed when its upper, or lower Orifice, is troubled with some swelling, Obstructed. which hinders the coming in of Nutriment into the stomach, and its going out after digestion. It is also Diseased with Smoothness, when the Inner Surface, which naturally Made smooth. should be wrinkled, is become smooth, which Causes that symptom which is termed Lienteria, which is, when there is such looseness of the Belly, that the Meat comes away unchanged, just as it was Eaten. Divers Symptoms infest the Stomach in respect of its Action being hurt, and in regard of the disorder of such things as are Evacuated therefrom. The A●tion of Action Hurt. the Stomach is, Appetite, Concoction and Chylification. The Appetite is hurt, when it is Abolished, Diminished, or Depraved. It is Abolished, when there is no Stomach or Appetite, or when Meat is loathed, especially flesh, which is the Want of Appetite. worst. Appetite is often Diminished in Diseases, which is not so bad. But the Depravation of Appetite is worse. Now it is depraved, when there is a Doglike Appetite which cannot be satisfied; Dog appetite. A●surd long. or when evil things are desired; which kind of depraved Appetite, Pliny terms Malacia; and Galen, cally it Citta; in Latin Pica, the Mag-p●e Chylification Abolished, or Diminished, is called, Apepsia, Inconcoction; and Undigestion. S●ow digestion. Ill digestion. by vulgar Physicians, Corruptio Chyli, a corruption of the Chyle. When Meat is long in digestion, 'tis called Bradu●epsia, slow Digestion. When the Meat is corrupted, it's called Dysp●psia, ill digestion. To Action hurt, belong the Feeling, Motion, and Pain of the Stomach. There is feeling in the whole Stomach, but it is exquisite in the upper Orifice, by reason of certain Nerves of the Six Pare, which are there interwoven with admirable workmanship. Feeling, is Abolished, and Diminished, when there is need of hungering and Re●●sing Meat. thirsting, and yet the Stomach perceives it not, but refuses both Meat and drink. This proceeds from a great distemper of Heat, or Cold; which causes Mortification, unless the Patient be distracted. The sense of feeling is depraved in the Pain of the whole Stomach, or of the upper Heartburning Orifice thereof, which draws the Heart and noble Parts to Sympathize therewith: wherefore this pain of the Stomach, is called Cardiogmos, Cardialgia and the aching of the Heart, or Heartburning; and causes that kind of swooning, which is called Syncope Stomachica, the Stomach swooning; and comes through the Hearts Sympathising with the Stomach. And to this Pain of the Stomach, belongs Anxiety, and Unquiet tumblings and Anxiety. tossing; which the Greeks' term Riptasm●s, or Ass; from whence the Fever Assodes, has its Name; in which the Sick are full of unquietness, The motion of the Stomach, is Relaxation, Coarctation; By the Want of Contraction upon the Meat H●ccuping. Belching. latter, it shuts itself upon the Meat to digest the same, and when that motion fails, there is nothing but ●●uctuations, and rise, both when a man is full and fasting. The motion of the Stomach is depraved in Hiccupings, and Bel●hings. Hiccuping is more trouble some then Belching, and is an i'll sign in fevers, whether it come by fault of the Stomach itself, or by its Sympathising with some other Part, especially the Li●er. Hypocrates mentions a Disease called Morbus Ru●●uosus, the Belching Disease. Disorders in point of Excretion are frequent in the Stomach; either upwards, in Symptoms in excretion a●e. Vomitings, and Spawling; or downwards, in the Lienteria, Diarr●●a, and Coel●a●a Affectio. Vomiting happens, either by reason of obstruction of the upper, or of the lower Vomiting. Orifice; if the upper be obstructed, the Meat is stopped in the upper Orifice a while, and presently after Vomited: if the fault be in the lower, the Meat is retained a longer time, and at last Vomited up. A daily Vomiting up of Choler, without further trouble, is no Disease, nor ill Of Choler. Symptom; because it happens by reason that a branch of the Choler carrying Vessel, is carried into the Stomach; as Galen observes and proves by examples. Vomiting of Blood is an evil Symptom, whether the Blood flow from the Liver, Of Blood. by the Veins which are branched from the porta, into the Stomach; or from the Spleen by the h Ta●. 4. Fig. 8. let. h. □ Vas Breve. Sometime the Patient's life is Vomited up this ways, according to that expression of a Poet. O●t of his Mouth, he sperves his Purple Soul. The frequent breaking up of wind with Belching, may be reduced to this Symptom Of wind. of Vomiting; and this may be that which is termed Cholera Sicca, known to Hypocrates, and declared with its signs, by Ludovicus Dure●us in his Comment upon the Coick Predictions of Hypocrates. But there is a Malignant Symptom, called Cholera humida, Of Choler up and down. which is a violent, and plentiful voiding of Choler upwards and downwards, which kills within four days; becauses very much Evacuation suddenly caused, is dangerous. H. p. 1. Book of Aphorisms; and all excess is an Enemy to Nature, according to the same Hypocrates. It proceeds from an Inflammation of the Stomach, which is allayed by cooling and astringent Remedies, inwardly taken, and outwardly applied, but especially by the drinking of the spa Waters, and other Medicinal springs of the like Nature; and by Laudanum discreetly given. We must avoid the use of cordial, and Stomach Powders of an hot Nature, because they vex and fret the Stomach. The Physicians of Paris do let Blood, in a small Quantity, though the pulse be very weak, lest the Stomach Heat being suffocated, a Gangraene should arise. Spawling, or Salivation, unless it be caused by anointing the Body with Quicksilver 2. Spawling. (which they call Fluxing) comes either from the Brain, or else (and that oftentimes) from the Spleen, whose superfluous serosity is received into the Stomach and voided at the Mouth by spitting and spawling. The Cardiacus Morbus belongs to the Diseases of the Stomach; of which, read Morbus Cardiacus. Trallianus Lib. 3. Chap. 5. 25. And Mercurialis in Varjis Lectionibus. 'twas knowingly said of Seneca in his 15 Epistle; Bibere et sudare Vita Cardiaci est; drinking and sweeting, is the Life of a Cardiacal Person. Pliny, in his 23. Book, Cap. 1. of his Natural History, says, that all Hope of Curing this Disease consists in the use of wine. Which he borrows from Varro, out of the 14. Chap. of the 13. Book. This Morbus Cardiacus, is an extreme Faintness of the Stomach, joined with much sweeting: it proceeds from an hot Distemper thereof. Among Diseases of the Stomach Rumination ought to be reckoned, which is an Rumination. inversion or turning of the Stomach, as it were Inside out, which in some Living Creatures is no trouble, as in those that chew the ●ud. Of this Disease see what Horstius says in his Epistles. Out of this Anatomical and Pathological Discourse may be collected, what parts Vomits warily to be used. are purged through the Stomach by way of Vomit: whether it be safe to exagitate this Part by Violent Vomits: whether it be good to use a man's self to this kind of Evacuation; seeing no good Housewife makes a closestool of her Pottage-Pot. The best way is, diligently to preserve the Stomach▪ and to Roborate ●s Tone or contractive Vigour, rather than to dissolve and s●●cken the same by Vomiting, unless Nature desire to di burden herself that way, and the patiented be easy to vomit, and such preparatives be premised as the Ancients were wont to use. Wherefore they deal unskilfully, not to say wickedly, who after many other Vomits not to be given to persons very weak. Medicines tried, do give vomits to such as are at Death's door, as the last help, which suffocate that little life which remains, and bring a speedy death. But some will say that Empirics and Mountebancks, do this with good success. I answer, if you should reckon up those patients who have taken them to their cost, you would find an hundred dead, for two robustions persons saved; who scaped by their good fortune, not by help of the vomiting Medicament: it is better to use vomits rather at the beginnings of Diseases, while Choler works and ferments in places near the Stomach, than when the Pangs of Death have seized upon the Patient. 'Tis Man slaughter, to wrong People in their health. The discreeter sort of Empirics, when they are called to such Patients, are wont to find fault with what other Physicians have acted, and to declare the Patient dangerously sick, and there upon, warily to give their Aurum Potabile or some such other. Medicine as a cordial and restorer of strength, until Nature being freed from all disturbance of Physic, gins to gather strength: and then they take opportunity to give a gentle Vomit which Purges serous, or such like Excrements, up and down. In very many Diseases, Hypocrates says, 'tis better to be quiet, than to do any thing; that is, 'tis better to leave the work to Nature, than to give any Medicament. And if the Physician knew that he is the Servant and Assistant of Nature, he would cure more Patients than he does. See Valesius upon the 19 Text of Sect. 2. of the 6. Book of Hypocrates epidemics. Sluggishness of the Belly, and impurity of the Vessels, brings all into confusion. Hypocrates. Chap. 24. Of the Liver. THe Liver, which is the Instrument of making Blood, consists of a Substance Substance of the Liver. It's Color. proper to itself, fitted, and ordained to that end; for it is like congealed blood, and therefore red, and the same colour it imprints upon the blood; howbeit the Liver of some Fishes, is of another Colour, viz. green, black, yellow as Saffron; in which Creatures, the blood receives its red colour by passing through the substance of the Heart. But in Men, and other living Creatures, which have the two Veins distinct, called Blood, where, and how made. Porta, and Cava, the whole Mass of blood is wrought in the Liver; but one part thereof, less perfect than the rest, is by the Vena Porta distributed among those Parts which serve to nourish the Body; another part being conveyed by the Vena Cava, is perfected in the Heart, of which is made the Arterial blood, which is distributed to all the parts, and afterwards is transmitted into the Veins, that so in a Circular motion, it may pass again into the Heart, that by its flux, it may maintain the perpetual motion of the Heart; as the Wheels of a Mil, are continually turned about by force of the Wind, or Waterfal. Such blood is furnished to those parts, which having sense and motion, depend upon the Brain or Heart. The Liver is a T. a. f. 10. 1. D. T. 4. f. 1. A B. □ situate in the right Hypochondrium, under the bastard, or short Situation of the Liver. Bigness. Ribs, and fills with its bulk, all that Cavity to the Sword-like Cartilege. Sometimes it is so enlarged, as to exceed those Natural Bounds, and then it rests upon the Stomach, reaching as far as the Spleen, and descends three or four finger's breadth below the bastard, or short Ribs: which happens, partly through relaxation of the bands wherewith it is bound to the Midrif, and short Ribs, partly through swelling of the Liver itself, over loaded with Nutriment. In Mankind, there is one single Liver, which is not divided into Lobes, or Fingers, Number. as in bruit Beasts; yet there is a certain b T. 4. f. 5. C. □ Cleft to be seen, where the Umbilical c f. 1. a. f. 5. B. T. 2. f. 10. G. □ Vein creeps into the Liver; and many times two little Lobes, or Laps, are d T. 4. f. 4. A A. □ seated Lobes, or laps. under the greater ones: sometimes there is only e f. 5. B. □ one, which being hollowed, receives the Trunk of Vena f f. 5. I. □ Porta, which is included in a Duplication of the Omentum, or Call, that the Excrements of the Liver might be derived thither. Although the Liver be one continued Substance, yet Anatomists divide the same Two Regions of the Liver. into two Regions; the one superior, and exterior; the other inferior, and internal. The superior, or upper, is called the g f. 1. B. f. 4. A A. □ Gibbous, or bunching part of the Liver: the inferior is called the h f. 1. A. f. A A. □ hollow part of the Liver. Into the upper Region, the Vena Its Vessels. i f. 4. D D. □ Cava sprinkles its Roots: into the nether Region, the Vena k f. 5. I. etc. □ Porta sows abroad its Suckers. Besides these Roots, there are observable, certain Branches of the Channel of Choler, dispersed among the Roots of Vena Porta; and certain little twigs of the Milky Veins, which near the Trunk of Porta, do enter into the Cavity of the Liver. ᵐ T. 9 f. 1. a a a a. □ ˡ f. 15. H. □ It is the mind of Physicians, that both these Regions ought diligently to be observed, Diversity of the Regions, to be observed in practice. because in either of these Regions, the morbific matter may be contained, which is diversely to be purged, according as it possesses the one or other Region: for as much as the bunching part of the Liver, is purged by the Kidneys, through the Vena Cava, the hollow part is purged by the Guts, by means of the Branches of Porta, which are terminated in the Guts, conveying blood, and the evil humours of the Liver. I have seen Impostumes in the bunching part, when the hollow part has not been at all tainted: and on the other side, I have seen the hollow part impostumated, without any detriment to the bunching part. Howbeit, inasmuch as I cannot see those two Regions separated so much as by a Membrane; I cannot believe that one part can be sick, and the other sound, unless the morbific humour be contained within the Pipes of the little Veins. Many Anatomists do affirm, that the Roots of Vena Cava, and Vena Porta, do Whether the Roots of Cava and Po●●●, are united in the liver. meet together, and are united one unto another by many anastomosis: others deny that there is any such Conjunction; among which, I willingly acknowledge myself for one, and give my voice on their side: my Reasons I have elsewhere laid down, and Nature would have it so, that natural, and vicious Humours might not be confusedly jumbled together in the Liver. You shall observe, how the Vein which is taken for Cava, takes its rise out of How blood is distributed from the Liver the upper part of the Liver, and is inserted into the Trunk of Cava, near the midrif, that the Cava may forth with power out the blood which it hath received from the Liver, or rather transmit the same into the neighbouring Heart, situate only two or three fingers breadths off, and enclosed in the Pericardium, which cleaveth circularly to the Nervous Centre of the Diaphragma: whereby thou mayest perceive, that the greater part of the blood, goes into the right Ventricle of the Heart, that it may become Arterial, by a double Circulation, Particular, and General. A double Circulation of the blood. I call that the particular Circulation, which is made from the right Ventricle of the Heart through the midst of the Lungs, so as that the blood comes again into the left Ventricle of the Heart. The general Circulation, is that which is made through the Channels, or large Pipes of the Cava, and the Aorta, after that manner which is described in my Treatise of the Circulation of the Blood. The Medicinal Consideration. The Liver being affected contrary to Nature, is subject to any distemper, either Diseases of the liver in respect of Temper. substance▪ Situation. with, or without matter; and instead of good blood, it breeds that which is Choleric, Phlegmatic, or Melanchollick. It is altered, and corrupted in its substance, whiles it loses its Tone, and becomes flaggy, and faint. It changes its Situation, when it is placed in the left side, and the Spleen on the right, which seldom happens: or when upon the slackening of those Ligaments wherewith it is fastened to the Midrif, and Sword-like Cartilege, it sinks below the short Ribs, as far as to the Navel. It's Magnitude is changed, when it is so overcharged with Humours that it swells Magnitude. again. It's Figure, or Shape, is also changed, if we feel it to be round. Oftentimes its Shape. passages are stopped, namely, the Roots of the Cava, and Porta; or the Roots of the Gallbladder are stopped, though the other be open. It has communion in regard of Neighbourhood, with many parts which it touches, Communion with other parts: but especially with the Stomach, which it often harms, being inflamed, or impostumated: and sometimes it exulcerates the same, and makes an hole therein, to empty its self that way of its Quittor. With its hollow part, it touches the Guts, which are offended in Diseases of the Liver; and also the Peritoneum itself, by reason of the Coat which it imparts, and the Midrif, by reason of ●…m Connexion they have with the Liver, are drawn to sympathise in its Disea●…. The Action of the Liver, which is Sanguification, or Blood making, is here by Action. the forerecited Diseases: whereupon divers Diseases, and divers Pains do arise. Wherefore the Similary Diseases of the Liver are all Distempers, and the Laxity It's Similar Diseases. thereof, from which some are termed Hepatici, who having a looseness do void Excrementitious Blood, like the Water in which Raw flesh has been washed, or Excrementitious Humours of bad and divers Colours. It's Organic Disease is obstruction. It's Disease common to the Similar and It's Organic, Common and Compound Diseases. Organic Parts, is an Ulcer and a wound. It's Compound Disease is all sort of Tumours, whence comes the Term of Inflammation of the Liver. also a scirrhus and a purulent Impostum, which is frequent enough. Its Symptoms are, Action hurt, and that manifold: and first of all, its attraction Its Symptoms. of Chyle being abolished, breeds a looseness of the Belly, in which Chyle is voided. It's Retention abolished, breeds the Liver looseness called Diarrhaea Hepatica. But the Principal Action of the Liver, viz. Sanguification or Bloodboiling is abolished in the Dropsy, is diminished in Atrophia, and is depraved in Cachexia. The Dropsy is defined to be, a frustration of Sanguification in the Liver, when Dropsy. in stead of blood or natural spirit, it produces nothing but Water and Wind, which are emptied forth into the Belly, whence come the Ascites and Tympanites, that is the Bottle-bellied, and the Drum-bellyed Dropsy; or else they are conveyed into the Habit of the body, whence comes the Dropsy Anasarca and Empneumatosis, viz. The Bloat-faced, Puf-cheeked Dropsy. Sometimes a Dropsy is caused through fault of the Spleen and other Parts, but not without the Liver be hurt, and likewise the heart, by means of the Circulation of the blood. Atrophia (or falling away of flesh) is an hindrance of the body's nourishment, Atrophy. by reason of the badness of the blood which the Liver Makes. Cachexia is a depraved kind of Nourishment, by reason of bad Sanguification. Cachexy. Before these, is wont to march a simple accident, viz. Badness of Colour in the Skin, either bluish white, or Yellow, by reason of Serosity or Choler shed into the Habit of the whole Body, even as far as the face, by which we discern the evil dispositions of the Liver. Chap. 25. Of the Bladder of Gall. NOw follows the Folliculus Fellis, or Cystis Billiaria, the Bladder which It's Name. is ordained to contain that Excrementitious Choler which flows from the Liver. It's substance is Membranous, being distinguished into two Coats. Substance. Situation. It is placed under a T. 4. f. 1. C. f. 5. F. □ the Liver, & affixed to the greater Lobe or lap thereof, and as it were, overwhelmed therein. The bottom of the Gal Bladder respects the inferior Parts, Its Neck, the superior Bottom. Neck. Sinus. parts, and a pipe derived from the Gallbladder called Canalis Cysticus, is carried obliquely till it meet the Canalis Hepaticus. There is a Sinus, or bending near the Orifice of the Bladder, Its Magnitude varies according to the plenty or Scarcity of Choler, It is only one. Bigness. Number. It has been found sometime double, but that was contrary to the intention of nature. It's divided into the bottom, which is the lower Part, and into the Neck which is the upper Part. It has an oblong shape resembling a large Pear, broad at the bottom and straitter Shape. towards the Neck. It is hollow that it may receiwe Choler, and retain it till a convenient time of Passages of Choler. emptying the same: is has certain pipes or Channels to carry Choler: the one b f. 5. H H. f. 3. c. □ broader and longer, drawn out from the Liver to the beginnigng of the c f. 3. D. □ Intestinum Jejunum, that is the Hungry Gut, or Gut termed Jejunum, by which the thicker Meatus Hepaticus. Choler passes directly away; the other Pipe is d T. 4. f. 8. b. □ smaller and shorter, which is drawn Cross-ways, from the Neck of the bladder, to the foresaid passage. The former I call Meatum Hepaticum, the Liver Channel; the latter I call Cysticum Meatum, the Bladder passage, by reason of its Rise and Orifice. For the Meatus Cysticus carries the thinner Choler into the Meatus Hepaticus, which a porous Meatus Cysticus. Membrane, full of little holes, rooted in the Liver had sucked therefrom. And therefore we must observe, that there are two sorts of Choler in the Liver, Two sorts of Choler ●in the Liver. Communion. and two Channels to Purge them away at divers times; which is a Consideration of great moment in the Cure of Diseases. The Gall Bladder communicates with the Stomach by touching the same, which it heats so, as sometimes to burn the same, when the Gall Is inflamed in its Bladder. Sometimes it sticks to the Gut Colon which passes along hard by, which it often Colers Yellow, and provokes it to expel the Excrements. This expurgation of Choler, being liable to be stopped, does vex the body with many Inconveniences. There is seldom observed a third channel of Choler, which goes into the Stomach, unless some Part creep from the Meatus Hepaticus unto the Pylorus. It has manifest Veins from the Porta called Venae Cysticae. Its Arteries and Its Vessels. Nerves are not so visible. The Medicinal Consideration. THe Gallbladder is subject to few Diseases. The most common are, when its Diseases of the Gallbladder. Cavity or its Channels are obstructed. When its Cavity is full of little stones, or filled with one great one, by reason of thick Choler changed into a stony substance. Its passages are stopped in the Liver, or in the Gut. Also it is broken, through violeut motion in Vomiting; and sometime it is so distended with Choler, when the passages are stopped that should Evacuate the same, that it has been seen as big as both a Man's Fists. Sometimes, when it is empty of choler, it dries up, so that nothing therefore remains saving the ductus Hepaticus. If we believe Fernelius, there could be no other 'Cause found of the death of some persons, than that their Gallbladder had no Choler in it: if so, the evil and venomous Quality of the suppressed Choler was so great, as to infect the heart, or to weaken and corrupt some noble part. The Symptoms of this Part are more manifest; which do consist in its action Its Symptoms. hurt, or in the undue proportion or quantity of the Excrementitious Choler. The Action of the Gallbladder is attraction of Choler, which is either diminished, or abolished. The undue proportions or quantity of the Choler is, when either too little or too much is voided forth. Which Symptoms chiefly appear in those Parts which Sympathize with the Gallbladder, Their Signs. as in the Stomach, when Choler is vomited up; in the whole body, when Choler is shed abroad through the Veins into the habit of the Body, and deforms the Skin; or when it takes its Course into the Guts and causes a dysentery, or a Choleric looseness. But the original of these Symptoms is to be charged upon the Liver, being il disposed. Their Original. And Democritus had good Reason to search diligently into the seat and Nature of Choler, when he made dissection of divers living Creatures, that he might be more able rightly to cure the Diseases of Body and mind. When I see in an extreme Yellow Jaundice, the whole Skin infected with Choler, & Diversity of Choler proved. that the Urins die clothes Yellow, the stools being in the mean time whitish; And when I see in another sort of Jaundice, both the Urins and stools Yellow; This confirms to me, that there are two sorts of Choler, and several ways for the expurnation of each of them. In the Yellowest sort of Jaundice, in which the stools are By the different sorts of Jaundice. whiteish, the Meatus Hepaticus or Liver passage of Choler is stopped in the Cavity of the Liver. In the other sort of Jaundice when the stools are Yellow, it shows that a quantity of Choler passes away by the Urins and Guts, and the obstruction is not so great nor so stubborn, as in the Yellowist sort of Jaundice, and therefore it is to be hoped the Cure will be more speedy. Chap. 26. Of the Spleen. THe Spleen is a Bowel placed right against the Liver, as its Lieutenant, and a The Spleen described. kind of Bastard-Liver, that when the Liver is Diseased, it may assist the same in Sanguification or blood making. It is of a a T. 4. f. 7. C. □ Substance spongy, soft, sprinkled all over with very many Vessels like It's Substance▪ Fibres or threads; yet it is altogether unlike the substance of the Liver. It is enfolded in a Membrane b f. 7. B B. □ proper to itself, seeing it receives none from the Peritoneum. It's Color is Black and Blue and obscurely Reddish. Color. Greatness. It's greatness is uncertain and not determinable, because it grows greater or less, according to the abundance, or defect of Humours which flow thither, & are collected therein. So that there is none of the Bowels which does so easily grow bigger and lesser, as the Spleen. In respect of Number, it is wont to Be single; Sometimes it has been observed to Number. be double and threefold. Consider in the Spleen its upper Part, which is termed the Head, and its nether Parts. Part which is called the Tail. 'tis a T. 4. f. 1. D. □ placed in the left Hypochondrium, under the short Ribs, opposed as it Situation. were to weigh against the Liver, that the Body might remain equally balanced. When it keeps its Natural Constitution, its Temper is hot and moist inclining to Temper. dryness. It is of an oblong shape, like a Tongue, in Brutes; but in Mankind, it is more Shape. like the Sole of a Man's Foot. In the fore Part towards the Stomach, it is b T. 4. f. 8. A A A. □ hollowed, that it might receive the c T. 4. f. 1. I. I. f. 8 B. and C. □ splenical Veins and Arteries, on the back part towards the Ribs, its d T. 4. f. 7. A. □ bunching. It's knit into the Stomach by two or three Veins remarkable enough, which do Connexion. make that so famous e T. 4. f. 6. h. □ Vas Breve, so called by reason of the shortness of the way. Through those Veins it disburthens itself into the Stomach: by the Veins and Arteries Splenical, it Purges itself into the Guts and Kidneys. Ii's fastened to the bastard Ribs by Membranous Fibres sufficiently strong: sometimes it's fastened to the Stomach, and is knit at its point to the Midrif or Diaphragma. It Communicates with the Heart, by a remarkable peculiar and admirable Artery which it hath, which by a short way carries thither, the Vapours or ●l Juices thereof. The Action of the Spleen is much doubled and controverted among Physicians Action controverted, divers Opinions thereof. and Anatomists: so Many Men, so Many Minds: Hypocrates did believe that it drew superfluous serosity out of the Stomach: which Opinion Aristotle followed, though others draw it to an attraction of Chyle, either out of the Pancreas and Mesentery, or out of the Stomach. Galen will have it employed in Purging away Melancholy, which it draws from the Liver. Others are of Opinion that it prepares Blood for the Heart that it may become Arterial, whether it be of the thicker parts of the Chyle, or of the dregs of the Blood carried thither. Others say it prepares a superfluous wheyish matter, being the excrement of its own digestion, which it sends back again into the Stomach, to ferment the Meats when they are turned into Chyle. The Arabian Physicians acknowledge such an Humour, but they assign its office to be the provoking of Appetite. Galen thought that it did help to strengthen the Stomach. In so great dissent of Authors what shall we resolve upon? every one brings probable reasons for his Opinion. Hofmannus conceives he has so sufficiently establshed his Opinion, that no wise man can contradict him. Shall I venture my Opinion among so many learned Champions? I conceive that the Spleen does attract slimy Blood to nourish itself, and that The Author's Opinion. it sheds a special kind of fermentative Serosity through the Splenick Arteries into the Stomach; and because its Parenchyma or substance is of a Spongy and soaking Nature, it does by the Veins attract and suck out the superfluous humidity of the Stomach, that the Coction may be the better. Howbeit, I deny not but that it may by Accident supply the Office of the Liver, when the same hath lost its faculty of Sanguification; but Blood cannot be made so good and perfect in the Spleen as in the Liver, seeing it is but a bastard Liver, and consequently makes but bastard Blood and impure, because not Clarified. Hoffman makes himself Ridiculous, while he eagerly contends in a little Book Hofman's Opinion of the Spleens Sanguification examied. which he has put forth, and up and down in his other writings, that the muddy part of the Chylus, is carried by the Mesaraick Arteries unto the Spleen; where it is turned into Blood, with which, the neighbouring Parts are nourished: and that the Excrements of this Blood are voided by Urins, Stool, and Sweat. That good Old Man is to learn, that the thicker Parts of the Chyle are not sucked out, but separated and sent away into the greater Guts; and that the Mesaraick Arteries cannot do as he says, because they contain Arterial Blood. neither do they reach any of them to the Spleen, because it has a peculiar Artery, which Arantius first described, and which I myself have often shown. Again he ought to have rejected the Milky Veins of Asellius, which he allows of; seeing none of them reach unto the Spleen. Furthermore, that same bastard and impure Blood, bred of muddy Blood by a bastard Liver, will be unfit to nourish the neighbouring Parts which serve for Coction, though they appear filthy, for they need to be nourished with pure Blood for their preservation▪ The Choleric, Melancholic and Wheyish Excrements of the said Blood, cannot be Purged away but by Veins and Arteries; the Arterics are already taken up with carrying the muddy Parts of the Chyle. They must therefore of necessity be carried by the Splenick Vein into the liver, that they may be voided through the Guts or by the Kidneys, which would breed very great confusion in the Liver. If Hoffman had considered, that the substance of the Spleen is unlike the substance of the Liver, its bigness different, its number uncertain, Colour divers, Situation variable, because sometimes it sinks down to the Hypogastrium, more often ascends towards the Midrif, sometimes descends upon the left Kidney, the Ligaments being slackened: and lastly, its shape, quite contrary to that of the Liver, and sometimes there is no Spleen at all: also that the structure of the Vessels of the Spleen, is altogether unlike that of the Vessels of the Liver; he would never have so stiffly affirmed, that that the Spleen made a peculiar kind of Blood out of the Chylus. Nature does in none of the Bowels more sport herself, than in her shaping of the Spleen so variously and unconstantly. But the Structure of those Bowels which are necessary to the maintenance of life, is always, one and the same and uniform. Furthermore you may know that the substance of the Liver & spleen are unlike, by boiling the one and the other: for the substance of the Liver is firm, solid and Reddish; that of the Spleen is Spongy, soft, and black and blue in Color: The substance of the Liver of Animals boiled, as of an Ox, a Sheep, a Goat, is eaten with content: the substance of the Spleen is not Man's meat, neither will other Creatures eat it, unless they be very hungry. But if the Office of the Spleen and Liver were the same in Brute as well as in Men, they should have both alike substance, and breed the same blood. Where will you find a place to cleanse away Choler in the Spleen, as their is in the Liver? If the Spleen draw the more thick Part of the Chyle, it ought to have larger Veins, but they are exceeding small, like unto threads. Wherefore Hoffman does foolishly to inquire the Dioti or Cause why it is so, before he knows the Hoti, that it is so, which ought to go before, and be diligently enquired into, when the natural Action of Parts is sought after, because the natural Constitution is Compounded and accommodated thereunto. What cannot an ingenious Wit imagine? But all such speculations are ridiculous and void, unless they are approved by the Eye, and confirmed by diligent Section and Inspection of Bodies. See Aristotle in the third book of his Politics, at the beginning of the 8. Chapter, who will there instruct thee. If Hoffman had known out of Aristotle, that such living Creatures as drink, have a Spleen, Reins and Bladder, he had more truly expounded that passage of Aristotle out of Hypocrates, of the true sense whereof he glories. The Spleen draws out of the Belly superfluous humidities, itself being constituted of blood. The Medicinal Consideration. The Substance of the Spleen is liable to alkinds' of Distemper, and to divers Diseases of the Spleen in Substance. swell, especially that kind of hard swelling which is termed Scirrhus. Sometimes it is inflamed, and then the substance thereof is perceived to pant, by reason of the Multitude of Arteries, of which it is full. It seldom impostumates. It's Coat does oftentimes grow thick and becomes Cartilaginous. It often grows great by abundance of Humours, and grows ●●al again, sometime Magnitude. of itself, and sometime by use of Medicines. It is better that the Spleen be small, than great. A double or triple Spleen is not good, because it is a fault in the Conformation. Number. The Situation of the Spleen is sometimes changed, when its Ligaments being Situation. slackened, its weight bears it downwards, or they being broke, it falls into the Hypogastrium or Parts beneath the Navel; and than it deceiveth unskilful and heedless Physicians, who in Women take it for a Mole, or for a Scirrhus' Tumour of the Womb, and in Men for a sort of Glandulous Tumour which lies hid in the Mesentery. In four patients it has been my hap to see the Spleen on this manner fallen down into the Belly. Sometimes one or other of the Kidneys is seen to fall down in the same manner: Difference of the Spleen and Kidney when fallen. but it is easy to know the one from the other. When the Kidney is fallen, the swelling is round: when the Spleen is fallen the Tumour is oblong and an emptiness is perceived on the left side under the short Ribs. And if the Tumour be movable, as it is at first, the Spleen or Kidney is easily reduced unto its Natural place: The C●●● of both. otherwise, after the space of six months, it sticks so fast to the Peritoneum before, to the bottom of the Bladder, to the Guts, and in Women to the Womb, that it must of necessity putrify in that place; which it will the sooner do, if either you give the patiented Emollient Medicines inwardly or apply them outwardly. If you would prolong the patient's life, you must often let blood, and bear up the Tumour with a truss or Swath band. What if the Spleen fall from its natural place, shall we sear and burn it with a red hot Iron? when it slips into the Belly shall we take that Course with it? It is a ticklish and dangerous piece of work, notwithstanding Old Farriers or Horse Doctors have written, that the Spleen has been by that means consumed in Horses; and in some poor slaves on whom they durst Experiment so cruel a Remedy. Much more dangerous it is by opening the left Hypochondrium to take away the Spleen; neither can its thick superfluous Humours be safely dissolved by heating the same. I should by such a practice sear a contusion, after which an incurable suppuration of the whole substance would undoubtedly follow. There is none of the Bowels which in Diseases does more change its shape. Sometime Figure. its long, sometime foursquare, sometimes round, according as it finds room to dilate itself in. when it rests upon the Stomach, it does much hurt and disturb the action thereof; Communion. and if it be fastened to the Midrif, is oppresses the same, or if it reach thither in its Bulk, it hinders the free Motions thereof. Upon the Spleen obstructed depend the Black Jaundice, Hypochondriacal Melancholy, Obstructed, what Diseases it Causes. the ill Colours of Virgins and other Women, The Scurvy, or Hypocrates his great Spleens, out of which flows a Malignant Wheyish Humour, which being spread into divers Parts of the Body, does in the Mouth cause Stomacace or Oscedo a soreness with looseness of the Teeth etc. In the Thighs Scelotyrbe a soreness with spots, and wand'ring pains through the whole body, which are either fixed and abiding in certain Parts, which we call Rheumatismes, and the Germans refer them to the scurvy, as may be seen in such Germane Authors as have written of the Scurvy, especially in the Treatise of Engalenus. And therefore after universal Remedies, they use other appropriate Scorbuticks, which are destined to the Cure of that Disease. Chap. 27. Of the Vena Cava and Aorta, within the Lower Belly. THe Trunk of the a T. 12. f. 1. A B C. □ Vena Cava is commonly reported to arise out of the Liver, Liver is not the Original of Vena Cava. and to be divided into the superior and inferior Trunk, as if they were separated, as it is in the stock of the b T. 12. f. 4. A. □ Aorta springing out of the Heart: but Ocular Inspection does demonstrate, that the Trunk of Vena Cava is separated from the Liver, which creeps beneath, and that near the top of the Liver by the Midrif it receives a branch which grows out of the c f. 1. r r. □ Substance of the Liver, which carries blood into the Trunk of the Cava, that it may be carried unto the Heart with other blood which ascends by Circulation. Wherefore that same Trunk of the Vena Cava, is extended all along without Interruption from the d f. 1. B. □ Jugulum or Neck even to the e T. 12. f. 1. D. □ Os Sacrum. There I make account is the Cistern of Blood, because a great part of the Blood is contained therein. The Trunk of Vena Cava, in regard of the Liver, which by a branch supplies i● Vena Cava divided into Trunks. with Blood, may be divided into the f f. 1. B. □ upper and lower g T. 12. f. 1. C D. □ Trunk. The inferior produces the Vena h T. 5. f. a. g. □ Adeposa, which is dispersed into the fatty Membrane of the Kidney; and then the i T. 12. f. 1. x x. □ emulgent, which is distributed into the Kidney: after that the k f. 1. z. z. □ Spermatick Vein, whose rightside branch springs from the Trunk of Cava, and it's left from the Emulgent; finally, it sends three or four branches called l f. 1. a a a. □ Lumbares into the Loins, which are spread abroad unto the Marrow of the Back. When the Trunk is come to the top of Os Sacrum, it is divided into two Channels Distribution of the inferior Trunk. or Pipes, which from their Situation are termed m f. 1. D D. □ Canales Iliaci, the iliack Pipes. From these on either hand are produced other Veins, especially the ᵃ Sacra, ᵇ Hypogastrica, Amplissima ᶜ Epigastrica, and ᵈ Pudenda. In Women, the Hypogastrica, is longer than in Men, and Nourishes more Parts, and holds the Menstrual blood, till the time come that itmust be voided. Wherefore blood is contained in greater plenty about the Genitals of Women, than of Men. The Epigastrica is observed to be twofould in Women; the one ascends into the Musculus Rectus, the other opposite thereunto, descends as low as the Womb. In this Trunk of Vena Cava, Fernelius after Galen, placed the seat of continual Seat of Fever's continual and I●…rmittent. Fevers, supposing the Blood rested quietly therein: but seeing the blood is in perpetual motion, I make the seat of continual fevers to be in the Trunk of the Vena Cava, and in those great Pipes carried along through the Limbs; as the sem●…ry ●f intermittent Fevers or Agues, is in the Vena Porta, or in the Bowels, which are nourished thereby. Seeing the Veins are the Vessels and Cisterts to contain the blood, they have a thin coat, saving that the Trunk of Vena Cava has a thicker and stronger coat Why Cava h●● a thick Coat. than ordinary, to avoid breaking, in case the blood should work or boil therein, which by means of the tenderness of the Coat, can sweat and breath through. 'tis a Question, whether the Veins have Fibres or no? some say yea, and some Whether Veins have Fibres. no. But seeing the Blood is thrust forward by the spirits and Hear, it has a natural ascent unto the Heart, and therefore it needs no Fibres to draw it, and if any were necessary, the right▪ ones would suffice, but the circular ones are interposed for strength, and some threads are observed in the Coat of a Vein, not to draw, but to strengthen the Coat. Wherefore the Contentions about the Fibres of Veins are but Vain Janglings; neither are we in Blood-letting so carefully and scrupulously to observe the rectitude of the Fibres, as the Situation of the Part affected. Hypocrates in his Book de Morbo Sacro, does Elegantly call the Veins Spiracula Why the Veins are called the Body's Wind-Doers. Corporis, the Wind-doers or Breathing places of the Body; because when they are opened, a Fuliginous or sooty Spirit Issues out with the Blood, and the Air is likewise by them received in, to Cool the Body. In Ancient t●…nes, and the days of Yore, it was a Part of Sooth saying, to view the blood which flowed from their sacrifices, which if it appeared pure and laudable, it was a token of happy and joyful success; i● bad and corrupted; it was an ill sign, according to Lucan. Nec Cruor emicuit solitus▪ sed Vulnere Largo Effluxit nig●um rutilo pro sanguine Virus. That is, No usual Blood did spring from the large Wound, But black and Venomous▪ for Red and found. The Medicinal Consideration. Seeing the Veins are the Cisterns of blood, it comes here to be considered how The conditions of good Blood. the blood ought to be qualified in sound bodies, that so we may be able to judge of that which is corrup●…▪ Now inbodies that are healthy the blood is Red, Fibrous, and has a small quantity of Wheyish Watermingled with it. Whether the Eabres are made of an earthy and phlegmatic matter which is drawn How the Fibres in the Blood are br●●●. out into threads within the Channels or greater Veins, and is made smaller in the lesser Veins, many doubt, supposing the four Humours to be contained in the Mass of blood. Some admit of blood, but severed from the other Humours, which in the first Region are separated from the blood. Others distinguish the Alimentary Humours from the Excremen●●tions▪ the former are confused and mingled with the Blood, the latter are to be seen collected in several Parts, as Choler in the Gallbladder; Melancholy in the Spleen; and Phlegm is diffused through all the Parts of the Region of the belly, notwithstanding Hypocrates acknowledged two fountains of Phlegm, the Head and the Stomach. Now the Quality or temper of blood is hot and moist. It's Quantity cannot be The natural Temper of the Blood. Quantity of the Blood. defined. The Arabian Physicians, especially Avicenna, do write, that in a Sanguine body well constituted, there are twenty four pounds of blood, so that a Man may▪ bleed twenty pounds and live▪ but if he bleed more, Death follows inevitably. That which preserves our life▪ is likewise the occasion of Death: for as good Blood in a moderate quantity preserves our life, so the same being vitiated, or too much in quantity, is the Cause of Sickness and Death it se●●. When blood offends in quality, it is termed Cacochymia, when in quantity, Cacochymia & Plethora, what they are. it's called Plethora. Sometime the blood is corrupted and not the Serum o● Wheyish Water, Sometime the serum is corrupt and the blood remains found. Now the serum or Wheyish Water being corrupted, is the worst Humour in the body, grievously infecting, weakening▪ and destroying such parts as are therewith diseased. Some Practitioners do make it a Question, Whether in the Veins, every Humour has its own proper Serum or not. I believe that there is but one kind Corruption of the Serum. of Serum, which according to the several degrees of its Corruption and Tincture, appears sometimes yellow and Choleric, sometimes green and livid, or black and blue; sometimes Melancholic, and sometimes Milky. Aristotle counts the Blood corrupted, when it is changed into Serum Sometimes the Putrefaction of Blood is so great, that the whole Mass is turned into a rotten putrefied Serum. When the Corruption of blood, is yet greater, sometimes Worms are bred Worms breed in the blood. therein, which I have seen come away in the opening of a Vein. Such a Worm being bred in the Veins, may sometimes flow into the right Ear of the Heart, and grow Heart eaten by worms bred in the blood. great, and at length gnaw, and eat upon the Heart, as has been often observed in the Dissection of dead Bodies. The Veins have in them, a Retentive Faculty, whereby they hold fast the Blood Retentive faculty of the Veins being lost, what follows. within themselves: which Faculty being perished, they suffer the blood to leak out through all the parts of the Body, yea, even to sweat out, as I have seen in some Patients. But more often it flows out immediately by the Nostrils, Mouth, Lungs, Guts, Bladder, by the Womb, and by vomiting. I have divers times seen in malignant burning Fevers, that the blood has been Blood congealed. congealed within the Veins, like unto the pith of an Elder stick; which has been noted by Fernelius in his Physiologia. Aretaeus writes, That the Vena Cava is sometimes inflamed, and thereupon Vena Cava inflamed. comes to break, which I have seen myself to happen. The Trunk of Vena Cava cannot be dilated, so long as the blood circulates freely. Neither is it subject to swell, termed Varices, which are wont to happen only in the Veins of the Thighs and Legs. Of the Diseases of this Vein, and of the Blood contained therein, there is a twofold Cure of the diseases of Vena Cava, and the blood, twofold. Purgation▪ Blood-letting. Cure; Purgation, and Blood-letting: but blood-letting is more necessary of the two in a Plethora, either ad vasa, or ad vires; or in a Plethoric Cacochymia, or in a very great and putrid Cacochymia, that a portion of the extremely corrupted blood may be taken away. Blood-letting takes away such Obstructions as are caused by blood, but not those that are caused by Humours congested in some part of the Body: and therefore that same Euro●a so often mentioned, that freeness of passage caused by blood-letting, must be understood of the motion, and free passage of the blood through the Veins, and not of the removal of an Humour that is gathered together, and wedged fast into any part of the body. I● blood-letting cannot be put in practice, the Question is, Whether Purgation If blood may be lessened by other ways beside bloodlessing. alone, may supply its place, according to Galens Opinion, in his Book, de Sanitate tuenda; or spare eating, exercising the body, frictions, sweeting? I suppose, where there is no Fever, the blood may be diminished by the means aforesaid, and also by such Medicaments as draw the Serum out of the Veins; for so the Veins being emptied, the rest of the body may be extenuated▪ and this is observed, and put in practice in such Nations where the People are afraid of blood-letting. Howbeit, to open a Vein twice or thrice, is a more speedy, and safe Remedy. Forasmuch as Silvius, and Carolus Stephanus, have written, that there is a Valve A Valve in Vena Cava. within the Liver, by the Trunk of the Vena Cava, which hinders the blood from returning back; Conringius says, that it is to be found in Oxen. This favours that Opinion of the bloods being carried from the Liver unto the Heart. It seems to me, that Nature has placed that Valve, that the filth of the mass of blood should not It's use. flow back into the Liver, and obstruct the same: which filth, either she carries by some way out of the Cava into the Porta; or else she sends it forth into the habit of the Body. Of the Aorta descending. Distribution of the Aorta descendent. Arteria Litnalis. It's Use. The descending a T. 12. f. 4. C. □ Trunk of the Aorta, sends forth so many branches, as the inferior trunk of the Vena Cava produces; but it sends withal, a remarkable Artery, called Lienalis Arteria, undivided, by an indirect Course unto the Spleen. That same Artery, as large, and wide as a Goose Quill, does furnish the Spleen with Arterial blood, that thereby the thick, and slimy blood, might be attenuated, and made fit to nourish the Stomach, and its neighbouring bowels, and that it might afford a fermenting juice to the Stomach, to help its Chylifaction, by that same permixion of both sorts of blood. Peradventure likewise, when the Liver is vitiated, and extremely obstructed, Arterial blood may be brought unto it, by the Splenick Vein, as it were a Natural Tartarum Vitriolatum, to open its Obstructions. Then it produces the b T. 12. f. 4. p. □ Caeliacal Branch, which is divided into as many twigs as the Vena Porta is, and has communion therewith, by a mutual Anastomosis of the Vessels, that is to say, by a mutual conjunction of their mouths. This same Arterial blood, is not circulated, yet may it have a reflux into the Trunk of the Aorta, to disburden the parts of superfluous blood; which returning back into the Aorta, may conveniently be evacuated, by opening a Vein in the Foot. The Trunk of the Aorta is made of a Membrane, six times thicker than a Vein; Thickness of the Membrane of the Aorta. and therefore it is not subject to that kind of Tumour, called Aneurisma, which the other smaller Arteries are subject unto, by reason of dilatation of their Coat, or its Rupture, or apertion, when in the Arm, an Artery is opened instead of a Vein. The Aorta, and Vena Cava, do constitute that Region, in which the matter of The Circulatory Vessels. continual Fevers is contained; but the blood does not remain quiet in that place, seeing it is perpetually moved round by Circulation: wherefore these two Vessels, the Vena Cava, and Aorta, are ordained both to contain, and circulate the blood, and may be termed the Circulatory Vessels. Of the Nerves of the Lower Belly. Between the two Kidneys, at the Base of the Mesentery, we must search diligently Contexture of the mesenteric Nerves. for that same a T. 3. f. 8. ▵. □ Intertexture of Nerves observed by Fallopius, which is woven together of the b f. 8. i i i. □ Stomachick and c f. 8. B B. Q. r. □ Costal Nerves, concurring on both sides to form this Contexture; from whence are derived all the d T. 3. f. 8. l m n. □ Nerves, which are distributed unto the parts of the lower belly. When this Contexture of Nerves is full of evil Humours, Convulsions happen with what diseases arise therefrom the Colic pains, both in men and women, though the brain be no ways misaffected. Chap. 28. Of the Kidneys. THe Kidneys, which are the Instruments of separating, and drawing out the wheyish Excrement, do consist of a fleshy substance, solid and proper to substance of the Kidneys. themselves, so that the like is not to be found in the whole body. They have a very thin c f. 2. H I I. f. 5. B. □ Membrane, or skinny Coat, which sticks close to their flesh; but they have another Coat which is lose, covered with Fat, which is called Membrana f f. 2. A A. □ adiposa, wraps, and infolds the Kidneys, and is produced from the Peritoneum. Their Temper is hot and dry, that they may be the better disposed to attract the Their temper▪ serous Humidities. They are a T. 5. f. 1. B C. □ situate in the Loins, between a duplication of the Peritonaeum, situation. which is no other than the Membrana Adiposa, and they seem to be placed without the Cavity of the Belly. The Reins are said to begin at the last bastard Rib. They have in length, the breadth of four or five Fingers; their thickness is two Greatness. fingers, and they are much about three fingers broad. They are two in Number: sometimes, though rarely, there is but one, and then Number. it is commonly as big as two, and lies upon the back, the Channels of the Aorta and Cava being a little removed to afford a place for the single Kidney. They are shaped like those Beans we call Kidney-beans. shape. Color. Vessels. Their Colour is reddish. You shall observe in their hollow side, the Emulgent Vessels, and the Ureter springing forth of that hollowed side. Their Vessels are the Emulgent c T. 5. f. 6. D D. □ Veins and d f. 2. a a b b. f. 5. C. □ Arteries, proceeding from the Trunk of the e T. 5. f. 2. E. □ Cava, and f f. 2. G. □ Aorta. And this is the outward Conformation of the Kidneys in a grown man or woman: Kidneys, how shaped in children. in Children it is otherwise till they are a year old, because the external face of the Wa being like a thick bunch of Grapes, does neatly resemble the Kidneys of a Calf: and upon the Kidneys, is placed the Glandula h f. 2. A & C. T. 5. f. 1. A A. f. 2. B B. f. 3. & 4. A A. □ Renalis, which is shaped like the Kidney, and in Children, dries up by little and little, till it become flat, being separate from the Kidneys by a portion of the Membrana adiposa, though it be found not far off in either side. The internal Structure of the Kidney, is admirable; which that you may conveniently It's internal structure admirable. view, and search into, you must cut it artificially on the hollowed side; and then there will present itself to your view, the enwidened a T. 5. f. 5. A A. □ substance of the Ureter, which forms the Pelvis, or Basin; into which, from the upper part, as it The Basin. were from an Housetop, the wheyish Humour reins down drop after drop, through nine little fleshy Teats, called Carunculae b f. 1. F G. f. 2. K K. □ Papillares, which are acuminated The Teats. without, and are included, and thrust into ᶜ nine Pipes, made of the substance of the Ureter dilated. Therefore that covering, through which the wheyish Excrement drops, may be called the Cribrum Renum, or Kidney-sieve. The sieve. In those papillary Caruncles, or fleshy Teats aforesaid, the Serum, or wheyish Excrement, is separated from the blood; which blood spends itself to nourish the Kidneys, or flows back again into the Emulgent Veins. ᵇ T. 5. f. 6. E E. □ ᵍ T. 9 f. 2. B D. □ ᵉ f. 2. F. □ The Medicinal Consideration. The Similar Constitution of the Kidneys, contrary to Nature, consists in the Depravation Infirmities of the Kidneys are Distemper. Impostume, Ulcer. of their Temper, and of their Substance. A distemper either single, or with matter, causes a Laxity or looseness in the substance of the Kidneys, whence springs Atonia, or want of their wont vigour to act by. By means of an hot distemper, they come to be inflamed, whence follows an Imposthume, and at last an Ulcer, as well in the internal, as external parts: for oftentimes a morbific matter, is collected within the Membrana adiposa, which breeds Impostumes which compress the Kidneys. Laxity proceeds from a cold and moist distemper, or from an exceeding hot one, Laxity, how caused. Diabetes. Ischuria. which corrupts the Natural temper of the part; whence comes Atonia, or an impotency to contract itself; and from thence comes Diabetes, which is the Pissing sickness; or Ischuria, which is a total suppression of Urine, not only in one Kidney, but in both, by reason of Fraternity, and Co-partnership, by reason of an afflux of a malignant air from one to the other; or by reason of a reflux of corrupt and filthy blood. Sometimes want of Appetite to meat, is a forerunner of this disease, by reason the Stomaches sympathising with the Kidneys. Observe diligently when the Stomach is ill, if there be no Disease in the Kidney; for if there be, that's the cause of the Stomaches disorder. The Number of the Kidneys is seldom changed, and if there be but one, it cannot be known that there is more; neither can that one perform as much as two: and therefore those that have but one Kidney, enjoy not their health so well as they that have both. Although the Kidneys seem fast fixed unto the Loins by the fat, as it were with Falling down of the Kidneys. glue; yet do they sometimes fall out of their place, and lean forward, sometime they slip into the belly, not without detriment to the Patient's life and health: this is a truth not to be questioned. Which comes to pass chief, not only by melting the fat in which they are wrapped up, but also by their weight, when they are grown so great, by reason of some tumour or stone contained in their Cavities, that they can no longer be kept in their place by such stays as were wont to hold them. Being fallen into the belly, they stay there a while, and at last they putrify, and impostumate. Being in their natural Situation, if they prove greater, or more weighty than ordinary, Their swelling they cause a kind of numbness in the the thigh, by compressing the Muscle Psoa, and the Nerves, which descend into the Thighs, which are conveyed through the fleshy parts of the Muscle Psoa. It the inner Passage of the Kidneys be stopped moderately, either by an Humour, stoppage. or by a stone, than the parties Urines are thin; or if the Obstruction be total, the Urine is wholly suppressed. If the inner Substance of the Kidney be exulcerated, the Patient makes urine with Ulcer. Matter, or Quittor in it. If a Vein be opened, or broken, bloody urines are made: and because the Kidneys Vein opened, or broke. communicate with the Stomach by the Stomachical Nerves, the Stomach does sympathise with them, being sick, and inclined to vomiting. The Action of the Kidney, is to attract Serum, and to separate, and expel the Action Hurt. same: these things it cannot do, unless it be sound and perfect; and therefore all the Diseases aforesaid, may pervert the same Action. The flesh of the Kidneys is dull of feeling, but the inward Membrane is very sensible. Stones are often bred in the Cavity of the Kidneys, either in the pipes, where they stones bred in the Kidneys. grow like Coral, or in the Basin, where a round stone is form. If the Stone increase so much as to cause a suppuration in the Kidney, towards the Loins, by a when curable by Incision. deep issue made in this part, the Quittor may be purged forth, and the stone extracted; otherwise, unless Nature do go before us, and show us the way, it were a wicked thing to attempt an Incision of the Kidney, by reason of the thickness, and profundity of the flesh in those parts. The Kidneys do sometimes consume away, and cause an universal Consumption Consumptton of the kidneys. of the whole body; which comes either from putrefaction of the Kidneys, or through overmuch ejection of Seed or Sperm. In new married Couples, and in such as are more wantonly disposed than ordinary, who most subject thereunto. this Consumption of the Kidneys happens; which would make some man affirm, that the matter of Seed, comes from the Kidneys, and that they carry a great stroke in the matter of Carnal Embracements. Observe, That oftentimes through weakness of the Kidneys, which cannot attract Dropsy from the kidneys weakness. How to be cured. the wheyish Excrement, a dropsy is caused without any fault of the Liver. Neither can the most effectual Diuretics open those passages. And therefore our chief Care must be to purge those, and the neighbouring parts, and by Fomentations, to restore the lost Faculty of the Kidneys. Whether or no, may we force in a sharp pointed Iron, to one of the Kidneys, that a passage may be made for the Serum, which is dammed up within the greater Veins, in case we cannot purge the same away with Hydragogues, or Water-Purgers? Chap. 29. Of the ureters. THe Ureters are Channels or Conduit Pipes ordained to convey the Urine to Their Description. Substance. the bladder. They consist of a single Membranous substance, which being enclosed in a duplication of the Peritoneum, therefore Anatomists have said, that they borrow another Coat of the Peritoneum. They are as long as the Space between the Kidneys and the bladder. Length. Situation. Resting upon the a T. 5. f. 1. F F. G G. □ Muscle b T. 10. f. 1 o o. □ Psoa, they are obliquely carried towards the Ossa Ilium, and rising up unto the bladder in the bottom thereof, they slip in between the two c f. 7. F F. □ Coats almost as far as the d T. 10. f. 7. D. □ Orifice, where they pierce the e T. 6 f. 6. c c. □ bladder. They have no Valves placed in their Extremities, to hinder the going back of the Urine: but two Membranes meeting together, do exactly shut the Passage. Naturally they are as thick as Goose-quills, but in such as have the Stone and use wideness. to void little ones from the Kidney, the hollowness of the Ureters is so widened, that they have been seen as thick as a Man's Finger in the dissection of dead bodies. The Original of the Ureters is rather from the bladder than from the Kidneys, because Original. they are of a Membranous substance. Within the Cavity of the kidneys they are divided into nine Pipes, which are fitted to the little fleshy Teats called Carunculae Papillares, that they may distil the Serum into the Basin or large Cavity of the Ureters, within the Kidneys. They are thought to have Nerves whereby they feel; but being of a Membranous Nerves. Nature, their extreme pain in the passage of a Stone, proceeds from the stretching of the Membrane. Seeing therefore they are ordained to pass the Urine unto the Bladder, they are Obstruction. offended with such things as pass through them, whether it be sharp Urine, or purulent matter, or a little Stone, or a thick and clammy Humour, by which they are obstructed. So that the most usual Disease of the Ureters is Obstruction. And if within the duplicature of the Bladder either of them be obstructed, there is Stone. bred a Stone, which grows by little and little, which is not movable, but remains fastened to the Bladder, which when those that Cut out the Stone endeavour to pull away, they tear the Bladder. Neither do I think there was any other difference of the Bladder in these, in whom a double Cavity was observed, and a Stone lying close in the one of them. Chap. 30. Of the Piss-Bladder. THe Piss-Bladder, is the Receptacle of Urine; being framed of a Membranous It's Substance. Coats. substance consisting of two ² Coats. The ᵇ third which they attribute thereunto, is a Duplication of the Peritoneum, within which it lies hid, hanging like a Bottle with its bottom upwards, and with this Partition it is severed from the Guts and other Parts, only in mankind, lest with the weight of the Guts bearing thereupon, it should be forced out of its place. It's natural size is small when empty, because it is widened and contracted according Magnitude. to the quantity of the Urine, The efficient Cause of its Contraction, is the second and external Membrane, which is altogether fleshy, which Fabricius ab Aqua Pendente took to be Musculous, and after him Spigelius, who calls it Musculum Detrusorem Vesicae. He might better have called it Expulsorem, the Expulsive Muscle of the Bladder. It's shape represents a bottle with the bottom upwards, whose bottom is in the Shape. lower Part of the Hypogastrium, and its Neck lies hid beneath, under the Bones of the Pubis. The Piss-bladder is but one in Number, yet severed sometimes into two Cavities, Number. after the manner before expressed. It is perforated with three holes near the Neck. The first and greatest, is that Holes. out of which the Urine passes: the other two being those by which the Urine comes into the Bladder, are the Ends of the Ureters. It's Orifice is shut by the Muscle Sphincter, which is form of the substance of Muscles. the bladder contracted. There is another Muscle called Externus Spleniatus, as broad as two Fingers, which is pla●ed about the Neck of the bladder and the Glandules or Kernels resting thereupon, termed ᵃ Prostatae. The power of shutting and opening the bladder depends upon this Muscle. The Piss-bladder has Veins and Arteries from the ᵇ Hypogastrical Vessels; it Vessels. has Nerves in its Neck, from the Os ᶜ Sacrum, and in its body from a Nerve of the ᵈ six Pair. Which is diligently to be considered in Diseases of the bladder causing stoppage of Urine, which proceed from a fall caught upon the Loins or Os Sacrum The Medicinal Consideration. THe Piss-bladder is subject to an infinite number of Diseases. In its substance Diseases of the Bladder. it is subject to all kind of Distempers, especially hot and cold: it suffers Inflammation, Tumours, Ulcers, and Palsy both in the Neck and whole Body thereof. Of which we shall Discourse particularly. It's temper is perverted, when the bladder naturally cold and dry, comes to wax In its Temper. hot, and fills into an inflammation. It's Situation is changed, when that Part of the Peritoneum in which it is included Saituation. is relaxed, whereby it slips a little down; which causes a difficulty in pissing, unless the lower Part of the Belly be lifted up with the Hand. Sometimes by the weight of many little Stones it comes to have an hollow nook, by the side of the straight Gut near its Neck, and then the Stones do nestle in that corner, so that they cannot be perceived by putting in a Catheter: but the best way to feel them, is by putting one's Finger into the Fundament. It's greatness or widness cannot certainly be defined unless it were empty; howbeit wideness. it is enlarged and widened according to the quantity of Urine. But if it be so much enlarged as to exceed the natural measure, than the Fibres of the Coats being broken or too much slacned, the party cannot make Water, because the fleshy Membrane is deprived of that motion, by which the Urine ought to be expelled. And in this Case the Water cannot be voided otherwise than by putting in of a Catheter, which sometimes for a Month or two, must be done twice a day, until the Membrane have recovered its ancient tone or contractive Vigour. Sometimes the bladder is so contracted and straitened, by reason of a painful exulceration in its inner Part, and then grows thicker and as it were Cartilaginous; which hinders its distension: and in this Case, the Patient must often make Water with pain. The Neck of the bladder comprehending its Orifice or the Channel of Urine, has Diseases of the Nick of the Bladder. also its Diseases. It is frequently inflamed, swollen Ulcerated, obstructed, and is weakened by the Palsy, when it can neither be contracted not relaxed, seeing it is thicker and more fleshy than the bottom of the bladder. It is easily inflamed, and Fernelius was of Opinion that no other Part of the bladder is subject to inflammation: from whence proceeds an Ulcer, which is not so hard to Cure, as that which happens within the body of the bladder, because injections and convenient Candles may be conveyed thereunto. It is frequently obstructed by the Stone lying hid in the bladder, or by a How Obstructed. fungous' body which grows therein. Yea and sometimes beyond the Neck, within the bladder, fungous or Spongy carnosities do arise, which do much trouble the bladder and fill the ●ame. They arise often ●rom a flux of blood, or a swelling Vein, which being opened causes a● incurable Issue of blood, which ●oon causes a Gangrene by rea●on of Clotte●s of Blood remaining there▪ Spongy Carnosities do grow without the Neck within the Ureter, which are te●●ed Hype●sa●●●ses, which are easily Eaten away with Medicinal Wax Candles, made and fitte● for that purpose. Oftentimes they happen in the Passage of the Urine after a Venomous Gonorrbea not well Cured. Al●o ●he Neck of the bladder is obstructed by another external Cause, Namely by swelling of the Kernels termed Prost●●●, which rest upon the bladder. But the Urine is often stopped by a Palsy in the Neck of the bladder, so that the Sphincter Muscles cannot contract no● dilate themselves. To open the Bladder and to search out the Diseases which are bred within o● The Key of the ●ladder, an Instrument so called. without the same, a wonderful new Instrument has been invented, which I call the Key of the bladder; it's commonly te●●ed a Catheter, and is used by such as Cut Men for the Stone, being different from the Ancient common Catheter. So long as this Instrument can easily be put in, so long there is great Hopes in Diseases of the Bladder: but when it will not Penetrate, all Hope as gone. In such a Case, either the bladder is perforated in the bottom of the belly by the Bladder perforated. Perineum opened. Urine let out with a Knife. Os Pu●is, to let out the Urine, or the Perinaeum is opened. But when a Catheter with grates in it, upon which the Section is wont to be made, cannot be thrust in, to depress the Neck of the bladder which lies hid u●der th' Os Pubis, a small Knife is thrust deep in as far as the bladder sidewaies, until the Urine comes away: for so I have often ●eed many from imm●●ent Peril. In persons far in years, who are greivously troubled to make Water by reason Ease for old M●● that have the Stone. of a great Stone, which cannot be taken out without manifest danger of Death, to give them some relief in their Misery, the Perinaeum is out in the same manner, as is used to take out the stone, and the hole is kept open with a little Pipe. So long as the Pa●ient can be kept alive, the little Pipe is stopped with a Tent, and a Sponge is applied to receive the droppings of the Urine, if any be, until such time as the patient must needs make Water, and then the stopple is taken out, and afterwards put in again, and thus the cruel pain and continual provocation to piss, is Mitigated in such as have the stone. Also by th●s means Ulcers of the bladder may be cleansed and dried, if there be no Ulcers of the Bladder cleansed. Zecchi●s his Vain Brag. Stone, to fret upon the Ulcer. Zecchi●s brags in his Counsels, that he invented this way of giving ease to Aged persons vexed with the Stone▪▪ but the Physicians of Paris did use this Palliative Cure long before Zecchi●s was born, it having been practised this hundred years. If a Stone in the bladder be little, and stick to the Neck of the bladder, or in the The Stone Sucked out. beginning of the Ureter, it may be drawn forth by a strong and continual ●ucking of the yard, or it may be drawn out by an ●●cision made in the Ureter. If the Stone ●e great it cannot be taken out ●●● by Cutting of the bladder, the Cut out of the Bladder. In●ection being made upon the Perinaeum, as our Stone-Cutters are wont to do▪ for the way used by the Ancients as it is described by Ce●sus is difficult and dangerous. And I believe that kind of operation used in E●ypt, when they would take out the The Aegyption Operation ●aught. Stone, 〈◊〉 difficult, which is by blowing up the bladder with a Pair of Bellows. For this operation described by P●osper Alpi●●●, is so absurd, that I doubt the truth of the story, because it is exceeding cruel and painful by reason of the extreme stretching of the bladder, which cannot indu●e distension, neither in its Neck, nor in the Ureter. That way which F●●b●●cius Hild●●●● goes to take out the Stone, is also ab●●rd And that of Hild●●●● is ●aught. and dangerous. The way used by the Operators of Paris and by some Italians of the Nvasion Family, is the only safe and easy way, by reason of the Instruments The French & Italian w●y the best to take out the Stone. and of the Industrious Dexterity of the Artists; wherefore I wish other Nations had such Operators. ᵃ T. 5. f. 1. F F. G G. □ ᵇ T. 10. f. 1. O O. □ ᶜ f. 7. F F. □ ᵈ T. 10. f. 7. D. □ ᵉ T. 6. f. 6. c c. □ ᵃ T. 5. f. 7. B. and C. □ ᵇ f. 7. A A. □ ᶜ f. 7. B B. □ ᵈ f. 7. B. □ ᵉ f. 7. E E. □ ᶠ f. 7. D▪ □ ᵍ T. 6. f. 6. c c. ᵃ T. 6. f. 5. F F. □ ᵇ T. 12. f. 1. and 4. ζ ζ. □ ᶜ T. 3. f. 8. o. T. 18. f. 50▪ □ ᵈ T. 8. f. 8. A B. □ Chap. 31. Of the Genitals of a Man; and first of the Yard. I Proceed to the Genitals of a Man, among which, the Yard, which is associated A Man's Yard with the Pi●s-bladder, because it casts out Urine through the Pipe of the Ureter, aught in the first place to be explained. It is made up only of Skin for thinness sake, of two hollow Ligaments, of the Its Parts Vretbra, the Glans or Nut, certain Muscles, Membranous bands, Nerves, Arteries and Veins. The Skin is by itself, has no Scarf-skin, and is terminated at the Root of the Nut. Skin Being lose, it is there doubled in manner of an Head▪ stall, that it may enfold the Nut or Head of the Yard and make the Foreskin, which the Jews and Mahometans Foreskin do cut off, out of a Religious Ceremony. Such Circumcised Persons cannot give that delight to Women in their carnal Embraces, as those can who have the Foreskin entire. And therefore their Women are better pleased with the carnal society of Christians. The Foreskin is tied to the Nut by a little band which is termed Fraenulum, The Bridle. the Bridle: it is extended in the nether Part unto the O●●fice of the Nut, in young Men that have not had to do with a Narrow-board Virgin. The Skin being removed, there appears a Membrane which closely girds in the The Membrane Ligaments of the Yard, which may be a production of the Panniculis Ca●nosus. This being taken away, the Vessels are seen which run along the Back of the Yard The Vessels. viz. Nerves, Veins and Arteries. The Nerves come from the Os Sacrum, the Veins and Arteries are portions of those termed Pudenda, which are spread out into the external Parts. Then follow the Muscles of the Yard, two of which are erectors, and two are The Muscles. Ejaculators. The Erectors do arise from the Tuberous Part of the Hucklebone and are sidelong fastened to the Ligaments of the Yard; the Ejaculators springing out of the Transverse Ligament placed between the Huckle-bones, and from a portion of the Sphincter Muscle, are spread along the Vrethra, to press the Drops of Water or Seed which happen to rest there towards the O●●fice of the Blader. These Muscles being taken away, three Bodies come to view which form the Yard, Viz. The two Ligaments and the Vrethra. The ᵃ hollow Ligaments being disjoined beneath in the Perineum, do arise The hollow Ligaments. from the Protuberancies of the Hucklebone, and have in their progress, the ᵇ Vrethra inter●ected. Near the Os Pubis, being soyned together they make a Pendulous Body terminated with the Nut, which is called ᶜ Penis, the Yard. In those Ligaments we must observe the internal substance which is like the Pith Their internal Substance. of Elder, being Spongy, blackish and bedewed with black Blood, that it may increase and decrease in the Carnal Conjunction, for the erection of the Yard depends upon these Ligamentsses. The Vrethra or Piss-Pipe, is a Channel of Spongy substance, that it may swell The Urethra or Piss-Pipe. and ●al with the foresaid Ligaments in the Carnal Conjunction; and therefore it is no continuation of the neck of the bladder, but is only fastened thereunto. Observe diligently, the Obliquation, or Reflection of the Vrethra in the Perinaeum, It's Obliquation in the Perineum. Impostumated hard to cure. and how the situation of the Orifice of the bladder lies hid under the bones of the Pubes. In the Perinaeum, divers Tumours are raised: but such as adhere to the Vrethra, and impostumate, are dangerous, often degenerating into Fistulaes', because the Vrethra will very hardly heal, and grow together. If it be eaten by a venomous and pocky Ulcer, it is not easily cured, and restored, unless by an exact Sudorific Diet, or by fluxing with Mercurial Medicaments. Balanus, ᶠ the Nut of the Yard, is an hollowed Kernel, wider in the middle, than The Nut of the Yard. the largeness of the external Orifice comes to. ᵃ T. 6. f. 5. M. □ ᵇ f. 2. C. □ ᶜ f. 1. d. f. 5. L. □ ᵈ f. 5. L. □ ᵉ f. 5. M. □ ᶠ f. 7. A. □ ᵍ T. 13. f. 8. o o. T. 18. f. 5. o. □ ʰ T. 12. f. 1. n n. f. 4. ●●. □ ⁱ T. 6. f. 1. a a. f. 5. H H. □ ᵏ f. 5. K K. □ ˡ f. 1. b b. f. 5. II. ᵃ T. 6. f. 5. K K. □ ᵇ f. 5. G G. □ ᶜ f. 1. c. □ ᵈ f. 7. B. □ ᵉ f. 5. G G. □ ᶠ f. 5 M. f. 7. C. □ ᵍ f. 5. infra. M. □ The Medicinal Consideration. The Action of the whole Yard, viz. voluntary erection, and stifness, being ordained Diseases of the whole Yard are, Priapismus, for carnal Conjunction, if it be unvoluntary, and painful, it is a Disease which is called Priapismus. It is caused by an inflamed disposition of the Ligaments of the Yard, and also of the Vrethra, or Piss-pipe, which is affected by reason of vicinity, and communication in the same Action. Weakness, and defect of Erection, is an imbecility of the whole Yard without Want of Erection. pain: It arises from a weakness, or a paralytic disposition of the Muscles, or Nerves of the Yard. Sometimes the whole Yard is bowed, and crooked to one side or another; or bended Crookedness upwards or downwards; which proceeds from a Convulsion of one of the Muscles, or from a repletion, and induration of the Nervous Ligaments of the Yard. Sometimes the Tumour called Ganglion, in the hollow Ligaments, is a cause of this Contersion, or crookedness of the Yard: of which Infirmity, Hollerius in his Comment upon the 63. Aphorism, of Book 5. and Caesar Arantius in Chap. 50. of his Book of Tumours, have treated. Furthermore, The whole Yard is subject to Inflammations, Tumours, and Ulcers. Inflammation, Tumours, and Ulcers The Yard is but one in Number, for two had been needless: if we find two, it is Monstrous, and they are both useless; or one is but the rudiment of a Yard, or some fleshy Excrescence. The just, and fitting length of the Yard, aught to be six or eight fingers breadth; Too long, if it be longer, 'tis inconvenient, and hurts the Woman in Carnal Conjunction, and must be shortened by a ring of wool put about it. If we believe Galen, the extraordinary length of the Yard hinders Generation, because the Seed loseth its virtue in so long a passage; which I do not believe. If the Yard be too short, it causes little, or no titillation, and is unfruitful. Too short Fallopius in his Book de Decoratione, teaches us how to make the Yard longer. Marteal mentions one that had so large a Yard, that when it stood erected, he could smell to it with his Nose. The Foreskin has its Diseases; sometimes it is too short, and sometimes too Of the Foreskin. long, and is incommodious. The Jews have it cut off, for which cause they are termed Apellae, that is, skin-less. If it cover the Nut of the Yard so close that it cannot be put back, the Disease is termed Phymosis: If it be depressed to the root Phymosis Paraphymosis, of the Nut, and cannot be drawn upwards, 'tis termed Paraphymosis. Both these Diseases, if they proceed from fervency of Carnal Conjunction, whereby the Nut of the Yard remains swelled, if it be for a long time together, fomented with extreme cold Water, its swelling will abate, and then the Foreskin may freely be drawn up or down. An admirable Secret. It is exulcerated with pocky Pustles; which being cured, if they leave any hardness Exulcerated. behind them, it is a suspicious Argument that the Venom of the Whore's Pox, does yet ●e lu●king in the body. Seeing the Foreskin is double, when it is ●ut, both the internal, and external Membrane, must be equally cu●. The band of the Foreskin termed Fraenulum, if it be more thick than ordinary, Thickness of the Fraenulum. and goes unto the hole of the Nut, and makes the same crooked, it makes men such as Galen calls Hypospadicos; so that they cannot engender, because they do not cast their Seed directly into the Womb, unless it be cut. The Nut is sub●ect to divers Tumours, and Ulcers, both internal and external. In Ulcers of the Nut. its middle, where 'tis hollowed, it is often exulcerated, by reason of a sharp matter abiding there, and often putrefying. But in the Whoremaster's Pox, it is full of Deformation with warts. Warts, and deformed; which warts may be eaten off, and eradicated with powder of Savin; but they grow again, if the internal Cause be not removed, by Medicines accommodated to cure the Pox. The Vrethra, or Piss-pipe, which lies along under the two Ligaments of the The Urethra▪ obstructed. Yard, has its Diseases. It is obstructed by the stone, which is taken out by Incision thereof. It is inflamed, by reason of its Spongy, and blackish substance, like the hollow Ligament of the Yard. It oftentimes burns, and is pained by reason of Inflamed. the acrimony of the Urine; it is inflamed by the sharpness of a putrid Humour, which passes through the same, as in the virulent Gonorrhaea, and then it swells, and makes the Yard crooked, and stretches it with the Tentigo like a Rope; which disease they term Gonorrhaea Chordata, the Corded, or Rope-stretched running of the Reins. It is ulcerated by the Acrimony of Quittor, and purulent Matter; and sometimes Ulcerated. the Ulcer being not well cured, there grows up a spongy superfluous flesh, which is termed Carnositas; which must be diminished, or eaten away, with Corrosive Candles; otherwise it swells so as to shut up that passage, and stop the Urine, not without pain to the Patient. To the Vrethra, and Cod, belongs that disposition which makes men termed Hermaphrodites, when the Testicles are hidden within the Septum of the Peritoneum, Hermaphrodites. and the Cod is empty, or open in its middle part, by reason of the Vrethra being there perforated, seeing the sides of the Cod are like the Lips of the Womb, and the Yard is very small. These things have deceived unskilful Midwives, and made them ●udg Children so born to be Females. Sometime the Vrethra is perforated above the Cod, or near the Nut of the Yard, which is then shut up, and solid, which hinders the right e●aculation of the Seed, unless the Vrethra be opened, and a little pipe be put in, to make a passage. But when the Parties grow into years, the heat of the body being augmented, also by violent exercises, and by plucking the same oftentimes, the Yard comes to be augmented, and the Stones which lay hid in the Groins, do fall into the Cod, unless it be perforated as aforesaid; or the Stones remain in the groins, and often deceive Physicians, making them to think the Persons are bursten. Such Persons having been accounted Women, do at last become Men. Howbeit, A woman is never changed into a man. there never was any Woman turned into a Man, unless she abused her Clytoris, being prolonged, or some superfluous Flesh have grown out of her Womb, which may have the form and stifness of a Man's Yard, but is no way compounded as a true Yard. And therefore Women are rather delighted with the mutual rubbing of their bodies one against another, and by the lying of the one upon the other, than by the vain titillation, and unprofitable intrusion of those Parts. Chap. 32. Of the groins. BEfore we proceed unto the Stones, we are to take notice of the groins; in Things to be observed. Crural vessels. Process of Peritonaeum. Muscle Cremaster. which are to be seen, the Crural a T. 24. f. 4. A A. □ Vein, and b f. 5. A A. □ Artery, with the c T. 18. f. 5. K L M N. □ Nerves descending into the Thigh, whereupon does rest the Production of the d T. 2. f. 9 E E □ Peritoneum, drawn through the holes of the obliqne Tendons, and transverse Muscles. Over this is spread the Muscle e T. 6. f. 2. D D. □ Cremaster, being carried athwart through the Groin into the Cod, and so unto the Testicle, which it encloses with two Coats; the one whereof is called f T. 6. f. 2. □ Erythrois, and the other g f. 2. C C E E. □ Elythrois. Above the bending of the Groin, you may see those Glandules, or Kernels, which Kernels. lie close to the process of the Peritoneum: below the Groin, near the Vessels, you may see other Glandules, or Kernels, bordering upon the Vessels. Within the Process are contained, Vas h T. 6. f. 1. A. f. 3. and 4. A A. □ Spermaticum, the Spermatick Vessel, Spermatick Vessels. which carries matter to make Seed of, unto the Testicle; and another i f. 1. V V. f. 3. C C E. f. 3. C C D. f. 5. C C. □ Spermatick Vessel returning from above, and carrying the Seed from the Testicle, to the Seed- k f. 5. and 6. E E. □ bladders. In the Groin, within the Process of the Peritoneum, descends the Gut l T. 3. f. 4. H H. □ Ileon, the inward Coat of the Peritoneum being relaxed. If it descend into the Cod, the said Coat is broken, and the descent of the Gut is Descent of the Gut Ileum. to be observed through the holes of the Tendons, which are interchangeably disposed, lest in reducing the Gut by Chyrurgical Operation, it come to be placed among the Combinations of Nerves; for the hole of the last Tendon ought to be cut in sunder, that the Gut may be reduced into the Cavity of the Belly; in which work, many of the very skilfullest Surgeons have erred, to the loss of their Patient's Lives. Note that among the Kernels above the Groin, do arise the Whore-pock buboes Buboes. or Swell: among the Glandules, or Kernels, below the Groin, pestilential swell do arise; ordinary swell do arise a little higher. Here you shall consider whether it be safe to use that prick, or Thread of Gold or Lead about the Production of the Peritoneum, that the process which in the Rupture called Oscheocele, is broken, may be drawn together: or a Caustick to produce an Eschar, may be applied above the Groin, to produce a Callous, or hard substance, which may stop the passage of the falling Gut. But care must be taken that the Caustick pierce not to the Vessels which lie beneath, viz. The Veins and Arteries, which being touched, the Patient dies for it. The Seminal Vessels may be feared, and so a man become invisibly gelded, because Insensible gelding. the Stones wanting their nourishment, do consume, and lose their Vigour. But I see on every side, great difficulties in these kind of Operations, which I judge to be dangerous; and therefore I conceive the best way is, to let them alone. Chap. 33. Of the Fundament. AT the same time, when the Cod is dissected, in the Order of Anatomy, by reason Order of Section. of Neighbourhood, the Fundament is to be dissected, and demonstrated. The Fundament therefore, called Anus, and Podex, is the outermost end of the It's Name. a T. 3. f. 7. M. □ Intestinum rectum, or straight Gut, which is shut, and pursed together by a b T. 3. f. 7. O. □ round Muscle, called Sphincter. It is twofold; the one is skinny, and narrow, the other is broader, and more fleshy; which adheres to a transverse Ligament, which is placed between the Protuberances of the Hucklebone, and the extremity of the Coccyx, or Crupper-bone. The Fundament has four Muscles, called Levatores; two of which are broad, Muscles. and two narrow: The broad do arise from the c T. 3. f. 7. N N. □ Os Sacrum, and Os Ilium, and are inserted into the larger Sphincter: As for the other two, the former arises from the transverse Ligament, the hindermost from the Crupper-bone, whereinto they are terminated. These four Muscles do relieve, and raise up the Fundament when it pouches Their use. forwards, and is ready to fall out in the expelling of Excrements which are more hard and solid than ordinary. The Circular Muscles do shut, and contract the Fundament, lest our Excrements should come away against our wills: for by means of these Muscles, we may take our own time, and regulate this kind of Evacution according to our own pleasures. The Medicinal Consideration. The Fundament is liable to very many Diseases. It is sometimes possessed with Its diseases. Tenesmus. Falling out. an hot distemper, with a troublesome, and almost intolerable itching, which causes a continual desire of going to stool, which is called Tenesmus. In the Expulsion of the Dung, sometimes the Fundament falls out, which is reduced into its place with extreme trouble and difficulty. Sometimes it is palsied, and the Excrements come away whether the Patient will or Palsy. no: and sometimes it is so straitened, that a man can hardly void his Excrements. Within, and without it swells, the mouths of the Veins being swollen and knobbed, Hemorhoids. which are called Haemorrhoides, both internal, and external. Sometime 'tis inflamed, but it is more often impostumated; from whence proceeds Inflammation. an hollow Ulcer, termed Fistula Ani. It is made rough with Warts, which are called, Condylomata, or Mariscae. It Warts. Cliffs. is exulcerated with small Cliffs, which are called Rhagades. It may safely be cut, according to Hypocrates, after any fashion, without hurting the Sphincter. Finally, 'tis troubled with all kinds of Diseases. Sometime it has a Scirrhous Tumour, which shuts up the passage of the Excrements, Scirrhous tumour. and causes a difficulty in pissing, by reason of the near neighbourhood of the Arsegut, and the Neck of the Bladder; which Parts do communicate their Infirmities one to the other. It is sometimes found closed up in newborn Infants, and it is cut open: but if Closed up. the Gut be found solid, having no Cavity, there is no way but death. Chap. 34. Of the Cod, and Stones. WE are now come unto the a T. 6. f. 1. x x. □ Cod, which is the Case of the Stones. It consists The Cod, their Coats. of two Skins, the outermost being b f. 2. A A. □ Cuticular, and grown with hair in such as are of ripe years; it has the Epidermis, or Scarf-skin upon it. Under the hairy Skin, there is a fleshy Membrane which called Dartos; it is a Continuation of the Membrana Carnosa of the Belly, stretched down unto the Cod; by help whereof, the Cod is widened, or contracted into wrinkles. For the Stones sake, it is by a Membranous Portion divided into two Cavities, which receive the two Cavities. Stones. The Cod has Veins and Arteries from the Privy Parts, and Nerves from the Os Vessels. Sacrum. A Stone, or Testicle, is a Glandulous, or Kernellish Body, ordained to make The Stones, their Coats. Seed. It is compounded of many parts, of which, the first are three proper Membranes, for each Stone has two common ones, viz. the Cutis, and Dartos. The first of the three proper Membranes, is called Erythroides, which has its Original from an expansion, or widening of the Muscle Cremaster, which holds up the Stone. The Second is the f f. 2 C C. E E. □ Production of the Peritonaeum, which infolds the Testicle. The Third immediately infolds the substance of the Testicle, and is called g f. 2. F F. Nervea, the Nervous Membrane. The Membranes being taken away, the Substance of the Testicle comes in sight, Substance. which is h f. 2. G. □ glandulous, white, pretty firm; and upon the same, overthwart, is placed a small body like a Silkworm, which is called a T. 6. f. 2. I I. f. 3. and 4. B B. □ Epididymis; to the one end Epididymis. Sperm Carrier. whereof, there cleaves Vas Spermaticum b f. 1. T T. f. 3. and 4. A A. □ deferens, the carrying Spermatick Vessel, which enters into the substance of the Testicle, and empties the Seminal matter thereinto: From the other end of the Epididymis, arises the Vas c f. 2. B B. □ Ejaculatorium, Ejaculator. the Ejaculatory Vessel, which in its beginning, is d f. 3. □ D. □ full of turn and wind, as is the Body of the Epididymis, and firmly cleaves unto the Testicle by its ends, being lose, and separate in its middle. The Testicles are excluded from the Cavity of the Belly, being placed in the Situation. Figure. Action. Cod. They are about the bigness of a Pigeons, or young Pullet's Egg. They are of an Oval shape, and their work, is to elaborate the Seed. The Medicinal Consideration. The Natural Constitution of the Cod, and Stones, being explained, let us now Diseases of the Cod. examine the Preternatural disorder thereof. The Cod is apt to be swelled with divers fluxions, which flow either immediately into it, or into the Stones. If the Gut fall into the Cod, or into the Cal, it makes that kind of Rupture which Oscheocele. is called Oscheocele. If water or wind flow from the Cavity of the belly, into the Cod, they make those Ruptures which are termed Hydrocele, and Pneumatocele. Hydrocele. If in the Spermatick Vessels, both Deferent, and Jaculatory, where they are full Cirsocele. of turn and wind here the Stones, thick blood be inrercepted, it breeds a tumour, which is called Circocele. If Spongy flesh breed, and grow to the Membrane called Dartos, it is termed Sarcocele. Sarcocele. If the Testicle adhere to the said spongy flesh, it has the same name. If the Stone swell, and exceed its natural bulk, it causes a swelling in the Cod. If wind or water insinuate themselves into the Membranes of the Testicles, they produce those Tumours which are called Hydrocele, and Pneumatocele Testiculorum, Pneumatocele. which are familiar to Children. Moreover, The Cod is inflamed, overrmuch widened, or contracted; both Inflammation. which dispositions, are inconvenient, and hindersom to life and Generation. The Laxity thereof, is termed Rhagosis; Howbeit, it is naturally more lax on Rhagosis. the left side, whether by reason of the weight of the le●t Testicle, or by reason of the weakness, and coldness of the left side. The Stones are faulty in point of Situation, while they lie out of sight in the belly, Diseases of the Stones in Situation. or when they are in the groins. By reason of the former Situation, in questions of Divorce, men are pronounced impotent, though strong otherwise, because the Stones are not in their Natural place. By reason of i'll Conformation in the Womb, they are faulty in point of number, Number. when there is but one, or when there are three, as in those who are called Triorches, who are by some thought to be very lecherous; which fault goes in some Families from Father to Son, and therefore it is a Disease. They are faulty in shape, when they are uneven, by reason of the swelling, relaxation, Figure. or divulsion of the Epididymis. If there be a fault in the Colour, there is a fault in the Substance, which ought to Color. be pretty solid; when it is over-flaggy, and soft, it is faulty. If the Stones exceed the greatness of an Hen's Egg, they are never the better, because they are liable to Greatness fluxions: and being swollen, or altered in their temper, they cannot rightly perform their Office: if they are small as Hazel Nuts, they have no power to engender. Now the Action of the Testicles is to elaborate the Seed by their inbred virtue Their Action▪ implanted in them to that end: wherefore they receive the seminal matter, and when it is sufficiently prepared, that is to say when it is impregnated with the Generative Spirit, they transmit the same into the Jaculatory Vessels, and the Jaculatory Vessels carry it into the Seminary Bladders. ᵉ f. 2. D D. □ ᶜ f. 1. V V. f. 3. E. f. 4. D D. □ ᵈ f. 1. c c. f. 3. and 4. c c c. Chap. 35. Of the Vessels which carry the true Seed, of the Seed-Bladders and the Prostatae or Auriliaries. IT remains now that we Speak of the Vessels which carry the Seed to the Bladder, and of the a T. 6. f. 5. F F. f. 6. G G. □ Prostatae or Assistants. That same b T. 6. f. 1. V V. f. 3. E. f. 4. D. □ carrying Vessel which is Ejeculatory Vessels. called Ejaculatorium, and takes its original from the Epididymis, is in its Rise very full of c f. 3. and 4. c c. f. 5. C. □ wind and wrinkled. Those Wrinkles being smoothed out do make the Vessel twice as long as before. Why Wrinkled Those Wrinkles are made to retain the most subtle Spirit of Generation, which How the Seed is voided. breaks forth violently in the act of Generation with a thin subtle and spirituous matter, which is mixed with that same other Excrementitious Seminal matter, which is contained in the little d T. 6. f. 5. and 6. E E. □ Seed-Bladders, so that they flow both together into the e f. 5. K K. □ Vrethra or Piss-Pipe. And as in the Act of Generation that same most thin and pure Spirit leaps forcibly with the matter out of the Testicls: so by help of the f f. 1. a a. b b. f. 5. H H. I I □ Muscles of the Yard, the Seminal matter which is contained in the littlie Bladders is also cast forth. For I make account that their is a threefold Seminal matter, one most pure, Matter of the Seed threefold. which is made and kept in the Stone; the other is Superfluous and Excrementitious, yet of use for the forming of the Conception, which is thrust away by the Stones and slides leasurly into the little Seed-Bladders: for it is not probable that the most pure Seminal matter and the Spirit which is the Author of Generation, should be contained amids the Nastiness of the Dung and Urine. The third Seminal matter, is an Oily Substance, which leisurely dropping out, does moisten the a T. 6. f. 5. K K. □ Vrethra or Piss-Pipe in Men and the b T. 7. f. 2. y. □ Sheath of the Womb in Women; also it comes away by itself when the Yard is distended through lust, and in strong imaginations of the matters tending to Generation and sometimes at the sight of a beautiful Woman. It is a Question whether this Oily substance do flow out of the little Seed-Bladders or from the c T. 6. f. 6. f. 5. F F. f. 6. G. G. □ Glandules of the Prostatae, which contain in them a Seminal matter, which is sent forth through small pores beneath the Knob of the Vrethra. The Matter which is contained in the little Bladders, is forcibly cast out by way of Ejaculation or Squirting, through the holes which are near the foresaid knobby wart of the Vrethra. Before the little Bladders be removed, you shall observe, how they are covered Whence the Texture of Veins among the Seed-Bladders. round about and hidden under a Multitude of little Veins scattered round about them. Whether they be Veins or Arteries, what they serve for is not yet certainly known. Whether to supply matter to those Parts viz. The Seed-bladders, that it may be thence transmitted to the Protastae to be further Elaborated? Touching this wonderful Intertexture of Vessels, we can as yet determine nothing. In the Prostatae and in the Seed-Bladders, is the seat of the venomous Genorrhea: The seat of a Virulent Gonorrhoea. which if it be unseasonably stopped, the venom is communicated to the whole body, or flows back into the stones and causes a Tumour in them: or if it extend so far as the Perineum, unless it be naturly repelled, it causes an Impostum and eats into the Vrethra or Piss-Pipe. You shall do well to consider whether it be safe in a virulent Gonorrhoea, to open a Vein in the Arm, if the arder in these places be light and without a Fever? In my what Vein to be opened in the Cure thereof. opinion it is better to take blood from the Foot, because the Saphena takes its rise near the Groin, and bestows two branches upon those Parts, and therefore large bleeding in the Foot, when the Buboes break out, does powerfully revel. Few or none except Julianus Palmarius a Physician of Paris and Fallopius an Italian, are for Blood-letting in the Arm in such Cases, for it is held unsafe, for fear of the Whores-Pocks, by reflux of the venomous Humour into the Bowels and habit of the Body. The Medicinal Consideration. The Diseases of those Seed-Vessels, Seed-Bladders and of the Auniliary Glandules Diseases of these Parts are, Distempers. or Prostatae, are, an hot or cold Distemper, which cause a corruption of the Seminal matter, either from an internal or an external Cause. Also the Laxity of those Parts causes an involentary shedding of the Seed, which Laxite whence Gonorrhoea. is called a Simple or single Gonerrhea: or when it is with pain and inflammation, being caused by infection of a Pocky Whore it is called Gonrrhaea Virulenta, the venomous Gonerrheae. The flux of Seed which happens to some in their sleep is called Oxynorrigmos, it comes from the abundance of hot and Spirituous Seed. The Oily subctance is exceeding needful, for in Men through want of the said Humour, The Oily Substance how needful. either the sharpness of Urine hurts the Vrethra or Piss-Pipe, or it cannot freely pass, neither can the Seed be forcibly cast out, as Galen hints and I have known in many; who were cured with a liberal moistening Diet, a Bath to sit in, and Oil of sweet Almonds, Squirted into the Vrethra with a Syringe. With the same Humour the Woman's sheath is moistened in such as are lustful, and it drops away by itself without the Ejaculation of Seed. The Action of the Yard, is not to transmit the Urine, but to Ejaculte or Squirt Action hurt, whence Barrenness. the Seed into the Womb of the Woman. If it cannot perform that Office it causes Barrenness, which depends either upon the Yard, by reason of the Ligaments which cannot be blown up so as to raise the Yard; or because of the weakness or Palsy of the Muscles of the Yard: or upon the Stones being colder than they ought to be, or being too Flaggy, or less or greater then is usual: or upon the ill shapeing of the Spermatick Vessels, as in case the Arteries be wanting; or upon the defect or faultiness of the matter. If the Man be Sickly or the Women have not her health, the Cause of Barrenness is attribted to an evil disposition of the whole Body: which makes that fitting and convenient matter to make Seed of, Cannot be from thence supplied to the genital Parts. Neither is fruitfulness and Conception to be expected, unless the Man and Woman be restored to perfect health; and unless the fault of the Genitals (if there be any) be amended, Chap. 36. Of the Genital Parts of a Woman, and first of the External. THe Genital parts of a Woman are divided into the external and internal. The External Genital Parts. internal prepar Seed, or somewhat like seed, and aford place for the Conception. The External Parts are visible and must be viewed before we come to Section. Let us therefore stay a whil in the porch, before we pass into that sacred Cave or Closet of the Womb. That outward Part which is adorned with Hair is called Pubis the Share: that Pubis. Cunnus I conceive th● Term Cunnus derived from the Greck Connos a beard, does properly signify the Hair about the Female Privity & not the Orifice itself, but only by a Metonymy of the Adjunct for the Subject. Carunculae Myrtiformes. Passage which is shut with two Valves or folding Doors (whence the name Vulva) is called in Latin a T. 7. f. 5. F F. □ Cunnus, in English the Coney, or Water-Gate. The Valves are termed Labra Cunni, the b f. 5. B B. □ Lips of the Coney, or the Doors of the Water-Gate. These Lips being drawn aside, the c f. 5. C C. □ Nymphae come in sight, which are pretty firm Membranous excrescences, broader towards the top. At the top of the Nymphs we meet with a little fleshy Knob, covered with a thin Skin, which is called d f. 4. I I. K f. 5. A. □ Clitoris. The Nymphae being drawn asunder, the Carunculae e f. 5. D. E E. □ Myrtiformes [that is small portions of flesh like Myrtleberries] come to be seen, whereof two are lateral, seated on each side, the third lies beneath toward the Fundament, and the fourth is always placed at the extremity of the Vrethra or Piss-pipe. In Virgins, the Lips are, straighter than in other Females, and when their Thighs are opened wide, they appear stretched or bend. The inferior Membrane of the Nymphs is also in Virgins bend and stretched out; but in their defloration and by frequent carnal conjunction, it is depressed: those Connexion's are wholly Obliterated in Women which have brougth forth Children. And these Parts may be seen in those which are living. And if you shall thrust Neck of the tromb. your Finger into a Woman's a T. 7. f. 2. Y. □ sheath or Scabbard [that is the Neck of her Womb] you will feel it b T. 7. f. 3. E E. □ Wrinkled, and if you carry your Finger higher, you will find the c T. 7. f. 3. D. □ in most Orifice of the Womb, for so fa● a long Finger is able to reach. All that space is called Collum d T. 7. f. 2. Y. f. 3. E E. □ Vteri, the Neck of the Womb or the Sheath of the Man's Yard, because it receives the Yard like a sheath or Scabbard, in the Act of Generation. In Virgins, after the Nymphs we meet with a Membrane or thin Skin drawn before Hymen. the Orifice, pierced through with a very little hole. This Membrane is called e T. 7. f. 7. A. □ f. T, 7. f. 5. B B □ Hymen. If this be found, we find no Carunculae Myrtiformes, if this be not found, those Myrtle form small portions of flesh, are so swelled, that they fill the whole Orifice or passage into the Womb, ●o that you can Scarce put in your little Finger, without paining the party: so great is the narrowness of this passage, by reason of the foresaid Caruncles or Myrtle-shaped fleshy Excre●cences, being united together by certain Membranes. It is to be observed, that those Myrtle-shaped little bits of flesh, are wholly obliterated in Childbirth and not to be seen, until the external Orifice of the Womb begin to contract itself again and to grow straight; which argues that they are nothing but plaites or Fouldings-in of this Orifice; which are unfolded and stretched or smoothed in the time of Travail, that the Child may more freely come forth; even as the Neck of the Womb is very thick, that it may be the more easily widened in the Birth. Hence I conjecture and conclude, that these Carunculae may more fitly be termed Carnositates and Plicaturas Orificii externi, certain fleshynesses and foldings of the external Orifice of the Womb. These things being thus observed, we must proceed to dissection, that the structure Lips of the Womb. of these Parts may be discovered. The ᶠ Lips of the Womb are made up of the Cuticula or Scarf-Skin and the Skin on which the Hairs grow, and they have underneath Fat and a fleshy Membrane which seems to be of the Nature of a Muscle. It seems to be spread in that place, that it may serve to draw the Lips together; but inasmuch as it reaches into the Clitoris, it does in some sort resemble the Muscles of a Man's Yard, Yet those in the Clitoris are different from the other. Those who have their Privity plump and Pappy, and the Lips thereof thick, the motion of their Muscles is very small and hard to be discerned. The Nympha a T. 7. f. 5. C C □ in young Women is soft, but as they grow in Years and by frequent The Nympha Copulation, it is hardened and becomes almost like a Gristle. It is a production of the Skin of the Lips, or by Nature so made and there placed, to direct the stream of the Urine. b T. 7. f. 4. I I. K. f. 5. A □ Clitoris being the seat of Lasciviousness and Lust in Women that delight in The Clitoris. mutual confrictions, is termed Tontigo, or the Woman's Yard. It is made up of two Nervous Ligaments, not at all hollow as those of the Man's Yard; they proceed from the Tuberous or bunching Part of the Hucklebone, and when they are come so far as where the bones of the Pubes are joined together, they receive another body placed between them, which is white, and being joined together they make up the Clitoris, which imitates a Man's Yard, as the Breasts of Men have a resemblance to women's Dugs. The Ligaments of the Clitoris have Muscles fastened unto them, as in Men proceeding from the same place as those in Men, and they are covered with Skin, and that Skin in the extremity or end thereof is folded back, like a Man's Foreskin. Not without cause therefore is this Part called the Woman's Yard or Prick. The round c T. 7. f. 2. S S. f. 3. and 4. F F. □ Ligaments of the Womb do reach unto this Part: whence it comes to The Wombs Ligaments. pass that the Clitoris being rubbed with the hand, the ends of those Ligaments are likewise chated and heated, and the Tickling is extended as far as the Womb and Testicles, whence they arise and through which they have passage. Those Ligaments of the Womb are somewhat hollow, as far as to the Groins, whence it comes to pass that a virulent matter being ●●om the Genitals expelled hither, does breed Pocky Buboes or Swell, and other Tumours which are not at all Malignant. The Sheath is Compounded or made up of two Coats: the one is internal and Membranous, the other is external and altogether fleshy, like a Muscle, that it may open and contract itself, and in the Act of Generation Squeeze and Milk the man's Yard. But the inner Coat is wrinkled, like the Roof of an Ox's Mouth. ᵃ T. 7. f. 2. Y. f. 3. E E. □ The Medicinal Consideration. Having diligently surveyed these Parts, you shall now consider the Diseases Common Diseases of these Parts. Closure which are wont to happen upon them. And in the first place the external Orifice or passage into the Womb, is sometimes naturally shut up, the Lips being closed together. This often happness in Girls newly borne. But this closure is more frequently found to be in the Nymphs; or instead of the Myrtle-shaped Carnosities, we meet with the Hymen fleshy and unboared. Sometime after hard labour in Childbirth, these Parts being torn do grow to one another. This natural growing together of those Parts in Children must be separated, and so it must in Women when it comes by accident. I have seen some women conceive notwithstanding this growing together, there being a little hole left for the Seed to enter at, being eagerly attracted by the hungry womb. When the time of their delivery was come, by reason of much moisture flowing unto those Parts, this closure did of itself open. Maids and women that are thus closed up, are termed in Greek Atretae imperforated persons, such as are unboared or unbroached. Sometimes the wideness and openness of these Parts is so great that it proves Laxity. loathsome and hurtful to Women, Namely such as have undergone hard Labour in Childbirth; so that it is needful to straiten the same with Medicaments. Sometimes in Women that have never had Children, by reason of over-frequent carnal Conjunctions, these Parts are so opened and widened, that they seek to Physicians, that they may recover their former straitness, and so bring their Hogs to a better Market. Howbeit, Virginity lost cannot be repaired, it may be couterfeited by Art, but it is not the Part of an honest Physician to teach those Arts: it belongs only to Adulterers and Bawds, or such as get their living by prostitution of the Bodies of young Women. Furthermore, the Lips have their peculiar Diseases, they are Inflamed, Swelled, Peculiar Diseases of the Lips. Ulcerated from a common or extraordinary Cause viz. The Whores-Pocks. Also they are subject on their inner side to Warts, Pushes termed Thymi, resembling the Colour of Flowers of Time, and certain small Tumours called Condylomata resembling the Joints of a Man's Fingers. Of the Nymphs. The Nymphoe in somè Women, yea and in some nations do grow to such a filthy greatness, that they hang without the Lips, and then they must be cut. They are made ruff with Pustles or Pushes, but more often defiled and made ugly with the foresaid Thymi, Warts and Ulcers springing from the Whoremasters Pocks. Of the Clitoris The Clitoris is sometimes exceeding long, resembling a Man's Yard: it is then termed Cercosis, Caudatio, the Longtail Disease; so that some Women do abuse that Part one with another when it is longer and thicker than ordinary. Such are those which are termed Hermaphrodites or Rubsters: for it was never known, neither is it possible, that a Woman should be turned or transformed into a Man. But a Man being at his Birth reputed for a Woman, as aforesaid, by the coming forth of his Genital Parts, may be turned into a Man, that is to say, be acknowledged for such. Sometimes within the Sheath there hangs a fleshy Excrescence which reaches Of the Sheath. as far as the Lips and farther, very deformed and troublesome, and somewhat like a Man's Yard. It is rooted near the inner Orifice of the Womb, or it rises from the sides of the sheath, far within. It must be cut up by the Roots, or else it will grow again, being a great trouble to married Women, because it hinders the entrance of a Man's Yard, in the carnal Embracement. Near the Caruncles or Carnosities before mentioned, there appears within, a Of the Caruncles. Vein, two or three, which are pretty full, and drop Blood out like the Haemorrhoides, and are sometimes exulcerated, and may degenerate into Malignant Ulcers, unless they be well looked to. Within the Sheath, in the upper Part, in the very Orifice of the Womb, a Malignant An Ulcer. Scirrhous Tumour is bred, which at last degenerates into a Cancerous Ulcer. A sad and miserable Disease, if it arise through fault of the Womb and other Parts of the Body. If the said Ulcer proceed from the Whoremasters-Pocks, as oftentimes it falls out, it is curable, provided the foresaid Orifice be not wholly eaten up, and that the Ulcer have not crept into the inner Parts of the Womb. That may be perceived not only by the Instrument called Speculum Matricis, with which we look into the Womb, but also by putting up of a body's Finger. Chap. 37. Of the internal Parts of a Woman which serve for Generation. THe external Parts being diligently viewed and accurately dissected, the Parts The Way of showing these Parts. of the Fundament come next to be cut up: and then the Symphysis or growing together of the bones of the Pubis being discovered, the Gristle placed between the bones, must be cut asunder with a very sharp Penknife, that the Thighs may be more easily displayed, and that their may be room enough made to handle the internal Parts. The internal Parts may be divided into those which make up or belong unto the Internal Parts twofold. Body of the Womb, and those which prepare the Seminal matter. We must begin with the latter. The Vasa Spermatica deferentia, that is, the a T. 7. f. 1. a b. □ carrying Spermatick Vessels, Vasa Deferentia. are made up, like those in Men, of the Spermatick b T. 7. f. 2. I M. □ Vein and the Spermatick c T. 7. f. 2. K L. □ Artery. They have the same Rise in Women as in Men. Herein only they differ, that they are not so straight united, nor with so many turn, as to make a broad d T. 6. f. 3. and 4. A A. T. 7. f. 2. c c. □ Parastata, which is not in Women, They are divided into three Parts, whereof one is carried into the Stones; the other to the Bottom of the Womb: and the third creeps along to the beginning of the Sheath. The Testicles in a T. 7. f. 2. o o. f. 4 A C. □ Women are otherwise framed than in Men: they have no Testicles. Epididymis; have but one Coat; their substance is soft, made up of little Bladders, wherein is contained a Wheyish substance, which is wont to spirit out upon the face of the dissector, if he take not heed. Such a structure of the Testices in women and such a conformation of their Spermatick Vessels, made Aristotle to doubt and others of his followers, whether the Female Sex were Prolisick and afforded Seed to the making of the infant, as well as the Male, as Galen after Hypocrates, maintains they do. From the Body of the Testicle the same Spermatick b f. 2. d d. f. 4. b b. □ Vessels preparatory are carried to the bottom of the c f. 2. R. f. 4. E. f. 3. A. □ womb, and to the d f. 2. Q Q. f. 4. D D. □ Horns or Trumpets of the womb, which Vessels are far different from those in Men. These things thus observed, let us take a View of the Body of the womb with the Horns of the Womb. Its Ligaments. external Parts thereof. Out of it there arises in its upper Part, the Horns and four Ligaments, two broad and e f. 2. P P. □ Membranous, which are productions of the Peritonaeum. They are stretched out in Virgins and women that have not boar Children, resembling the displayed wings of Bats or Flitter-mices. They hold the womb that it fall not down. The other two Ligaments are round & somewhat f f. 2. S S. f. 3. and 4. F F. □ longish, which arise from the bottom of the womb near the Horns. In their Rise they are hollow, and in their progress as far as the Ossa Pubis, we find them hollowed. When they are come as far as the Clitoris, they are cloven and spread forth in the shape of a Goose-foot through all the fore part of the Thigh. I was the first that made discovery of that same Cavity and of the formerly unknown use of these Ligaments. According to the Opinion of the Ancient and latter Anatomists, they keep the womb from ascending upwards: but without these Ligaments, the womb cannot ascend, unless it should pluck away the Sheath and the Privities, which are contivations of the body of the womb. The Horn a T. 7. f. 2. Q Q. f. 4. D D. □ of the womb being fistulous or hollowish, is observed in the lower Part thereof to be torn and jagged, as if the Rats had gnawed it: it contains within it, a certain hard and round texture, which resembles the substance of the Jaculatory Vessels in Men, and white Seed is there preserved and found. Having observed these things, you shall proceed to the body of the womb; The Wombs. Substance. Coat. the Substance whereof is fleshy and Syungy, and as thick as a man's Finger. It is Clothed with a Membranous Coat, whether it be proper or received from the Peritonaeum. The womb is of an hot and moist Complexion: it is Situated in the lower b T. 7. f. 1. d. □ Part Temper. Situation. of the Belly, beneath the Navel, just in the middle between the c T. 7. f. 1. e. □ Intestinum Rectum or Arsegut and the d T. 7. f. 1. e □ Piss-Bladder. In Virgins until they have their Courses it is little and hard, after they have had Greatness. their Courses, it grows softer: in women which have had Children it is greater and thicker. It is shaped like a small Gourd, a Pear or a Cupping-Glass. Shape. Number. It is one in number and no more, yet sometimes divided into two Cavities by a Partition in the middle, which is the Cause that some women bring forth two or three Children at a Birth. The Cavity of the e T. 7. f, 3. B B. □ Womb in Virgins and in those which have never conceived, Cavity. is so small as to contain only a pease or a very little bean; In such as have born Children, it is larger. The Action of the womb is conception, or attracting the Seed, and reducing the Action. same into Act, by causing the same to ferment and proceed to formation. And although this be that for which the Womb was ordained, yet it is by accident the Sluice or Outlet of Superfluous Humours in the Body, which do either continually flow unto this place, as in the Whites, or at certain seasons; as the Menstruous Blood, which being more than the woman needs for her Nourishment, is ordained to nourish the Child in the womb, and when it is born, it drops out of the Dugs in the form of Milk. The Medicinal Consideration. By out knowledge of the Natural Constitution of the Genital Parts of women Disorders of the. we come more certainly to understand their departure from the said natural Constitution by several sorts of Infirmities. The Spermatick Vessels are liable to obstructions, whereby the usual Flux of Spermatick Vessels. Stones. Humours is stopped, which is very hurtful to women. They swell together with the Stones, and become as big as a man's Fist; by a collection of Humours resembling Tallow or suet. This is known by a swelling in the bottom of the Belly at the sides. The Trumpet or Horn of the Womb is widened and moved by Seed, which being Trumpet. there corrupted, seeks its passage out. But wonderful it is that the man's Seed should come thither, and that as Histories report, a Child should be conceived there. 'Tis very strange that a Child should be form out of the Cavity of the womb; and it favours the Opinion of Paracelsus and Amatus Lusitanus, that a Child may be made in a Glass of a Man's Seed and menstrual blood, placed in Horse's Dung, unless both of them, the one being an Atheist the other a Jew, were known to be Impostors. The womb is the Root, Seed plot and foundation of very near all women's Diseases, Womb itself. being either bred in the womb, or occasioned thereby. It it be troubled with an hot distemper and inflamed, it causes intolerable burn, Distemper. the Fever Synochos and the burning Fever, very troublesome Itchings? and finally it brings exulcerations, the Cancer and Gangraena. If it be stung with servant Lust, it becomes enraged, causes Uterine fury and Madness; will not let the Patient's rest, but invites them to shake and agitate their Loins, that they may be disburdened of their Seed; and at last, they become shameless and ask men to lie with them. Sometime it is drawn out of its place towards the sides, and is carried this way and Motion depraved. that way, as far as the Ligaments and Connexion's of the Womb will give leave; and it will rise directly to the Liver, Stomach and Midrif, that it may be moistened and fanned; it Causes Choking and Stranglings, and raises terrible and violent motions and Convulsions in the Body. In a word, the Womb is a furious Live-wight in a Live-wight; punishing Poor women with many Sorrows. Although Hypocrates hath written and Fernelius confirmed the same, that the womb like a Globe does roll itself in the Cavity of the Belly; yet are they rather the Horns of the womb, which are receptacles of Seed Spirituous and hot or putrified, which being swelled do move themselves this way & that way, till they have shed their Seed into the Cavity of the Belly: which Seed being dispersed, brings very cruel pains and stretches the Belly, until the force of the Spirits be Evaporated: hence comes that same swelling of the Belly and stifling about the Midrif. Sometimes malignant Vapours ascending from the Womb by the Veins a T. 7. f. 2. V V X X. □ and Arteries, Suffocation unto the Lungs and Kernels of the Throat, may cause choking and stifling: and the malignant vapour of the Seed being so pernicious, is violently darted into the Brain, and all parts of the Body, from the Womb, as from a Beast that spits poison. The Womb is but little when empty; but when it is filled with evil Humours, it swells above measure; and it has been seen to equal the Head of a newborn Child Cancerous Scirrhus. which is an incurable Infirmity, because it is a Cancerous Scirrhus, which is the worse for being tampered with by Medicines. Sometimes the Orifice of the Womb being closed, and firmly sealed up, Water Dropsy flows out of the Belly into the Cavity thereof, and coming to a quantity, it brings the Dropsy of the Womb. Sometimes evil Humours are collected there, and by the force of Nature, do afterwards break forth. This often happens to Virgins, and others, from the suppression of their Courses, the internal Orifice being stopped, as I said before. The Womb is watered with a twofold Humour, Seed, and Menstrual Blood; the Whether seed suppressed hurteth women? suppression of both which, does many ways afflict Womankind, and the evacuation thereof, does them much good in many respects. Howbeit, we do not read in Hypocrates any where, that the retention of their Seed, is hurtful unto Women: he writes indeed, that the Womb being dry, does ascend to the superior parts to receive moisture (which Galen laughs at) and that it desires to receive the Man's Seed to moisten itself; and that therefore marriageable Virgins that are troubled with fits of the Mother, should be married, and have the carnal society of Men. And therefore he makes the retention, or overgreat flux of the Courses, the only general cause of women's Diseases, and says that Women cannot be in Health, unless they play the Women, that is, void their Menstrual Blood. In case therefore, that a What must be observed in letting blood to move the courses? Woman, or a Virgin have her Courses stopped, whether or no may we hope by blood-letting, three or four times repeated from the Arm or Foot, to draw the blood unto the Womb? I remember the Story of a Woman in a Consumption, because of the stoppage of her Courses, from whom Galen drew blood in a large quantity. That we may know to resolve this Question, three things are to be noted; The Matter, the Place, and the Expulsive Faculty. The Matter is Blood, which remains 1 The sufficiency of matter. over, and above what was necessary to nourish a woman for a month's time, which was ordained to conceive Child, and to nourish it being born: wherefore we must consider, whether the woman abound with blood, so that she has what to spare, and void forth; for if she want blood, by reason of some foregoing disease, or because she eats little, we are not to expect that she should have her Courses. The place through which it ought to flow, is the womb, with the Hypogastrick 2 Fitness of the place and Spermatick Veins: for these Vessels do contain the superfluous blood, until the due time appointed for this Purgation, and they send it forth either by the Cavity of the womb, or by the Spermatick Vessels, into the neck thereof. But if so be the Womb shall be dry, or hard, and the Spermatick Vessels and Veins obstructed, we cannot hope to procure the Courses to flow, by often blood-letting. And the Expulsive Faculty is not seated in the Genital Parts, which receive this blood, 3 Strength of the faculty but depends upon the general strength of Nature, which thrusts this superfluous blood out of doors. These three things ought therefore to concur, that a woman may have her Courses, Matter, Place, and the Expulsive Faculty; and Medicaments ought to have a Medicaments, & other means to accomplish the Cure respect thereunto. A Vein is to be opened in the Foot, rather than in the Arm; Cupping-glasses must be applied without Scarification to the inner part of the Thighs, above the Vessels: Convenient Purges must be given, with Apozemes that move Urine, attenuate, and open the mouths of the Veins. Pills of Steel, Myrrh, and Aloes, must sometimes be given, and Baths made to sit in: or a Vaporary must be used sometimes of bloodwarm Water alone, and sometimes boiled with Hysterical and opening Herbs, the steam whereof, the Patient must receive into her Womb. Also Fomentations must be applied to the Os Sacrum, and the lower part of the Belly, and good Diet appointed, not heating, but attenuating and opening. The Action of the Womb, is Conception; if it be abolished, the Patient is barren: Symptoms in the Actions hurt. Sterility Which barrenness, depends either upon the distemper of the womb, or upon the i'll shape thereof, or the hardness of the inner Orifice, or the distortion thereof, or from fault of the Stones, and Spermatick Vessels, in which somewhat is wanting, either in point of structure, or of matter: and if a woman be sickly, she cannot make good Seed fitting to cause a Conception, till she recover the soundness of her health, and till the faults of her womb (if not incurable) shall be amended. But forasmuch as the Womb is ordained, not only for Conception, but to evacuate Suppression of blood or seed. the Superfluicy of Natural Humours in the Body, such as are, superfluous Seed, and Menstrual blood: if they be totally, or in part suppressed, the woman cannot be in Health, nor if they flow too much. Hence comes the Gonorrhoea Overgreat flux thereof. simplex [simple running of the Reins] or the Feminine Flux, either of blood, or Humoral, when only Humours come away: which last, if it be malignant, and the Humour be sharp, exulcerating, and of evil colour, it is dangerous, and comes sometimes from an outward, venomous, and contagious cause; and therefore women ought discreetly to be questioned touching that matter, that they may be brought to acknowledge their Disease, and not deceive the Physician under a pretence that they have the ordinary whites, to their own hurt, unless they acknowledge themselves faulty, or lay it upon their Husbands, whom it is better to accuse, if they be in any measure suspected, than to call the woman's Chastity in question. Because we are treating of the Action of the Womb, which is Conception, I will speak a little touching the same, and show, How a woman is disposed during Conception: What is the fruit, or work of Conception, u.z. how the Infant comes out of the womb, and how the woman is constituted in the time of her Travel, and what happens unto her after her Travel, until she be well, and upon her Legs again. Touching other Diseases, whereunto ●he is subject, I will speak nothing, because they differ not from such of the same kind as she is troubled with, when she is not with Child. Wherefore, as the Abolition, or taking away of the Action of the womb, is Barrenness; Moles, Abortion, etc. so the Action thereof being depraved, brings forth a Mole, or a fal●e Conception, or an Efflux of the Seed, after eight days, or Abortion. If the Conception be true, and legitimate, a Child is thereby begotten; for the The Child Conception Man's Seed being squirted into the a T. 7. f. 2. Y. □ Sheath, is sucked, and retained by the b f. 2. K. f. 3. A A. □ womb; and then the c f. 3. D. □ internal Orifice being shut by its heat, and inbred virtue, it stirs up the forming Faculty of the Seed, and sets it on working: Whereupon, of both Seeds mingled, the Child is framed; which is begun by a certain point, or little Right shaping speck; which upon the third day is perceived to pant, in Eggs that a Hen sits upon. Afterward, certain Skins are form, within which, the foundations, or first threads of the Vessels, and all parts, are drawn out of the Seed, and the woof, or super-structure, is produced out of the Menstrual blood, which comes upon it: and then the Placenta is made, being a Mass, or Lump of Flesh, termed also the d T. 8. f. 3. A A. □ Womb-liver, The Placenta or womb-liver. which being glued to the sides of the Womb, interposes itself between the e f. 2. A B C D G. □ Navel-strings of the Child, and the Vessels of the Mother's womb, which before were joined together. Now the Conformation of the Infant, is different in the parts thereof; but the said difference, does more manifestly appear in the Vessels of the f T. 9 f. 4. D▪ □ Heart, which are united by a double Anastomosis, or Union of the mouths of the said Vessels, as I have described them, in my History of the Child in the Womb. Some sickly Women, while they go with Child, have their health better than Why some childing women are sickly, others not ordinary; but the Child fares the worse for it, because it sucks up the impurities of the Mother's blood. Others are worse at that time, because the impurity of the mass of blood, is carried into divers parts; and if it stick in the Stomach, it causes either strange long, or frequent vomiting; in some, all the while they are big, in others, to the middle of the time of their Belly-bearing. If a Woman, during the whole time of her Conception, can make the Child partake of her passions, it will partake both of her Health and Sickness. Whether or no, may we let blood, or purge a sick woman that is with Child? Whether a bigbellied woman may be let blood? Affir. Blood may be taken away at any time, especially in the first months, in which the Child being small, needs little blood to nourish it; but in other months also, blood is taken away, if the greatness of the Disease require it, to save both Mother and Child. And if any ill happen after blood-letting in such a Case, it must be attributed rather to the violence of the Disease, than to the blood-letting, or any other Remedy applied. But if a Woman with Child, be taken with the disease Cholera [a violent purging Whether in the disease Cholera she may bleed? Neg. upwards and downwards of corrupt Humours] when she is in her seventh or eighth month; whether in such a case, is it safe to let her blood? If it be suspected as hurtful in such women as are not with Child, lest their strength being by much Evacuation weakened, should be more perished, and decayed, much less is it to be allowed in such as are bigbellied, who have suffered plentiful, and immoderate Evacuation out of their Veins; because it inclines the Patient to miscarry, while it defrauds the Child of its nutriment, and impoverishes the mother; so to go about to Cure a Woman with Child, is a dangerous, and unheard of Practice. For if all Practitioners disallow the same in Men, and Women not with Child, both Greeks, Arabians, and Latins, both Ancient and Modern; much more is it to be dis-liked in a woman seven or eight months gone with Child. If it be done in a small quantity, it is to no purpose: what can the taking away of one little Porringer of blood do, to resist the furious agitation of Humours, and to extinguish a Fever, seeing the blood is wont to come very slowly away, drop by drop, and the best first. I say no more, lest I should seem with affectation to handle this Question, which shall be more accurately discussed in another place. He that desires to be acquainted with the Cure of Woman's Diseases, let him read Hypocrates his fift Book of that Subject. It is worthy Observation, That the greater the Child grows in the Womb, the Whether in bigbellied women, the womb grows thinner? Neg. more does the Womb, and the Placenta, or Womb-cake, or Womb-liver increase; so that near the time of Travel, it is as thick as a man's Thumb, contrary to the Nature of other Bodies, which by how much the more they are distended, by so much the thinner they grow. If the thickness of the Womb be less, either those Women are lean, or have little blood, or had a flux of blood a little before their Childbirth; and such do void little or no blood by way of the Childbed Purgations. Now the Child in the Womb, lies round like a Football, floats in Water, being The posture, & accommodation of the child in the womb. compassed with two a T. 8. f. 1. C C C C. □ Membranes, the one called b f. 2. E E. □ Amnion, the other c f. 2. F E. f▪ 3. B B. □ Chorion, has the d f. 3. A A. □ Placenta, or Womb-liver fastened to the sides of the Womb, as a Mattress, or Bed to rest upon, in which the Mother's womb is purified, and in which the Unbilical, or Navel-Vessels are rooted, viz. e f. 2. A. □ a Vein and two f f. 2. B B. □ Arteries, which carry blood to the Liver and Heart. The Vena Porta has blood proper thereunto; and the Cava has also blood of its own, which must go unto the Heart to be circulated. The Child in the womb, is nourished by the g f. 2. D D. □ Navel; it breathes a little, its Heart h T. 9 f. 3. B. T. 11. f. ♃. □ moves, and exercises its vital Faculty, it feels, and is moved, and has been heard also to cry. At last, when it finds itself perfect, whether in the seventh, or in the ninth The Natural Birth. month, which is the ordinary time for a Child to be born, being impatient to be any longer there imprisoned, it breaks its bands, and prison doors, and seeking to come out, makes its own way, with the Head i T. 8. f. 1▪ D. □ foremost; and such an Egress is termed a Natural, and right fashioned Birth. Before that Nature gins to work, she moistens the ways before the Birth, with a What precedes the same. Clammy, and gluish Humour. The internal Orifice of the womb, and the whole Sheath, which in the last months, do by little and little grow thick, are moistened with the same clammy, glutinous Humour, that they may easily be enlarged to such a widness as shall be necessary for the going out of the Infant. That the Child be rightly born, it ought to come out with its Head first, and its Face towards the Mother's Breech, the Membranes being first broken, and the water run out: After the Child, the Secondine, or Afterbirth, must come forth, viz. What follows the Placenta Carnea, or Womb-Liver, whole, and untorn. When the Child is come forth, the Navel is tied a T. 9 f. 2. P. □ a Thumbs breadth from the Skin, and after it is tied, it is cut of, leaving only another Thumbs breadth. The Infant being wiped and cleansed, with its Head gently pressed together, and closed, is delivered unto the Nurse. The Midwife takes care of the Mother, who is careful of her privy parts, being pained, and to recover her languishing strength. If the Birth prove hard and painful, a Fever is raised, and the privy Parts are swelled, by labouring, and endeavouring in vain to bring forth the Child. Sometimes Helps to further hard labour her strength falls her, and other whiles Convulsions do arise. Then is blood drawn from the Arm, and the Forth, and the Genital Parts are fomented with Emollient, and laxative Fomentations, and are anointed within with opening Oils, and fresh Butter. The Patient is put into a bath of lukewarm water, and sharp Clysters are given, to provoke the womb to excretion: and the inferior parts are provoked by Aperitive, and provoking Potions to open themselves. Finally: when all will not do, and the woman has passed over two or three days in these Torments, if she appear like to die, and ready to faint away, if tokens of a Gangrene in the Privities do appear, although we are not sure that the Infant is dead, it is drawn out with an Hook, that the Mother's life may be saved; it is better that Drawing the Infant out by an Hook. one die, than two, and the life of the Mother is to be preferred before the life of the Child. The Mother ought not to die to save the Child, and therefore the Caesarean Section [ripping the Child out of the Mother's Belly] aught not to be practised. 'Twas elegantly said by Tertullian in his Book de Anima, cap. 25. Necessaria crudelitate trucidatur Infans ma●ricida ni moriturus; that is, It is a necessary kind of Cruelty, to kill that Child, which otherwise would kill its own Mother. When the Infant has broke prison, and escaped, if the Placenta, or Afterbirth do not follow, the Midwife must thrust her hand into the Cavity of the womb, and pull it ●way gently, lest the bottom of the womb be drawn down. If in a woman dead presently after her Delivery, you view the privy Parts, you shall observe the Caruncles obliterated and defaced, the Nymphs much diminished▪ so that only some Rudiments of them, are to be seen, and the inmost Orifice so wide, that it will receive a man's four fingers bended together. The widening of those Parts to let out the Infant, and the straitening of them again, Admirable power of Nature. Childbed Purgations what they are a while after, is an admirable work of Nature. The widness and thickness of the womb, are diminished by little and little, by the coming away of the Loches, or Childbed Purgations, which is nothing but that blood squeezed out, which had been shut up between the Spongy sides of the womb. But if the largeness of the womb be not diminished, nor the blood evacuated, it putre●ies, and causes an Inflammation, and the womb continues stretched, and bard, as is the Child were yet within it, and at length a Gangrene arises, which brings unavoidable death after it. But if the whole Placenta be not drawn forth, it is no necessary cause of Death; and the place from whence it was pulled by force, for a while appears rough and uneven, till the whole womb be dried, and reduced unto its natural Figure: all which ought diligently to be observed, especially in Childbed women that are sick. The largeness and hardness of the Body of the womb continuing with a Fever, is Childbed Purgations retained, how to be evacuated a very dangerous, and doubtful Disease; and a great Question it is towards the Cure, whether we should open a Vein in the Arm, or in the Foot. Fernelius confidently lets blood in the Arm: Pereda a Spaniard, tells us, That we should not regard from whence the blood comes, but into what part it is collected, and bids us open the Vein which is next that part. Cortesius in his Miscellanies, has sifted this Question, and favours the Opinion of Fernelius: howbeit, more profitable it is, and more secure, to take blood out of the Foot liberally, respect being had to the Patient's strength, not neglecting cooling Clysters, Epithems, Fomentations, and Pessaries, made to provoke the womb to cast forth that putrified, and death-causing blood; and the rather to avoid the Calumny, and prating of il-tongued Gossips, by whom Remedies are defamed, which have been the means to save many people's lives. The Infant has no Diseases proper to itself, saving Teeth-breeding, Small Pox, Diseases proper to Infants▪ and Measles. Hypocrates under the name of Tooth-breeding, comprehends all children's Diseases, because chief when they breed their Teeth, Infants are so sick that many times they are taken away by death. Many Diseases are raised by the pain of the children's Tooth-breeding. There Teeth-sickness are two times in which the Tooth-sickness does vex, and endanger the lives of Children, viz. When the Teeth first sprout, and when they break out of the Gums. The Measles, and small Pox, are new Diseases, unknown to the Ancient Physicians, Measles. Small pox which are thought to be contracted, and bred in the Mother's womb, by the Mother's corrupt, and Menstrual blood; the fault whereof, Nature is wont to purge out, and scum away by those Eruptions. I say no more, lest I should seem to go beyond the bounds of an Anatomical Discourse. Neither is it my Design to deliver an exact Pathology, or Description of Diseases; but only to hint at such Diseases as are known by knowing the Natural Constitution of the parts of the whole Body. Chap. 37. Of the Pains of the Loins. THere is nothing which we more frequently meet with in Hypocrates, and in the Practice of Physic, than Pains of the Loins, whether they be primary, or secondary; that is to say, Attendants of other Diseases; which are oftentimes neglected by Physicians as Symptomatical, unless they be very stubborn, and solitary without a Fever. The Causes of which pains, are not accurately enough declared, neither is their Cure sufficiently explained by all Practitioners. This knot I shall endeavour to untie, and illustrate. The parts therefore of the A muster of such parts as are in the loins lower Belly, being demonstrated, and the Guts taken away, we shall see the Loins a T. 10. f. 1. T. 14. all the Tabl. □ covered with Muscles, both within and without, and fleshy b T. 10. f. 7. H H. □ portions of the Midrif reaching down to the Os Sacrum, and the Trunk of the Vena c T. 12. f. 1. c. □ Cava descendent, also the d T. 12. f. 4. C. □ Aorta, and the two e T. 5. f. 5. B C. □ e T. 5. f. 5 B C. □ Kidneys. And if you shall call to mind the cleaving of the Mesentery to the Loins, and shall observe the Lumbary, or Loyn f T. 12. f. 1. a a. □ f T. 12. f. 1. a a. □ Veins, produced from the Trunk of the Vena Cava, and the Arteries proceeding from the g T. 12. f. 4. C. □ g T. 12. f. 4. a a. □ Aorta, both conveyed into the holes of the Vertebrae as far as the marrow of the Back. All these things being diligently viewed, and considered, will give great light to our Consultation. Galen complains in his Commentary upon Text 7. of the Second Book of Pro●heticks; and upon Text 8. of the Third Book of the same Work, of the Obscurity of the pains of the Loins, because of the Ignorance of those Parts which compound and work upon the Loins; yet some causes he assigns of those pains, and Ludovicus Duretus that same sublime Interpreter of Hypocrates has added others, but they have not assigned all. I will therefore do my endeavour to clear this point. And in the first place, it is fit to take notice, that this pain is by the Greeks called The Name with its Elymology. in one word Osphualgia: the Latins term it Lumbago, and he that is made weak by pain in his Loins, is called Elumbis vel Elumbatus, disloined or unloined. In the French 'tis termed Erne as it were a Rene from the Kidney, which lies in the Loins; and when the pain arises from a Convulsion of the Fibres, the common people say their Kidneys are torn in sunder. If this pain of the Loins be eased with Clysters, the Humours being emptied which were shut up in the Guts or Mesentery, the Common People say, that their Reins or Kidneys are well disburdened. Now that our enquiry touching pains of the Loins may be clear and Methodical, The Author's Method. it is necessary in the first place to distinguish the Parts constituting the Loins, which are pained, and the bordering Parts which as efficient Causes do give occasion to those pains, not neglecting the more remote Parts. Then we shall inquire into the common internal and external Causes of those pains, and to sum up all in a word, we shall consider the Parts which send the Humour, and the Parts which receive the same. The Parts therefore which make up the Loins and are the subject of the pains, Parts which constitute the Loins. and Are the subjects of Pains. are these. The a T. 1. f. 2. B B. □ Skin with the b f. 2. D D. □ fleshy Membrane, the c T. 10. and 14. etc. □ Muscles which are spread upon the five d T. 2. f. 1. □ Vertebraes, both without and within with the e f. 5. and 6 □ Os Sacrum. Within the f f. 2. a. □ Cavities of the Vertebraes, the Marrow of the back with its Membranes, and a numerous company of g T. 18. f. 5. 11. 14. □ branches of Nerves, and the Membranous Ligaments, which knit the Vertebra's one unto another. Also we must observe how the h f. 5. A. □ Marrow of the back is in the Loins parted into an innumerable company of i f. 5. o. □ threads, like an Horse-Tail, and that the whole Backbone is moved in the Loins, by an Articulation of the first Vertebra of the Loins, with the last Vertebra of the Back. They are deceived who think that by the word Loins Hypocrates understands only the Parts included viz. The k T. 18. f. 5. II. o. T. 3. f. 8 o. p. etc. Nerves, the a T. 10. f. 2. T. 14. □ Muscles of the Loins, the Spinal b T. 18. f. 5. A. □ Marrow with its Membranes, and the c T. 5. f. 1. B C. f. 2. C D. □ Kidneys: for besides all these Hypocrates comprehends under the term Loins, the d f. 1. D. f. 2. F. □ great Vein and e f. 1. E. f. 2. G. □ Artery, and the f f. 1. H I. f. 2. L L. N N. □ Spermatick Vessels, and the g f. 2. H I. a a. b b. etc. □ Vessels of the Kidneys, the h f. 7. F F. T. 12. f. 1. and 4. ζ ζ etc. □ Bladder, the i T. 7. f. 1. X X V V. □ Womb, the k T. 4. f. 6. II. □ Hemorrhoides and the thick l T. 3. f. 4. I K M. □ Guts. But I would fain see the places which severally demonstrate those Parts. Now the neighbouring Parts, which are able to hurt the Loins, by reason of their Parts bordering upon the Loins which are The special Causes of their Pains. nearness, or heavyness, or by disburthening their Humours into them, are the Mesentery m f. L A A. etc. □ which is knit unto the Loins, the lower Part of the n f. 4. K. □ Gut Colon, the two o T. 5. f. 1. B C. f. 2. C D. □ Kidnies which touch upon and cleave unto the Loins, by their p f. 2. A A. □ fatty Membrane, the Trunks of q f. 1. D. f. 2. F. □ Vena Cava and r f. 1. E. f. 2. G. □ Aorta which are spread along in the Loins, and the Vessels springing out of them, which are propagated into the Muscles of the Loins and the Backbone. Of which sort are the Veins and Arteries of the s T. 12. f. 1. and 4. α α α. □ Loins, al●o the Haemorrhoid t T. 4. f. 6. I I. □ Veins, which pass down all a long the Loins into the Fundament; as also the u T. 6. f. 1. 2. etc. □ Spermatick Vessels which swell with Spermatick Humour, which in their progress do send branches unto the Loins. In Women, the x T. 7. f 1. d f. 2. R T etc. □ Womb with its y f. 2. Q Q. S S. □ Ligaments and z f. 2. o o. f. 4. A A. □ Testicles may hurt the Loins, but especially in a Woman with Child, by reason of the weight of the Womb and Child. The Veins and Arteries of the Iliac α T. 12. f. 1. and 4. D D. □ branches, which are spread abroad through the Os Sacrum, may vex the Loins. The remote Parts which hurt the Loins, are, the a T. 4. f. 1. A B. □ Liver by the Vena b f. 1. F F f. 6. the whole □ Porta, Remote Parts and c f. 1. G H. □ Mesentery, and the d T. 17. and 18. □ Head lest it disburthens itself of its Superfluities into the e T. 18. f. 5. A. □ Marrow of the Back according to Hypocrates in his Book de Glandulis. The Humour descends through the Cavity of the Spinal Marrow, as far as the Loins, and it cannot easily go farther, by reason that the Marrow of the Back is their divided into a f f. 5. o. □ Million of Threads. We must also observe the common Causes of the Pains, which are frequently Common Causes of Pains. found in Pains of the Loins, as internal Rheumatismes or Fluxes of Humours, and external by the Veins, or an Humour between the Skin, which flows from the Head betwixt the Muscles and Fleshy Membane, Oftentimes the btanches of the Vena Cava and Aorta do carry a Patt of boiling and Superfluous Blood, out of the greater Channels into the Loins, which they Disease either in the Muscly Parts, or in the Membranous Parts, or in the marrow of the Back; which is the Cause that a Palsy follows the Colic, or an Arthritis degenerates into the Colic and the Colic is changed into the Sciatica. Also, outward Impostumes of the Kidneys, and passions of the Gut Colon being either distended or exulcerated, are Communicated to the Loins. within and without in the Loins may arise Tumours, Impostumes, and Ulcers, yea, and the Loins are distorted by flux of Rheum, or some swelling. Their Fibres are distended by the Cramp. Many times pains of the Loins are stirred up by external Causes, as External Causes. a fall on the Back, or a Blow with a thick Stick, or some other massy thing. These things being premised and well understood, it is easy to explain very obscure Certain places in Hypocrates expounded. places in Hypocrates, touching pains of the Loins, which you shall find in the Commentaries of Duretus upon the Coick Prognostics of Hypocrates, and others collected together in the Commentaries of Marinellus upon Hypocrates, in the word Lumbi. There are two kinds of Loin Symptoms: for some are in the Loins, and others spring from the Loins: both of them are by Hypocrates judged to be very stubborn and hard to deal with, In his Coicks he hath pronounced absolutely and without exception, Such as have pains in their Loins are in a very bad condition. And in the same Book, Diseases which arise from pain of the Back, are hard to cure. And how will you understand those places, unless by a clear knowledge of the the Parts sending and Parts receiving, as I declared before. Certain it is, if in the beginning of Diseases their be pain in the Loins, with heavyness and a Fever, Blood very hot or in great plenty is contained within the greater Vessels, which being more inflamed, if not timely prevented, may be carried into the Head or into the Lungs, from whence grievous Diseases may follow. In other places he does particularly explain the Causes of Lung pains. If I should recite those places, I should fill twenty Leaves and upwards, wherefore I will take in my Sails and dispatch all in a word. Pains of the Loins in acute Malignant Danger of these pains in Fevers. Fevers or other Fevers in the beginning are dangerous▪ for they signify a great Tumult in the Blood, and irritation of Humour within the greater Vessels, which is much to be feared if a speedy course be not taken to prevent what may follow, by a plentiful blood letting, especially in the Feet, to hinder the recourse of the blood to the upper Parts of the Chest or Head, where it is wont to produce divers terrible and deadly Symptoms. We ought therefore to be very fearful of pains in the Loins which persevere in Fevers, although Blood have been often let, because in the Region of the Belly, Humours lie extreme deep, which may take their course suddenly to some of the nobler Parts, if they be not diligently Purged forth. And therefore to cure such like pains of the Loins, Hypocrates was went to Their Cure. open the Veins of the Ham or Foot: which is confirmed by him, in his Coicks: the pains of the Loins proceed from abundance of blood there, and bloodletting that are caused by pains of the Loins are large and plentiful. These things declare the necessity of blood-letting, when the Loins are pained with a Fever. Purging must not be omitted that the Vault of the lower Belly being loaded with Excrements may be emptied and cleansed; out of Aphor. 20. Book 4. Though Hypocrates has written that such as complain of pains in their Loins, are loo●e● bellied than ordinary; that saying does not take away the necessity of Purging in these cases. Bleeding at the Hemorrhoid Veins is good both for the Kidneys and for pains of the Loins; and therefore the Hemorrhoids are to be provoked. A lasting pain of the Loins without Heat or any Inflammatory disposition, unless it can be discussed with Fomentations, after purging & blood-letting often repeated, the Humour must be drawn out with Cupping-Glasses and Scarification, and by Application of Vesicatories, or making Issues on each side of the Backbone; also with a Bath of fresh water qualified with Herbs, or by sitting in natural Baths, or having their water Pumped from on high upon the Parts affected. For the pains of the Loins are more vehement and stubborn if the serous matter be contained within the Muscles as far as the Vertebras: and they are yet worse and harder to be cured, if they come to the Marrow of the Back. But those Symptoms which are thought to arise from the Loins, do not arise from the Parts which constitute or make up the Loins, but from the neighbouring Parts, which being spread upon the Loins, do cause pain, and transfer their Humours into other Parts, by a quick or slow motion, by the Veins and Arteries, such as are Vena Cava and Aorta, the Haemorrhoid Veins and the Mesaraicks. Out of Galen. The End of the Second Book: THE THIRD BOOK OF THE ANATOMY AND PATHOLOGY OF John Riolanus, THE KING'S PROFESSOR OF PHYSIC. Chap. 1. Of the Chest. LET us proceed unto the Parts of the Chest. Now the Chest It's▪ Bounds is the Mansion House of the Vital Parts It is bounded, and circumscribed below, by the a T. 10. f. 2. 11, 12, etc. □ bastard Ribs, and b f. 1. I I. f. 6, 7, etc. □ Midrif; above by the c f. 1. f. T. 12. f. 1. B B. □ Claviculae, and the whole Circumference, and bulk thereof is made up of all the d T. 10. f. 1, 2, 3, etc. □ Ribs, the Vertebrae of the e f. 3. □ Back, and the f f. 2. A A. □ Breastbone. And because the Neck comptehends the beginnings of certain Parts which belong unto the Chest, it is referred thereunto, rather than to the the Head, though it be the prop and Pillar thereof. That the Chest may be well shaped, it ought to be of an Oval Figure, and not Shape. flat before, which is termed Pectus Tabellatum, a Table-shaped Breast, and is a token that the Party so Breasted, will fall into a Consumption. The Chest is Compounded of divers Parts, which are divided into external and Parts. internal, that is to say into Parts containing, and Parts contained. The containing Parts are common and proper. The Common are five. The Scarf-Skin, the Skin, the fatty Membrane, the fleshy Membrane, and the Membrane common to the Muscles, which were explained in our Anatomy of the lower Belly. The Membrane of Fat and the fleshy Membrane have one thing proper and peculiar in the Chest, that they receive the Paps in Men and Women. In Men there are only the marks of Paps or Dugs, in Women they are Parts made not only for a feminine ornament, but to nourish the Infant, of which we are now to treat before we pass any further. Chap. 2. Of the Dugs of Women. THe Dugs are made up of a company of Kernels very like the Kernels of Prune-Stones, Their Substance clustered together, and disposed confusedly in heaps upon a Membrane proper to themselves, in the midst of which there lies one Kernel greater than the rest, under the Teat. The Dugs are placed upon the Breast, not to defend the Heart not to adorn and Situation▪ beautify the Woman, but that the Infant may be more conveniently nourished, while the Mother embracing it in her Arms lays it to the Dug, and the Child T●●kling her Nipple with its ●ucking provoks her the more to love it, and to express her Love by frequent Kisses. The largeness of the Dugs is different, according as the Woman is of a more or less Magnitude▪ fleshy and lascivious constitution of Body: for the lustful heat of the Womb does puff up and swell a Woman's Dugs. In a Marriageable Virgin they become more large, if she enjoy carnal Embracements with more than ordinary pleasure and content, Nature, our bountyful Mother, has given a Woman two Dugs, that she may nurse Number. two Children; or if one breast be sore, the other may serve the turn for a time. And for this Cause they communicate Vessels one with another. The shape of the Dugs is not flat but bunching out, that they might contain the Shape greater Quantity of Milk. At the end of the Dugs, are the Teats, out of which drops the Milk, which the Infant sucks. The Teat or Nipple is made of the Skin drawn together and boared with little The Teats. holes. It is wrinkled on the outside that the Infant may more easily lay hold upon it, and keep it in its Mouth. Round obout the Teat there goes a Ring or Circle of different Colours in Women, The Circle about the Teats. in respect of their Age and of their being with Child or not with Child etc. In Virgins it is red, in such as are devirginated it is Black and Blue. In Women with Child it is larger than ordinary; and if they go with a Boy it is Black and Blue or red; if they go with a Girl, it is of a whiteish Color. The Medicinal Consideration. The largeness of the Chest is commended as sound and healthful; but a narrow Misshapen Chest. Chest is blamed because it occasions shortness of Breath, because the Lungs are ill housed wanting Room to display themselves. The shape of the Chest ought diligently to be considered by a Physician when he sees any troubled with shortness of Breath. In healthy Persons, that the Chest may be perfectly shaped, it is requisite that it be round in the forepart and not sharp, and that it be straight before and behind; if it prove crooked, there is a fault in the Backbone, of which we shall speak in our Doctrine of bones. Terence blames the affected Care of Mothers who straitened the Chests of their young Daughters, that they might become Slender and small in the waist. [Such are ●…ghtly termed Wasp-wasted Wench's, because they seem divided in the middle▪ like a Wasp or Bee.] A misshapen Chest by reason of the Crookedness of the Backbone is more frequently By Crookedness of the Backbone. seen in Women than in Men, because they are the weaker Vessels. These Crookednesses we endeavour to correct with a firm Pair of Bodies, made either of hard Leather, or of strong Linen with Whalebones sowed between, or of very thin Plates of Iron. Also the Backbone is daily by contrary motious bowed the other way. Some are born thus Misshapen, and they are incurable, let the Rectifiers of Crookedness do what they c●…▪ Many times Rheums fall upon the Muscles of the Back▪ bone, which draw the Vertebraes awry, whence proceeds a misshapen B●…-bone and consequently a Crooked Chest, because their shape depends upon the shape of the Backbone. To the evil shaping of the Chest appertains the falling down of the Breast, or the By falling of the Breast. bowing in of the Sword-like Gristle, which hurts the Stomach and provokes vomiting, and also shortness of Breath by hurting the Midrif; therefore this Gristle ought speedily to be lifted up and restored to its place. Baptista Codron●●us and Ludov●cus Septalius have treated of this Disease. The Diseases of the Cavity of the Chest are Empyema, or a collection of quittor Empyema. Dropsy. within the said Cavity, and the Dropsy of the Breast: all which Diseases require a perforation to be made between the fourth and fift Rib of the Chest on that side in which the Humour is contained. Sometimes winds do so violently distend the Lungs, that the Patient is in danger of Choking, unless the Chest be opened by the Perforation afore said, which is often practised at Paris to the great benefit of the Patients and easing of the Chest; although no watery Humours come forth, but only wind, which Issues violently, with a noise. Those whose Chests are distended with wind, are by Hypocrates termed Pneumatiai. The Dugs are to be considered at divers seasons, in a Virgin Marriageable, in a Condition of the Dugs. Married Woman, in a woman with Child, and in one that lies in Child▪ bed and giveth Suck: because in these several times they are subject to several Diseases. In ripe Virgins fully Marrigable, the Dugs are firm and solid. They become more soft and In a marriageable Virgin. swelling, when they are transported with a burning desire of carnal Embracements: and by how much the higher they swell without pain, and the fuller Orb that they make, strolling and Kis●ing one another, the greater is their desire after bodily Pleasure, and it may be guessed that they have tasted the Sweetness of Mans-Flesh. If when the Dugs are pressed, Milk drop forth, it is a sign of the Parties being with In a married Woman. Child, though Hypocrates accounts it but an uncertain Sign. The Dugs of a Married woman which were raised with the Ardency of fleshly lust, do sink and fa● by little and little. Women that have large strutting Dugs are termed in Latin Mammosae Mulieres, and they are of an ho● Con plexion, lustful and lovers of Wine and good Liquor. If they happen to be of a cold Complexion, the swel●ing of their Dugs, comes from an Wheyish Humour which they suck in like Sponges. So says Hypocrates. Large and ponderous Dugs, do hinder Breathing, by burdening the Chest. So the swollen Breathes of Ancient Virgins and married women, are liable to the same Diseases. For either by reason of a Flux of Humours or of some bruise, they are Inflammation of the Dugs. Impostum. inflamed and impostumate: sometime they become Scirrhous and Knobbed as it were with the Kings-Evil, by reason of the Kernels; and then a Kernel or two, if they be movable, aught to be taken clean away, by cutting the Skin before they Scirrhus. cleave to the Fat, the Disease increasing and creeping on to infect other Kernels: Hence comes an incurable Cancer; Because the Dugs are full of Kernels and spongy, Cancer. and therefore ordained by Nature to receive superfluous Humours. So that such Women as have them dried and shrunken up, are unhealthy and much troubled with spitting. The Dugs of a Woman with Child, some time after her Conception, do swell by In a woman with child. Distension by blood. little and little, by reason of the flowing back of the Menstrual blood, and they drop a mil●y Whey: but in Child bed women, they become yet bigger, by reason of a greater afflux of blood, than the Dugs are able to contain. From this distension springs a Fever, on the third day after they are delivered, which lasts a day or two, or longer; unless the Milk be forced back, or some Child suck the Dugs. This Milk is called in Latin, Colostrum, and many are afraid to nourish the Child therewith. Yet Spigelius has proved, That this first Milk is no bad milk, and that a Mother ought not to refuse to nourish her Child therewith. If in a Woman with Child, the Dugs are liable to Inflammation, Tumours, and Ulcers; In a woman that lies in. much more are they so in a Childbed Woman, and one that gives suck, by reason of the curdling of her Milk. Dioscorides writes, That the swelling of the Dugs is brought down, by the application of bruised Hemlock, which Experience shows to be true. Howbeit, Dodonaeus approves not of this Medicine, by reason of the malignant, and venomous Nature of this Herb, which being applied unto the Dugs, may wrong the Heart. Hypocrates in his epidemics, has this Saying: If the Nipples of women's Dugs, and that which is red in them, be pale, their Womb is diseased. There is a great League, and fellow-feeling, between the Dugs, and the Womb, Consent of the wom● & dugs▪ how caused? by reason of two Veins, viz. The Vena a T. 2. f. 9 d. T. 12. f. 1. C C. □ ▪ Mammaria, or Dug-Vein; and the b T. 2. f. 9 e. T. 12. f. 1. E E. □ Epigastrica: and also by the Venae c f. 1. l l oh o. □ Thoracicae, or Breast-Veins, which are Branches of the Vena d f. 1. A B. etc. □ Cava, which in the bottom of the Belly, affords the Hypogastrick e f. 1. ξ ξ. □ Vein unto the Womb. The Ancient Surgeons were wont to cut off Cancerous Dugs with the Incision Knife; but because it luck's not well, women are not willing to undergo so cruel a Remedy, neither do our Surgeons practise it. Chap. 3. Of the External Parts of the Chest. THe proper Containing Parts are boney, musculous, or membranous. The Proper containing parts. boney Parts are of four sorts, viz. Twelve f T. 10. f. 2. 1, 2, 3, etc. □ Ribs, two Claviculae, or g f. 1. f. T. 21. f. 1. B B. □ Channel-bones, the Sternum, or h T. 10. f. 2. A A. □ Breastbone, and the twelve Vertebrae, or i T. 10. f. 3. □ turning Joints of the Backbone, of which we have spoken in ou● Osteologia, or History of the Bones. The Musculous parts, are either external, or internal, at least placed between the bones. The External musculous parts, are divided into Muscles proper to the Chest, or such as are referred to other parts; such as the Musculus a T. 10. f. 1. A B. □ Pectorali●, or Breast-Muscle; Serratus b f. 1. E. □ minor anti●●s, or the smaller fore-side Saw-Muscle; and the greater Saw c f. 1. C D. □ Muscle, or Serratus major; the rest belong unto the Chest, of which we shall speak in our Myologia, or History of the Muscles. The Internal musculous Parts are, the Intercostal Muscles, both d f. 1. H H. □ internal, and e f. ●. G G. □ external; which are placed in the spaces between the Ribs, as their name imports. Chap▪ 4. Of the Pleura, Mediastinum, and Pericardium. THat continued membranous Part which encloses all the internal parts of the The Pleur●▪ what it i●. Chest, and bestows Membranes upon every one of them, like the Peritoneum, is termed f f. 5. A A. □ Pleura; which being every where g f. 5. C C. □ stretched out under all the Ribs, is firmly joined to the bony Parts, and to the Midrif. Because of its thickness, it is It's thickness accounted double; but it cannot be demonstrated to be so, without tearing. In Diseases of the Chest, when it swells, its doubleness is easily separated. Being on either side reflexed unto the Back, and rising up unto the Breastbone, it is h f. 4. B B. □ reduplicated, and makes the i f. 4. A A. □ Mediastinum, and leaves within itself a certain void The Mediastinum, what it is? space, full of threads, which also comprehends the Heart, and the Pericardium: it is noths●g else, save a Production, or a doubling and folding of the Mediastinum. This Cavity of the Mediastinum, is diligently to be observed, as that which helps It's Cavity. to form the voice as an Echo to beat back the sound: it does likewise separate the bulk of the Chest into two Cavities, and divide the Lungs one from another. The Mediastinum is fastened unto the Claves, and the Midrif, by reason of the Pericardium, which is circularly knit unto the a T. 10. f. 6. F F. f. 7. G G. □ Circulus Nerveus, and the Breastbone; and by this Artifice, the Mediastinum, by help of the Pericardium, does hold the heart suspended, and becomes the band of the Midrif itself. Now the b T. 11. f. 1. A. f. 2. A. □ Pericardium is the Bag, or Case of the Heart, which contains a watery Humour The Pericardium, what it is? to moisten the Heart, from which it is round about so far distant, as is requisite that the Heart may freely move itself. If the Pericardium, or Heart-case has no proper Coat of its own, yet it does at least borrow one from the Mediastinum, which compasseth it about. By reason of the near conjunction of the one unto the other, the membranous substance is no thicker, than the Membrane of the Mediastinum in other places. The Medicinal Consideration. Because Contraries compared together, are the better understood, having seen Diseases of the Costal muscles, i● the Natural Constitution of these Parts, let us now take a view of their Preternatural Dispositions, or Diseases. The Muscles, as well those that are spread upon the Ribs, as those which are placed between the said Ribs, which are subject to divers Diseases, caused either by the Flux of Humours▪ from other parts, or by Humours collected in, and about the said Muscles. They undergo divers Tumours, Inflammations, Impostumes, Rheumatic pains, springing from a serous, or wheyish Humour; all which do produce sharp pains in Pains of the ●●des. How known from the Pleurisy. the sides, with a Fever, and sometimes with a dry Cough, which imitate the Pleurisy; wherefore the difference must diligently be marked, lest we apply the same Remedies to these pains of the sides, which are proper to a Pleurisy. Hypocrates has observed this Difference; and after him Duretus, the Ghost of Hypocrates, and his Faithful Interpreter: For every Pleurisy is a pain of the side; but every pain of the side, is not a Pleurisy, or at most, but a bastard Pleurisy. But some will say, both Diseases require the same Cure in respect of blood-letting, because the passage is easy for the Humours to go from the external parts, unto the internal. I do not deny that blood is to be taken away, but not so much, and so often, as in a true Pleurisy. And therefore Hypocrates in a pain of the side, was wont first to make use of Fomentations, that he might try whether the pain was in the side, or in the Membrane called Pleura; for a simple pain of the side is eased by How they differ in Fomentations, but the Pleurisy is thereby enraged the more, in which there is a continual Fever, an Inclamation, a Cough, and a pricking pain of the side. And therefore the pains of the side differ in Situation, and in matter; because Situation, one is ●eated in the Membrane a T. 10. f. 5. A A. □ Pleurd, and the b f. 1. G G. H H. □ Intercostal Muscles; another in the grea●●● Muscles, which are spread upon the Ribs, such as are the c T. 10. f. 1. A B. □ Pectoral Muscle the d f. 1. C D. □ Serratus major, and e T. 10. f. 1. E. □ minor, the f T. 14. f. 1. C C D D. □ Latissimus, and the Muscles of the g T. 14. f. 1, 2, etc. □ Back. They differ also in Matter, because wind, or wheyish Humours, or blood does Matter. insinuate itself into the greater external Muscles, and is carried likewise, or slips down from the Brain, by the Veins termed h T. 12. f. 1. l l. o o. □ Thoracicae, or Chest-Veins: But the Humour which does possess the Intercostal Muscles, is brought by the small Branches of the Vena i T. 12. f. 1. a a a etc. □ Azygos, or Vein without a Fellow, and does produce the true pleurisy. It is not necessary that the Humour be contained within the Membrane Pleura, because it is not capable, nor apt to receive the Flux when the pain gins; but the Humour being shed abroad into the space which is between the Muscles, and the Pleura, it becomes partaker of the pain, which is more sharp in the Pleura itself, by reason of its Nervous, or Sinewy Nature, than it is in the Musculous Flesh. The Action of the Chest, is motion, ordained for Respiration; which motion, is governed by Muscles and Nerves which are subject to the Palsy and Convulsion. To the Convulsion of the Muscles of the Chest, does belong the stoppage of the breath, difficult breathing, and Hypocrates his double-stroaked fetching in of the wind. The Membrane Pleura being inflamed with a continual Fever, a pricking pain in Whether there may be a Peripneumonia, or no? the side, and a Cough, makes a Pleurisy, which some late Physicians do think, never lasts long, without a transmission of the Humour into the Lungs, which often cleave to the Pleura, yea, and that the Humour passes over by a Metastasis into the Lungs▪ and causes a Peripneumonia, or Inflammation of the Lungs. Zecchius was the first that broached this Doctrine in his Counsels, building upon the Authority of Hypocrates; others did in their writings, confirm it by reasons, as Vincentius Baronius, in his Book de Pleuropneumonia. And this Combination of two Diseases of the Chest in one, they term Pleuropneumonia, that is, the Side-and-Lung-sickness; which thing I gave an hint of, before them, in my Anthropography, or Description of Man's Body, in the Chapter which treats of the Lungs. That place of Hypocrates, is worthy consideration, which many have undertaken to explain: I for my part do thus interpret the same. Oft-times the Lungs in one, or both the sides, do cleave unto the Membrane which How it is caused, according to our Author. covers the Ribs: or if they do not cleave thereunto when the side is first inflamed; the Membrane Pleura being soaked, and made softer by the afflux of Humours, does sweat out a clammy wheyish Humour; so that the Lungs when breath is drawn in, filling the whole Chest, do at length stick unto the said membrane Pleura, and there cleaving is made the faster by the heat of the Fever. Neither does the motion of the Lungs hinder that same cleaving too aforesaid, because when the pain is increased, the Patient breathes short for fear of augmenting the same, and so the Lungs are moved very little: whereupon the Lungs are fastened to the part pained, and then the Pleurisy turns into a Peripneumonia, or Inflammation of the Lungs, or both these Diseases are joined together; and therefore there follows an easy Expectoration, first of a bloody Humour, by reason of a light Exulceration both of the Pleura, and of the membrane of the Lungs, and then of the rest of the matter, which comes partly out of the side, partly from the Excrement of the Lungs Nutriment, or from the impurity of the mass of blood, passing by its circular motion through the Lungs: whence it is, that so great a quantity of a Choleric and Phlegmatic Humour flows, which is spit up with Coughing. But if the Lungs do not cleave to the side, the blood-watry Humour being shed into the Cavity of the Chest, and scarce ever drawn back again, there is bred an Empyema; which if it be not voided of itself, it must be let out by opening the side; which Operation sometimes luck's well. So that according to the Doctrine of Hypocrates, whom Herophilus (as Caelius The difference of a Pleurisy, and Peripneumonia. Aurelianus relates) and Cornelius Celsus do follow, there is a true Pleurisy, if there be joined thereunto, an Inflammation of one side of the Lungs; if both sides be pained, it is a true Peripneumonia, or Universal Inflammation of the Lungs, because the whole Lungs are affected both in the right, and left side; and continually beating upon the Ribs, they are apt to infect them with the blood-watry Humour wherewith they abound. Wherefore the Pleurisy, and the Inflammation of the Lungs, are Diseases of a brotherly Kindred, which help one another to destroy the Patient, or to comfort him, according as the Constitution of the Lungs is weak or strong; and as they are assisted with Remedies, especially, liberal blood-letting. Neither can the matter causing the Pleurisy, be transferred, or propagated by any other ways into the Lungs by any Metastasis, or Epigenesis. Howbeit, we see in dead bodies, the diseased Pleura ten times thicker than ordinary, which argues that the seat of the Disease was there. I deny not but that it may be communicated to the Lungs, and that the Pleurisy may degenerate into a Peripneumonia, or Inflammation of the Lungs, after the manner aforesaid. Touching blood-letting, there has been for an hundred and fifty years, an eager On which side the blood is to be taken away in a Pleurisy? contention between the Modern Physicians of France, Italy, and Germany, from what part blood is to be drawn in a true Pleurisy, whether on the same side that is pained, or on the other side. At last, the Opinion of Hypocrates confirmed with the Authority of Galen, has prevailed, and got Victory over the Doctrine of the Arabian Physicians. The Physicians of Paris, and all true Artists, do follow Hypocrates; for they let blood on the Arm, of the same side which is pained. After three or four times letting blood in the Arm, for Revulsion sake, a Vein may be opened in the Foot; but the diseased side must be first disburdened. In blood-letting, we choose our Vein, because the Patient is sooner eased by opening Out of what Vein? the a T. 24. f. 1. C C. □ Basilica Vena, if we consider the Rectitude of the Vessels by the Fibres: for this Vein is a continuation of the b T. 12. f. 1. B B. □ Axillary Trunk, which produces the c f. 1. l l. o o. □ Chest-Vein, which glides through the external parts of the Chest, and is joined to the Extremities of the Solitary Vein called Azygos. This was formerly declared by Gordonius, a Physician of Montpelier. Ludovicus Duretus has confirmed the same with Histories, in his Commentaries upon the Practice of Hollerius. The Mediastinum is subject to divers Diseases. Its Membranes are inflamed as Diseases of the Mediastinum. Inflammation, Impostume, in the Pleurisy, because of the near Neighbourhood of the Heart, and the communion of substance with the Pericardium. The Quittor therein collected, makes an Impostume, which is drawn out by perforation of the Breastbone, or by an Instrument fitted for that purpose. Winds also are sometimes shut up within the Cavity Wind, of these parts, which do vex, and torment the Chest, and pierce it through as it were. The Pericardium may also be inflamed, with much pain, and no little danger, because Pericardium Inflamed, it is near the Heart; which therefore is subject to frequent Swoon; and then the pulse is quicker, the Fever stronger, the thirst more vehement than in the Pleurisy, or in the Inflammation of the Lungs. Oftentimes abundance of moisture is collected therein, which causes Suffocation, Full of Humour and over-whelms the Heart. If thou canst not draw away the said moisture with such Medicines as purge wheyish Humours; what if you should boar an hole in the breastbone, a Thumbs breadth distant from the Sword-like Gristle? because the Pericardium is there fastened, that the heart may hang pendulous. A doubtful Cure, is better than certain Desperation: it is better to try a doubtful Remedy than none at all, where there is no hope of help, save in some extraordinary providence of God. If there be no water at all in the Pericardium, the Heart pines away by little and Deficient of Humour. Worms. little, as it has been observed in many Patients. Certain it is, that Worms are bred in the Pericardium, which feed upon the Heart, and are destroyed by the use of Scordium. Petrus Salius Diversus has treated of this Disease. Neither is it any absurdity, that worms should be sound within the Ventricles of the Heart; howbeit they are bred in the Vena Cava, and come from thence into the Heart. Seeing the Heart hangs upon the Breastbone, it will not be unprofitable to apply Topick Medicaments, and Fomentations, whether hot or cold, made to strengthen the Heart, unto this part, according as the Disease wherewith the heart is troubled, shall require. ᵈ f. 1. a a a. □ Chap. 5. Of the Midrif, or Diaphragma. THe Method of▪ Dissection has brought us to the ᵃ Midrif, the principal Instrument Midriffs of free Breathing, which separates the Chest from the Belly like a Partition wall, being tied to all the bastard Ribs, to two of the true Ribs, and to the Situation. Sword-like Gristle; and being on this manner oblickly stretched round about, it sends forth two ᵇ fleshy Productions somewhat longish, even to the utmost Vertebrae of the Loins. It is made up of Flesh, and a ᶜ Sinewy membrane, which is placed in▪ the Centre Substance. thereof, the rest of its compass being fleshy, and of the Nature of ᵈ muscle. On that part which is towards the belly, it is covered with a membrane of the Peritoneum: on the other side, towards the Chest, it is compassed with the Pleura. The Sinewy Circle is placed in the midst, to strengthen that part, that it may bear the point of the Heart beating thereupon, and that it may bear up the Liver: for the Liver hangs fastened to the Diaphragma, which is drawn upwards within the Chest, by help of the Mediastinum: for the Figure of the Diaphragma, or midrif, Shape. towards the belly, is hollow, within the Chest, it is bunching out. It receives a T. 10. f. 6. C C. □ Veins, and b T. 10. f. 6. B B. □ Arteries, termed Phrenicae, from the Cava, and Aorta. Vessels It has two notable c T. 10. f. 7. A B. □ Nerves, which taking their Rise between the fourth and fi●t Vertebrae of the Neck, are inserted into the Sinewy Centre of the Diaphragma. Seeing the midrif is a muscle of a peculiar Nature by itself, so that there is not Motion. such another in the whole Body, it has a perpetual motion like the Hea●●▪ if not so fast an one: for it is dilated and contracted; sometimes slowly, and softly; other whiles swiftly, and violently. Sometimes it is moved alone with slow and soft breathing, but more often with the Lungs, when the body is stirred with exercise; but in violent Respiration, it is compelled to follow the motion of the Chest. Hypocrates calls the midrif, the Fan of the Belly, because by its motion of dilatation and contraction, descending and ascending, it fans both those Cavities. Seeing therefore there are two parts of Respiration; Inspiration, and Expiration, How it moves in Respiration. it is worth our Enquiry in which part the midrif is moved. By motion I understand contraction. In the Inspiration, or drawing in the wind, while it is brought unto a right line, that is to say, of hollow, is made straight, than the midrif is contracted. In the Expiration, or letting go of our breath, it is slackened, raiseth itself upwards, and of straight or even, becomes hollow. When it is moved alone, it directs our free Respiration, which is done by an insensible, and invisible motion of the Chest, while the whole body does rest in peace; otherwise, in violent fetching the breath, it follows the motion of the Chest, which is elevated, and depressed (as we see after running) not only by the Intercostal muscles, but also by the greater muscles stretched out upon the Chest, and by the muscles of the Abdomen. In which case the midrif is haled, and forced to follow the violent motion of the Chest. The Medicinal Consideration. The Midrife is sometimes Diseased of itself, sometimes by accident as Sympathising Its Diseases are. Distemper. with the Diseases of other Parts, Of itself it is troubled with an hot or cold Distemper, also with Inflammations and Impostumes. And it communicates its disorders to other Parts neighbouring thereupon, and to the Brain, and upon this Account it is wont to cause a Frenzy. Fernelius saw hard Tumours fixed in the Root of the Midrif, which wasted Tumours. away the Patients by a slow Consumption, without any Frenzy or other Dotage. When the Midrife is Inflamed, an acute Fever does begin to show itself: under Inflammation. the short Ribs towards the Midrif a palpitation or panting is felt, the Hypochondria are drawn together by reason of the Membrane of the Peritonaeum: the Breathing is unequal, sometimes swift, sometimes slow, sometimes great and sometimes little, and at length Convulsions happen. The Midrif being wounded causes the Patient to die laughing, if we believe Hypocrates, Wounds. Pliny and other later Physicians. Wounds inflicted upon the fleshy Part of the Midrif are not so dangerous and deadly, as those in the sinewy or Nervous Part, and therefore Ulysses (in Homer) intending to give the Cyclops a deadly wound, chose the place where the Liver is fastened unto the Midrif, as Galen has observed. In an universal Palsy of the whole Body the Midrif is affected, which is known by difficulty of breathing, Chap. 6. Of the Lungs or Lights. THe Lungs or Lights are the Instruments of breathing and framing the Voice: Their to which end they are framed of a substance light, soft, Spongy, whitish Substance. without, and reddish within, interwoven with many Vessels which are spread through the whole substance thereof; such as are the Bronchia Vessels. or ᵃ Pip●● of the Weazand, and the Pipes of the Vena ᵇ Arteriosa and of the Arteria ᶜ Venosa, which go so in company, that the Bronchia or Wind-Pipes are interposed Situation. between the Veins and Arteries. The ᵈ Lungs are Scituate within the Chest, and do with the Heart fill up Both the Cavities thereof, while they are dilated to fetch in breath; but they leave the Chest Empty, while they are contracted to expel the sooty or superfluous Motion. breath. These interchangable motions of the Lungs are perpetual and never cease from Division. the beginning of our Life until we Breath our last. Nature has Distinguished the Lungs into two Parts, placed in the several Cavities of the Chest, and she has divided each Part into sundry Lobes, Laps, or Scollops, for the facility of motion and for their preservation, for by this means they do more easily spread abroad (as it were) their wings; and one Lap or Scollop being hurt or Shape. corrupted, the other may remain whole and sound. If you take a diligent view of the Lungs after they are taken out of the Chest, you shall see that each Part of each Cavity does in its shape represent the form of an Ox's Hoof, for it is cloven and convex or bunching out in the external Part, and hollow Membrane. in that Part on which it touches the Back. It is girt about with a very thin ● Membrane, which is manifestly porous and full of little holes, that being pressed and overburthened in suffocations, it may disburden itself into the Cavity of the Chest, and also suck in again such Excrementitious moisture, as shall there at any time abound. This Bowel alone is nourished after another fashion than the rest of the Body, Peculiar manner of nourishment. for it borrows its blood from the Heart, from whence it has Vessels and not from the Vena Cava. And therefore those Physicians are shamefully over seen who in Diseases of the Lungs, are wont to say that they are oppressed by an afflux of blood, shed thereinto by an innumerable company of Veins. They cannot receive Humours from the Head unless with coughing, so that where there is no cough, the Lungs are affected only by that blood which comes from the Heart. The Medicinal Consideration. The Lungs are extremely necessary for the maintenance of Life, For we live Excellency of the Lungs. so long as we Breath, and no longer: Nor is it enough merely to breath we must breathe easily, or it will go ill with our Heart and our whole body. For in Diseases, difficult breathing is of great moment, and was more regarded by Hypocrates than the pulse: And Galen composed three admirable Books of Difficult Breathing, according to the Doctrine of Hypocrates, howbeit they are obscure and not to be understood save by skilful Physicians and Anatomists. I will give you a little taste of them, after that I have laid open the Diseases of the Lungs. Because the substance of the Lungs is soft and Spongy above that of the other Why the Lungs are so subject to Fluxions. Bowels, therefore it is more subject to Fluxions than the rest which flow either from the Brain, or from the Bowels, by way of the Heart. They lie in the middle space between the Head and the Midrif, not only between the Hammer and the Anvil, as the Proverb is, but between two Hammers, wherewith they are beat upon and hurt on both sides: whil the Head distils upon the Lungs, and the Liver affords impure or over plentiful Blood unto the Heart, whichthe Heart spews and casts back into the Lungs, whereby they are infected and overwhelmed. Which infection of the Lungs springs not from the Heart, but from the distempered and ill disposed Bowels, which suggest unto the Heart very impure blood, whose viciousness the Heart is not able to correct, save after many Circulations. In the mean whil the Lungs are greivously offended by the foresaid blood passing The chief Diseases of the Lungs. through the substance thereof, for they are subservient unto the Heart as it were in the Nature of an Emunctory Emissary or Common-shore, whiles the filth of the Heart flows unto the Lungs with the Blood, whereupon the Lungs are subject to sundry Diseases. For they are troubled with an hot or cold distemper, with a Choleric and Distemper. Inflammation. Consumtion. Phlegmatic Tumour, and a frequent Inflammation called Peripneumonia, or at least with an inflammatory disposition; also with Impostumes and Ulcers, which bring the Consumption: for from spitting of Blood comes spitting of quitter, and from thence the Consumption. Also they are subject to a certain kind of Push or rising which in the end Push. Vomica. turns into a secret mischievous Impostum termed Vomica, of which few escape. If the Quitter be derived from the Lungs into the Heart, unless it pass readily into the Aorta, it suddenly chokes or stifles the Patient. If it be carried into the right ventricle, it Causes the greater danger, because it cannot be so easily Purged out. Furthermore the Lungs are obstructed in the Asthma either perpetual or coming Asthma by fits, which causes difficulty of breathing, which as it is more or less, is distinguished with different names. The lesser is termed Dyspnea; the greater, It's Kind's. when the Patien cannot breathe save standing or sitting upright, is termed Orthopnaea. Oftentimes the Patient is vexed also with a cough, which is sometimes moderate Cough and sometimes vehement, with great wheezing and ready to choke the Patient, which Springs from a cruel fierce Catarrh or sudden and plentiful Defluxion. Whereupon by reason of the extreme troublesomeness of the Cough which shake● the Lungs, there arises that disposition termed Spadon Vasorum, or a dilatation of the Vessels, being a dangerous and formidable ●ort of A●e●risma. In the Peripneumonia or Inflammation of the Lungs, there is no small dispute Whether Blood-letting is good in these Cases? about Blood-letting, for it is written that Blood must be drawn from the common Veins. Now there is none of those Veins which are usually opened, that communicates with the Veins of the Lungs; neither are there any branches distributed from the Vena Cava into the Lungs: which has by Galen in many places been disputed against Erasistratus. The motion likewise of Nature shows the same: for whereas in Diseases of the Bowels and in burning Fevers the Crisis is wont to happen by bleeding at the Note; in a Peripneumonia there is no such Crisis, because the Veins of the Nose from whence blood is wont to Issue, have no Communion with the Lungs. If it be true that Blood naturally does pass from the right Ventricle of the Heart unto the Lungs, that it may be brought into the left Ventricle, and from thence into the Aorta: and if the Circulation of the Blood be acknowledged, who sees not that in Diseases of the Lungs, the blood flows thither in greater quantity than ordinary, and oppresses the Lungs, unless it be first liberally taken away, and afterwards affirmed. at several times, a little at a time be let out, to ease the said Lungs: which was the advice of Hypocrates, who when the Lungs were swelled, did take blood from all Parts of the Body, from the Head, Nose, Tongue, Arms, Feet; that the quantity thereof might be diminished, and the Course thereof drawn from the Lungs. He himself in Diseases of the Lungs, bids us draw blood, till the Body were Blood-less, and in one that had a Consumption, when he saw that the corruption of the Blood infected and corrupted the Lungs, he took away blood in so great a quantity, that the Patient's body remained quite empty of the same, in a manner. Supposing that the Blood circulates, the Lungs are easily emptied by Phlebotomy. If the Circulation be denied, I cannot see how blood may be from thence drawn back; for if it should flow back by the Vena a T. 11. f. 2. E E G. □ Arteriosa into the b T. 11. f. 3. D D. □ right Ventricle, the c T. 11. f. 4. B B B. □ Sigma shaped Valves do hinder it, and the d T. 11. f. 3. C C C. three forked little Valves, do hinder the recourse thereof, from the right Ventricle of the Heart into the Vena Cava. And therefore when the Veins of the Arms and Feet are opened, blood is drawn from the Lungs by reason of the Circulation thereof; and consequently the Opinion of Fernelius comes to nothing, namely that in Diseases of the Lungs, blood should be taken rather from the right Arm than the left; because the blood cannot return into the Vena Cava, save by breaking two doors and Bolts, placed in the Heart. Ulcers of the Lungs do often happen by reason of a fierce cough, caused by very Some Causes of Consumption of the Lungs. sharp Serosities, or by spitting of Blood: which if it come from an opening of the mouths of the Veins by reason of Abundance of blood, it is not so much to be feared, as when it proceeds from eating asunder the Coats of the Veins, by the acrimony of Humours. Nature in this case, out of Pity, that our life might be preserved, ha● distinguished Why the Lungs are distinguished into Lobes or Laps. the Lungs into divers pipes and sundry Lobes, Laps or Scollups that the infection might not spread over the whole Body of the Lungs, which is usual in all continued or evenly united bodies. And therefore we see many that have Ulcers in their Lungs do live long, if they have but an indifferent Care of themselves. If the Circulation of the blood be allowed, so that it passes often through the A twofold Circulation of the Blood. Lungs, & not through the Septum Medium or Partition-Wal of the Heart, we must maintain a two fold Circulation of the blood: the one is performed by the Heart and Lungs, whiles the blood spirting from the right Ventricle of the Heart is carried through the Lungs that it may come unto the left Ventricle of the Heart, (for it is squirted out of the Heart and returns thither again) the other is a longer Circulation, by which the blood flowing from the left Ventricle of the Heart, compasses the whole body by the Arteries and Veins, that it may return into the right Ventricle of the Heart. He that approves of one of these Circulations, cannot deny the other. The Lungs as it were do hang upon and are firmly fastened to the claves and the Brest-bone, for they do not depend or hang by the Aspera Arteria, for so in a violent Cough and when the Lungs are overburdened, the Weasand or Windpipe and Parts fastened thereunto would be torn in pieces. Howbeit the Lungs and Heart being inflamed (according to Hypocrates) if the Lungs fall to one side, the Patient faints away, lies Cold and senseless and dies within the third or fourth day. If the Heart be not inflamed, the Patiented lives longer, and some escape. Seeing the Substance of the Lungs ought to be light and soft to Facilitate respiration; Why Old People are short Breathed. and in old, People it becomes dry and hard, either through the dryness of their temper, or by being filled with Phlegm: this is the reason of that shortness of Breath we see in Old Men, which ushers them to their Grave. Chap. 7. Of Respiration, or fetching of Breath. THe proper action of the Lungs is breathing: which we must consider how it Necessity of Respiration. ought to be in bodies that are in health, that we may discern faults thereof, when it is depraved. In our whole Practice, especially if you regard acute Diseases, their is no Disease or Symptom so usual as difficulty in breathing. It is well for the Patient, if in all Diseases, especially acute ones, he breathe easily, because life is inseparable from Respiration, according to Galen in his 6. Book of the Parts Diseased. And if with all the Patient Sleeps kindly and sweetly, and feels no pain in the noble Parts of his body, it is to be hoped the Disease will end well, because Hypocrates never knew any one die, in whom these three conditions were found. Now Respiration or breathing is twofold, free, or forced, free is that whereby the It's twofold. Air is gently drawn in and Issued out, without any remarkable motion of the Chest. And this depends only upon the Midrif, the Ribs and whole Chest never moving: Free, and Forced. unless happily the lower bastard Ribs are gently stirred; and this kind of breathing is truly natural. The second sort of breathing, which is forced and violent: is partly natural, partly against Nature. Natural, when it depends upon our own power, so that we can make it quicker or slower, as when we puf out our wind with a long blast, and when we hold our breath. It is against Nature, when it depends not upon o●r will, but upon the violence of the Disease. In this kind of Respiration the whole Chest is moved by all the Muscles, and the Midrif, to avoid the oppression and suffocation of the Lungs and Heart, which desire Air to cool them, and that their smoky Sooty Vapours may be expelled. There are two parts of Natural Respiration; Inspiration, and Expiration. Inspiration is caused by drawing in the Air, and the dilatation of the ●hest by the Parts of Natural respiration Inspiration Expiration Ascent thereof: Expiration, is a breathing out of fuliginous, or sooty Vapours, the Chest being drawn together by the descent thereof. Between these two motions, is interposed a twofold Pau●e, or Rest, viz. The space between the drawing in, and blowing out of the breath; and the like space between the blowing out of the breath, and the drawing it in again, as in the Pul●e there is a twofold Rest, termed Perisystole. In Respiration, or breathing, Galen writes that three Organs are to be considered: It's three Organs. The Principal Mover, viz. the Heart; The Secondary Movers, namely, the Muscles; and the Things moved, viz. the Chest and Lungs. The Organs by which the motion is performed, are the Animal Spirits, and the Nerves. Now that unnatural, and disordered breathing, may be discerned, we must principally Wherein Natural Respiration consists. learn to know, wherein the Natural manner of perching breath, does consist, viz. In the moderation, and equability of Inspiration, and Expiration, and of those things whereby Respiration is performed. Now these are four; Motion, Rest, that which is moved, and that which by the motion, is drawn in, and carried forth. That Respiration will therefore be moderate, wherein we shall observe a Mediocrity of motion and Rest, and of the distension of the Chest, and of the matter itself, which is drawn in, a●d breathed out, and wherein Persons in Health appear no ways changed from what they were wo●t to be. And this Natural Respiration ought to be the Rule of the contrary, which is not Differences of unnatural Respiration. natural, viz. of the hurt Respiration, and of that which is in moderate. Now Respiration is hurt as many wa●es as there are parts which make up Natural. Respiration, viz. Motion, Rest, Swiftness, or Slowness. So that he hurts of Respiration, are these following, namely, Defections from Natural Motion; Rarity, and Frequency of the Rest; Greatness, and smallness of Inspiration and Expiration; Plenty, and penury of the matter drawn in, or breathed out, with cold, or heat. Wherefore all difficulty of breathing, consists in Magnitude, or Paucity; Frequency, or Rarity; Swiftness, or Slowness; and consequently, Respiration is said to be faulty, when it is too great, or too little; too slow, or two swift; too frequent, or too rare; too hot, or too cold. Also these Defections, as well in excess, as defect, are to be considered, either in both parts of Respiration, or in one alone; also some are little without, and great within; others great without, and little within: and some ar● great, swift and frequent; others contrarily, are little, seldom, and slow; and some are doubled, both in drawing, and rendering back the breath. These are the Compound Differences of Respiration hurt. If Respiration fail, the Question is, Whether Perspiration can supply the defect Whether Perspiration may supply the use of Respiration? thereof? Galen ●aies it may, and he describes Perspiration, to be an eva●uation of Spirit, or Air, by the Arteries which are dispersed into the Habit of the Body, by receiving in of Air, and expelling fuliginous Vapours. For Hypocrates has written that the whole body is perspirable, within and without. And the Author of Transpiration, or Perspiration, is counted to be the Heart, the Instruments are the Arteries; the Pores of the Skin, are the Passages by which the Transpiration is made. But I very much doubt, whether Perspiration can supply the Office of Respiration for a time, the Heart not being moved, because I cannot persuade myself, that the Air can pass so far as the Heart, by the small Arteries, unless they did gape very wide, seeing it would meet with the Arterial blood, to stop its course. The Arteries may indeed expel the sooty vapours of their blood, but it is hard for them to draw the A●r in again. And if Perspiration be hindered by suppression of the smoky vapours, then putrid Fevers are wont to arise; as Galen has observed in Book 11. of his Method. In which case, blood letting is good for Ventilation, and must be repeated, if need be. Unnatural Respiration, is sometimes necessary in those that have their Health, to Unnatural Respiration sometimes 〈◊〉 in healthy persons. expel smoky vapours by forcible blowing out of the breath; or to expel the Excrements of the Bell●, or to force out a Child by holding the breath. exsufflation, or forcible puffing out of the breath, answers to Expiration; and holding of the breath is a long Inspiration, as much as the party is able to endure, for some necessary use; and it is performed (which is strange) by one very small muscle, which shuts the Arythenois, and the Glottis. Chap. 8. Of the Heart. THe Heart is the Principal, and most Noble Bowel of the whole Body, the Nobility of the Heart. Fountain of Life-giving Nectar; by the Influx whereof, the virality, or lively force of all ●he parts, is recreated, and cherished; It is the first that lives, and the last that dies: by the benefit whereof, all the parts of the body do live, and subsist. And therefore it is, that Nature has framed this principal Part with admirable Workmanship, both without and within, of a a T. 11. f. ● B. □ fleshy substance, strong, and thick, It's Substance interwoven with all sorts of Fibres, and because it is the Seat of Native Heat, lest it should become dry, and parched up, she h●s moistened it with fat placed round about, and wa●ered the same by cu●cumfusion of a wheyish Liquor. It is situate in the middle of the Chest, hanging by the a T. 11. f. 4. A A.▪ Mediastinum, and b ●. 11. f. 1. A.▪ Pericardium. It's Situation. For those two parts do join in this Office, as hath been said in our Chapter of the Mediastinum. The Heart is alwa●es of the same greatness; in some strong men it is more small Bigness and solid, than ordinary: in feebler Per●ons i● is greater, and of a loser substance, as ●n some men, and frequently in women. It is shaped like a Pineapple: having a broad bottom, and growing pointed towards Shape the top. The broad end is called the Basis, or bottom, which receives four Vessels; the Vena c T. 11. f. 1 C.▪ Cava, running through the Breast, and opened near the Heart, Vessels. and fastened thereunto; the Vena d f. 2. E E. G. □ Arteriosa; the e f. 1. M. f. 2. C. □ Aorta; and the Arteria f f. 2. H H. □ Venosa. In the Basis we find little Cases, or Covers placed by the Vessels, which carry blood into ●he Heart: They are called 〈◊〉 Cordis the g f. ●. C C.▪ Ears of the Heart, Ears. and are hollow. In grown persons, the right Ear is larger than the left: but in the child in the womb, and all Infants, the left Ear is larger than the right. The other end of the Heart is termed the Conus, or pointed end. There appear Veins and Arteries h f. 2. by B. □ creeping upon the surface of the Heart, which seem ordained to repair the Fat as it spends. Before we proceed to the inner Structure of the Heart, we are to consider how it Action, viz. the pulse. is moved: For its Action is Motion, or Puliation; because look what blood it receives in, it drives the same out by pulsation. There are therefore two parts of the Heart's motion; Systole, and Diastole; or Systole. Diastole. Contraction, and Dilatation: when it takes in blood, it is dilated or widened; when it expels the same, it is contracted, or drawn together: between both which motions, there intercedes a pause, or resting time, which is termed Peri-Systole. How these motions are caused, is a doubtful Question. Rejecting the various Opinions of others, I will tell you how I conceive this moti●ion 'Cause of the pulse, according to our Author. is performed. It is probable, that the Heart being widened, cannot receive the blood, unless its dilatation be made by drawing back the Basis thereof to the Cone; that the Vessels may shed their blood, and the heart draw the same to itself. In the Systole the heart is contracted, and the blood received, is thrust out; and then the Heart becomes narrower, and longer than it was before. And because it is shut up in the Pericardium, or Heart-case, which is fastened circular-wise to the Sinewy Centre of the Midrif, with its Cone, or pointed end, it smites the Nervy Centre of the Midrif, and with its Basis, or broad end, and the Aorta sticking out, it smites the Breast at the same instant, when it is extended, and prolonged. This perpetual motion of the Heart, though it depend in respect of its production, How necessary the circulation of the blood is to continue the motion of the Heart. upon the inbred faculty thereof, yet can it not always continue, save by the coming in of blood, out of which, the Heart frames the vital Spirit: and in case at every pulse the Heart receive one drop of blood, or two, which it casts into the Aorta, and that in an hours space, the Heart pulses two thousand times, it must needs be, that a great quantity of blood, or all the blood in the Vessels, should pass through the Heart within the space of twelve or fifteen hours. Now this quantity may come to fifteen, or twenty pounds of blood, which is as much as is contained in the Vessels, and therefore it must needs be that in the space of twenty four hours, the whole mass of Blood is twice or thrice passed through the Heart, according as the motion of the Heart is quicker, or slower. And that this Circular Motion of the blood, might be performed with the greater Whether the blood do pass from the right Ventricle of the Heart unto the Lungs. commodity, and facility, William Harvey, an English man, the King's Physician, the Author and Inventor of this motion of the blood; and Joannes Walaeus, a Professor of Leyden, and most eager Defender, and Protector thereof, will have the blood to be carried through the Lungs, from the right, unto the left Ventricle of the Heart, not allowing that it should pass through the Septum, or Partition wall between the Ventricles of the Heart; and that the whole mass of Blood, in an hour, or two hours' space, is circulated through the Heart, and the whole Body: which I do not allow of, and I have elsewhere laid down my reasons of the impossibility, and inconveniency of such a motion. The Heart is the Original of Vena Cava. When I had observed that the Trunk of the Vena Cava was separated from the Liver, running continually from the Jugulum, to the Os Sacrum, without any interruption, and that it passed not through the Liver, as we may see with our Eyes, and perceive also by thrusting a small stick thereinto; I came to be of Opinion, that The Liver of Vena Porta. They have different blood in them. the Vena Cava did spring from the Heart, as the Vena Porta takes its rise from the Liver; and that two sorts of blood were contained in those Veins, though both of those sorts are laboured, and wrought in the Liver: the one of these sorts of blood being sent into the Porta, the other by a branch rooted in the Liver, twice as small as the Trunk of Vena Cava, carried unto the Heart. What kind of blood is circulated? The blood which is contained in the Vena Porta, is not circulated, although it have a flux, and reflux within its own Channels, and communicate with the Caeliacal Arteries, which are joined one to another by mutual anastomosis. Within those Vessels, the blood may pass to and fro reciprocally; but it does not run out according to the longitude of the body; neither is it in such a sense circulated. In what Vessels? And therefore the Circulation which is made in the Heart, does borrow its matter from the Liver by the Vena Cava. The Circulatory Vessels, are the Aorta, and Cava; neither do their branches receive that Circulation, because the blood being shed into all the parts of the second and third Region, does remain there to nourish the said parts; neither does it flow back unto the greater Vessels, unless it be reveled by force, when there is great want of blood in the larger Vessels, or when it is stimulated into some violent motion, and so flows unto the greater Circulatory Vessels. After what manner? And so the blood which is brought from the Liver unto the right Ventricle of the Heart, does pass through the Partition wall of the two Ventricles, into the left Ventricle. I confess that in a violent Circulation the blood is carried through the Lungs unto How the circulation is performed? the left ventricle of the Heart, where it is forcibly ejected into the Aorta, that it may afterwards be carried into the greater Veins of the Limbs, which communicate by mutual anastomosis with the Arteries; and then from the Veins it flows up into the right Ventricle of the Heart, and so there is made a perfect Circulation, by the continual flux and reflux of the blood. So that the blood in the Veins, does naturally, and perpetually ascend, or return unto the Heart, the blood of the Arteries naturally, and continually descends, or departs from the Heart. Howbeit, if the smaller Veins of the Arms and Legs, shall be emptied of blood, the blood of the Veins may descend to succeed in the place of that which is taken away, as I have clearly demonstrated against Harvey, and Walaeus. No man can deny the mutual anastomosis of the Veins and Arteries, seeing that Galen has said it, and demonstrated the same by Experiments, and our daily Experience confirms the same. Hypocrates himself, in his third Book of the Joints, takes notice of this communion of the Veins and Arteries, in a Discourse by itself. How necessary the circulation of the blood is. You see how necessary it is for the blood to circulate, that the motion of the Heart may not cease; and how this Circulation may be performed without confusion, and perturbation of the Humours, and without destroying the Ancient Art of Healing. And therefore the Circular motion of the blood is necessary, to continue the motion of the heart; as in Mils, the Water must perpetually fall upon the Wheel to make it turn about; also to warm again, and restore the strength of the blood, The Utility thereof. which is decayed by the loss of Spirits dispersed up and down the body; whereas in the Heart, it is refurnished with new Spirits: and that the Heart being the Fountain of Native Heat, may be moistened with a perpetual Dew, lest by little and little, it should parch, and whither away, for want of that dewy moisture, or Life-giving Nectar. By the Circulation of the blood in the Heart, the Causes of Life and Death, are more easily declared, than by the Humidum Primigenium, or Original Moisture bred in the Heart when the Child is form; which is so little that it is soon consumed, and the perpetual motion of the Heart continuing day and night without ceasing, would at length wear away the Substance of the Heart, unless by a perpetual flowing in of the circulated blood, it were moistened, and repaired. Whether the Heart and Arteries are moved at the same time? Howbeit, we must hold that the Heart and Arteries do move by Course, one after another, not being moved at the same instant with the same kind of motion; but taking their turns, and performing their work interchangeably; for when the Heart sends out the blood, the Arteries receive it, and transmit it into the Veins; not that which is expelled the same instant, but that which is nearest the Veins. This being granted, these parts must of necessity be moved one after another, and the swelling motion of the Artery when it rises under our Finger, is dilatation, or widening, and not contraction; although it seem very like the pulse which the Heart makes, when it contracts itself. Having explained the Circulation of the Blood, we must now open the Heart, The right Ventricle of the Heart. which you shall see divided into two Ventricles by the Septum Medianum, or a T. 11. f. ☉. D D. □ Middle Partition: The one is termed the b f. ☉. C C. f. 3. D D. f. 4. C C. □ Right Ventricle, being the wider and softer: The other the c f. ☉. B. f. 5. C C. f. 6. D D. □ Left, being harder, narrower, and compassed with a thicker wall, reaching as far as the Cone, or Point of the Heart, which the Right does not. The Right Ventricle receives the Vena d f. 1. C. f. ♃. E. □ Cava, and the Vena e f. 2. E E G. f. 4. A. T. 12. f. 3. all □ Arteriosa. The Its Vessels. Cava pours blood into the Heart; the Vena Arteriosa carries back all, or a part thereof into the Lungs. To the Orifices of the Cava, are adjoined certain three-pointed f T. 11. f. 3. C C C. □ Valves, or Their Valves. Shutters, which hinder the going back of the blood. The Orifice of the Vena Arteriosa, is compassed with three Valves, or Shutters, shaped like an old▪ fashioned g f. 4. B B B. □ Greek Sigma, which hinder the reflux of the blood. The Left Ventricle receives two Arterial Vessels, the a T. 11. f. 1. M. f. 2. C. f. 5. A. □ Aorta, and the Arteria b f. 2. H H. f. 6. A. T. 1. e. f. 6. all □ Venosa. Which latter, according to the Doctrine of some Anatomists, carries The left Ventricle of the Heart. Its Vessels. blood from the Lungs into the left Ventricle of the Heart, or carries Air prepared in the Lungs, into the said Ventricle, and likewise carries back fuliginous Vapours; howbeit, many do not allow the said use. The Arteria Venosa hath in its Orifice, only two c T. 11. f. 6. C C. □ three-pointed Valves, or Shutters. The Aorta carries back Arterial blood out of the left Ventricle of the Their Valves Heart, and its Orifice is stopped by three d f. 5. B B B. □ Sigma shaped Valves, or Shutters, which hinder the blood from returning back again. It is to be observed that these three-pointed Valves, or Shutters, are membranous near their Vessels; but they depend upon fleshy Pillars, which within the Heart are like unto Muscles, being fastened to the sides of the partition wall, or Septum of the Heart, which remains unmovable, saving towards the Basis, where it is softer, and gives way a little, when the Basis is drawn back, in the Diastole, or Dilatation of the Heart. The Septum e f O D D. medium, or Partition-wall of the Heart is porous, full of little holes, which are sometimes manifestly discerned towards the Cone, or Point of the The Septum Medium of the Heart. Whether the blood pass through it, or no? Heart. It is more probable, according to the Doctrine of Galen, that the blood does naturally pass through the said Septum. or partition wall, than through the Lungs. Howbeit, I deny not, but that in the violent Agitation of the Heart and Lungs, the blood is carried through the midst o● the said Lungs. The Medicinal Consideration. Having finished these Observations, I proceed unto the Diseases of the Heart. The Heart (as Pliny says) cannot endure long Diseases, nor suffer lingering torments. Usual Diseases of the Heart, art, And Galen tells us, That Physicians have not been able to find out, or invent Medicines able to cure an evil, and malignant distemper which has taken hold of the substance of the Heart. Wherefore this part is diligently to be preserved, which suffers not by its own fault, but by the Impurities of other parts wherewith it is infected and corrupted. Wherefore, if the Heart be supplied with pure, and good blood, and be not infected by contagion of the neighbouring parts, he Lungs, and the Liver, it flourishes Swooning most cheerfully, and causes a very long life. But by our Intemperance we suffer it not to continue in Health for the good of the whole Body. And therefore it is exercised with divers Diseases, by the loss of strength, that is to say, of Spirits, or by their Dissipation; such as are Syncope, and Leipothymia, or swooning and fainting Fainting. away, which differ only in degrees: Syncope being greater than Leipothumia. Oftentimes the Heart does counterfeit, and make show of a kind of Apoplexy, but without snorting; neither does it leave a Palsy after it, or any feebleneis of Body, or mind. If this Disease return often with violence, at length it over-whelms and stifles the Heart, not only because the blood is stopped from going forth, by reason of the fullness of the Vessels, but by the Hearts being oppressed by some gross substance of the blood, forcibly crowded into the Ventricies of the Heart, stopping the pulsative motion of the Heart and Arteries, and causing sometime that the Patient cannot speak, and bringing him finally to his Grave. This Disease is as common among the Germans, as is the Apoplexy, by reason of their full, and Championlike habit of body, contracted by their daily Feast, and liberal drinking, especially at dinner, which lasts till within Night, they in the mean time taking no care to abate their Plethoric habit by liberal blood-letting. Nor is it any wonder, if from so great plenty of blood, they fall into an Apoplexy, or the Heart-swooning aforesaid. Hence depends the Explication of the 42. Aphorism of the Second Book. The motion of the Heart is depraved in the Palpitation, or Panting thereof, and Palpitation it is interrupted in Syncope, and Leipothymia. The Ventricles, and Partition, are oftentimes obstructed, being filled with little The Circulation intercepted by obstruction of the Ventricles, Or of bits of Flesh or Fat, wherewith the Heart is choked, the Circular motion of the blood being stopped. Sometimes they stick in the right Ear of the Heart: whence follows Palpitation, or inequality, or Interception of the Pulse. Worms are also bred in the Heart, of which Salius treats. There is a memorable Story of a certain English man, whose Heart was eaten into by a Worm. You may read the Story in Aurelius Severinus. The Circulation of the blood is stopped, not only in the Heart, but also in the The Velns. Veins, when they are stopped with very thick blood, or with blood congealed like the pith of an Elder stick, as I have often seen it after burning Fevers, and as it has been observed by Fernelius. The most frequent Diseases of the Heart are Fevers, wherewith it is inflamed, A Fever. and roasted as it were; so that the Original moisture thereof, becomes exhausted, and dried up: for as Ludovicus Duretus says in his Commentary upon Hypocrates his Coick Discourses. We lose more of our strength by a fever of seven day's continuance, than by the depraedation of our Natural Heat, in seventy year's time: a young man dies in seven days, consumed by a Fever, who might have lived seventy years under the sole Regiment of his Natural Heat. Differences of Fevers. In respect of the Cause, a Fever is, Spirital, The History of Fevers belongs to this place, which I shall dispatch in few words. The Hot Distemper of the Heart, is termed a Fever. The Differences of Fevers are taken from their conjunct Cause, which is threefold; The Spirits, the Humours in the Vessels, and the Humours fixed in the solid parts of the body. From the Spirits, a Fever is termed Spirituosa, or Spirital; from the Humours in the Vessels, it is termed Humoralis; and from the Humours fixed in the solid parts, it is termed Hectica. Though there be three sorts of Spirits, Natural, Vital, Animal; yet is it the Vital Spirit alone, which being inflamed, causes the Spirital Fever. There are four Humoral Humours contained in the Vessels, whence comes four sorts of Humoral Fevers; the Sanguine, the Choleric, the Phlegmatic, and the Melanchollick. But the Hectic Fever is distinguished by three degree: For the simple Hectic arites Hectic, from the fixed Humour, being only inflamed; the middle Hectic is when the said Humour gins to waste; and the Hectica Marasmodes, when it is quite exhausted, and consumed. The Modi of Fevers, or their manner of afflicting, is twofold: for either the In respect of the manner, Continual, Intermittent. Fever is continual, or it intermits; it is putrid, or not putrid; malignant, or well-affected. A continual Fever never ceases burning, till it go wholly away. An intermitting Fever, leaves the Patiented some space of time free from burning. The Cause of the Continualness of a Fever, is the plenty of Morbific matter and its nearness to the Heart, and the distance and paucity of the said matter is the Cause of its Intermission. A Putrid Fever is caused by Putrefaction of the Humours: Putrid, Imputrid Malignant, An Imputrid Fever is caused only by the fervency of the Spirits and Humours contained in the Vessels, or fixed in the solid Parts. A Malignant Fever is caused by extreme Pucrefaction, or by divers Symptoms greivously afflicting the noble Parts: a Well-affected Fever, has none of all these. A great Fever is the Non-malignant. same with a Malignant, and a little Fever differs not from a Well affected. Hence are all the differences of Fevers taken; a spirital Fever is continual indeed, yet lasts but a Day, and is therefore termed Ephemera: a Sanguine Fever is also continual and threefold, Increasing, standing at a stay, and decreasing; Putrid or Imputrid: It is by some termed continens to distinguish it from the rest of the Humoral Fevers. Choleric, Melancholic and Phlegmatic Fevers, are continual, when the Humours from whence they arise do Putrify in the great Veins: when they Putrify in the little Veins, or out of the Veins, they make Intermitting Fevers. An Hectic Fever is also continual, but slow and linger. The Return of intermitting Fevers is termed their fit; the more than ordinary The sit of a Fever. It's Exacerbation. Circuit Tertian Fever. Quartans Quotidians violence of continual Fevers it called their Exacerbation. The beginning of a ●i● is called Invasio, the time of Remission and Exacerbation, of intermission and accession, is termed Periodus or Circuitus, the Period or Circuit. Now the Accessions or exacerbations of Fevers are various according to the various motion of the Humour. They come every third day, by reason of the proper motion of Choler, whence all bilious intermitting Fevers are called Tertians or third day Agues; as the Quartans come every fourth day, because the Melancholic Humour is moved upon that day; as Phlegm is moved every day, whence quotidian Agues are Phlegmatic. Quintan, Septan, Nonan, or sift, seventh and ninth day Agues, as they are exceeding rare, so eaten they not comprehended under any Rules of Art. The Proper Symptoms of the beginnings of Ague-fits, do show the sort of Ague what it is: so a shaking shows a Tertian Ague, A grinding cold fit that makes a man think it would break his bones, argues a Quartan; and for the fit to begin with a mere simple coldness, is the token of a Quotidian. A double tertian comes every day, as the Quotidian does, but with extreme shaking; whereas the Quotidian comes only with a coldness. Confused and implicated Fevers, are made of those Fevers, which we have Confused. now explained. Confused or mixed Fevers, are made by mixiture of the Humours, as a Bastard Tertian is made by a mixture of Choler and Phlegm. But Implicated Implicated Fevers are stirred up by Vicissitude of Humours put into Putrefaction or Commotion, where upon there is observed in them, distinct sits one following another, as in a double Tertian, and in a double and triple Quartan, and in a Semitertian, which is nothing else but a complication of a continual Quotidian and an Intermittent Tertian: and in the Fever called Triteophyaea, which lasts thitty hours and longer. Two Agues are observed to follow one another, so that the first being not quite Erratic finished, another which is worse succeeds and follows the same. But i● these sits are inordinat keeping no certain Course, and returning upon several days, they make such Agues as are termed Erraticae, wand'ring giddy Agues. There are other differences of Fevers taken from the Symptoms, yet so as they In respect of Symptoms. may be reduced to these sorts I have spoken of: as the Fever Epiala, Leipyria, Typhodis, Elodis, Pestilens, Causus, for they are all Humoral, and distinguished by some remarkable Symptoms. In the Fever Epiala there is a sense of heat and cold by reason of the unequal Epiala Leipyria motion of the Morbific matter. In Leipyria, the outward Parts are cold, and the inner Parts burn with Heat, because the Feverish Heat is drawn inwards. Typhodis and Eleodis are, in which the Patient sweats much, without any ease Typhodes. thereby. A Pestilential Fever is no other than a putrid, but it Springs from an extreme and remarkable putrefaction, and so deadly, that more die than recover. Causus is a name signifying extreme Heat and burnning, such as is in a continual Burning Fever. Fever arising from Choler, so that a Choleric continival Fever by way of Eminency is so termed. Cremnodes Febris the Fever so called, is said to proceed from an Inflammation Symptomatical Fevers. of the Lungs: but such Fevers as are caused by Inflammation of the Internal Parts, are Symptomatical, neither are they properly termed Fevers. For here we speak of a Fever only as it is an hot distemper of the Heart primarily affected. Chap. 9 Of the Vessels viz. Veins, Arteries and Nerves contained within the Chest. I Have a few things to speak of one Part of the Trunk of Vena Cava, for In the Chest are Veins. the whole Trunk has been sufficiently explained in our Chapter of the lower Belly. You shall observe that the Trunk piercing through the Midrif, does receive that same a T. 12. f. 1. r r. etc. Hepatick branch which arises from the top of the Liver, and carries Blood Hepatica into the Cava, and from that same Obliqne insertion, unto the opening of the Trunk, in the right Ventricle of the heart, there is the distance of two Finger's breadth. From whence we may gather, that Blood is carried directly from the Liver to the Heart, although it is mixed with other blood ascending by Circulation. That same opening of the Vena Cava, and its cleaving to the right▪ Ventricle of the heart, is contained and to be seen within the Pericardium: which when the Trunk has passed through, it ascends unto the Claves. And therefore you may know, that the blood ascending unto the heart by Circulation, does also come as far as the Throat, and is derived into the upper Limbs, with that blood which descends from the Head by the Veins. You shall observe, that this Trunk does afford no branches to the heart except the a T. 12. f. 2. □ Coronaria▪ but only to other parts of the Chest, and how blood shed out of Coronaria the left Ventricle of the heart into the Lungs, may be reveled by Blood-letting, seeing it has two Doors to be broken open in the heart▪ before it can come to the Trunk of Vena Cava, which hinder the flowing back of the Blood from the Lungs. You shall consider if the b T. 11. f. 3. and 6. B. □ Anastomosis of the Arteria Venosa with Vena Cava he remaining, by which the foresaid Reflux may be made: or whether the blood of the Lungs, ought not to return into the left Ventricle of the heart, that it may be made vital, and then speedily to be cast into the Aorta, from thence to be forthwith delivered over into the Veins. Then you are to search for the Vena c f. 1. D●t. 12. f. 1. a a a □ Azygos or Vein without a fellow, which Azygos Its Valves nourishes the Ribs. In it you shall observe two or four valves or shutters, not feigned and imaginary, but true, interchangeably disposed, which resist the blood flowing in abundantly. I have many times shown those valves, and an inferior branch of this Vein, ending into the Trunk of the Vena Cava, below the Kidneys. For which cause it cannot drink up nor transmit purulent matter into the Kidneys. This branch serves to disburden the Vena Cava above the Heart, if blood do any time there abound, or be contained in any great quantity, within the little branches or twigs of the Azygos, or solitary Vein. Furthermore you shall search out the mutual anastomosis of the twigs of the anastomosis. Azygos o● solitary Vein, with the twigs of the Chest Vein, under the lesser saw-fashioned Muscle, near the Arm-Pi●ts. Hence it comes that in the Pleurisy, the pained side is better disburdened and the pain sooner eased, by opening the Vena Basilica, than any other Vein. After the Azygos or solitary Vein, out of the Trunk of the Cava ascending, the Intercostals arise, on a T. 12. f. 2. b b. □ each side one, if the branches of Vena Azygos, do not reach Intercostals unto the upper Ribs. When the Trunk is come as far as the Claves it produces the Mammaria or Dug-Vein, which is twofold; b T. 12. f. 1. c c. □ internal and external: they are both carried through Mammaria the Longitude of the breastbone unto the Dugs. But the internal being the greater, having transmitted a branch through an hole in the Breastbone, into the Dugs, Runs along unto the Right or straight Muscle, that it may Join itself to the Epigastrica. Hypocrates was wont to open the external, in Inflammation and pains of Parts belonging to the Chest: But now because of the Obscurity of those Veins, that operation is not of use: instead whereof Horsleeches may be applied, or Cupping-Glasses with Scarification. In the parting of the Vena Cava you shall under it observe a great Kernel, placed Thymus a Kernel so called. in the Throat under the Claves like a Pillow, that it may gently bear up and enfold the Subclavian branches. It is called Thymus. In young Animals it is soft, as in Calves, and together with the great Kernel of the Pancreas or Sweetbread, it is eaten as a dainty Dish. By the swelling of this Kernel, Strangulations or a sense of Choking may happen even to Men, but in Women subject to the Mother it is more frequently swelled, and Chokes them if they be not relieved by Blood-letting. Some do reckon up three small Veins which are termed Thymica, Capsularis and a T. 12. f. 4. C. etc. □ Mediastina: whereas notwithstanding the Capsularis and Mediastina, are one and the same Mediastina Vein. From the b T. 12. f. 5. □ Ramus Subclavius, four notable branches do arise. The first is cal-Anterior Cervicalis. c T. 12. f. 4. A. □ Cervicalis the foremost Neck-Vein, which being drawn out upon the Musculi Mastoides, ascends unto the Chin and Waters the fore Parts of the Neck. After this follows the d T. 12. f. 4. C. □ Internal Jugular, being larger than the external, which Internal Jugular. ascends unto the Neck under the Musculus Mastoides, and about the middle thereof, it is divided into three Branches, one of which being greatest and thickest, creeping along the Vertebra's goes under the Skull▪ making its entrance at the hole which is near the Apophysis Styloidea, so as being applied to the lateral Channels of the Meninx dura or Dura Mater, is pours out its Blood and goes no farther. The Second branch creeps through the sides of the Neck and is distributed under the Jaw. The third goes into the Tongue and produces the Ranulae or Veins under the Tongue, the opening of which does wonderfully help in Diseases of the Brain. A Finger-breadth distant from this Vein you have the Externa ᵉ Jugulatis, External Jugular. which creeping as●ant or sloping under the Clavicula, it sends forth two twigs, whereof the one passes Obliquely unto the Delta-shaped Muscle under the Shoulder-point and is united unto the Vena Cephalica; the other arises to the lateral Parts of the Head; where at the corners of the Jawbone it▪ is divided into two, and is distributed into the Jaws and all the Parts which are subjected unto the Jawbone. The Other Portion, being carried behind the Ears, is distributed into the Forehead and hinder Part of the Head, and upon the Temples with manifold branches; and in these Parts, by reason of the Veins, Fernelius did conceive that a serous Humour was heaped together, which flowing down upon the Parts beneath, does breed Fluxions in the Habit of the Body: he conceived likewise that an Issue made, or a caustick applied to the Cavity behind the Ear, did more good, than if it had been made in the hinder part of the Head, because of a branch of the Jugular Vein, reaching unto the Eye. This external Jugular Vein being opened by a skilsul Surgeon in sleepy Diseases, Whether and in what Case it may profitably be opened. is very good, as many Histories do testify: but many will not allow of it, who prefer two or three Horsleeches fastened according to the Longitude of the Vein, as far as the corner of the lower Jaw, where it sticks out and is visible▪ Howbeit you must observe, that the internal Jugular does in the Neck communicate with the external; and there this external Vein being opened, although it reach not unto the Brain▪ yet ●ay it disburden this Part, seeing the internal Jugular is hid, under the Muscu us Masto●d●us and cannot safely be opened. And therefore that sa●e opening of the Jugulars which is so much spoken of, is to be understood of the external Jugular, and not of the internal. And because the Arteries and Veins are always con●guous and coupled together, A●…ries. Cor●…▪ in the same ●…e you shall lo●k for the sr●…k of the ᵃ A●rta ascending. Spr●…ging out of the left Ventricle of the Heart, it does presently even in its Rise produce the two ᵇ Corona●y or Crown Arteries, which do compass the Heart like a Crown▪ These you will not see exactly, unless you cut the Aorta and look into it through the left Ventricle of the heart: if there be only one, you shall ●ind a little Valve plac●d at the O●●fice thereof, as in the Coronary Vein. The Trunk of the Aorta after a little progress, is without the Pericardium divided into Two Branches, the one whereof is termed ᶜ Ascendent, the other ᵈ Descendent. The ascendent is triparted, three Arteries being brought from the same place; that on the right side ascending to the Claves, makes the a T. 12. f. 4. B. □ Subolavia dexira; the Subclaviae other two a●cend unto the left ●…de; the first whereof, is called Ca●…tis b f. 4 a. □ S●●st●a going upwards; the second is named c f. 4. B. □ Subclavia ●inist●a; and a d T. 24. f. 2. A. □ hile a●te● ᵈ Axillaris, Axillaris. when it is come as far as the Armpits, and ●ends forth the e T. 12. f. 4. δδ. □ Arte●●a. Cervicalis, ●●er the Shoulder-point. The Right Subclavian Artery having overpast the Claves, does produce that Artery which i● termed Carotis f f. 4. a. □ Dex●ra, which near the corner of the lower Jawbone, is like the internal J●guiar Vein, divided into two no able branches▪ the g f. 4. c. □ Internal, and h f. 4. b. □ External. They are termed Arteriae Carotides. Sleepy Arteries; Carotides. because they being compressed, do make a man ●al into a ●eep sleep and take away he Voice. Wh●…h I have often demonstrated i● Dogs, and how the ●ame is done b●●ying a Nerve of the sixth Conjugation. Ga●en. in his Book, of the Utility of Respiration, does conceive▪ and proves by Whether the obstruction of the Carotides do cause deep Sleep? making experiment in Live Creatures, that Animals are no way offended by ●●ing o● 〈…〉 the Jugular Arteries; and therefore he refers the Sleepy-Evil to the Jugular Veins. I shall ●ather think, that in Apoplexies and Dead-sleeps the Arteries are stopped, than the Veins. Valverda does 〈…〉 that Columbus made public demonstration in a youth, that deep sleep is caused by compression or constriction o● the Caro●ick Arteries: but he does not tell us how he did it. That the a●cent of the Carotick Arteries and their penetration into the brain by the holes of the Skull may be plainly perceived, you shall put in a very small ●rass W●re that will be●d, with a knob at the end, into the several divisions of this Artery; which may be done and showed, by the vulgar way of dissecting the Brain, beginning from the upper Part, not from the lower Part a●ter the manner of Varoli●s, and in the Neck you shall put your Probe into the Catotick Artery. The Tru●k of the Aorta being writhe towards the left side, and bend downwards The Intercosta●s. again, is born up by the Vertebraes of the back, and in its progress as far as the Os Sacr●…, ou● of each side produces as many Arteries as there are Vertebraes, neither is there ●ound any soliiary Artery to accompany the solitary Vein, but there are such like petty Arteries which supply its place. Within the Chest they may be termed ᵃ Intercoastal Arteries: beneath in the Lumbal. lower be●ly, ᵇ the Lumbal or Loyn Arteries: they insinuate themselves in●o the spinal Marrow by the holes o● the Vertebrae which may be proved by a memorable example in Galen, in his fourth Book of the Parts affected. One out of a vehement Inflammation of the Lungs, fell into a Palsy of his upper Limbs, and the upper intercostal Nerves being anointed, he was cu●ed. I, and my most learned fellow Collegiate, Dr. Merlet, have seen a Palsy caused by Communion of the Arteries & spinal Marrow. translation of the matter of a Pleurisy into the Marrow of the back, which Pal●● freed the Patient from the eminent danger he was in by reason of the Pleurisy. So Hypocrates, in his Coicks, observes, that a Convulsion takes away a Fever, by translation of the Morbi●ick Matter into the Marrow of the Back. The hinder ᶜ Neck Artery may do as much, which waters the Marrow of the Neck. I know not how the Humour which causes an Apoplexy, ●alling through the fourth Ventricle of the Brain upon that Marrow of the back, should bri●g the Palsy into one side more than another: by that way before mentioned, viz. The Cervical and Intercostal Arteries, the serous Humour may be derived into either side. By the same Reason, the serous matter may through the Celiack Artery return back into the Aorta, and by the little Arteries penetrating the Marrow of the back, be derived into the Nerves of the inferior Limbs; and on the other side, the matter of a true or bastard Sciatica, by the continuation of the thickest Nerve, may return into the Marrow of the back, from whence it may be reveled by the Aorta into the Mesentery. In the Chest we are to take notice of eight remarkable Nerves or Sinews. Two Nerves. of which are called Diaphragmatici, two are termed Recurrentes, two Stomachici, and two Costales. Diaphragmatici, the Midrif Nerves, taking their rise between the a T. 10. f. 7. A B. □ fourth and Diaphragmatic ●i●t Vertebrae of the Neck, from that same thick Nerve of the Neck which goes into the Arm; they descend between the foldings of the Mediastinum unto the Nervous Centre of the Diaphragme, or Midrif. The Recurrent b T. 3. f. 1. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. □ and Stomachic, are branches of a Nerve of the sixth Conjugation Recurrent. or pair, whose Trunk you shall seek for in the Neck near the internal Jugular, by the Apophysis Mastoides; where it is cle●t into two branches, the one of which is dis●emmia●ed into the Superior Muscles of the Neck: the other being placed between the internal Jugular and the Carotis descends unto the Claves, where it is parted into two branche●, the Recurrent and the Stomachic. The bending back of the left Recurrent Nerve is found about the place where the Their bending Back where to be ●ound. Aorta is bowed in, and that easily▪ before the Pericardium is opened. You shall find the bending back of the right Nerve, about the right subclavian Artery. I have often seen Dogs live and run, after their Recurrent Nerves were cut, and have myself made public demonstration thereof, but they could not bark a● all; and when these Nerves are tied they deprive the Animal of voice, and being united the voice returns: wherefore it is apparent, that these Nerve● serve to make the voice▪ because they return upwards, that they may be inserted into the He●ds of the Muscles of the Laryn●●, Tongue, and Os Hyoide●, which arise from the Inferior Parts. You shall search for the Stomachic c T. ●. f. ●. III. etc. Nerves beneath the Heart, near the Vertebrae, Stomachic. they ●●e hid within the folding of the Mediastinum, and from them you shall perceive ten or twelve twigs drawn into the a T. 3. f. 8. h h. □ Lungs; and of the small branches of the two Stomachick Nerve● folded and 〈◊〉 together, is made that ●ame Nervorum Mir●●ilis Ple●us, wonderful contexture of Nerves in the upper Orifice of the stomach. Afterwards the Stomachick Nerves creeping along the hinder Parts of the Stomach, are near the Backbone between the two Kidney b T. 3. f. 2. H. □ Joined to the c T. 3. f. 8. B B. □ Costals, so as to make that d T. 3. f. 8. ∧. □ Contexture of Nerves, out of which all those Nerves are derived, which are distributed into the Parts of the lower Belly. All e T. 3. f. 8. B B B. □ Anatomists derive ●he Costal Nerve from the sixth pair, when as in the mean Costal. while, it ari●es from the same poin● of the B●●●n ●rom which the ●●xt pair arises. The costal Nerve, being come without the Skull, is strengthened as it were with a Knot tied about it, and it descends undivided upon the Neck; and when it is c●●● to the three last Vertebrae of the Neck, it is de●ended by another Knot, and grows thicker by addition of three small Nerves; and being slipped down within the ●hest, in its progress near the Backbone, under the Membrane Pleura, it is augmented by additions of other two small Nerves proceeding from the Marrow of the Back. Having pierced the Mid●i●●, it is Joined to the Stomachick Nerves, to make that same Contexture of Nerves, ●●●emb●●ng a Net which is between the two Kidneys. The End of the Third Book. THE FOURTH BOOK OF THE ANATOMY AND PATHOLOGY OF John Riolanus, THE KING'S PROFESSOR OF PHYSIC. Chap. 1. Of the Head. THE H●ad being the Seat of the Soul, the Mans●on▪ House of Why the Head is placed in the ●ig●est place? the br●in is placed a lo●t in the highest part of the Body, as it were the prime Castle, which co●m●●ds, and bears Rule over the whole ●●y. 〈◊〉 says ●●●●ea● was th●● pl●●●d on the top of the Body; because of the Eyes, which are the scouts and Guides of the Body: Aristotle says i● was for to cool the Heart, by that coldness which ●he brain would shed down thereupon. ●A● Head that is well framed, aught to be of an indifferent Size; for a great, and It's Size. a little Head, are disallowed, and dispraised. The Natural Figure of the Head is round, or spherical, son what longish, bunching Shape. out before and behind, with two Eminences, and a little flat, or compressed towards the Temples. The Head is divided into the hairy Part, and the smooth Part, so long as it is Division. whole, and unparted: The smooth part is termed the Face, and thereunto is the Forehead appertaining. The hairy part retains the Name of the Head. The Head is otherwise considered in the History of the Bones: for it is divided into the a T. 15. f. 3. A B C. □ Skull, and the two Jaws, the b f. 5, and 6. □ upper, and the c f. 3. L M N. □ lower; and the Forehead appertains unto the Scull. Again, The whole Head is divided into two direct parts, and two side parts. The External parts of the Head. direct are the d f. 3. A. □ fore part of the Head, which from the beginning of the Hair, arises four or five finger's breadth towards the top or Crown of the Head. After which, the space of two finger's, and as much after the Vertical point of the Crown, where the Hairs turn, is termed e f. 3. B C. □ Vertex: the hinder part is called f f. 4. C. f. 6. A A. □ Occiput; the lateral parts are called Tempora, g f. 3. D. f. 6. B. □ the Temples, or Times; because they discover the Times of a man's Age by their hollowness, hoariness, or baldness. The Head is compounded, and made up of many parts, of which, some a●e external, The consti●●●ing parts. others internal; containing, and contained. The Containing, o● Membranous, or Bony; the contained, or internal, are the Brain, the Cerebellum, or petty brain, the four roots of the Spinal Marrow▪ and such Particles as are included in their Cavities. The first containing part we meet with, is the h f. 1. A A. □ hairy Skin, which has also its Epidermis, The hairy Skin. The fl●shy Membrane. or Scarf-skin. Under the Skin, lies the Fleshy i f. 1. B B. □ Membrane, which is the Foundation, & Seedplot of the Hairs: which if it be Fleshy, it makes the hairy Skin movable, because it sticks close hereunto without any fat coming between. The Pericraneum follows, which does immediately compass the bony Skull. It Pericranium is produced from the thick Meninx, which in Children, goes through the Sutures, at what time they are not firmly closed, no● joined Tooth within Tooth. ᵏ f. 1. C C. □ Besides the Pericranium, there is scraped from the Skull, as from other bones, Periostium the Periostium being a thin Skin, which immediately covers them. Wherefore the Pericranium is not the Periosteon of the Skull▪ but is spread out upon the Skull by a great Providence of Nature, that it might hold fast the Muscles which arise It's use, from the Skull, such as are the temporal Muscle, the strongest in the whole Body, which with its companion, contracts, and lists up the Jaw, and bears greater burdens in some bodies, than the other Muscles acting all together. Also it strengthens, and closely comprehends the Muscles of the hinder part of the He●d. Descending to the Eyes, and stretched out under the Eyelids, it makes the Conjunctive Coat of the Eye. These Membranes being separated, and plucked off, and the a T. 15. f. 1. D D. Skull having its The Skull▪ Cap taken off, it presents itself to ou● sight, being framed together of many bones, which are soyned one to another, by loser, or faster Sutures, or Seams. Sometimes there are no Sutures, or Seams to be seen, when the Skull is one continued bone. But the History of the Skull appertains to that double Osteology, or Bone-story; the one of which has been pr●mised unto this Work, and the ot●●● shall be demonstrated at the end hereof. The Medicinal Consideration. The Head being the Fountain, and Original of almost all Diseases, according to General Diseases of the head Hipyocrates, by reason of Fluxes of Rhewm, which flow from the Head into the in●erior parts, even as low as the Feet, does condole, and has a fellow feeling with all parts. Being placed on the top of the Trunk of the Body, like a Cupping-glass▪ it attracts, and receives vapours which mount from the inferior parts, according to Hypocrates in his fourth Book of Diseases: which vapours, the brain being s●●●gy like a kernel, does drink, and sup in, according to the said Hypocrates, in his Book of Glandules, or Kernels. The Vapours being con●ealed into Water, do fall down, and return up again like a River that ebbs and flows, according to Aristotle; which Hypocrates had taught before him, having in that respect▪ termed the Brain, the Metropolis of a cold, and moist, glutinous, and clammy Humour. If the Shape of the Head be depraved, so that it be sharp pointed, or the longitude Shape depraved. thereof▪ be turned into latitude; such an Head cannot be ●ound and healthy: and therefore either it is diseased, or the principal Faculties are weakened▪ If in Children new born, ●uch a Figure be observed, it may ●e corrected by Art, and with the Hand; as if it be great, and large, when the Child is a month or two old, d●ying Medicines being applied, and Fo●●anels, or Issues made in the Nape of the Neck, the overgreat moisture of the Brain may be dried up; and consequently the Head will become less; which cannot be effected when the Children are grown up. A narrow Head, cannot be by Art enlarged, many Age whatsoever. If the Sutures of the Skull are straighter tha● ordinary, orff there be no Sutures, Over lax, or lose, etc. or they be wider than is ●i●, the Head is subject to Diseases, because the smoky Excrements of the Brain, have nor a free passage. If the Head be more lose and open than is ●it, it is the more exposed in the Injuries of the ambient Air. These Inconveniencies may be remedied by help of Physic, or by wearing a Cap, or by going barehead, as occasion requires. I proceed unto the Particular Diseases of the Parts containing. And first of the Particular diseases. hairy Skin, whose Action is the breeding of Hairs, the efficient cau●e wh●●eo● is a temper moderately hot and dry, and an indifferent Constitution of the Skin; and the internal cause is a sooty Excrement, which thrusting itself for●●bly by the small Pores, gains the form of a thread. The hurting of this Action, is a Symptom of the hairy Skin. The hurt thereof is three-●old, it is diminished in the Disease termed Ophiasis, in which the Hairs fall off from the hinder part of the Head along to the Ophiasis. Forehead, making bald wreaths like those of Serpents; or it is abolished in baldness, and the Alopecia, or Fox▪ fall of the hairs. The Cause of the falling off of the Hair of the Head, is the hot and dry distemper of the Skin, with a naughty and sharp Humour, eating away the roots of the Hairs. The Naughtiness of the Humour is known by the colour of the Skin, and of the blood, which comes out of the Skin being pricked. Baldness is a deprivation of the Hair of the Head, by reason of an Hectical dry Baldness distemper, and hard Constitution of the Skin. A defect of Nutriment, and profitable Humour, or of the fuliginous Excrement, causes this distemper of the Skin. Hence it is that Eunuches, because very moist, do never wax bald. Gray-hairedness is a Symptom of the Hairy Scalp or Skin of the Head, by which Grey Hairs the Generation of Hairs is depraved, so that they grow white before the time. The cause of both these kinds of baldness, as well that which comes Symptomatically, as that caused by Age, is the cold and moist distemper of the Skin, whereby the fuliginous Excrement of the Skin is allayed and tempered. When I say a cold distemper, I mean the weakness of the Natural Heat: whence it comes to pa●s that by sickness and sorrow, many become gray-haired, because the Natural Heat is by both diminished. Ulcers of the Head are either light, and possess the Scarf-skin only, which turns Daddruf into little Scales, Scurf, or Dandruf, when the Head is combed: whence the Greeks term it Pituriasis, the Latins Porrigo: such like Ulcers are either dry and invisible; or they are visible, and manifestly to be seen: their Cause is an hot and dry distemper of the Skin, with a sharp and thin Humour. Ac●or, is a Disease of the Skin of the Head, compounded of a tumour, and an Ulcer; Sor● Head the tumour is known by the inequality, the Ulcer by little holes, out of which flows a clammy Humour; which made Pliny call the flowing Ulcers of the Head, Ceiron, or the Honeycomb. But the Honeycomb, though a tumour, and Ulcer of the Head, yet differs from the former, because it has greater holes, and the Humour that comes out is mattery like Honey, or of the Consistency of Honey. Pl●ny calls them Ulcers congealed together like an Honeycomb. The Cause of both these Diseases, is an hot and dry distemper of the Skin, with a sharp and biting Humour, which invites one to scratch: by scratching, the swelling is increased, and at length Ulcerated, so that the holes break out: Vulgarly 'tis called Tinea, the Moth, because the holes are like those of Moth-eaten Garments. Hydrocephalos, or the Water-head, is a swelling of the Head, caused by a Head-dro●sie. wheyish Humour, collected and shed abroad between the Skull, and the Pericram●●; or between the Skull, and Dura Mater, or within the Ventricles of the Brain filled with wheyish moisture, which runs over as it were on all sides. In Infants 'tis caused by squeezing of the Child's Head at the time of Birth. In those that are grown up, the cause hereof is a cold and moist distemper of the Head and whole Body, or a translation of ●erous humours unto the Head, which generally is swelled, and rai●ed to a vast compass, by the humour under the Sk●n, or included within the Head. P●●ir●asis, or the Louz● Evil, is a Symptom of the hairy Scalp, when instead Lousy Evil. of the ●hicker Excrements, or together with them, L●ce are bred in the top of the Skin, or deep in the same. The Cau●e hereof, is an hot and moist distemper of the Skin, with a putrified humour not very sharp; which makes this Disease commonly subject to Children, and old Phlegmatic Persons. The Temple-Muscles are to be observed, which cover a great part of the Skull, whose wounds or bruises, do cause a Convulsion, and contract, and straiten the Jaw. Chap. 2. Of the Brain. THe Skull being duly sawed in sunder, and the covering removed, the a T. 16. f. 1. □ Brain The Brains. appears, proportionated to the Skull which contained it; such as is the thing containing, such is the contained. Or suppose the Brain gives Figure to the bones when they are soft, than the Skull follows the quantity of the brain, be it great or little. But in case the brain follow not the Natural figure and magnitude of the Head, its conformation is faulty; and consequently sickly and adverse to the internal Senses, both principal, and subservient, wh●ch it hurts in their Actions. The Brain is compounded of a b f. 3. A A. □ Substance soft, waxy, or pliable, whitish: Substance. which because, like a Kernel, it drinks and sucks up humidities, it is therefore by Hypocrates, termed the great Kernel. It is divided into two parts. That which is three times as big as the other, retains Division. the common name of the c f. 6. A A. □ Brain: the lesser part placed in the hinder part of the Head, is termed d f. 6. D D. □ Cerebellum, or the Petty-brain. Both these parts are covered Two Coats, viz. 1 Crassa-meninx. 2 The Tenuis meninx. with common Cover, termed meanings. The first Coat, or Covering, is called e f. 1. A C. f. 2. B. f. 3. H. etc. □ Crassa Meninx; the second f f. 1. B B. □ Tenuis Meninx. The Arabians termed these Membranes, Matres, or Mothers, because they were persuaded, that the other Membranes of the Bo●y, were propagated from these. The first Meninx g f. 1. A A. etc. □ hard and thick, being united to the Sutures of the Head, suspends the whole bulk of the brain; these Connexion's must be viewed when the Skull is taken off. In the thick Meninx are observed innumerable h f. 1. a a. □ Vessels, wherewith it is sprinkled and strewed: they are rather Arterial than Venal, being produced from the Rear Mirabile, being drawn out from beneath upwards, as far as the Channels of the Meninx, where they unload their blood; and therefore it is the Membrane which is seen to beat and pant, rather than the substance of the Brain. Now the Pipes belonging to this Coat, are four; whereof two are lateral, which The Pipes. run along the sides of the Sutura Lambdoides, that they may receive the blood from the internal Jugulars, and from the Neck Veins; or by them, according to the Doctrine of Circulation, the blood may flow back unto the Heart. From the Union of these two Channels, is form a third, longwise, drawn out directly as far as the Nostrils. In the Concourse of the three beneath, there springs a fourth c f. 5. e e. □ Channel or Pipe, which goes into the Substance of the Brain, between the Brain, and the Petty-Brain: it is not shut up in the foldings of the Dura Mater, but there is a great Vein, so called by Galen, which descending into the d f. 3. D E □ former Ventricles, makes the Plexus e T. 17. f. 1. O O R R. T. 16. f. 3. F F. f. 5. f f. □ Choroides, which is dispersed through all the Ventricles, Plexus Choroides. Torcular unto the Basis of the Brain. The Channel which runs longwise, deserves rather the name of Torcular, than the f T. 17. f. 5. F. □ fourth: because from thence, is the blood distributed into the lower parts, by innumerable little Veins, through the turn and wind of the brain. These lateral Channels, neither do the Veins, nor the Arteries go into, and pass through with their Coats, but are terminated at the entrance; and therefore those Channels are rather Arterial, than Venal: for the Brain being of its own Nature cold and soft, ought rather to be nourished with hot, subtle, and Arterial blood, than with such as the Veins afford, being thick, and hard to penetrate. And in case the Vein, and Arterial blood were confused and mixed together in these Channels, they would not pant or beat; and the Pulsation of the Channels demonstrates, that it depends not upon the Body of the Arteries; for there are no●e in that place, but upon the leaping of the blood, after the manner of Arteries. ᵃ T. 16. f. 5. a, & b. □ bf. 2. a a. f. 5. c c. □ Now this Menbrane, namely, the Crassa Meninx, divides the Brain into two parts, as far as the middle thereof, by the Corpus Callosum. This Partition is termed a T. 16. f. 3. A A. f. 5. E E. □ Falx, and being doubled on both sides, it severs the Brain from the Petty-Brain. Falx The Tenuis b f. 1. B B. □ Meninx follows, which immediately encloses the brain, being Tenuis Meninx Why the Brain is full of wind and turn? closely conveyed into the wind and turn thereof; for the substance of the brain, is c f. 1. b b. □ without, after a wonderful manner, full of deep turn and wind, for the lighter passage of the Arteries, which disperse the blood here and there; and therefore Pelops, the Master of Galen, seeing those little Arteries dispersed up and down the Brain, did believe that there was the beginning of the Veins. The Tenuis Meninx is three times so long as the Crassa Meninx, because it passes into the inner Parts of the Brain, and as a Veil it covers and separates, and divides the whole Bulk of the Brain into three Parts. For near upon the upper half of the Brain, which covers the Ventricles being placed upon the Corpus Callosum, it is on both sides Circularly separated and lifted up as high as the Roots of the Marrow of the Back, which do knit together that same upper portion. So that the Brain is divided into three Parts; on each side one over the Ventricles, and the third which includes the Ventricles, being continued, and no ways disjoined. A small quantity of the d f. 2. B B. f. 3. B B. □ Corpus Callosum being cut of, the Two e f. 3. D D. E E. f. 4. C C. D D. □ former and The two former Ventricles. upper Ventricles appear, which in their lower Part towards the basis of the Brain are larger, from whence they take their rise upward, being smaller at the top. They are separated by a Thin Membranous Partition, which is framed of the Tenuis Meninx doubled together, and is called Speculum Lucidum, or the Bright Septum lucidun. Mirror, because it is transparent. a T. 16. f. 3. G. □ The former Ventricles are perforated in the forepart towards Os Ethinoides, that the serosities may flow down from the superior Part● to that place. Above the foremost Ventricles there is spread out a b T. 16. f. 3. b b. f. 4. B. □ Tripartite body, which is termed Corpus Psalloides, or the Welsh Harp, sustained by three Pillars: whereof Fornix. two are c T. 17. f. 1. G G. □ Lateral: turned back about those d T. 16. f. 4. b b. c c. etc. □ Eminencies which Galen calls the Chambers of the Optic Nerves: The other forward e T. 17. f. 1. F. □ Colomne, is placed between the two Ventricles. If you shall follow those two lateral Columns, you will find them to be productions of the Optic Nerves, which within the Ventricles do Join themselves one to another, as in the Basis of the Brain; behind the Choana, they are again united; whence I conjecture that the power of understanding and knowledge, is principally contained, in the former Part of the Brain, and that from thence the Animal spirit is drawn▪ which is administered unto the Eyes. By the Concourse of the two Ventricles Between the two large Hillocks aforesaid, and other subsequent Eminencies, is form a Guttur or Channel, which makes the third f T. 16. f. 4. E. □ Ventricle. In the Basis of which Channel there is seen an g T. 17. f. 1. below Q. □ hole, The third Ventricle. which penetrates into the Choana, to purge out Wheyish Phlegm into the throat, near the Palate. In the sides of this Channel, the Circumjacent Eminences do form, some the Nates Testes: Anus. h T. 16. f. 4. b b. □ Nates or Buttocks, others the Testes or i T. 16. f. 4. c c. T. 17. f. 1. M M. □ Stones. For so those Eminencies or bunchings out are termed, being interchangeably disposed, and from that Channel, the Hole which goes into the fourth Ventricle, is termed Anus or the a T. 17. f. 1. above Q. f. 2. F. □ Arse-hole. In the upper Part of this Channel is superincumbent that same Kernel which is Conarium. termed b T. 16. f. 4. ●. T. 17. f. 1. L. □ Conarium the Pineapple Kernel, because 'tis shaped like a Pineapple. And over this Channel and the fourth c f. 2. N N. □ Ventricle, is a thin Membrane stretched out, derived from the Tenuis Meninx, upon which runs the d T. 16. f. 3. F F. T. 17. f. 1. O O. R R. □ Plexus Chor●ides, diffused through the foremost Ventricles. In the entrance of the fourth Ventricle, there is placed a certain portion of the Processu● Vermiformis. Brain more firm than ordinary which represents the tail of a River-Crab when the shell is peeled off. It is called Scolicoides and Vermiformis e T. 16. f. 6. E. T. 17. f. 2. C C. □ Processus, the Worm-fashioned Production: is opens and shuts the passage into the fourth Ventricle. This is placed in the Cerebellum or Petty Brain; which contained within itself the two hinder most portions of the spinal Marrow, as the Brain contained the other two foremost, which I have named with Galen the beds of the Optic Nerves. In that same f f. 1. N N. f. 2. D D. G G. T. 18. f. 4. F. □ fourth Ventricle, there appears a certain g T. 17. f. 2. H. T. 18. f. 4. ●. □ Chink like a Writing-Pen, The fourth Ventricle. which is the Separation of the Marrow of the Back. The Petty-Brain being pulled asunder, you shall see how it contains within it the fourth Ventricle, between the two aftermost Roots of the Marrow of the back; and how being drier than the Brain, it gives Original to h T. 18. f. 3. □ seven or eight pair of Nerves, saving the Optic Nerve. It is not full of wind above but beneath, according to the external form of the brain itself. In like manner it is divided beneath into i T. 18. f. 4. A A. □ two Parts, being continued above. If you shall gently draw upwards the foremost Part of the brain, as far as its basis, Pelvis. Glandula Pituitaria. you shall observe the k T. 17. f. 1. S. T. V T. 18. f. 1. B. f. 3. B B. □ Optic Nerves, and the Nerves, serving for a T. 18. f. 1. C C. f. 3. G G. □ Motion, and then the b T. 18. f. 3. D. □ Choana or funnel dropping Wheyish moisture upon the ᶜ Glandula Pituitaria or Flegm-Kernel, which fills up and possesses the Sella Equina or Horse-Saddle. In the Choana or Funnel you shall see Four Pipes distilling Tubuli. Seven pair of Nerves. Wheyish moisture into the Palate and throat. Then you shall consider the order of those seven pair of Nerves recorded in the following Verses. The d T. 18. f. 1. B B. f. 3. B B. □ First Pair sees, the e f. 1. C C. f. 3. G G □ Second moves the Eyes; f f. 1. D D. f. 3. H. H. □ Third and Fourth taste, h f. 1. F F. f. 3. K K. □ Fift hears and makes us Wise. The i f. 1. G G. f. 3. L L. T. 3 f. 8 all □ Sixth is large and wanders all about: k f. 3. M M. □ Seventh Larynx moves a prating Tongue so stout. Then you shall search under the Dura Meninx in the basis of the brain about the Compass of the Sella Sphenoides, for the Rete Mirabile or wonderful l f. 3. P P. □ Net of Arteries Rete Mirabile. interwoven one among another, being form of the two m f. 3. C C. □ Carotides or sleep Arteries. You shall observe in the Basis of the brain, that Wheyish Humours of blood is poured forth, in extreme pains of the Head coming with Inflammation, which while they seek to go forth by the Cavities of the Ears, they cause extreme sharp pains, which bring the Patient into Madness and Sickness. Whether or no in such a desperate Case, may we boar either side of the Hindermost Part of the Head, to let out the superfluous putrid Humour, which corrupts the substance of the Brain? The n T. 18. f. 1. F F. f. 3. K K. □ Auditory Nerve is worthy of Consideration, which is inserted into the Cavity of the Ear, and by a little Channel slides down into the Palate, and is distributed into the inner Part of the Larynx: from whence comes that same Consent that is between the Tongue and Teeth, the Larynx and the Lungs. ᵍ f. 1. E E. f. 3. I I. □ Observe Whether or no they be intersected Crosewise, so as the right should from its original be carried unto the left Part, and the left unto the right, which I have never seen. Whether the Nerves in their Rise have Arteries Joined in company with them? Whether the Nerves are made up of many small threads? Whether the other Nerves differ from the Optic Nerve. I will not wholly pass over those four notable Questions: Whether the brain be moved? Whether or no the brain does cool the Heart? Whether the Ventricles of the brain are ordained only to contain Excrements? Whether or no the blood be there Circulated and how? As to the first Question, I say that the substance of the Brain is not moved of it Whether the Brain have any Motion? self, by Diastole and Sistole, after the manner of the Arteries, but only the Crassa Meninx, which is sprinkled all over with Arteries, arising from the wonderful Contexture of Arteries, unto the upper Channels of the said Crassa Meninx: also the Channels do pant, and the brain is moved by elevation and depression of the substance thereof, according as it is driven by the Animal spirits. The brain does cool the Heart, in as much as by Circulation, it sends back the Whether it cools the heart? blood unto the Heart being cooled in the Brain. The foremost and uppermost Ventricles are Receptacles for spirits: the whey may The use of the fore Ventricles. indeed descend into the upper Ventricles, from the whole Mass of the brain, but it presently falls down into the lower Ventricles, that from thence it may flow through Os Ethmoides into the Nostr●s: if the Os Ethmoides or Colauder-bone be obstructed, it distils by the Choana or Funnel, or by the little holes over the Funnel, into the Palate and Jaws or Throat. The Circulation of the blood is performed in the brain, with a slow pace. The Whether or n● and how th' ulood is Circulated in th' Brain. blood rises out of the Net like-Contexture, by the Arteries of Dura Meninx, unto the four Channels; afterwards it descends by the Veins unto the Heart, having been plundered of its spirits, which the brain drank up. And so the blood being cooled, is said to cool the Heart. Of all which I shall treat more fully in my Anthropographia, or large Description of the body of Man. The Brain, being of its own Nature cold and moist, is nourished only with the What Bloo● the Brain nourish● with▪ purer and more spiritous arterial blood, which ascends by the Carotides and passes speedily forth. And though the Spirits are tempered, they lose none of their subtlety, because they are not mingled with the Air. From the Plexus Mirabilis, blood ascends by the Arteries which spring from the said Plexus unto the Crown of the Head, where the blood Channels of the brain are Scituate. From whence it distils into the lower and side Parts of the brain, and also by that same great Vein mentioned by Galen, which makes the Plexus Choroides, it is distributed into the inferior Parts. And therefore in bleedings of the Nose, the most pure blood does always come What Blood comes away in the Nose bleeding. away, whereas that which is taken away by opening the Veins of the Arms or feet, seems always most impure. Whereby you may know, that it is only the Arterial blood which nourishes the brain and which comes away by the bleeding at Nose: and it was not without Cause that Fernelius would have it stopped, after it had bleed a pound, to cool the body and extinguish the Fever. And therefore refrigerating and astringent Medicaments are to be applied, not only to the hinder Part of the Neck, but also before upon th' Carotick or sleepy Arteries. You shall observe that the Air drawn in by the Nostrils, does not pass under, nor Whether the Air goes which is drawa in at the Nostrils? Whether it is mingled with the Spirits? enter into the foremost Ventricles of the brain, because they are void of any Insets, but being shed externally round about the Crassa Meninx, it cools the Surface of the brain. Nor is it mingled with the Spirits, because they ought to be most subtle, otherwise by permistion or mingling of the Air, they would become more thick and would not run so swistly by the Nerves all the body over. The same I conceive touching the Air received into the Lungs; that it is not mixed with the vital Spirit but only cools the Lungs Now that the brain may be demonstrated after that manner, which Varolius describes The Manner of Dissecting the brain and the History of its Parts. in a particular Book: You shall saw in sunder the Skull of a body newly dead, round about near the Eyes, and the hollow of the hinder part of the Head, and with a pair of Pincers you shall take of the upper portion of the Socket of the Eyes, that you may draw out the Eyes hanging at their Optic Nerves. Afterwards having pulled the Dura a T. 16. f. 1. A A. f. 2. D D. etc. T. 17. f. 1. A A. □ Meninx from the Skull round about with help of a Spatula, leave it at the Basis of the Skull, where it sticks exceeding fast to the Bones. Then you shall take out the Brain and as much of the Spinal Marrow as you can both at once, and let some body hold the Brain turned upside down in both his hands whiles you shall dissect it. But you shall first search within the Dura Mater for those four bend or c T. 16. f. 5. a b c e. □ Hollownesses, for the place of the d f. 5. F. □ Press, the great Vein described by Galen which makes the Plexus e f. 5. f f. □ Choroides, and that division of the brain which resembles a f f. 2. A A. f. 5. E E. □ Sickle: Afterwards returning to the Basis of the Brain, you shall observe the Tenuis Meninx to be more easily plucked and separated in the lower than in the upper Part: because the Petty-Brain in its Basis or Bottom is not so full of turn, away, and wind, as on the top. And therefore the thick Meninx being first taken we meet with that same Rete Mirabite, or Miraculous g T. 18. f. 3. P P P P. □ Net, made of Multitudes of small Arteries, springing from the h f. 3. C C. □ Carotick Arteries and two other i f. 3. O O. □ ascending through the holes of the Vertebraes of the Neck; but it will be torn, which cannot be prevented. Now each of the Carotick or Sleepy-Arteries enters within the Skull divided into two, to Wove that same wonderful Net, and creeping upwards, through the wind of the brain it is disseminated up and down every way even as far as the Longitudinal Cavity of the Dura Meninx. The Carotis is drawn obliquated and as it were crook backed, within that same winding hole at the Basis of the Skull, and within its Cavity, contains certain very small Bones, like those which are called Sesamoidea. Neither has Nature placed these little bones only in these Arteries, but she has likewise inserted them into other Arteries, where it was requisite, that they should be kept open. ᵇ T. 17. f. 2. I I. □ Then you shall observe that the Processus a T. 18. f▪ 3. a a. □ Mammillares or Teat-like Productions do not run out so far as Varolius has described them. Then you shall see the growing together of the b T. 17. f. 1. T. □ Optic c f. 1. S S. V V. □ Nerves near the Choana or Funnel. And therefore Masticatories may do good in the Diseases thereof. Also you shall observe that the Veins of the Plexus d f. 1. O O R R. □ Choroides descending to the Basis of the e f. 1. P P. □ Brain, are interwoven with exceeding small Kernels. In that place the Plexus Choroides is more easily discerned, than upon the foremost Ventricles. Afterward, you shall contemplate four tuberous Eminencies: two f T. 16▪ f. 4. c c. □ before, situate in the middle of the brain, and the other two g f. 4. b b. □ behind, which constitute the Cerebellum, or petty Brain. Those Eminencies, or Rise, do receive four white and hard Roots of the Spinal Marrow, whereof the foremost, longest, and hardest, are drawn along between the greater Eminences of the Brain. The other two short ones, are carried within the petty brain; which a thickened Portion of the Marrow of the said petry-brain, placed athwart, as broad as a man's Thumb, does fasten together like a Swathband, and is by Varolius termed h T. 18. f. 4. by C C C. □ Ponticulus: or rather it is the pavement of the Channel from the third, into the fourth Ventricle. And the said Channel lies above those foremost Roots of the Spinal Marrow, and is stretched out according to their longitude. Between the growing together of the Optic Nerves, and the foremost Roots of the Spinal Marrow, there appears a foursquate hole, which is taken for the i f. 3. E. □ Choana, or Funnel, serving to discharge the Excrements of the Ventricles of the Brain. When you have viewed all these things, you shall pass over unto the a T. 16. f. 6. D D. T. 17. f. 2. A A. T. 18. f. 4. A A. □ Petty-brain, where you shall separate from the Spinal Marrow the Processus b T. 16. f. 6. E. T. 17. f. 2. C C. □ Vermiformis which lies between the two Tuberous Eminencies of the Petty-brain, by taking away the Membrana Choroides; that so you may see the c T. 17. f. 2. D D. etc. T. 18. f. 4. F. □ Chamber of the fourth Ventricle and the Cistern of the Animal Spirits. Then you shall cut a sunder d T. 18. f. 4. by C C C. □ the little Bridge, or the Band of the Roots of the Spinal e T. 18. f. 4. D D. □ Marrow, that the f T. 16. f. 3. D D. E E. f. 4. C C. D D. etc. □ foremost and Superior Ventricles of the brain may appear, which you shall see separated by a partition g T. 16. f. 3. G. □ as long as ones Finger, drawn from one End towards the Forehead, as far as the Petty-brain: it cleaves to the h T. 16. f. 3. b b. f. 4. B. T. 17. f. 1. F. G G. □ Arched Roof of the Ventricles, but beneath it is lose, and free from all ties, that the passage of the Spirits might be free. But you shall diligently note, that the Extremities of the said partition are double forked: the hindermost bifurcation is longer than the foremost, and it cleaves unto that same transverse Ligament, which connects the two Tuberosities or bunchings out of the brain, and so being spread out like a beam it bears up the Vaulted Arch of the Ventricles; the fore most bifurcation cleaves unto a little transverse cord, which resembles the Optic Nerve in thickness and in Color. The same partition which is termed Septum i T. 16. f. 3. G. □ Lucidum, being pulled back, you shall manifestly discern the Vault of the Ventricles, which is called Corpus Psalloides or Harp fashioned body; also you shall see that the foremost Ventricles make but one continued Cavity. ᵏ T. 16. f. 3. bb. f. 4. B. T. 17. f. 1. G G. F. □ Mean while you shall observe, that the inferior Ventricles placed at the Basis or bottom of the brain, are larger or at least equal unto the superior, and that the continuity of the superior and inferior Ventricles is one and the same: or rather that there are but two Ventricles which contain the whole brain. For the a T. 17. f. 2. D D. T. 18. f. 4. F. □ fourth Ventricle lies concealed in the Petty-Brain, and is manifestly seen to be wholly and only the●e. Further you shall observe that all the b T. 18. f. 13. etc. □ Nerves even the Optic ones, do arise out of those same Roots of the Spinal Marrow: and therefore all the Nerves in the body do arise out of the Spinal Marrow, within or without the brain. For if those Prominencies, which are termed by Galen the beds of the Optic Nerves, are productions of the Roots of the Spinal Marrow within the brain: we may with good reason aver, that the Optic nerves chemselves do spring from the Spinal Marrow. Finally you shall see that the moving Nerves that give motion to the Eyes, are continued, and make one Cord as it were: and that the Optic Nerves being bowed or turned back near the beds of the Optic Nerves, do ascend unto the foremost Ventricles. You shall likewise see that the Testes or Stones are c T. 16. f. 4. c c. □ portions of the Roots of the Spinal Marrow, growing out of the brain: and the Nates or d T. 16. f. 4. b b. □ buttocks are portions of those Roots which are derived from the Petty-brain. And if you shall compare this my description of the Parts which are to be seen in the brain turned upside down, beginning from the basis, with that of Varolius, you will find it larger and different from his. And he that will take pains to do as much, after he has once or twice seen me demonstrate these things, he will acknowledge the truth of them with admiration. Now that in the brain the Diseases & Symptoms thereof, may be distinguished as much as may be by their proper places, the whole bulk of the brain must be divided into three Parts, viz. The c T. 16 f. 1. b b. □ brain properly so called, the Petty-brain a T. 16. f. 6. D D. etc. T. 17. f. 2. A A. etc. □ and the f. 2. l l. T. 18. f. 4. D D. □ Marrow of the back. But I divide the brain, as it is the subject of dissection into three Regions, the The Parts of the Supreme Region. uppermost, the Middlemost, and the Lowest. In the uppermost you shall observe the Turn and Wind of the brain, the d f. 2 A A. f. 5. E E. □ Sickle, and the Corpus e f. 2. B B. f. 3. B B □ Callosum. In the Middlemost which is beneath the f f. 3. b b. f. 4. B. T. 17. f. 1. F G G. □ Vault, you shall observe the Arched Of the Middle Region. ceiling of the said Vault, being the Roof which is placed over the Ventricles; the Partition-Wal, born up by g T. 16. f. 3. G. □ three Pillars; three h f. 3. D E. f 4. C D. etc. f. 4. E. □ Ventricles with certain i f. ●. b b c c etc. □ Eminencies, which make up a Channel to the fourth Ventricle. And then you shall observe the Plexus k f. 5. & 6. f f. T. 17. f. 1. O O R R. □ Choroides, the l T. 16. f. 4. a. T. 17. f. 1. L. □ Conarium, and the m T. 16. f. 6. D D. T. 17. f. 2. A A. etc. □ Petty-brain, and the n f. 2. D D. G G. T. 18. f. 4. F. □ fourth Ventricle therein concealed. In the lowest Region, you shall mark the o T. 18. f. 3. E. □ Choana, or Funnel, the Glandula, Of the lowest Region. or p T. 18. f. 3. D. etc. □ Kernel; the Mammillary, or Teat-like q f. 3. a a. □ Productions; the ●even r f. 3. B G H ●● L M. f. 1. B C D E F G. □ Pair of Nerves; the s f. 3. P P P P. □ Re●e Mirable, or wonderful Net; and the Roots of the Spinal t f. 4. D D. etc. □ Marrow. And forasmuch as Casparus Hofmannus, in his Book against Montanus, and in his Institutions, calls those Men Fools and Blockheads, who suppose that the Ventricles of the Brain, are the Shops, or Work-Houses where the Spirits are made; and so confidently, and arrogantly avers it to be impossible, that he accounts it a great Crime or Madness to think otherwise: I shall briefly examine his, by him supposed invincible Arguments, because no man has yet had the Courage to contradict them: only I shall in the first place demonstrate the contrary to be true. The Animal Spirit is made of the Vital, which is continually brought in great The place where the Animal Spirits are made according to our Auth●r. quantity, by the Carotick Arteries to the Basis of the Brain, where the branches meeting, and being woven together, do make the Rete Mirabile, from which innumerable branches are derived into the Crassa Meninx; that the blood may a●cend on every hand to those blood-channels of the Dura Mater, which I conceive does alone palpitate, or pant; and I have seen in Fractures of the Skull, that when that Membrane is broken, the brain remains immovable. Seeing therefore the foremost Ventricles are opened in the Basis of Brain, and equal in their widness to the upper Cavities of the said Ventricles, and are close unto the Rete Mirabile, from it the Ventricles draw their Spirits, or the Spirits exhaling from that Texture, whose Arteries are exceeding tender and thin, they are brought along into the foremost Ventricles; and soon after, by the third Ventricle which serves instead of a Channel or passage, they are forthwith carried by a straight course into the fourth Ventricle, the Cistern, or Conduit Head of Spirits; that from thence they may be distributed into the inferior Nerves, and into the Cavity of the Spinal Marrow. But the seven Pair of Nerves are propagated from those four Eminencies; of which the two greater do form, and enclose the sides of the foremost Ventricles; the other two make the sides of the fourth Ventricle, whose Roof, and fore, and after parts, are made up by the double Apophysis Scolicoides. Those four Eminencies are Spongy, and receive Spirits, which run directly into the Nerves of the Spinal Marrow by the forth Ventricle. And no man can deny that the Nerves of ●he brain are the offsprings of those four Eminencies: and so this Proposition is to be interpreted. All Nerves of the Body and Brain, do spring from the Spinal Marrow, either within, or without the brain. I deny not that the Spirits are diffused through the whole substance of the brain, and not wholly contained in the Ventricles: but I aver that the Ventricles are the true Shops, or Work-Hou●es of ●he Animal Spirit, which is distributed unto the seven Couple of Nerves, and to the Spinal Marrow. That this is ab●u●d and impossible, Hofm●n does thus seek to prove: 1. Arg. There is the Spirit made, where the Action is performed. I Answer, many Actions are performed in parts, in which no Spirits are bred: The Arguments of Ho●man to the contrary, answered. and I deny that in the Body of the Brain, all Actions are performed. Again, there needs no other elaboration than their passage through the brain: for as the blood of the Veins, passing through the Hearts Ventricles, is in a moment made Vital; so the Vital Spirits running through the middle of the Brain, as far as the Ventricle, do become Animal. For if it were needful that the Animal Spirit should be elaborated in the Substance of the Brain, it would lose much of its subtlety, because the brain is cold and moist. 2d Arg. of Hoffman. If the Spirit be to act, it must needs be under the command of the Soul in the Vessels; for after that it is entered into the Sea of the Ve●tricles, what is there to compel the same to return into the stra●t passages of the Ne●ves? I ●n●wer: If the Spirit be diff●●ed into the whole substance of the brain, being really soft as Wax, how can it return into the Nerves, seeing there are no Vessels running through the substance of the brain? Those bloody marks wherewith it is sprinkled, are points of blood dropping down from above, out of the Arteries which runs between the winding substance of the brain. The great Providence of Nature, because the blood could not pierce, nor pass through the midst of the Substance of the brain, hath carried the same through the Channels of the Dura Mater, as far as the ●●ood passages, whence ●● slides into the inferior parts, and by the Press, o● that great Vein which Consti●utes the Plexus Choroides, it ●●ows into the Ven●ricles. More probable it were to assign the Seat, and Shop of the Animal Spirits in the Plexus Choroides, which is diffused through all the Cavities of the brain, as far as the ba●●s thereof. But show me (friend Hoffman) the way by which the Animal Spirits made of the Vital, may be diffused into the substance of the brain, so as to flow back into the Nerves. 3d Arg. The Ventricles are surrounded within, with the Pia Mater, which ●inders the ingress and regress of the Spirits. I Answer: If the Ventricles have for their Covering, the thin Meninx, the passage is thereby the sa●er into the foremost Ventricles, without any loss at all. I have already demonstrated in an Entrance in the basis of the brain, being the way into the fourth Ventricle; there is no need of a regress for Arterial blood, which ascends upwards by the Crassa Meninx, distilling into the brain, does on all sides afford Spirits to the whole brain; neither can the blood penetrate without Spirits. 4. Arg. Hofman's strongest Argument is this: Seeing the two superior Ventricles, open into the third, and that into the Funnel, and it into the palate, who will be Surety, that the Spirits will not ma●e their escape this way? I Answer: This danger is easily shunned by the continual flux and pulse, or driving of the Spirits to the Ci●●ern; and that same hole is exceeding small, and so deep, even to the O● Sphen●●des, that it can equal the length of a man's ●●●ger. You who believe that the blood passes from the Right Ventricle of the Heart, through the Lungs, that it may return into the Left, are you not afraid lest we should lose our vital Spirits, when we blow ou● breath out in Respiration? 5. Arg. The Ventricles are not continued with the Nerves, but with the whole Body. I Answer: If the Nerves proceed from those same Eminencies, which are Roots o● the Spinal Marrow, between the Brain, and the Petty-brain, and they are principal portions of the Brain; do not the Nerves arise from the brain itself? But you yourself have often times written, that the Nerves arise within the brain, from the ●oots of the Spi●al Marrow. 6. Arg. The Ventricles have now another Office, which cannot stand with that of the Spirits. I Answer: That I deny any such Office. For the Choana, or Funnel, can p●●ge away any wheyish Excrements which shall be in the Ventricles; but the greatest part, flowing down by the external wind of the brain unto the basis, falls partly into the Os Ethmoides, or Colander▪ bone, partly it descends to the basis of the brain; and if not by the Choana, yet by other holes near abouts, it is purged into the Pa●●ate. But because Hofman's Spirits fail him in ●andling this Question (can you forbear laughing) for they are his own words, we shall also leave him to enjoy his self-love, with a great flock of bleating Animals (so he says) which follows his absurd Opinion, provided that he be the Bell-wether. Let him no more triumph before the Victory, nor let him be so secure and undaunted, as not to fear Hercules himself. That same new Tenent of Hoffman, disturbs the whole Doctrine of Diseases of the Hofman's Tenent disturbs the practise of Physic. Brain▪ and that I may declare so much, I will choose out only two Diseases, which have their Seat in the Ventricles, viz. The Epilepsy, and Apoplexy. The Apoplexy he makes to be in the whole Substance of the brain, not in the Ventricles: The Epilepsy, he will have to be caused only by vapours ascending into the Head, and di●●●●ed through the whole substance of the brain. He allows of no Epilepsy from a primary affection of the Head, but only by Sympathy from other parts. He assigns the Seat of the Apoplexy to be in the whole substance of the brain obstructed, and avers that it is caused only by blood shed forth of the Veins; and makes the Cause thereof to be the obstruction of the Press introduced by Nymmanus. But if the Torcular, or Press is obstructed, which is the fourth Channel carrying blood into the Plexus Choroides, the passage of the blood and Spirits is intercepted. But according to Hoffman in an Apoplexy, only blood is found shed out of the veins within the Ventricles, and therefore the Torcular was not obstructed. It is a certain, and undoubted thing▪ confirmed by many Experiments, that in the Apoplexy, the Ventricles of the brain are obstructed, or there is an obstruction in the Choana, or Funnel. But especially the hole of the fourth ventricle which is shut with the Apophysis Scolicoides, is stopped by thick and clammy Phlegm sticking there; which if it be not discussed, or removed, being evacuated through the Funnel, it cause● death. If the Matter be serous, and pass into the Spinal Marrow, it causes the Palsy instead of the Apoplexy; and so a greater Disease is cured by a lesser, the matter being translated from one place to another. But if blood happen to be shed into the ventricles, present death follows. But if ●o be the Apoplexy should be produced by blood alone, as Hoffman will have it; how could blood which was shed into the ventricles, pass into the Nerves without putrefaction, and how could it enter into the Cavities of the Nerves? In these two Diseases he hath be●rayed his own Ignorance, although he could find no such difficulty in the falling sickness, as Cra●o acknowledged, whose Wish was this: Would to God I could see before I die, the Essence of this Disease, together with the Cure thereof rightly explained. The Medicinal Consideration. The brain is exercised with many kinds of Diseases, with an hot, cold, moist Distemper; Principal dis●●ses of the Brain. Distemper. with divers Humours, Phlegmatic, Choleric, Melanchollick, Sanguine, and Wheyish; which either do mo●est the Membranes of the brain, especially the Crassa Meninx, or are diffused into the Channels thereof, and being there stopped of their course, they cause most acute pains: or they slide into the exterior wind of the ●rain, and by little and little, they distil into the substance of the brain, and the ventricles thereof; or into the hinder part of the Head, or the Petty-brain; or they descend into the lowest parts of the brain. If the Humour ascend by the Carotick Arteries unto the brain, it may produce the same Diseases; now all Diseases that are caused by consent, or sympathy, without matter, only by evaporation, are not so dangerous, as if they were bred within the brain, so as that the morbi●ick Matter should be therein contained. The brain, besides similar Diseases in Distemper, and Laxity, suffers also Diseases Obstruction of th● Cavities. in Conformation, when as, according to the motion of the Moon, its bulk is increased, or diminished; in the Disorder of its Passages, when the Channels of the Dura Meninx are obstructed, especially the fourth, which is called Torcular, or the Press: which being obstructed, is thought to cause the Apoplexy, the passage of the Spirits to and ●ro being intercepted. Which I do not believe, because the Spirits are shed abroad into the inferior Vessels from that admirable Net of A●●e●●es, called Rete mirabile, and that same Cavity being stopped, only the Plexus Choroides, being defrauded of its blood, is hurt. The Ventricles are also obstructed, especially the fourth, which being s●opped, Of the Ventricles. present death follows, by reason of the stoppage of that continual influx of Spirits, which ought to be into the inferior parts, and the Marrow of the back. The Choana may likewise be obstructed, which intercepts the Efflux of serous Of the Choana▪ ●●●u●●●●▪ and Phlegmatic Humours, whereby flowing back into the brain, they may cause the Episep●●e, or Apoplexy, and induce divers deadly Diseases. If the anterior, or foremost ventricles, are perforated into the Nostrils, the obstructions of those passages, will be very ●u●●ful to the brain. A fault of evil Conformation, cannot be amended exactly: by strengthening, and drying the brain, both the forementioned may be helped. The brain is Inflamed, not only the meanings, or Coats, but sometimes also in the Siriasis. proper substance thereof; whence comes the Frenzy, and Siriasis, or Dog day madness; but not any Paraphrenitis. Siriasis is termed from the Dog-Star; for in the Dog-days chief, it afflicts Frenzy. both Boys, and elder persons; and therefore it comes rather from an external Cause, as long abiding in the Sun, etc. than from any internal Cause: as a Frenzy comes only from an internal Cause, whether it be Primary, or Secondary, by consent of other parts in a burning Fever. The brain may likewise swell, by reason of a Commotion thereof from some internal Tumours. Cause, it is called Ecplexis. Stupidity of the Head after a blow, is a bad sign, according to Hypocrates. At length these Diseases bring a Sphacelism in the brain, causing putrefaction, corruption, and mortisication. Again, it is subject to a wa●ry Tumour, either in its Circumference, or within the Ventricles. If in its Circumference it is termed Hydrocephalos, or the Water-Head; and at length the wheyish Humour slipping by little and little, within the Ventricles, causes the sleepy Disease, and after it the Apoplexy. And these I take to be Diseases of the brain; however Fernelius has written, that all the Disorders of the Head, which have been observed by Experience, are symptoms, and not Diseases. But he elegantly, according to his wont fashion, does divide the Symptoms Symptoms of the bra●n. Or Membranes. into three Ranks, with reference to the parts affected. Some possess the Membranes; some the Substance of the Brain; and some the hollow Passages. In the Pericranium, and meanings, Pains are caused. In the Substance of the Brain, which is the Seat of the Animal chief Faculties, are contained the Symptoms of Fancy and Reason depraved, such as are, Dotage, Melancholy, Ecstasies, Lyncanthropy, Madness. Also the Symptoms of Memory abolished, such as are Forgetfulness, Foolishness, Doltishness, and blockishness. Symptoms consisting ▪ Or in the Cavities, and passages. in the Cavities, and passages, are very many, appertaining to Sense and Motion; and to sleeping and waking, as dead sleep, sleeping Trance. Symptoms of Motion are, Walking in one's sleep; to be taken stiff, as it were blasted, or Planetstruck; the Nightmare, Convulsion, Falling-sickness, Unquietness, and tumbling, S●ivering, Shaking, Trembling, Palsies, Feebleness of the Limbs, and Apoplexy. Symptoms in the undue proportion of what should be voided forth, do belong Symptoms of the Membranes Pain. to the passages and Cavities, as a Catarrh, Rbeumatismus, Bleeding at Nose. All these Symptoms aforesaid, I will now declare particularly. The Headache, either occupies the Pericranium, or the meanings; if the Pericranium, the pain is outwards; if the meanings, the pain is inward. Each of these pains reaches unto the Eyes; because the internal Membranes do produce the Coats of the Eye, called Cornea, and Wea; and the Pericranium produces the Coat Conjunctiva. The kind of the Pain shows the Nature of the Disease. A sharp and biting pain does argue a Choleric Distemper of the Head: a heavy pressing pain, shows a Phlegmatic Distemper: a panting, or pulsing pain, argues somewhat of an Inflammation: A pricking pain shows an Erosion, or gnawing, caused by a sharp Humour, or a Worm which is rare. A stretching pain, argues abundance of Humour, or of windy Spirits, which distend the Membranes. Now the Pain is either in the whole Head, or in the half, or in some one particle thereof. If it infest the whole Head, it is called Cephalalgia: if half the Head, Hemicrania, because the brain is divided into two parts: If the pain possess one part, as if a Nail were driven in there, the Arabians call it Clavus, and Ouum; the Nail, or Egg. If the pain of the Head, be of long Continuance, it is termed Cephalaea; which together with the Hemicrania, is periodical; but the Cephalalgia is a continual universal Headache. A continual Pain of the Head joined with a continual Fever, and signs of malignity, is exceeding dangerous, according to Hypocrates in the Second of his Prognostics. Pains of the Head are, Primary, and Proper; or Secundary, and by Sympathy from other parts: These are not so dangerous as the former. The Principal Actions of the Brain, Imagination, Ratiocination, and Memory, Symptoms of the Substance of the brain. are diminished, depraved, and abolished. Depravation of the Fantasy and Reason, is Raving; the Imminution thereof is Foolishness. There is a threefold Hurt of the Memory; but the Abolition thereof has only found a name, being called Oblivion. The Cause of Foolishness, is every great distemper of the brain, which is known Foolishness. by its Causes, as by signs; or some ill shaping of the Head, which is easily discerned. Dotage, or Raving, consists in absurd Thoughts, Words, or Deeds. The Say Dotage. of such as rave, are estranged from Truth and Reason, or not to the point in hand; their Deeds are either unusual, or undecent; their Thoughts are absurd, ridiculous, and Chimerical. The manner of Raving, aught to be distinguished to know the differences of the Melancholy. Melancholy which causes the same; for a Delirium, or raving with depravation of the Fancy, is termed Melancholy, which consists in a false Opinion touching things past, present, and to come; which being manifold, it is defined by vain fear, anxiety, or sorrow. Again, Melancholy is either Primary, or Secondary: The Primary has its Original in the brain; the Secondary springs from the Hypochondriacal parts, whence it is termed Hypochondriaca Melancholia, which is either Humoral, or Flatulent: the former is the worse of the two, and brings at last Madness, and Outragiousness. The Melancholy Ecstasy, is an excess of Melancholy, which is threefold: An Ecstasy. Ecstasy simply so called; an Ecstasy with silence; an Ecstasy with a Frenzy: they are caused by black Choler, according to the divers degrees of its Adustion: Foolishness with laughter is better and safer, than with seriousness and fierceness. Raving without a Fever, is so much the better by how much the Parts under the short Ribs, or the Brain, are less heated. The Resting, and binding up of the Senses, is Natural Sleep: The breaking off, or hindrance of sleep, is Watching: Either of which being out of measure, is hurtful. Coma, or Dead sleep. If Sleep be profound, 'tis called Coma, or Carus, Dead-sleep. If this Symptom be mixed of Sleep and Watching, so that the Patient seems to incline to sleep, with his Eyes shut, but is not able to sleep; it is termed Coma-Vigilans, the Drowsy Watch. But if one that has a sleeping Disease upon him, every time he is awakened, does rave, and talk idly, the Disease is called Typhomania. And if a man lie stiff with his Eyes open, and when he comes to himself, remembers The Nightmare. what was done about him, it is termed Incubus, the Mare; which is wont to happen in the right to such as lie upon their backs, or have glutted themselves with feasting; and it seems that they are choked, by some Devil lying upon them, or by some Thief that has laid hold upon them to Rob and Murder them. The abolition of all sense and motion saving Respiration, is called Catalepsis or Catalepsis. Catoche: whereby a Man is Frozen as it were in that posture he was in when the fit seized upon him. It springs from a Cold distemper of the Brain with Phlegm. Carus is a deep Sleep, which comes upon Fevers and wounds of the temporal Carus. Muscles, or from an hot and moist distemper, or from much evaporation with serosities, moistening the substance of the brain. A Lethargy is an Imminution of sense and Motion and also of the Memory of A Lethargy. necessary things. It Springs from a Primary hot and moist distemper of the brain, joined with a putrid Humour which provoks a Fever and cherishes and keeps it up a long time. There is also Dotage adjoined. Touching this Disease there is a saying of Hippocrates in his Coicks Page 75. Which explains all the Symptoms thereof. The existence or particular Nature of the Lethargy and Coma, consists in a looseness, as that of the Catalepsis in a Tension or bending. Those that are in a Lethargic Sleep, at last become Apoplectic. An Apoplexy does oft times primarily and unexpectedly invade a Man, and sometimes An Apoplexy. it follows some other Sleepy disease. It is an Abolition of sense and motion with respiration hurt, which at last brings snoring and suffocation, by reason thick Phlegm flowing out of the Funnel and obstructing the Larynx or Weasand. It is Caused by a Repletion of the Ventricles of the brain, either with a pituitous or Wheyish Humour, or with blood, some small Artery of the Rete Mirabile being broken in the Basis of the Brain, or blood being carried aloft in a Plethoric body by the fourth Channel, rushes into the Ventricles. If it be Simple and mere Whey, by strength of Nature out of the anterior Ventricles, it slips into the fourth Ventricle, and from thence into the Spinal Marrow and so Causes a Palsy. If it be a Phlegmatic Humour stopped in the fourth Ventricle, or in the third, it cannot be discussed, and the brain is overwhelmed thereby. If the blood be shed out of the vessels, it suddenly suffocates. In the Carus or other Sleepy Disease, only the foremost Ventricles of the brain, are overwhelmed with Serosities, so that there is yet freedom for the spirits to pass into all Parts of the body. But in an Apoplexy, all the ventricles of the brain, but especially the fourth, are obstructed, and unless the matter be discussed into the spinal Marrow Death fallows unavoidably. Fernelius avouches that an Apoplexy is bred by an Obstructiou of that Rete Mirabile, the afflux of Arterial blood out of the Heart into the brain, being thereby intercepted. Therefore they are termed Carotides, because being obstructed they cause Carum or the Sleepy-Evil. In the Apoplexy and Sleepy Diseases, besides general Medicines, as blood-letting Cure of the Apoplexy, Carus and sucid like Diseases. liberally twice or thrice repeated out of the Arm and foot; strong Purgation of watery Humours, Cupping-Glasses fixed unto the shoulders and the hinder Part of the Head, Topical Remedies, are not be neglected, which draw and Evacuate near the Part affected; such as is the opening of the Veins under the Tongue and of the external Jugular Vein, and likewise of the Temporal Artery: great Vesicatories applied towards the top of the shoulders to the Cephalick Vein, strong Medicines to provoke Sneezing, a Seton in the Neck, the string being often drawn about and anointed with Oil of Vitriol, that it may by't the more and attract: opening the Veins of the Nose after the manner used by the Ancients, with a split Toothed Quill thrust up as far as the bottom of the Colander: a sharp injection into the Nostrils Nostrils by a syringe, and within the furrows placed between the spaces of Os Vomeris: drawing out of the Phlegmatic clammy matter which sticks in the Throat and stops the Larynx, but thrusting a feather far into the throat: to which intent a strong vomit is good to cast forth any Humour that has flowed into the Windpipe: neither must we omit extreme hard rubbings with salt, and continual stirring of the body, if it be possible. All which remedies are to be applied with all possible speed one upon the Neck of another, in an Apoplexy, because there is danger in delay. In Sleepy Diseases which proceed slowly, and are caused by matter falling down from the Parts above, they are more slowly administered, and without Precipitation. You shall observe also, that a great Part of these Humours is gathered together in the turn & wind which are outmost in the upper substance of the brain, which do either putrify there, or slip into the ventricles of the brain: and yet these wind of the brain are not considered. The Palsy is an Abolition of sense and motion, not in the whole body, as in the Apoplexy, but only in the greatest Part of the body, or in half The Palsy. thereof, which is termed Hemiplegia, or in one Part, which is called Paraplegia. Fernelius observes, that sense is taken away, the motion remaining unhurt: and sometimes motion is taken away and the sense remains, because of the difference of the Nerves of the brain and the Spinal Marrow. In the Palsy, the Nerves of the Spinal Marrow are obstructed, but those of the brain, not: and therefore many Parts remain unhurt, especially the internal. Sometimes the Palsy happens without obstruction of the Nerves, because the sostning and Humectation of the Nerves, brings a kind of Palsy. In an imperfect Palsy when motion and sense are only dulled, the Disease is Stupor. termed Stupor or Nothrotis, which arises from a moist distemper of the brain. A Stupidity or dulness of sense and motion in a Fever, is wont to foretell a sleepy Disease to follow. When it comes alone without Fever, it foretells a Palsy or an Apoplexy. Vertigo, is a depravation of sense and motion, which makes the Patient think Vertigo. that all things turn round: it springs from a windy Humour, which being agitated within the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, causes the foresaid Apprehension of all things turning about. If it Causes a darkness before the Patient's Eyes, it is called Vertigo Tenebricosa or Scotodinos. It arises from the Brain or from vapours ascending from the inferior Parts. That is worst which arises primarily from the brain, and it is a forerunner of the Falling Sickness. The convulsion is a violent pulling back of the Muscles towards their Head or Convulsion. beginning. It is threefold, Emprosthotonos, when the body is bend forward; Opisthotonos, when the body is drawn backward: and Tetanoes when both sides remain stiff, by reason of an equal bowing or stretching of the Muscles on both sides. The Cause of a Convulsion, is either an obstruction of the Nerves, or their being pricked by a sharp Humour, or a dry distemper, which dries the Nerves, and so makes them stiff as a dried Lurstring; this is incurable. In one word, all Convulsions are said to arise either from too much emptyness, or over fullness. An Epilepsy or Falling-sickness, is a Convulsion of the whole body, coming by Falling-Sickness. fits, and hurting the Mind and senses. It is caused by an obstruction of the foremost Ventricles of the brain, caused by an Abundance of sharp Humours, either, Choleric or Phlegmatic. Either it comes from the brain Primarily affected, or from some other Part sending Malignant Humours to the brain. If it proceed from the brain Primarily affected, it is the more dangerous: if by fault of the Spleen or some other Bowel venomously infected: the coming of the fits may be foreseen and prevented. The former comes in a moment, the latter by degrees. Fernelius, besides the Humour which is the common Cause, accounts the peculiar Cause to be a venomous Air or vapour, which is exceeding hurtful to the brain; and therefore he conceives, it must be cured with specificks and appropriate Remedies, as well as those vulgar ones. Trembling is a depravation of Motion through weakness. It is caused by the Trembling. weakness of the motive faculty and the body's heavyness. So that look how much the motive faculty endeavours to lift up the Member, so much does the heavyness of the said Member not sufficiently illustrated with spirits, press it down again. And therefore it arises, from obstruction of the Nerves, or from their being overmuch softened, or from some external Cause, as by anointing with Quicksilver, or other Application thereof. There is a certain mixture of the Convulsion and tremble, which is called Spasmo-Tromois. Shivering and shaking, are motions of the body, which happen in Fevers, and Shivering and Shaking. they are forerunners of the fits of Agues, or of the Exacerbations of Fevers. They happen also, to such as have ripe Impostumes, when the Impostum is ready to break. And therefore Hypocrates observes a threefold Shaking-fit; the one feverish, the other Ulcerous, and the last Symptomatical. Unquietness, Anxiety, tumbling and tossing of the body this way and that way, Tumbling and Tossing. called by the Greeks' Ass; is a depravation of motion, which proceeds from a misaffection of the Stomach, by reason of a sharp Humour Nettling and Stinging the Nerves of the body, or the Membranes of the Back-bones Marrow. Which makes that the Sick cannot rest in one place or posture; but are forced every foot to change place and tumble here and there, and to change the posture of their Bodies. Nightwalking, ought to be reckoned among the Symptoms of motion depraved: Walking in one's Sleep. because it is not preformed by Judgement and Reason, but by force of a Disease, namely of sharp Fumes which compel the Sick person or the healthy to rise up and walk in their Sleep. I proceed to the Irregularity of the Excrements. The proper excretion of the Symptoms of things voided forth. brain, is either an Exhalation of a thin Vapour by the seams of the Skull or the pores of the Skin, or it is an Efflux of a thick Humour by the Nostrils and Palate of the Mouth. The Disproportion of this Excretion consists either in excess ot defect. That in defect has no Name, but it degenerates into a Cause of Diseases of the brain, of which we have already spoken. The disproportion in Excess is various, either when blood does immoderately Nose bleeding. flow from the Nose, or by drops. Both which Symptoms are Malignant. The former decays the body's strength, by reason of the loss of blood and Spirits, the latter betokens a repletion of the Head, and a Vain endeavour of oppressed Nature, And therefore drops of Blood coming from the Nose, is bad in a Vaporous Fever. both as a Cause, and as a Sign. The disproportion in Excretion of a serous and Phlegmatic Humour, is manifold. Catarrhs. Their general Name is a Catarrh, which is a distillation of Humour from the Head into the Inferior Parts, from which Parts it receives divers Appellations. If it fall into the Nostrils, it is called Coryza or Gravedo; if into the Throat Branchos, Hoarseness; if into the Mouth and Palate Ptyelismos, or the Spawle. And these three sorts of Catarrhs, are vulgarly comprehended under the Name of Rheum. A Catarrh falling upon the outward Parts of the body is named Rheumatismus Rheumatismus or Rheumaticus affectus, the Rheumatic Pains. If it fall upon the Joints it resembles the Gout, save that it comes not by fits: wherefore an Eunuch may suffer upon the Rheumatic pains, but not the true Gout. See Galens Comment upon that Aphorism. Boys and Eunuches are not troubled with the Gout. Galen makes frequent mention of the Rheumatic Disease, which was common at Rome, as it is with us in Paris: in his Second Book to Glauco: in his Book of Blood-letting, against Erasistratus etc. This Disease he cured by liberal Blood-letting. It is described by Hypocrates, in his Book of the internal Diseases, under the Name of a Joynt-pain, which is wont to trouble young People more than Aged. The other differences of Catarrhs with Reference to the diversity of Parts on which they fall, are Vain. It suffices to know, that all Fluxions upon internal Parts, are called likewise Rheums. The Cause of a Catarrh or Flux of Rheum, is a cold and moist distemper, or an hot distemper with an abundance of Humours working in the Vessels, or without. Galen acknowledges both these Causes, in his Comment upon the 24. Aphor. Of the third Book. The latter Physicians, following the Doctrine of the Arabians will have the Humour which Causes the Catarrh, to be bred in the Head, only without the Vessels, by reason of Vapours ascending. Fernelius contends that the Conjunct Cause of a Catarrh, is a serous matter, collected under the Skin of the Head, without the Vessels: and that the Antecedent Cause, is an Humour shut up in the Veins. If you desire to know more of this subject, Read Fernelius, who will give you abundant satisfaction. Chap. 3. Of the Eyes. BEcause the Eye and the Ear may be demonstrated without meddling to The Eyes. dissect the Face; I will dispatch these Parts, before I proceed unto the Countenance. The Eye, the Instrument of the Sight, is the principal Part of the face, placed Situations. in the Forepart of the Head, to direct the Actions of the body, because all actions are directed forwards, by reason of the Situation of the Hands. Seeing it is an Parts. Organical Part, made up of many Similar Parts; some of those Parts are external and some internal. The external are the a T. 19 f. 1. □ Eyelids, which are the Cover of the The Eyelids. Eyes, wherewith they are covered, shut and opened. And therefore each Eyelid is movable, howbeit the motion is more evident in the upper Eyelids, and is performed by help of Muscles, of which we shall treat in our fift Book containing the History of Muscles. From whence the Reader may fetch what does appertain to the present occasion. The Eyelid is made up, of the Skin, a Membrane and muscles. The Membrane It's Membrane. stretched out under the Skin, it produced from the Pericranium, which descending by the length of the Forehead unto the Eyes, is an underwofe for the Eyebrows, withal makes the conjunctive Coat of the Eye, which being fixed to the Brain of the Socket, detains and binds the Eye in its Hole or Cavity. The Extremities of all the Eyelids, are terminated with a Cartilaginous or Tarsus. Gristle edging, which is called b f. 1. C C. □ Tarsus, whereupon one by one in a row are fastened the c f. 1. beneath B. □ Hairs of the Eyelids; which are born with us, and look how long they are at our Birth, the same length they keep, during our whole life. They seldom fault of by reason of Sickness, unless in a Malignant Whores-Pocks, Cilia. which mows down and makes waste of all the Hairs of the Body. These Hairs of the Eyelids are termed Cilia. The angular Extremities of the Eyelids meeting together, are termed Anguli, Corners. the corners of the Eyes. The one is d f. 1. by D. □ greater, towards the Nose; the other is e f. 1. E. □ lesser, towards the Temples. In the Eyelids by the greater Corners are observed two little f f. 1. d d. holes, which are Tear-Spouts. termed Puncta Lachry malia, or the Tear-Spouts, because the superfluous Humidities of the Eyes, or tears, do flow thither and Issue out of those Holes; which Humidites to receive, the Glandula Lachrymalis or a T. 19 f. 1. D. □ Tear-Kernel is ordained, being thrust into the little perforated bone, that the Humour might rather distil through this Hole into the Nostrils, than fall out upon the external Parts. The upper Eyelid has a Muscle that lifts it up termed therefore b f. 1. A A. □ Levator or Muscles. the Lifter, which arises from the bottom of the Orbita or Socket and being spread out upon the Muscle which lifts up the Eye, it is c f. 1. B. □ widened into an Eyelid, that when the Eye is lift up the Eyelid may therewith be raised. The Musculus latus, or broad Muscle is common to the two Eyelids; which being Circularly derived from the bony brim of the Socket, is spread out through both the Eyelids, that it may serve to shut them both: and because it reaches in the upper Part as far as the Eyebrow it draws that likewise down, in a strong and close shutting of the Eyelids. Unless any man will contend, that there is a distinct Muscle for that use. Now the Eyebrow is a Fleshy Hillock, adorned with Hairs, which serves for a Eyebrow. Penthouse to overshadow the Eyes; it is depressed by the Orbicular Muscle of the Eyelids, and lifted up, by the frontal Muscle. These things being observed, the Eyelids are cut away, and the Circular adhesion Parts of the Eye. Fat of the Conjunctive Coat unto the Eye; that the Eye may de viewed, which is compact and made into a round bal or Globe of the fat which is placed d f. 2. A A. □ round about the same, to stop up the chinks and to make it more movable; and of six Muscles for motion; and of Coats, Humours, Veins, Arteries and Nerves. Before the Fat be removed, the two Glandules or Kernels are to be considered in Kernels. their Situation, of which one is of the greatest moment, Viz. The Lachrymal or e f. 1. D. □ Tear-Kernel; whose substance you shall observe to be Fleshy, soft and small; and its Situation to be within a little bone, beneath the same. Then you shall look out the other Kernel which is wholly unlik the former, placed in the other f f. 1. E. □ Corner; which is flat, White, and like other Kernels. The Fat being carefully taken away, the a T. 19 f. 2. B B B. □ six Muscles present themselves; in the investigation whereof, we must begin at the b f. 3. F. f. 4. F. □ Trochleator, or the greater Obliqne Muscle, Scituate at the greater c f. 1. by D. □ Corner; and there we must be careful to preserve the d f. 3. G. □ pulley, being a little strong Gristle fastened to the bone, beneath and close by the Caruncula Lachrymalis or e f. 1. D. □ Tear-spout; through which Gristle (like a Rope through a Pulley) the round Tendon of the Trochleator is drawn, and inserted into the upper Part of the Eye. The other, Obliquus f f. 3. and 4. E. □ Minor, must be sought for in the inferior Part of the Socket, being rolled back under the Eye, it is terminated by the lesser g f. 1. E. □ Corner. The other four, are right Muscles, whereof one h f. 3. 4, 5. A. □ lifts up, and its opposite i f. 3. 4, 5. B. □ draws down; the remaining two draw towards the k f. 3. 4, 5. C. D. □ Sides. They all take their original from the Cavity of the Socket, by the hole of the Optic Nerve, and each one is produced right forewards to the Conjunctiva. These things being observed, the Eye must be pulled out, that the inward structure True Coats. thereof may be made to appear: and in the first place you shall observe two true Coats of the Eyes, which are orbicular as the Eye itself: the rest are imperfect coats: and before you cut asunder the Cornea or Horny-Coat, you shall take away the Nervous productions of the Muscles of the Eye, which some would have to be a m f. 5. a a a a. □ Coat, which is absurd. You shall observe that the Cornea or n f. 6. A A. B B. □ Horny Coat is transparent before, to serve ● Cornea. the sight, but behind and on the sides, it is dark. It's thick o f. 8. C C C. □ Substance, is divided into little Skins, especially on the fore-side; when it is cut, presently the watery p f. 9 D D. □ Humour Runs out, which is also found Circumfused about the Wea Tunica, or Grape-Skin q Coat, if the Cornea be divided in the hinder Part: this Humour cannot be stopped, because it presently Occurs, fllowing out like Water. ˡ f. 2. C C. □ ᵖ f. 7. A A. C C. □ Afterwards you shall see the a T. 19 f. 7. A. C C. f. 8. B B B. □ Wea or Grape-Skin Coat, and its open hole, 2 Wea. Pupilla. Iris. which makes the b f. 7. a. □ Pupilla or sight of the Eye; the external Face or Circle of the Pupilla is termed c f. 5. b b. □ Iris, or the Rainbow. The Circumference of the Pupilla is adorned with small threads or little Fibres extended upon the Crystalline Humour, which they retain in its Situation. The Pupilla, in Cats, is manifestly moved, in Men it is unmovable, unless it be somewhat slackened and straitened, by the Access and Recess of some extraordinary light. These things being observed, pour out the Humours, and you shall find the e f. 9 A. □ Crystalline Humour overwhelmed in the Vitreous f f. 9 C C. □ Humour, and then the interior g f. 7. C C. □ Superficies of the Wea Tunica will appear black, and clean; in Brute Beasts it is varigated, beingtainted with Green Black and Sky-Color. Wherefore, when you are to demonstrate the Eye, you shall have an Ox and a Sheeps-Eye in readiness, that you may compare them with the Eyes of Mankind. In the hinder Part of the Wea you shall see the Optic h f. 3. I I. f. 4. K. f. 6. C. f. 8. D. □ Nerve fastened, and the Marrow thereof piercing within that Coat. There are three Humours contained in the Eye; the first is the i f. 9 D D. □ watery Humour, The three Humours of the Eyes. The Watery Chystallin. already run out, there remain two fastened together, the Chrystallin and the Vitreous. The Crystal is like a k f. 9 A. □ Vetch, transparent, and being placed upon letters in a Book, it makes them show larger, as a spectacle is wont to do. There is a Membrane attributed thereunto, termed l f. 9 within A. B. a Circle □ Chrystalloides. Hypocrates says that in living Creatures it Runs like Water, or is more liquid at least. The Crystalline Humour being pulled out, there remains the ᵐ Vitreous Humour, The Glassy. being compacted and not running about, by means of the Reticularis Tunica, or n f. 8. A A. □ Net-like Coat Interwoven: which being o T. 19 f. 8. a a. □ cut asunder, by frequent chopping of the Penknife thereupon, it becomes Liquid and runs about, the threddy Fibres being cut in sunder. The Veins and Arteries which accompany the Optic Nerve unto the Eye, are Their Vessels. more easily observed within the Brain, than in the Eye after it is pulled out. Neither is the motive Nerve so easily detected being dispersed among the Muscles, as it is within the Brain, while you observe its progress, even to the very Eye-hole. ᵈ f. 7. B B. f. 9 B B. □ The Medicinal Consideration. Although the Eye be but a small Part of the body, yet is there no Part afflicted There are divers Diseases ●…e Eyes. and destroyed with more Diseases. And therefore the ancient Physicians, when they had diligently examined the structure thereof, they observed so many and so divers disorders in its Parts, as did amount to about one hundred and twenty, partly Diseases, and partly Symptoms, and distinguished them by their Proper Names; which in other Parts they did not do. And Rome and Alexandria had Physicians that attended only the Cure of the Eyes. In imitation of them I shall Of which some are general of the whole Eye. a● declare the disposition against Nature happening to the Eyes. And because most of the Names are Greek, few of them Latin, and our Surgeons use them: after the example of Leonardus Fuchsius in his Medicinal Institutions, I will retain and use them as Latin Names. An Arabian Physician, Haly by Name, has writ a Book by itself of Diseases of the Eyes: and there is a considerable French Book of the same Argument written by Jacobus Guillemeau the King's Chirurgeon: unto which you may add if you please the Author of Medicinal Definitions: the Book of Galen touching the differences and Causes of Symptoms; and a bastard Book de Oculis attributed to him. The Eye therefore is afflicted either by being increased, or diminished in its Diseases of Magnitude. Quantity. The Eye is diminished, when it consumes for want of nourishment: its Magnitude is augmented when it swells without the Eye-hole or Socket. It's Situation is changed, when it falls without the Eye-hole, which Disease is Of Situation. termed Ecpiesmos: or if it turn to one side or another, as in Squinteyed People, and in him that saw through his nostrils and was therefore called Rhinoptis. There aught to be two Eyes: and therefore he that wants one, is diseased in Number. Number, and is called Monoculus. Furthermore the Eye is troubled by an hot and a cold Distemper and by inflammation Distemper etc. of the whole body, which by putrefaction of the Humours is turned into an Impostume. It is sometimes Ulcerated, whence the Eye becomes spoiled and the sight diminished. And in case an Inflammation of the whole Eye turn to Suppuration, which is called Hypopyon, and transparent matter be collected under the Cornea Tunica, showing that the other Humours are not putrified, there is hopes the Patient may recover sight, the quittor being let out, by pricking the Cornea: which is happily practised at Paris; and so with the Quittor a watery Humour is let out, as in the couching of a Cataract. Besides these general Diseases, all the Parts whereof the Eye is made up, have ● Special Diseases of other Parts. their Diseases and Symptoms, which I will particularly and briefly explain, beginning at the Eyelids. Eyelids Diseases. as Emphysema. Hydatis. A moist distemper of the Eyelids with wind, or a flatulent Spirit, is called Emphysema. With much Wheyish Humours, it's termed Hydatis, and by Celsus Vesica, and Aquula, which does so load and depress the upper Eyelid, that it cannot be lifted up. An hot distemper of the Eyelid, Joined with a thick Humour, is called Sclerophthalmia, Sclerophthalmia. Xerophthalmia. Psorophthalima Hard-eyedness. A dry distemper without Humours, is Xerophthalmia: if it cause Itching, Psorophthalmia. Unto which may be referred the Phthiriasis, or Lowsie-Evil of the Eye lid. If the said said hot and dry distemper Joined with a sharp Humour, do cause Redness, pain, and falling of the Hairs, it is called Ptilosis, Milphosis, or Madarrhosis. Ptilosis If it make the Inside of the Eyelid rough its called, Tracoma: which if it be Tracoma Sycosis. Tulosis. Crithe Chalasion● great, so as to resemble the small Seeds that are in Figs, it's called Sycosis; if it be hard and of long Continuance, its Name is Tulosis. A little Tumour upon the upper Eyelid springing from a thick Homor, is called Crithe, the Barleycorn. If it be greater and movable, because of its likeness to hail, it called Chalasion, the Hail-Stone. A Disease of the Eyelids in Contiguity is, when the Eyelids stick unto the Anchiloblepharon. Coat of the Eye, or to one another, which Disease is called Anchiloblepharon: the cause whereof is an exulceration of the Coat or the Eyes, or the Eye Lids: the exulceration being caused by an hot and dry distemper, with a sharp Humour. Lagophthalmia is a Convulsion of the upper Eyelid, or a drawing back thereof Lagophthalmia Ippos. by reason of a Cicatrice or some seam. Ippos is the trembling of the said Eyelid: both these Symptoms come by Consent of the Brain affected and therefore they are dangerous. Ectropion, Inversion, is a Disease of the lower Eyelid in Situation of Figure: Ectropion. it is caused by a Scar without, or by an excrescence of internal Flesh. Chalasis, or the loolness of the Eyelid, is caused either by a Palsy, through Chalasis. consent with the Nerves of the Brain, or by a moist distemper of the Eyelid: in both cases the Hairs are turned inwards. The generation of the Hairs of the Eyelids being depraved, is called Trichiasis, & Trichiasis. Dystichiasis. it is twofold: when more are bredthan ordinary, it's called Dystichiasis, when there is a row of Hairs more than usual. But when the natural Hairs are only longer and inverted, 'tis called Phalangosis: in both these, the Hairs prick the Eyes: 'tis caused Phalangosis. by a moist distemper of the EyeLids, with much Humour which is not sharp. Tear-Kernels Diseases. The Caruncle or little bit of Flesh in the greater corner of the Eye, makes a Tumour Euchantis. against Nature, which is called Euchantis: the Diminution of the said Caruncle is termed Rhyas, which causes a dropping of moisture from the Rhyas. Eye. Near the said Caruncle and the Nose, there breeds an Impostum through Inflammation, which is called Anchylops: which being broken and turned into a Fistula is Anchylops Aegylops. termed Aegylops. The Diseases of the Muscles of the Eyes, as distempers, Laxity and solution of Continuity, are distinguished by the Names of the Respective Symptoms. Diseases of the Tunica Conjunctiva. The hot distemper of the Conjunctive Coat with Humour as blood or Choler, if it be light and proceeding from an external cause, as the wind or dust, or a blow, is Taraxis. called Taraxis. But if it spring from an internal cause as a Plethora or Cacochymia, it is termed Opththalmia. When it is but beginning, it is called Epiphora; which is a Name Ophthalmia. Epiphora common to an Inflammation and fluxion. And if the Inflammation be very great, so that it hinders the coming together of the Eyelids, and spoils their Evenness, so that the white of the Eye becomes higher than the Iris and Pupilla, it is called Chemosis, as much as to say Chemosis. Hyposphagma Hiatus. Hyposphagma is a collection of Blood under the Adnata Tunica, or an effusion of blood out of the Capillary Veins into the Adnata, proceeding from a blow or bruise. There is a Disease of Number, in the Tunica Adnata, called Pterygium: Pterygium and it is a certain Membranons' Eminency reaching from the greater corner of the Eye to the Pupilla; or a certain hard knob of the Adnata itself: both springing from a moist distemper Joined with a clammy Humour. Phlyctena. Phlyctena, is a pustle or small Tumour of the Adnata or the neighbouring Cornea, proceeding from a thick and sharp Tumour, so that it terminates in an Ulcer. Botrion. Epicauma. And if it be hollow, it is called Botrion, or Fossula; if it be become crusty 'tis named Epicauma. After the Ulcer follows a Scar, which is the Hardness and thickness of a Spermatick Part springing from a wound or Ulcer. Diseases of the Cornea Tunica. The Ulcers and Scars of the Cornea Tunica, have a great resemblance with the Cheloma. Diseases of the Adnata, in regard of neighbourhood: yet are they distinguished, because the Ulcers and Scars in the black of the Eye, that is, in the transparent Part of the Cornea, belong only to the Cornea: such as is the Cheloma, which is a broad Ulcer of the Cornea, about the Iris. Argemon, is a round Whitish Ulcer of the Cornea towards the Circle of the Argemon. Iris. Scars in the Black of the Eye, or in the Transparent Part of the Cornea, do differ Albugo. in the degrees of more or less. The greater Scar of the Cornea, about the Iris or Pupilla, because of its whiteness is called Leucoma and Albugo: if it be small it is termed Nephelion or Nebula, the Cloud: if the Scar be thin, it's called Nebula. Caligo. Achlys, Caligo, a Mist or Darkness. Diseases of the Uvea Tunica. The rapture and Exulceration of the Cornea, is attended by a Disease of the Proptosis. Wea in Situation, which is called Proptosis, Procidentia, when the Wea sticks out above the Cornea. If the Extuberance of the Wea be small, it's called Myocephalon or the Flie-Head, Myocephalon Staphyloma Melon Clavus. because it resembles the Head of a Fly: if it be great, 'tis termed Staphyloma, because it resembles a Grap-Stone, or Melon as being like an Apple. If their be an inveterate Ulcer of the Cornea through which the Wea falls out, it's called Elos, Clavus, the Nail. The Ulcers of the Cornea and Adnata, if they be Malignant are termed Carcinomata. Diseases of the Pupilla. The hole of the Wea is termed Pupilla the Apple of the Eye. Between the Pupilla and Cornea there is a space, full of Spirit and Watery Humour. There is a double Disease of that space: Zinifisis, springing from a dry distemper, Zinifisis. which consumes the Watery Humour and Dissipates the Spirit; or from a wound, which lets out the Watery Humour, and suffers the Spirit to vanish and reek away. The other Disease of the space, is an Obstruction from a corrupted Phlegmatic or purulent Humour. If it proceed of a purulent Humour or Quittor, it is called Hypopium. Suffusio. Hypopium: if the Obstruction be caused by Phlegm, it's termed Hypochyma Suffusio. But Hypopium follows an Inflammation, and Hypochyma is caused for the most Part by a Congestion or Concretion of a thick Humour: if the Disease be proper or primary, and do not arise by consent from the Stomath, sending Vapours up into the Eye. Fernelius saw a thick and perfect Suffusion bred in one day's time; for if a thick Humour suddenly falling into the Optic Nerve do blind a man in a moment: why may not the same Humour falling lower into the Pupilla, breed a sudden and perfect Suffusion? The narrowness of the Pupilla, springs either from the first formation in the Corrugatio. Womb; or from a dry distemper, and then it is called Phthisis or Corrugatio. Galen writes that a small Pupilla from from one's Birth is occasion of a very sharp sight but when it happnes a whil after, 'tis bad. In his first Book of the Causes of Symptoms. Chap. 2. The Dilatation of the Pupilla is called Mydriasis or Platu-Corie. It springs Mydriasis. from a moist distemper, or from a Rupture, or by breach of Continuity caused by a blow. Diseases of the Chrystallin and glassy Humour. Diseases of the Vitreous and Chrystallin Humours, are either a distemper simple Distemper or with Humours conjoined; or such as happen in the consistence of the said Humours, viz. Thickness and hardness. The distemper of the Humours and Coats of the Eye, if it happen without a Tumour or an Ulcer, is commonly attributed to the weakness of the Faculty, and the quality and quantity of the spirits being misaffected: but neither of these is a Disease; they are rather effects of a Disease: for what is the weakness of a faculty other than Actio laesa, the action hurt. Thickness of the Spirits is caused by a cold and moist distemperature, either proper Thinness of the Spirits. Their Paucity to the Eye, or by consent with the brain or some inferior Parts. Paucity of Spirits comes from a dry distemper, either of the Eye or the brain: the Cause and fomenter of which distemper may be a Choleric Humour not purged out of the body, being the cause and Effect of a distempered Liver. The thickness and hardness of the Chrystallip Humour is properly termed Glaucosis Glaucoma or Glaucoma, because the colour thereof resembles that of an Owls Eyes: it proceeds from a cold and dry distemper, and is therefore familiar to aged Persons. The Disease of the Crystalline Humour in respect of its Situation, has no name, but if it be somewhat higher and flatter than ordinary, it produces a Symptom, whereby all things appear double. The watery Humour may run out, by a prick in the Eye, but it is bred again in Running out of the watery Humour. Thickness of the Visive spirit. Children, as Galen saw by experience, and as we may observe in Chickens. The Visive or seeing Spirit implanted in the Eye, may become thick, and surround the Crystalline Humour with darkness and obscurity: as the implanted Hearing-Spirit of the Ear, being rendered thick, does cause deafness or thickness of Hearing. Diseases of the Optic Nerve. The Optic Nerve may be troubled with any kind of distemper, and with solution Obstruction of continuity; but the proper and usual Disease thereof, is Obstruction, which is known by a sudden blindness, the other Parts of the Eye being all sound: which made the neoterics call this Disease Gutta Serena, and sometimes Amaurosis. Amaurosis Diseases and Symptoms of the Sight. Sight abolished is called Caecitas Blindness: when it is diminished only, 'tis Caecitas Amblyopia Myopsis Nyctalops termed Amblyopia, thick sightedness: and it is accounted twofold Myopsis and Nyctalops: In the former the Patient is Purblind, and is fain to look close to what he would discern and to hold his Eyelids almost shut together. In the latter, the Patient can see only by day, but very little or nothing at all by night, or very obscurly: the other differences of sight diminished are comprehended under the general name of Amblyopia. Sight depraved, is a falls perception of things before the Eyes: its termed Parorasis Hallucination or Hallucination. The Causes of these Symptoms, are no other than those Diseases of the Eyes, Causes of blindness. of Anchylo-Blepharon. which we have before recounted. For the Cause of blindness is, the Obstruction of the Optic Nerve, Glaucoma, Leucoma, Hypopion, Hypochyma, Proptosis, the larger Mydriasis, a Pterygium or Film covering the whole sight of the Eye, Anchylo-Blepharon or Gluing together of the Eyelids. Imminution or Impairing of the sight, is caused by the other Diseases of the Eyelids. As by a thin Scar of the Cornea, called Nephelion and Achlys; and by a Leucoma and a small Mydriasis, which touches but Part of the Sight. Myopsis Nyct●uopsis Dry distemper of the Humours of the Eyes cause Myopsis: the over Humidity and thickness of the said Humours, makes a Man that he cannot see in the Night. The Causes of sight depraved is an Hypopion beginning; or an Hypochyma, Namely, when the Humour is not yet united and grown together, so that the visive Spirit can pass too and fro between the Parts of the Humour through the empty spaces: whence it is that some see flies as it were, and certain dark bodies, move before their Eyes. When true objects presented to the Eyes, have a falls Appearance, the sight is Hallucination Amalops depraved, and termed Amalops: so all things appear Yellow, to such as have the Jaundice. But that kind of Symptom happens, when the Cornea which is spread out before the sight of the Eye, is infected with Blood or Choler. The Animal action of the Eye is hurt sometimes, as Feeling and Motion: the Eyes pain Feeling of the Eye is hurt by extreme Pain thereof, which notwithstanding, according to the Judgement of Celsus, remains within the Eyes, and draws not the Brain into consent, as Pain of the Ears is wont to do. The Causes of all Pains in the Eyes, is a distemper, or Solution of Unity. The hurting of the Eyes Motion, is either a Palsy, Convulsion, or Trembling. Palsy Convulsion Trembling In the Palsy and Convulsion, the Eyes become stiff and fixed: in that sort of Convulsion called Tetanus, they are unstable, as in the Trembling. The Natural Action of the Eyes, is likewise hurt, as Nutrition. To the Jrregularity of the Excrements of the Eyes, does belong the Involuntary shedding of Tears. It's caused by a moist or cold distemper of the Eyes, or from Flowing out of tears. pricking by a sharp Humour, or some external Cause; or from the Erosion of that same Caruncle, which is in the greater corner of the Eye. Hereunto likewise belongs the filth of the Eyes, which is by the Greeks called Laeimai Laeimai: they are caused by an extreme distemper of the Eye, which makes a dissolution or melting down of matter. The simple infirmities of the Eyes, are the spots and Scars of the Conjunctive Spots and Horny Coats, which are both Diseases and Symptoms. The Duskynes and obscurity of the Eyes, is when the Bal of the Eye, does not Obscurity represent any outward object to him that looks upon it; which is a token of Death in an Acute Fever. Chap. 4. Of the Ear. THe Ear, being the Instrument of hearing, is divided, into the a T. 20. f. 1. and 2. □ External The Ears Parts Part, broad and gristly, and the b f. 3 4. etc. □ Internal, which lies hid in the Os petrosum. The external Part is termed c f. 1. and 2. □ Auricula, made up of a d f. 2. B B. □ Gristle, which is covered with a Skin full of e f. 2. A A. □ Folds, and made hollow, with divers f f. 1. A A. B B. □ wind; with an hole g f. 1. G G. □ through the same placed upon the side of the Head, just against the hole of Wind h f. 3. A. □ Os Petrosum. It is more beautiful, when small: for a great pair of Ass' Ears are uncomely. The Ear was placed as it is, for the Conveniency of hearing: and if the Situation of the Ear inverted would not have been deformed, it had been more commodious for hearing, then placed as it is upright and Joined to the Temporal Bone. For we see such as are thick of hearing, put the hollow of their hand behind their Ear, that they may hear the better. In the Ear you shall observe two Parts; one is called i f. 1. G. □ Tragus, and Tragus Antitragus the other k f. 1. D. □ Antitragus the Names of the other Particles of the Ear, are useless. In the Auricula is contained the first passage, or Hole of the Ear, and reaches Hole of the Ear as far as the m f. 4. B B. □ Tympanum or Drum: its entrance is fenced with Hairs, to keep out dust and crawling Bugs, that might otherwise enter in. There is a T. 20. f. 3. C. □ collected, the Earwax Choleric Excrement of the Ear, called Earwax, which Bird-Limes and entangles any Dust or creeping thing that would pass that way. It's termed Marmoratum. The internal Ear Concluded in the Os Petrosum, is altogether boney, and divided Concha into three Cavities. The first Cavity is the b f. 6. B. C. f. 7. within A. B. □ Concha: In the extremity of the first c f. 4. B B. f. 5. B. □ hole is the Membrane stretched out, which terminates upon the d f. 3 B. f. 4. A A. etc. Drum: it has a string that runs cross it, as we see the Military Drums have. The Drum ˡ f. 3. B. f. 4. A. etc. □ Furthermore, we observe three little Bones, the e f. 4. G. f. 5. E. f. 7. A. □ Maller, the f f. 7. B. □ Anvil, and the g f. 7. C. □ Stirrup: Four little Bones. others add a h f. 7. D. □ fourth, which is a little Scal of a bone, such as is found in the Carotick Artery near the Os Sphenoides. But this is vain and unuseful. Fortunatus Plempius places another Membrane at the other extremity of the Concha, but how or where it is extended, he does not explain: whether at the two petty windows, whereof the one is the entrance of the labyrinth and the other of the Cochlea, or elsewhere? It is a most hard piece of Service to find out and demonstrate the internal structure of the Ear. In the Skulls of i T. 8. f. 5. 6, 7, 8. □ Infants, and in a Calves-Head, it is more easily observed, by lifting up with a Penknives Edge that same portion of k T. 20. f. 10. B B. □ Os Petrosum, which within the Skull reaches unto the Basis of the Brain. In the Concha you shall observe on the left side an Hole, which passes into the winding Cavity of the Apophysis Mastoides, or Teat-like Production. The Auditory l T. 8. f. 1. F F. f. 3. R▪ R. T. 20. f. 12. A A. B B. □ Nerve, being m f. 10. A A. □ drawn through the n f. 7. D D. f. 9 A. f. 11. B D. □ Cochlea, when it is come to The Nerve the Concha, it slips through an hole or o f. 8. A. B B. □ Channel, which opens on the right side of the Concha, into the palate, by the Process which is termed Apophysis Pterygoidea. And this is the natural structure of the internal Ear; for the finding out whereof we are obliged to Fallopius, after Carpus, who discovered those little bones the the Hammer and the Anvil. The third, namely, the Stirrup, Philippus Ingrassias brags to have himself first observed. In living-Creatures, there is an inbred and implanted Air in the Cavities of the Implanted Air Ears, as there is a visive Spirit in the Eye, shut up within the Cornea Tunica. The Medicinal Consideration. The Gristle of the external Ear if troubled with Pustles or Pushes, is confsed, Diseases of the ●ar. Swells, is inflamed and exulcerated. By cold it contracts Sphacelation, is contracted and djes do what a Man can: and it's sometimes cut of both in sick and in sound Persons. Whence the Greek phrases Colo●oma and Acrotiriasmenoi, for persons that are Crop-eared. The greatness of the external Ear, though it be ill favoured, cannot be helped. Parotis what it is. The Swelling and Inflammation of the Kernels which are beside the Ears, is termed Parotis, which in regard or the narrowness of the place and nearness to the brain, is not very safe, happening upon an acute fever, though it have the name of Dioscouros or Castor and Pollux, because of its good token, for such it gives when it is critical; proceeding from the strength of Nature, and attended with light somness of the Patient following the same. In Children and young People a Parotis does many times break forth, void of danger; caused by the over great moisture of their brains. In the hollow behind the Ear; according to the advice of Fernelius, a Caustick must be applied, in Diseases of the Ears and of the Eyes. The first Auditory passage of the Ear, because 'tis fleshy is obstructed by a Tumour, Of the Auditory passage. by a Caruncle or bit of Flesh growing up, or by quittor Issuing out, or by Fi●●h, or somewhat from without. It is inflamed, and impostumated, and Exulcerated either of itself, or by means of some eating Medicine poured into the Ear: or by a Choleric Humour: wherefore Hypocrates says that when Deaf persons fall into Choleric Loosnesses, their deafness is lessened, or taken away: and when their looseness is stopped, their deafness returns. This passage is terminated inwardly by the Drum, which either of itself and primarily, or secondarily and by accident through consent of the Bowels, but especially through fault of the Head, is troubled with a very painful and dangerous Inflammation, which draws the brain into Sympathy. The internal Cavities, because they have no Periostium, are not pained, unless Of the inner Cavities. Of the Drum the Auditory Nerve be affected, whose offspring makes the Drum: from its inflammation proceeds an Impostum and from that an Ulcer: which tears asunder the Drum. It is broken, not only by an Ulcer, but also by a blow and a vehement sound; whence it is that those who dwell by the Falls of the River Nilus, are all deaf, by reason of Loud roaring and Headlong fall of the flowing Water. Also the looseness and over great moisture of the Drum is to be considered, because it may Cause Deafness. The proper Symptoms of the Ear, are those which belong to the hurts of hearing, Symptoms of the Action hurt. Deafness. and the Irregularity of Excrements. The hea●ing is hurt in a threefold Manner. When it is abolished, it is called Surdita●, Deafness: which if it come from the Womb and is born with the Patient, it is incurable: if it come by accident, it may be curable. Hearing diminished is called Barucoia, thickness of hearing. Thickness of Hearing. Noise in the Ears. Their Cause Hearing depraved consists in a noise and ring or buzzings in the Ear; 'tis called Paracousis. The Causes of Deafness and Thickness of Hearing are the same, save that they differ in Intention and Remission: and therefore the foresaid Diseases of the Auditory passage and of the Drum may cause these Symptoms. Paracousis or Noise in the Ears springs from a distemper of the drum, being more moist or more dry than is fitting: which, as it causes a more exquisite sense than ordinary, so also does it cause a ringing in the Ear, as being affected with the very lightest motion of the internal implanted, or external Air, of while the spirits do continually flow into the Ears; which cannot be contained in so close a Room▪ of some Spirit may stir itself within the Dug-like Cavity. Several sounds are imagined in the Ears according to the various motion and mode of the flatulent Spirit which causes the same. So that if it be thick, whisper are heard and Hum▪ if thin, Hissing: and when it moves by fits and starts, it presents a tinkling, as it were of bells. Sometimes noises are imagined without any fault of the internal Ear, by consent of the Head, whiles the internal and external Arteries being hotter than ordinary, do beat more violently than they are wont to do, and do make a great sound in the Ears, if the Patient do lie upon one of them. The differences and Causes of this seeming Noise in the Ears, are neatly expressed by Fernelius in his Pathologia. In natural Deafness, springing from mis-formation in the Womb, and not from Their Cn●● any of the Causes aforesaid: whether may we experiment that which fell out unexpectedly well to a certain Deaf man: who thrusting an Ear-Picker very far into his Ear, rend the Drum and Break asunder the small bones and afterwards, attained hearing? Whether in a ringing of the Ear may the teat like Process be perforated, to let out the Spirits which make a tumult in that Cavity? Whether does the thickness of the Tympanum hinder Transpiration? so that the flatulent Spirits cannot break out? whether or no will it avail to rub the extremity of the Auditory Channel, behind the Grinding-teeths, with Mustard of some other opening Liquor? The Irregulary of Excrements in the Ear, is not only of Choleric and Wheyish Symptoms of the Excrements. Excretion of blood Choler serum, quittor etc. Humours, but also of quitter and blood, proceeding from the brain: neither is so great a quantity of quittor as is avoided, bred in the Cavities, but in the Brain. If an intolerable inflamatory and pulsatory pain does occupy the hinder parts of the head, and the matter flows thither and there stops, the pain abiding: it will be safe to boar an hole in the hinder part of the Head, that Egress may be given to the quittor; when no great danger is like to follow from the said operation. The Ear-Worms termed Eblai, which are voided from the Ears, belong to the Worms. Irregularity of things voided from these parts. It is good in Children for the internal and external Parts of their Ears to run and void much Humour, because it purges their Brain and prevents great Diseases. There is in Diseases observed a great Sympathy between the Ears, Mouth, Lungs and Weasand: and therefore when the Ears are hurt, the voice is changed, by reason of the Auditory Nerve, which being spread into the Throat, reaches as far as the Weasand or Wind-Pipes Head. And when Nature has been accustomed to Purge out the Excrements of the Brain, by the Ears: the stoppage of that Purgation, has made many to die suddenly. Chap. 5. Of the Face and outside of the Mouth. THe Face is the broad and fore part of the head, comprehending the Forehead The Face described. in a living and dead Man without dissection; and therefore the a T. 15 f. 3. A. □ Forehead, b f. 1. between F F. T. 19 al. □ Eyes, c T. 15. f. 1. G I □ Nose, and Mouth with its d f. 1. N N. □ Lips, as far as the Chin, do belong unto the Face: which, as it is the subject of Anatomical dissection, is divided into the Parts internal and external. The External Parts are the Scarf-Skin and the Skin, which are thin and very It's Paris. smooth in Women. The internal Parts, are the Muscles of the e f. 1. G H I etc. □ Nose, f f. 1. K L M N. □ Lips, and inferior jaw, whose empty Spaces are filled up with fat. Moreover the Musculus Latissimus, does cover the side of the Face, as far as the Forehead; yea and it compasses the whole Neck, excepting the hinder Part thereof. The Muscles of the Lips, are the Extremities of the Mouth: the other Muscles which belong to the lower Jaw, as the a T. 15. f. 1. P P. Temperal Muscle, the Muscle called b f. 1. S. □ Masseter, possessing the sides of the Face, shall be explained in our History of the Muscles. The Mouth therefore is a Slit in the Skin of the Face, necessary for breathing, The Mouth described. speech, and nourishment of the body: for by the Mouth we breathe, speak and receive our Food. The extremities of this Slit art termed c f. 1. N N. □ Lips which are moved by Muscles in their The Lips. opening and shutting. The utmost bound of the Face is called the d f. 1. n. □ Chin, as the upper extremity The Chin. thereof from the Eyebrows to the beginning of the Hairs is termed the e f. 3. A. □ Forehead. The sides of the Face are the f f. 1. O. □ Cheeks. The internal Parts of the Mouth, as the The Cheeks. g f. 1. R S T. etc. f. 2. A B C. etc. □ Teeth, Gums, h T. 10. f. 1. g g. Palate, i T. 13. f. 15. A. □ Throat, k f 14. A etc. □ Tongue, shall be described in order. The l f. 9 10. etc. □ Larynx m f. 11, 12, 23. □ Os Hyoides, n T. 3. f. 2. 3. □ Pharynx, and the o f. 16, 17. etc. □ Glandules, appertain unto the Neck. The Face, besides Veins and Arteries has a notable p T. 18. f. 2. A. □ Nerve from the third pair, The Vissels. which is carried along between two q f. 2. c c. etc. boney plates, under the pavement of the Orbita or Socket of the Eye, and is branched up and down like a Goose's Foot, through the whole Face, by the Nose, as far as the Lips. gf. 6. m n o. □ ʰ f. 6. L L. □ The Medicinal Consideration. The Skin of the Face, is the Looking-Glass wherein are seen the Diseases of the Diseases of the Face. Body, especially of the Liver, Spleen and Lungs: for look what Humour bears sway in the bowels, the same shows itself forth in the Face. If there be a lasting Ruddyness in the Cheeks, it is a Sign of an hot Liver: if the Redness be seated upon upon the balls above the Cheeks, it argues an hot distemper of the Lungs. If Choler stick in the pores of the Skin, it causes Freckles: if the Colour proceed from Sunburning. The Rose. being in the Sun, it is termed Ephelis. If Redness remain settled on a great Part of the Face, it is named Gutta Rosacea, and those who are spotted on that manner are termed Antirhoei. Paleness is commonly seen in Virgins and such as are recovered out of some Sickness. Green-Sickness The Green-Sickness, is a slow Fever in Virgins and other young Women that want their Courses. In such as are sickly and crazy, the Colour of the Face is without blood because the whole Mass of blood is Wheyish, and therefore the blood of the Face being such, must needs be of an Wheyish Color. Those that are so affected, are called Liphaemoi, bloodless. A bad Colour of the Face, both in Sick and sound persons, is termed Cacochroia Furthermore, the Face is made rough and deformed by burning Pustles, jonthi, Vari, Fici, Naevi, and Spilloi. An hard Push is called jonthos, because it represents a branch of the flowering jonthos. Violet. Varus is an harder knob, and not so red and fiery as the jonthos, Ficus is a certain Varus. Wart. Lichen, Impetigo or Darta, is a roughness or Scaly Eminence of the Skin, if it Lichen. be dry; if it be moist, it Exulcerates and runs. Naevi, Warts, are smooth knobs white or bluish: which if they be of a Warts. bad Color, they must not be tampered with, lest some worse and cancerous disposition follow: and Seneca says that a face without Warts or moles is not pleasing. It is a wonderful thing how these Warts of the Face do produce others in divers Parts of the body, which answer the measure of the Face as far as the Neck. Of which subject Ludovicus Septalius has composed a most Elegant Book. Black and blue Colour in the Skin of the Face, proceeding from a bruise, is called Hypopium. Hypopium. Spilloi are Sooty Excrements of the Skin, intruded into the pores thereof, which Spilloi. are pulled out, either by a pin, or by squeesing the Skin, or by some emollient Medicament or Pomatum, if they be hard and thick. Pani, are scars in the Face. Pani Mentagra. Mentagra, an Impetigo or Dry-Scab of the Chin, which troubled the Gentlemen of Rome in Plinnies time, where it was a Popular Disease: is a Malignant Scab, which remains many years and is hardly curable, and to altars the Skin of the Chin and Lips, that a Man continues Beardless all his Life long. The Action of the Skin of the Face being hurt is termed Cynicus Spasmus, The Cynicus spasmus. Doglike Convulsion, or torture of the Mouth expressing the snarling of a Dog: for it is a depraved motion of the Muscles of the Face, belonging to a Pal●e or Convulsion. It is be Paralytic the Retraction is made in the sound Part, because of the dissolution of the opposite Parts: If it be convulsive, the Part affected is drawn back: Those Nerves which are affected in this Symptom, do arise from the spinal Marrow between the second and third Vertebra of the Neck. Galen attributed this depraved motion of the Mouth to the Muscle termed Latissimus. Besides the Cynicus Spasmus, there is another Convulsion very ordinary, of the upper Lip towards the Eye, by the disorder of that same Nerve of the third pair described above, which being cut a sunder, below the Socket of the Eye, the said Convulsion is healed. The particular medicining of the Face besides the universal, is twofold, the one called Commotice painting and plastering with Fucuses etc. The other Cosmetice Painting Beautifying beautyfing and adorning without any thing laid on: the latter Galen allows to take away the ill favouredness of Women: but the former, he disallows in a Physician, and leaves it to panders, bawds and Whores The Use of those Fucuses, unless skilfully managed does quickly wrinkle the Skin, such as are the Spanish- White, and Purpurissus or Louly-red. The Diseases of the Lips are very many, distempers, Inflammation, Swelling, Ulcers, The use of the Lips. and others consisting in evil conformation, all which pervert the use and action of the Lips which serve to shut the Mouth, form the speech and for the easy reception of meat and drink, to contain the Tongue within the Mouth, to cast forth the Spittle out of the Mouth, for Trumpeters to make a strong blast, for Infants to Suck with, and both in Men and Women to express their mutual Affection by Kissing, Diseases of the Lips. and to beautify their Faces: and therefore if a Man's Lips were cut of, he would appear very deformed, just like a snarling Dog. Such as have great Lips and sticking out, are called Labeones: such as are born In their Shape with imperfect or cloven Lips, are said to have an Hare's Lip: this defect is amended by Surgery. If the Lips be lose and hanging, it proceeds from a Palsy. He that has the insides of his Lips turned outwards is termed Brochus: and he that has swelling Lips is called Cheilo. Those are by Arnobius termed Mentones, whose Chins stick out. The Chaps of the Lips are called Rhagades. Sometimes Tumours and little bladders Chaps Tumours break out upon the Lips, especially in Fevers, when Nature drives the virulent Humour out of the Veins and Arteries into the Lips, which Avicen says is a good sign, that the Fever will quickly cease: and experience does many times confirms the same. Yet sometimes Tumours and Ulcers in the Lips are in Diseases signs of Ulcers Death, as in the two Brothers Hermoptolemus and Andreas in Hypocrates. Bad Colour of the Lips in Diseases is no good sign: in such as are well, it argues a Bad Color fault in the Lungs or in the blood. ` Moles and Warts black and blue and Scirrhous sticking upon the Lips, are Moles and Warts. etc. things to be warily handled, and not to be tampered with by way of Incision. Sometimes the Lips do naturally Swell, especially the lower Lip, when the Jaw is drawn out, and then the lower Teeth before are higher than the upper, and include them. The principal hurt of the action of the Lips, is depraved Speech. But this Symptom wants a Name. Symptoms The depraved trembling motion of the Lips, happens by consent of the Stomach Trembling distempered, by reason of a Membrane common to the Lips and Stomach. Whence it is that those who are ready to vomit, have a trembling in their nether Lip: which trembling is called Seismos. The opening of the Mouth is hurt, when the Jaw is become stiff and immovable: Shutting its shutting is hurt when the Jaw is Palsied, as in Fevers, by reason of the Heat of the bowels and Lungs, and difficulty of breathing. Much spawling, and want of Spittle, do belong to the Diseases of the Mouth, Frequent spitting. though they have other remote Causes: for Spittle is necessary for chewing of meat, for speech and Tasting; but immoderate Spittle is hurtful, and the avoidance thereof is accounted filthy and undecent. Touching the Cure of Lips cut of, Taliacotius has written. Chap. 6. Of the Nose. THe Nose, the Instrument of Smelling and of cleansing the brain, is placed in the The Noses Situation. midst of the Face; dividing the Eyes and Face into two even Parts. The length and breadth thereof is uncomely, if it exceed a Man's Thumb in length and thickness. Magnitude The Figure of a Man's Nose contributes much to his healthy living: for an high Shape Nose is better than a flat Nose, and wide Nostrils are to be preferred before narrow ones. It is divided into two a T. 15. f. 2. □ Cavities, which are called Nostrils severed by a partition, Cavities and reaching as high as the Colander-bone. The Depth and Widness of the Nose, are greater within than they appear outwardly: for that same space which lies between the two tables or boards of the Palate and Os Sphenoides, divided into two Cavities by the Os Vomeris, reaching to the Partition of the Nostrils, belongs unto the Nose. That space is filled up with Spongy Bones, which are portions of the Colander-bone. Spongy Bones Spongy Caruncles. And those▪ Spongy bones are filled with Spongy bits of Flesh, which drink up the Phlegm which flows from the Head, that Snevil might not be always dropping out of the Nose. These bones and Caruncles or Spongy bits of flesh do likewise serve to Filtrate and strain the Air, which, the Mouth being shut, is drawn in at the Nostrils, that it may be imparted pure unto the Lungs and brain. The Nose therefore is compounded of bones, Gristles, Membranes and Muscles. Bones It consists of b T. 15. f. 3. K. □ Two Bones, which stick outwards and fashion the same. Five Gristies Gristles are dependant upon those bones, two being lateral placed by turns, and movable through the help of Muscles. They are termed Pinnae and Alae Nasi the Wings and Pinnacles of the Nose. There is a Gristle placed between them, which is called Septum, the partition, and it depends upon that same boney a T. 15. f. 6. ●. □ partition, placed between the bones of the Nose, being a continuation of Os Vomeris. The Nose is clothed externally with the Cuticula and Cutis under which lie the Membrane Muscles b T. 15. f. 1. G H. etc. □ Muscles. The inner Parts of the Nose are invested with a Membrane sprinkled with fleshy Fibres, by the help of which, the Pinnacles of the Nose are contracted, when the breath is strongly drawn in; as the said Pinnacles are widened by other external Muscles, the description whereof you shall find in my History of the Muscles. Book the 5. To the Nose do belong, the Seive like plate of the Colander bone, and the Mamillary or Teat-like Productions ending at these bones, and given out to be the Organs or Instruments of Smelling. Some would doubt whither those Caruncles or little bits of Flesh which are thrust into the Spongy bones, are the proper Instruments of smelling, or only some way subservient thereunto; because when they are overmoistened, or by any Diseases impaired, the smelling is depraved, or wholly lost. ᶜ T. 15. f. 5. C C. □ ᵈ T. 18. f. 3. a a. □ The Medicinal Consideration. The Gristly Parts of the Nose, are Inflamed, Bruised, and Ulcerated; the Diseases of the whole Nose. honey Parts are broken; all of them are troubled with distempers, but especially with organic Diseases springing from a bad Conformation, as when the Nose is crooked inwards like a saddle; which is oftimes caused by external Causes: but if a Child be born with a Saddle-Nose, it may be then raised and rectified. For as Plato reports in his Alcibiades, if the King of Persia had a Daughter so born; they did thrust Pipes into the Child's Nose, and reduce it by little and little to its right shape, by widening the bones and Gristles, whiles they were yet Waxy and pliable. An over great and high Nose, cannot be cut shorter without making the party more deformed. If in persons grown up the Nose be Swelled with Tuberous Excrescencies of Flesh; that fault may be mended by cutting of the said luxuriating Flesh. The inside of the Nose is apt to Swell, and is infested with Inflamatory bunches, Of the inside Tubercula Ozena which come to suppuration: but far within in the Spongy bones and their Caruncles, there is bred a filthy stinking Ulcer called Ozaena, which is offensive both to the Patients and all that come near them, and is very hard to cure. Sometimes the little bones are corrupted and come out at the Nostrils. The Caruncles being swelled with or without an Ulcer, cause the Polypus, which falls into the Nostrils, or it fills Polypus the hollow places above the Palate, reaching as far as the Throat. The Polipus is neatly described by Celsus in his sixth Book, Chapter the eight. Unless it be of a Malignant Color and painful, it may safely be cut away by the Roots, if possible, which is the true▪ Cure, for otherwise it will grow again, if any Part be left remaining after section. A Malignant Cancerous Polypus must not be meddled withaleither by cutting, burning, or caustick Medicaments, for if it be exasperated it eats and devours the whole Face. Symptoms of the Nose are either its action hurt, or simple affections thereof, Symptoms of the Nostrils. Smelling lost or the Irregulary of what is voided forth. The action of the Nose is Smelling, which is abolished, diminished or depraved. The Causes of the smell diminished or abolished, are the same, to wit, the obstruction of the inward passages of the Colander-bones and the Mammillary productions, in which the smelling is exercised. Diminished. If the foremost Ventricles be stopped, other parts of the Nose remaining entire, it is known by the perfection of speech, which shows that the Colander and Spongy bones with the Mammillary Productions, are free. The Smelling is depraved, when all things seem to stink, and when the Patient depraved. perceives a stink in his Nose, which is likewise discerned by the standers by. The true Cause of this Symptom, is a putrified Humour congealed in those Cavities. If the Putrefaction be within the Skull, the stink is not perceived by the Patient, but is discerned by those which converse with him, as Fernelius judiciously observes. Simple affections of the external Nose, are spors which are black and blue or red, Spots and deform the same. They must be taken away, or corrected with some Fucus, if there be no other Remedy. The Irregularity of Excretions, consists in Bleeding at the Nose, and in a Nose-bleeding Coryza Flux of Serosities therefrom, which causes the Coryza or Gravedo, or a continual Nose-dropping. Hypocrates in his sixth Book of Aphorisms says, Such as have running Noses, are unhealthy. In bleeding at the Nose, the blood either comes from the Nostrils opened by 'Cause of Nose-bleeding. picking, or from that same long Cavity of the Dura Mater, which reaches unto the Nostrils: if the Veins be opened by the sharpness of the blood or the abudance thereof, after it has flowed a while, it must be stopped by opening a Vein in the Arm, unless the blood flow critically. Fernelius would have all bleedings at the Nose to be stopped, be they what they will, and would have a Vein opened to that end, contrary to the Doctrine of Hypocrates. Blood coming from the inner Parts of the Nose may be stopped: but it is very hard to stop the same when it comes from the meanings or Coats of the Brain. Dropping of blood from the Nose in burning and Malignant Fevers, is bad, both It's Cure. as a Cause and a sign: because it does not ease the Patient, and it shows a Plenitude in the brain, and that nature being weak is not able to disburden herself. In such a case, great care is to be taken of the head by Revulsion, and Derivation of the blood, and by cooling of the Head, for fear of Inflammation or some Sleepy Disease. If bleeding at the Nose be stopped in young people accustomed thereunto, and their brains Ache through fullness, they must be let blood. The Ancients did open the inward Veins of the Nose, which Practice is left off, because the way they did it, is to us unknown. Fernelius writes that Worms as long as ones Finger have been found in Saddle-Noses, being there bred▪ which at last made the Patients mad and killed them: those Worms were thought to have been cast out of the brain, where as indeed they were born and bred in the Cavities of the Nose. For Worms bred in the Ventricles of the brain, cannot come out, unless they should eat a sunder or break the Sievelike table of the Colander-bone. That which Fernelius has written, is worthy of consideration in reference to Diseases of the Head. That in Nose-bleedings, the blood comes out not from the brain, but out of the Veins of the Nostrils. The Veins (saith he) do run into the Nose not from the inner Parts of the brain, but out of the Cavities of the Mouth and Palate, which are wide and open enough, so as they seem to be the Emissaries of superfluous blood; Even as the Haernorrhoid Veins, and those which belong to the Neck of the Womb. Wherefore the brain being burdened with blood is not eased, if the blood flow not from the Cavities of Dura Mater. But I believe it flows out of the brain. And Galen and Areteus do writ, that the Veins within the Nostrils, beneath the Colander-bone, may be opened by Art. Sneezing may be said to belong unto the Nostrils, because they being vexed do Sneezing cause Sneezing. Also Sneezing is referred to Diseases of the Head, and especially to the Epilepsy or Falling-Sickness, because it is a momentany Concussion or Convulsion of the brain. So says Hypocrates in the seventh Book of his Aphorisms. It is caused by heating or moistening of what is contained in the Ventricles of the brain. Chap. 7. Of the Neck. THat Part which is interposed between the Head and the Chest, is termed The Necks use Collum, and Neck: ordained for the Service of the Windpipe and Lungs, and as a Pillar to sustain the Head upon. It ought to be of an indifferent length, that it may be healthy and useful for the It's Length. body: because a Neck too short consisting of but six Vertebraes, by reason of the shortness of those Vessels which are carried into the Head, is liable to the Apoplexy or Sleepy Diseases; and a Neck too long containing eight Vertebraes, does at length bring a Consumption: because the Lungs being shut up in so straight a place do by little and little Wax overhot, and whither away by degrees. The Neck is made up of divers Parts, which are divided into Containing and Its Parts. Contained. The Containing are common or proper, the contained are manifold. There are reckoned two common containing Parts, the Scarf-Skin and the Skin. The containing proper Membrane is its Coat viz. The Musculus Latus, which seems to be a Propagation of the Membrana Carnosa. The Parts contained are manifold viz. The Muscles of the a T. 13. f. 18. T. 14. f. 4. etc. □ Head, of the b T. 13. f. 18. T. 14. f. 2. 3, 4. □ Neck of the c T. 13. f. 13. etc. □ Os Hyoides, of the d T. 13. f. 14. □ Tongue, of the e f. 8 9, 10. etc. □ Larynx and he f T. 3. f. 2. 3. □ Pharynx; which being orderly dissected and taken away there comes in view the g f. 8. 9 etc. □ Larynx, the h f. 11. 12. A B C. □ Os Hyoides, the Pharynx, the i f. 15. A. □ Tongue, the k f. 16. 17. etc. □ Kernels, The l T. 12. f. 1. e e. ● f. □ ●our jugulars, the two m f. 2. a a. □ Carotick Arteries, A Nerve of the n T. 3. f. 8. □ ●ixt Conjugation both descending and Recurrent, the Cervical o T. 12. f. 1. g g. □ Veins and p f. 2. δ δ. □ Arteries; and the greater number of the●e Parts, is placed in the foreside of the Neck: in the hinder Part thereof are the q T. 13. f. 19 □ Vertebraes, and the hinder r T. 14. f. 2. 3, 4. etc. □ Muscles ordained to move the Head and Neck. I will reserve the Explication of the Muscles to my Myöl●gia or History of Muscles, where the Reader may look, if he denre to know the Muscles of every Part. But you must diligently observe the Kernels placed upon the a T. 13. f. 1, 2. 8. □ Cartilago Thuroides or Door fashioned Gristle, which are larger in Women than in Men. In this order therefore you shall search for the Parts of the Neck, and separate them if you can one from another, or take them out. And first of all, the Musculus Latissimus being taken away, you shall search diligentfor Its Vessels. the Nerve of the b T. 3. f. 8. A B. etc. □ sixth pair, placed between the internal jugular Vein and the Carotick Arteries. The c T. 12. f. 1. e e. □ Internal Jugular has little values or shutters near the Claves, but the d f. 1. f f. □ external Jugular has none. The Carotick Artery at its entrance into the Skull, has two very small thin bones, which hinder and keep back the Arterial blood, when it would flow in too violently. The Nerves of the sixth Pair being both of them tied in a living Dog, he cannot bark having lost his voice, if one only be tied, he barks but faintly and by halves: which is diligently to be observed. Then you shall consider the Os f T. 13. f. 11. 12. A B C. □ Hyoides, how it is suspended with strong bands Os Hyoides. and firmly fastened to the Apophyses g T. 15. f. 6. D D. □ Styloides; how it sustains the Larynx, the Epiglottis and the Tongue. For the Cartilago h f. 1, 2, 8. A. □ Thyroides, is by its Horns annexeded to the Os Hyoides. And therefore the Os Hyoides is the Foundation of those Parts, and yet is it movable in swallowing: and Rondeletius saw one taken Speechless as in a Palsy, by reason of the dissolution of the Reluctancy of the Muscles of Os Hyoides. Which is a thing to be observed in that bone. Besides those Kernels resting upon the Cartilago Thuroides, there are other little Kernels. ones, placed all along the internal jugular and orderly disposed, into which the brain disburthens itself. Under the lower Jaw, in the upper and foremer Part of the Neck, are seen two other Kernels, which do often swell, and in them the Kings-Evil is bred. At the Root of the Tongue are the a T. 15. f. 16. and 11. □ Tonsillaes, termed Antiades; certain Kernels so called. Whose pain and swelling are by Ulpian termed Antiagri. All these Kernels are diligently to be considered in Fluxions which happen in the Neck, whether they be the Scrophulae Kings Evil or Bronchacele. ᵉ f. ●● a a. □ The Medicinal Consideration. The Neck is subject to Similar Diseases arising from distemper, and to Diseases Similar Diseases of the Neck. The Organical Diseases. as Bronchocele. Organical, consisting in bad Conformation: if it be too long, or too short, or the Vertebraes thereof be out of Joint, especially the second; in Magnitude, if it be swelled, as in the Bronchocele, Kings-Evil and squinsy. Bronchocele is a Swelling in the Neck, near the Larynx, arising from an humour collected in that place, or from the Kernel of the Cartilago Thuroides being longer than ordinary and producing superfluous flesh; or it is an Impostum proceeding from the Tumour Atheroma or Steatoma, or it is a Dropsy. Bronchocele does not proceed, as many have imagined, from immoderate Clamours and Cry out, or by drinking of melted Snow, as the fashion is among the Inhabitants of the Alps or other high Mountains; but from thick and clammmy Phlegm, which slides thither by bittle and little out of the Head and the external Parts thereof, down behind the Ears. Which is the Judgement of Fernelius. It may be questioned, whether the matter be contained between the Musculus latus and the Skin, or whether it lie all concealed under the Musculus Latus. For if the matter be collected there, it cannot be drawn out, because it is crept in between the spaces of the Muscles. If it lie outward to the sight, it may be rooted out and cured. It is wont to begin with a wind, which distends and separates the Skin from the Membrana Carnosa: or the Musculus Latus itself, is separated from the Parts which lie beneath the same. Into the which space the matter flows by degrees, which differs according to the various temperament and Constitution of the Patients. It grows by little and little, and receives nourishment, not by the Veins, but by certain little Pipes which Nature creates. Bronchocele differs very much from the Kings-evil-swelling, which rise under Kings-Evil the Jaw and in the Neck, of a rounder shape, distinct one from another, or clustered together. They spring from a Phlegmatic clammy matter, which drenches the Kernels and makes them swell; and therefore look where there are Kernels, there the swell arise. Scirrhous Tumours have in them somewhat of the Nature of the Kings-evil-swelling, which makes them suspected. They happen under the Jaws, in the Groins, behind the Ears, and in all Parts of the Body where there are Glandules or Kernels. And sometimes in certain places of the Body, a portion of Fat grows hard and makes a Scirrhous Tumour and sometime the Kings-Evil. The Tumour Gongroni is mustered among the external swell of Gongrone. the Neck. It is cau●ed by an Humour, not so thick as that in the Kings-Evil, or Bronchocele. Angina the squinsy, is a Tumour of the Neck either internal or external: or an Squinzie. internal or external inflammation of the Neck. The external is properly called Synanche, the Internal is termed Cynanche. Galen conceives that this distinction of Names is vain and of no use in Practice. But I account the same necessary. For although general Medicines do serve for both, yet in Cynanche where the Patient can neither fetch breath nor speak, the danger is greater: and therefore Medicines are to be sped with all hast possible: yea and the Windpipe must be opened ere twenty four hours are past, that the Patient may by that means receive breath, till such time as the upper Part of the Larynx be unstopped. For in that kind o● squinsy, where no outward swelling appears, the Larynx alone is inflamed and obstructed. In other Squinsies the Circumjacent Muscles of other Parts are affected: In the Cynanche, the Fluxion is in the Arytaenois and the Glottis, and in other Musculous Carnosities of the Larynx, by which means the passage of the Larynx is stopped, and death follows unvoidably, for though there is some little passage left for Liquors, yet no man can live without fetching his breath. A Leek thrust into the Throat, with some sharp biting Powder sprinkled upon it may do good, as also some strong drawing Medicine or a Vesicatory applied to the Larynx, and Scarifications made here and there about the Larynx. Touching the squinsy, read Hypocrates in the 27. and 34. Aphorisms of his sixth Book. In the third Book of his Prognostics, And in the 49. Aphorism of his seventh Book. Chap. 8. Of the Teeth and Gums. I Return now unto the inner Parts of the Mouth which are there contained, and may be seen with the Eyes, such as are the Teeth, Gums, Palate, Wula and Tongue, of which in order. I will begin with the Teeth, the Instruments of Chewing and of speaking; for use of the Teeth. those that are Toothless cannot well chew and grind their Meat, neither can they pronounce their words clear and plain as they ought to do. There is a twofold consideration of the Teeth; as they are in Infants, till they are two or three years Old, and as they are in persons of riper years. In Infants they break out by Course, first the Cutters, than the Dog-teeths, after Condition of the Teeth in Infants. them the Grinders, and they have but twenty till they are three years Old, at which time the rest break forth. These first Teeth are called Dentes Lactei, the milk Teeth, which have under them another branch, which will shoot forth another Tooth, if the first be plucked out, or come out of itself. There are two seasons observed in which Children are most tormented with Tooth-breeding: the one is when they first sprout within the Gum, the other is when they break out of the Gum. And under the Term of Tooth-breeding Hypocrates does in a manner comprehend all children's Diseases, because Children are troubled with many Diseases upon that account, springing from the pain of Teeth-breeding, and bringing them to their Graves. In Persons grown up the Teeth are distributed into two ranks or a T. 14. f. 3. □ rows, according In grown Persons. to the two Jaws in which they are fixed. In each Jaw are reckoned fifteen or sixteen Teeth, and they are of three sorts. The first four placed in the forepart of the Jaw, are called b T. 15. f. 6. m. □ Cutters: next them on either side, are the two c T. 15. f. 6. n n. □ Dog-teeths, and after them on each side five Grinders. They are immovably fastened in their Holes called Alveoli, by that kind of Articulation which is termed Gomphosis. They are bound and fastened both by their proper Ligaments and by the Gums. They receive Nerves, Veins and Arteries within their Roots, which are hollow, Their Vessels. and therefore they are pained more than any other of the bones. The external and bare Part of the Tooth, is termed its Basis, the internal which is covered, is called the Root, which is double or triple. ᵈ T. 15. f. 6. o o o o. □ The Medicinal Consideration. Tooth-Sicknesses of Infants, have two times in which they are wont to torment Diseases of the Teeth in Infants. and kill. The first is when the Tooth first sprouts within the Gum, which is called Odaxismos, which causes the Gums to Swell and be inflamed, brings Fevers, continual Vomiting and Looseness: the other is the time of the breaking forth of the Tooth, which is called Odontophua, and then the poor Infants are most of all vexed and tormented with pains. The teeth of grown Persons are troubled with divers Diseases, as Distempers, Dryness In grown persons. through Age, and Looseness; with Organic Diseases in Number Deficient, when they fall out; or in Number exceeding, when there are two or three rows of Teeth: or when there is but one Bone, in the place of so many Teeth. In Magnitude exceeding or deficient, as when there be long gag Teeth, that go out of their Rank, or when the Teeth are too little and worn away. In Situation, when they stand not close together, or when the lower Teeth are not just against the upper, or when the upper Teeth fall within the lower, or when Teeth grow in the Palate of the Mouth. Diseases common are, when the Teeth Scale and moulder away with rotteness, Symptoms of the Teeth are. Setting on edge Toothache. or when they are broken. Symptoms of the Teeth, are the hurting of the proper and peculiar feeling of the Teeth, which is called Haemodia, Setting of the Teeth on Edge; or the hurting of the common feeling of the Teeth, which causes the Tooth Ache, which is termed Odontalgia or Odontagra for the likeness it has to pains of the Gout. Pain of the Teeth is reckoned among the greatest torments which are in the world, although a Tooth be so small a Part. Celsus Book the sixth Chap. 9 Simple Affections of the Teeth are Blackness, Rustyness and a clammy gluishness (which Hypocrates counts the sign of a strong Fever) also a stony Crust which grows upon them. Symptoms in the Irregularity of things voided, are, A Stinking of the Teeth, Stinking. Excrescence. Worms. Bleeding. an excrescence and Worms, which are bred within the Cavities of the Teeth, or a flux of blood immoderately flowing, after the drawing of a Tooth, which is sometimes a cause of Death. See Duretus in his Comments upon the Coicks of Hypocrates, where he explains what is the grinding of the Teeth in Diseases. Dryness of the Teeth in Sick people, foretells a Convulsion or Madness. It is worth the enquiry. Whether into the plaee of a Tooth drawn out, another Whether a Tooth may be fastened in the place of one drawn out? may be thrust in at the same moment, and fixed in the Room thereof, so as to stick fast and be clothed with the Gums flesh, and to abide and serve to chew the Meat with the other Teeth? He that shall consider that the Teeth have Life, do receive Veins, Arteries and Nerves; do feel, are pained; and firmly tied and fastened with certain bands into the Gums: will never say that a strange Tooth, thrust into the place of one plucked out, can be made so like to the other Teeth, as to perform the same Office with them and stick there as long as they shall do. Yet some Physicians in favour of a Norman Tooth-drawer, would persuade Men that it is possible to substitute such a Tooth, and they have upbraided me with Incredulity and Ignorance, because I am not of their mind. You are to consider the holes in the upper and lower Jawbone, through which are drawn the Nerves Veins and Arteries, which are inserted into the Roots of the Teeth. In the upper Jaw there creeps an Artery which running towards the Ear, is there burnt, or seared up, and to that place and upon the Temples, an astringent plaster is laid to stop the Veins by which the Flux of Rheum does come. There creeps an Artery in the Lower Jaw near the Corner, which is to be seared where it beats, or topics are to be laid thereupon, to ease the Toothache of the lower Jaw. Sometimes a bony Fungus or Spongy substance grows out of the hole of a Tooth, How the Spongy excrescence is taken out of the Tooth-hole. and comes to be so big as to fill the Patient's Mouth, and at length to choke him, if prevention be not used, by cutting off the said excrescence and burning the Root thereof. You shall observe that the brain hurts the Teeth by Distillation of Rheum, the Stomach hurts them by Fumigation or raising fumes and steams which annoy them: and that the Lungs likewise do in some Measure damage the Teeth. That there is a Regeneration of the Teeth, and that Teeth grow out in every Age Whether Teeth do breed in all Ages? of Man, is most certain: yet must we not rely upon this Regeneration of Teeth, so as certainly to make account thereof, and expect it after seven years are over. To Cleanse the Teeth you shall find an Admirable Water, in the 96. Counsel of ☞ Fernelius Chap. 9 Of the Gums. THe Gums are certain parcels of Flesh folded about the Teeth, which cover the The natural Constitution of the Gums. Preternatural. holes of the Teeth within and without: but without they are wider and more swelling. When this Flesh of the Gums grows Proud and covers the Teeth more than it should, it causes pain and hinders Chewing, also the Looseness of the said Flesh is troublesome, because it makes the Teeth to become lose. Inflammation of the Gums is called Parulis: if the Flesh grow from an Ulcer, it's Parulis. Epulis. Cancer. termed Epulis. Sometimes the Gums are Cancerated, and sometimes they bleed immoderately. The Gums are Eaten up by Ulcers called Aphthae: in the Scurvy (which the Old Physicians called Stomachache and Oscedo) the Ulcers of the Gums are Malignant. Sometimes these Aphthaes or Ulcers of the Gums are so Malignant, that they eat Apthae. into the Tongue, Wula, and Tonsillae, without suspicion of the Venereal Pox. such are described by Aretaeus, and such appear in that strangling Spanish Disease, which the Spanjards call Garotillo, and which is common to the inhabitants of Naples (who call it Vlcus Syrianum Faucium) perhaps by reason of their Commerce with the Spanjards, who are much subject to the Kings-Evil: and therefore the Malignant Humour of the Kings-Evil does Produce such Symptoms in the Mouth and Jaws. Chap. 10. Of the Palate. THe Palate is the a T. 15. f. 5. L L. etc. □ Vaulted Roof of the Mouth, which is a very thin bone, The structure of the Palate. clothed with a b T. 13. f. 15. D. □ Nervous Skin, which is wrinkled, by reason of the Crevesses which are engraven in the bone: and therefore it sticks very hard to the bone, which has no Periostium▪ This most tender bone does many times become rotten in the Whores-Pocks, It's Rottenness. the Palate being boared through (if care be not taken in time) whether the infection be lodged in the Mouth, or within the Nose: which Hole so boared does much hinder the Patient in chewing of Meat and in speaking unless it be stopped with a plate, Cotton, or Sponge. Chap. 11. Of the Uuula and Isthmus. AT the inner part or further part of the c T. 13. f. 15. D. □ Palate hangs the d T. 13. f. 15. A. □ Gargareon or The Use of the Wula. Wula, a Fleshy Particle, which is given to mankind to help his speech, and to some birds which imitate the speech of Man: it hangs therefore at the farthest end of the Palate, to help our speech, being that to the voice, which the Quill is to the Musical Instrument, whose strings are struck therewith. It is therefore called the striker bp Paulus Aegineta in the 51. Chapter of his sixth Book. It hinders liquid things from running back into the Nostrils, and it purifies the Air which enters into the Windpipe. Therefore such as have no Wula, are hoarse in speaking, part of what they drink runs into their Nose, and because of the impurity of the Air which they draw into their Lungs, they fall into a Consumption. It has a T. 13. f. 15. B B. C C. etc. □ Muscles for motion, though it be moved very obscurly or rather suspended Its Muscles. in Aequilibrio. Of these Muscles you may read in my History of the Muscles. Lib. 5. To this Particle are adjoined certain Lateral Ligaments, which being widened Ligaments. and spread forth by a Defluxion of rheum, they resemble the wings of Bats or Flitter-mices, and are very troublesome to the Patient. Naturally they ought to be dry, and drawn back toward the Palate bone: they are two, and do include the b T. 13. f. 17. and 18. □ Kernels termed Tonsillae. The Medicinal Consideration. This Part, viz. The Wula o● Gargareon is Inflamed Swelled, Lengthened Its Diseases. Staphyle. Columella. Chalasis. and grows Lank. When it is inflamed it represents a Grape, and is termed Staphyle, if it represent a Pillar, 'tis called Columella and Chion; if it grow lose and slap by reason of the Rheum, 'tis called Chalasis Gargareonis; and than it is contracted and drawn back, by sprinkling salt or Pepper upon it, whereby the moisture thereof is dried up. If it hang down too much, part of it is cut away; if the lateral Membranes are relaxed it is called Imantis by Aretaeus; who elegantly describes the Relaxation of Imantis. those Ligaments in his first Book de Causis Acutorum, Chap. 8. Of the Gargareon read Hypocrates, in his third Progn, sent. 31. Of the Isthmus. Isthmus is a place or space between the Larynx and Pharynx, seated in the Isthmus' defined. Diseases of the Tonsill●. Throat, like a Neck of land between two Seas, which is an Isthmus. The Kernels there placed are called ᵃ Antiades and Paristhmia. The swelling of those Kernels is called by the same names by which the Tonsillaes are called when they are inflamed. Sometimes they swell and grow to such a greatness, that they descend into the Throat like two Apples and hinder the Patient from swallowing and fetching breath. They are often inflamed and Impostumated, and then they must be pricked deep in with a lancet, to let out the blood or quittor, otherwise they choke the Patient. Sometimes they are inflected with Cancerous Tumours, which are incurable. Chap. 12. Of the Tongue. THe Tongue, which is the Instrument of tasting speaking and swallowing; is The Tongue's Substance. Number. made up of a b T. 13. f. 14. A. etc. □ Fleshy and Spongy substance, compassed about with a thin Membrane. Although it seem one, yet is it divided into two Parts, which are so separated, although closely connexed; that one side may have the Palsy and the other be free, and the one side may be discoloured and the other not. It is placed in the Mouth and throat, born up by the Basis of the c T. 13. f. 11. and 12. A. □ Os Hyoides, Situation. and tied with a strong band. It was very conveniently thus seated, that it might discover the Diseases which lie hid in the three Cavities of the Body viz. The belly Chest and Head. For it is soaked and tainted with the moist and fuliginous Excrements of those Parts, and has the Colour of that Humour which bears most sway in the Body. And therefore because it is the Instrument of Taste, of speech and of the Mind, it was requisite that it should correspond and communicate with those principal Bowels: and therefore as the Urinal is in all Diseases looked upon and examined, so ought the Tongue to be diligently considered. Hypocrates Lib. 6. Epidem: Sect. 3. Text 14. The Tongue shows what the Urinal is: which Galen has confirmed in his Commentary upon that place. The Magnitude of the Tongue is to be considered: for naturally it ought to be Magnitude. as long as a man's middle Finger, but hardly so thick as the said Finger, and not broader than the breath of two Fingers. Such is the natural greatness of the Tongue, that it may be fit to speak with, otherwise a thick, overlong and over-broad Tongue, doth much hinder a man's Speaking. The a T. 13. f. 16. and 17. □ pointed end of the Tongue, which smites against the Teeth, is termed Proglossis: Proglossis the broad end which lies hid in the Throat, is called Basis Linguae, the bottom of the Tongue. That it may not run out to far or wander from its bounds, it is retained by a band under neath, which is called Fraenum Linguae, the bridle Fraenum of the Tongue. It has Veins from the Jugular, Arteries from the Carotick. The Veins under Its Vessels. Kernels. the Tongue are called Hypoglottides or Ranulae: and two Kernels placed there are likewise termed Ranulares, in which, grown round and hard, the foundation of the Elephantiasis, a kind of Leprosy, is bred, as appears by the swelling of the Lips, Pushes of the Face, and thickness of the Tongue. Muscles It has c T. 13. f. 14. a a. b b. □ Nerves for tasting and motion. For though it be of itself Voluble in speaking, yet for the more strong motions of chewing, swallowing and spitting, it stands in need of d T. 13. f. 14. B. C. D. E. □ Muscles, of which you may read in my History of Muscles Lib. 5. ᵃ T. 13. f. 14. A. □ ᵇ T. 13. f. 14. B B. □ The Medicinal Consideration. The Tongue is subject to divers Diseases, Similar, Organic, and common. Diseases of the Tongue. Similar. Organical. For it is liable to all kinds of distempers; to looseness or softness, hardness, Density and Rarity of substance. It is Organically Diseased, when it is swollen in all its dismensions and cannot be contained within the Hedge of the Teeth. Common. It is inflamed, when the Tumour called Batrachium rises under the Tongue, and turns to an Impostum: out of which being opened, there flows a substance like the white of an Egg and sometimes true quittor. If it be removed never so little from its place, the Cause is in the Os Hyoides, or in its Muscles, being either Palsied or Convulsed. It is also Ulcerated by those simple Ulcers termed Aphthae, and sometimes with Malignant Ulcers, which putrify, Eat and consume the same. Whether its substance will grow again. That the substance of the Tongue may grow again is confirmed by many Histories, and that the same being lost, a man is not wholly deprived of speech. There have been some seen who could speak distinctly enough, so as to be understood, without a Tongue. But peradventure they had some Part of their Tongue remaining far within, which with the Glottis and Wula did frame the Speech. Its Symptoms Symptoms of the Tongue, of the first kind, are two, the Marring of Speech and Tasting. Speech is marred three ways, by Abolition, Imminution and Depravation. Speech Abolished. Traulotis. Psallotis. Stammering Abolition of Speech is termed Anaudia. Depravation of speech is of two sorts, Traulotis, Psallotis or Balbuties. Traulotis is when the Patient cannot pronounce some one letter, and Psallotis or Psellismos is, when he cannot pronounce divers letters. Ischnophonia, Stammering, is a stoppage of the Tongue, so that the Patient cannot proceed in his discourse, but repeats one and the same Tonguetied. letter often over before he can proceed. Anchyloglossos and Mogilalia are when the Tongue is tied either too straight or too lose. Taste Vitiated There is a threefold marring of the Taste, not distinguished by names: for it is abolished, depraved and diminished. The depravation of taste happens when the Tongue is filled with some evil Taste depraved Humour. So that what ever it tastes is infected with that Humour and tastes thereof. Taste is abolished when the Tongue perceives no taste in any thing. The motion of the whole Tongue is abolished in the Palsy, diminished when the Palsy of the Tongue. half of the Tongue is Palsied, without any hurt to the Taste. In a total Palsy of the Tongue, there is great fear that the Patient will fall into an Apoplexy, though Fernelius saw none to follow: but we must not be too confident, but meet the Disease when it is coming. In a total Palsy of the Tongue the Patients are dumb: in a Palsy of half the Tongue, they speak untowardly. A simple affection of the Tongue, is its Colour changed, which comes not only Tongue discoloured. from the primary distempers thereof, but chiefly by Sympathy with the Bowels. There is a certain trembling or wavering of the Tongue observed in Diseases of the Brain, which is a forerunner of the Frenzy, according to Hypocrates in his Coicks. Chap. 13. Of the Larynx, or Head of the Windpipe. THe Larynx is the Head of the a T. 13. f. 9 and 10. E E. □ Aspera Arteria or Windpipe, the instrument The Larynx. its of modulating our speech, and the Channel by which Air is breathed in and out. 'tis seated in the Forepart of the Neck which is termed the Throat. Situation In Men it bunches out more than in Women, for the Women have two Kernels placed thereby, which swell more than they do in men, and so make the Neck even, taking away that same deformed Protuberancy, which is seen in Men. It consists of five Cartilages or Gristles, whereof the two greatest do make up Gristles Thuroides Cricoides. Arytaenoides. Glottis. the Body of the Larynx: the first is called b T. 13. f. 1. and 2. f. 8. A. □ Thuroides, the second a T. 13. f. 3. and 4. f. 9 and 10. D D. □ Cricoides, and those are the two largest and hardest. The third is the b f. 5. and 6. f. 10. a a. □ Arytaenoides, which is placed upon the Cricoides and shuts up the Larynx. Within there is observed a fourth, which is called c f. 10. beneath A. □ Glottis, being the principal Instrument of framing the Voice, which is contracted and dilated with the Arytaenoides: but the Arytaenois with the Glottis, is so firmly shut, when we draw our Breath in, that it strives against the Muscles of the Throat and Chest which resist the same, to hinder Expiration or the going out of the breath, by which all the Muscles are loosened, and Expulsion ceases from the inferior Parts. Only the Glottis Acts, in the Modulation of our Speech. And that nothing either solid or Liquid might fall into the Larynx, it has a cover, which is called d T. 13. f. 7. 9 and 10. A A. □ Epiglottis. It stands always open for Respiration sake, nor is it Epiglotti●. depressed save by the weight of what is eaten and drunk. The whole Larynx is Movable by way of Ascent and Descent, through help of Muscles, for to Facilitate our swallowing. It's Moti●…. Again, two Cartilages or Gristles are moved by themselves viz. The Thyrois and the Arytaenois. The former is widened and contracted, the latter is shut and opened. For those are contrary motions, which are performed by e f. 8. 9 10. etc. □ separated Muscles, which spring from the Cricois an immovable Gristle, which is placed to Its Muscles. fasten the Gristles and Muscles, as a foundation to make the Circle of the Larynx. Touching the Muscles, I shall speak in my Doctrine of Muscles. The Larynx though it be Gristly, yet in Old Men it becomes boney, and it has been found to be so in some that were to be hanged, whom the Halter could not choke: and not only the Larynx, but also the gristly Channel of the g f. 9 and 10. E E. □ Aspera Arteria. Either those parts were boney or the Halter way too thick, so that it could not sufficiently force and rend the same. The Medicinal Consideration. The Larynx is subject to a distemper, a Tumour and Inflammation, which when Diseases of 〈…〉 Larynx. it happens, it hinders Speech and Breathing and strangles the Patient without any appearance of swelling, without. Within fifteen or twenty hours it kills a Man, his mind and senses remaining Squinzie. sound and perfect. An Horrid Symptom it is, in which besides general Remedies, if Scarification of the Neck, will do no good, we must proceed ad Bronchotemiam, viz. To open the Part by Section. And this Disease is that most Pernicious Angina which Hypocrates make● mention of: Liquid things penetrate into the Stomach, but all breathing is stopped, and consequently sudden death must needs follow. The Action of the Larynx is breathing, and the forming of speech and singing. Privation of Speech. Hoarseness. want and disficulty o● breathing. Privation of speech is termed Aphonia, the depravation thereof is Raucedo Hoariness: the Imminution thereof is called Ischnophonia. The Interception of Respiration is termed Apnoia, the Imminution thereof Dyspnoia. Both these Actions are hurt, either by a proper Disease of the Larynx, or of the neighbouring Parts, or of the Parts remote, especially of the Lungs, from whence the matter of speech is supplied and respiration proceeds. For the Larynx affected, does only stop the ways of breathing. The Epiglottis has its Diseases; either it is relaxed, or it is too much contracted Diseases of the Epiglottis. and straitened, or it becomes hard, whence proceeds difficulty in swallowing. Some there are who can more easily Swallow meat than drink, and in such the Epiglottis is become hard and sti●, so that it will not be born down save by the weight of solid meat, with which that which is liquid slips along. When it is become lose and Flaggy by reason of a Catarrh, it cannot be conveniently raised up; and when it is become straighter and narrower than it ought, it does not exactly shut the Arytenoides: which causes that crumms of bread and some portion of what is drunk, do slip into the Windpipe. Nature has provided against this inconvenience, having by the sides of the Glottis, which is almost always shutting, framed and set certain Cavities, which receive, such portions of meat or drink as slip beside, so that they are cast out again by coughing. ᶠ f. 9 and 10. between A. and E. □ Chap. 14. Of the Aspera Arteria or Wind-Pide. IN the Forepart of the Neck is placed the a T. 13. f. 9 and 10. E E▪ □ Channel of the Aspera Arteria, the Use of the weasand. Instrument of speech and breathing, because it brings Air into the Lungs and carries out sooty Vapours; also there the Voice is form and gins to be Articulated. It consists of many Semicircular Gristles, which are severed one from another, Its Gristles. and are imperfect behind, not filling up the Circle, by reason of the Oesophagus or Gullet which lies beneath it, being the Channel of Meat and Drink. The Aspera Arteria or Windpipe is lined within by a Membrane, It's Membrane. which is drawn from the Mouth into the inner parts of the Windpipe and Oesophagus. The Medicinal Consideration. The Pipe of the Aspera Arteria is troubled with an hot or cold distemper, with an Humour flowing from the Brain, whence comes Branchos, Raucedo or Hoarseness. The Windpipe being wounded is curable and may securely be cut, under the Whether the wouds of the windpipe are Curable? Larynx, between two Gristles, in a very choking squinsy. May we not experiment this operation in a choking stoppage and wheezing with rattling in the Windpipe, seeing that it may be as safely practised in this case as in the other? that sweet attenuating and cutting Liquors may be taken or forced in, to cut the Phlegm and bring it up, if it be possible, and pain, caused by Choughing, hinder no●? Chap. 15. Of the Oesophagus, or Gullet. THe Oesophagus is the a T. 3. f. 2. E E. f. 3. E F. etc. □ way for the meat to pass into the Stomach. The beginning What the Pharynx is. thereof is termed Pharynx, which is moved by the help of Muscles, b T. 3. f. 2. and 3. A B C. etc. □ to thrust or swallow the meat. It is made up of a proper Fleshy Membrane. Woven together with strait and Membrane of Oesophagus. circular Fibres. It has another internal Tunicle which hath its original from the c T. 3. f. 3. D. □ Mouth. Within the Chest, that it may give way to this Aorta Artery, leaving the Backbone, it inclines and is wreathed a little towards the right hand. Two Kernels support that part which is so turned aside, and stay it on either It's Kernels. hand, which being drenched and swelled with some Humour, do bring a great Impediment to the swallowing. Oftentimes the end of the Oesophagus which is joined to the Stomach, and is in Obstruction of the Oesophagus. Latin termed d T. 3. f. 3. H. f. 4. A. □ Stomachus, is obstructed by a Tumour either proceeding from Phlegm or Melancholy, which turns at last unto an Ulcer and brings Death▪ Which Disease is known by the hard descent of soiled meat into the Stomach, which sometimes stays, and many times is vomited up again. The End of the Fourth Book. THE FIFTH BOOK OF THE ANATOMY AND PATHOLOGY OF John Riolanus, THE KING'S PROFESSOR OF PHYSIC. Chap. 1. Of the Limbs. HAving gone over and finished the Trunk of the Body, I proceed The Method of handling. unto the Limbs, whose Muscles, Veins, Arteries and Nerves with the Diseases of those Parts, I intent to explain, which cannot be done without Anatomical dissection. But before I proceed to that work: it will do very well to contemplate the lex●eral Conformation of the Limbs, and and withal to show you what Veins are wont to be opened, and in what places Issues may be made. The Limbs are made up of the Scarf-Skin, the Skin, the fatty Membrane, the Parts of which the Limbs are compounded. Flesh of Muscles, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Bones, Ligaments, Gristles and Kernels. These Parts I shall so divide in the Limbs, as I did in the Trunk of the body viz. Into parts containing and Parts contained. The Parts containing are the Scarf-Skin, the Skin, the fatty Membrane, and the common Membrane of the Muscles. All the other Parts are contained, being comprehended by these. Touching the Scarf-Skin and the Skin, I shall repeat nothing, because they are the same and all a like in all Parts. The Membrana Adiposa or fatty Membrane, is spread out in the Arm as far as the Wrist: and in the Leg, from the Groin unto the Ankles. After that, follows the common Membrane of the Muscles, which comprehends the Muscles in their natural Situation. In the Thigh the Fascia Lata supplies its place. The Medicinal Consideration. The Universal Diseases of the Skin are divers distempers, simple, Diseases of the Skin. or with Humours conjoined. If the distemper be with Humour it makes the Skin rough or swollen, whence springs the Scab, the Mange, the Morphew, Scurf, Leprosy, Tetters, Itch, Pustles, Blains, Water-Bladders, Yellow-Blisters, Warts, Scalds, Moles, Biles, Night-Blains, Ringworms, Lowsie-Evil, Chaps, Black and Blewness, Small Pocks, Measles, Whores-Pox and Elephantiasis or a Cancerous Tumour, over the whole body. Of the Flesh. The Flesh is infested with all kinds of Tumours, Inflammations, Carbuncles, Choleric Tumours, Phlegmatic Tumours, Melancholic Tumours, Cancers, Watery Tumours, Windy Tumours, Impostums of all sorts, Steatoma the Fat impostum, Atheroma the Pap impostum, Meliceris the Honey imposthume, an Ulcer, a wound and a Gangrene. An Athletic or Championlike constitution of body, high fed, and as we say, lusty and full of Beef, is dangerous. Hypocrates shows the Reason in his 1. Book, Aphorism the 3. and Celsus says, that when a Man becomes Corpulent, he ought to suspect lest he be fatted to the slaughter. And in Hypocrates his Aphorisms we are told, that fat Men are not so Long-lived as lean Men are, and there are some of cold Constitutions. who have hot Stomaches. Of the Vessels. Of the Bones. Veins and Arteries have Diseases proper to themselves, the Nervs have their peculiar Diseases, and the Joints have theirs. And the bones are subject to fractures, Dryness, Disjointing, Rottenness, etc. Which shall be explained when we come to treat of the bones. Chap. 2: Of the Superior Limbs. The Limbs both Superior and inferior are divided into three principal Parts: the The general▪ division of the Limbs. Special division. Arm into a T. 21. f. 1. C. □ Brachium from the Shoulder to the Elbow, b f. 1. D E. □ Cubitus from the Elbow to the Hand, and the c f. 1. F G H I □ Hand: The Leg into the d f. 1. K. □ Thigh the e f. 1. M N. □ Shank, and the ᶠ Foot. And forasmuch as the whole Arm hangs upon the f f. 1. O P Q. □ Shoulder bone, as the whole Leg upon the h f. 4. A. □ Huckle bone, and those bones are not reckoned to appertain unto the Backbone, the best way is to begin our description of the Limbs from them, viz. Of the Arm from the Shoulder-blad, and of the Leg from the Hucklebone. Of the Shoulderblade and the Arm from the Shoulder to the Elbow. The Axillary Kernels. The Shoulderblade i f. 1. A. □ Joined to the k f. 1. C. □ Arm, makes a Joint: in the bending of which Joint beneath, Kernels are placed, which are counted to be the Close stools of the Chest or Heart, as the Parotides or Kernels behind the Ears, are of the brain, into which those Parts do empty their Excrements. The place of these Kernels is called the Armpit. Diseases of the Kernels. These Kernels do frequently Swell, Impostumate, are infected with the Kings-Evil, and subject to Buboes, yea such as accompany the Whores-Pox, as in the Groin. Of the whole Joint. This Joint is liable to be disjointed, but it is more often vexed with the Gout, Rheumatisme, and other Fluxions. The strong smell of the Arm-Holes proceeds from these Kernels. Upon which Martial has wittily and neatly played in one of his Epigrams. Laedit te quaedam mala fabula, qua tibi fertur Valle sub alarum trux habitare caper: Hunc metuunt omnes, neque mirum, nam mala valde est Bestia. That is, An ill Report your Credit (Sir.) does wound, How that a stinking Goat has dwelling found Within your hollow Armpits shady Grove, A beast which all Men fear, and none do love; And good Cause why &c. Of the Cubit or part of the Arm from the Elbow to the Hand. The Articulation of the Brachium with the Cubit, is more hardly disjointed; admits Fluxions which do there breed divers Tumours hard to cure. In which case, The Diseases of the Joints of these Parts. unless diligent care be taken, the very bones are altered and the Cubit is made crooked, and such as are on that manner crooked, are by Hypocrates termed Galliaggones. If such a croockedness be caused by a retraction of the Muscles, it is more easily cured, than if it come from a repletion of the Cavities by a thick, clammy, condensed and dried Humour. The Articulation of the Cubit to the Wrist is subject to many Diseases, the Gout, the Rheumatisme, the Tumour Ganglium which possesses the tendons of the Muscles; Phlegmatic Knobs and other Tumours. Of the Hand. The Hand is divided into the c f. 1. F. □ Wrist the d f. 1. G H. □ After-Wrist and the e f. 1. l. Fingers. To Diseases of the Hand. these Parts the Diseases lately named are common. A Disease in number is here usual in Children from the Womb, viz. A sixth Finger growing to the Thumb o● little Finger. It is easily taken away, by the Incision Knife. Of the Nails The Fingers are cerminated and closed up by the Nails, which are liable to Diseases of the Nails. divers Diseases, in Figure, in Magnitude, wh●l they grow thick, wrinkled, unequal, rough, ●ooked as in leprous persons; they are also Cleft; and fall off in the time of Sickness and afterwards breed again. The Colour of the Nails is changed in time of Sickness. Also there is a sore Disease of the Nails termed a Whi●e-Loafe o● Felon. A Whey i●h very sharp Humour is bred under the Nail near the bone, which causes most bitter and intolerable pains, and brings an Inflammation first of the Hand, and after of the Arm also, unless the Humour be let out, by cutting the pappy flesh of the Finger to the very bone. The Pappy Ends of the F●●gers are aften corrupted, and putrify, and sometimes Of the Pappy Ends of the Fingers. the last Joint of a Finger must of necessity be out off, by reason of a sphacelation of the bone. Paronyc●ia Gr●corum, viz. Opening of the Skin at the corners of the Nails and Issuing of blood therea●, is a ●leight Disease, which does not affect the tendons and Nerves of the Finger's Ends, as that Panaritium Arabum, a Disease of this Part described by the Arabian Physicians. The Ancient Philosophers, and Physicians, were wont to Divine, and tell Fortunes, by the Nails of men's Fingers: touching which kind of Divination, Camillus Baldus has lately written. ᵍ f. 1. A. □ ᵃ T. 21. f. 1. C. □ ᵇ f. 1. D E □ Chap. 3. Of the Inferior Limbs. The Inferior Limbs are commonly divided into three Parts; The Thighs, the Diseases of the inferior Limbs. Shank, and the Foot. The Os Ilium is joined to the Thigh, and from thence we are to ●ake measure of the length of the Leg. In the bending of the Os Ilii, and the Thigh, are placed many Kernels, above and beneath; in which divers Buboes arise, both Pestilential, Venereal, and springing from common Causes: of which we have spoken in our Chapter of the Peritoneum. These inferior Limbs are liable to the same Diseases with the superior, which I will not repeat. Proud Flesh is often bred in the hinder parts by contusion of the Thighs, occasioned by long and hard sitting, or riding. Fernelius does elegantly explain the material Cause hereof. It is not caused by afflux of Humours, but only by the nourishment of the Part, which being ulcerated within or without, if it be not stopped, it is by continual access of Nutriment spread abroad, and swelled, and produces oftentimes as it were certain Pipes of Veins and Arteries, by which it is nourished. So, when the Skin remaining whole, the Flesh underneath is bruised and ●orn, a mighty Swelling does arise by little and little, without any pain, but furnished with exquisite sense, and Natural Heat. In the Joint of the Thigh, about the Cavity of the Huckle bone, is bred the Gout The Sciatica. called Sciatica. If the Humour flow into the Ace●abulum, and cause the Head of the Thighbone to slip out of its place, it breeds a Disease in Situation hard to cure, and which at last causes the Patient to halt. If a very sharp putrid Humour does corrode, and bring corruption into the Joint, The Hip-Consumption. it produces a Disease called Phthisi● Coxaria, the Hip-Consumption, which makes an end of the Patient by degrees. If an Humour flow into that part where the great Nerve arises, which creeps up and down the hind parts of the Leg, Notha Ischias, The Bastard Sciatica. o● a Bastard Sciatica is produced. Swell of the Knee, either springing from a Phlegmatic Humour, or from Inflammation, Swell of the Knee. are oftentimes very dangerous, or long-lasting, and at last do hasten the Patient's Death. The Foot is divided into the a T. 21. f. 1. O. □ Ta●sus, b f. 1. P. □ Metatarsus, and the c f. 1. Q. □ Toes. The first Bone of the Tarsus called d f. 5. B. □ Pte●na, is subject to a Disease springing from Cold or Fluxion, which i● called Pernio, a Kibe: And because this Bone receives a very Ki●es. thick Tendon, if it be bruised and wounded, it causes inevitable death, by the very Convulsions thereby raised. The Toes of the Feet, by compression, and straitness of Shoo● or Boots, have painful Corns breeding upon them, the unw●●y ex●●●pation whereof has sometimes Corns. brought a Gangrene into the Part. The whole Leg from the bending of the Groin unto the T●●s, is sometimes exceedingly The Legs. Elephantiasis, of the Arabia●●▪ swollen with an hard, and ill-favoured Tumour, which is called Elephantiasis, Arabum: The Arabian Physicians, Elephants Leg, because it makes the Leg of the Patient resemble that of an Elephant. But the Shank and Foo● are chief ●iable to defluxions which are caused either in Swell. such as are newly recovered out of sickness, by ●he Humours falling down into those parts; or primarily by the evil Disposition of the said parts. The principal matter of these Tumours, is Wind or Water, or a clammy Phlegmatic Humour, which produces the swelling called Oedema. Sometimes the Toes of the Feet, as well as the Fingers of the Hand, are deficient or superfluous in their Number. There is a little knob grows sometimes under the little Toe called Gemursa, because it makes the Patiented groan. Disease's consisting in the Evil-shaping of the Shank and Foot are frequent. Ill shape Hence arose those nick Names Varus, one that has crooked Legs bending inward; Valgus, one that has Legs bending outward; Compernis, one narrow between the Knees; Scauripeda, one that has hunching Ankles, that interfere and hinder his going; Pansus, one that has a broad or Splay foot; Atta, he that treads only on the fore part of his Feet, as it were on Tip Toes; Plautus, he that is Splay-footed or Broad-footed, all which Infirmities are seen in grown Persons and in Children. Some are borne with their Legs contracted, others become so by ill Swaddling in the time of their Infancy, and by untoward Carriage in their Nurses Arms. Sometimes one foot is longer than the other which Causes halting. Sometimes the Feet do Stink intolerably, by reason of their much heat and Stink Palsy Sweat; which must be helped. Oftentimes there happens a Palsy of the lower Limbs, by reason of a Defluxion of Humours out of the Mesentery, into the Lumbal Nerves. Many times a bastard Sciatica does possess the whole Thigh as low as to the Ankle-bone, even as far as that most thick Nerve does reach, which comes from the Os Sacrum. Pains of the Knees are extreme bitter and make stout Men cry out. Knees pains. Because of the consent the Knees had with the Veins in the Mother's Womb. And Pliny says that a Man's life lies in his very Knees. Fluxions of Rheum into this Joint are long lasting, dangerous and hard to Wounds of the Ankle. Cure, in the Judgement of Pardus, which daily experience does confirm. And a blow or wound in the Ankle, that same great Tendon being bruised or wounded, do bring Death, not without great Convulsions, so says Hypocrates. Chap. 4. In what places Issues are commonly made. NOw I will show you in what places Issues are to be made to purge out Wheyish Plates of Issues. in The Crown of the Head. Humours, which flow either through the Vessels or betw●een the Skin. I will begin at the Head. And first of all an Issue may be made where the sagittary and coronal Sutures meet. You may find the place by applying your Wrist to the Nose of the Patient, and observing how far you can reach upon his head with your middle Finger, for there the Issue must be made. Also in the hollow part of the Occiput or hind part of the Head. But if you The Hind part of the Head. find no fitting Cavity there, you may apply your Caustick on either side of the Additions of the Sutura Lambidoides. Likewise in the hollow behind the Ears, when the Eyes or Ears are Fore part of the Head. Diseased. Sometimes on either side of the Neck, as far as the third or fourth Vertebra. The Neck The Arm The Breast In the middle of the Arm between the Muscles Deltois and Biceps. In the Breast, two or three may be made according to the Longitude thereof, in Diseases of the Chest and Lungs. At the bending of the Buttocks, at the Ends of the Muscles called Gloutii, where The Thigh the Thigh is perceived to move upon the Joint, an Issue may be made, in a perfect Sciatica when the Humour possesses the Cavity of the Joint. Issues are made within side the Thigh, two Fingers above the Knee; also on the The Leg inside of the Leg, two Fingers beneath the Ham. Sometimes to turn away Fluxions into the Thigh, Issues are made upon the The Loins Loins, near the Backbone, on each side the said bone. Chap. 5. Of Veins usually opened. I Proceed unto such Veins of the whole body as are usually opened. Veins The Veins which are wont to be opened. in The Fore head Hind part of the Head. which now adays are opened in the Head, are in the Forehead, the hinder-part of the Head, and in the Temples. The Forehead Vein is termed a T. 1. f. 1. L. T. 24. f. 1. B B. □ Praeparata or the ready Vein, because it is evident, and there is no need to Shave the Hair to come at it, as must be done in the Vein behind the Head, which is termed Vena Puppis, the Aftenship-Vein. The ancients did open the Veins behind the Ears, but that operation is now out of use: Hypocrates says the cutting of those Veins made the Scythians barren; perhaps he meant the Arteries in those Parts. The manner of opening these Veins Albucasis does ●each us in his 2. Book Chap. 97. Neither is it unprofitable to open the Veins of the Head, by reason of the external Veins, which through the holes of the Skull have communion with the Mening. I know Hieronimus Fabricius ab Aqua Pendente disallows the opening of those Veins, because oftentimes they do not appear. But if the Head be rubbed, and the Hair shaved off and then again rubbed, they will be more evident, provided you throttle the Neck a little with a Towel or Napkin. The ᵇ temporal Vein is also cut as is the Artery, in great and continual pains of In the Temples In the Nose the Head. The Ancients did open the inner Veins of the Nose, as appears out of Hypocrates in divers places, and from Galen his 6. ●o●k of epidemics. The later Greek writers, Paulus Aegineta and Aretaeus, men●●on ●●e opening of inner Veins of the Nose: and Areteus himself, declares the Instruments which the Ancients used, to provoke those Veins to bleed. ●ut if ●he blood, according to the Opinion of Fernelius, do flow from the Veins o● the Face, which creep into the inner Parts of the Nostril's; the Head being oppressed with plenty of blood, cannot be eased, because that same Irritation and opening of the Veins, aught to be performed nea● the Colander bone, h●t ●he Longitudinal passage creeping unto the Nostril's may be opened. therefore ● conceive those Parts are frequently to be fomented with Lukewarm Water, before we use tho●e Instruments propounded by Aretaeus. The manner of opening those Veins propounded by Albucasis, may be admitted, but it does not penetrate to the inmost Part of the Nostril's, as far as the Colander bone. The Veins under the Tongue termed Ra●ulares are more frequently opened In the Mouth with good success, in Diseases of the Throat and Head. Only Aurelianus against Diocles has disallowed that Practice, alleging that it fills the Head, and the blood cannot be stopped. Lib. 1. Acut. c. 12. True it is that in some the blood has Issued so plentifully, that it could very hardly be stopped, as was observed in a Capuchin Friar, Father Joseph. le Clerc, the great Politician and ●amiliar friend of the Cardinal Richelieu; as Simon Pimpernel a most expart Surgeon of Paris, himself told me, he having opened the said Veins, in the Fria● aforesaid. In the Neck the a T. 1. f. 1. H. □ external Jugular is opened. T●alli●nus in Cure of the squinsy In the Neck. opened the same with good success Lib 4. Cha●. 1. And Soranus Ephesius, in his Introduction Chap. 12. Commends the opening of this Vein. In like manner Actuarius commends this Practice in dangerous Disease's of the Head. Caesalpinus Lib. 2. Quaest: Medic. Chap. 12. Commands the opening of this Vein in a Squinzy, because the Jugular Veins are more filled, than the shut cover and Mouth of the Larynx. Prosper Alpinus in his 2. Book of the Egyptian manner of healing Diseases Chap. 9 Writes that this is a common Remedy in that Country. ᵇ T. 1. f. 1. I. □ ᶜ T. 1. K. □ Jacobus Corpus in his Anatomical Introductions, shows the way to open those Veins. Read Paulus Magnus Lib. de Phlebotomia printed in the Italian Tongue. And Rondeletius in his Me●hod●●s Medendi; Lud●v●cus Mercatus Chap. 13. Method; Medend. And Albucasis Lib. 2. Chap. 97. Rondeletius ●els us of a Vein in the Back Lib. 1. Methodi Melendi. Chap. 37. In the Back Which he says is to be found, in the first Vertebra of the Back; it is seen elevated on the top of the Vertebraes, creeping down the back, as far as Os Sacrum. It seems to flow from the brain according to the Longitude of the spinal Marrow. He lets us know that this Vein is profitably opened, in the Tetanus and Falling-Sickness, and if it be not so visible as to be opened, in that place must Cupping-Glasses be fastened with Scarification. Ludovicus Mercatus in Lib. 1. Practicae Cap. 19 Commends this Remedy against the Convulsion. Hypocrates in his Book de Visu, burns and pricks the Veins of the back: which Remedy is propounded by Alexander Benedictus Lib. 1. de Morbis Curandis, c. 5. And Gattivaria advises to open the same in in his Comment upo● the 9 Book of Rhasis. In the Arm three Veins are opened, the Cephalick or Head Vein accompanied In the Arm by an a T. 1. f. 1. Q. R. T. 24. f. 4. a a a. etc. □ Artery without any Nerve, and therefore it is opened without danger. The Basilica and Mediana are opened, but the b T. 1. f. 1. M. T. 24. f. 1. C C. □ Basilica must be opened with prudent waryness, by reason of an Artery near the same and the Tendon of Musculus Biceps, which lies beneath it: neither is the c T. 1. f. 1. N. T. 24. f. 1. f f. etc. □ Mediana void of the like danger. In the Hand between the Ring Finger and the little Finger the d T. 1. f. 1. P. □ Salvatella is □ opened, the opening thereof many account superstition: howbeit Hypocrates opened the Veins of the Hands: and this Remedy has not been rejected by learned Physicians, especially in long lasting Sicknesses, and in the Quartan Ague at the Conjunction of the Sun and Moon: which I have known to have succeeded happily both to other Physicians, and to myself, in old Quartans, after the use of divers Medicaments. It is not our Custom to open the Veins in the lower part of the Thigh above the Knee: yet Lazarus Sotus says that they are opened in Portugal in his 1 Book of Animadversions, Chap. 4. Sect. 61. To stop gouty Defluxions into the Legs, and to diminish the deformity of the Varices or black swollen Veins of those Parts, the Ancients were wont to open them. And Platerus commends this Remedy to to diminish the Varices. Which may be confirmed out of Galen Lib. 2. Method ad Glauconem. In the ●oot is opened the ᵃ Saphena, which is above the Malleolus internus o● In the Foot. inner Ankle bone; or the continuation thereof in Tarso, or the swelling side of the Foot between the Heel and the great Toe. Sometimes the b T. 1. f. 1. SS. T. 24. f. 4. m. □ Ischiadica Vena or Sciatica Vein, is opened, which is Scituate in the external Ankle. But this Vein ought not to be opened without very great heed to the place where the Orifice is made, because of an Artery near, and Tendons very near the same. 'Twas usual with the Ancients to open the c T. 24. f. 4. f f. □ Ham Vein, which is now a days seldom performed, and quite out of use: nevertheless the opening thereof would be as beneficial as is the opening of the Arm Veins. It might be conveniently opened if the Leg be put into a Vessel of hot Water above ●●●hether the Foot Veins may be opened and how? the Knee, and rubbed, as is usual in bleeding at the Arm; also a double Ligature may be used, one above and the other below the Knee. It is easily found and safely opened, below the hollow of the Ham, at the beginning of the Musculi Gemelli: and a sick Woman as she lies in her bed, may as conveniently present her Leg as the Arm, being covered with the sheet or other fitting covering. Though the Sciatica Vein and the Saphena are branches of the Crural Vein yet, because the Sciatica Vein does answer the Basilica, as the Saphena does t● Cephalica of the Arm; certain it is, blood is drawn by a more direct way fro● the Sciatica Vein, then from the Saphena. Howbeit Galen in his second Book Secundum Locos Chap. 2. The Sciatica Vein not appearing admits the Saphena to be opened in stead thereof. And if it appear not in the outward Ankle, its branch must be opened, on the Tarsus or pulp of the Foot beneath the Ankle, or above the Ankle, if it be visible. It's also possible to make it the more apparent by such a kind of Ligature as the Author of the Book de Anatomia Vivorum has described, made with a long and broad Swathband brought from the top of the Hip as low as the Ankle. Chap. 6. Of the Arteries which are opened. THe Ancient Physicians were wont to open Arteries as well as Veins. Howbeit Whether Arteries may be opened? Horatius Augenius in his Book of Blood-letting, dissuades the opening of Arteries, because he never saw any Artery opened, that could be stopped again, Aurelianus, Favours his Opinion, in his 1. Book of Chronic Diseases Chap. 5. Howbeit Galen in his Book de Venae Sectione, commends the opening of the Smaller Arteries in very bitter and old pains of the Head. Heurnius did wish, that in some part or other it might be safe to open an Artery in burning Fevers, because one Porringer of the Arterial blood drawn out, would cool the Patient more, than to lose ten Porringers of the venal blood. And in his Commentary upon the 23. Aphorism of the 1. Book, he says that in the Hungarian What Arteries are to be opened? Fever, when very red blood drops out at the Nose, it would do the Patiented good to draw a little blood from an Artery. But who (says he) dares open an Artery? I desire that all learned Artists would think of it. I say therefore, and aver, That in Paris, the Arteries of the Forehead and In the Forehead. In the Temples Temples, before and behind the Ears, are successfully opened in Ancient or very acute pains of the Head, in the Frenzy, Inflammations and extreme pains of the Eyes and Ears. As for the opening of the temporal Artery Thadaeus Dunus, in the 12. Chap. Of his Miscellanies, shows how profitable a Remedy, it is. Lazarus Sotus aforementioned, in the same place, observes that the Arteries behind the Ears are profitably opened in Portugal. Ludovicus Mercatus a Spanish Physician suspects this opening of these Arteries, for fear it should make Men Barren. But daily experience has delivered us from that fear. An Artery seated in the hinder Part of the Head is opened, the Hair being first In the ●ind Part of the Head. Shave of, and the Head and hand being fomented in hot water, or rubbed with a Sponge, that it may appear. The manner of opening this Artery, is not unlike that of the temporal Artery, and therefore that same way of Paulus Aegineta, Aetius and Albucasis, is to be rejected, who did first cut the Skin before they opened the Artery. Galen in his Book of Blood-letting near the end, in an Inflammation of the Liver In the Hand opened the ᵃ Artery, which Runs out between the Thumb and Fore Finger. Which, Prosper Alpinus observes to be very usual in Egypt, in his third Book and 12. Chap. De Medicina Egypt. And Septalius in his 6. Book of Animadversions▪ Article 122. Judges that in a Palpitation of the Heart, the In the Foot Arteries which Run along the Fingers may safely be opened. Which may likewise be done in the Tarsus and Meta-Tarsus of the Foot, according to the Advice of▪ Galen in his 3. Book of Anatomical Administrations, and the last Chapter. In other Parts Arteries may not in any wise be opened, unless they have a bone under them, that they may be pressed close down to make the Orifice grow together again: and therefore in a lean Body, an Artery being unawars opened in the Arm, may be closed again, if it be timly and closely tied as is sitting, to avoid Aneurisma. Before we think of opening the Arteries of the Head to turn away Fluxions, An experiment of Benedictus ●or the Rheumatism. that experiment of Alexander Benedictus will not be unprofitable, to apply unto the Shorn Head, Medicines that are to stop Rheums falling into the Eyes, must be applied from the Eyebrows unto the Crown of the Head: if the Eyes begin to appear dry, it is manifest that the Rheum falls into them by those Veins which are under the Skin: but if they continue moist, it is evident the Humour flows into them from under the bone. Now the foresaid Mixture of Alexander Benedictus which stops Rheums is this. Make a Cataplasm of Course bran, ●ine Frankincense, the white of an Egg, a little Vitriol and Stone Alum● and apply it as a foresaid. Chap. 7. Of the Muscles and first of the Forehead Muscles. INtending to explain all the Muscles of the Body, I will begin at the Frontal or The Forehead Muscles should rather be called the Eyebrow Muscles. a T. 15. f. 1. E E. □ Forehead Muscles, which I conceive are ordained rather to move the Eyebrows, than the Forehead itself. They have their original from the upper Parts of the Forehead, and being spread ou● upon the bone thereof, they end at the Eyebrows, that they might lift them up. They are severed in the midst of the Forehead, right above the Nose. And because we do at our pleasure depress and draw together our Eyelids into wrinkles, we must assign to each of them its Muscle, and I can find no other save the Orbicular b T. 15. f. 1. F F. □ Muscle of each Eyelid; for the Eyebrows cannot be drawn down without the Eyelids be closely 〈◊〉. Chap. 8. Muscles of the hinder Part of the Head. IN the after Head are found Muscles, or rather fleshy Membranes, which draw backwards the Skin of the Head in such persons as have the said Skin movable. These Muscles, as also those of the Forehead, are portions of the Musculus Latus or Broad 〈◊〉; which Silvius does neatly compare to a riding Hood, taking away only as much as is covered with a little cap on the top of a Man's Head: and therefore the broad Muscle does cover the Neck, Face, Fore and side Parts of the Head. ᵃ T. 15. f. 1. E E. □ ᵇ T. 15. f. 1. F F. □ Chap. 9 Muscles of the Eyelids. THe two Eyelids are moved by four Muscles, of which three are orbicular, and one is strait belonging to the upper Eyelid, which arises at the internal The first. Cavity of the Eye, and being spread out upon the Muscles, which lifts up the Eye, it 〈◊〉 unto the Eyelid. The first of the 〈◊〉 or round Muscles, is the Musculus Ciliaris, which The second. compasseth about each of the Eyelids. The other is drawn out under the Eyelid, arising from the Circumference of the Orbita or Socket of the Eye. The ● third round Muscle being of a Finger's breadth, compasses the Surface of the The Third. Orbita or Socket, and being placed under each Eyelid, and reaching as far as The fourth the Eyebrow, and closely shutting the two Eyelids, it lifts up the lower and draws down the Eye brow. Chap. 10. Muscles of the Eyes. THere are reckoned six Muscles of the Eye, four Strait and two Obliqne, The Attollens. which are named from their Situation and action. One is termed c T. 19 f. 3. A. 4. 5. A. □ Supernus and Attollens Oculum, the upper, and the Eyes up lifter; another is called d f. ●. 4. 5. □ Infernus The Deprimens and Deprimens Oculum, the lower and Eye Depresser; of the two Lateral or side Muscles, one at the greater corner of the Eye is termed e f. 3, 4, 5. C. □ Lectorius, the The Adducens Readers or the Students Muscle; the other placed at the smaller corner is called f f. 3, 4, 5. D. □ Indignatorius, the Disdeigners Muscle. They all arise from the Cavity of the Socket of the Eye and the broad Nervous The Abducent production, and are inserted into the Cornea Tunica under the Conjunctiva. The Contranitency of these Muscles pulling one against another is necessary, that the Eye might be movable to and fro, which being depraved, the Eye is drawn to some one side, and so abides in that posture. And that the Eye might be drawn back towards the greater Corner, and might be fixed in continual reading or looking upon somewhat, Nature has framed two other Muscles, which are termed Obliqne, because they direct the Obliqne motion of the Eye, which is none at all, neither can the Muscles themselves perform such a Motion in regard of their Original and Insertion, which ought to be contrary and opposite. The Musculus Obliquus a T. 19 f. 1. A B. □ Major, greater Obliqne Muscle, or Trochleator, contains The Obliquus Ma●●r. in it a wonderful piece of Workmanship, which is found in Mankind, detected by Rondeletius and observed in some great Fishes: for taking its rise from the Cavity of the Orbita, it produces a thin Tendon, which being drawn through a Transverse b T. 15. f. 1. F F. □ Gristle affixed unto the bone, by and beneath the Glandula Lachrymalis or weeping Kernel, is after widened and spread out upon the Eye. The Obliquus c f. 3. and 4. E. □ Minor drawn out externally by the greater Corner, and rolled The Obliquus Minor. athwart about the Globe of the Eye, comes as far as the Tendon of the greater Obliqne Muscle, that the Nervous productions of both the Obliqne Muscles might meet together to draw back and ●ix the Eye towards the Nose, that from both the Eyes beholding, one Pyramid Li●e may pass unto the visible Object. ᵃ T. 19 f. 3. and 4. F. □ ᵇ f. 3. and 4. G. □ Chap. 11. Muscles of the external Ear. THey are common and proper, which are Seldom moved, because the Ear it Of the external Ear. self is rarely moved. They are therefore rather marks and signs of Muscles, than true ones, such as are found in Brute Beasts which move their Ears. And therefore a portion of the frontal Muscle reaching unto the Ear, a portion of The common. the Cutaneous or Skin Muscle drawn unto the Pulp of the Ear, and a Part of the Occipital or after Head Muscle, stretched out behind the Ears, do make the common Muscles. There is only one proper Muscle, which lurks under the Ligament One proper. of the Ear, it arises, from the Mammillary Process, and is inserted into the Root of the Ear. The later Anatomists do make reckoning of two Muscles appertaining to the internal Internal Ears Ear, one of which is a T. 19 f. 3. and 4. F. □ external in the auditory passage or hole of the Ear, First. Second which draws back the Membrane of the Ear: the other is within the b f. 3. and 4. G. □ Concha, fastened to the Mallet or Hammer. In Bruts the Muscles of the internal Ea● are more evident than in Men ³ f. 3. and 4. E. □ ● T. 20. f. 5. A. □ ᵇ T. 20. f. 5. C C. □ Chap. 12. Muscles of the Nose. THey are common and proper. One Common. The common is only one, being the upper portion of that Orbicular Muscle which compasses the c T. 15. f. 1. N N □ Lips, which draws the No●e downwards, when the upper Lip is drawn down. Two d T. 15. f. 1. G. □ Muscles do lift up the Nose, on each side one, drawn from the space between ●●● proper. the Eyebrows and fastened to the bone of the Nose, and so carried to the wings or battlements thereof; the motion of these Muscles, when they act together is easily perceived in the drawing up and cri●ping or wrinkling of the Nose. In Persons that are largely Nosed, two T. 15. f. 1. I. □ little Muscles are found, spread upon the extreme Gristles of the No●e, which do widen the Laps of the Nose, without any elevation or lifting up. Within the Nostrils under the Succingent Coat, there lies lurking a little Muscle of a Membranous Nature, which does stick to the internal Parts as far as the Laps of the Nose, it is said to contract the Nostrils. Chap. 13. Muscles of the Lips▪ SEeing there are two Lips, each has its Muscles, and there are two common to both. The upper Lip is drawn upwards by a a T. 15. f. 1. K. □ Muscle which taking its rise from the hollow The fi●st of the proper ones. of the Jaw, beneath the Cheek bone, descends obliquely or sla●ting to the upper Lip. It is moved downwards by a b f. 1. M. □ Muscle brought from the midst of the lower Jaw, The second. into the said Lip. The nether Lip is drawn upwards by a Muscle, which being drawn out of the The third. lower Parts of the Cheek bone, does ●nd side ways upon the nether Lip. I● is moved downwards by a c f. 1. N. □ Muscle, which Springing out of the Chin, is inserted The fourth. into the middle Lip. The common Muscles are the lateral on●●▪ which do draw the Lips to the right or The common ones. 1 Zygomaticus. 2 Buccinator. left side The first is called d f. 1. L. □ Zygomaticus, being somewhat long and thin, and arising from the bone Zygoma, it is ●erminated in the meeting of each Lip. The ot●er common one, is vulgarly termed f. 1. O. □ Buccinator or the Trumpeter, it were more rightly called Bucco the Cheek driver, because it stirs the Cheeks, wh●●●● drives the meat this way and that way, in the action of chewing. It arises ●rom the top of the Gums or the bones in that place near the farthest grinders, and ends in each Lip. It is lose and s●ack, that it may give way inwards, and perform its Office of forcing, as the Muscles of the belly do; and that it may give way, when the Mouth ●apes wide. There is added a round f f. 1. NN▪ □ Muscle, which makes the proper substance of the Lips, Sphincter of the Mouth by the service whereof the Mouth, is drawn together, the Lips are opened, go inwards, and swell. It might well be called the Sphincter of the Mouth, or the Pylorus. Chap. 14. Muscles of the lower Jaw. THey are on either side six. The g T. 15. f. 1. P P. f. 2. A A. □ Temporal Muscle, being a very strong one The Temporal li●ts up the Jaw. It arises from the whole Cavity of the Temples, and being carried along under the Os Zygoma, it is by a very strong nervous Tendon inserted into the sharp ᵃ process of the Jawbone. This Muscle is assisted by the Pterygoideus b f. 2. D D. □ Internus, arising from the Cavity of Pterygoideus Internus. the Apophysis Pterygoides, and terminated at the corner of the inferior Jaw. It is called by Galen Masseter Internus. The Jaw is drawn down wards by the Digastricus or Twi-bellyed Muscle, and Digastricus. the Musculus Latus or Broad Muscle. The Digastricus or Twi-Belly, being in the c f. 1. T T. f. 2. C C □ middle Nervous and fleshy at the Ends, springs from the Apophys●● Styloides, and being in the Middle reflexed about the Stylo-Ceratoides, it is inserted into the Chin, under the bending of the Jaw. The Musculus T. 10. f. 1. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. T. 15. f. 2. F. □ Latus or Broad-Belly, arises from the upper Part of the Brest-bone, The Latus. the Clavicula and Shoulder point, and cleaves firmly to the Basis of the inferior Jaw, muffling the Neck and whole Face; and by reason of the aforesaid Adhesion, it is said to draw the Jaw downwards. Pterygoideus T. 15. f. 2. E E E E. □ Externus, the external wing fashioned Muscle forces the Jaw Pterygoideus Externus. forwards, which being swelled does lightly drive the Jawbone forewards: which happens in the overshooting of the Jawbone, when the lower Teeth are above the upper Teeth. The Jaw is plucked about this way and that way by the Masseter or Chaw Muscles being in its Original Twi-Headed, one of whose heads arises from the Os Zygoma, Masseter. the other beneath the said bone; each of which being furnished with divers Fibres which Cross one another, is inserted into the Corner of the inferior Jaw. It may easily be divided into two Parts. Chap. 15. Of the Muscles of the Os Hyoides. BEcause the bone termed g T. 13. f. 11. and 12. A B C. etc. □ Hyoides, is placed in the Neck to a prop and foundation for the Tongue and Larynx, it has obtained Muscles as well as Ligaments, by which it is held suspended, that it might be moved with the Tongue and Larynx. And therefore its Muscles are common to the Tongue and the Larynx. The bone Hyoides has ten Muscles, on each side five, for I add the Muscle termed Myloglossus (which is commonly attributed unto the Tongue) and I call it Mylohyoideus, because, it does not any ways touch the Tongue. ᵇ T. 15. f. 2. a a. □ ᶠ f. 1. S. f. 2. B B. □ The Os Hyoides is l●●●●d up by the Muscle a T. 13. f. 13. B B. □ Geniohyoideus, it arises from within The Genio●yoideus. Mylobyoideu the Chin and is inserted into the Ba●is of the Hyoides. Assistant hereunto is the Muscle b f. 4. E E. □ Mylohyoideus, i● arises from within the Jaw in the Quarters of the Grinding Teeth, and reaches to the Basi● of the Bone Hyoides. The bone Hyoides is drawn downwards by the Muscle ᶜ S●ernohyideus which 〈◊〉 springs from the top of the Breast bone, and drawn o●t upon the Weasand is inserted into the Basis or bottom, of the said bone Hyoides. The Muscle c f. 13. D D. □ Stylocerathyoideus, from the Apophysis Styloides is carried Stylocerathyoideus. into the Horns of the Os Hyoides. Chap▪ 16▪ Muscles of the Tongue. THe Tongue is forced forward by the Muscle e f. 13. C C. □ Genyoglossus, which growing out Genyoglossus. of the inner side of the Chin, is terminated to the Tongues Root. It is drawn back by the Muscle f f. 14. B B. □ Basiglossus which takes its rise at the Basis of Basiglossus. Os Hyoides, and is carried unto the Root of the Tongue. It is forced sidewaies to the right and left, by the Muscle g ●. 14. D D. Stylogossus, which Stylogossus. taking its beginning at the Apophysis Styloides, is extended into the middle, very near of the Tongue. ᵈ f. 1. E E. □ Chap▪ 17▪ Muscles of the Larynx. THe whole body of the Larynx consisting of five Gristles, is moved upwards and downwards. It is drawn upwards by the Muscle a T. 13▪ f. 8. B B. □ Hyothyroideus, which arising from the Hyothyroideus. Basis of the Hyoides bone, is inserted into the external middlemost of the Thyroides. The Muscle b f. 8. C C. □ Bronchius draws it downwards, which taking its rise, from the 〈◊〉. inner side of the Breast bone, and stretched out upon the Channel of the Aspera Arteria or Weasand, it ascends unto the Bas● of Thyroides. Two only of the Gristles of the Larynx are movable, viz. The f. 1, 2. 8. A. □ Thyroides and the d f. ●. and 6. □ A●yt●noides, and to procure their motion they have little Muscles, which spring out of the immovable Gristle Cricoides. The Thyroides is dilated by the Muscle Cricothyroideus Anticus, which gins Cr●cothyroid●●● Anticus. at the ou●●er forepart of Cricoides, and ends within the internal sides of Thyroides. The said Thyroides is contracted by the Muscle f. 9 C C. □ Cricothyroideus Lateralis, Lateralis. which spri●●ing from the lateral part of Cricoides, is inserted externally into the sides of Thyroides. The A●ytaenoides is opened by the Muscle f. 9 B B. □ Thyroaryt●noideus, which springing Thyroaryt●noideus. from the inner and foremost part of the Thyroides, ends into the sides of the Ary●enoides: or rather it takes its rise from the Cricoides and Thyroides, being placed between both. The Arytaenoides is shut by one only Muscle called Arytaenoideus, which h f. 10. B B. □ compasses about and shuts the Arytaenoides, like the Sphincter Muscle, and also Aryt●noideus. with its Basis it Streightens the Glottis, ●or to make the voice ●ound the better. The Epiglotti● has i f. 9 and 10. A. □ no Muscles to lift it up and shut it down in Mankind, as it has in Brute ●●asts. e f. 3. and 4. f. 9 and 10. D D. □ Chap▪ 18▪ Muscles o● the Pharynx. THe Pharynx which is the beginning of Oesophagu● or the Gullet, has obtained from 〈◊〉 seven Muscles, of which three have ●ellows and the fourth is without companion namely that which is termed Oesophag●us. The ●●●st is a T. 3. f. 2. and 3. B B. □ Spheno-Pharing●us, which arises from a certain sharp Spheno-Pharing●●. point of the Sphenoides nea● the Styloides, and bending a little downwards, it ends in the sides of the Jaws, that it may draw the Pharynx upwards. The second is b f. 2. and 3. A A. □ Cephalopharyngaeus, which arises from that part where the Cephalopharyngaeus. Head is Joined to the Neck, and descending is spread out into the Pharynx, and seems to make the very coat thereof. The third is c f. 2. and 3. C C. □ Stylo▪ Pharyngaeus, which arises from the Apophysis Styloides, Stylopharyngaeus. Oesophagaeus. and is implanted into the side of the Pharynx, to serve to widen the ●ame. The Muscle Oesophageus, does draw together and close the d f. 2. and 3. D D. □ Pharynx, which growing out of one side of Thyroides, and compassing round the hinder part of Oesophagus, is implanted into the other side of Thyroides; or being outwardly fastened to both sides of Thyroides, it draws together the beginning of the Oesophagus and purls the same like the Sphincter Muscle of Anus. Chap. 19 Muscles of the Gargareon, Uuula, or Mouth Palat. THe Wula has two Muscles T. 13. f. 15. A. □ on either side. The Muscle Ptery-Staphylinus f f. 15. B B. □ externus, taking its Rise from the upper Pterystaphylinus externus. Jaw under the last grinding Tooth, ends in a small Tendon g f. 15. b b. □ which passes through a chink engraven on the upper side of the Pterygoides: and there being turned back, as it were through a pulley, it is inserted into the sides of the Wula. The Ptery-Staphylinus h f. 15. C C. □ internus, cast out of the nether part of the inner Skirt Internus. of the Pterygoides, it has a peculiar movable Gristle ordained for its original, and ascending according to the Longitude of the internal Wing or Skirt of the Pterygoides, it ends at the Wula. Chap. 20. Muscles of the Head. THe Muscles of the Head are proper or Common. The Common are those which move the Neck and Head both; such as are the Muscles of the Neck: the proper are such as move the Head, the Neck remaining unmoved. Now the proper are fourteen, on each lied seven, six of which are placed in the hinder part. There is one only in the Fore part, which is called a T. 14. f. 2. K K. f. 3. H. f. 4. F F. □ Mastoideus, and Caput flectens. Mastoideus. bows the Head; it arises from the top of the Breast bone and midst of the Clavicula, and is obliquely inserted into the Apophysis Mastoides. Sometimes in the forepart of the Neck, there is another Muscle next the Long Muscle, which helps the Mostoideus to bend the Head: and I have many times shown this Muscle, and sometimes I have seen it wanting. Six Muscles do extend the Head: of which two are large, the other Extenders. four small▪ The first of the large ones is called b f. 2. H H. □ Splenius; which arising from the sharp points Splenius. of the ●ive uppermost Vertebrae of the back, and the four lowest of the Neck, it is in●erted into the hinder part of the Head. There comes the other large Muscle to assist the former, and is called c f. 2. I I. f. 3. E F. □ Complexus. ●omplexus. It springs from the transverse or overthwart Eminencies or Apophyses of the foresaid Vertebrae, and is terminated in the after part of the Head. The lesser Muscles are some strait, others crooked, and of both these, some Rectus major are greater, others le●s. The greater d f. 3. and 4. I I. □ strait Muscles, arising from the Spine or point of the second spondile, Vertebra or Knuckle, are inserted into the after side of the Head. Under them the e f. 3. i. f. 4. K K. □ two lesser arising from the hinder part of the first Vertebra, are Rectus minor terminated in the after side of the Head. The greater a T. 14. f. 3. L. f. 4. G G. □ Obliqne ones do arise from the spin or point of the second Vertebra Obliquus mijor. Obliquus major. and reach unto the overthwart Eminence or Apophysis of the first Vertebra; and from the same place the Lesser b T. 14. f. 3. K. f. 4. H H. □ Obliqne or crooked ones do arise and are terminated in the Occiput, or after Part of the Head. Chap. 21. Muscles of the Neck. THe Neck has eight, on each side four, being placed before and behind, to bend The Neck benders. The Longus. the Neck and extend the same again. It is bend by the Musculus Longus and the Muscle Scalenus or the unevensided Muscle. The c T. 13. f. 18. A A. □ Long Muscle being situate under the Oesophagus, springs out of the body of the third Vertebra or Knuckle bone of the back, and ascends laterally connexed or knit unto all the bodies of the Vertebrae, ending into the former part of the first Vertebra. The Scalenus arising from the d T. 13. f. 18. B B. □ first Rib of the Chest, it is inwardly engrafted The Scalenus. by obliqne Fibres into all the overthwart or transverse Eminencies of the Neck-bones: through it the Vessels are drawn, which are to be distributed into the Arm. The Neck is extended or stretched out by two Muscles. The Extenders Spinatus The Spinatus Muscle e T. 14. f. 4. D D. □ arises from the Roots of the seven uppermost Vertebrae of the Chest and five of the Neck; and is inserted into the Spina or point of the second Vertebra of the Neck. The Muscle Transversarius, arising from the f T. 14. f. 4. E E. □ transverse Apophyses or Eminencies Transversarius. of the six uppermost Vertebrae of the back, is planted externally into all the transverse Eminencies of the Neck. Chap▪ 22, Muscles of the Shoulderblades. THey are four in Number. The Muscle Levator ᵍ Proprius, does lift up the Shoulder blads lister. Shoulder blade. It arises from the transverse or overthwart Apophyses or Emineneys of the second, third and fourth Vertebra of the upper part of the Neck, and ends in the uppermost Corner of the Shoulderblade. The Muscle Trapezius ᵃ arises from the hinder part of the Head, at the Points Trupezius. of five Vertebrae of the Neck, and of eight or nine of the uppermost Vertebrae of the Chest, and is inserted into the Basis of the Shoulder blade and the Spina, as far as the shoulder tip. It causes divers motions according to the original and direction of the Fibres; that is, according to their▪ Rise and insertion. The Shoulder-blad is drawn forwards by one only Muscle termed Serratus Serratus minor ᵇ Minor, which arises out of the four upper most Ribs, and ends in the Coracoides. It is drawn backwards by the ᶜ Rhomboides o● lozing fashioned, or diamand Rhomboides fashond Muscle, which arises from the three points of the lower Vertebraes of the Neck, and the three points of the uppermost Vertebraes of the Chest, and is inserted into the external Basis of the Shoulderblade. Although by its own weight it return to the natural Situation: yet a ᵈ portion of Musculus Latissimus, running out unto the Arm, cleaves by a loop to the lower Corner of the Shoulderblade, and is said to draw the Shoulderblade downwards. Chap. 23. Muscles of the Arm. THey are nine. The Muscle Deltoides and Supra Spinatus do move it upwards. Arm lifters. The Deltoides ᵉ does arise from the midst of the Clavicula, the Shoulder tip, Deltoides the whole spin of the Shoulderblade, and is carried out unto the middle of the Arm. The Supraspinatus being thrust into the Cavity above the Spina or sharp point Supraspinatus of the Scapula, and being conveyed under the Shoulder tip, is inserted into the Neck of the Arm. The Latissimus and Rotundus Major, do move the Arm downwards: the Latissimus The depressers Latissimus. ᵍ springs from the sharp prominencies of the Os Sacrum, of the Vertebraes of the Loins, and of nine Vertebraes of the Back: it is inserted into a part of the Arm, not far below the Head. It is assisted by Rotundus ᵃ Major or the larger round Muscle, which arises from Rotundus major. the whollower Rib of the Shoulderblade, and ends very near in the middle of the Arm. The Pectoralis and Coracoidaeus draw it forward. The Pectoralis arises out The drawers to. The Pectoralis. of the first sixth and seventh true Ribs, the Brest-bone and more than the middle of the Clavis; and it is inserted by an acute Tendon into the middle of the Arm between the Deltoides and the Biceps. The Muscle Coracoidaeus ᶜ springs out of the Apophysis Coracoides, and ends Coracoidaeus. very near in the middle of the Arm; it draws the Arm towards the left Shoulder. The Arm is moved backwards by three Muscles, Infraspinatus, Rotundus Drawer's back. Minor, and Immersus. The Infraspinatus arising in the middle between ᵈ the lesser round Muscle and Infraspinatus the Spina, ends into the Neck of the Arm which is muffles about. The Rotundus ᵉ minor gins at that Cavity which appears under the lower Rib Rotundus minor. of the Shoulderblade, and ends in the Neck of the Arm. Immersus or the ᶠ Subscapularis does possess the hollow and inward Part of the Immersus Omoplata or Shoulderblade, and is carried out unto the Neck. The three last Muscles which act all at once, do carry about the Arm upwards with a sudden motion flaunting outwards, so that the motion seems to be doubled. Chap. 24. Muscles of the Cubit. THe Cubit consists of two Bones, which as they are Knit together by divers Articulations, so do they perform divers motions. The Cubitus guides the motions of the Bending and extending. The Radius directs the motions of Pronation and Supination, and therefore they have proper Muscles for these motions. The Cubit is bended by two Muscles Scituate in the internal Part of the Arm viz. Cubit benders The Biceps and Brachiaeus internus. The Biceps arises from a ᵃ double beginning, the one of which from the extremity Biceps of the Cavity of the Glenois is conveyghed through the cloven of the Arm, the other taking its Rise from the Apophysis Coracoides, they are after united and make one Tendon, which is inserted into the inner Part of the Radius, there where is bunches out. The Brachiaeus ᵇ Internus, being placed beneath the Biceps, takes its rise from the middle of Os Brachij, unto which it firmly adheres, a●d is terminated between Brachiaeus internus. the Radius and the Cubitus, in that Part where they are fastened together. The Cubit is extended by ●●ur Muscles, Viz. Longus, Brevis Brachiaeus Cubit extenders. Longus externus, and Angoneus or Cubitalis. Longus, the long Muscle ᶜ arises from the lower Rib of the Shoulderblade near the Neck, where it has a peculiar Cavity, and it is terminated into the Elbow. Brevis, the short Muscle, ᵈ springs from the hinder Neck of the Arm and ends Brevis. likewise at the Elbow. Both those Muscles do make up one strong and sinewy Tendon. For the third Muscle Galen in the first Book and last chapter of his Anatomical Administrations, reckons a lump of Flesh which is confounded with the two foregoing Brachiaeus externus. Muscles, and inserted into the same place. I call it Brachiaeus externus, because being spread upon the outside of the Arm, it is placed beneath the other two last mentioned. In the same place Galen does acquaint us, that any man may accurately separate these three Muscles following the rectitude of the Fibres. The fourth Muscle called ᵉ Angoneus, is Scituate in the bending of the Cubit on Angoneus. the hinder side, which is called Agcoon or Ancoon and answers to the Musculus Poplitaeus. It arises out of the lower and hinder Part of the Arm, being Scituate between the Radius and Cubitus: and it is inserted by a sinewy Tendon into the side of the Cubitus, a Thumbs length below. Sometimes ●● cleaves so fast to the Fleshy end of Brachiaeus Externus, that there is no apparent difference to be discerned between them; and than it is Judged to be a portion of the Brachiaeus externus, extended so far as to that place. Chap. 25. Muscles of the Radius. THe Radius is bowed downwards by the two internal Muscles, so called because The Radius its they are placed in the inner Part of the Cubit; and one is called Inferior Pronator, and the other Superior Pronator. The Superior being a a T. 22. f. 1. and 3. D. □ round Muscle, springs form the inner Part of the inner knob of the Arm, and ends with a Membranous Tendon, obliquely carried unto Pronator superior. Pronator inferior. the Radius. The Inferior Pronator b T. 10. f. 1. A. B. T. 12. f. 1. E. □ Quadratus, is carried overthwart from the lower Part of the Cubit unto the lower Part of the Radius, and is thereinto inserted, being altogether Fleshy. Also it Knits the Vlna to the Radius, as if ●t were a Ligament. The Radius is drawn down backwards by two external Muscles. The Longus c T. 22. f. 1. H. □ Supinator, springs out of the top of the Arm, above the external Supinator Longus. Supinator Brevis. Knob, and being drawn out upon the Radius, it is inserted on the inside of the lower Epiphysis thereof, being fleshy. Brevis Supinator, arising out of the d T. 22. f. 3. B. □ outside of the inner Knob, is carried obliquely very near to the middle of the Radius, and turning back does straight comprehend the same. ᵃ T. 22. f. 1. G. □ ᵈ T. 22. f. 1. I I. f. 2. B. □ ᶜ T. 22. f. 3. E. □ ᵈ T. 22. f. 3. F. □ ᵉ T. 22. f. 3. ●. f. 4. G. □ ᵃ T. 22. f. 2. C. □ ᵇ T. 22. f. 2. D. □ ᶜ T. 22. f. 4. E. □ ᵈ T. 22. f. 4. F. □ ᵉ T. 22. f. 2. and 3. C. □ ᶠ T. 22. f. 1. B. □ Chap. 26. Muscles of the Wrist. THe Wrist is bended, stretched forth and laterally moved by two Muscles, the bender and extender of each side, acting both together. It is bended by two inward Muscles, of which the one may be termed Cubiteus, Wrist-benders the other Radieus, by reason of their Situation. The Cubiteus a T. 22. f. 1. N. □ internus takes its rise from the inner part of the inner Knob of the Cubiteus Internus. Arm, and being fastened unto the Cubit and to the fourth Wrist bone of the first Rank, it is drawn out aloft. The Radieus b T. 22. f. 1. M. □ Internus, having its original in the same place, and being stretched Radieus Internus. out upon the Radius, is inserted into that bone of the Metacarpium, which sustains the fore Finger. The Wrist is extended by two external Muscles, which hold the same way with Wrist extenders the internal, and are therefore called by the same names. The Radieus c T. 22. f. 3. H. □ externus or Bicornis, takes its rise from that bony point which is Radieus Externus. in the Arm above the Knob thereof, and resting upon the Radius, it sends forth a double Tendon, the one of which is inserted into the Wrist bone lying under the Radius, the other into that bone of the Metacarpium which is seated under the fore Finger. Some will have this Muscle to be a double one, because it appears wholly distinct in its original and insertion. For that which is carried to the Wrist grows out of the bony point of the Arm: the other arises out of the external Knob of the Arm and extends the Metacarpium with the Wrist. It has its Tendons separated and enclosed in peculiar cases and sheaths, which are of a sinewy Gristly substance, without the Ring fa●…iond Ligament of the Wrist. The Cubiteus d T. 22. f. 3. G. □ externus, arising from the outward Apophysis of the Arm, and Cubiteus externus. being carried along the Cubit, it inserts its Tendon into the fourth bone of the Metacarpium, Scituate beneath the little Finger. Chap. 27. Muscles of the Palm of the Hand. IN the Palm or Hollow of the Hand are found two notable Muscles, which are termed the Palmar Muscles, the one of which is short, the other long. The long Palmar Muscle growing out of the a T. 22. f. 1. K. □ inner side of the knob of the Long Palmar Muscle. Arm, is spread into the hollow of the Hand, as far as the first Articulation of the Fingers. In its original it is Fleshy and presently after lessens itself into a small Tendon, which passing above the Ring-shaped Ligament of the Wrist, and not included with the rest of the Tendons, it is widened into a sinewy Membrane, which is so firmly fastened unto the Skin (to make the sense of feeling the more quick, and that the Hand may hold things the faster) that it is a very hard thing to sever it from the Skin. Besides the Palmar Muscle in the hollow of the Hand, a Certain piece of Flesh Short Palmar Muscle. four Square of a Thumbs breadth is found upon the Ring-shaped Ligament, which is redder than the Flesh, between the Thumb and the middle Finger, and is sometimes single and sometimes double, looking like two Muscles: and being carried under and implicated with the Palmar Muscle, it seems to take its rise from the Root of the Fleshy part of the Hand called Thenar, and to be inserted into that same vl bone of the Wrist, which is placed out of order. It's Office is to hollow the Hand and so to make Diogeness his Dish to drink on of, together with the Muscles of the Thumb and the Hypothenar. This Muscle shall be named Palmaris brevis; the short Palm Muscle. Chap. 28. Muscles of the Fingers. THe Fingers are bended, stretched out, and moved sidewaies. Four Finger benders. There are two Muscles which bend the four Fingers, viz. The Musculus Sub●imis, and the Musculus Profundus. The Sublimis arises from the inner, b T. 22. f. 1. O. f. 5. A. □ part of the inner knob of the Arm, and produceth Sublimis four a T. 22. f. 5. a a a a. □ Tendons about the Wrist, which are terminated at the second Articulation of the Fingers, and have holes bored in them, to give passage to the Tendons of the Musculus Profundus. The Profundus springs out of the b T. 22. f. 1. P. f. 5. B. □ upper parts of the Cubitus and Radius and Profundus. being c T. 22. f. 5. b b b b. □ divided into four, it is carried through the holes of the Tendons of the Sublimis, unto the third Articulation of the Fingers. Do but observe the Industry of Nature, who to the end the Fingers might be rightly bended, on the inside according to their length, she has framed a Channel of most hard Membranes resembling Ligaments, which Channel does straight enfold the Tendons of the Musculus Profundus and Sublimis, lest in the bending of the Fingets the Tendons being bowed should be drawn out of their place, and like ropes rise up and lift up the Skin. And although the Tendons be closely comprehended within the said Channel, yet have they their fre● course and passage, because the Channel is smeared with a fat a●d Oily Humour. Out of the very Tendons of Musculus profundus by the Wrist, do arise the Lumbricales four d T. 22▪ f. 5. C C C C. □ Lumbricales, being firmly fastened thereunto, and carried to the first Articulation of every Finger, where they unite themselves to the Interosseans. The Muscles which extend the Fingers are Common and proper. Extenders Extensor Magnus. ● I call them common, which serve the four Fingers, such as the Extensor magnus Digitorum [the great extender of the Fingers] or which beside extension, do cause other motions, as the Lumbracales and Interossei joined together. The proper are they which belong and are attributed only to certain Fingers, as the Extensor Indicis [stretcher out of the fore Finger] and the Extensor Auricularis [stretcher out of the little Finger. Magnus' Extensor Digitorum, the great a T. 22. f. 3. K. □ Finger stretcher arises out of the outward Knob of the Arm, and by the b f. 3. e. □ Wrist is cloven into four c f. 3. f f f f. □ Tendons, which end into the two lower Joints of each Finger. The Fingers are moved sidewaies, which motion is commonly termed adduction Side way movers. and Abduction. The Adduction or drawing to, is when they are drawn towards the Thumb; Abduction or drawing from, is when they are moved sidewaies from the Thumb▪ And this motion is performed by the Interossean Muscles: of which there are Interosseans three d f. 4. I I I I □ External and as many e f. 2. f f f f. □ Internal, spread in the spaces between the Bones of the Metacarpium. They arise from the upper Parts of the said bones near the Wrist, and in the first Internodeum or space between the Joints, with a very small Tendon, they creep side longs over the three bones of the Fingers, until they come unto the Roots of the Nails; in the former and upper Part whereof, the Tendons, being first united are terminated. And therefore the Interossean Muscles acting together, do keep the Fingers both stretched out, and one close to another, just as we hold out hands when we swim. Moreover you shall observe two Muscles, which are as it were external interosseans, Proper. which are spread without, upon the ●irst and fourth bone of the Metacarpium, the one of which called f f. 2. g. h. f. 1. S. □ Hypothenar, is Peculiar to the little Finger, and Abductor minimi. may be divided into two. It arises from the third and fourth Wrist bone of the second Rank, and is sidewales inserted into the Joints of the same Finger, to draw the same towards the outside. The other belongs unto the fore Fingers, and lying beneath the Antithenar, it Abductor Indicis. it grows out of the inner Part of the first bone of the Thumb and is inserted into the Joints of the Fore Finger, to draw the same unto the Thumb. So that it may be called Musculus Abductor Indicis. Besides the Tendon of the common extender, it has a Peculiar extensive Muscle, Proper extenders. Of the fore Finger. which may be termed Indicator the g ●. 3. I. □ Pointer, because this Muscle serves the Finger to point withal. It arises from the middle and external Part of the Cubit, and is inserted by a forked Tendon into the second Articulation: and the other Tendon grows together with the Tendon of the greater extender. There is a Proper extender ascribed to the little Finger. It arises out of the upper Of the little Finger. Part of the Radius being seated between the Cubitus and the Radius, and it is with a double Tendon planted into the little Finger on the outside thereof, but with another tendon it is mingled with the Tendon of the greater extender. Mean while you shall observe the Lumbrical or worm Muscles, which are sometimes three, other lest four, seldom five: which though they are implicated with the Tendons of Musculus Profundus, and are constantly thought to arise there from; yet I conceive, they are bred out of the sinewy and orbicular a T. 22. f. 3. ●. □ Ligament of the Wrist, that it might have a firm and stable Original. Chap. 29. Muscles of the Thumb. THe Thumb has peculiar Muscles, whereby it alone is bended, extended and moved sidewaies. Thumb Muscles It is Extended by two long Muscles. One of which arising out of the b T. 22. f. 3. M. □ upper Extenders and outward side of the Cubit, goes up upon the Radius, and being carried beyond the Wrist, it is inserted into the first and second Joint of the Thumb, by a double and sometimes a triple Tendon. The other arises from the c T. 22. f. 3. L. □ same Part of the Cubit, but lower, near the Wrist, and is inserted into the third Joint of the Thumb. The Thumb is bent by d T. 22. f. 2. D. □ one Muscle, which growing out of the Inside of the Bender. Cubit, it carried unto the second and third Joint thereof. It is moved sidewais by two Muscles. Lateral movers. The Thenar a T. 22. f. 4. K. □ arises from the inside of the Wrist, beneath the Thumb, and is inserted into the second Joint of the Thumb, to draw it from the Fingers. The other Muscle termed b T. 22. f. 1. Q. f. 2. F. □ Antithenar, draw● the Thumb towards the ●ore Finger. It grows out of the external side of the first bone of the Metacarpium which sustains the Thumb, and is inserted into the first Joint of the said Thumb. It is drawn to the four other Fingers by a c T. 22. f. 1. R. f. 2. G. □ Muscle, which being Joined unto, and seated beneath the Thenar, grows out of the three lower bones of the Metacarp●um, and is inserted into the second Joint of the Thumb. It may be called Hypothenar Pollicis, because it is spread out under the Thenar. Chap. 30. Muscles of the Chest. THe Muscles of the Chest are Proper or Common. Those are said to be Proper, which particularly and properly belong unto the Chest; the Common are such as being destinated to some certain Part, yet do assist the Breast with their help, as Auxliaries, such as are the upper Muscles of the Shoulder blade. The Chest is widened or lifted up by five Muscles. Three of which are before Which widen. The Chest. viz. Subclavius, Serratus major, and the Triangularis or Pectoralis internus. One is hinderly Scituate viz. Posticus Serratus superior: and the fift is the External Intercostal. The Subclavius arises from the d T. 10. f. 1. F. □ inner part of the Clavicula, near the Shoulder Subclaviu● tip, being of a Fleshy substance, and is inserted into the first Rib, near the Breast bone. The Serratus a T. 10. f. 1. C D. □ Major, reaches from the inner Basis of the Shoulder blade, unto Serratus major six, and sometimes seven Ribs, of which the five lowest are true Ribs, and the two uppermore are bastard one. The Serratus b T. 14. f. 2. E. □ Posticus Superior, being Scituate beneath the Romboides, Serratus Posticus Superior grows out of the sharp points or spines of the three lower Vertebras of the Neck, and the first spin of the Back; and ends into the three upper Ribs, and sometime the fourth. The eleven c T. 10. f. 1. G G. □ External Intercostals, hold the place of one Muscle, which is carried External Intercostals. Obliquely forward from the lower side of the upper Rib, into the upper side of the lower Rib. Unto those Muscles which widen the Chest, we must add the Diaphragme or Midrif. The Triangular Muscle, growing out of the middle and inner Part of the Brest-bone, Triangular Muscle. is inserted into the Gristles of the lower Ribs, as far as the third or fourth bastard Ribs. Three Muscles there are which Contract the Breast, the Sacrolumbus, Intercostalis Contracters. internus, and Serratus Posticus inferior. The Sacrolumbus, takes its original from the Os d T. 14. f. 1. L L. f. 3. B B. □ Sacrum and the Spiny productions Sacrolumbus. of the Loins, and is terminated into the upper Ribs, near unto their Roots; bestowing upon each Rib a double Tendon or Tendinous handle or clasp, an internal and an external; and therefore it serves both to depress the Ribs and to raise the Backbone, when it is bowed and bended forward. The Eleven internal Intercostals, which fill up the spaces between the Ribs, are Internal Intercostals. reckoned to be but one Muscle. It is carried obliquely from the nether Rib to the upper more. It has Fibres contrary to those of the external, cross wise intersected. The Serratus Posticus f T. 14. f. 2. F G. □ inferior, growing out of the spines of the three lowest Serratu● p●sticus inferior. Vertebraes of the Back, and the first of the Loins, is Terminated into three or four of the lower Ribs. This same Serraticus Posticus inferior, is just opposite to the Serraticus Posticus superior, and both of them by a broad and Membranous Aponeurosis, do so grow together, that they serve instead of a band to bind and keep together the hinder Muscles of the Backbone. Others do add eight Muscles of the Belly, because more Muscles are requisite to cause violent Expiration. ᵉ T. 10. f. 1. H H. □ Chap. 31. Of the Midrif. THe Diaphragme or Midrif is an a T. 10. f. 1. I I. f. 6. and 7. the whole. admirable kind of Muscle, both in regard of ●se of the Midrif. its composition and continual Action, whiles it does night and day incessantly fan the Natural and Vital Parts, serving nevertheless as a Wal of partition to sever the one from the other. It arises from the Circumference of the bastard Ribs, through which it is obliquely It's Original. drawn about, as far as to the Vertebraes of the Loins: the end or Sinewy Part thereof, is in the Nervous Centre. When we draw in the Air, it is contracted and bend, and when it draws the lower It's Motion. Ribs downwards and of convex becomes strait and even. When we blow the Air out, it is by help of the Mediastinum drawn upwards, and of strait is made Convex or bunching like the surface of a Bucklar. Chap. 32. Muscles of the Back and Loins, wherewith the Backbone is moved. THe Back is not moved, because of the Ribs interposed, and the Penury of Muscles The Back properly is not moved. both internal and external; it has indeed Muscles spread upon the outside thereof, but they are for another use. So that between the Neck and the Loins it remains immovable, whiles the extreme Parts are moved. Now the motion is made in the last Vertebra of the Back which is received on all hands by its neighbouring Vertebraes, and receives none; and because it is Contiguous with the Loins, The Motion is attributed to the Loins rather than to the Back: although it belong to the whole Back-bon. The Backbone therefore, as the Loins, are bowed and extended and drawn to the sides. They are bowed by two Muscles, on each side one. The Musculus a T. 14. f. 2. O O. f. 4. C C▪ f. 1. N N. □ Quadratus Back is bowed by the Quadratu●. takes its rise from the hinder Part of the Os Ilij and from the inner side of the Os Sacrum, being inserted into the transverse Apophyses of the Loins as far as the last Rib, and of a Fleshy substance. I for my Part would rather say it arises from the transverse Productions or Apophyses of the two lower Vertebraes of the Back and the last Rib, that it might together with the obliqne descending Muscles and the strait ones, stir and move forwards the whole frame of the Ossa Ilium. The Muscles of the Abdomen which serve for Inspiration or drawing in of the Air, do also further the bending of the Loins and of the whole Backbone; for whiles they bear down the Chest, they do withal bow the Backbone▪ if lying along upon your Breech, you would lift up the Trunk of your Body; or would leap up upon your Fee●, without the Assistance of your Hands. The Loins are distended by four Muscles, on either side two, which are so enfolded Extenders. all along the Backbone, that either we must make so many pares, as there are Vertebraes, or we must say there is only one Pair of Muscles distributing Tendons to all the Vertebraes, according to the Opinion of Ga●en. The Semi-Spinatus Muscle, takes a b T. 14. f. 3. D D. f. 4. A A. □ sinewy beginning, from all the Spines of Semispinatu●. the O● Sacrum, and ends into the transverse Apophyses of the Loins and whole back. The Musculus Sacer▪ with a c T. 14. f. 4. B B. □ pointed Fleshy beginning grows out of the hinder Part of Os Sacrum and terminates into the Roots of the Spiny points of the Vertebraes of the Back, The Spina or Loins are laterally moved, when the Muscles on the contrary side do act by themselves, both the benders and extenders. It the Muscles which extend the Spina or Backbone, are opposite to the obliqne Muscles of the Belly descendent and the stiaight ones, which move the frame of Ossa Ilii, they must needs grow out of the upper Parts of the Spine, that they may be inserted into the Ossa Ilium and Os. Sacrum. And although they arise from the upper Parts of the Spina, they will nevertheless serve to erect the Spina; and they will be ever more Antagonists against the Muscles which bend the Spina, viz. The Quadratus▪ and the▪ Musculus Obliquus ascendens. For they receive Nerves, as well in their upper as middle Parts. Chap 33▪ Muscles of the Belly: BEcause those ᵃ ten Muscles, which are found displayed upon the Belly, were accuratly described, At the beginning of the first Book, I will not here repeat them, because they are excepted from this Discourse. Chap. 34. Of the Motion of the Ilium Bones and Os Sacrum Joined together. THe frame of the Ilian Bones and Os Sacrum Joined together, is moved backward By what Muscles its moved forwards. and forward in the Genial Embracements tending to Procreation. The said Conjunction of bones is moved forwards by the ᵇ Right and Obliqne ● descending Muscles of the Belly, the Chest resting and the Thighs remaining unmoved, unless they follow the Motion of the Ilium Bones. It is moved backwards by the Musculus a T. 2. f. 8. A B. f. 9 A B D. □ Sacer and the b T. 2. f. 9 B C. □ Semispinatus, which By what moved backwards arise from the upper Parts of the Back: which I have demonstrated by many reasons and experiments in my Anthropographia. Chap, 35. Muscles of the Testicles. THey are Proper or Common. The Proper is that which is peculiar to each Testicle called c T. 2. f. 8. A. etc. □ Cremaster. It Proper Muscle of the Stones. Cremaster. grows out of the lower a T. 14. f. 4. B B. □ fore Part of the spin of Os Ilium: or rather it is the fag-end of the Obliqne ascending Muscle, bordering upon the Os Pubis, whose Flesh is redder, thinner and as it were severed from the Flesh of the said obliqne ascendent Muscle. ●●●●●olds ext●●nsecally the production of the Peritonaeum, and is carried together with the Seminary Vessels unto the Testicle. It draws the Testicle upwards and retains it suspended in that Posture. The Common Muscle is the Membrane of the Scrotum or Cod termed d T. 6. f. 2. B B. □ Dartos, The Common●●a tos. being a Continuation of the Fleshy Membrane. And this Musculous Membrane suspend both the Testicles. Women have likewise their Cremaster, shorter than that of Men, Scituate upon the production of the Peritonaeum. Chap, 36, The Bladders Muscle. LEst the Urinal collected in the Bladder should run out of itself against one's will; Office of the Sphincter of the Bladder. their is a e T. 6. f. 5. F F. □ round fleshy Muscle which being rolled back over the Prostatae, does shut the bladders Neck; and being made broad it expels the Urinal; and by wring or squeezing the Prostatas or Auxiliary Testicles, it squirts out the Seed in Venereal Conflicts. Now the Neck of the Bladder being Fleshy, performs the office of an internal Sphincter Muscle, and exactly closes the Bladder. ᵇ T. 14. f. 3. D D. f. 4. A A. □ ᶜ T. 6. f. 2. D D. □ Chap. 37. Muscles of the Yard. THe Yard has four Muscles, two on each side. Musculus a T. 6. f. 1. a a. f. 5▪ H H. □ Erector is bred out of the innermore bunching out of the Ischium, Yards Erectors and being knit unto the Ligament of the Yard, it reaches sidewaies as far as the middle of the Body thereof. The Accelerator takes his Ri●e not only from the Accelerators. sphincter of the Anus or Fundament, but also from the internal Tuberosity of the Ischium or Hucklebone, and being with his Mate spread out under the Vertebra or Piss-pipe, it is drawn out as far as to the middle of the Yard. It hastens the squirting out of the Seed, and forces out the drops of Urinal, in the conclusion of Pissing. And because it is in its Original twofold, it may therefore be accounted a double Muscle; but because I attribute that portion which arises from the Tuberosity of the Hucklebone, unto the Fundament▪ and call it Levator externus▪ Any [the external Arse-heaver] therefore the true Accelerator, according to mine, and other Anatomists Opinion, must arise only from the external Sphincter of the Fundament. Chap. 38. Muscles of the Clitoris. THe Clitoris in Women represents the Man's Yard, and therefore is furnished with Muscles alike, though not serving for the same of Office. Of which I have treated in my first▪ Book, in the Chapter which describes the Womb▪ ᵇ T. 6. f. 1. b b. f. ●. I I. □ Chap. 39 Muscles of the Fundament. I Have descried the Muscles of the Fundament very sufficiently in the 33. Chap. of my second Book. Chap. 40. Muscles of the Thigh. THe Thigh is extended, bended, drawn to a man, and from a Man and oblickly Extenders of the Thigh. wheeled about. It is extended when we stand, our Thigh being Perpendicular to our Hucklebone, which posture is caused by three Muscles which constitute the Buttocks, and are therefore by Authors termed Musculi Gloutii; that is the Buttock Muscles. Maximus and ex●imu● a T. 23. f. 2. B. f. 3. A. □ Gloutius, the greatest and outmost buttock Muscle▪ is Gloutius m●●imus. ●●ed out of the spines of Os Sacrum and more than half of the Ilium Rib; and is inserted▪ four Fingers ●●neath the great Trochanter, where a certain Eminence of the ●one is discerned. Secundus and medius▪ Gloutius, the second and middle buttock▪ Muscle, springs Medius out of the external Pa●● of the Os Ilium, and is inserted into the great and external Trochanter. Tertius and intimus c T. 23. f. 4. B. □ Gloutius, the third and innermost buttock Muscle, arising Minimus from the outward and lower side of Os Ilium, is implanted into the Top of the great Trochanter. The Thigh is bended by three Muscles. Benders. Psoas. Primus Lumbaris, The first Loin Muscle called d T. 10. f. 1. O O. T. 23. f. 1. A. □ Psoas, spread over the bodies of the Lumbal Vertebraes, in the Cavity of the belly; is bred out of the transverse Apophyses of the lower Vertebraes of the back, and being carried along upon the inner surface of Os Ilium, it is inserted into the small Trochanter. I have in Men, oftimes found a little Muscle spread over this, which in its original, being of the length and thickness of a Man's little Finger and fleshy, with a small and flat Tendon is carried above the Psoas, and when it is come to the Illiac, it loses itself into a broad and very strong Aponeurosis, which firmly combiness the Iliac and Psoas Muscles. And therefore I conceive it is added, in strong Men, that it might straight embrace the Psoas and hold it firmly in its seat. It is called Pa●vu● Psoas, and is more rarely found in Women than in Men: Howbeit in the year 1631. In a very stout Virago or kind of Moll Cutpurse, it was my hap to see one of these Muscles, she having been hanged for Robberies and Murders by her committed. ᵇ T. 23. f. 3. B. f. 4. C. □ Iliacus Musculus, the Iliac Muscle, takes its rise out of the a T. 23. f. ●. B. □ internal Cavity of Iliacus. Os Ilium, and being by its Tendon Joined with the lumbal Muscle, it is terminated between the great and little Trochanter, b T. 23. f. 1. C. below b. □ Pectineus Musculus, The Comb Muscle shoots out of the upper Part of Os Pectineus. Pubis, and is inserted a little below the Neck of the Thigh, on the foreside. The Thigh is drawn to the inside by the Musculus Triceps or c T. 23. f. 1. and 2. C C. □ three headed Drawer to. Muscle, which has three originals and as many distinct Insertions. One of its Heads arises from the upper▪ Part of the share bones or Ossa Pubis; the Triceps. other arises from the middle of the said bones, and the third from the lowest Part of the said bones▪ and they are inserted into the hinder line of the Thigh, being disposed by course. The Action of this Muscle is strong and Praevalent, drawing the Thighs inward, when we Climb Trees, ascend to the Main mast and Ride on Horseback. This treble headed Muscle is the first that receives the Excrementitious Humours of the body which fall into Legs, because of the Vessels which pass that way. The Thigh is drawn to the outside by very small Muscles, because the drawing of With drawrs. the Thigh outwards is not very necessary. The Musculi Quadrigemimi, are four little Muscles, interchangeably placed upon The Quadrigeminals. the Articulation of the Thigh in the hinder▪ Part thereof. The first and a T. 23. f. 3. C. f. 4. D. □ uppermost of the Quadrigemini being longer than the rest and as First it were p●ar fashioned, is by others termed Iliacus externus. It arises from the lower and external Part of Os Sacrum. The b T. 23. f. 3. b. f. 4. G. □ second of the Quadrigemini, arises from the Tuberosity or bunchy▪ Part Second of the Hucklebone. The third which is contiguous unto the former, arises from the same Part, and Third these three are inserted into the Cavity of the great Trochanter. These three of the Quadrigeminal Muscles, being included in the Cavity of the great Trochanter, do serve likewise to thrust downwards or lengthen out the Thigh When it is stretched a little beyond its natural length, which▪ you may observe in a Man that l●●s upon his Back, with his body and Leg stretched out. They perform this Action in the same manner as the Pterygoideus internus, interposed between the two Jaws, does drive the lower Jaw forwards. The Quartus Quadrigeminorum c T. 23. f. 3. D. f. 4. E. □ Quadratus, is broader and more fleshy than The Fourth. the other three, being distant from the third of the Quadrigemini two Fingers breadths; and is propagated from the inner Part of the Procuberance of the Hucklebone, and fastened into the external Part of the great Trochanter. The Thigh is obliquely wheeled about by the two Obturators, the external and Obliqne wheelers. Obturator Internus. the internal. The Internal d T. 23. f. 3. E. and 4. F. □ grows out of the inner Circumference of that hole which is in the Os Pubis or share bone; and being carried along through that hollowness which is between the Knob of the Hucklebone and its Acetabulum or Socket, it is by a tripartite Tendon inserted into the Cavity of the great Trochanter. It's Tendon is folded up and enclosed by the second and third Quadrigeminal Muscles, which resemble a purse. It's action is to direct the external wheeling motion of the Thights. The Externus ᵃ Obturator, taking its revolution from the external Circumference Obturator externus. of that hole, which is in the share, and being Circumducted through the Neck of the Thigh as through a pulley, it is carried unto the Cavity of the great Trochanter under the fourth Quadrigeminal Muscle. It governs the internal wheeling motion of the Thigh. When the Quadrigeminal Muscles and the Obturatores, are soaked in Wheyish Humours, they cause most bitter pains, which sergeant the true Sciatica, and lengthen the Thigh, as if it were half out of Joint, which is diligently to be noted and distinguished. Chap. 41. Muscles of the Leg. THe Leg is Joined with the Thigh, by that kind of Articulation which is called The Motion of the Leg. Gynglymus, and therefore it is only moved by bending and extending; but because the Articulation is lose, it suffers a man to draw his Leg sidewaies: for which Cause Laurentius and other latter Anatomists, will have the Leg to be turned inwards and outwards by certain Muscles ordained to that end. It is drawn inwards or towards the other Leg, by the Sutorius, a very long Muscle. It is drawn outwards or from the other Leg, by a Membranous Muscle, or broad sw●th. I leave it free for any Man thus to divided the Muscles, which I distinguish into benders and extenders. The Leg is bend by four hinder Muscles. The Leg benders. The Semi. Nervosus. The Semimembranosus. The first of those four, is called b T. 23. f. 3. G G. □ Seminervosus, the Half sinnew Muscle. It arises from the Tuberosity or bunching Part of the Huckle, and ends in the hinder and inner Part of the Leg. The other is termed c T. 23. f. 3. H H. □ Semimembranosus Musculus, the Half Membranary Muscle, which proceeds from the same bunching▪ Part of the Hip or Hucklebone, with a beginning which is Nervous and Membranous; and with a larger Tendon, is inserted into the inner and hinder Part of the Leg. ᵃ T. 23. f. 4. e. □ The Muscle a T. 23. f. 3. III. □ Biceps springs from the foresaid Tuberosity of the Hip or Hucklebone, The Biceps and being carried along the outward Part of the Thigh, about the middle thereof it becomes fleshy, which fleshyness I have seen separated as a second Muscle, as far as the Head. It is by one only Tendon inserted, into the ourward Part of the Leg. The fourth being commonly termed Posticus b T. 23. f. 3. F F. □ Gracilis, arises from that ●…ne The Gracilis. which shows where the Hipbone and the Share-bone grow together, and descending along the Inside of the Thigh, it is inserted into the inner Part of the Leg. The Muscle called c T. 23. f. 4. H. □ Poplitaeus, is to be reckoned among the ●●●ders, it lies lurking The Popliteus. in the Cavity of the Ham, above the Head of the Soleum. It arises out of the external swelling or bunching out of the Thigh, and is Obliquely inserted into the hinder and upper Part of the Leg, which it closely embraces. The Leg is extended by six Muscles. The first we meet with 〈◊〉 the d T. 23. f. 2. F F. □ Membranosus, which is drawn out of the upper spin or sharp point of the I●ian bone and Extenders. The Membranosus. The Sutorius carried into the fore part of the Leg, or rather of the Thigh, and g●●ts in the Muscles of the Leg itself, like a ᵉ Membranous ●wath, all save the Musculus sutorius. This Muscle taking its rise from the upper ᶠ Spine and fore Rib of the Ilium, and sliding down Obliquely by the inner Parts of the Thigh, ends into the inside of the Leg, which it is said to bring to and place over the other, as Tailors are wont to do when they would sit Crosslegged. The Rectus ᵍ Gracilis, Springing out of the lower Spine of Os Ilium, and being R●ctus ●●acilis. carried right out all along the Thigh, ends on the fore Part of the Leg, beneath the Epigonatis. The two Muscles called Vasti do on either side border upon the Rectus Gracilis; Vastus externus. the one of which being h T. 23. f. 1. G G. □ External, arises out of the Root of the great Trochanter, and is inserted into the Leg, a little below the Patella, on the outside. The other which is a T. 23. f. ●. H H. □ internal, arises from the Root of the small Trochanter, and Vastus internus falls into the inside of the Leg, a little below the Patella. The Muscle termed b T. 23. f. 1. etc. □ Crureus placed under the two Musculi Vasti, springs out of Crureus. the fore bone of the Thigh, between the two Trochan●ers, and cleaving to the whole body of the Thigh, it produces its Tendon over the Epigonatis, unto the fore part of the Leg. These five Muscles, the Re●tus, the Gracilis, Duo Vasti and the Crural Muscle, being united all together about the Knee, the produce one only Tendon, very broad and strong, wherewith the Patella is enfolded. Chap. 42. Muscles of the Feet. AS the Hand is divided into three Parts, so is the Foot into the Tarsus, Metatarsus Motion of the Foot. and Phalanx or Row of Toes. And as in the H●nd, the Wrist is moved while the Parts after the Wrist remain unmoved: so in the Foot, the Tarsus is moved, the Metatarsus remaining unmoved. And therefore the Tarsus is bowed, when it is moved forward, and it is extended, when it is forced backwards. In the mean while you shall observe that the bowings of the Members in the whole Leg and Foot are contrary; in the hand they are like one another, for the conveniency of taking up of any thing; in the Leg and Foot they are contrary, to make us stand firm, and for the performance of different actions. For the flexion or bowing of the Thigh is performed forwards, the bowing of the Leg is performed backwards▪ the bowing of the Foot is done forward, the bowing of the Toes of the Foot, backwards. The Foot is bowed by two Muscles seated before, which are called Tibiaeus and Foot-benders. Peronaeus. The Tibiaeus c T. 23. f. 1. K. □ anticus, taking its rise from the upper Epiphysis of the Leg near Tibiaeus anticus. the Fibula, and cleaving to the Tibia all along, about the middle of the bone, it degenerates into a Tendon, which beneath the d T. 23. f. 1. ζ. □ Ring-fashioned Ligament of the Foot, is ●●it into two Tendons, the one of which is inserted into the O● primum innominatum or first nameless bone, and the other is lengthened out as far as to the Bone of the Metatarsus which is placed unde● the Great Toe. The Peronae●● a T. 23. f. 1. L L. □ Ant●●●● is in it● Original soyned to the Peronaeus Posticus, although Per●●●us anticus. though both ●●● Tendons are drawn through the cloven of the external Ankle, yet in their ●nd and inse●●ion they are separated. The Anticus has its rise from the middle and external part of the Perone, and being led through the cloven of Malleolus externus, it is inserted on the foreside into the bone of the Metatarsus, which susteines the little Toe. The Foot is extended by the after Muscles. The first and outmost are the Extenders. b T. 23. f. 1. d d. f. 2. D D. f. 3. K K. □ Gemell● or twins, so called because they are equal ●n Bulk, Strength and Action. They are al●o termed Gastrocnemij, because they make the Belly or swelling of the Calf o● the Leg: and the one of them is internal, placed in the inner side of the Ti●i● or shank, the other is external, and possesses the outside thereof. The internal Twin-Muscle, arises from the inner knob of the Thigh; the external Gemellus internus. externus. Twin-Muscle arises from the external knob of the said Thigh. They are severed in the● beginning, but grow together at l●st into one Belly, which by a strong Tendon is lengthened out unto the hinder part of the Heel. Vesalius was the first that observed that. To several beginnings of every one of them, there are several little ᶜ T. 23. f. 3. o o. □ Bones placed like unto Se●amine Seeds or like Tares or Ve●ches, to the end that with their smooth and slippery surface, being placed between the Muscles and the Bones, they may hinder the Muscles from being hurt, when the leg is turned this way or that way. Plantaris. Plantaris d T. 23. f. 3. M. □ Musculus, which lu●ks between the Twins and the Soleus', arises from the external knob of the thigh, being fleshy on the upper part, and quickly ending into a very ●mal and longish tendon, it is drawn under the Heel, by the inner Ankle-bone, and diffused into the sole of the Foot. It performs the same office in the Foot as in the hand; that the Foot might answer to the hand, and that whilst the Foot is hollowed, the Skin, by the Tendons lying under, might be firmly fastened. The a T. 23. f. 3. f. 3. L L. □ Soleus', a broad and thick Muscle, takes its original from the upper part of Soleus'. the Leg, or from the upper and hinder closure of the Tibia and Perone; and is inserted by a tendon mixed with the Gemelli or Twins, into the hinder part of the Heel. Under the Muscle Soleus' remarkable vessels have their passage, both Veins, and Arteries and Nerves: whence it comes to pass that the pains of the Calf of the Leg are deep and lasting. Of the Twins and the Soleus' mingled together in their inferior parts, is made that The Chorda of Hypocrates. same common Tendon, which is so exceeding thick and strong, which Hypocrates terms the Cho●da m●gna, the Hurts, Bruises and wounds whereof, do cause death. The foot is extended by two hinder Muscles, the Tibiaeus posticus and the Peronaeus Tibiaeus posticus. posticus. The Tibiaeus posticus does arise from the upper part of the Tibia, and being a●●●xed to the whole body thereof, through the cloven of the inner Ankle bone, it produces two Tendons, the one of which ends at the Scaphoidean Bone, and the other is carried as far as to the primum Os innominatum. The Peronaeus c f. 23. f. 2. F F. □ Posticus, does arise from the upper and hinder part of the Peronaeus posticus. Perone, And being carried with the Peronaeus anticus through the cloven of the external ankle bone into the bone of the Metatarsus, which sustains the great toe, under the sole of the Foot, it transmits' its broad, hard and gristly kind of Tendon, under the Tendinous head, of that Mass of flesh, which does produce its internal inter-osseans. The Muscles Peronaeus anticus and Posticus, as they are distinct in their original, so are they also distinct in their insertion, although they are drawn through the pulley of the external ankle: but the Tendon of the other Peronaeus Flexor, is inserted into the outside of the Os metatarsi which susteines the little Finger. The Tendon of the other Peronaean Muscle, whose office is to extend the part, being situate behind, is carried further and more inwardly under the M●scle called Pediaeus. These two tendons are separated one from another, b●●ng enclosed in two distinct sheaths or scabbards, of a nerve-gristly substance. ᵇ f. 2. E E. □ Chap. 43. Muscles of the toes. THe Toes have their proper Muscles, fitted to procure their bending, extending, The Annular Ligament. and lateral motion from one side to another: also their tendons are comprehended within a Ring-fashioned or circular and transverse a T. 23. f. 1. g. □ ligament, which does encompass them beneath the Ankles, just as we see in the Wrist. They are extended by the Musculu● longus and Brevis. Toe-stretchers. cnimodactylius The longus, or b T. 23. f. 1. M M. □ long-Toe-stretcher called in Greek Cnimodactylius, takes its rise from the fore and inner side of the Tibia, there where it is joined to the Fibula, lurking close under the Tibieus anticus, and goes downright all along the Fibula, till having passed the Ring-fashioned ligament, it ends into the three Articulations of the c T. 23. f. 1. f f. □ four Toes that it might at once and by one motion, move the three ●oyntings of the four Toes aforesaid. Brevis Digitum tensor, or the d T. 23. f. 2. G. □ short Toe-stretcher, or Pediaean Muscle, springs Pedi●us. out of the Heel and the external and upper part of the neighbouring Astragalus or bone so called, and being spread under the Superior, it is with its tendons inserted into all the Joints of the Articulation. The Tendons of these Muscles, as well the long as short, do pass crosswise one over another, above the Metatarsus. The Toes are bowed by two Muscles the Brevis and Longus, which answer to The Toe-benders. Perodactyleus. these Muscles of the hand which are called Profundus and Sublimis. Longus e T. 23. f. 4. II. f. 6. C. □ Digitum flexor the Long Toe-stretcher called also Pero-dactyleus, arises out of the hinder and upper part of the Perone or Fibula, and being carried along under the inner ankle, through a peculiar cavety of the Heel, it is divided into four tendons, which are drawn through the slits of the short Toe-bending Tendon (as we see likewise in the Hand) and then inserted into the third Joint of four Toes. Brevis a T. 23. f. 4. ●. f. 6. A. □ Digitum flexor, or the Pediaeus internus, or short Toe-Bender, springs Pediaeus internus. from the inner and net her part of the Heel, and being parted into four▪ it is terminated into the second Articulation of the Toes. The Tendons of this Muscle have holes bored in them for the Long Toe-benders Tendon to pass through. Moreover, the Toes are drawn sidewaies by the Interossean Muscles. They are The obliqne movers. eight in number, four internal and as many external, which are otherwise disposed in the foot than they are in the hand. The b T. 23 f 2. a a a a. □ external arise from the spaces of the Bones of Metatarsus: the internal, The Interosseans. being situate in the c T. 23. f. 5. d d d d. f. 6. f f f f. □ Hollow of the foot, and knit unto the bones, and seem to take their original from that lump of d T. 23. f. 6. D D. □ Flesh, which possesses and fills up that same Cavity of the Bones of the Metatarsus: but the membrane being taken away, they are seen to arise from one nervous pointed or acuminated Original, fixed on the inside near the Heel, and divided into four tendons, and to end into the second Articulation, whereunto the worme-fashiond or lumbrical Muscles do cleave. And therefore the external interossean Muscles, do fill up the empty spaces of the Bones of Metatarsus. The Lumbrical or wo●●-fashion'd e T. 23. f. 6. e e e e. □ Muscles, do not arise from the tendons of the long Toe-bender, as in the Hand, but from a fle●●y lump, which lies hid underneath the short Toe-bender; and that has its original from the Heel. Chap. 44. Muscles of the Great Toe. THe great Toe f T. 23. f. 4. K. f. 6. B. □ Bender, being situate near the long Toe stretcher, and of a The great toebender. fleshy substance, arises out of the upper Part of the fibula, where it is joined with the Tibia, and passing along under the inner Ankle bone and the Sole of the Foot, it is inserted into the first bone of the Great Toe: and before it comes unto the second bone a little Sesamoidean Bone is preposed; and the Tendon for security's sake is intercepted, with two greater Sesamoidean Bones. Sometimes under the sole of the Foot it is divided into two Tendons, the one of which is transmitted to the great Toe, the other to the second of the little Toes; and then the great Toe-bender is divided only into three. Extensor a T. 23. f. ●. N. □ Pollicis the great Toe-stretcher, arises from the external side of the The Stretcher. Tibia, where it is separate from the Fibula and creeping along the surface of the Foot, it is inserted into the whole great Toe, in its upper side. The other ends into the Bone of Metatarsus, which is spread beneath the great Toe. The great Toe and the little Toe, have two notable Muscles, externally situate, The Abductor, which draw these Toes outwards from the rest▪ so that one of them, being externally fastened unto the bone of the Metata●sus, which is placed under the great Toe, is termed Abductor b T. 23. f. 3. O. f. 5. b b □ Policis, the Drawer aside of the great Toe. The other being externally spread upon the first ●one of Metatarsus, may be The little Toes Abductor. called Abductor c T. 23. f. 3. P. f. 5 c. □ minimi digiti, the drawer aside of the little Finger. It answers to the T●enar and Hypo●henar of the Hand. Furthermore the Great Toe has in the sole of the Foot another Transverse The great t●●● drawer ●●. d T. 23. f. 5. a. □ Muscle, like the Antithenar, which arising out of the Ligament of that Bone of the Metatarsus which is placed under the least or next Toe, and going obliquely upon the other Bones, it ends with a strong Tendon into the first Joint of the great Toe, beneath the same. This Muscle is opposed to to the Abductor, that it might draw the great Toe back again. The flesh being taken away, we find a threefold or fourfold Membrane, I suppose it is that M●ss of flesh which fills the cavity of the sole of the foot. In the lowest p●●t of the Foot which is termed Vestigium, there is contained a The Massa Ca●●●●. a T. 23. f. 6. D D. □ Lump of flesh which ●ils up the Cavity and empty space of the first Joints: from whence writers say Tendons are drawn to the several Toes. I coneive the use of this flesh is rather to strengthen the Toes and to combine their It's Use. first Articulations, than to move the same, also like a soft Cushion, it is spread under the Tendons of other Muscles. Chap. 45. An Introduction to the Art of Muscular-Dissection, showing an Accurate Method to cut up the Muscles of the whole Body. Whosoever has perfectly learned the History of the Muscles, will easily understand The Method the Art of their Dissection, and be able of himself without any help, to administer this part of Anatomcal section, which many account the hardest of all, provided he diligently observe the Method which I here deliver. And therefore having finished our Myologic or History of Muscles, Myotome or the Art of their Dissection, will seasonably follow. The Frontal Muscle. The Skin of the forehead, being circulary cut off above the Eyebrows and drawn The frontal Muscle. away as far as to the Coronal Suture, or to the beginning of the Hairs, you meet with the two frontal Muscles, which are most exactly to be separated from the frontal or forehead bone which lies beneath, beginning from above and cutting all away into the very Eyebrows. They are in the middle of the Forehead distinct one from another. ᵇ T. 15. f. 1. E. □ The Orbicular Muscle of the Eyelids. The Skin of the Eyebrows and of the whole face being industriously dissected, The Orbicularis The Ciliaris. there appears a double a T. 15. f. 1. F F. □ orbicular Muscle, which does circularly cover the socket of the Eye a Fingers-breadth on all sides, and is spread under each Eye▪ lid. Also, you shall ●ind the Musculus Ciliaris, s●ierched out orbicularly under the Tarsus. Muscles of the Lips. After wards, the whole Face being made bare and the Skin flayed off, a little below Zeugomaticus. the Eye-hole, we meet with a little lean longish Muscle, placed athwart and called c T. 15. f. 1. L. □ Zygomaticus. For it is produced from the Zygoma unto the opening of the Lips. This Muscle must be separated from the Fat; for much Fat (which is also crowded into the Muscles) does cover the whole face, which you shall pluck away with your nails or with a pair of pinsers, or with a very sharp penknife, that the Musculous flesh may more evidently be distinguished. From the Zygoma towards the Lips, you shall search for five Muscles besides Lip-heavers. the Zygomatick muscle: and you shall find two above the upper Lip; each of which is exactly to be separated from the other. That Muscle which is nearest the Zygoma, belongs unto the nether Lip, which is lifted up thereby. The other being Buccinator. very near to the e T. 15. f. 1. H. □ Nostril's, is reckoned to belong to the upper Lip. The lateral f T. 15. f. 1. O. □ Muscle broad and Fleshy which opens and forms the Cheeks, and therefore is called Bucco, must not be stirred out of its place. In the nether jaw, as far as to the middle of the lower Lip, you shall search for Lip depressers. two▪ Muscles▪ having first taken away the skin. ᵇ T▪ ●9. f. 1. C C. □ ᵈ T. 15. f. 1. K. □ That a T. 15. f▪ 1. n. □ which is nearest the Chin, does depress the lower Lip. That which lies b T. 15. f 1. M. □ beyond next the Masseter or fastened to the Corner of the mouth, draws the up●er Lip downwards. These two Muscles, though most exactly united, are yet distinguished one from another by the various posture of their fibres; namely, in as much as the Fibres of the former Muscle, do ●eeme to go upwards from the Chin to the 〈◊〉▪ 〈◊〉 do it were constitute a pyramidal Muscle, whose Basis rests beneath and its top reaches to the Lip: the Fibres of the other Muscles do ascend unto the Meeting of the Lips. Muscles of the Nose. The Skin of the Nose being curiously taken away, two Muscles discover themselves Nose-●is●ers▪ being ●●st●ned unto the bones and laps of the Nostril's, which arising▪ out of c T. 15. f 1. G. □ the 〈◊〉 between the Eyebrows, are carried into the laps of the Nostrils. Other Anatomists ad (but only in such as have great Noses) two little▪ d T. 15. f 1. I. □ Muscles Nostril widners. spread athwart upon the ends of the Nose laps, which widen the Nostrils, as the former do lift them up. Other Anatomists ad (but only in such as have great Noses) two little d f. 3. and 4. F. □ Muscles Nostril widners spread athwart up in the Ends of the Nose-Laps, which widen the Nostrils, as the former do lift them up. In the Interim you shall observe, that all these Muscles are so strictly conjoined, that one of the Lips, or the Nose cannot be moved without the motion of the Neighbouring parts. The internal Muscles of the Nostrils are seldom found, and only in such as have ●olly ●oating Noses. The Temporal Muscle. That same thick and fibrous Flesh which is situate between the smaller Corner Temporalis. of the Eye and the Ear, is called the e T. 15. f. 1. P P. f. 2. A A. □ Temporal Muscle; whose tendon being drawn along under the Zygoma, is f T. 15. f. 2. a a. □ terminated into the Top of the lower Jaw. The Masseter Muscle. From the lower part of the Zygoma, arises the Muscle a T. 15. f. 1. S. f. 2. B B. □ Masseter, which makes Masseter up the fleshy sides of the Face. It is inserted into the Corner of the Lower Jaw; and ●● may be divided into two, the internal and external fibres being cro●s-waies intersected. The Parotick Kernels. Above the Joint of the lower Jaw, behind the Ears, there are scattered certain Constitution of the Parotis. Kernels, of which one great kernel is made, called Parotis. this cannot be seen unless the broad Muscle, which reaches unto the Ear, betorn away. This Kernel being plucked out, you may proceed to the Muscles of the Ears. The Muscles of the Ears. Although the Ears in Mankind remain firm and immovable, yet have they their b T. 15. f. 1. Q. R. T. 20. f. 1. H I. etc. □ proper muscle placed behind them. The first is a very little one, divided into two or three fleshy fibres, very friendly imbraceing the ligament of the Earth. you must search for it at the root of the Ear. The other Muscles of the Ear, are only portions of the frontal muscle, the br●ad Muscle, and the Hinder-Head Muscle; all which are bred out of the fleshy pannicle. The Muscles of the Eye. Within the Eye-hole are contained seven Muscles, such as are the Attollens Palpebram The Eye-lidli●●er the Eyelid li●●er, Four strait ones and two obliqne. Six of these arise out of the deepeest part of the Eie-ho●e; You shall find two above the globe of the Eye, of which the one being first in situation, Four right muscles of the Eye. is the a T. 19 f. 1. A A. □ Lifter-up of the upper Eyelid; and the other is called Attollent b f, 3. 4. 5. A. □ Oculi the Eye-Lifter. You shall search for three other c f. 3. 4. 5. B. C. D. □ straight Muscles, every one ●● its sitvation suitable to the action which it is to perform. ●●● you shall diligently observe the six● ᵈ large obliqne Muscle, which at the Obliq●●s ma●●● great corner of the Eye, or by the space between the Eyebrows above the Tearepipe or foramen lachrymale, runs back about the Cartilege or Gristle, as about a pulley, or as a bridle about the Annulary or ring-fashioned ligament. Be very careful that you do not break this Conjunction. For which cause you shall begin your Anatomical administration of the Eye▪ in that place, that is to say from the greater corner of the Eye, that you may preserve entire the e f. 3. and 4. G. □ Pul●y and the Insertion of the Tendon, which is enclosed within a small nervous Ligament which receives the Tendon itself, and accompanies the same unto the Eye. The flesh of that muscle is fixed to the boney sides of the Eye-Hole at the greate● corner. The septimus Musculus Obliquus f f. 3. and 4. E. □ minor, seventh Muscle, being the lesser of the Obliquus m●nor. crooked ones, is bred out of the inside of the lower part of the Eye-hole, near the Tear g f. 1. D. □ Kernel, and taking its revolution above the Muscle Humilis, but below the i f. E. 4. and D. □ Indigna●ori●s: it is terminated aloft upon the Globe of the Eye, by the Muscle called k f. 3. 4. etc. A. □ supe●bus. In he Anatomical Dissection of the Eye, this Muscle is to be looked a●ter in the second Place, and to be warily preserved, lest we tear it in pieces, while we seek for the rest. If with the point of your Penknife you pluck back the Coat of the E●e called Conjun●●va, you shall see that all the Muscles of the Eye, do Terminate by a fine Membranous Aponeurosis (conjunction or Contexture of many Nerves) into the Tunica Cornea. But they do not make a peculiar Membrane, as Columbus imagined, because the Aponeurosis (nerve contexture) of every Muscle, is distinct by itself. ʰ f. 3. 4. and B. □ But you cannot see or demonstrate the Muscles of the Eye, unless with a pair of Scissors you take away the fat placed about them; and a●ter that you have shown the Muscle which is the Up-lifter of the upper Eyelid, with the four straight Muscles and the little crooked one. That you may plainly discover the Obliquus Major or greater Crooked Muscle, with its revolution to the pulley, you shall take out the Eye, leaving that greater oblick Muscle, but cutting the rest away with your scissors. Muscles seated in the Neck. The Neck, which we make account reaches from the Basis of the Head unto the shoulderblades, comprehending seven spondyle or Vertebra's, has divers Muscles in its fore side; of which some appertain unto the Head, to the Os byoides, some to the Larynx, others to the tongue, and others to the Pharynx. And first we met with the Musculus a T. 15. f. 2. ●. T. 15. f. f. 1. g g. □ ●atus, the broad Muscle, which infolds the Latus. whole Neck. It ●●e●ds out of the Clavicul● and Brest-bone, and being sastened to the Bas●● of the nether Jaw, it is laterally carried forth unto the Ear; it must be very exactly separated from the Fleshy parts which lie beneath it, because it is an exce●●in● thin Muscle. The Musculus Latus being reveled or drawn back, in the fore part of the Neck under the Chin you shall find nine as ●ar as to the Larynx, and beneath the Larynx six. Towards the outward part of the Neck, there appears the thick and round Mastoid●us. Muscle Mastoid●us, which ascends slan●●●g from the Cl●vicula to the Mastoides. this Muscle 〈◊〉 to be separated at its original, that the others may be seen. But observe, by the way, that this Muscle is very often broken asunder by the Halter in such as have been hanged. V●der the Ma●●●ideus there lies looking the Coraco-●yo-ideus, a ●ean and longish Coracohy●ideus. Muscle, ubl ●k●y stretched out ●●om the Scapu●a, to the Os Hyoides, for the re●●action whereof, it is ordained. ᵇ T. 14. f. K K. f. 3. G. □ ᶜ T. 13. f. 13. F F. □ Then you shall see afterwards the Carotick Artery, and the internal Jugular Vein, and the Nerve of the sixth Conjugation, interposed between the said two Vessels. And then you shall pass unto the Muscles se●●● beneath the Laxy●x. The first which presents it ●●●● is the a T. 13. f. 13. D D. □ Sterno●yo-ideu●, which is bred out of the top of the sternum or ●●est▪ bone. Under this lies the c T. 15. f. 1. T T. f. 2. C C. □ Bronchius which belongs to the Larynx. Then you shall di●●ect and show the Muscles placed above the Larynx and under the Chin. The first is Digastricus maxillae internae, or the Twi-bellyed Muscle of the lower Digastricus. Jaw, which is small and nervie in the midst thereof, that it might be turned back about the Stylo-cerato-ides, and ends into the Chin, inwardly. There are two Glandules or kernels under the Chin near neighbours to this Muscle, which in rheumatic defluxions do often swell. They are termed by Vesalius, I know not why, Animellae. You must remove these Glandules that the rest of the Muscles may be discovered, also you must separate the Digastric or Twi-belly from the Chin. Under it lies the Muscle d T. 13. f. 14. E E □ Mylohyoideus with his Mate most straightly tied and Mylo●yoideus. united, but a line drawn from the no●ch of the Chin as far as to the middle of Os Hyoides within, will show you how to dissect. Under this Mylohyoideus are found two remarkable Nerves, Branches of the Seventh Pair, and the Muscle e T. 13 f. 13. B B. □ Geniohyoideus, rising from the inside of the Geniohyoideus. Chin and ending into the Os Hyodes, but so closely linked with his Ma●e, that it is distinguished no otherwise, than by a white line which is manifest within. Under these lurks the f T. 23. f. 13. C C. □ Genioglossus, by the outer side whereof lies the Meloglossus: Genioglossus Basiglossus. under which lies the g T. 13. f. 14. C C. □ Ceratoglossus, or rather Basiglossus. ᵇ T. 13. f. 5. C C. □ Afterward you shall come unto the hollow of the Neck under the lower corner Styloglossus. of the Jaw, where the Kernel was situate, which was formerly taken out. In this place is found the a T. 13. f. 14. D D. □ Styloglossus, which is inserted into the Ceratoglossus. Beneath there appear two Muscles, the one of which being lean and altogether fleshy, Stylo●yoideus is called Stylohyoideus, the other which is next unto it and touches it, being fleshy in its original at the Styloides Process, and small as a st●ing in its middle, is called b T. 15. f. 1. T T. □ Digastricus or Twi-belly. The first was observed in the Neck under the Chin. Under the Styloglossus, lies skulking the Stylopharingaeus. Under the corner Stylophary●gau●. P●erygoid●u● internus. of the lower. Jawbone, there is internally and immediately fastened the Pterygoideus d T. 15. f. 2. D D. □ internus; which takeing its rise from the Cavity of the P●erygoides, ends into the Corner of the lower jaw, on the inside. You must not remove it from its posture. From the Basis of Os Hyoides on the outside, presents itself the short Muscle Hyothyroideus. e T. 13. f. 8. B B. □ Hyothyroideus, which is inserted into the middle of the Thyroides. This whole Muscle, is commonly found broken by the Halter, in such as have been hanged. All these Muscles having been showed and taken away, there appears the f T. 3. f. 2. and 3. D D. Oesophagaeus, Oesophageu●. a broad and Membranous Muscle spread under the Oesophagus, which it embraces, and is externally terminated in the Wings or Skirts of the Car●ilago Tyroides, or Gristle so called. Muscles of the Larynx, Pharynx and Gargareon. The Oesophageus being showed and separated, take away the whole Larynx that you may see those little Muscles which are proper to it. You shall observe eight or ten of them, of which ●ome are ordained to move the Thyroides, and others pertain to the Arytaenoides. In the foremost and lowest part of the T●●roides, are placed the two Muscles Cricoarytenoid●●▪ called Cricoarytaenoidei antici. ᶜ T. 3. f. 2. and 3. C C. □ ᵍ T. 13. f. 8. D D. □ By the sides and lower Corners of Thyroides are situate the Muscles called a T. 13. f. 9 CC □ Cricoarytaenoidei ●aterales. In the hindermore and outward side of the Cricoides, you shall find the two Muscles called Cricoarytaenoidei. Having separated Thy 〈…〉 Ar●●eno●deus. the Tyroides, inwardly and towards one side▪ you shall see the Muscle Tyroarytaenoideus. To these is added the d f. 10. BB. □ circular Muscle insolding the whole Arytaenoides. But all these Muscles cannot be seen unless the Osephageus be taken away, and the e f. 16. & 17. □ Paristhmian Kernels plucked of, with which the Cartilege Thyroides or Gristle so called, is covered. The Epiglott●● f f. 7. 9 & 10. A. □ in Mankind, has no Muscle; in Brutes, two pretty ones are found, which you may see in the Larynx of an Ox. But in Mankind, we find only a sinewy Ligament, which keeps the Epiglottis continually erected, unless it be depressed with the weight of the Nutriment passing by. Afterwards you shall search for two other Muscles of the Pharynx, viz. the g T. 3. f. 2. & 3. BB. □ Sphenopharyngeus The Pharyngeis. and h f. 2. & 3. AA. □ Cephalopharyngeus. And then you may easily find the other two l T. 13. f. 15. BB. CC. □ Muscles of the Gargarreon, if you have learned their Originals and Insertions out of the History of the Muscles. The Muscles of the hinder-part of the Head and Neck. The Skin being removed, and the Fat of the hinder part of the Neck and of the whole back as far as Os sacrum being pluck away, you shall observe many Muscles; the first of which is called Trapezius or Scapularis, which with the Latissimus does Traptzius. cover the Neck, Back and Loins, at it were a cloak. Now the scapular k T. 14▪ f. ●. & 2. AA. f. 2. AA.▪ I. f. 1. CC. □ Muscle, which belongs unto the shoulder, its broad end reaching out as far as the Occiput or Hind-part of the Head, does compass all the Muscles of of the Neck, and must in the lower part thereof be separated from the ⁱ Latissimus Musculus, and wholly plucked up from the roots of the Spines or pointed Bones of the whole Backbone as far as to the hinder part of the Head, from which it must be separated, and only left sticking to the shoulderblade. ᵇ f. 10. CC. □ ᶜ f. 9 BB. □ This Muscle being taken away, the a T. 14. f. 1. B B. f. 2. ●. C. □ Rhomboides a Muscle of the Shoulderblade, Rhomboides. Servatus minor. must be cut from the spines of the Backbone. Under these lies the b f. 2. E. □ Seratus Supernus minor posticus, the upper and smaller Saw-Muscle situate behind. These Muscles being plucked away as far as to their Insertion, the Muscles of the The splenius. Head do show themselves. And the first that occurs is the c f. 2. H H □ Splenius. Near unto which is placed on the side of the Neck, Levator d f. 2. D D □ proprius Scapulae Levator scapulae. or the Muscle appropriated to pluck up the shoulder; whose orginal cannot be discovered, unless the Mastoideus having been showed, be taken out of the way. The Splenius Musculus, towards the Roots of the spines of the Neck, being taken away, there lies under it the e f. 2. I I. f. 3. E E. □ Complexus, near unto which at the side of the Complexus. Neck, lie certain portions of Musculus Spinatus, and the Sacrolumbus ariseing as high as the second Vertebra of the Neck. The Complexus being taken away, below the second Vertebra of the Neck, are Transversarius seen two Muscles which owe their service to the Neck. The first of these is f f 4. E E. □ Transversarius, inter-posed between the transverse and Spiny Apophyses of the Neck and Back. Under this is spread the g f. 4. D D. □ Semispinatus immediately covering the Bodies of the Semispinatus. Vertebrae. Upon the first and second Vertebras of the Neck, are seen eight small Muscles, Obliquus major. in each side four, of which the two Greater h f. 2. L. f. 4. G G. □ Obliqne Muscles, are carried from the transverse Apophysis of the second Vertebra, to the transverse one of the first. The two i f. 3. & ● I I □ Recti Majores, do begin at the Spina of the second Vertebra, and end into Rectus major. the Occiput. Under their upper ends are situate the two Musculi minores, or lesser Muscles, Rectus minor. the Straight and the Crooked, or the Rectus and Obliquus. The k f. 3. 1. f. 4. K K. □ Minor Rectus lies hid under the Major Rectus, which you shall unloose at the Head and pluck it a side, that the minor Rectus may appear. The Muscle called Obliquus a T. 14. f. 3. K. f. 4. H H. □ minor, is carried from the Hinderpart of the Head Obliquus minor. by the Minor Rectus, into the Transverse Apophysis of the first Vertebra: But you must free and lay bare of fat these Muscles, as well the straight as the Obliqne or crooked ones, that they may be the more apparently seen. And you shall begin your Section of the Muscles of the Head and Neek at the respective Spines or pointed Eminencies of the Backbone. When you have viewed the Muscles aforesaid you shall then make diligent search after one that lies closely sci●lking, above the Articulation of the inferior jaw and under the Zygoma; it is sit●●ate upon the external wing o● Lapet of the Pterygoides, and being altogether fleshy and round in a manner, it is ●…erted into that same sli● which is interposed between the Coronis and the knob of the Lower Jaw bone. It may be termed the Pterygoideus Externus to difference it from the Internus Pterygoideus externus. described before. Muscles of the Arme. These Muscles being administered, you may proceed to others. And first you The pectoral muscle. shall separate the c T. 10. f. 1. A. B. T. 22. f. 1. E. □ Pectoral Muscle either from the Brest-bone, or from its lowest part, by which it is joined to the Serratus Major. Mean while observe that the Serratus Minor or d T. 10. f. 1. E. □ Smaller Saw-Muscle, lies Serratus minor under the Pectoral or Ribs: lest you should tear the same, whiles you dissect the pectoral Muscle, which you must cut up, as far as to the middle of Clavicula. To which place being come, you shall separate it from the Deltoides or Delta-shaped Muscle, unto which it is fastened by a firm, but obscure band. Then you shall separate the Deltoides from its original. From thence you shall proceed to the Muscles which are spread out upon the shoulderblade. Infraspinatus. One lies upon the Spina or Backbone, three are seated beneath the same. That which is Next the Spina, is called e T. 22. f. 3. B B.▪ f. T. 22. f. 1. & 3. C. □ Infraspinatus. Next thereunto, is the Rotundus ᶠ Minor. ᵇ T. 15. f. 2. E E E E. □ Beneath that, you find the a T. 22. f. 1. and 3 D. □ Rotundus major, stretched out beneath the lower Rotundus major. Rotundus Immersus. Rib of the Omoplatae or shoulderblade. Under the scapula you shall find the Muscle called Immersus o● b T. 22. f. 1▪ B. □ Subscapularis: it fills the Hollow of the Shoulderblade. You shall leave the Original and Insertions of those Muscles untouched, only you must separate the sides of one Muscle from another, that they may be dis●…guished asunder, one from another. Muscles situate upon the Back and Loins. From the Omoplata or shoulderblade, descend unto the Back & loins▪ which pa●●s Latissimus▪ are covered with a Muscle called Amplissimus and Latissimus, or the c T. 14. f. 1. C C. D D. T. 22. f. 1. F. □ Large●● and broadest Muscle. This Muscle must be separated from the Os Sacrum and the external Rib of Os Ilium, as far as to the lower Angle or Coruer of the shoulderblade, and its insertion at the Os Brachij a little beneath the Neck. You must while you cut it up at the Spines of the Vertebrae, take heed of spoileing Serratus posticus▪ a Mu●●le which lies beneath it, and is termed Serratus ᵈ T. 14. f. 2. F. G. □ posticus infernus, the Hinder and lower Saw-Muscle, being a little one. Which after you have plucked off, from its original by the Os sacrum, as far as its Insertion, you shall show three other Muscles, stretched out from the Os sacrum, all along the Spina or Backbone. Of which the first being lateral and seated towards the Ribs, is called e T. 14. f. 1. L L. f. 3. B B. □ Sacrolumbus. Sacrolumbus. You shall begin your dissection of this Muscle at the upper part by the Root or the Ribs. A white line of fat will guide you from the top to the bottom, where you may separate it from the f T. 14. f. 2. O O. □ Musculus quadratus which belongs unto the Quadratus. Loins, but in its original it is exceeding hardly separated from the Spinatus. Note by the way that the Sacrolumbus does reach as far as the Hinder part of the Head, and that it does bestow a double Tendon upon every Rib. Now you shall separate the a T. 14. f. 3. D D. f. 4. A. □ Spinatus from Os sacrum, by easily and gingerly taking Spinatus. away the hard Aponeurosis which is spread out over the Sacer. Musculus sacer; which being taken off, if you lengthen out your section above, you will discern the difference between the Spinatus and the b T. 14. f. 4. B B. □ Sacer. Which when you have attained, thrusting your penknife straight in, as far as to the transverse Apophyses, you will easily separate those Muscles. The Spinatus, goes as high as the second Vertebra of the Neck, being in the midst between the Transversarius and the Complexus. The Spinatus being fastened to the transverse Apophyses, does also arise as far as the Neck. Muscles of the Breast. The Body being turned and laid with the face upwards, you shall sever the c T. 10. f. 1. C D. □ Serratus Serratus major Major laterally, and putting in your hand underneath, you shall find it stretched out under the Omoplata or shoulderblade as far as to the Clavicula. And then you shall see the d T. 10 f. 1. F. □ Muscle subclavius placed between the Clavis and the first Rib. Subclavius. Triangular is. You shall look for the Pectoral Muscle internal or the Triangular Muscle, in the inner part of the Breastbone plucked off. Afterwards you shall carefully and gingerly separate the e T. 10. f. 1. G G. □ external intercostal Muscle form the f T. 10. f. 1. H H. □ internal. The fibres Intercostalis. Cross ways interposed, will distinguish the one from the other. Muscles of the Cubit. When this is done, you shall return unto the Arm to make observation of the Muscles of the Cubit, which are seated in the Arme. Five Muscles do enfold the whole Arm, two in the fore parts, and three behind. You shall separate the two Benders of the Cubit, on the former and inner part. The first, which presents itself is the a T. 22. f 1. G. □ Biceps or Twi-headed Muscle, which Biceps. from its Original to its Insertion, may very easily be divided into two. But you must mark, that one Head of the Biceps, which grows out of the Coracoides, has a certain flesh adjoined to it, which creep along the side of the Pectoral Muscle, as far as to the middle of the Arm, unto which it is fastened most firmly; and this Portion of Flesh makes a Muscle, which is ordained to draw the Arm forwards, which from its original I call b T. 22. f 1. H. □ Coracoideum, the Coraco-idean Muscle. Coracoideum. I have observed the Biceps or Twi-Head in a very strong and brawny Man to be a Triceps or Tri-Head, being tightly separated into three parts, both in the Original and end thereof. The third Head sprang out of the tendon of the pectoral Muscle. Under the Biceps is placed the c T. 22 f 1. I I. f 2. B. □ Brachieus internus or Inner Arme-Muscle, Brachieus internus. whose original is at the end of the Muscle d T. 22. f. 1. A. □ Deltoides. This Muscle must be separated sidelongs from such as border upon it. In the outer part of the Arm three Muscles are placed, viz. the Longus, Brevis and Brachieus externus, and beneath the Elbow, the Angoneus is seated. The external are the e T. 22. f. 3. E. □ Longus and f T. 22. f. 3. F. □ Brevis which embrace that Mass of flesh Longus Brevis▪ which makes the Brachieus externus. In their original they g T. 22. f. 3. above E □ are distinguished by the tendon of Musculus ●a●●ss●●nus which comes between them: but at their ●…on they grow together by a firm and sinewy tendon. And therefore they are easily, in their upper-part, separated from the Brachieus externus; but in their lower parts Brachiaeusexternus. towards the Elbow, they are very hardly divided from the Brachieus. Now thus you shall proceed: you shall curiously take away the nervous tendon near the Elbow, and going upwards by little and little, you shall gently 〈…〉 on the one side and the other, also inwardly; diligently observeing the line which separates the long Muscle from the short, until you have separated the Brachieus externus; from the Muscles which are placed above it. Then you shall see it 〈…〉 from the Bone of the Arm, a little beneath the Neck thereof, with a fleshy substance. The Muscle Angoneus a T. 22. f. 3. a. f. 4. G. □ cannot be seen till you have pulled away the ●●newy membrane wherewith it is covered. It arises at the lower part of the Arm near the Elbow, lying hid between the Radius and the cubitus, and it is inserted into the Cubit. It is of the Length and thickness of a Man's forefinger. Muscles of the Radius, the Wrists, the Fingers, and the Thumb. In the Cubit you shall find the Muscles of the Radius, the wrists, the Fingers, and the Thumb. And in the Inside of the Cubit as far as to the wrists, you shall find Nine Muscles; on the outside you shall meet with seven. In the Inside you shall find them disposed in this Situation and order following. Longus-Supinator radij Wrist-benders. The first that presents itself is the Longus b T. 22. f. 4. E. □ Supinator Radij, which arises from the external apophysis of the Arm, and is stretched out upon the Radius. Next to that, is the Radieus c T. 22. f. 1. M. □ Flexor Carpi, after which follows the d T. 22. f. 1. K. □ Palmaris Remarkable by a very small and very long Tendon. By the Palmaris is seated the e T. 22. f 1. O. f 5. A. □ sublimis Digitorum Flexor, and next to it, so as to touch the same, you have the f T. 22. f 1. M. □ Cubiteus▪ Flexor Carpi. On the upper part of the Cubit, near the Joint, between the Longus Supinator and the Radieus flexor, the round Head of the Pronator g T. 22. f▪ 2. C. □ Radij shows itself; Pronatoacs-Radij. which is a very shor● Muscle, ariseing from the internal Apophysis of the Arm and obliquely carried to its insertion into the Radius. Under the Radieus, lies the Flexor h T. 22. f. 2. D. □ Pollicis. Beneath the Sublimis, lies the Profundus i T. 22. f. 1. P. f. 5. B. □ Flexor Digitorum, and in the lower Finger▪ bendexs part of the Cubit, by the wrists, lies the k T. 22. f. 2. D. □ Quadratus spread under the Tendons of the Muscles, being three Fingers broad, and immediatedly fastened Cross-w●●es, into the Radius and Cubitus. On the outside of the Cubitus above the Radius, the Extensor a T. 22. f. 3. H. □ Carpi is stretched Extenders of the wrist. out. Next to it, is the Altar b T. 22. f. 3. G. □ Extensor, which is carried obliquely to the Cubit, and being fastened thereunto, takes its course downwards. Between the Radius and the Middle-part of the Cubitus, the Extensor c T. 22. f. 3. K. □ D●g●torum is placed, which has a parcel of flesh▪ annexed unto it, spread under the Muscle of Of the fingers. the Extensor Pollicis. Under it, near the Cubit, lies the Extensor parvi Digiti, by the Wrist. Under the Tendons of the Extensor Digitorum you shall find two other fial Muscles, the one of which is the Extensor d T. 22. f 3. M. □ Policis, the other is the e T. 22. f. 3. ●. □ Indicator ordained to wait upon the Index or Forefinger, whose Tendon is united by certain Fibres with the Tendon of the Extensor Digitorum. The dvision of all these Muscles is easy on the upper part of the Cubit, both on the The best way to dissect these muscles. inside, and on the outside, and in the said upper part, you must begin your section. For if you should begin at the Tendons you would multiply Muscles, and make as many Muscles as you find Tendons. Thus therefore, near the Wrist, on the inner side of the Cubit, you shall distinguish the Tendons of the sublimis and the Prosundus, allotting ●ou● Tendons to each Muscle, and then take your course upwards. Radieus Externus extensor Carpi, is termed also Bicoruis twi-horned, by reason of its double Tendon. You may divide this Muscle into two, Muscles, distinct in their original and insertion, but you shall do better to make but one of it. In the Hand, you shall find Seventeen Muscles. Muscles of the Hand. In the Palm or Inside of the Hand there are Thirteen; viz. the four f T. 22. f. 5. C C C C. f. 2. f f f f. □ Lumbricales, the g T. 22. f. 1. S. f. 2. h. □ Hippothenar, the h T. 22. f. 4. K. □ Thenar, the i T. 22. f▪ ●. R. f. 2. G. □ Antithenar, the Abductor Indicis, the Massa Carnea, and the four Interossei a T. 22. f. 2. f f f f. □ interni. In the outside of the Hand you shall find only the four Interossei b f. 2. I I I I □ externi; with the Tendons of the Finger-stretchers, or of the Thumb-stretcher, and of the little Finger-stretcher. Muscles of the Abdomen or Belly. In your anatomical Administration of the Muscles of the Belly you shall thus proceed. The first you meet with, which must be plucked out, is the Musculus c T. ●. f. 2. H H. T. 2. f. 8. A. □ Obliquus descendens, which you shall see conjoined with the ᵉ serratus major, d T. 2. f. 8. a a. □ tooth Obliquus descendens. within tooth, as if the Edges of two S●wes were Put togeher, and Joined one within another, or as some parts of the Skull are coupled by the sutures. You shall know the difference of the Serratus and Obliquus one from another, by certain white lines and by the different posture of the Fibres. You shall separate the Musculus Obliquus from its entanglements with the Teeth of the serratus major, with help of a very small and sharp Penknife. The first tooth is interposed between the Musculus rectus and a portion of the Serratus: the second and the e T. 1. f. 2. F F. T. 10. f. 1. C. D. □ third are very hardly separated. The other four lie lurking under a portion of the Latissinus, not receiving the fleshy Productions of the Serratus. To bring them therefore into sight, it will be convenient to pluck up a portion of the Latissimus, as far as to the hinder spin of the Os Ilium; and th●n you shall take those four Teeth off from the Ribs, and in conclusion you shall cut off the Muscle, from the whole Rib which appertains to the Os Ilium. If you be industrious and can endure to take pains, you shall observe that the second, third, and fourth Tooth [or Finger] of this Muscle, do creep higher up under the Serratus, than vulgar Anatomists imagine, and that this Muscle does there attain a sinewy tendinous Head, which cleaves fast to the lower side of the Rib. A tendinous Head receives a portion of the intercostal nerve. For the nerve, when it is come thither, it is divided into two parts, the one of which does insinuate itself into the sinewy Head of the Tooth of the Muscle: the other sticking fast unto the Rib, does make the a T. 2. f. 9 d d d. □ nervous intersections of the Musculus Rectus. The Muscle being thus cut up, must be turned back upon one side of the Belly. You shall in the mean while observe, that the b T. 2. f. 8. b b. □ Aponeurosis of this Muscle, is bored through near the Os pubis; as the c T. 2. f. 8. B. □ Aponeurosis of the Obliquus ● ascendens, and of the Transversus are perforated, near the foremost and lowest Spine of the Os Ilium; and therefore the Holes of the two obliqne Muscles are not set just one against another, but at a distance one after another, that the Gut might not be so apt to fall down into the Groin or Cod. These Holes are broken in Ruptures into the Cod▪ or else dilated, which are diligently to be observed, in reduceing of the Gut when it is strangled in the Groin. And if at any time an Incision be made in the Groin, to reduce the Gut, that hole ought to be made wider by Incision, that the Gut may more easily return into the Belly. Above the Obliquus ascendens towards the Hypogastrium, you shall find a little Nerve which insinuates and winds itself into the Apophysis of the Peritonaeum that it may be carried to the Testicle, because it penetrates the transverse Muscle. It arises from the Nerves of the Loins, and is a portion of those nerves which are disseminated into the Obliqne Ascendent and the Transverse Muscles. When you have cut the f T. 2. f. 8 B. c c. □ Obliqne Ascendent from the Rib of Os Ilium to which it cleaves very fast, you shall bring it to the Loins, where it may be separated from the Transverse. Then you shall separate it from the Ribs themselves as it returns upwards. And it will be convenient to turn back this Muscle to the contrary side, after the manner of the primus Obliquus; and when you shall come unto the Musculus Rectus, you shall observe that this same Obliqne Muscle does embrace the Musculus Rectus or straight Muscle above the Navel, and below the Navel it transmies a single Tendon under the Rectus▪ which notwithstanding by the Edge of the Rectus does cleave so obstinately to the Aponeurosis of the Obliqne Descendent, that it is not possible by any Art to separate or pull them asunder, without rending them. ᵈ T. 2. f. 9 A. □ ᵉ T. 2. f. 8. d d. f. 9 bb. □ While you cut the Tendons of the obliqne Muscles from the share Bones, be very careful lest you mangle the Apophysis of the a T. 2. f. 9 E E. □ Peritonaeum which is carried through those Tendons, and tear the b T. 6. f. 2. D D. □ Muscle Cremaster placed upon the said Apophysis, and also lest you tear the Tendon of the Transverse Muscle lying beneath. You shall know the Muscle Cremaster by its colour and Consistence. For it is How the cremaster is known. a piece of red flesh, thin, sprinkled with straight fibres, severed some space from the flesh of the Obliqne Descendent, and according to the Length of the Groin, incloseing the Apophysis of the Peritonaeum. You shall find such a parcel of flesh in women, but shorter and narrower, placed upon the production of the Peritonaeum. Between the Obliqne ascendent and the transverse Muscle towards the Loins, many veins are seen, which are the offspring of the Lumbal and the Hypogastrick Veins. But you shall take precise notice of two remarkable nerves or sinews, which besides the little intercostal twigs inserted into the Teeth of the Obliqne Descendent Muscle, do arise out of the two inner Vertebrae of the Back, and creeping obliquely upon the bastard Ribs, are by the last Rib dispersed into the flesh of this Obliqne and the Transverse Muscles. You may conveniently separate the c T. 2. f. 8. ● e. f. 9 C. □ Musculus Rectus following the white Musculus rectus. Line, but not meddling with the ends thereof. If you shall diligently and leisurely pair off the extremities thereof opposite unto the Linea Candid● or white Line, you will find the intercostal Nerves which bore their way through the peritonaeum, that they might come unto and constitute the nervous a T. 2. f. 9 dd. □ intersections of the Muscle, which now and then are wanting, as I have observed in some Bodies. I have often found two imperfect ones above the Navel; if a third be found, it is always directly opposite unto the Navel; you shall very rarely find a fourth Intersection. Towards the end of Rectus Musculus, on the inside you shall observe the Epigastrica Which is the true Linea candida. b T. 2. f. 8. e □ ascendens and the Mammaria c T. 2. f. 8. d. □ descendens to d T. f. 8. f. □ meet together about the middle of the Muscle, where they grow into one by a close Anastomosis. That which separates the right Muscles is a real e T. 1. f. 2. K K. □ white Line stretched out from the xiphoides as far as to the Conjunction of the Share-Bone; and it is simply done of them, who call the growing together of the nervous conjunctions or aponeurosis of the Obliquus descendens, the White-Line, seeing the aponeurosis themselves are united continually and not disjoined by any apparent Line. In big-bellyed women when their Bellies are very much distended, in the last months of their going with Child, by reason of the Drawing of the Musculi Re●… asunder, a certain black-blewish Line remains for two or three months after the woman is delivered, which gins at the xiphoides and reaches unto the place where the share-bones grow together, which vanishes away by little and little, the Right Muscles being reunited and growing together again. Over the lower end of the Right Muscles lies a small Muscle called f T. 2. f. 9 D D □ Pyramidalis Pyramidalis. which you must curiously part into two, and having taken away one, you shall see a most strong sinewy Tendon of the Musculus Rectus, fastened to the Os pubis or Share-bone. The Lef● Pyramidal Muscle is oft times shorter and narrower than the right. The transverse g T. 2. f. 9 A f. a a etc. □ Muscle which cleaves to the Peritonaeum, is not easily drawn off Transversus. yet if you are desirous to take it away, you must cut it from the Loins, and then gently separate it from the Peritonaeum with your fingers alone. Muscles of the Yard. In a Man's Yard on either side in the Groin and the peritonaeum you shall search for The Yard Erector. two Muscles, having first removed a great deal of fat wherewith they are covered. The one of these Muscles is a T. 6. f. 1. a a. f. 5. H H. □ Erector Penis the Raiser of the Yard, which a●●ses from the Sphincter Any or Arse-muscle so called, and is inserted into the hollow and spongy Ligament of the Yard. The other being placed upon the Urethra or Piss-pipe is called b T. 6. f 1. b b. f 5. I I. □ Accelerator or The Accelerator. the Speeder, it arises out of the same Tuberosity beneath the spongy c T. 6. f. 5. K K. □ ligament of the Yard, although it be fastened by a bit of flesh to the foresaid sphincter or Arse-Muscle, that it may bear up the fundament▪ which fleshy portion or bit of flesh forementioned I am wont to show for the Levatores externi ani, or external Arse-Heavers. Muscles of the Fundament. The Fundament has six external Muscles belonging unto it. The Sphincters, The sphincters of Anus. The Levatores ani. and four external Lifters, for the Levatores interni or inner-lifters do lie ●ut of sigh●… women there is a fift Muscle which belongs to the Coccyx or Crupper-Bone. In the first place you shall anatomise and show the Sphincter d T. 3. f 4. O. □ Cutaneus, than another larger red Muscle, and then the side-muscles before and behind, the e T. 6. f 3. N N. □ Levatores which arise out of the tuberosity of the Hucklebone, you shall seek for them behind the Crupper bone and above the accleratores on the foreside, putting your hand in beneath, or putting in a little knife made of boxewood. But you shall more evidently discern the largeness of the Levator Any, if you shall take away the Bladder, the Intestinum Rectum or Arsegut and the womb of a woman, and withal shall sever the Conjunction of the share-Bones. For than you shall see a br●ad but thin piece of flesh, drawn out from the Os Sacrum as far as to the Spine of the Os Ischij, underproped with a firm ligament, which is in that space, and produced as far as to the Os Ischij itself: which fleshy Membrane ought to be taken for the Levator: for under it the Obturator Internus is situate. Besides those Levatores there is another sound to arise from the farthest extremity The Muscle peculiar to the Coccyx in women. of the Os sacrum and the Crupperbone, viz. a thin and sharp pointed piece of flesh strewed with right fibres, encloseing the lateral parts of the Crupper-bone or Coccyx on either side, which holds up the Sphincter, and so the external Orifice of the Privy Parts in Women are widened, this Muscle drawing the Crupper-bone backwards, that in Childbirth the passage may be more free for the Infant. I have seldom seen such a Muscle in the Bodies of men, and the use of it when it is extant in men, is, to render the avoidance of Dung more easy, by drawing back the Crupper-bone when men are at stool. The internal Sphincter (if we must needs admit, and allow of a third) is no other The internal Sphincter. than a Membranous parcel of flesh, somewhat black and blue, which comprehends the Rectum Intestinum, or Arsegut, like a Sheath or Scabbard, being adorned with straight Fibres and interwoven with a few circular ones; which if the Coat of the Guts is fleshy, it differs from that common Coat of the Guts, which covers their inside. So the Rectum Intestinum is distinguished from the rest, neither is the Situation of the Membranes, or Coats, varied. The Bladdermuscle. The Bladdermuscle b T. 6. f 5. F F. □ Sphincter, is placed in a Man above the Prostatae, The Bladdermuscle in men. which it embraces for the Space of two fingers breadth, and is easily found without the Channel of the Pi●s-pipe: If you shall cut up the Pipe with a pair of Scissors from the N●● of the Yard, as far as to the Prostatae. You shall examine if you can find two Sphincters of the Bladder, one beneath, and the other above the Prostatae, which I never observed. ᵃ T. 2. f 5 Q. □ Now that part of the Neck of the Bladder, which respects the Bones of the Share, is manifestly fleshy, between the two Kernels called Prostatae▪ and there a twofold Demonstration of the Double Sphincter. Sphincter may be allowed; one fleshy, placed upon the Prostatae, and in that sense above them; but under the Prostatae, is the Membranous Muscle of the Neck of the bladder: the other broad Muscle above the Prostatae, and turned back under the same, will ●e the Second Sphincter Muscle, because it does circularly embrace the Prostatae, above and beneath. The Neck of the Bladder in women, is very near as long as ones Thumb, being The Bladdermuscle in Women. Nervous, Spongy, and black within, like the P●●s-pipe, or Urethra in Men, and compassed about with reddish flesh, which is taken to be the sphincter: and while the Neck of the Bladder in women swells, if you put your finger within the water-gate, you shall percive an hard and long tumour or swelling▪ and the uppermore carnosity of the Privy Part, which closes and stops the end of the Bladder, is both in Girls and women always found larger than the rest, and the other glandules being by frequent childbearing torn and defaced, this always remains to the End of their lives. Muscles of the Clitoris. You shall seek the Muscles of the Clitoris, after this manner; having leisurely Latus. taken away much fat till such times as ruddy flesh appears, you shall sever the Latissimus Musculus which lies very low, growing out of the sphincter of the Fundament, and inserted into the very Lips of the Water-Gate or female Privity, for the moving or straitening whereof, I concevie this Muscle is ordained. The other is Gracilis. the Gracilis Musculus fastened to the Ligement of the Clitoris. Musclus of the Thigh. In the Cavity of the Belly, when the entrails are removed, you shall observe above Psoas. the Loins the Musculus longus and rotundus, the long and round Muscle which is termed a T. 10. f. 1. O. O. T. 23. f. 1. A. □ Psoas, which you shall separate from its original to its insertion which is in the small Trochanter I have oftentimes in Men, and sometimes in Viragoes, or manly Women, observed another ●ank Muscle placed over the Psoas aforesaid. It seems for this Cause added, that as a Ligament or Band it might strengthen, and as it were gird in the ●o●t ●nd lose flesh of the Muscle Ploas. The Cavity of os Ilium is filled by the Musculus latus a T. 23. f. 1. B. □ Iliacus or broad i●●ak Iliacus. muscle, which together with the Psoas being conveyed along upon the Os Pub●s and by its tendon united to the Psoas, is terminated in the small Trochanter. Having turned the Body, you shall proceed to the Muscles which make the Buttocks, called Gloutii that is buttock Muscles. There are three of them resting one upon another. The first and greatest b T. 23. f. 2. B. f. 3. A. □ Buttock▪ Muscle, you shall separate towards its tendon, Gloutius major both before and behind, having first made it clean and freed it from the fat. Then you shall proceed in your section upwards till the whole is on all sides cut of, till you come to its insertion, which is in the great Trochanter, and there you shall leave it, or having first taken away the broad band, you shall cut off the said Muscle in the fore part. Under this lies the Gloutius c T. 23, f. 3. B▪ f. 4. C. □ Medius or middlemast Buttock muscle, which may Medius. easily be separated in its upper and lateral part towards the Os sacrum. But bene●●h the middle part of the Gloutius Secundus the T. 23. f. 4▪ B. □ third is placed, immediately fastened Minimus. to the Os Ilium: this Muscle you must not cut of. Between the middle and the lesser Buttock Muscles there are two remarkable veins, which from the Hypogastrica do creep over the Obturator Internus ● with an A●●e●●e, Hand in Hand, and a portion of the Nervus major posticus, they spread themselves into numerous branches: and there arise most cruel pains in the inmost parts of the Buttocks, which sergeant the sciatica or Hip-gout. Would not drawing blood from the Haemorrhoid Veins, serve well to disburden these parts? In the next place you shall proceed to the Quadrigemini and the Obturatores, Quadrigemini which are seen beneath, the greater Buttock Muscle being taken away. The uppermost being the first and longest of all, is called the a T. 23. f. 3. ●. f. 4. D. □ Pyriformis unto which the two b T. 23. f. 3. ᵇ f. 4. G. □ Purvi or little ones do follow in order, coupled together, that between them ●…d in their Bosom as it were, they might contain the Tendon of the Obturator internus. To these two there is orderly adjoined the c T. 23. f. 3. D. f. 4. E. □ Quratus Quadrigeminus being broader and more fleshy than the rest. The Obturatores are two, the d T. 23. f. 3. E. f. 4. F. □ internal and the T. 23. f. 4. ●. □ external, the Internal has its Obturator internus. orginal out of the Circumference of the Oval hole; and its Tendon being carried along between two Ligaments, and being hid in the bosom or hollowness of the second and third Quadrigeminal Muscles, it is carried into the Cavity of the great Trochanter. And therefore you must pull asunder the second and and third Quadrigeminals, before this Muscle can come in sight. Now the Ligaments through which the Tendon of the Obturator Internus is carried, are two; the one being external is carried from the Os sacrum to the Tuberosity of the Os Ischij: the other being internal and placed beneath the external, is carried from the same Os sacrum, into the spina of the Os Ischij. The Obturator externus cannot be discovered unless the fourth broad Quadrige●…nal Externus. Muscle be plucked back, and that the Propagation thereof may more evidently appear, you shall take away the Musculus Triceps or Three-Headed Muscle. Sometimes I have observed above the Primus Quadrigeminus, the Iliacus exter●… Graci●…, which from the lower and transverse spines of the Os sacrum, did ●nd into the top or the great Trochanter. You shall therefore anatomise and show eleven Muscles of the Thigh, placed above the Os Ilium. In the hinder part are nine, Three Gloutij or Buttock Muscles, which being drawn aside, there appear four Quadrigemini and two Obturatores. In the fore part and hollowness of the Os Ilium are found two Muscles, the Psoas which indeed has its original higher than from the Os Ilium, and the Iliacus. Muscles of the Leg. In the Thigh from the Haunch to the knee and Ham you shall observe and show eleven Muscles. In the fore part you shall find seven, the Longus, the Fascia lata, the Rectus Sutorius. Membranosus. Rectus. Vasti. Crureus. gracilis, the D●●o Vasti, the Crureus and the Triceps; which are so situate, that in the first place you meet with the longus or ●u●orius, than the Membranosus or Fascia ●ata. According to the straightness and length of the thigh the Rectus Gracilis is drawn out. Near and bordering upon this are the Vasti d●o, under which lies the Crureus which immediately covers the Os femo●i●, or Thighbone, Adjoining to the vastus internus is the Triceps, which lie● scu●keing within the Thigh. In the hinder-part of the thighs you shall find four, disposed after this manner. Unto the Triceps on the Inside is ●●●●ened the Gracilis Posticus: bordering upon it, is the seminervosus, with the Semimembranosus, and between this and the vastus externus is the Musculus Biceps placed. In the forepart of the thigh, you must begin at the a T. 23. f. 1. l l. □ Long Muscle; which being cut of, you shall cleverly take away the Fascia b f. 1. E. c c c. □ ●●●a, either all of it or as much as you can, and you shall bring it as far as to the knee. Then you shall cut of the Gracilis c f. 1. F F. □ Rectus. Afterwards you shall proceed unto the two vasti, which that you may more easily separate from the Crureus, they are distinguished one from another by a line running between them, which you shall cut up. Then you shall dissect the Vastus d f. 1. G G. □ Externus by the latus externum; but it is harder to separate the Vastus e f. 1. H H. □ internus. And you shall begin to separate the same at the lower part near the Patella, and thrusting in your hand, and neatly mannageing your penknife, you shall cut it towards the upper parts: and so the two Vasti shall be severed from the a T. 23. f. 1. etc. □ Crureus. From these, you shall come unto the Triceps, which may more truly be termed Triceps. quad●icep● or rather quadrigeminus, because of four Heads and as many distinct ●mer●ions. It is placed in the inner part of the Thigh, and its first and upmost portion growing Pectineus. out of Os Pubis, seems to be a Distinct Muscle, which in regard of its situation may be termed Pectineus. I have sometimes found four other portions perfectly distinct one from another, besides the Pectineus, and the last portion was ve●●e long, like a semi-nervous Muscle, and was carried on with a sinewy tendon as far as to the Leg. I conceive this is the Muscle, which has been in women observed distinct from the rest, in the hinder part of the thigh, and is wont to be joined as a fift, unto the four P●stici. For it arose from the Tuberosity of the ●●chium and was inserted into the H●●der Part of the Tibia. It is found in Women, because they were to have broader Buttocks and larger Thighs than Men. It is an ea●●e matter to separate those four Muscles placed in the hinder part of Seminorvosu●. Semimembranosu●. ●iceps. Gracilis. the thigh, viz the c T. 23. f. 3. G G. □ Seminervosus, the d T. 23. f. 3. H H. □ Semimembranosus, the e T. 23. f. 3. ●●●. □ Biceps, & the Gracilis f T. 23. f. 3. F F. □ internus. I have often sound the Biceps distinct both in its Original and Insertion. ᵇ T. 23. f. 1. etc. C C. □ Muscles of the Tansus. In the Leg from the knee unto the Tarsus are found 13. Muscles; in the hinder part you shall find five placed after this manner. Gemelli▪ Popliteus. Plantaris. Soleus'. The first are the a T. 23. f. 1, d d, f. 3. K K. □ Gemelli; under their Heads lies the b f, 4 H. □ Popliteus hidden; between the Gemelli and the Soleus', the c f. 3. M. □ Plantaris hides itself. The Soleus' lying beneath the Gemelli, does immediately cover the shinbone. In the lateral and external Part of the Tibia, by the Spine, there appears the Foot-benders Peroneus e f. 1. L L. □ Flexor pedis, Neighbour to which is the Longus f f. 1. M M. □ Extensor Digitorum. After which follows the Extensor Pedis, tibieus g f. 2. E E □ posticus. Under the Extensor Extendors. longus Digitorum, lies the Extensor h f. 1. N▪ □ pollicis; and beneath the Flexor pedis Peroneus, lies the Extensor i f. 2. F F. □ Peroneus. The Flexor k f. 4▪ K. f. 6. B. □ pollicis does take up the internal and lateral part of the Tibia. In the lower part of the Tibia, between the flexor pollicis and the Tibieus posticus, the Flexor l f. 4. l l f. 5. C. □ digitorum medius holds its place. It is easy to separate the Muscles which enfold the Tibia on all sides, provided The separateon of these Muscles. you do fir●● pluck off the fascia m f. ● E. c c c. □ lata, which is carried out as far as to the foot. Having divided the Heads of the Gemelli, you shall diligently search for the Popliteus or Ham-Muscle, situate obliquely over the Head of the Soleus'. Then you shall observe the fleshy Head of the Musculus Plantaris, which lies lurkeing between the Gemelli and the Soleus'. The Plantaris is like the Palmaris. In the fore part of the Tibia the Peroneus externus and Peroneus internus seem to make one Muscle, because they arise from one and the same part, and are carried through the Cleft of the external Ankle-bone. But the one is internally inserted into the Os meta-tarsi, which sustains the little Toe: The other being drawn under the sole of the ●ee●, is carried into the Os metatarsie which susta●es the Great Toe. ᵈ f. 3. L L. □ In the Foot you shall take notice of seventeen Muscles. In the out side of the Foot the●e are five, viz the a T. 23. f. 2. G. □ Pedieus and the four interossei b f. 2. a a a a. □ externi. In the sole of the Foot you shall observe twelve, viz. the Brevis Digiti c f. 4. L. f. 6. A. □ Flexor or little-Toe bende●, the three d f. 6. e e e. □ Lumbricales, those which are made out of the Massa e f. 6. D D. □ Carnea, the four external Interosseans and as many f f. 5. d d d d. □ internal. Upon each side of the Foot is placed one Muscls, viz. the Abductor g ●. f. 3. O. f. 5. b b. □ Pollicis; and Minimi Digiti abductor. In the hollow of the foot, there is placed another Massa carnea, spread under the first, and cleaving immediately to the Bones. it may be perfectly divided into four or five portions, although in the middle spaces of the Bones of Metatarsus the Musculi Interossei are contained. Furthermore in the Sole of the Foot you shall find that same Internal Muscle which is opposed to the Abductor Pollicis or Great-Toe withdrawer, like unto the Antethenar in the Hand. It may be called i f. 5. b b. e □ Musculus Transversalis. Chap. 46. Of the Veins, Arteries and Nerves belonging to the Limbs. The Veins of the Limbs begin in the Arm at the Armpit, and in the Feet they 〈…〉 the Veins of the upper▪ Limbs▪ Axillaru. take their Original from the Groins. The Vena k T. 24. f. 1 A. □ Axillaris near the Armpits does produce the Humeralis, which is called the l f. 1. B B B. □ Cephalica or Head-Veine. It has no Artery to accompany the same, and it holds its Course through the whole Radius. A little after it sends forth the m f. 1. ●. m m. □ Thoracica which is expanded into external parts Thoracica. of the Chest, and meets with small twigs of the Vena n T. 12. f. 1. a a a a. □ azygos. It is afterward termed o T 24. f. 1. C C. □ Basilica and by the Bending of the Arm, it is divided Basilica. into two branches. The p f. 1. e e. etc. □ one of which creeps all along the inside of the Cubitus; the other being T. 24. f. 1. x. y. etc. external descends beneath the Skin unto the Hand. ʰ f. 3. P. f. 5. c. □ The Ramus internus or inner branch is called Mediana b 1. t t. etc. □ Vena, and it receives Mediana. a branch of the c f. 1. f f. □ Cephalica below the bending of the Arm, where it is called the Cephalica or Basilica. These three Veins are opened beneath the Bending of the Arme. But the Basilica has an d f. 2. A. by L. □ Artery under it or very near it, and a e f. 3. ●. 1. etc. □ Nerve and the Tendon of Musculus f T. 22. f. 1. G. □ Biceps, which bends the Arm: which parts must (in the opening of a vein) be avoided, for if they happen to be cut, they bring great Inconveniencies to the Arme. The Cephalica being stretched out upon the g T. 24. f. 1. i i. etc. □ Radius near the wrist, diverts to that part of the hand termed Metacarpium, that it might with its twigs water the Hollow of the Hand. Between the Ringfinger and the little finger, they place the h f. 1 ● □ Salvatella vein, Salvatella. which is wont to be opened; between the thumb and the fore finger, there is another opened, which is called Vena f. h □ pollicis or the thumb vein. The Mediana k f. 1. g □ vena is to tally external and runs under the Skin, into the palm of the Hand. The Basilica creeps through the l f. 1. o o. x. y. etc. □ internal and external parts of the Cubit, with a two-headed branch. Now the Veins have one thing peculiar to them in the Limbs viz▪ that they Anastomosis of the Veins and Arteries. manifestly do communicate with the Arteries. This Galen proves in his third Book of Natural faculties, the last Chapter, And up and down in other parts of his works. Which thing is so ma●●test that it ought not to be called into question. Moreover the veins in the f. 7. the whole □ Limbs and internal Jugulars have Valves. In the The Valves of the Veins greater channels and in the division of the lesser ones there are n f. 8. the whole □ two on each side one opposed to the other and placed interchangeably. Now we may doubt of their use since the circulation of the blood has been found Their use. out, for the common opinion was that they were placed in the Limbs and in the internal jugular to stop the exceeding flux of blood into those outmost parts which are in continual motion. But those that hold the Circulation of the blood, do say their use is to hinder the flowing back of the Blood which ascends upwards unto the Heart, according to the opinion of Dr. Harvy, unto which I willingly give my Assent. Let us pa●son from the Veins to the Arteries of the Arme. The Ramus supe●●●av●us The Arteries. Axillaris. proceeding to the Armpits, is termed a T. 24. f. 2. A. □ Axillaris. It accompanies the Vena Basilica, whereas there is no Arteria Cephalica. Near the Armpits it produces the b f. 2. c. d. □ Thoracica and in its progress bestows Thoracica▪ certain twiggs upon the bordering Parts, and being lengthened out as f●r as to the bending of the Arm, it is divided into two c f. 2 C. B. □ branches, which are carried o●, to the Inside of the Hands. For the outside of the Hand above the Metarcarpium, is void both of Muscles and Arteries. The other d f. 2. B. □ Branch being drawn out upon the Inside of the Radius, is felt to beat Ram● minores. in the wrist. The other running straight along the Ulna is with its Cousin spread out into the hand according to the length of the Thumb and of the little Finger, so as to bestow of their twigs upon every Finger. I shall in the same Method dispatch the Nerves of the whole Hand. The Nerves. Out of the Holes of the four lower Vertebrae of the f f. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. □ Neck, and the two first Vertebras, of the g f. 3. 1. □ Back, h f. 3. a. b. c. d. e. □ five or six Nerves take their Original, which being overwhelmed under the Muscle scalenus, they are brought under the Clavicula, as far as to the Arm-hole, where they are i f. 3 X X. □ twisted one within another, like the strings of a Cardinals Hat. ᵉ f. 2. C. □ Afterwards the four superior ones are under the Deltoides scattered over the internal part, accompanying the Vena basilica and the Artery of the Arm, and creeping between the Muscles Biceps and the Brachieus externus. The a T. 24. f. 3. f f. □ fift and sixth b T. 24. f. 3. I I. □ Nerve, being bowed back under the scapulary Muscle Rotundus major, they are disseminated into the hinder Muscles of the Head. There remain then the Quatuor Primi already described, which being carried through the Arm and Cubit; they are dispersed into the said Cubit and the Hand The Primus c T. 24. f. 3. g g. □ Nervus beneath the head of the shoulder is overwhelmed in the Primus. Coracoidaeus and drawn along under the inner side of the Biceps, and lurking under the Tendon of the said Muscle, it joins itself to the Vena Cephalica, where it grows small: also it is placed beneath that Vein, below the bending of the Arme. The Second d T. 24. f. 3. K K. □ Nerve being undivided and thicker, does descend to the bending of Secundus. the Arm, being covered only with fat, and at the bending of the Arm it is placed beneath th' Arteria and Vena Basilica. Howbeit the Vena Basilica a little below the Cubit does, towards the interior part, recede a little from that Nerve, that it may be united to the Vena Cephalica. But four fingers beneath the bending of the Arm, being always superintendent to the Basilica, it passes undivided along, unto the wrist, the vein appears above. At the Wrist 'tis cleft into ten small branches affording two little twigs to every singer, which creep along the sides of the said singers. You shall observe by the way, that three fingers breadth beneath the bending of the Cubit, it is covered by the Muscles which bend the wrist and Cubit, which arise cut of the internal tuberosity of the Arme. The third e T. 24. f. 3. h h. □ Nerve is carried along undivided unto the Angona, where being Tertius. conveyed through a Cleft which is between the Elbow and the inner Condylum or Tuberosite of the Arm, according to the length of the Cubit, and being drawn out over the Cubitaeus externus, it is carried unto the wrist, towards the little finger. And therefore by leaneing on the elbow, the whole Arm is benumbed. Being divided near the Hand into four branches, it is spread into the outside, of the Hand or Back of the Hand. The fourth Nerve is the thickest of all interwoven with Veins and Arteries, and Quartus. sunk deep in the Brachiaus externus; it is carried from the forepart of the Arm into the Hinderpart, and descending there through unto the Radius, and being carried all along the same, it is joined to the vena Cephalica, and loses itself at last into the wrist. I proceed unto the vessels of the Inferior Limbs. The Crural b T. 24. f. 4. A. □ vein, does in The veins of the lower Limbs. Poplitea. the groin produce a remarkable branch viz. The c T. 24. f. 4. a a a. □ saphena, which according to the longitude of the sutorius Musculus descends unto the Ham. Beneath which, in the Ankle it constitutes the vena poplitea, which was opened in Times past. There it transmics the branch which is in the upper part returrent, above the Ham, unto the crural veins, or the sarhena receives that same branch, from those cruralls. Afterward being divided into two parts it slips down unto the two external Ankles, but the greater portion takes its course unto the internal Ankle, where it forms the true e T. 24. f. 4. a. beneath □ Saphena which is usually opened. It is termed corruptly Saphena, as if one would say Saphaia because of the Apparency, Saphena. which is a new name brought into use by the late Greeks', unknowen to Galen. When the crural vein has produced the Saphena, it is soon after divided into four branches, of which, the two f T. 24. f. 4. b b. etc. □ external and lateral ones which are the shortest are disseminated into the superior Muscles of the Thigh, both the internal, namely the Biceps, and the external viz. the vasti and the Musculus Cruraeus. ᵃ T. 24. f. 3. i i. □ ᵈ T. 24. f. 4. f f f. □ The Ramus ●er●ius which penetrates into the inner parts, is termed Ischiadicus. Ischiadicus. The fourth is called b T. 24. f. 4 d d. □ b T. 24. f. 4. g g. □ Muscularis. Muscularis. These branches being propagated, the Trunk of the Vena cruralis being split into two, descends unto the knee, being attended with the crural Artery branshched The lesser branches. into two: But one of the c T. 24. f. 4. h h. □ branches is aloft and waters the external parts, the other is more d T. 24. f. 4. g g. □ deep: both of them do afford twigs to the neighbouring parts, and when they have reached unto the Ham, being spread along between the Soleus' and the Gemelli, they descend to the two Ankles. But the external Ankle is princspally watered from the low-laid crural vein, yet so that in the compass of the Ankle two notable veins are observed. That which quarters upon the Malleolus internus or inner Ankle-bone, is the branch of the Saphena. That which takes its course beneath the malleolus, being spread out above the Tarsus, is a branch of the crural Vein. Neither of these Veins can be safely opened unless they swell, by reason of the neighbouring arteries, which the Vena Saphena placed in the inner Ankle is free from. And this Vein is opened in all diseases aswel of Men as of Women. Yet nevertheless in the Sciatic, the Vein beneath the Malleolus externus, is more advantageously opened, because it has greater Communion with the Part affected, namely the Coxendix or Hip. The Distribution of e T. 24. f. 5. A A. □ Arteria Cruralis, is not equal to the Vena Cruralis, because The Arteries. it produces no Saphena. For a little lower than the Groin, it transmits' two Cruralis. f T 24. f. 5. etc. □ within the Musculus triceps, which are lengthened out as far as to the Gloutij. Afterwards it sends forth g T. 24. f. 5. d d. etc. □ two, into the former parts of the Thigh. ᵃ T. 24. f. 4. c c. etc. □ And then the Cruralis descends undivided as far as to the Ham, Where it is divided Its branches. into two Branches; the a T. 24. f. 5. i i □ one of which does laterarlly creep all along the outside of the Leg upon the Musculus Peroneus. The other being thrust into the Muscle soleus, and sliding down unto the Heel, is disseminated into the sole of the Foot; and the other is branched forth into the outside of the Foot. The Vena Saphena has no Artery to attend it, and there is not any nerve near it, and therefore it may safely be opened. The Nerves of the foreside of the Thigh are two, distinguished in their original, The Nerves of the fore par●. The first. but so as they soon grow together and become one cord, which is carried entire without any division, unto the Groin. Where it is distributed into five c T. 24. f. 6. B C D. etc. □ branches, commonly wrapped up in a Membrane, which being dispersed on every hand into the Muscles of the fore part of the Thigh, they are branched out as far as to the whirl-bone of the Knee. Now the Rise of these Nerves is in the d T. 24. f. 6. 3. 4. 5. □ three lowest Vertebrae of the Loins, neither is it visible, unless the Muscle Psoa be torn asunder, within which they lie hid. Then besides those forementioned, you shall see another small Nerve, drawn ●…e second. through the oval hole of the Os Pubis and spent upon the neighbouring Muscles viz. the Triceps. A great and very thick Nerve does glide along the hinder part of the Thigh, which Of the Hind-part. The first. in its Original is made up sometimes of three, oftener of four portions, which are bred out of three or four of the upper holes of Os sacrum, and being carried along through the cavity of Os Ischii, which is seated between the spines of the said Os Ilium through the internal and hindermost Muscles of the Thigh, undivided, sometimes doubled and solitary without the society of a vein and Artery, as is ordinary in other Nerves of the Body, it is carried into the Ham; where being divided into two, sometimes into g T. 24. f. 6. i. k l. etc. □ four, it bestows little small twigs (considering its bulk) upon the Neighbouring Parts. ᵇ T. 24. f. 5. I I. □ ᵉ T. 24. f. 6. E E. □ ᶠ T. 24. f. 6. 6. □ The other ᵃ Branch descends through the Calf of the Leg to the Heel, dealing out Its Branches▪ little Nervs in its passage, and being drawn through the Cleft of the inner Ankle-bone, it is distributed into the sole of the Foot in as many Branches as there are Fingers. Another is carried into the ᵇ fore part of the Foot, fastened unto the Perone, and so slipping down along unto the external ankle, and when it is come thither, it is spread abroad into the upper side of the Foot, as was said of the former. This exceeding great and thick Nerve being ill disposed or diseased, a Bastard A Bastard Sciatica what? Sciatica is thereby caused, which consists wholly therein; there is a grievous pain, which afflicts not only the Hip, but reaches into the Thigh, the ankle and Foot, namely to all places whether the Nerve which comes from the diseased Hip does reach. Fernelius in the 18. Chap. of the 6. Book of his Pathology. and therefore in this bastard sciatica Caustics are to be applied, and Issues made at the bending of the Buttocs', also those parts must be anoynetd and smeared with an Epispastick or drawing Plaster. You shall observe by the way in a bastard sciatica, that those nerves are watered by the Hypogastrick veins and the Arteries above the same, and therefore the nerves cannot be dried unless the Hypogastrick veins are emptied, by many times letting blood in the Arms and Feet, and by Horsleeches often applied to the Veins of the Fundament. Now Galen in the 8 Chap. of his 16. Book of the use of the parts of our Body, shows the reason why this same Nerve is not mixed with other fore nerves as it is in the Nerves of the Arm, but is carried behind the thigh; viz. Because the joint of the Arm stands farther from the Vertebrae of the Neck, than the joint of the Thigh does from the Vertebrae of the Loins and Os sacrum. About the Beginning of this great Nerve, there is another adjoined, which rising The second. out of the third hole of the Os sacrum, and being carried along above the spin of Os sacrum, it is branched out into the Musculi Gloutij and the Flexores Tibiae, as far as to the Ham. The Medicinal Consideration. Diseases of the Veins belonging to the Limbs, especially to the Leg and Thigh, Varices what they he? are the Varices which are knotty dilatations, in which the Blood is collected, as it were into Certain Satchels. Now they are cured with astringents with a close and Their Cure. convenient ligature. Or the veins are pricked and the blood let out, or at the beginning of the varix the largest vein which gives nourishment to the rest, or the beginning Whether a vein cut off will grow again? itself, is tied up and cut off. Many conceive that the veins cut off are bred again; they bring for an example the veins which are seen in a very great Sarcoma or fleshy Excrescence; but Fernelius has rightly observed, that they are not veins, but channels between the Skin which nature has framed as gutters to water and nourish the Sarcoma or fleshy Excrescence. Many think that the veins which are cut, being tied together with a string do grow again, which I do not believe. Hypocrates calls the veins Spiracula Corporis, the vents of the body or the breathing holes thereof, which being opened, the Body is aired: and he says that when the Veins are dried, they draw sharp and choleric humours in burning fevers. Also the same Author says, that the veins do draw more than the flesh Lib. 1. de Morbis. Especially if they be more hot and dry than ordinary. ● Bloody sweats whence they proceed? When the Veins being debilitated through Sickness of the Liver, become nauseant and inclined as it were to vomit, they suffer the Blood to run out, not only through the mouths of the upper and lower veins, but also through the Skin of the whole Body, in manner of a bloody sweat, which I have observed two or three times. A stoppage of the Veins and Arteries, does often happen in Pleth●…ck bodies, The motion of the vessels how abolished? so that in all places in which the pulse is wont to be felt, the motion of the Arteries is abolished; 〈◊〉 which case Hypocrates commends blood letting, as a means to put the vessels into motion again. Sometimes the Pull of all the Arteries is intercepted, not excepting the Groin or crural Arteries, the Motion of the Heart still remaining, which disposition if it continue long it kills the Patient. But if the motion of the Heart be perished likewise, the Patient dies suddenly. I have seen two that had no pulse at all, only their Heart continued beating, who lived sixteen years, but in extreme weakness. Balduinus Ronsaeus saw one in the same condition, as he affirms in his medicinal Epistles. Hereupon, a question may be raised, how the pulsation of the Arteries can be How the motion of the pulse in the Arteries can be stopped, while the Heart moves. stopped whiles the Heart beats after its wont manner, though slowly; whether it be not necessary in such a Case that the Aorta be obstructed near the Heart, and that the irradiation and influlx of the arterial blood be by that means interce●●ped. And then the Blood of the veins approaches the Heart, being drawn thither in the diastole or dilatation thereof, that it may receive the seal of Vitality in the right ventricle; and being afterwards driven forth by the Systole or Contraction into the vena cava, the vital spirits are forcibly carried into the length of the channel, and by the mutual anastomosis of the veins and Arteries, they are communicated to the said Arteries with the blood. I have in some persons observed that the motion of their Arteries hath been frequently intercepted or became very unequal for some days together, afterwards the impediment being removed which was near the Heart, I found the same inequality in the Caeliac Artery, which did beat vehemently, although the pulse appeared equal and well ordered in the rest of the body. This, I conceive happened by reason of a little bit of flesh or fat, which ascending to the Gates of the Heart did cause such a pulse so inordinate, and being repelled or drawn back unto the Caeliac Artery which is a branch of the Aorta, it did produce such an irregularity as aforesaid. The Crural Artery, seeing that it is evident in the Groin, and subject to our feeling, The Pulse is last felt in the crural Artery the pulse thereof is easily discerned, being vehement in regard of the greatness of the Artery, and the last which remains after the pulse is extinguished in other extreme parts of the Body, wherein it is usually felt to beat. And therefore when no pulse can be felt in the other usual places, it must be sought for, ᵉ examined in this crural Artery, not only in Men but in women also, provided the Rules of Honesty be not broken. And if when a disease is at the Height, we can feel no pulse in this part, death is near at hand. The Dilation or Section of an Artery happens chief in the external parts, Aneurisma, what it is? where the lesser Arteries reside which are branches of the great Trunk. And this disease is termed Aneurisma. It is seldom seen in the trunk of the Aorta because of its thickness. The End of the Fift Book. THE SIXTH BOOK OF THE ANATOMY AND PATHOLOGY OF John Riolanus, THE KING'S PROFESSOR OF PHYSIC. A new Osteologia or History of the Bones. Wherein he treats of the Bones, Ligaments and Gristles of the whole Body, by which the frame of the Body is compacted together, the Muscles being removed, handling all the Diseases and symptoms which happen unto the Bones. CHAP. 1. THe Scope of Nature and of the Physician about the Body of Man its Fabric, are contrary, the one unto the others Nature intending to make up the Body of Man, gins at the most simple parts, and so proceeds by little and little to the more compounded ones, until she The Method. finish her work. But the Physician, that he may attain unto the knowledge of this workmanship of Nature, proceeds gradually from the more compound unto the most simple parts; so that in his Analysis or Resolution, these parts are last which were first in the Composition. So when we pull down an house, first we throw off the Ceiling, than we demolish the walls, and Why we treat of the Bones in the last place? lastly we d●g up the foundation. We in like manner in our taking asunder this House of Man's body by Anatomical Administration, do now in the last place treat of the Bones which are the foundation of the whole Body, and placed before all other parts. we shall consider of them in the way of a new kind of Osteologia or History of the Bones, which is no less, ● necessary than the doctrine of the Skelleton of the Bones. Having therefore explained and demonstrated the softerparts of the Body by way of Analysis, I proceed to the last and more solid parts thereof, which according to the Synthetick method, or order of composition, are the first, such as are the Bones, which are now otherwise considered than when they are boiled and dried and so demonstrated. Chap. 2 Of the great Profit of this new Osteologie, or Doctrine of the Bones. THere is a twofold Doctrine of the Bones; one is demonstrated in dried Bones, The Doctrine of Bones demonstrated in a dead body, is better, & more necessary. which have been prepared by boiling; the other is showed in the Bones of the Body, whiles they remain naturally fastened one unto another. Both these Doctrines are useful in the Art of Healing, and for such as would have a perfect knowledge in the Body of Man. For in the dried Bones, in which commonly this Doctrine is taught, nothing is learned, saving the external shape, posture, and composition or frame of one with For the perfect knowledge of Man's Body. another: But a diligent observation of the Bones, while they are knit and fastened one unto another, is more conducing to practice. Because the fastenings of the Bones one unto another by Gristles and Ligaments, also by the several sorts of Articulation, or jointing, are in some dried Bones quite different from what they are in such as be moist; for in dried Bodies you would think that some Cavities are hollow, and Cup-fashioned, the Cavities being empty, and bereft of their Cartilages; which notwithstanding appear shallow in a fresh Body, the Cavities being full of Gristles; and contrariwise, you would in a Skeleton say, that some Cavities And are shallow, which are deep in a fresh Body, the hollowness being increased by a Gristle brim. Moreover, The external Conformation and Quality of the Bones, is more evidently discerned in the Bones of a Carcase, which loses much in Bones that are prepared by boiling: as for example, the Gristly incrustations of the extremities, the Membrane which is about the Bones, and the Mucous, or slimy substance lodged between the Bones; also the internal substance, or Marrow, or Marrowish Juice, are manifestly discovered in the Bones of a fresh Body, which are not at all in dry and withered Bones. And therefore in respect to the Practice of Physic, and the Cure of vitiated For the Practice of Physic bones, and such as are broken, or out of Joint, it is necessary, diligently to look into, and carefully to axamine in a dead Body, the Natural Conformation of the Bones, and their conjunction one with another. I do not dislike the use of dried Bones, to teach and demonstrate the vulgar Osteology, or Doctrine of bones, at Than the Vulgar. which we must begin, as we have done in this Treatee; provided the Demonstration of the bones in a dead Body, be afterward added to the former. For by this Repetition, and Representation of the bones, we shall imitate the Order Where notwithstanding we ought to begin. and Design of Nature, which in the Generation of the Parts of our Body, is wont in the first place to form the bones; but she finishes, and perfects them after all other parts, for they grow as long as the body increases, according to Aristotle. And if we believe Hypocrates in the sixth Book of his epidemics; Women have their Courses, till their bones have attained their utmost perfection. Chap. 3. What is to be observed in the Bones of a dead Body not boiled. The Natural Constitution of a Bone in what it cosists? IN the first place, you shall observe the Natural Constitution of the Bone, that you may discern the fault of a bone which is out of Order. A bone in a living Body naturally disposed, aught to be, 1. Hard, to procure the body's stability. 2. It ought to be Oily without, because it is nourished. 3. It must be covered with the Periostean Membrane, that it may have sense; for if it lose the Periostium, it becomes senseless. 4. It must be white tinctured with a moderate redness, because it is a Spermatick part, and is nourished with the dewy vapour of the blood. 5. It must be hollow, or spongy, that it may continue the substance of Marrow, or a Marrowy Liquor to nourish itself withal. 6. It must be at the ends crusted with Gristles 7. It must be anointed as it were with an oily moisture, to facilitate its motion. 8. It must have a continued and even substance. And therefore you shall know that a Bone is misaffected, if it be soft, as Ruellius, In what the preternatural. Fernelius and Hollerius have observed, that in some persons the Bones of their Bodies were by sickness become so soft and flexible, that you might bend them which way you pleased, like wax. Aristotle in the third book of his History of Animals, says that bones are not flexible, neither are they apt to split, but only subject to break. Scaliger in his commentary adds: I have seen the thigh bone by reason of the venereous disease, or by use of I know not what medicaments, bowed like an horn. Geographers writ that in a Country of Ethiopia, the inhabitants have naturally from their birth bodies so flexible, that they can turn and wind them into any posture. I have red in Hypocrates of a boy that was borne without bones, having the Principal parts of his body otherwise distinct. Forestus saw a boy made after the same manner in some of his members. Wherefore if a bone shall be dry without, it declares a distemperature of the part: if it be white it argues want of heat, if red, inflammation; if black, rottenness and blasting. If a bone be sensible, there is some secret fault in its substance, or in its periostean membrane. If it be solid and concrete without cavities or parts▪ it renders the body heavy and sluggish, and can contain no marrow. Pliny relates that there are some that lived having solid bones and without marrow, which are very rare and are termed Cornei. The sign of such a Constitution is never to thirst and never to sweat. They are called Cornei from the Cornel or Dog-tree; because the male Cornel has no pith or marrow. See Rhodiginus. Such a one the Syracusian Lygdamus is reported to have been, who in the three and thirteth Olymp●ade was the first who at the Olympic Games, became Victor at all Exercises and won the Paneratian Crown: his bones were found to have no marrow in them, as Solinus relates in his 4 Chapter. Antigonus in his Book of wonders Chap. 8 Writes that the bones of a Lion are so solid that you may strike fire out of them as out of a flint; Howbeit Columbus denies that such bones are void of marrow. Which Epicurus, contradicting aristotle maintains, as possible in the 8. Book of Athenaeus his Deipnosophists. Aldrovondus has observed that among Fowls the Ostrich has solid bones, void of marrow. But in case a bone should be deprived of its Gristly Crust and of its periostean Membrane, it is moved with difficulty, and has no feeling at all. If a bone become uneven and prominent so as to have bunches upon it, it is termed Exostosis, which is an effect and concomitant of the venereous pocks when it is of long standing and confirmed, howbeit it may spring from some other cause. Finally being depraved and misshapen, or disjointed, it hinders and mars the Action of the whole body or its parts; and being divided in its substance, it argues solution of Continuity by some cloven or fracture. and although a broken bone by the mediation of a Callus becomes soddered together one the outside: Yet does it still remain divided within. Chap. 4. Of the Nourishment, Sense, and Marrow of the Bones. While the Bone did live and was nourished, it had a twofold sustenance, the one The remote matter that nourishes the Bones. remote, the other conjunct or immediate according to Aristotle, in his Book of the parts of live-wights. The remote Sustenance of the Bones, is the thicker and more earthy part of the blood. The next or immediate is the marrow, or marrowy liquor, which is contained in the hollowness and porosity of the bones. Hypocrates in his The immediate matter. Book de Alimento, says that the marrow is the Nutriment of the bones, and therefore it is that they are Joined together or soddered up by a callus. How can it be Whether the Bones have Veins? (may some man say) that the blood should nourish the bones, seeing they have no veins, which are the channels to convey blood to all parts? Hypocrates says in his book de Ossium Natura, that of all the bones, the lower Jawbone alone has veins. Galen indeed in his 8. Book de Placitis, attributes unto every bone a Vein greater or Lesser according to the Proportion of the Bones: and in his Comment upon the first Book of Humours, he says that there is a Vessel distributing blood allowed to every bone. But he confesses in the last chapter of his 16. Book de Vsu Partium, that the veins of the Bones are so small and fine, that they are not so much as visible in the larger sort of Animals or Live-wights, because nature according to the Necessity and Indigence of the Parts, bestows upon some greater, upon other lesser Veins, moreover the little holes which are found about the extremities of the bones, Whether they have Arteries? do manifestly declare that somewhat there is which goes into the said Bones now their is nothing goes into the bones but little Veins. If we believe Platerus, the Arteries do no where enter into the bones, seeing the spirits can easily penetrate Or Nerves? into any of the bones without the service of the Arteries to carry them. Neither do I conceive that there are little nerves diffused through the substance of the Bones to give them the sense of feeling, because all the feeling they are capable of, is by means of the periostean Membrane which does encompass them. Nevertheless Nicolas Massa calls God to witness that he saw a Man, who had an ulcer in his thigh, so that the bone was bare, in which bone there was a sense of pain, so that he could not endure to have it touched with a rough instrument in regard of the pains it caused, and it was freed from the periostean Membrane. Yea and he bored the bone, and found that it had the sense of feeling within the same, which he therefore thought good to declare, that Anatomists might be moved to consider, whether some branches of nerves do not Penetrate into the substance of the bones. ● Threefold Marrow of the Bones. We cannot look into the Cavities and Marrows of the Bones; unless they be first broken. I observe a threefold Cavity of the bones and a threefold marrow. In the greater Cavites of the larger Bones, the Marrow is reddish; in the lesser Cavities of the smaller bones the marrow is white; In the spongy bones there is contained a marrowy Liquor. In the mean while you shall observe, that the marrow within the Cavity of the Whether the Marrow of the Bones be compassed with a Membrane. Bones is compassed with no membrane, neither is it made sensible by any little nerves penetrating the substance of the bone, as Paraeus does imagine. Hypocrates himself, in his Book de Principlis was the first that noted this. The Marrow of the Backbone is not like that marrow which is in other Bones, for it alone has membranes, which no other marrow has besides it. Chap. 5. Of Articulations or Jointings of the Bones. LET us proceed to the Joinings-together of the Bones. To the Articulation of the Bones there concurs. an Head. There does concur to the Articulations of the Bones, the Head, the cavity, the Gristle, the Flegmatic moisture, and the Ligament. Every Head is in its own nature and original an Epiphysis, but in process of time it degenerates into an apophysis. The Head is within of a Light spongy and porous substance, being filled with blood or with a marrowy Juice, on the outside it is covered with a very hard shell or bark, very thin and compact, which is crusted over with a smooth and polished Gristle. Now the Head of a Bone is a T. 21. f 1. d d. f 4. a. □ great and long, or short and flat, which is termed b T 21. f 1. & 2. I I. □ Candylos The Cavity of the Bone which receives the Head, is also crusted over with a Gristle, A cavity which if it be deep, it is called in Greek a T 21. f 4. B. □ Cotyle, if shallow, 'tis called b T 21. f 4 F. □ Glene. It is sometimes increased with a Gristlie brim, lest the bones should too easily slip A Gristle. aside, and fall out of their places. And in the Cavities themselves, there is contained a clammy, thick, and Oily A phlegmatic Humour. Pituitous Humour, to procure a more easy, and expeditious motion of the Bones, so we grease the Axletrees of Coaches and Carts, that the wheels may turn more easily and quickly. Through want of the foresaid Humour in such as have the consumption, and are extremely dried, while they go and stir their Limbs, one may hear as it were their bones knock one against another, and rattle in their Skins: As is proved by a memorable History, recorded by Symphorianus Campegius, in the Medicinal Histories of Galen; and as I myself have often times seen. Now that the bones might be so knit together, as to make a Joint, there is need A Ligament. of a Ligament or Band, whose substance is broad and round, its colour white or bloody, such as is the round Ligament which fastens the c T 21. f 7. a a. □ Leg, and the d T 21. f 8. a □ Thigh, and that which unites the e T 21. f 5. A. □ Astragalus with the f T 21. f 5. B. □ Pterna, and that of the Astragalus with the three Bones of the Tarsus, which are termed g T 21. f 5. E E E. □ Aeneiformia. For these bloody, or bloodyish Ligaments, are always interposed between the bones, and are very hard; but those which are drawn about the Articulations, do always appear white. So the Nerve-Gristly Ligaments, which are interposed between the Os Sacrum, and Os Ilium, are observed to be bloody in a Woman newly delivered of her Child. Now every Conjunction of the Bones is made by Nature, either for Motions Why the bones are articulated. sake, or for Perspiration, or for the Passage of some certain Substance, or for the differencing of Parts, or for Security, and to preserve from violence. Conjunctions of the bones for Motions sake, are seen in the Fingers, Wrists, Elbows, Shoulders, Hips, Shanks, Ankles, Ribs, Spondyls; in a word, in all movable Articulations. For Perspirations sake, we see bones joined together in the Sutures of the Skull. For to give passage to some substance or other; we see the like conjunction at the production of the Pericranium, and at the thoroughfare of some certain Vessels, which go partly out, and partly in; to which intent the Sutures of the Skull were contrived. For Securities sake, and to avoid the violence of breaking, etc. we see the said Conjunction▪ in all such bones as are compounded of divers smaller ones. For the differing of parts, certain conjunctions of bones seem to have been contrived in the Bones of the upper Jaw. Having laid this Foundation out of Galens 11. Book, de Vsu Partium, chap. 18. it is an easy matter to prove the sorts and differences of Articulations, out of the Doctrine of Galen himself. The Bones are joined one with another, some by Articulation, or jointing; others Twofold conjunction of bones. What a join is▪ Sorts of joints. by Symphysis, or cleaving together. A Joint termed Articulus, is a Connexion of Bones, ordained either for motion, or for some other Cause. In respect of motion, there are two sorts of Joints▪ The one is contrived for manifest and strong motion, which is called Diarthrosis: The other is ordained for an obscure and difficult motion, or for none at all, and it is called Synarthrosis. Of the former kind of conjunction of bones, viz. Diarthrosis, there are three Particulars of ea●● sort. sorts; Enarthrosis, Arthrodia, and Gynglymos. Of the second kind of Articulation, viz. Synarthrosis, there are in like manner three sorts, Enarthrosis, Arthrodia, and Gynglymos; because Synarthrosis, and diarthrosis, do differ only in the quantity of the motion; as Galen does teach in his Book de Ossibus, which also he manisestly declares in his Book de Dissect▪ Muscul. Chap. 22. near the end. and in the 13. Book de Ossibus. But because a Synathrosis is ordained not only for motion, but for some other cause, as namely for perspiration, the transmission of some substance, the differencing of Parts, and to save from harm by stress and violence; it comprehends three other sorts under it, viz. Sutura, Harmonia, and Gomphosis. These six differences of Synarthrosis or jointing may be proved by sense and by Examples of the sorts. Example. The a T. 10. f. 2. 1. 2. 3. etc. □ Ribs are joined to the b f. 2. A A. □ Brest-bone by an Arthrodia, which in regard of motion may be referred to a synarthrosis. The c T. 21. f. 1. & 2. F. □ Bones of the wrist are coarticulate with the bones of the d f. 1. H H. f. 2. G. □ Metacarpum (Galen de usu partium Lib▪ 2▪ Chap. 8.) but that synarthrosis is made by the way of Arthrodia. The e f. 5. A. □ Astragalus is joined to the f f. 5. C. □ Scaphoides with an obscure motion, which is Enarthrosis▪ Lib. de Ossibus, Chap. 24. Gynglymos is found in the Vertebras of the g T. 10. f. 3. □ Back, which is to be counted as a kind of Synarthrosis; the Gynglimos of the other Vertebras, is a kind of Diarthrosis. Galen in his 26. Book de Compos. Med. secundum locos, and in his 12. Book de usu Partium, calls the sutures h T. 15. f. 1. a a. etc. □ of the Head synarthroses. Also he calls the harmonia of the i T. 8. f. 4. D. □ inferior Jawbone, synarthrosis, in his Comment upon the Ninth part of the second book de Fracturis. The bones of the Ste●●●n or Brest-blade k T. 10. f. 2. A A. □ being immovable, are joined together by a synarthrosis. From Galen in his book de Ossibus and other places of his Writings, I could prove, that the Jawbone and the bones of the Brest-blade are Joined together by symphysis, because they grow together as the Person comes to years, so that no marks are remaining of their former distinction. So Galen in his Book de Ossibus, calls the Conjunction of the inferior Jawbone with the Chin, Symphysis. Symphysis is an immovable union of the Bones, which is performed either with Symphysis, what it is? Its Differences. somewhat intermediate or without. In regard of the threefold Medium, some Symphysis is called Synchondrodis, from the Cartilege Gristle which is the Medium of the Union▪ a second is termed syneurodis, from the nerve which is the medium, a third is called Syssarcodi● from the fleshy Medium. To which we may add a fourth termed Neurochondrodis, because the Union is made by a Medium which is of a mixed nature, being partly nervy, and partly gristly. But more may be seen of this, in Galen his Doctrine of Bones. The differences of symphysis, do appear in the bones of the ᵃ lower Jaw, in the Its differences exemplified Bodies of the ᵇ Vertebras, in the bones of the ᶜ share one with another, and in the conjunctions of the d ●l●an bones with the e Os sacrum, in the growing together of the vertebras of Os sacrum one to another, and of the epiphysis; and in the conjunction of the Os ● Sphenoides with the Occiputs bones, and in the conjunction of other bones, which in children were divided, but in persons come to years, they are found growing together by Symphysis, sine Medio; such as are described by Galen in his Book de Ossibus. The Ligaments which knit the bones together and that phlegmatic humour wherewith the bones are smeared, and the Gristles, both such as are common to divers bones articulated together, and likewise such as are proper to the particular bones to crust the ends of each of them: all these shall be treated of in our particular Muster and Survey of the Bones. The Medicinal Consideration. General diseases of the Bones-Caries The General Diseases of the Bones are, Caries or Rottenness, and putrefaction, which proceeds from a common, or extraordinary Cause, such as is the Venereal Pox. Exostosis, or a swollen knot upon a bone, which arises from the foresaid Causes. Exostosis. Kedmata, mentioned by Hypocrates, which are Chronical Diseases, proceeding Kedmata. from defluxions, common to all Joints, but especially infesting the Hipbone. Of these kind of Diseases, ●ead the Medicinal Definitions of Gorraeus, and Foesius in his Oeconomia Hippocratis. Of kin to this, is Paracelsus his Synovia, or Hydarthrosis, which is a continual Hydarthrosis. Flux of wheyish or blood-watry Humour, out of exulcerated Joints, especially if the Nerves or Ligaments be Diseased. Hildanus in a peculiar Book on this Subject, proves that this Disease Synovia (which was first so called by Paracelsus) is the same with that Disease which is termed Meliceria, by Cornelius Celsus, Lib. 5. Cap. 26. A sure thing it is, that the bones being diseased, do drop blood, and Galen observed as much. The bones are likewise subject to Fracture, or breaking, and Luxation, Dislocation, Fracture. or disjointing. Now a Fracture of a bone, is a Division made in a bone by some external Cause, cutting, or bruising the same. There are two sorts of Fractures, a strait one, and an obliqne, or crooked Its kinds. one. The former is according to the length of the bone, or overthwart. The latter, or obliqne is (if we believe Galen) too curiously differenced by the latter Physicians which have succeeded Hypocrates; for it is said to be Nailfashioned, when the Fracture is partly strait, and partly circular; another sort is called Alphi●●edon, when the bone is broken all to shivers. Another sort there is, which is called Apotrausis, or Detractio, whereby a Fragment of the bone is so taken away, that there remains a mark in the surface of the Bone. Another sort of Fracture, Hypocrates mentions, which he calls Apoclasma, and Galen terms Hapagma, when a bone is broken there where it is joined with another bone. Luxation, or Disjointing, is a Disease of the bone in Situation, when it is removed Luxation. out of its place. There is a two fold Luxation, or disjointing of a bone; the one complete, when the Head of the bone is slipped out of its socket, and this is called Exarthrema, a being out of Joint. The other is Incomplete, and termed Pararthrema, when the bone is in some Its sorts, measure only removed, and lengthened as it were, which is mostly seen in the subluxation of the Thigh. In an Exarthrema, the Leg seems shorter than it was wont to be; in a Pararthrema it seems longer than usual. The Causes of Luxation and Subluxation, that is to say, of perfect, and imperfect Causes, disjointing of any Member, are external, or internal: The External are, a blow, a violent distorsion, or wrenching, a fall, and extension of a Member. The Internal causes are, a thin Humour, which does relax the Ligaments, or a thick Humour which by little and little, fills the Cavity of the Joint, and at last thrusts out the bone, by reason of an Anchylosis, which is bred. Now Anchylosis, is a fault in the Articulation of bones, whereby the Cavity of Anchylosis. a bone, which ought to receive the Head of another bone, is filled up; be it what kind of Articulation it may be, either Enarthrosis, Arthrodia, or Gynglymos. Hereupon the bone thus diseased, either is held bowed in, or remains stretched out, and stiff. And in case without the foresaid Anchylosis, the Tendons of the one side shall in the Limbs be cut in sunder, the strait or crooked bones do no longer serve to bend or stretch out the said Limbs. Chap. 6. Of the Bones of the Skull. HAving diligently considered the Articulations, or jointings of the Bones one Things to be observed principally. unto another, let us now take notice what is observable in every particular bone being fresh, which is not to be seen in the Skeleton, or in dried bones. I will proceed from Head to Foot, according as I am wont to do in my Dissection, and Demonstration of these parts. Now my Demonstration of the bones is twofold; the one I call Osteotome, or Bone-Dissection, in which the bones are separated each from other; the other I term Ossifragium, in which the bones are broken, that their inner structure may be discerned. And in the first place, let us contemplate the twofold Table of the Skull, or Twofold plate. the double Skul-board which is thinner in Women, than it is in Men. The uppermore is thicker, and harder, and more smoothly polished than the nether: but the lower is rough and furrowed as it were, that it might afford place for those Vessels which creep along the Dura Mater, from which some notable Vessels arise, which by the Ears do insinuate themselves between those two plates, or boards of the Skull, for to irrigate the intermediate space. Now that same intermediate space, is a certain spongy Substance, which receives Intermediate space▪ and contains a Marrowy Juice, serving for the nutriment of those bones. The which Marrowy Juice is reddish, by reason of blood flowing out of the small Veins situate in those parts; which is wont ●hen to flow out when the Skull of a living man is boared through with a Wimble, or other boaring Instrument. Now the Skull, according to Hypocrates in his Book de Vulneribus Capitis, is double in the Why the Skull is double? middle of the Head, that is to say, hollow between two plates and boards, that it might contain a Marrowy Juice to nourish the bones. Hypocrates adds, The whole Head, a small part excepted, resembles a sponge full of small Caruncles, or little bits of flesh, which if you press, and squeeze with your finger, you shall perceive blood to drop out of them: also you shall see small Veins running up and down, which abound with blood. Out of the foresaid Caruncles, being bruised with a vehement blow, the blood is squeezed, which putrifying, does corrupt the bone, which in the mean while appears sound on the out side: but the Sanies sweeting out from the inner plate or Skul-board, does corrupt and putresce the very ●rain itself. And if so he when the Skull is razed, you see blood come forth, do not therefore conclude that the Fracture: penetrates the inner plate; because that blood flows out of the space which is between the two plates, or boards of the Skull. That same spongy Hypersarcosis▪ or breeding of proud flesh, which grows up in Proud flesh in Head-wounds, whence it▪ proceeds? wounds of the Head, is bred out of the foresaid Duplicature of the Skul-bone; as Hypocrates has observed. Touching the Fungous Excrescences of the brain, whether they are bred from the broken bone, or from the Dura Mater, see Sennertus in the first Book of his Practice. But Hypocrates his Caruncles▪ are vainly sought for in this intermediate space, whatever Fallopius pleads to the contrary in his Book of the Wounds of the Head, unless a man would call the pungy substance of the bones Sarcia, or Caruncles, in regard of their Function. This intermediate space interpoled between the two plates of the Skull, is called The space between the skulplates, how called. by Hypocrates, Diploe. Howbeit, Galen contrary to the Opinion of the Ancient Physicians, calls the second, and inmost plate of the Skull, Diploe, in the six Book of his Method of Healing. The Use of this Diploe, Duplicature, or spongy substance, is threefold▪ First The use thereof. to receive blood for the nourishment of the Skull Secondly, That the Fleshy Excrescence in the Fractures of the Skull, might grow out of it: Thirdly, That the Fumes of the Brain might more easily be exhaled. Sometimes an Humour is collected between the two plates by way of transcolation, Why there are two plates. which being in process of time corrupted, does cause most excessive pains, which often happens in an ●iveretate Venereal Pox, when the Skull is knobbed, and bunched with a certain Exostosis. This double pla●e or board, of the Skull has been made by a wonderful contrivance of Nature, lest in all blows upon the Head, the wound should penetrate the whole substance of the bone. Hence it comes to pass, that sometimes one plate is cleft while the other remains unhurt. The Whoremaster's Pox does oftentimes eat through the external plate, and sometimes through both the plates, without killing the Patient, who lives a long time after; as Palmarius avouches in Chap. 4. of his Book de Lue Venerea. The like Example you may read in the 18. Chapter of Benivenius his Book de Abditis Morborum Causis. And I myself have often observed the same. The Sutures, although they are a T 15. f 3. a a. b b▪ f 4 b b. etc. very closely united in living Persons, yet are The Sutures. they sometimes very a●t to gape, and to move pain, as Galen reports, towards the end of his third Commentary in Officinam Hippocratis. But they seem not at all inclined to any looseness, or gaping about the meeting together Whether an Issue may be made in the Crown of the Head? of the Sagittal and Coronal Sutures in Persons come to ripeness of Age, where a Fontanel is ᵃ made; and therefore I have often found by Experience, that this part may without any detriment have a Caustick applied thereunto. Which kind of Practice, Fabricius commends in his Chirurgery; others dislike it as dangerous, viz. Mathaeus de Gradis, Vesalius, Lib. 1. Cap. 6. of his Anatomy. Baptista Montanus in his 36. Counsel. Zechius in his Counsels. And Baptv●●a Carcanus in hi● Book of Head-wounds. See Claudinus his Counsels. I confess, that sometimes in Children, this part being soft and gristly, is long ere it grow hand over that it is in grown persons; and Galen has seen it in such Younglings to move and pant, Gal. Lib. 13. Method. Cap. 22. And in such a case to apply a Cautery, were dangerous. The Africans did burn an Issue in the Crown● of their children's Heads; as Mercurialis shows from Herodotus. They did burn the Veins of the Crown of their Heads, with scalding Oesypus, or Sheep's Grease▪ and in case any Convulsion happened they did Remedy the same by the sprinkling of Goats piss thereon. It is written by Herodotus, Aratus, and Arrianus in the Life of Alexander the Whether Blackmeers have Sutures in their Skulls? great, that the Heads of the Aethiopians, and Egyptians had no Sutures, which gave Pareus occasion to write, That the Aethiopians and Moors, and those which inhabit hot Regions towards the South, and the Aequinoctial Line, have Skulls harder than ordinary, having none, or very few Sutures in them. The falsity where of did plainly appear, when I dissected a very swart●y Black-moor publicly in the▪ Medicinal Schools▪ whose Skull was in all things like one of ours. In the Head there are many remarkable Cavities, which the Anatomists call Cavities of the Head. Sinus. These you shall diligently search for, that you may know whether they are void and empty, covered with a thin Membrane, and what communion they have one with another. Now the Cavities are, on each side four. The Maxillary Cavity, which lies concealed within the upper Jaws. The Frontal Cavity, seated in the Forehead, by the Eyebrows. The Sphenoidean Cavity, which lies hidden under the Seat or Saddle of the Sphenoides. The Mastoidean, which is contained within the Mastoides. They are all empty, and covered over with a thin Membrane, only the Mastoidean, is hollow indeed▪ but has no Membrane, but is distinguished into seven, eight, or nine little Cells, as we see in a Beehive. The Entrance of the Maxilary Cavity within the cavity of the Nostrils, is to be seen on the side of Os Spongiosum. The Entrance of the Frontal Cavity is seen in the highest and inmost pa●●s of the Nostrils. The Entrance of the Sphenoidean Cavity we find to be deep. Within the nostrils the spongy bones being taken away. The Ingress of the Maxillary Cavity, is evident without cutting the Bones. The Ingress of the Frontal Cavity is evidently perceived, the Frontal bone being cut in sunder above the Eyebrows: The Ingress of the Sphenoidean Cavity, is discerned, as soon as the inner plate of the Sphenoides is taken away. The entrance of the Mastoidean Cavity, is contained in the left side of the Concha, near the Apophysis Mastoides, and cannot be seen unless the arched Vault of the Concha be broken, or the porus auditorius pulled in pieces. Silvius conceives and demonstrates from Galen that phlegm being transmitted through the little holes of the upper plate, is collected and heaped up within the Whether phlegm may be collected within the Cavity of the Sphenoides. Sphenoidean cavity, and thence conveyed into the Palate: which way of the passage of Excrements, is by Vesalius, Columbus, Falopius, and Valverda rejected: who contradict Galen in this point, and maintain that this excrement is voided through the neighbouring holes which rest upon the Sella Sphenoidea. The reason of Galen and Silvius is, that it is better the excrements should be strained, and kept up for a season in those Cavities, than that a man should be continually spitting, and holding his mouth evermore open. For although the Sphenoidean Cavities, are in the dissections of dead bodies empty, and appear not to be full either of phlegm or serosities: probable notwithstanding it is, that the serous humour which flows and distils out of the Choana, through the sieve-like plate of the Sella equina, is transcolated into the Cavities which are beneath, and from them poured back by certain oval and sufficiently wide Holes, and voided forth into the spongy bones of the Nostrils: neither do they deny, that a part of the serosities, does sweat through the porosities of the inferior table or plate, into the palate. But the serous humour received in the spongy bones of the Nostrils, does by little and little sweat out and pass away, when by its quantity or quality, it provokes nature to an exctetion. For to what purpose think you has Nature framed The use of the sinus Sphenoides. those cavities? Has she done it to make the skull so much the lighter? or that they might be conduit heads or storehouses of air, which is of necessity breathed in, for the Generation of animal spirits? But they cannot be storehouses, because they are a finger's breadth distant from the frontal Cavities, nor have they any continuation or conjunction with them. Again the Air which is required to be exceeding pure, would be defiled by passing to and fro through the spongy bones. Furthermore in the many dead bodies which I have dissected, some of which might be snotty and phlegmatic, I never found the mammillary Processes any larger than usual. But by those passages phlegm ought to be derived unto the Os Ethmoides or Colander Bone; or fluctuating unto the Basis of the brain, it ought of its own accord to flow unto that place, because the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, are seldom perforated before, so as to have a through▪ far into the Nostrils. Wherefore I conceive that all the snot and phlegm of the nostrils is not strained By what ways the phlegm of the nose passes? through the Colander Bone, but that it flows down into the Palate through the four pipes or channels of the Choana, or that being collected in the Cavities of Os-Sphenoides, if it pass through the little holes of the Plate of Os Sphenoides, it may be derived into the Spongy bones of the Nostrils. The said spongy bone is full of holes being distinguished, with bony Cells, in which small Caruncles or bits of flesh are contained, which being swelled, the disease Polypus is bred. Afterward you shall consider the Passage of the Nostrils into the Palate, by these The passages from the Nostrils to the Palate. cavities which are distinguished by the Os a T. 15. f. 6. 1. Vomer. At the root of the pterygoidean Apophysis, there appears an hole compassed with a Gristle, which is the extremity of that passage, which reaches from the From the Ear to the Palate. Ear to the Palate, by help whereof Deaf persons hear, it a man speak into their mouth when it is wide open. Also by help hereof the Ear is most easily purged with masticarories. The Medicinal Consideration. In the Skull, by reason of the space contained between the two plates thereof, hard Primary disoases of the Sćul. Tumours tumours are bred, and almost of a bony nature; yea and some are truly bony, such as are horns. An hard, full and oblong tumour is called Tesiudo, of kin to which is the Tumour Talpa, which also is called Topinaria. There is another tumour which is termed Natta, and grows sometimes chief in the Back, which hangs by a small root. This threefold tumour, if timely care prevent not, is wont to grow to a greater Bulk. Horns are wont to grow out in the Skull, the forehead, and else where; yea and upon other bones. I have seen an horn a finger long, which grew out of the lower part of the Leg, like a spu●. Of these kind of Horns Sennertus has neatly treated, in the fist Book of his Practice. Besides these Tumours the Fracture of the skull is frequent, which proceeds from Fracture a Violent and external Cause. And it is either without or with Contusion. There is a threefold fracture without Contusion, the first is termed diacope, when an Arrow or dart falls upon the Head and peirces deep, the second is called Aposcheiparnismos, which is a kind of planing or shaving as it were, when a piece of the bone is pared away: the third is termed Hedra which is a gap or ra●e made by the cut of a weapon. A fracture with Contusion, if it be straight and in the bone smitten, and immovable, Kind's of fractures. it is termed Fissura or Rima, by the Greeks Rogme: if it be in another bone besides that which was smit, it is termed apeichema, that is to say, a resulting cleft, like the Rebounding of an Echo. If the bone be moved and broken, there is a threefold fracture reckoned; viz. engeisoma, which is a depression of the skull to the Membrane or Meninx of the Brain; Ecpies●…a which is a depression of the said Scul divided into thinner and smaller bits: camaroosis which is a vaulted Elevation of the broken Skull. Enthlasis so called, is indeed a contusion but without fracture, being as it were a flexure or bowing of the soft skull. Which kind of contusion is seen in brazen vessels, as pans and kettles etc. when they are battered only and not broken. In the Bones of the skull we often find a Caries and Exostoosis proceeding from a Caries Exostosis common Cause, but more often from the Whore's Pox. Chap. 7. Of the Inferior Jawbone. The inferior a T. 15. f. 3. L. □ Jawbone is in such as are of years one continued bone, without It's substance. Articulation. any show of division, as far as to the Chin. It's Articulation is very lose, being fastened with an orbicular Ligament. A movable Gristle is spread over the knob thereof, to procure the frecer motion▪ Within the Jawbone there is a crease or Channel cut out, ordained to contain the Vessels, which is separated from the cavity which contains the marrow, that is might afford a small postion of the vessels to every tooth. channel. This Channel of the Vessels is situate in the middle of the Jawbone, and is manifest; and therefore Hyppocaates writ in his book of the Nature of the Bones, that of all bones only the lower jawbone has veins. Cahp. 8. Of the Teeth. Afterwards you shall with an Instrument made for that purpose, draw out by the roots one tooth of every sort, that you may contemplate the Roots and Ligaments of the Teeth, and the form of their holes or socke●s. When the Teeth are broke, you shall find them stuffed with a slimy substance and with threads, which are the vessels. The Cavities are more evident in teeth which are withered and dried; it is the best way to compare the fresh teeth and the dried ones together, and to observe the difference. But that you may discern yourself and demonstrate unto others the distribution The way to show the vessel appertaining unto the Teeth of vessels, viz. of little veins, arteries and nerves into the Teeth: you shall take this course. You shall take an Ox's or a Rams neither jaw (in which these vessels are more apparent) and cut it on the inside, and open it until the marrow and Nerve appear. The marrow being taken away, And the Membrane of the nerve being torn, the Nerve comes in sight, being composed of many little strings, from which certain fine threads and other things resembling veins and Arteries, being wove together, do enter beneath into the Cavities of the Teeth roots. To the a T. 15. f. 6. n n. □ Dog-teeths and the b T. 15. f. 6. m. □ Cutters a nerve is carried which is more thick than ordinary. To the c T. 15. f. 6. o o. □ Grinders according to the quality of their Roots, there is a triple or quadruple very small and exceeding fine nerve distributed. Then drawing a Grinder or Cutter leisurely out of its hole, you shall see very small sibres inserted into the roots of the Teeth, which you shall reckon to be nerves. The teeth being pulled up clean by the Roots, in the lowest part of the said What must be observed in a Tooth that is drawn out? roots, there appears a matter which is partly fibrous, bred of the vessels, and partly clammy, which fastens the tooth into its hole as it were with Glue, by the way of Syssarcosis. An Ox or Sheepes-tooth being cut asunder in the midst, the internal substance being clammy, is manifestly interwoven with vessels. All these things may be evidently demonstrated in the teeth of an Ox's, Calves, or Sheep's Jaw; they are not so clearly discernible in Man; nevertheless you may perceive the roots of the teeth to be bloody and that a nerve creeps closely into the Roots. But in dried teeth the roots are hollow. Chap. 9 Of the Bone Hyoides, and of the Ligaments. There is a Ligament placed under the Beginning of the Musculus Digastricus or twibellie; which is produced from the Apophysis styloides as far as to the Angle of the nether jaw. The situation, colligation and structure of the a T 15. f 11, 12, 13. □ Os Hyoides ought diligently to The Situation of the Os Hyoides. be observed in a dead Body, because they cannot be seen in a skeleton. It is placed in the Throat under the lower jawbone, hanging upon the Apophysis of the Styloides by the help and assistance of Ligaments. It is made up of five bones, the middlemost of which being the greatest and the It's structure. It's fastening. broadest, is termed Basis b T 13. f 11, & 12. A A. □ linguae, from which on either side there shoots forth a little c T 13. f 11, & 12. B B. □ horn, which is for the most part gristly, seldom bony, being fastened to the upper sides of the Cartilago▪ Thuroides, which two little horns are accounted for the sixth and seventh bones. It is worth our consideration which Galen observes in his seventh book of the use Why it has many Ligaments? of the Parts Chap. 19 How that this same bone is kn●● and fastened not only by Muscles; but it fastened by Ligaments and membranes unto the Apophyses of the Styloides, and to the upper Horns of the Thyroides; lest one Muscle being palsied, that same counterpoise and equability in the motion of the Muscles should be dissolved, whereby it should come to be drawn on one side more than the other, or slip downwards, which would bring great detriment, and discommodity not only to the voice, but also to the swallow. Nature providing against this Inconvenience, hath tied and fastened it by four Ligaments to the Stoyloidean Apophyses, and to the Cartilege or Gristle which is called Thyroides. Howbeit, the Hyoidean Bone does in women appear smaller and thinner, and consists of fewer little Bones, whose use is supplied by the suspensory Ligaments, which in them are longer than in Men. You shall likewise observe that only the Epiglo●●●● is received in the Cavity of Hyoides, the Tongue resting itself upon the upper side of the basis. Chap. 10. Of the Heads Motion, and Ligaments▪ THe Head is moved by a strait, or obliqne motion upon the ● second Vertebra, Which Vertebra the Head is moved upon. which in its hinder part is a finger's breadth distant from the first ᵇ Vertebra. And the first Vertebra is so closely and firmly fastened to the hind▪ part of the Head, that it cannot be stirred, or agitated so much as with one's Hand. Also the Tooth-fashioned ᶜ Apophysis is so fastly united to the ●ody of the second Vertebra, that in the bending, and obliqne motion of your Head, you may not hurt the Spinal Marrow. Hence you may be assured of the verity of that Opinion of Vesalius, and other Anatomists, touching the motion of the Head, how it is moved upon the second Vertebra, both in its right, and obliqne motions. For seeing the Head cannot be moved with a circular motion upon the first Vertebra, because such things as are moved with a circular motion, aught to rest upon one single Bafis. Yet the Opinion of Galen might be confirmed, by that Natural growing together of the two first Vertebrae of the Neck, which were joined and fastened together in a certain Soldier, who having in the year 1611. killed a Man in a Tavern, was hanged, and his body brought into the Anatomical Theatre of the University: where while his bones were boiling to make a Skeleton, it was observed that the two first and uppermost Vertebrae of the Neck, did Naturally grow together; yet did he in his life time freely move his head every way, as I have been informed by others. Celsus, before Vesalius and Columbus, described the motions of the Head, in these words: The upmost Vertebra does altogether sustain the Head, receiving the small processes thereof through two ᵃ Cavities: whence it comes to pass that the head is bunched above, beneath, on every side. The second is inserted into the first, for as much as concerns the circuit thereof. The upmost part is terminated with a smaller circle, and therefore the upmost encompassing the second, giveth way to the Head to be moved sidelongs also. In the Articulation of the Head, three Ligaments are observed; the one is circular, The Ligaments of the Head. which compasses the first and second Vertebra within, as far as to the hind-part of the Head. The other two do appertain unto the Tooth-fashioned Apophysis: the one fastens the said Apophysis unto the body of the first Vertebra; the other arising from the top of the Apophysis Odontoides, is inserted into the Hind-part of the Head. Chap. 11. Of the Inside of the Ear. LEt us now approach unto the internal Cave of the Ear, which has been inaccessible Three Cavities of the Ears. to the ancient Physicians, and let us diligently survey the admirable Architecture thereof. There are contained three Cavities within the same, disposed in the sciruation and order following. The first is the a T 20. f 7. B. etc. □ Concha, the second b f 9 B B. □ Labyrinthus, and the third is the c f 9 A A. □ Cochlea. In the Porch of the Concha, is placed the d f 4, 5. B. □ Tympanum, which is not green as Why the Drum is placed obliquely. Pauvius imagines, neither is it directly opposed to the external hole of the Ear, but stretched out slantwa●es before the same, lest any small matters should fall, or fly into the Ear, and finding the passage clear and open, should hurt the Drum. Whether anything be fallen into the Ears, may in such as are living, and have wide Ears, be seen in the Sun, or by holding a Candle near the same. Now the whole structure of the e T 8. f 6, 7, 8, etc. □ Concha wherein three little Bones, the Timpanum; The Parts of the Concha. the string annexed to the Tympanum, and a Muscle are contained, are to be seen at one cast of the Eye in young Children and Infants: The Auricular Apophysis, which is then an Epiphysis, being plucked away with the point of a Penknife; which must be done within the Skull. But in grown Men, which are come to maturity, all these cannot so well be seen The way to show the parts of the Ear. and demonstrated, because whiles the Os Lithoides, is cut up towards the hind-part of the head, it is impossible but that somewhat appertaining to the internal structure of the Ear, should be pulled in pieces. And thus you shall break the Os Petrosum, the Marrow of the Brain being taken away, and the Ear plucked up by the Roots, and the circumjacent flesh being removed. The Os Lithoides, comprehending the Aedisice of the Ear, you shall cut asunder with very wel-steeled, and extreme sharp Knife's, beginning at the external passage. Then having pulled back the vaulted roof of the Ear, that is to say, having taken off the upper part of the Os Lithoides, you shall see the three little Ear-bones, The Mallet, Anvil, and Stirrup. viz. The Malleolus, or Mallet; the Incus, or Anvil; and the Stapes, or Stirrup. ᶠ T 20. f 7. A. □ ᵍ f 7. B. □ ʰ f. 7. C. □ Then you shall see the ᵃ Drum with its string, and small Muscles fastened to the little bones, both within and without the Drum; which are indeed more plainly to be seen in other living Creatures, than in Men. For in Men you can discern only one Muscle, which is seated on the left side of the The Muscles internal Ear towards the hind-part of the head, being fastened to the little head of the Maller or hammer. But there are found two Tendons, or rather Ligaments; one which stays the tail the Ligaments. or handle of the Mallet; and a second which is fastened tooth up per corner of the Sti●●●p. 〈◊〉, or little Nerve, is stretched out upon the Mallet, that it may hold and The Drum●●ring. 〈◊〉 Mallet upon the Drum. Moreover, in a Skull newly boiled or dried, you may discern the three little Ear-bones within the Concha. If you shall peep in foreright into the external passage, and hold your Eye close, with benefit of a clear daylight, or of a Candle, you may draw the said little bones every one of them out with a pin. Chap. 12. Of the Clavicula. THe Clavicula in its ᵈ Articulation to the Sternum, has a soft Cartilege, or The Gristle of the Clavicula. Gristle interposed, that it might more easily give way, in motions of the Arm and Shoulderblade. You shall observe why it is form after the manner of an Italian S. The Claviculae It's Ligament. are tied and fastened together, by the Mediation of a strong Ligament. Chap. 13. Of the Breastbone. THe Sernum, or Breastbone, is in persons come to years, of a bony c T 10. f 1. A A. T. 8. f. 2. A. □ substance, but different in Nature from the rest of the bones, because it is of a reddish colour. ᵃ T 20. f 4, & 5. B. □ ᵇ T 21. f 1. B B. f 2. a. □ Galen will have it compounded of seven Bones, so as that the several bones of the Of how many particular bones, the Brest-bone is made up. Breast do by way of mutual articulation, answer to the several true Ribs, which Hypocrates seems to confirm. The Breast bone a T. 10. f. 2 A A. T. 8. f. 2. A. □ growing together in itself, has obliqne discriminations, there where the Ribs are fastened unto it. Howbeit in persons grown up, there are three, seldom four divisions remaining in the Breast bone. Valverda says that the Brest-bone is compounded for the most part of six or seven bones, which in elderly persons, do so grow together, that it seems composed, only of two or three Bones. Sometimes also, though very seldom, it consists of eleven bones, as I saw at Rome in the year 1554. ●n a girl about seven years old, this bone divided into six bones, of which the five last, were cut from the bottom to the top, through the length of the Bone. Bartholomew Eustachius adds, how that it many times falls out, which none has yet observed, that the Bones of the Brest-bone, the first and last excepted, viz. all the middle ones, or at least some of them, are divided by a most evident line, sometimes straight and sometimes crooked, through the middle longwayes: by which means it comes to pass, that the Breast bone is reckoned to consist frequently of ten nine, seven, or eight bones. Sometimes the Brest-bone is pierced through the middle with a large Hole, which The Hole of the Breast bone. was observed by Silvius and Eustachius, being ordained for the transmitting of Vessels. I have myself often observed the same, especially in women. In one woman the hole was so large, on the inside of the Brestbone, as that a man might put his little singer into it, and her Chest did consist of thirteen ribs on each side. Nicolas Massa brags that he was the first observer of that Hole in the Brestbone, that somewhat might thereby breathe forth of the Mediastinum and the neighbouring parts of the Breast, or rather to give passage to the Vena Mammaria which is spread and branched forth into the Duggs. In large-dugd and corpulent women, their large dugs being removed, I have observed the Brest-bone to be sharp and the Breast narrow, which was the Cause of shortness of Breath in such women, the which narrowness of Breast was caused, 〈◊〉 the weight of their Duggs. That representation of the Breastbone as branched or jagged, is not true no● natural: The Natural shape of the Brest-Bone. for the Brest-bone according to Galen resembles a Dagger or sword, whereupon the whole Bone, is by some termed Xyphoides or sword-like bone. The Gristly a T. 8. f. 2. C C. □ Branches being taken away from either side, which are parts of the Ribs, the Hast of the Dagger or sword Handle, will be in the upper part, and its point in the Cartilago b T. 8. f. 2. B. Xiphoides. The figure of which Swordlike Gristle or Cartilago Xiphoides, by such as are Of the Cartilago Xiphoides diligent observers, is found to be various: for sometimes it is single and triangular, sometimes it is double, and like the Herb Hippoglossum, Horsecongue or Tongue wort it has the larger part resting upon the smaller: sometimes it is tripartite and resembles a Trident; and other whiles it is bipartite resembling a ●ork or Rake. Nicolaus Massa says that the Barbarous writers call it malum Granatum, the pomegranate, as resembling the flower of that Apple. Galen conceives that it is placed there to defend the stomach and the Septum It's Use. Transversum. But because the stomach is far distant there from, it seems to be framed only for the midtifs sake, or rather to hold up the Liver, fastened thereto by a ligament. Amatus Lusitanus, in the 95. Cure of his fift Centure, observes that the Cartilago It's Hole. Xiphoides is bored through for perspirations sake, that the filthy vapours of the the stomach might by that hole breath out; which is a simple Conceit. For unless the Cartilege is biparti●e, it is perforated to give passage for the vena mammaria interna, and in wounds if there be no hole in the Brest-bone, it is found in the Cartilago Xyphoides. This Cartilege being pressed down and crooked in, does so hurt the Liver being It's crooking seated beneath it, that infants are by that means killed with an Atrophy or Consumption, and in grown persons it ●au●es perpetual vomiting, until it is reduced to a natural posture. Chap. 15. Of the Ribs. Every Rib does consist of a twofold substance, the one of which is a T. 8. f. 2. 1. 2. 3. etc. □ bo●y, which Twofold substance of the Ribs. makes up the greatest part ●● of the Rib; the other is b T. 8. f. 2. C C. □ gristl●e, of unequal length, which is joined to the Brest-bone, by that sort o● Articulation which is called Arthrodia, that in the viseing and falling of the Chest, it may yield more easily. But they have another a●●●culation with the vertebras of the Backbone which is twofold in every Rib. Now there are seven, which are called true and perfect Ribs, because they are The true Ribs joined to the Brest-bone by way of Arthrod●a; unto which sometimes an eighth is added, which has been found more than once in the dissection of some bodies, being fastened to the Roo●e of the Cartilago mucro●ata. And ●his is the Cause why Aristotle, whom Pliny thought it no disparagement to imitate, has reckoned up sixteen true Ribs. The five lower are called d T. 8. f. 2. 8. 9 10. 11. 12. Bastard and Imperfect Ribs, because they do not The Bastard Ribs. reach unto the Brest-bone, but are terminated in a long Cartilege which is reversed upwards, and so grov one unto another. ᶜ T. 8. f. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. □ Chap. 16. Of the Backbone. The Musculous flesh wherewith the Backbone is covered being removed, its admirable The shape of the Backbone. figure is e●sil● discerned, which is partly straight and partly obliqne, sometimes bending inward and sometimes outward, which Hypocrates first discovered, and Duretus, Hypocrates his Ghost has described in Coacis. Every where between two vertebras, a thick cartilege is placed in the middle The Gristles of the Vertebras● like glue. Galen ●● his Book de Ossibus, writes that it is an hard and in some sort Gristlie Ligament. All the vertebrae o● turning Joints of the Back, are covered on the outside with Their Membranes. an hard membrane; and within they have a strong membranous ligament, drawn a long from the highest vertebra as low as to the Os sacrum, which is there placed and wrapped about (besides two other membranes) to defend and preserve the spinal Marrow. I have often found in bodies that were hanged and burnt, and have been informed A fable of the Cabalists touching a bone which they call Luz. by the Executioner, that it is a ridiculous fable, which the Cabalists relate of a certain Vertebra, viz. that in the Back is found a certain Vertebra which they have termed Luz. out of which as from a seed, the Bones shall be regenerated and spring up at the General Resurrection. This Bone Luz ●o called, Cornelius Agrippa and Vesalius will have to be in the foot. Howbeit Hieronymus Magius in his sift Book de Exustione Mundi, relates that Adrianus learned experimentally of Rabbi Joshua Ben Anime, that the foresaid Bone is one of the Vertebrae of the Back. For he found in the Back bone, one bone that a milstoneturning upon it would not break, the fire could not burn it, the water would not dissolve it, and at last being laid upon an Anvil and smitten with a sledge or smiths-hammer, it was so far from being broken in the least, that the Anvil was cracked and the sledge broken the Bone receiving in the mean while no detriment. Which is as false as false can be. For all the Vertebrae, may be broken in pieces, burnt and reduced to ashes. Whence we may judge what credit is to be given to the Cabalists, who in things manifest, do so impudently mock and abuse us. If Aristotle had observed the structure of the eleventh or twelfth vertebras, he The structure of the Loins would not have written in his third Book de part Anima, That the Back is fleshy, but the Loins without flesh, because the Bending-places of all parts are void of flesh. But the Loins are more fleshy than the Back. But the Articulation of the twelfth vertebra is different from all the rest, being the Cause of all Motion which is performed thereupon, for both above and beneath, it receives, and is not received, as is observed, in other Articulations of the Vertebrae. From the Loins you shall descend to the Coccyx or Crupper-Bone, and you shall observe its structure consisting of three bones, its spongy reddish substance and Crupper bone. triangular shape. Which Part we read does in some Nations sprout out like a tail. Pliny records in the 22. the Chapter of his seventh Book, that in India there is a race of Men that have hairy tails, and are incredible swift. And Paulus venetus, in the 28 Chap. of the fift Book of his Travels, does avouch that in the Kingdom of Lambri, there are men that have tails like dogs a span long: who dwell not in Cities but in the Mountains. The Nubiensian Arabic Geography mentions a tailed Nation, in an Island of the Eastern seas which is called Namaneg. Page 70. I suppose that it is but a fable which Historians relate touching the Kentish-long-tailes in England, how that God to revenge the Injury done to Tho. Becket the Archbishop of Canterbury, caused Tails to sprout out of the Kentish Crupperbones. When the Crupper-bone suffers a Luxation inwards, a man cannot (according to Avicen) draw his Ankles, towards his buttocks, neither can he bend his Hams, which is confirmed by the Experience of Ambrose Pareus. This Impediment is caused by compression of a very thick nerve seated on the hind-side of the Leg, which creeps along near the Crupper-bone. The said bone is easily reduced, by a man's finger put into the fundament. In the next place you shall fall to dissect the Vertebras of the back, that you may contemplate the admirable fabric of the spinal Marrow, wiz. how in the extreem The way to dissect the ver●●a's of the Back. parts thereof the nerves are parted, ending in the shape of an Horse-tail; by reason of millions of little nerves woven together, which being agitated in water and dishevelled, do express the shape of an horses tail. Now you shall dissect the Vertebre in this manner; Having taken away all the ribs at their joints, you shall fasten the Backbone to the table with two iron hooks above and beneath your section, as ●oiners are wont to fasten their boards. Then with your incision knives you shall forcibly cut on every side about the conjunction of each Vertebra, in order cutting off every vertebra, with their obliqne apophysis which help their articulation, till you come unto the Os sacrum. This is a painful work; but he that would eat the kernel, must of necessity crack the shell. Before the fistula ossea be cut off to discover the spinal marrow: a few things are to be premised touching the natural constitution of the spinal marrow, and the Origination of the Nerves. The Spinal Marrow springs from the Brain and petty▪ brain, and though it The Natural constitution of the spinal marrow. appear like the marrow of the Brain, yet is it in some things unlike, because softer and besides its two membranes propagated from the Mening, wherewith it is enfolded, it is encompassed with a third membrane strong and nervous, which hinders the spinal marrow from bruiseing or breaking, when we stoop or any ways bend our Backs. I am not certain whether or no, that same membrane which is propagated from the Crassa Meninx have any pulsation: nor whether the spinal marrow be divided into two cavities according to the length of the backbone as far as the loins. Certain it is, that the spinal a T. 18. f. 5. A. □ marrow descending by the b T. 2. f. 2. a. etc. □ ●istula ossea, grows continually harder, and smaller, till it come unto the Loins, where it spends itself into little c T. 18. f. 2. o. □ cords, and springs resembling an horse-tail; that in that part where it suffers violent motions, it might be out of danger of breaking. The Nerves of the spinal Marrow are made up of divers little threads, fastened d T. 24. f. 9 etc. 10▪ etc. □ one to another, and contained in the tenuis Meninx: which little filaments or threddy substances, do rise so much the higher, by how much more the spinal marrow descends. And that nature might by all means possible provide for the security of the Nerves; It's Original. when they come forth of the holes of the vertebras, she has compassed them above with a thick substance, which does so closely and firmly knit and bind ●…ogether the sibres of the nerve, that they cannot be drawn asunder one from another. After which knot and egress, they are easily separated. But I beseech you observe Progress▪ the cunning Industry of Nature in the going forth of a nerve. Which that it might be less subject to rapture, seeing that it is as yet clothed only with the tenuis Meninx, she has not drawn it through that hole which is nearest its original, but through a lower, which when the nerve has passed, it does not go unto the next rib, but descends to a lower, which when it has reached, it is divided into two, and turns back the lesser branch towards the spina, and carries the greater to the fore parts. It is a Question amongst Anatomists how the Animal faculty can with the spirit How the animal spirit is carried through the Nerves? be carried through the Nerves into the whole Body; because in none of the Nerves except the optic, there is found any hole or poor or spongy substance; but we find them all solid, woven together of many small threads according as the Bulk and magnitude of every one requires. Caesalpinus in his 5 Book of Peripatetic Questions, supposes that those little threads are a multitude of small veins and Arteries, which make up one body as it were a faggot, being continuations of the Branches of the Rete mirable, which may be imagined, but cannot be demonstrated: or at least that between the little membran●… Co●…ry nerve, a very thin animal spirit is diffused which runs swiftly to the utmost 〈◊〉 the limbs. But I see ●ot how Caesalpinus can demonstrate such a continuation of the Rete mirabile with the Nerves of the spinal marrow. Out of the spinal marrow a T. 18. f. 1. D. I. K. etc. 28 pair of nerves do take their Rise, seven out of the How many Nerves proceed from the spinal marrow. Neck; twelve out of the Back; five out of the loins; four from the Os sacrum, the branches whereof to search out, is a wearisome piece of work, and must be done in a dead body provided for that intent alone, and with diligent Inspection. The medicinal Consideration. The dignity of the spinal marrow with reference to the necessity of Life, is equal The Dignity of the spinal marrow. to that of the Brain, and therefore Hippocrates termed it Aion, because he believed that the vitality of the animal was placed therein: as Erotianus proves in his Onomasticon and after him Foesius in his Oeconomia Hippocratis. Plato in his Timeus does acknowledge the spinal marrow to be the foundation of Life Beneath the Head. and Hypocrates himself teaches that men have most grievous sicknesses and hard to cure a●iseing from the marrow of their Back: for a fluxion thereinto causes a consumption, and its drying up and withering is a grievous disease, and a Man dies if the marrow of his Back be wounded. In a word, Hypocrates in the 2d of his Predictions says that if the spinal marrow be diseased, either by reason of a fall or upon any other occasion, or its own accord, the Patient becomes both ●ame in his Thighs, so that he feels not when he is touched; and also in his Belly and bladder impotent, so that at first he voids neither Urine nor dung, save upon mere necessity▪ but when the disease grows older, both dung and Urine come away of themselves, without any forcing of the Patient, and a short while after he dies the death. From a flux into the Back-marrow an hidden and undiscernible Consumption arises: but when it flows back into the Vertebrae and the flesh, a Dropsy is engendered; so says Hypocrates in his Book de Locis in Homine. How the consumption of the Back proceeds from the Marrow, the same Hypocrates does accurately teach us in his ● Book De Morbis. The natural figure of the Backbone. Before we declare the Diseases of the Ossea ●istula, I must show you the natural figure of the spina or Back bone; which is Ithuscolios' straight bowed through the whole length of it: but in the Neck and Loins it is Ithu-lordos straight bowed inward, in the back it i▪ Ithu-cuphis straight bowed outward, and therefore it is easy ●…asses of the Backbone. to declare the disea●s which viciate the Backbone, such as are Lordosis, Cuphosis, Scoliosis, and, Seisis. Lordosis, is a disease of the Backbone, when the vertebras thereof, are out of their Lordosis. place, and turned inward or forward. Cuphosis, is a disease of the Backbone, when its Vertebrae are dispointed and Cuphosis turned outwards or backwards. Lordosis happens in the Back, as Cuphosis in the Neck and Loins. Scoliosis is a crooking or wreathing the Backbone to one side. Scoliosis. Scisis is such a Commotion of the Vertebrae of the Backbone, as that they remain indeed in their places, but so as their frame and fashion is disordered. Scisis. Scoliosis is the Inclination of the Backbone to one side or another, when we go, depends upon some fault in the twelft Vertebra of the Back, where the motion of the The cause of Scoliosis. Backbone, is performed. This Vertebra is received by its Neighbours above and beneath, and does not receive, as all other Vertebrae do beside. For it is Jointed not by way of Gynglimus but by way of Arthrodia; and therefore if its Apophyses either upper or nether shall be depressed; it cannot sustain the ●ru●ke of the body bolt upright in motion, but it must of necessity lean to one side or another: and this fault comes to People when they are Childr●… being brought into the world with them, or caused by ill carrying, or b●… of the softness of those Vertebrae while the Child is forced to use its Legs, ●●oner than is fitting. I have showed another Cause of halting according to Galens doctrine in my Chapter of the Thighs. Those two Causes of halting are irreparable and incurable. The Luxation of the second Vertebra of the Neck, causes a squinzie, which in few hours does choke the Patient, because it cannot be restored into its place. The diseases of Os sacrum are of great Moment, whether they be tumours or ulcers, by reason of its natural constitution, the whole Bone being in a manner spongy, fistulous, and perforated within and without: and therefore when this Bone is Diseased, ●he Patien is in danger of his Life, as Hypocrates observes in his Book de Glandulis. In his third book De Fracturis he gives us to understand, that the Os sacrum being exulcerated, is not cured without very great difficulty, which Galen also con●…s in his Comments. Langius in his Epistles, relates, that he saw two gallant Gentlemen worn away with incredible raging pain, their Os sacrum being putrified: so that in conclusion they consumed away and died. Chap. 16. Of the Scapula. Having diligently Viewed the trunk of the Body, you shall proceed unto the It's Articultion with the Brachium. Limbs▪ and you must principally observe the Articulation of the T. 21. f. 1. A. □ Scapula or Shoulderblade with the b T. 21. f. 1. C. □ Arm, which is made by the way of Arthrodia, by the coming between a most thick and nervous Ligament, which does round about embrace the whole Joint. Also four muscles viz: the c T. 22. f. 3. A. □ Supraspinatus, d T. 22. f. 3. B. □ infraspinatus the e T. 22. f. 1. & 3. C. □ Rotundus minor, Its Muscles. and f T. 22. f. 1. D. □ Subscapularis, do with their broad tendons encompass the said joint. The Cavity of the g T. 21. f. 2. c. □ Head Omucopole, being not sufficiently proportioned to receive It's cavity. the Shoulder: which was so contrived to make the motion more easy and free, but it is augmented with a Gristle which crowns the Lips of its Cavity. Then you shall discover under the h T. 22. f. 1. A. □ Deltoides a broad and remarkable Ligament, It's Ligament. which reaches from the Shoulder-tip as far as to the Coracoides Apophysis, that it may hold in the Arm aloft, to prevent Luxation upwards. Afterwards you shall observe the extremity of the T. 21. f. 2. ● □ Clavicula articulated with It's ArtiCulation with the Clavicula. the Shoulder-tip or Acromium, which is therefore termed Catapleis, although Galen in the 12. Chapter of his Book of the dissection of Muscles, does call the first upper Rib by that name, because it's placed beneath the Clavis. Ruffus' Ephesius calls the Acromium, the coupling▪ band of the Clavis and Scapula: but Eudemus says that it is a very little Bone, which in children is a most exact gristle, which though in process of time it degenerate into a Bone, yet until they be 18. years old, it retains much of the substance of a gristle contrary to the nature of all the other bones. Some whiles it grows so highly together with the spin of the Scapula, that in a person of middle age wrestling or exerci●eing▪ it may easily be separated, which happened to Galen, as himself tells us in his first Book de Articulis. The like accident he observed in another, as he relates in Comment. ad Part. 1. Sect. 1. de Officina. Hippocrtes himself takes notice of the Luxation of this Bone, in his Articulis: where he says that the Acromium or shoulder-point is of a different nature in mankind, from that which it is in other Creatures. Upon the Neck of the scapula rests an ᵃ Apophysis which in children is an Epiphysis: The use of the Apophysis coracoides. from the likeness to a Crow's bill or an ancher, it is termed coracoides and ancuroides. It prohibits the shoulder from slipping out on that side, according to Galen in Com. in part 1. Sect. de Art; and therefore it was framed for the security and strength of the Articulation. For when the Actions of the Hand and arm are forwards, the shoulder would easily be unjointed, unless it were retained by the coracoides: and therefore the laxation of the shoulder is seldom towards the fore part; Hypocrates did observe it once, and Galen saw it five times at Room, as himself relates in his comment: ad Part. 4. Lib. 7. de Articulis. Now the pars of the Scapula he thus distinguished: as much of the whole Commissure The parts of Scaplua how named by Galen. or Jointing, as is subject to the sight he called Omos; & that part which is under the knitting of the shoulder, he called Epome, which we term Acromion: and that broad part of the Scapula which is situate behind, and is covered with muscles, is by Galen termed Omoplatae. From this place we may gather & fish out the Interpretation of an obscure passage in Cornelius Celsus, in his eighth Book Again from the Neck two broad bones on either hand do go unto the Scapulae, our Countrymen call them Scoptula operta, the Greeks term them omoplatas, Celsus calls them Scopula operta, because they stick out By Celsus. like boughs of Trees, and are situate in the upper part of the Chest. For the tops of Mountains were by the ancient Latins termed Scopula, which Tertullian in his Book de Pallio, calls Montium Scapulas. Also the small branches of trees were called Scopi, hence the phrase Warum scopi vine branches used by Varro in his first Book de Re Rustica. Cato speaks of Scopulae myrti Myrtle branches. It is worth observation which Women by long experience have learned viz. that Whether broad shouldered Men beget large children. broad shouldered Men do for the most part beget great Children, because they are very hot hearted. And Galen says in his Arsparva, that by how much the Heart is hotter, by so much the Chest is larger. And therefore Forestus his wife's Mother, would not marry her daughters to broad breasted and broad shouldered Men: for she was afraid lest they should die in their travil by reason of the largeness of their Children, which Forestus says he had often seen come to pass in the 70 Observation of his 28. Book. The Cause of this is as hard to assign as of another inconvenience, with which Why french maidens have their right shoulder higher than the left? the young maids of France, especially the Gentry are infested: Whose right shoulder is frequently higher and fuller than their left: so that among an hundred virgins you shall hardly find ten that have well proportioned shoulders. Whether it is caused by the more frequent and stronger motion of the right arm, whereby the shoulder blade in widened, and raised up, by means of the interjacent muscles lifting themselves up. Ad thereunto that in persons that are grown up; their right shoulder is more heavy than there left, if we believe Amatus Lusitanus in the last Cure of his 4 Centure. Why is the right Hand stronger than the left? and why are there so few Ambodexters Why so few that can use both hands alike? that can use both hands alike? Is it because the Lungs and Liver do incline more to the right side than to the left? Or is it because Nurses when they teach children to go, do draw them on by their right hand. Is it because Mothers would maketheire daughters low shouldered while they study to make them small and waspe-wasted? For as Terence long since said, if a Girl have a good habit of Body and burnish a little, they say she is a champion or wrestler, and therefore they pinch their bellies and withdraw their food, and though naturally of good constitutions, they never leave tampering till they make them like Bulrushes; mere waspe-wasted Rush-Candles. Which is done, not without manifest detriment to their Health; whiles by the overgreat pinching in of the lower part of their Chest, the upper parts thereof are enlarged, whence proceeds that same sticking out of their shoulders, or from contorsion of the Backbone, its natural shape is vitiated and depraved. Chap. 17. Of the Humerus, Cubitus and Radius. In all shoulders about the middle and inward part towards the Ribs, there is a The shoulderhole. manifest open hole tending downwards, and evidently piercing into the substance of the Bone, through the which a remarkable vein does insinuate itself into the Cavity of the Bone, that it may nourish the inner Marrow; whence it comes to pass, that the whole marrow of this Bone appears bloody when the Bone is broke. The Articulation of the a T. 21. f. 1. C. □ Brachium with the b T. 21. f. 1. D. □ Cubit, is fastened and encompassed It's Ligament. with a membranous and nervie Ligament. The c T. 21. f. 1. E. □ Radius is adjoined to the Cubit, that it might direct the obliqne motions of Why the Radius is joined to the Cubitus? the Arm, which are performed downwards and upwards, which motions, having taken away the Muscles, you may observe, by turnning the Radius to and fro backwards and forwards. The d T. 21. f. 2. c. □ Cubitus and the e T. 21 f. 2. d. □ Radius, do in the middle way part one from another, Why they part one from another? that the Radius in a semicircular motion, might be more freely moved, and that a larger seat might be afforded for the muscles, which in that part are many. Between this space there is interposed a membranous a T. 22. f. 2. e e. □ Ligament, by help of Why a Ligament is interposed? which the Cubitus and Radius are more nearly and straight combined, and the interior muscles are separated from the external. It helps also the equality of their motion, that both might be bend, or stretched outright at one and the same time. These two Bones, are in their extremities fastened together, by a very different Their Articulation with other Bones. joint; above, the Cubitus receives the Radius, but beneath, the Cubitus is received by the Radius, the Bulk and thickness of the substance being changed. For the Radius is at the wrist thicker, that receiving the greater part of the wrist, it might more conveniently move the same by an obliqne motion. But the Cubitus at the Brachium is broader, because that bone alone is articulated with the brachium; the Articulation of the Radius with the knob of the Brachium, is thin. Lastly you shall observe, whether or no the styloides b T. 21. f. 1. □ apophysis of the Cubit do touch the wrist, being fastened thereunto by way of a joint. Hypocrates observed the external part of the Cubit to be dislocated, in Lib de Arctic. Which kind of Luxation Dalechampius observed, as himself avers in his Comments upon the Surgery of Paulus Aegineta. They who deny that the Cubit in a Man does touch the wrist, do allege that there comes between them a thick and movable Gristle, which fills that space; and in very deed that same Cartilege or Gristle, seems to be adjoined by way of a supplement. Chap 18. Of the Wrist. The c T 21. f. 1. F F. □ wrist and d T. 21. f. 1 D. E. □ Radius, are joined one to another by a nervous▪ Ligament, which infolds the Articulation. Moreover another ᵉ Nervous ligament, is observed, being shaped like a Ring, which compasses the wrist round about, which contains within it the tendons which are carried through the cavity of the wrist, and which lie upon the back of the wrist, saveing some particular ones: howbeit on the outside it seems small. The Wrist a T. 21. f. 3. □ bones are eight, disposed into two orders or ranks. Number of the wrist bones. The first order consists of three bones. The second is made up of four bones. The fourth bone is over and above, out of rank and order; but we may with Silvius refer it to the first order, Seeing it rests upon the third bone of the first order. Howbeit Vesalius accounts it a sesamoidean bone, because in this place it fills an empty space. But how can it have the use of sesamoidean, seeing it is not interposed between Bone and Bone? It hangs over another, that it might form that cavity, which is in the inner part of the wrist, and to this bone the Muscle Cubiteus flex or carpi does adhere. The three wristbones of the first order, being joined together, do make a cavity, Their Articulation. which receives two Bones of the second order, which being joined one with another, do make the joints Head: whence you may know that the first order is obscurely moved with the second, and that ᶜ the articulation is by way of Arthrodia, and in a dead body, having taken away the tendons, you may discover this motion. The rest of the wrist bones, being articulated with the Metacarpium, do cause no motion at all, or a very obscure one. It is very rare to find nine bones, in the wrist; howbeit some have found so many. Chap. 19 Of the Metacarpium, Fingers and Sesamoidean Bones. After the wrist follows the b T. 21. f. 1. H H. f. 2. G. Metacarpium which is framed of five bones, if we believe ●elsus and Rufftus, whom Pliny does favour, when he attributes only two joints unto the thumb; Lib. 11. Cap. 43. Galen does better, who separates the first bone of the a T. 21. f. 1. G G. f. 2. H. □ Thumb. from the Metacarpium, Of how many Bones the Metacarpium. consists? because it is joined to the wrist by an Arthrodial diarthrosis, with evident motion. But the bones of the metacarpium are articulated to the wrist by way of synarthrosis, without motion. Ad hereunto, that this bone is shorter than the bones of Metacarpium, is not conterminous to them; has a contrary situation and a different motion. For the Thumb is termed pollex a pollendo, because it alone is equivalent to the The▪ Bones of the Thumb. other four fingers. That it might be strong and substantial, it was requisite that it should have three bones; & that it might perform manifest and strong motions, it has peculiar muscles and they are affixed unto the first Bone. When the Athenians would render the Aeginetae, their emulators, wholly unfit for warfare and Navigation, they cut their Thumbs of. And we call such as are cashiered for their cowardice Polletrunci, thumb-les companions. They were by the ancients in way of merriment termed Murci. The Metacarpium therefore is compounded, only of four bones, two of which are immovable, the other two which are under the ring finger, are manifestly moved. In that same space where the Thumb is joined to the Brachialis, there is a certain cavity, in which the Arabian Cautery was usually celebrated, which is largely and elegantly described by Gesnerus in his Appendix to the Art of Chirurgery. And it is no wonder if some at this day undertake to cure the venereal pox, by applying mercurial water to this part, which ea●es, through the skin, and pe●ces so deep as to flux the patiented. In the hollw of the hand, a transverse ligament is observed, which connects the The Ligaments of the Hand. The Sesamoidean Bones. row of fingers to the bones of the Metacarpium. Within the palm of the Hand you shall find divers Sinewy-Ligaments. There are a few sesamoidean bones found in the Inside of the Hand▪ There are none in the outside. They are found hidden among the first jointings of the fingers. The Thumb in its second and third joint has some sesamoidean bones; in the first joint it has none. Now to find the sesamoidean Bones either in the hand or foot, you shall this do. The way to find those Bones. You shall so cut out the tendons that stretch out the fingers, that you be careful not to take away the cartilages of the joints which are under them, which may seem to be the sesamoidean bones. Under these tendons, most frequently in the hand, especially in hard bodies, you shall perceive a certain hardness sometimes gristlie, sometimes bony. Then you shall cut crosswise the Ligaments of all the joints, until you make them appear, their inside in the hand, their outside in the foot; in which side, you shall find the sesamoidean bones; having first cut asunder the ligaments wherewith they are enfolded, or drawing them a little back, upwards towards the roots of the fingers. Chap. 20. Of the Os a T. 2. f. 3. & 4. A. etc. T. 21. f. 2. A. □ Ilium and b T. 21. f. 1. K. f. 2. C. □. Thighbone. From the Arms you shall proceed unto the Inferior Limbs. Their Ligaments. Between the Os sacrum and the Tuberous bunching out of the Ischium, there intercedes a Great and strong Ligament. Beneath the seam or growing together of the share-bone there is another Ligament stretched out. And a c T. 21. f. 7. a a. □ T. 21. f. 7. b. □ circular Ligament comprehends the Articulation of the Thigh with the socket of Os Ischij, which being cut away, another ᵈ Ligament somewhat long and bloody appears. The said bloodyness is caused by reason of Certain little veins which creep through the Acetabulum of the Hucklebone. That same Ligament which is brought out of the top of the thighbone, is fastened and strongly driven into a cloven which is in the foreside of the Acetabulum: which being relaxed, and drawn from its place, there falls out such an halting as is incurable: in which the Thigh, though perfectly put in Joint, will still stip out again. That same tabes Coxaria, P●●isis ischiadica, mentioned by Hypocrates in his Consumption of the Hip. Book De morbo Sacro, and elsewhere, it is worth your observation: when by reason of an Impostume or a fluxion into the Hip-bones Cavity of Acetabulum, the Ligaments cotrupt and putrify, and the Hip grows lank and lean. It was an ingenious observation of Hypocrates: all Bones vitiated, cease to grow; if the part containing be corrupted, it infects the part contained. wherefore if the Hucklebone be corrupted, the Thighbone cannot remain untainted; which disease I have often observed. The oval hole of the a T 2. f 3. & 4. B. □ Hucklebone called thuroides, from its resemblance of a The oval hole of the Hucklebone door, is ascribed unto the share. It was contrived for lightness sake, and is exactly covered with an hard membrane, which does sever the Musculos obturatores, which rest on either side thereupon. That is false which Aristotle has written in his fourth Book of the Live-wights Chap. 10. that no four footed Beast has Huckle-Bones. The natural shape of the hip. In the Thighbone you shall observe the b T 21. f 1. K. f 3. G. shape thereof, bunching out on the foreside, and saddle-fashiond behind, for the convenience of sitting and firm walking. Which figure Hypocrates observs in his Book of fractures, and advises when this bone is broken, that care be taken to preserve the same. For such whose Thighbone is straighter than it ought to be, are crook-legd, and are same in their knee; and they cannot stand nor go, without trembling. But they whose thigh-bones are very crooked, they stand more firmly either on one Leg or on both, than they who have straight thigh-bones. The Neck of the Thighbone, is somewhat long-fashioned and obliqne, that it The Neck of the Thighbone why long-fashioned. may pass along the tendon of the Rotator Infernus. But Galen supposes it was made for that end, viz. to leave space for muscles, which were to be placed in the lower part, and for great Veins, Arteries, nervs and kernels, which are quartered near the divisions of the Vessels. They whose Thighbone is shorter-necked than ordinary, have their groins narrow and compressed, and when they walk are constrained to halt on one side, and are termed Vatii. so says Galen in his third Book de Vsu Partium. For the Thighbone does contribute much to the rectitude and stability of the Body, by that same obliqne Longitude of its Neck; whence the cause may be given why men naturally halt to the one side or the other, or to both sides, their Feet and Legs being of equal length; which no man yet assigned, nor observed. The lower end of the Thighbone Joined to the Leg is termed the Knee, which is Ligaments of the Knee. fastened by a twofold ligament. One of them is ᵇ circular, and compasses both the Bones round about. The other being ᶜ placed between the two bones, is somewhat Long-fashioned and bloodyish, through neighbourhood of such veins, as descend through the Ham into the Leg: it arises, from the middle-space of the knobs of the Thighbone, and is inserted into the middle Eminency of the Knobs of the shank. Sick people often speak of this Ligament when they talk of a burning heat in their Knees. Upon the Knobs of the shankbone two semicircular Gristles are fastened, which hold the same Knobs more stable, that they may not swerve, in violent motions and contortions of the thigh. See Galen touching the of the shankbone, in its Articulation with the Thighbone. Lib. 2. de fracturis. That Part which is opposite to the knee behind, is termed Poples the Ham, being The void space in the Ham. empty and void. The uessels which pass that way being removed, an empty space is observed, interposed between the two knobs, which Pliny seems to have understood in the 45. Chapt. of the. 11. Book of his Natural History. In the knee itself, the conjunction of both, as well the right as the left, is on the foreside double (it should be on the hinder side) there is a certain emptiness like cheeks, which being pierced, the spirit fl●es out as from a Cut Throat. Wherefore I have always observed the wounds of the Ham to be deadly, not only Why wounds in the Ham are deadly? for the dissipation of the spirit, but also by reason of cutting asunder such remarkable vessels, viz. Veins, Atteries and nerves, which creep through that hinder part of the thigh, which being cut, inevitable death follows. The society and sympathy between the knees and Cheeks is wonderful, which is Whence proceds that sympathy which is between the knees and the▪ cheeks? described by the Author of that Book De Ordine Membrorum, which is falsely ascribed to Galen: How that the knees being affected and afflicted, the eyes condole and weep, by reason of that old acquaintance of the knees and eyes, or Eye lids in the womb, where the child touches its Eyes and Sustains them with its knees. Chap. 21. Of the Patella. Upon the Articulation of the thigh and leg a small bone is placed, which they It's connexion. call a T. 21. f. 1. LL. □ Mola or Patella, the whirl bone of the Knee. It grows unto the knee, not fastened by any Ligaments: but only being a T. 21. f. 8. d. □ glued to the tendons of the muscles of the shank, it is so held close upon the knee. If you take a diligent view, you shall observe a Ligament somewhat bloody, which It's use. does firmly knit and b●nd the Patella to the hard fat which is palced beneath. The office of this bone, is to defend the joint to guard the bowing and bending of the Part, and to render the motion more facile: for it hinders the extension of the leg from passing out of a right line; and when we sit with our knees bend, it keeps the thigh from luxation forward. And because the whole Body inclines forward, it hinders us from falling when we go down a steep Hil. This Galen found by experience, in a certain young man that was a wrestler, in whom, as he was wrestling, the Patella was disjointed, and did a●c●nd towards the thighbone, whereupon two inconveniences followed, viz. a dangerous bending in his knee, and a trouble in going down Hil: and therefore he could not go down hill without a staff. Paraeus observes in the 22. Chapter of his 14 Book, that he never saw any that had the Patella broken, but they halted. I have seen such whose Patella was luxated and drawn upwards, who could not so easily go up hill and downhill as formerly. Notwithstanding Vesalius in his Surgery denies that the Patella confers any thing Vesalius his opinion touching the use of the Patella. to the firmness of the joint, and that a man does halt, when it is broken or taken out, as he avers he had found by many examples, only he says it is placed upon the knee for to defend and secure the joint. And he goes not much from the same opinion in his Anatomy, where he says it performs the same office in the knee, which the Sesemoidean bones do in other joints. Hypocrates in his book de locis in Homine, assigns another use of this Bone, namely to prohibit moisture from descending out of the flesh into such a lose joint as the knee is. Seeing therefore the Necessity of the Patella is so graeat, I conceive it is but a fable which is reported of the Thebans, who, that they might be able to run more swiftly, took certain Bones out of their knees. Yet there have been found about Nova Zembla certain Pigmies or little Men, who could bend their knees backward and forward, and were so swift of foot that none could overtake them, if we give credit to the relations of seafaring Men. Chap. 22. Of the Tibia and Fibula. The Tibia has two Bones, the one a T. 21. f. 1. M. f. 4. D. □ larger and more inward, which ●ea●●s the The rason of these names. name of the whole; the other is smaller and more external, called b T. 21. f. 1. N. f. 4. E. □ Fibula. But Perone (which is rendered fibula) does signify two things in Hypocrates, the whole Fibula, and appendix of that bone, as Galen expounds it, in his Interpretation of the words of Hypocrates. It is termed Perone from peiro, which signifies to boar or thrust through. 'tis called Fibula in Latin from the Greek word phible, which signifies small and lank; howbeit in Latin writers of Architecture, certain beams or joices of wood placed to give strength to other parts of the building, are termed Fibule. For this Bone fibula does sustain the outer knob of the shanke-bone unto which it is ●ixed, because the weight of the Thigh and of the whole Body, does most of all bear upon that part. The lower ends of the Tibia and Fibula are termed c T. 21. f. 1. I. K. f. 4gh. □ Malleoli Ankle-bones, both What the Malleoli be? being fastened together by a a strong circular Ligament, through which the tendons of the Muscles are drawn, as was said of the wrists. Chap. 23. Of the Foot. The Articulation of the a T. 21. f. 5. A. □ Astragalus with the b T. 21. f, 5. C. □ Scaphoides is very close, so that it seems altogether immovable, so that any man would think, that the foot is not moved laterally by that Articulation. Two Sesamoidean Bones are fastened behind the great toe, that they might give The Sesamoidean Bones belonging to the Foot. The Ligaments of the Foot. a secure passage to the tendon of that Muscle which bends the Great toe. In the Sole of the foot, you shall find very many Ligaments, by which the Bones are straight united, that the foot might become hollow. You shall therefore observe t●e Transverse Ligament, which binds up the Bones of the Metatarsus, with the first rank of Toe-joints, like that which we find in the Hand. Chap. 24. The number of Bones for a Sceleton. Two hundred thirty and two Bones are required to make a sceleton, fifteen being taken from the number, two hundred forty seven. Because the brestbone is reckoned but for one, as also the Os sacrum and the Cocyx or Crupper bone, because in the boiling and clenseing of the Bones, they do not separate Neither will the d T. 2. f. 5. & 6, b, □ Coccyx, e T. 13. f. 9 10. etc. □ Larynx, f T. 13. f. 11, two. etc. □ Hyoides, nor g T. 10. f. 2. AA, □ Sternum endure boileing. I omit the six little Eare-bones, the Os hyoides and the Larynx, because they are not joined by way of Articulation with other bones. ᶜ T. 23. f. 3. N. etc. □ ʰ T. 20. f. 7. A B C. □ Chap. 25. Of Breaking the Bones. When you are sufficiently instructed in the number of the Bones, you shall break in pieces every particular bone, that you may inquire into the inner structure thereof. The profit of this knowledge is evident in fractures. For hereby may be collected in how long time a broken Bone may be soddered together again. Hypocrates writes in his Book de Alimentis: that the nourishment of a Bone may be known by the breaking thereof. The Nose bone requirs ten days to grow together, the Jawbones and the claviculae and ribs twenty; the Cubit requirs thirty, the Tibia and Brachium forty, and the thighbone fifty, little more or less as occasien servs. Inasmuch therefore as the Quantity of a Bones nourishment, and the space of time requisite thereunto, does always hold proportion to the Bones thickness: to that if the Nose-bone, that is to say the Bone of the upper Cheek which reaches to the Nose, do require ten degrees of nutriment: the nutriment of the other Jawbone of the Ribs and Jugular, which are twice as thick as the Nose-bone, must be double in proportion to the nutriment of the other, and will require twice as long time to grow together which is known by their breaking, or by the Cu●e of their respective fractures. And therefore by how much thicker the Bones are, by so much the more nourishment, and the longer time they require to be soddered together; to that suppose the Nose-bone require ten parts of nutriment, and the Nose being broken shall need ten day's time to grow together: the Aliment of the ribs, Jawbone and Jugular, (which are twice as thick) must be double in quantity, and they shall require twice the time (being broken) ere they can grow together again. And the Cubit-bone, because it is thrice as thick as the Nose-bone, therefore it will need thrice as much nutriment, and thrice as long time to grow together. The Tibia and Brachium because they are four times as thick as the Nose-bone, will require four times as much nutriment and four times longer space to grow together. Finally, the Thighbone being five times as thick, will require five times as much nutriment, and five times as much space to grow together, after they have been broken. Celsus writes in his seventh Book, out of Hypocrates, that between the fourteenth and twentieth day the a T 15. f 3. L. □ jawbone, b T 15. f 1 E. □ Cheek-bones, the c T 21. f 1 B B. f 2. A. □ Jugular, d T 10. f 2. A A. etc. □ Breast bone the e T 21. f 2. B. □ Shoulder blades, the f T 10. f 2. & 3. □ Ribs, the g T 13 f 19 T 10. f 2. & 3. T 2. f 1. □ Backbone, the h T 2. f 3. & 4. etc. □ Hip-bones, i T 21. f 5. A. □ the ankle-bones, the k T 21. f 5. B. □ Heel-bones, the l T 21. f 2. G ●. □ Hand, and the m T 21. f 4. G H. □ Foot-sole are healed. between the twentieth and thirtieth days the n T 21. f 1. M N. □ Thighs and o T 21. f 2. D E. □ Arms: between the seaventh and twentieth and fortieth the p T 21. f 1. C C. □ Arm-bones and q T 21. f 1. K K. □ Thigh-bones are healed. the sense of which place cannot be understood, but by consideration of the threefold cavity and marrow of the Bones. A Threefold Cavity in Bones. A Threefold Marrow. For I find a threefold marrow contained in the Bones in three different Cavities. The marrow of the greater bones as of the Arm and Thigh, is reddish: the marrow of the middlesized bones which are hollow in some good measure, is white. The rest of the bones being of a spongy substance, or full of little Cavities, are replenished with marrowy Juice, but not with red marrow. Howbeit the inferior jawbone is hollowed in the base, and in the Chin it is of a stony hardness, it contains red marrow, which does not fluctuate from one end of the jawbone to the other, because of the hardness and solididity of the jawbone in the Chin. Whence it is easy to be demonstrated that the Maxilla is a double bone. The Clavicula, which Galen writes is fistulous, we find to be every where of a spongy substance. The R●bs, the Vertebrae, the shoulderblades, the Hip-bones, the Tarsian and Metatarsian bones, also the wrist and afterwrist-bones, are spongy and like Pu●ice-stones. The bones of the fingers are hollow and contain a whitish marrow. In the Feet, only the great Toe is fistulous or hollow-boned. Chap. 26. The Collection and ordering of Bones for a Sceleton. But if you are not minded to break the bones, but desire to preserve and prepare Two parts of this works. them for a sceleton. You shall observe that there are two things required thereunto; first the purifieing and cleansing of the bones, secondly their apt uniting and fastening together, which may be termed Sceleto-paeia. The Clenseing of the Bones. As for what concerns the cleansing of Bones, Scaliger in his Exercitations observes, that the stone termed Sarcophagus does in a short space eat off and consume the flesh from the Bones. And so the bones remain bare and naked. Pausanias' in Eliacis relates that the Devil Eurynymus eats off the flesh of dead People, so as nothing but the bones remain. The Jews imagine that there is an internal Devil named Azazel; who in Leviticus is named Princeps desertorum, and eats and devours the flesh of the dead, leaveing only the bones behind. But we are not wont to use the stone sarcophagus, because we have it not; neither are we acquainted with its operations. Neither do we use the assistance of the Devil Eurynomus, because we defy and execrate those wicked spirits. Wherefore having cut the Bones one from another and taken their flesh off, you shall cast them into a large Kettle or Cauldron, except the Brest-bone, the Hyoides, and Coccyx. Then fill the Cauldron with scalding water, so as to cover all the Bones and set them on the fire and boil them four or five hours. You shall be careful while they are boiling that no bone stick out, so as to be fainted by the smoke. Also you shall ever and anon take off the scum and fat which swims aloft, that the Bones may be the more neat and clean. Which that it may be more effectually performed, you shall pierce the larger bones that are full of Marrow, in the Head with an Awl that all the superfluous marrow may flow and soak out. You may throw away the first water and boil them in a second, that all the marrow may be drawn forth. Then take them out while the water is hot (for if it be cold they will be greasy) and scrape and cleanse them with a small knife. Some, while they are boiling, throw in a pound of Lime or Chalk, to make them the whiter, but this eats off the Epiphysies and the Gristles which do crust the extremities of the Bones; which you must take heed you pull not away, when you scrape the Bones. Then you shall put the Bones again into most pure water boiling hot, and boil them for an hour, that all the marrow and fat may be separate and exhausted. After that cast them into cold water, and take them out and wipe and rub them well with course linen clothes. When the Bones are thus prepared, many lay them two or three months in the open air to bleach and grow white. Others put them into a wooden case, bored full of holes and hang them in a running brook, or in the streams of a swift River, that the rubbing of the stream may whiten them. I had rather lay them under the falling of a Mil-stream for the space of ten or twelve days. Bellonius in his Book de Admirandis, relates that he saw in the shore of Bononia in Picardy, an innumerable company of exceeding white bones of Bodies which had been drowned and cast out upon the shore having been buried in the Sea sand. He saw the like by the Red-sea, so that the bones so prepared, and sticking and growing together by their nerves and Ligaments, are exceeding neat, and clean and whiter than Snow. Such as were those two Sceletons which Galen had to serve him in Anatomy. Bellonius observes in the same place, that dead bodies are preserved from corruption if they be anointed with the Balm that drops out of Cedar trees; also that bones moistened with the same juice remain uncorrupted. The Bones accurately cleansed and dried, you shall preserve in a Chest, or you may fasten them together with brass-wire, and so keep them standing in a Case. It is needful that you have bones both ways, viz. single and united. And the truth is, as Vesalius has rightly observed, the Bones united serve more for ostentation than Instruction. Moreover by long boileing, first in water, and then in oil, all the Bones of the The manner of fastening the Bones to make a Skeleton. Head and of the upper jawbone are easily separated, as I have often observed: and by this means you may have them severed one from another, that you may view and measure the size and dimensions of every one. The manner of fastening the bones together, depends either upon the Industry of the Artist; or it is done by imitation of another Sceleton neatly composed. You may read more of this subject in Vesalius and Columbus. Also Carolus Stephanus, has noted some things upon those Authors, worthy of Consideration. FINIS. An Alphabetical Table. A ABdomen, It's Medicinal consideration, the swelling thereof, and its constitution what it should be. Page 33 Abdomen, The diseases thereof Page 34 Its Muscles Page 248 Absurd Long, whence they proceed, Page 55 Accelerator, What Muscle so termed. Page 250 Amaurosis, What we are to understand thereby Page 142 Anastomosis, Of the Veins and Arteries what it is, Page 255 Anatomy, The consideration thereof twofold, towit, Philosophical and Physical, both which necessary Page 1 Anatomy, How far forth useful and profitable in Physic Page 2 The Author's intent and method in treating thereof, ibid. etc. The Method of teaching it twofold Page 3 Anatomist, General Precepts for him to be first acquainted with Page 26 Anchylosis, What to be understood thereby Page 266 Aneurisma, What it is Page 259 Angina, or Squinsy, What kind of tumour Page 201 Ankle, The wounds thereof Page 214 Annular Ligament of the Toes, what it is Page 238 Animal Spirits, The place where they are made, according to our Author, Page 128 Hofman's arguments to the contrary, answered Page 129, 130 How they are carried through the Nerves Page 277 Anxiety, Whence it proceeds Page 55 Aorta Vein, Descending, its distribution, its great Artery called Lienalis, its Use, Thickness of its Membrane, and its Vessels Page 67 Aphthae or Ulcers of the Gums, their malignancy Page 204 Appetite, Want thereof whence it proceeds, and likewise Dog-appetite Page 55 Apophysis, What it is Page 279 Apophysis Coracoides, Its Use ibid. Apoplexy, What, and whence it proceeds Page 133 Apoplexy, And such like diseases, their cure ibid. Arm, The nine Muscles thereof, Page 225 Arteria aspera, Or Windpipe, its Use etc. And whether the wounds thereof are curable Page 208 209 Artery, Its definition Page 27 Arteries, What they are, whence they have their original, a large discourse hereof by the Author, Page 115 116 Arteries, Whether they may and which of them may be opened Page 217 Arteries, Of the Head before they be opened a profitable experiment of Alxander Benedictus to be put in practice Page 218 How the motion of their Pulse can be stopped while the Heart moves Page 259 Ateries Crural, The Pulse is last felt in them Page 259 Arteries Carotides, Or sleepy Arteries, whether or no the obstruction of them do cause deep sleep, Communion of them and the spinal Marrow Page 115 116 Articulation Of the bones, what concurs thereto Page 263 etc. Asthma, What it is, its kinds Page 103 Atrophy, What it is, and whence it proceds Page 59 Auditory Passages of the Ear Page 193 Axillary Kernels, their diseases Page 211 B Back and Breastbones, Their Vertebrae, Fallopius his observation touching them Page 23 Back, Properly is not moved Page 231 How it is bowed by the Quadratus ibid. It's various Muscles, Page 231 232 Backbone, Its shape gristles, Membranes, and the way to dissect the Vertebras thereof Page 275 276 Baldness, Whence it proceeds, Page 120 Belchings and Hiccuping, Whence they proceed Page 55 Belly, The Muscles thereof, their number, figure, largeness, original; the white-line, connexion, action, use, etc. Page 40 41 their medicinal consideration Page 42 Belly, The division of its parts Page 44 the two notable veins thereof, and what is to be considered in them, Page 50 51 52 the Caeliacal Artery thereof Page 52 the Nerves thereof, and what diseases rise therefrom Page 67 Its Muscles ten Page 232 Benedictus, His experiment, before the Arteries of the head may be opened Page 218 Blackmoors, Whether they have any sutuers in their Sculls Page 268 Blindness, Whence it proceeds, and the causes thereof. Page 142 Bladder, Its Muscles and the office thereof Page 232 251 Blood, Where and how made, and how distributed from the liver, a double circulation thereof Page 57 58 105 how necessary the circulation of it is to continue the motion of the hart, and whether the blood do pass from the right ventricle of the heart unto the Lungs, Page 108 Blood, what kind of it is circulated, in what vessels, after what manner, and how necessary the circulation is, Page 109 difference of blood in Vena Cava and Porta Page 108 whether the blood pass through the Septum Medium of the heart or no Page 110 the circulation thereof intercepted by obstruction of the ventricles, or of the veins, Page 111 The conditions of that which is good, and how the Fibres, are bred therein, the natural temper thereof, the quantity sometimes congealled Page 66 Whether it may be lessened otherwise than by blood-letting Page 66 Body Of man, how to be considered by Anatomists, its Parts, its solid parts, how manifold, its similar parts, what and how many. Page 26 It's natural and legitimate conformation, and the necessariness of it, Page 29 Body Of man, its division, Page 31 Bone, its definition, Page 27 Bones, the history of them, otherwise termed Ostology Page 4 Four considerations of them ibid. Bones, Doctrine of them double Page 5 Why there are many of them in man. Page 6 Bones Of men, in what particulars they differ from those of Women Page 18 The number of them in a Man's Body Page 19 Bones Of Infants, the history of them, ibid. Which is both Ancient and profitable Page 20 The number of them in Infants, Page 25 Bones, A new history of them, Page 260, &c Why they are last treated of Page 261. The Doctrine of them demenstrated in a dead body very necessay for the perfect knowledge of Man's body, for the practice of Physic, ibid. Bones, Their general diseases, Page 265 etc. Bone, Called Luz the fable of the Cabalists concerning it Page 275 A threefold cavity in them, and a threefould marrow Page 286 Bones, The remote matter that nourisheth them Page 263 The immediate matter of them, and whether they have Veins, Arteries, and Nerves ibid. Bones, the collection and ordering of them for a Sceleton Page 287 The manner of fastening them to make a Sceleton Page 288 Brains, Their substance, division, their Coats, Pipes, and principal diseases Page 121, 130 Brain, Full of wind and turn, Page 122 Brain, Whether it hath any motion, and whether it cooleth the heart Page 124 Whether or no and how the blood is circulated therein, and what blood it is nourished with Page 124 125 Brain, The manner of dessecting of it, and history of its parts. ibid. Breast, or Chest, What it is, fourfold Page 14 Its form what it ought to be Page 30 Breasts, What to be chosen in Nurses, ibid. Breastbone, Of how many particular bones it is made up, the hole thereof, and the Natural shap thereof. Page 274 Bronchocele, what it is Page 201 Buboes, where they arise Page 76 Buccinator, what muscle so called. Page 220 C Cabalists, their fable touching the Bone Luz, Page 275 Cachexy, what it is, and whence it proceeds, Page 59 Cacochimie, what it is, and whence it proceeds Page 65 Call, what it is, its situation, original, diseases thereof, similar, organical and common Page 45 46 Cancer in the gums, what it is, and whence Page 204 Caries of the Skull, what it is Page 270 Cartilege, its definition Page 27 Cartilege xiphoides its figure. Page 274 Its use and hole ibid. It's crooking Page 275 Carunculae Myrtiformes, what, and where they are Page 81 Catalepsis and Carus, what diseases they are Page 133 Catarrhs, what they are and whence. Page 135 Cheeks, their description Page 195 Cheeks, whence that sympathy between them and the knees proceeds Page 284 Chest its bounds, shape, parts, and medicinal consideration, and diseases, Page 94, 95, 96, 97 Its Muscles proper and common. Page 230 Child, its conception Page 87 its posture and accommodation in the Womb, its natural birth: Sometimes drawn out with a hook. Page 88, 89 Childbed purgations, what they are, retained how to be evacuated. Page 89 90 Chin, described Page 194 Choler, what it is, the passages thereof, two sorts thereof in the Liver Page 59, 60 Choler, diversity of it proved by the different sorts of Jaundice. Page 60 Chorda of Hypocrates, what it is. Page 237 Choroides plexus, t●…ause thereof. Page 122 Circocel●, what kind of tumour, and where bred Page 78 Clavicula, what it is, its gristle and Ligament Page 273 Clitoris in women, what meant thereby Page 82 The Muscles thereof Page 233 Coccix or crupper bone, what it is, and the Muscles peculiar thereunto in a Woman Page 250 Cod, their coats, cavities, vessels. Page 77 Columella or Uuula, inflamed. Page 205 Coma or dead sleep, whence it proceeds Page 132 Concha, what it is, and its parts. Page 273 Conorium, what it is, Page 123 Convulsion, what it is, and whence. Page 134 Corus, their original Page 213 Cough, whence it proceeds Page 104 Courses, in letting blood to move them what to be observed Page 86 Cremaster Muscle, what it is Page 76 How it is known Page 249 Crupperbone, what it is, and the Muscle peculiar thereunto in man and woman, Page 250 Its structure, etc. Page 276 Cubitus, what it is, and why the Radius is joined thereunto, Page 280 Cubit, the Muscles thereof Page 225 Cuphosis, a disease, and where Cynicus spasmus, what, and whence. Page 196 D Dandrif what it is, and whence it proceeds Page 120 Deafness, whence it proceeds. Page 193 Diabetes, what it is, and whence it proceeds Page 68 Diaphragme, its original, motion, and use Page 231 see midrif Diastole, what it is, and where. Page 107 Digestion, how it is caused Page 53 Dropsy, how defined, and whence it proceeds Page 59 Drum of the Ear, what it is Page 193 Dugs of Women, their substance, scituatiod, magnitude, shape, the teats, and the circle about them, their diseases. Page 95 96 Dugs and Womb, their consent how caused Page 97 E Ears, the passage of them, and the Bony Circle, 21. Their parts, wind, Nervs, and diseases Page 191 192 Ear external, its Muscles common and proper Page 219 Inside thereof; it's three Cavities, and why the drum thereof is placed obliquely Page 272, 273. It's Mallet, anvil, and stirrup, Muscles, Ligaments, and drumstring. ibid. Ears, Noises in them, their cause and cure, Page 193 The passages from them to the palate, Page 269 Egyptians, their operation in cutting out the stone not to be approved Page 72 Eyes, their Situation, Parts, Membrane, Muscles, Kernels etc. Page 136. 137 Eyes, their divers Diseases, and their names Page 138, etc. Eye, the Orbitary bones thereof how many Page 12 Picolominus, his error touching their number ibid. Their Muscles are six Page 219 Eye-holes, the bones thereof Page 22 Eyelids, their Muscles four Page 218 Elephantiasis of the Arabians what it is Page 213 Empyema, what we are to understand thereby Page 96 Emphysema, what dstemper of the eyè Page 139 Epididymis, what it is, Page 78 Epiglottis, what is meant thereby Page 207 Its diseases Page 208 Excretion of Blood, Choler, Serum, Quittor, etc. Page 194 Exostosis, what it signifieth Page 266 Exostosis of the Skull, what it is Page 270 F Face, what it is, And its Parts Page 11 Its description and diseases. Page 194, 195 Fallingsickness, whence it proceeds. Page 134 Falx, a partition so termed. Page 122 Fat, its definition and division Page 27 Fevers, continual and intermittent seated in the trunk of the Vena Cava Page 64 Fevers different either in respect of their Cause, matter, or manner, etc. Page 111 Fiber, its definition and description. Page 27 Fingers, their Muscles. Page 228, 229 Their pappy ends Page 212 The best way of dissecting them Page 247 Phlegm, whether or no it may be collected within the Cavity of the Sphenoides Page 269 By what ways the phlegm of the nose passeth Page 269 Flesh, its definition and description. Page 27 Proud Flesh in head-wounds whence it proceeds Page 267 Foot, its division into Tarsus, Metatarsus, and Toes Page 18, etc. Its Muscles and Motion. Page 236, 237, etc. The Sesamoidean bones belonging thereto, and its ligaments. Page 285 Forehead Muscles, should rather be they called the Eyebrow Muscles Page 218 Forinx, what meant thereby Page 123 French Maidens, why they have their right shoulder higher than the left Page 280 Frontal Muscles, two of them Page 228 Fundament, in what order to be dissected, Its Name, Muscles, and their use Page 76, 77 Its diseases, sometimes closed up ibid. G Gall, The Bladder thereof, its name, substances situation, bottom, neck sinews, bigness shape, communion, vessels, diseases, Page 59 60 Gargareon, Wula, or mouth-palat Its Muscles Page 223 Gelding, How it may be made insensible Page 76 Genitals, Of a man, and first of the yrad, its parts, skin, foreskin, bridle, membrane vessels, muscles, the hollow ligaments, their internal substance, the Nut there of, and its diseases Page 73. 74 see Yard Gongroni, What kind of Tumour, Page 201 Gonorrhoea, Virulent, theseat thereof, Page 79 What vein to be opened in the cure thereof Page 80 Green-sickness, What it is, and the cause thereof, Page 195 groins, What to be observed therein, Page 76 Gullet, Its membrane, kernels, and obstruction Page 209 Gums, Their natural and preternatural constitution, Page 204 Their Ulcers, or Aphthae, Page 204 Guts, Their substance, situation, longitude, general division, and specially their cavity and use, Page 46 Their names, ●…ments, fat, shutters, connexion, and Medicinal consideration Page 46 47 48 Gut Duodenum, The Biliar poor thereof Page 46 Gut Ileum Its descent, Page 76 H Ham, Why the wounds therein are deadly Page 284 Hairs grey what kind of Symptom Page 120 Hallucination, What meant thereby Page 142 Hand, Its division into three parts Page 16 The two muscles thereof Page 227 228 The Void space therein, Page 283 Head, What it is, and its division, Page 8 The sutures thereof Page 21 The form thereof, Page 30 Why placed in the highest Place, its size shape, division, and the general diseases thereof Page 118 119 Its Muscles proper and common Page 218 223 Whether an issue may be made in the crown Page 268 Its mo●●●n and ligaments Page 272 Head Dropsy, What it is, and whence it proceeds, Page 121 Head, Which Vertebra it is moved upon Page 272 Heart, Whether it be the original of vena cava, and whether it and the Arteries are moved at the same time Page 108 109 Heart, The Nobility thereof, its substance situation, bigness, shape, vessels, Ears, pulse, and the cause thereof according to our Author. Page 107 How necessary the circulation of the blood is to continue the motion of the heart Page 108 Whether the blood do pass from the right ventricle of the heart unto the Lungs, and what kind of blood is circulated Page 108 It's right and left ventricle, their vessels and valves Page 109, 110 Heart, It's usual diseases, Page 110 Heart, the Septum medium of it what it is Page 110 Heartburning, Whence it proceeds Page 55 Heart, Eaten by worms bred in the blood Page 66 Heart, The original of Vena Cava Page 108 Hemorrholds, What they are, and where, Page 77 Hermaphrodites, Who so to be termed Page 75 Hildanus, His way of taking out the stone not to be approved of Page 72 Hippolito, The consumption thereof, Page 283 It's natural shape ibid. Hypocrates, Certain places in him expounded Page 92 Hoatsness Whence it proceeds Page 208 Hofman's Arguments touching the breeding of the Animal spirits answered, Page 128 etc. His tenant disturbs the practice of Physic Page 130 Huckle bone, The Oval hole thereof, Page 283 Hydrocele, What kind of rapture it is Page 78 Hymen In Virgins what it is Page 81 I Jaws Two; the bones thereof Page 11 12 22 The lower Jaw, its Muscles on either side six Page 221 Iliacus Muscle its original, Page 234 Ilium, The bones thereof, its parts Page 17 How its motion is performed Page 42 Ilium and os sacrum, Joined together, their motion, and by what Muscles they are moved forwards and backwards Page 232 282 Indigestion, Ill digestion, and Slow digestion, from whence they all proceed, Page 55, Infants, What diseases are proper to them Page 90 Intercostals internal what they are, Page 230 Interosseans, what Muscles they are Page 29● Joints, Gallen doctrine concerning them Page 8 Ischuria, What it is, and whence it proceeds Page 68 Issues, in what places they are commonly made Page 214 Isthmus defined, its diseases. Page 205 K Kibes where bred, and whence they arise Page 213 Kidneys, The substance of them, their temper, Situation, greatness, number, shape, colour, and vessels Page 67 68 Kidneys, How shaped in children Page 68 Their internal structure admirable, its Basin, teats, sieve, and infirmities ibid. The falling down of them, their swelling stoppage, altar, vein opened, action hurt etc. Page 69 Stones bred therein, when curable by incision ibid. Kidneys, Their consumption, and who most subject thereunto, &c ibid. Kidneys Weakness, when a dropsy proceeds therefrom, how it is to be cured, ibid. Kings-Evil What it is, and how its swell differ from Bronchocele, Page 201 Knees, Whence that sympathy between them and the Cheeks proceeds Page 284 Its ligaments Page 283 L Labour hard in Childbearing, helps to further it Page 89 Larynx, Or head of the Windpipe, its situation, Gristiles, motion, muscles, and diseases Page 207 208 222 Leg, The two bones thereof Page 17 It's several Muscles, and motion Page 235 etc. Lethargy, What it is, and whence, Page 133 Ligament, its definition, Page 27 Ligament Why it is interposed between the Radius and the Cubitus Page 280 Limbs (being the third part of the Sceleton) how to be considered Page 15 their division ibid., etc. and 211 Limbs, upper and inferior, Page 24 Method of handling them, and parts of which they are compounded, and their several diseases Page 212 etc. Veins, Arteries, and Nerves, belonging to them Page 254 etc. Linea Candida, which is the true one, Page 249 Lips, Their description Page 194 Lips, Their Muscles are two, common to both Page 220 Their use and diseases, Page 196, 197 Liver, Its substance, colour, situation, bigness, lobes or laps, regions, vessels, and diseases Page 57 58 Its communion with other parts Page 58 Its action, and symptoms, Page 58 59 Liver, whether the roots of Cava and Porta are united therein Page 58 Liver, Not the original of Vena Cava, Page 64 It is the original of Vena Porta Page 108 Lordosis, A disease, and where Page 278 Lousy Evil, what kind of Symptom it is Page 121 Loins, The parts thereof, name, with its etymology, parts bordering upon them Page 90▪ 91 Loins, Their pains, the special causes thereof, the Author's method in treating thereof, Page 91 92 Loins, their structure etc. Page 276 Lungs or Lights, Their Substance, Vessels, Situation, Motion, Division, ●…shape, Membrane, Peculiar manner of nourishment, and diseases Page 102 103 Lungs, their excellency, and why they are so subject to fluxions, in the diseases thereof whether blood-letting be approvable Page 104 Lungs, their consumption, and some causes thereof ibid. Lungs, why distinguished into lobes or laps Page 105 Luxation or Disjointing, what kind of disease it is Page 266 Luz a bone so called, and a fable of the Cabalists touching the same, Page 275 M Maidens French, why they have their right shoulder higher than the left Page 280 Maleoli, what they are Page 285 Man well form, how many things to be consideerd in him Page 29, 30 Massa carnea what it is, and its use, Page 239 Masseter or Chaw Muscles, what they are Page 221, 241 Men broad shouldered whether they begen large children Page 279 Men, why so few that can use both hands alike Page 280 Marrow of the Bones threefold, and whether it be compassed with a membrane. Page 263 Marrow spinal, its natural constitution, original, progress, and dignity, etc. Page 276, 277, Meatus Hepaticus and Cysticus, what they are Page 59, 60 Measles and small Pox, whence they proceed Page 90 Mediastinum, what it is, its Cavity and diseases Page 98, 100 Melancholy, its definition Page 132 Membrane, what it is, its Names, Substance, Original, Temper, Situation, Number, Figure, Colour, Connexion, Communion, Action, Use. Page 27, 36, 37 Membrane, its Medicinal consideration, Page 37, 38 Membrane common of the Muscles. Page 38 meanings, what they are Page 121 Mesenterium, what it is, its situation, Structure, Vessels, Use, Diseases. Page 48, 49 How the milky Veins thereof are affected Page 49, 50 Metacarpium, what it is, and of how many Bones it consists Page 281 Midrif, or Diaphragme, its Situation, Substance, Shape, Vessels, Motion, how it moves in resptration, and its diseases, Page 101, 192 Its Original from the Circumference of the bastard Ribs, and its Use. Page 231 The Muscles thereof Page 231 Mouth-palate, the Muscles thereof. Page 223 Muscle in the general, what it is, its definition, Substance, Temperature, Original and insertion, Quantity, Number, Figure, Belly, Head, Tendon, Color, Connexion, Communion, Action, Diversity, how it is known Page 38, 39 Muscles particular of several parts. Page 218 219, etc. Muscular dissection, an Introduction thereunto, showing an accurate Method to cut up the Muscles of the whole Body. Page 239, 240, etc. Muscles of the Radius, Wrists, Fingers, and Thumb; the best way to dissect them Page 248 N Nails, their diseases Page 212 Navel what it is, Its vessels, use, and Medicinal consideration Page 44 45 Neck, Its use, length, parts, vessels kernels, and medicinal consideration Page 200 201 The Muscles thereof eight Page 224 Nerve, its definition Page 27 Nerves, or sinews, contained within the Chest, eight remarkable ones, their name's Page 116 117 Nerves, how many of them proceed from the spinal marrow Page 277 Nightmare, what Affect so called, Page 132 Nose, Its situation, magnitude, shape, cavities, bones, gristles, membrane, Muscles, and diseases Page 197 198 Its muscles common and proper Page 220 Its diseases Page 198 Nose-bleeding, the causes thereof, and cure Page 198 199 Nostrils, The passages from them to the palate Page 269 Nympha in young women, what it is Page 81 O Oesophagus, or Gullet, its membrane, kernels, and obstruction Page 289 Omentum what it is, it's situation, original, diseases 45 46 see Cal. Ophiasis, what kind of disease it is Page 120 Osteologia nova, or a new history of the bones, Page 260 etc. Os Hyoides, Its situation, structure, fastening, and why it hath many ligaments Page 271 Os Hyois, What it is, its parts, Basis, and Horn, Error of Anatomists concerning it, and its Muscles Page 12 13 221 Os Sacrum, and Os Coccyx, what they are Page 23 How the motion of the Os Sacrum is performed Page 42 Oscheocele, What kind of rapture, Page 78 P Palate, Its structure, and rottenness Page 204 Its Muscles two Page 223 Palsy, what it is, and whence it proceeds, Page 134 Pancreas, What it is, its substance, situation, vessels, new channel, use, 50, see Sweetbread. Parotis, what it is Page 192 Its constitution Page 241 Parts of the Body solid how many fold, similar what and how many Page 26 etc. Parts, Organical what, how many, what to be observed in each of them Page 28 Patella, What its connection, use, & Vesalius his opinion touching the same Page 284 pectoral Muscle described Page 245 Pelvis and glandula pituitaria, what they be Page 124 Pericardium, What it is, how inflamed, full of humour, deficient of humour, worms bred therein Page 100 Pericranium and Periostium, What they be. Page 119 Perineum opened, and in what manner Page 72 Peritoneum, what it is; its temperature, substance, original, situation, quantity, figure, colour, connexion, communion, use, and Medicinal consideration Page 42 43 The process thereof Page 76 Peripneumonia, Whether there may be any or no, how it is caused according to our Author; it's difference from a Pleurisy Page 99 100 Pharinx, What it is, and its Muscles Page 209 222 Phymosis, and Paraphymosis, what diseases Page 74 75 Piss-bladder, Its substance, coats, magnitude, shape, holes, Muscles, vessels diseases Page 70 71 Its key, an instrument so called Page 72 Piss-bladder perforated, its ulcers cleansed ibid. Plethory, What it is, and whence it proceeds Page 65 Pleura, What it is, Its thickness Page 97 98 Pleurisy, How the pains of the sides are known from it, and how they differ in their situation and matter Page 98 99 Differnce of it from a Peripneamunia Page 100 On which side the blood is to be-taken away in a plerisie ibid. And out of what vein ibid. Pneumatocele, What kind of rapture it is, Page 78 Polypus in the Nose, the cause thereof Page 198 Priapismus What disease it is Page 74 Processus vermiformis, Where it is placed Page 123 Psoas Muscls, what, and where it is Page 234 R Radius, what it is, and its Muscles. Page 226 The best way of dissecting its Muscles Page 247 Why it is joined to the Cubitus. Page 280 Respiration, or fetching of breath, the necessity thereof, it is either free or forced, its Organs, wherein natural respiration consists, whether perspiration may supply its use Page 105, 106 Respiration unnatural, the differences thereof, it is sometimes needful in healthy persons Page 107 Rete Mirabile, what it is Page 124 Rhagosis, what kind of laxity it is. Page 78 Rheumatism, an experiment of Alexander Benedictus, for it. Page 218 Rheumatismus, what Catarrh so called. Page 135 Ribs, the true and bastard ones, their two fold substance Page 275 Rhomboides, what kind of Muscle it is Page 244 Rumination, what kind of disease it is and from whence it proceeds Page 56 S Saphena vein, what and where it is Page 257 Sarcocele, what it is, and why so termed Page 78 Scapula or shoulder blade, its articulation with the Arm, its Muscles, Cavity, Ligament, etc. Page 278,279 The parts of it how named by Galen. and how by Celsus ibid. Sciatica, the bastard one what it is. Page 258 Sciatica gout, where it is bred. Page 213 Seed, the matter of it threefold, how it is voided Page 79 Seed suppressed, whether hurtful to Women Page 86 Seed vessels and Seed bladders, why wrinkled, from whence the texture of veins among them, they are the seat of a virulent Gonorrhoea Page 79 Scoliosis, what it is, and the cause thereof Page 278 Sceleton, what it is, and its division. Page 8 Septum or Speculum Lucidum, what so called, and why Page 122 Sesamoidean Bones, which they are. Page 282 The way to find them ibid. & 285 Shoulder blades, The Muscles thereof four Page 224 Shoulder, the extremities thereof. Page 15 Shoulder, why the french Maidens have the right higher than the left Page 280 Siriasis or dog day madness, what it is. Page 131 Smelling Lost, Diminished, depraved, the Causes thereof Page 198 Sneezing, whence it is Page 199 Sphenoides Sinus, its use. Page 269 Sphincter of the mouth, what Muscle it is Page 220 Skin, its division, Searf skin its substance, Original, Figure, Color, Connexion, Use, and how beautified Page 34, 35 Its diseases Page 211 Skin called Derma, or the true skin, its Substance, Temperature, etc. whether lost can be regained Page 35, 36 Skull, what it is, its natural Figure. Page 8 The number of the Bones thereof Page 9 The holes and pits thereof Page 10, 11 What is principally to be observed therein, and why it is double Page 267 The Primary diseases thereof Page 270 Spawling, or Salivation, whence it proceeds Page 56 Spinal Marrow, the natural constitution thereof, its Original and Progress, and how many Nerves proceed from it, together with its dignity. Page 276, 277 Speech abolished, the cause thereof Page 206 Spirits Animal, how they are carried through the Nerves Page 277 squinsy, what kind of tumour it is. Page 201 Squinzie, an horrid Symptom, sometimes killing a man within fifteen or twenty hours' Page 208 Spleen described, its Substance, Color, greatness, Parts, Situation, Temper, Shape, Connexion Page 61 and 62 Its Actions controverted, and divers opinions thereof Page 61, 62 Sternum, what it is, Fallopius his observations concerning it Page 23 Sterility, whence it proceeds Page 87 Stammering, whence it proceeds. Page 286 Stisis, what disease it is, & where Page 278 Stomach, the Membranes thereof, its Situation, Size, Figure, Orifices, its Bottom, inner Surface, Action, digestion, Communion with other Parts, great sympathy with the Kidneys, communion with the whole body, and medicinal consideration Page 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57 Stone, ease for old men that have it Page 72 Stone sucked out, and cut out of the bladder ibid. The french and Italion way the best. Page 73 Stones, their Coats, Substance, Situation, Figure, Action, Diseases. Page 77, 78 Their several Muscles Page 232 Suffusion, what we are to understand thereby Page 141 Sutures, what they are, and how manifold Page 9 Whether Blackmoors have any in their Skulls Page 268 Sweetbread or Pancreas, what it is, its Substance, Situation, Vessels, Use. Page 50 Systole, what to be understood thereby Page 107 Sweats bloody, whence they proceed. Page 259 Symphysis, what it is, and its differrences Page 265 T Taste Vitiated and depraved, the cause thereof Page 206, 207 Temples, the bones thereof Page 21 Teeth and Gums, their Nature, Parts, Basis, and root Page 13 Their Number and Order. Page 13, 202 At what time they appear Page 22 Where the hinder Teeth lie, & when they first break out, their generation ibid. Teeth-sickness Page 90 Whether they breed in all ages and whether they may be fastened in the place of those drawn out Page 203 Teeth, the way to show the Vessel appertaining unto them, what must be observed in a Tooth that is drawn out Page 271 Toothache, the cause thereof Page 203 How the spongy Excrescence is taken out of the Tooth-hole Tendon, what it is, and its Original. Page 40 Tenesmus, what disease so called Page 77 Testicles, or Stones, their Muscles. Page 232 Thigh, and the bone thereof, Knee, Ham, Knee-pan etc. Page 17, 282 Its motion, and various Muscles. Page 233 etc. Thighbone, the Neck thereof why long fashioned Page 283 Thumb, its Muscles Page 229 The best way of dissecting its Muscles Page 247 The bones thereof Page 282 Tibia and Fibula, the reason of their names Page 285 Tonsils, their diseases Page 205 Tongue, its Substance, Situation, Magnitude, Vessels, Kernels, Muscles, and diseases Page 205, 206 Whether its Substance will grow again Page 206 Tongue-tied, who they are. Page 206 Toes, their proper Muscles. Page 238, 239 Trunk, being the second part of the Sceleton, of what it consists Page 13 V Varices, what they be Page 258 Their cure ibid. Vena Axilaris, Thoracica, Basilica, Merdiana, Salvatella, what and where they are Page 254, 255 Vena Cava inflamed, Cure of the diseases thereof twofold, a valve therein, its use, Page 66 Heart the Original thereof Page 108 Vena Cava and Aorta, within the lower Belly Page 64 Vena Cava, Divided into trunks, it is the Seatof Fevers continual and intermiting ibid. The Liver is not the Original thereof ibid. Why it hath a thick coat Page 65 Vein, its and definition description. Page 27 Veins contained within the Chest, at large discoursed of by the Author. Page 113, 114, 115 Veln Jugular, in what case it may be opened Page 114 Veins, which of them are most usually opened Page 215 Whether the Foot vein may be opened, & how Page 216 Veins, whether they have fibres, and why they are called the bodies wind-doors. Page 65 The retentive faculty of them being lost, what follows Page 66 Vena Porta, the Liver, the original thereof Page 108 Veins, their valves, with the Use of them. Page 55 Vein cut off, whether it will grow again. Page 258 Ventricles, what meant thereby. Page 33 Why the dissection gins at the lower, its Substance, Temperature, Original, Situation, Quantiy; Parts containing, Common, Proper, Divers; Parts contained, Figure, Color, Connexion, Use, Action Page 32, 33 Vertebrae, What they are, and the parts thereof Page 13 Vertebrae of the Neck, Back, Loins, Os Sacrum, or boly bone, and the Crupper bone Page 14 Vertebrae, their Gristles, and Membranes Page 275 Vertigo What it is, and whence it proceeds Page 134 Vesalius his opinion touching the use of the Patella, Page 284 Vessels their motion how abolished Page 259 Vomits warily to be used, not to be given to persons very weak Page 56 57 Vomiting of choler and blood, whence is proceeds Page 55 Vomica, What kind of Impostume it is Page 103 Ureters, their description, substance, length situation, wideness, original, Nerves, Obstruction, stone Page 70 Urethra, or piss-pipe, Page 73 Its obliquation in the Perineum, impostumated hard to cure Page 74 Urine let out with a knife Page 72 Uuula, Its use, Muscles, ligaments, and diseases etc. Page 204, 223 W Warts, From whence they arise, Page 195 Weasand, or Windpipe, Its use, gristles, Membrane, and diseases Page 208 209 Whether the wounds thereof are curable Page 209 Woman, Her Genital parts, which are either external, or internal, their diseases Page 81 82 Parts, internal which serve for generation, two fold, the way of showing these parts Page 83 Woman childing, Why some sickly, others not Page 87 Woman big-bllyed whether she may be let blood Page 88 Whether in the disease Cholera she may bleed ibid. Women beg-bellied, whether in them the womb grows thinner ibid. Women never changed into a Man Page 75 Womb, Its substance, coats, temper, sctivation, greatness, shape, cavity, action, infirmities Page 84 85 Worms, how they breed in the blood, Page 66 Heart eaten by them ibid. Worms bred in the Pericardium, which feed on the heart Page 100 Worms, in the Ears termed Eblai, Page 194 Wrist, The two Muscles thereof Page 227 The best way of dissecting its Muscles Page 247 Wrist bones their number, and articulation Page 281 Y Yard of a man, Its parts, Skin, foreskin It's bridle, membrane, vessels, muscles, It's hollow ligaments, their internal substance, Its obliquation in the Perineum, the Nut thereof, impostumated hard to cure, Page 73 74 Yard, the medicinal consideration, and diseases thereof Page 74 Its muscles are four Page 233 Z Zecchius, His vain brag Page 72 Zygomaticus, What Muscle so called Page 220 The Names of several Books printed by Peter Cole at the sign of the Printing-press in Cornhill near the Royal Exchange. Eleven several Books by Nich. Culpeper, Gent. Student in Physic and Astrology. 1 The Practice of Physic, containing seventeeu several Books. Wherein is plainly set forth, The Nature, Cause, Differences, and several sorts of Signs; Together with the Cure of all Diseases in the Body of Man. Being▪ Translation of the Works of that Learned and Renowned Doctor, Lazarus Riverius, now living; Councillor and Physician to the present King of France. Above fifteen thousand of the said Books in Latin have been sold in a very few Years, having been eight times printed, though all the former Impressions wanted the Nature, Causes, Signs, and Differences of the Diseases, and had only the Medicines for the cure for them; as plainly appears by the Author's Epistle. 2 Riolanus six Books of Anatomy and Physic, containing the Foundation of Physic and Chirurgery; wherein all the Body of Man is in such sort Anatomically dissected, as that the Causes and Natures of all Diseases are demonstrated from the Fabric and use of the Parts affected. 3 Veslingus Anatomy of the Body of Man, Wherein is exactly described, the several Parts of the Body of Man, illustrated with very many larger Brass Plates than ever was in English before. 4 A Translation of the New dispensatory, made by the College of Physicians of London. Whereunto is added The Key to Galens Method of Physic, 5 The English Physician enlarged. being an Astrologo-Physical Discourse of the vulgar Herbs of this Nation; wherein is showed how to cure a man's self of most Diseases incident to Man's Body, with such things as grow in England, and for three pence charge. Also in the same Book is showed, 1 The time of gathering all Herbs, both Vulgarly and Astrologically. 2 The way of drying, and keeping them and their Juices. 3 The way of making and keeping all manner of useful Compounds, made of those Herbs. The way of mixing the Medicines according to the Cause, and Mixture of the Disease, and the part of the Body afflicted. 6 A Directory for Midwives, or a Guide for Women. Newly enlarged by the Author in every sheet, and illustrated with divers new Plates. 7 Galens Art of Physic, with a large Comment. 8 A New Method both of studying and practising Physic. 9 A Treatise of the Rickets, being a Disease common to Children; wherein is showed, 1 The Essence, 2 The Causes, 3 The Signs, 4 The Remedies of the Disease: Published in Latin by Dr. Glisson, Dr. Bates and Dr. Regemorter, translated into English, And corrected by N. Culpeper. 10 Medicaments for the Poor, Or Physic for the Common People. 11 Health for the Rich and Poor, by Diet without Physic. Twenty one several Books of Mr. William Brid●e, Collected into two Volumes. Viz. 1 Scripture Light the most sure Light: Compared with, 1. Revelations & Visions 2. Natural & Supernatural Dreams. 3 Impressions with, and without Word 4 Light and Law within. 5. Divine Providence. 6. Christian Experience. 7. Humane Reason. 8. Judicial Astrology. Delivered in Sermons, on 2 Pet. 1. 19 2 Christ in Travel: Wherein, 1. The Travel of his soul. 2. The first and after effects of his Death, 3. His Assurance of Issue. 4. And his satisfaction therein▪ Are opened and cleared in Sermons, on Isa. 53 11. 3 A Listing up for the Cast-down, in case of, 1. Great sin. 2. Weakness of Grace. 3. Miscarriage of Duties. 4. Want of Assurance, 5. Affliction. 6 Temptation. 7. Dissertion. 8. Unserviceableness. 9▪ Discouragements from the Condition itself. Delivered in thirteen Sermons, on Psalm; 42. 11. His Four Sermons concerning, 4 Sin against the Holy Ghost. 5 Sins of Infirmity. 6 The false Apostle tried and discovered 7 The good and means of Establishment 8 The great things Faith can do. 9 The great things Faith can suffer. 10 The Great Gospel Mystery of the Saints Comfort and Holiness, opened and applied from Christ's Priestly Office. 11 Satan's power to Tempt, and Christ's Love to, and Care of his People under Tempta●on 12 Thankfulness required in every Condition. 13 Grace for Grace. 14 The Spiritual Actings of Faith through Natural Impossibilities. 15 Evangelical Repentance 16 The Spiritual Life, etc. 17 The Woman of Canaan. 18 The Saints Hiding place, etc. 19 Christ's Coming is at our Midnight. 20 A Vindication of Gospel Ordinances 21 Grace and Love beyond Gifts The Cause of our Divisions discovered, and the Cure propounded. Twelve Books of Mr. Jeremiah Burroughs lately published; also the Texts of Scripture upon which they are grounded. 1 Gospel Reconciliation, Of Christ's Trumpet of Peace to the World. Wherein is Opened Gods exceeding willingness to be Reconciled to Man ● And God's sending his B●●b●ssadors to, that End from. 2 Cor. 5 19, 20, 21. 2 The Rare Jewel of Christian Contentment, on Phil. 4. 11. Wherein is showed, 1 What Contentment is. 2 It is an Holy art and Mystery. 3 The Excellencies of it. 4 The Evil of the contrary sin of Murmuring, and the Aggravations of it. 3 Gospel-Worship, on Levit. 10. 3. Wherein is showed, 1 The right manner of the Worship of God in General; And particularly, In hearing the Word, Receiving the Lord's supper, & prayer. 4 Gospel-Conversation, on Phil. 1 17 Wherein is showed, 1 That the Conversations of Believers must be above what could be by the Light of Nature. 2 Beyond those that lived under the Law. 3 And suitable to what Truths the Gospel holds forth. The which is added, The Misery of those Men that have their Portion in this Life only, on Psal. 17. 14. 5 A Treatise of Earthly-mindedness: Wherein is showed, 1 What Earthly-mindedness is, 2. The great Evil thereof, on Phil. 3. part of the 19 verse. Also to the same Book is joined, A Treatise of Heavenly-mindedness, and walking with God, on Gen. 5. 24. and on Phil. 3. 20. 6 An Exposition on the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh Chapters of the Prophecy of Hosea. 7 An Exposition on the eighth, ninth, and tenth Chapters of Hosea. 8 An Exposition on the eleventh, twelfth, and thirteenth Chapters of Hosea, being now complete. 9 when Evil of Evils, or the exceeding sinfulness of sin, on Job 16. 21. 10 Precious Faith, on 2 Pet. 1. 1. 11 Of Hope, on 1 John 3. 3. 12 Of Walking by Faith, on 2 Cor. 5. 7. Eleven Books made in New-England, by Mr. Thomas Hooker, and printed from his Papers, written with his own hand; are now published in three Volumes, two in Quarto, and one in Octavo, viz. The Application of Redemption by the effectual work of the Word, and Spirit of Christ, for the bringing home of lost sinners unto God. The first Book on 1 Pet. 1. 18, 19 The second on Matth. 1. 21. The third on Luke, 1. 17. The fourthon 2 Cor. 6. 2 The fift on Matth. 20. 5, 67 The sixth on Revel. 3. 17. The seventh. on Rom. 8. 7. The eighth on John, 6. 44. The Ninth on Isa. 57 15. The Tenth on Acts, 2. 37. The Last, viz. Christ's Prayer for Believers. On John, u7. A Godly and Fruitful Exposition, on the first Epistle of Peter. By Mr. John Rogers, Minister of the Word of God at Dedham in Essex. The Wonders of the Loadstone. By Samuel Ward of Ipswich. An Exposition on the Gospel of the Evangelist St. Matthew. By Mr. Ward. Clows Chirurgery. Marks of Salvation. Christian's Engagement for the Gospel, by John Goodwin. Great Church Ordinance of Baptism Mr. Loves Case, containing his Petitions, Narrative, and Speech. Vox Pacisica, or a Persuasive to Peace. Dr. Prestons' Saints submission, and Satan's Overthrow. Pious Man's Practice in Parliament time. Mr. sympson's Sermon at Westminster Mr. Feaks Sermon before the Lord Major. Mr. Phillip's Treatise of Hell.— of Christ's Genealogy. Eton on the Oath of Allegiance and Covenant, showing that they oblige not. A Congregational Church is a Catholic Visible Church. By Samuel Stone in New-England. A Treatise of Politic Powers, wherein seven Questions are answered, 1 Whereof Power is made, and for what ordained. 2 Whether Kings and Governors have an Absolute Power over the People. 3 Whther Kings and Governors be subject to the Laws of God, or the Laws of their Country. 4 How far the People are to obey their Governors. 5 Whether all the People have, be their Governors. 6 Whether it be Lawful to depose an evil Governor. 7 What Confidence is to be given to Princes. The Compassionate Samaritan. Dr. Sibbs on the Philippians. The Best and Worst Magistrate. By Obadiah Sedgwick. The Craft and Cruelty of the Church's Adversaries. By Matthew Newcomin. A Sacred Penegrick. By Stephen Martial. Barriffs' Military Discipline. The Immortality of Man's Soul The Anatomist Anatomised King Charles his Case, or an Appeal to all Rational men concerning his trial. Mr. Owen's stedsastness of the Promises. A Vindication of Free Grace: Endeavouring to prove, 1. That we are not elected as holy, but that we should be holy; and that Election is not of kinds, but persons. 2. that Christ did not by his death intent to save all men, and touching those whom he intended to save, that he did not die for them only, if they would believe, but that they might believe. 3. that we are not justified properly by our believing in Christ, but by our Christ, believing in him. 4. that which differenceth one man from another, is not the improvement of a common ability restored through Christ to all men in general, but a principle of Grace wrought by the Spirit of God in the Elect. By John Pawson. Six Sermons preached by Doctor Hill. Viz. 1 The Beauty and Sweetness of an Olive Branch of Peace, and Brotherly Accommodation budding. 2 Truth and Love happily married in the Church of Christ. 3 The Spring of strengthening Grace in the Rock of Ages Christ jesus. 4 The strength of the Saints to make jesus Christ their strength. 5 The Best and Worst of Paul. 6 Gods Eternal preparation for his Dying Saints. The Bishop of Canterbury's Speech on the Scaffold. The King's Speech on the Scaffold. The Magistrates Support and Burden. By Mr. John Cordel The Discipline of the Church in New-England: By the Churches and Synod there. A Relation of the Barbadoss. A Relation of the Repentance and Conversion of the Indians in New-England: by Mr. Eliot, and Mr. Mayhew. The Institutes of the Laws of England, by John Cowel. Octavo. A Description of the Grand Signiors Scraglio; or the Turkish Emperors Court. By John Greaves. Octavo. The reigning Error arraigned at the Bar of Scripture, and Reason. By Francis Fulwood. Octavo. The state of future Life. By Thomas White. twelve. FINIS. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FIRST BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. The first Figure shows the Effigies of a living Man, in which, not only the external parts of the Abdomen, but also the Veins under the Skin which are conspicuous are represented. A The right Hypochondria. B The left Hypochondria. CC The Epigastrium. DD The Bowels. EE The Hypogastrium. F F The groins. G The Region above the Privities. H The Vein of the Forehead. I The Vein of the Temples. K The external Jugular Vein. L The cephalick vein of the right Arm. M The basilick vein of the right Arm. N The middle or common Vein, which is not in the same place in all Bodies. O The cephalick vein of the left Hand. P The vein of the left Hand, called Salvatella. Q Q The Vein Saphaena descending. R R The Vein Saphaena in the Foot it itself. S S The Sciatick Vein. The Second Figure expresseth the common cover of the Body of Man, and the Muscles under them laid open. A A The Scarf-skin. B B B B The Skin. C C C C The Fat. D D D D The fleshy Membrane. E E Part of the pectoral Muscles laid open. F F F Certain beginnings of the Muscles called Serrati antici majores. GG HH TWO The Muscles of the Abdomen obliquely descending. G H H Their toothed beginnings. I I I I The tendon of the obliqne descending Muscles, under which the right Muscles of the Abdomen with their Nervous inscriptions appear. K K The white line of the Abdomen. THE TABLE OF THE SECOND BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK, OPENED AND EXPLAINED. This Table lays open the Bones of the Abdomen in seven Figures: two others, to wit, the eighth and ninth shows the Muscles of the Abdomen: The tenth gives you a clear sight of the Parts, the Peritonaeum being removed. FIG. I. Expresseth the five Vertebrae of the Loins, as they are observed on the fore part. a a a a The Transverse Process. FIG. II. Lays open to your view, the Vertebrae of the Loins, as are presented on the back Part. a The hole for the Marrow of the Back. b b The transverse Process. c c c c The obliqne Process. d Th●●acute Process. FIG. III. Represents the internal face of the Os Coxae, as it is united in such as are grown up. A Os Ilium. B B Os Coxendix. C Os Pubis. FIG. iv Demonstrates the external face of the Os Coxae. A Os Ilium. a a The Spine of the Os Ilium. B Os Coxendix. C C Os Pubis. FIG. V Gives the internal view of the Os Sacrum divided into six parts. a a a a The holes which give passage to the Nerves. b The three parts of the Coccyx. FIG. VI The same Bone externally to be seen. a The hole for the Marrow of the Back. b b b Lesser holes for Nerves. c Os Coccyx. FIG. VII. The Figure which deciphers the Os Coxa, as it is observed to be distinct in Children. A Os Ilium a little taken from the rest. B B Os Coxendix. C C Os Pubis. a a The clest distinguishing the Os Coxendix and Os Pubis. The connexure of all the Bones of the Abdomen, see in the Table to Chapter 17. FIG. VIII. A The Muscle of the Abdomen obliquely descending, in which a a Are the toothed beginnings. b b The Tendon sticking to the white Line. B The Muscle of the Abdomen obliquely ascending, in which c c c Its beginning. d d A portion of its tendon which covers the right Muscle. e e The right Muscle of the Abdomen. FIG. IX. A The transverse Muscle loosed about the beginning, in which a a a The beginning. b b A portion of the Tendon. B The right Muscle of the Abdomen, in which c The Beginning. d d d The Nervous inscriptions. e The end. C The back part of the other right Muscle, in which d Shows the Vein and mammary Artery descending. e The Epigastrick vein and artery ascending. f The Anastomosis of the veins. g g The Peritonaeum laid bare from the muscles. D D The Pyramidal Muscles. E E The Process of the Peritonaeum descending to the Cod. FIG. X. A Part of the Pectoral Muscle detected. B The Sternum. C The Stomach being something hid by the Liver. D The Liver. E The Omentum in its Situation. b A portion which sticketh to the Liver. c c A portion which is knit to the bottom of the Stomach. d d d The remainder of the Omentum as it lies upon the Bowels. F F The Bowels in their situation. G The Navel Vein. H The Ligament of the Bladder composed of the Urachos, and the two Navel arteries. I The bottom of the Bladder. a a a a The Peritonaeum divided. AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE OF THE THIRD BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. The Omentum and Mesenterium, figure I. The Gula with its Muscles, figure II. and III. The Stomach and Bowels under it, figure IU. The Tunicles of the Bowels, figure V and VI The Muscles of the right Gut, figure VII. The Nerve of the sixth pair, figure VIII. FIG. I. A A A A. The Mesenterium with the Guts adjoined. a a a a. The Glandulae of the Mesenterium. B B B. The Vessels of the Mesenterium diffused to the Guts. C C. Part of the Colon stretched out. D D. Part of the Omentum drawn abroad upwards. FIG. II. A A. The first pair of the Muscles of the Gula, called Cephalopharyngaeus. B B. The second pair of the Muscles of the Gula, or Sphenopharingaeus. C C. The third pair, Stylopharingaeus. D D. The Sphincter of the Throat. E E E. A backward view of the Gula. F The left external Nerve of the sixth pair. G. The right external Nerve of the sixth pair. H. The superior Orifice of the Stomach. I I I The bottom of the Stomach. K. The inferior Orifice of the Stomach with a portion of the Duodenum annexed to it. FIG. III. A A. The Muscles Caephalopharyngaeus conspicuous on the fore part. B B. The Muscles Sphenopharyngaeus. C C. The Muscles Stylopharingaeus. D D. The Sphincter of the throat dilated. E. The internal face of the Gula. F. The descending part of the Gula. FIG. iv A. The superior Orifice of the Stomach knit together within a thread. B. The inferior Orifice, or Pylorus. C C. The common tunicle of the Stomach separated. D. The middle tunicle of the Stomach. E. The inner tunicle of the Stomach. F. A portion of the Duodenum. G G. The gut called Jejunum. H H H. The gut Ileum as it lies in its foldings. I. The Gut Caecum. K K K. The Gut Colon. L. The shut, being opened in the beginning of the Colon. M. The beginning of the right Gut, knit with a thread. FIG. V P P. The common tunicle of the guts separated. Q. The middle tunicle of the Guts, which is the first proper one. FIG. VI R. The rugged tunicle of the Guts which is the second proper▪ FIG. VII. M. The right Gut cut off. N N. The two muscles called Levatores. O. The Sphincter of the Fundament. FIG. VIII. ♃. The Nerve of the sixth pair on the right side, in which A A The external and greater Branch. a The branch which is carried to the Neck. b A branch of the seventh pair, joined to this sixth pair which is carried to the Neck. c A Nerve of the seventh pair joined to the sixth under the skull. d A branch of the seventh passing to the muscle of the Os Hyois. e A branch from the seventh to the tongue. f f A Nerve from the external branch of the sixth pair, which is carried to the internal muscles of the Larynx. g g The right Nerve called Recurrens. h h Many Nerves distributed to the Lungs and wind pipe. i i i The branches of the right Stomachical, stretched out. B B B The internal, or costal branch, laid open with its bunches. ▿ The Nervous plexure of the Mesenterium guarded with certain callous Bodies. l l The branch which is carried to the Omentum, Duodenum, and Liver. m m The branch which is carried to the right Kidney. n n n n The branches distributed in the Mesenterium and Guts. o The branch which goes to the Os Sacrum. p p The extremity of the internal right branch, which is distributed to the Womb and Bladder. q r The branches from the internal right side, which make the plexure on that side. ♀ The Nerve of the sixth pair on the left side; in which, the signification of the Letters is the same, save only G Is the Nerve from the left Recurrens, which is distributed to the Pericardium, and Heart itself. ** The Nerve which from the external left stomachical is carried to the Liver. l l The Nerve which is carried to the Spleen and Gut Colon. m m The Nerve of the left Kidney. The remainder are the same with the former. AN UNFOLDING OF THE TABLE OF THE FOURTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. The fourth Table lays down the Situation of the Sweetbread, Liver, and Spleen, and the Delineation of the Vena Porta. FIG. I. A The hollow part of the Liver. ● The round convex, or bowing part of the Liver. ● The Umbilicar Vein drawn upwards. C The Gall in its Situation. D The Spleen in its natural place. EE The Sweetbread in its proper place. FF The Vena Porta descending by the Sweetbread under the Liver. G The superior Mesenterical Artery. aaaa The branches of the Vena Porta, extended by the Mesenterium. bbbb The branches of the artery distributed by the Mesenterium. HH The Mesenterium itself dismantled of its superior Membrane. TWO The Splenical Vessels laid open, the Pancreas being cut. FIG. II. AA The Body of the Sweetbread deciphored in its Natural form. FIG. III. The back part of the Sweetbread, together with the Spleen turned downwards. AA The substance of the Sweetbread, its Membrane being taken off. BBB The channel of the Sweetbread newly found out. C The biliar poor joined to the channel .. DDD A portion of the Guts Duodenum and Jejunum, cut off. E The common Orifice, by which the biliar poor and channel of the Sweetbread, open themselves into the Duodenum. FFF The internal face of the Spleen. GGG The veins and arteries distributed in the Spleen. FIG. iv AA The convex or bowing part of the Liver. B The skin of the Liver separated from it. CC The Ligament of the Liver called Septale. DD The large branches of the Vena Cava within the Liver. FIG. V AA The hollow part of the Liver turned upwards. B The Lobe of the Liver by which it joins itself to the Omentum. C The cloven of the Liver, out of which the Umbilicar vein descends. E The Umbilicar vein turned upwards. F The Gall placed under the Liver. G The channel of the Gall. HH The biliar poor, with the channel stretched outwards, together with a part of the Duodenum, noted by M. I The trunk of the Vena Porta descending from the Liver. K The right Caeliacal artery. L A Nerve arising from the plexure of the costals. FIG. VI The Vena Porta whole, distinguished into branches, as it is publicly showed. AAA The trunk of the Vena Porta; A the inferior portion, descending from the Liver. A A the deduction of it to the right and left with an infinite number of small branches. B The Splenical branch, divided first into great, afterwards into very many small branches, and distributed like strings about the Spleen. C The right Mesenterical branch. D The left Mesenterical branch. aa The Umbilicar vein, b The vein of the Gall. c The vein of the Sweetbreads dd The vein called Gastrica dextra. eee The greater Gastrica sinistra. fg The lesser veins called Gastricae sinistrae. h The vein called Vas breve. two The vein called Gastroepiploica sinistra. KK The vein called Gastroepiploica dextra. ll The Uemorrhoidal veins produced here from the right Mesenterical branch of the Vena Porta. m The vein of the Duodenum. FIG. VII. A The convex part of the Spleen laid open. BB The Membrane of the Spleen separated. CC The black substance of the Spleen. FIG. VIII. AAA The hollow part of the Spleen which receives the Vessels. B The Splenical vein with its three branches. C The Splenical artery divided in like manner before it enter the Spleen. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FIFT BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. The present Table lays open the Reins with their Glandulae, the Emulgent Vessels, Bladder and ureters. Also the rise and progress of the Spermatick Vessels. FIG. I. AA The Glandulae of the Reins, or the Capsula of Melancholy. B The right Kidney uncovered of the Membrane. C The left Kidney. D The descending trunk of the Vena Cava. E The descending trunk of the great artery. FF The right Ureter. GG The left Ureter. HH The right Vessels preparing the Seed. TWO The left Vessels preparing the Seed. K Part of the Bladder, besides which, the Vessels carrying the Seed are turned in the Abdomen. L Part of the right Gut cut off. FIG. II. AA The common Membrane of the Reins which is bespread with fat. BB The Glandulae of the Kidneys. C The right Kidney. D The left Kidney. E The proper skin of the Kidneys partly separated. F The trunk of the Vena Cava descending. G The trunk of the great artery descending. H The left Emulgent Vein. TWO The right Emulgent Vein. aa The right Emulgent arteries. bb The left Emulgent arteries. c The left Spermatick artery. d The left Spermatick Vein. e The right Spermatick Vein. f The right Spermatick artery. g The Fatty Vein arising from the Emulgent. h The fatty artery. KKKK The Ureters on both fides. LLLL The Vessels preparing the Seed. MM The Scrotum with the testicles in it. NN The Vessels carrying the Seed. O The Bladder stripped of his external tunicle. FIG. III. A The Capsula, or right Glandula Renalis. BB A Vein from the trunk of the Vena Cava coming into it. FIG. iv A The Capsula dissected. BB The hollowness of the Capsula somewhat laid open. FIG. V AA The internal face of the dissected Kidney. BB The Emulgent Vein with his branches distributed in the Kidney. C The Emulgent artery in like manner distributed. FIG. VI AA The Kidney dissected. B The Sinus of the Ureter about the Kidney. C The round form of the ureters descending from the Kidneys. DD The narrow passages of the ureters. EEE The fleshy Knobs called Papillares. FIG. VII. AA The common tunicle of the Bladder drawn back. BB The middle tunicle and bottom of the Bladder. C The inner tunicle which appears when the Bladder is cut. D The Orifice of the bladder by which the Urine passeth out. EE The Neck of the Bladder which seems swelled by reason of the Prostatae joined to it. FF Part of the Ureters that come to the Bladder. AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE OF THE sixth BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table shows the Spermatick Vessels, the Testicles, the Membranes of the Scrotum, the Yard, the Reins and Bladder. FIG. I. A The right Glandula renalis. B The left Glandula renalis. CC The Reins on each side. D The left emulgent Vein. E The right emulgent Vein. FF The right and left emulgent Arteries. G The right Spermatical Vein. HH The trunk of the Vena Cava descending. I The left Iliack branch of the Vena Caya. K The right Iliack branch. L The right Spermatical Artery. MM The trunk of the great artery descending. N The right Iliack branch of the great Artery. O The left Iliack branch of the same. P The left Spermatical artery. Q The left Spermatical vein. RR The left Ureter. SS The right Ureter. TT The Vessels preparing the Seed. tt The same Vessels, in what place the Pampiniformia begin. W The Vasa deferentia passing behind the Bladder. XX The Scrotum with the Testicles in it. Y The Bladder. Z The neck of the Bladder. aa The two Muscles erecting the Yard. bb The two Muscles dilating the Urethra. c The Body of the Yard. d The Praeputium. FIG. II. AA The skin of the Scrotum separated. BBB The Membrane called Dartus. CC The external part of the membrane Elytroides. DD The Cremaster arising under the transverse Muscles of the Abdomen. EE The internal or membranous part of the Elytroides. FF The proper white tunicle of the testicle separated. f The same joined to the testicle. G The Glandulous substance of the testicle. H The Vessel called Pampiniforme or Pyramidale. TWO Epididymis. K The Parastate. FIG. III. oe A portion for the preparing Vessels. AA The Pyramidal Vessels. BB Epididymis. CCC Parastates. D The testicle covered with its proper Membrane E A portion of the Vasa deferentia. FIG. iv AA The contexture of the veins and arteries in the Pyramidal Vessel. BB Epydidymis. CC Parastate. DD A portion of the Vasa deferentia. FIG. V A The Bladder laid bare from its outward tunicle. BB A portion of the Ureters. CC A portion of the Vasa deferentia. DD The Capsulae. dd The end of the Capsulae. EE The Seminal Bladders. FF The Glandulae Prostatae. GG The Urethra. HH The Muscles which erect the Yard. TWO The Muscles which dilate the Urethra. KK The two Nervous bodies of the Yard. L The Preputium drawn back. M The Glans with its Bridle. FIG. VI A The internal tunicle of the Bladder being open. BB Part of the ureters. CC The Orifice of the Ureters as they are diducted into the Bladder. DD The beginning of the Capsulae. EE The Seminal Bladders. GG The Glandulae Prostatae divided. L The hole in the Capsulae passing into the beginning of the Urethra, which is covered with a shutter. FIG. VII. A The Membrane of the nervous body of the Yard separated. B The blackish marrow of the same body. C The Glans laid naked. AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE OF THE SEVENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table shows the Genitals of Women: First of all in their Natural Situation; then their several Parts out of their Situation; Lastly, the Hymen and Zone. FIG. I. a The right preparing Vessels. b The left preparing Vessels. c A portion of the right Gut. d The bottom of the Womb sticking up above the Bladder. t The Bladder. FIG. II. A The right Glandulae renalis. B The left Glandulae renalis. CC The Kindneys on both sides. DD The right emulgent veins. EEE The right emulgent arteries. FF The trunk of the Vena Cava, divided into the right and left Iliack branches. G The left emulgent vein. H The left emulgent arteries. TWO The right Spermatical vein. K The right Spermatical artery. L The left Spermatical artery. M The left Spermatical vein. NN The trunk of the great artery divided into the right and left Iliack. OO women's Testicles. PP A portion of the broad Ligament. QQQQ The Tubae of the Womb, depressed on both sides with the Ligament, that so the Testicles may appear. R The bottom of the Womb. SS The round Ligaments of the Womb cut off below. T The neck of the womb. V In the right side, the Hypogastrick vein V In the left side, the Hypogastrick artery distributed in the Womb. X In the right side, the Hypogastrick artery distributed in the Womb. X In the left side, the Hypogastrick vein distributed in the Womb. Y The passage of the Womb. Z The Bladder depressed above the Privities. aa A portion of the Ureters cut off about the Bladder. bb A portion of the ureters descending cut off about the reins. cc The preparing Vessels dilated about the testicles. dd The Vasa deferentia. FIG. III. AA The bottom of the Womb dissected closely. BB The cavity of the bottom. C The neck of the Womb. D The hole in the neck of the Womb of a Woman which hath brought forth. EE The wrinkled face of the passage of the womb. FF The round Ligaments of the womb cut off underneath. FIG. iv A The right testicle. BB The right Tubae depressed. C The left testicle. bb The passages of the testicles of the womb. DD The left Tubae of the womb. E The bottom of the womb. FF The round Ligaments of the womb cut off below. G The Bladder inserted to the passage of the womb and stretched upwards. HH Portions of the Ureters. TWO The two musculous parts of the Clytoris. K The body itself of the Clytoris. FIG. V A The head of the Clytoris slicking out under the skin. BB The external Lips of the Privities drawn aside. CC The Alae or Nymphae drawn aside. D The Caruncle of the passage of Vrive besides (a) EE The two fleshy productions like Myrile Leaves. FF The Membranous containing of the chink. FIG. VI A The Membrane drawn cross the Privities vulgarly taken for the Hymen. FIG. VII. A The Privities of a young Girl, in which the signification is the same as in the fift figure. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE EIGHT BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. The Fruit in the Womb being often helped by Physical Remedies, requires no less diligent observation than the Body itself of Man: therefore we have given you the representation of it in two Tables according to the Method of Dissections. The first of which, lays open to your view the Umbilicar Vessels, and the Sccleton: The other the Deliniament of the Bowels. FIG. I. Shows the Child ready to be born, as it lies in a sit posture for extramission. AAAA The parts of the Abdomen dissected and distracted. BBBB The body of the womb divided into four parts CCCC The Charion and Amnios joined together, and dissected into four parts. D The child turning its head downwards, which is the natural way of Birth. FIG. II. Shows the Child taken out of the Womb, the Umbilicar Vessels, and Membranes separated about the beginning. A The Umbilicar vein distended from the liver. BB The two Umbilicar Arteries rising to the Navel. C The Urachus knit to the Navel. DDD The Navel produced even to the Placentum. EE The Amnios' separated from the Chorion, under which a portion of the Navel appears. FF The Chorion divided into four parts. GGG The Umbilicar veins and arteries, distributed in the Placenta which are extended above the Chorion, but very lucidly appear under it. FIG. III. Explains the Secundines, in what part they cleaye to the womb. AA The convex part of the Placenta. BBBB The Chorion under the Placenta. FIG. iv Shows the Bones pertaining to the Head. AA The bone of the Forehead distinct from the Suture. BB The two bones of the fore part of the head. C The Crown as yet Membranous by reason of the distance of the Bones. D The inferior cheek divided into two parts. FIG. V Shows the ring-like bone of the Infant, to which the Membrane of the Ear called Timpanum is knit. FIG. VI The bones of the Ears, removed a little from their Natural Situation. A The Malleus. B The Incus. C The Stapes. D The little bone annexed to the Ligament of the Stapes, first found out by D. Silvius. FIG. VII. Exactly represents the Labyrinth and Cochlea of the Ears perfect in all parts. A The Oval hole in the Tympanum, which looks toward the Labyrinth. B The round hole in the Tympanum between the Labyrinth and the Cochlea. CCC The three bony Cavities of the Labyrinth. DD The Cochlea. FIG. VIII. Shows the internal face of the Cochlea with the Labyrinth. A The oval hole. B The round hole. CCC The three circles of the Labyrinth something opened. DD The Cochlea broken, showing the little inward porous circle. FIG. IX. The Vertebra of the Infant in three distinct parts. A The first back part. B The second back part. C The third fore part. FIG. X. Shows the Vertebrae of the Neck, the bones of the Breast as they are seen on the forepart. A Denotes only the upper part of the Sternum, the rest are under it. FIG. XI. Shows the back, and its Vertebrae, wanting their Processes. FIG. XII. Shows the Vertebrae of the Loins with the bones that make the Pelvis. A The five Vertebrae of the Joyous, whose Processes are yet cartilaginous. B The Os Sacrum composed of six parts. CC The bones called Ilium. DD The bones of the Pubis. EE The bones of the Coxendix. FIG. XIII. Expresseth the bones of the whole hand. abd The Appendices of the bones, yet cartilaginous. c The bones of the wrist all cartilaginous. FIG. XIV. Represents the bones of the whole Foot. abd The Appendices of the bones which are cartilaginous. c Certain Cartilaginous bones of the Instep. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE NINTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table comprehends all the Bowels which are found in the Abdomen, and Breast of the Infant. FIG I. Singularly expresseth the Lacteal Veins, as they are represented at a single view. AAA The hollow part of the Liver. B The Gall. CC The umbilicar vein bowed upward. DD The Stomach turned upwards. E It's lower Orifice tied with a string. F A portion of the Jejunum cut off near the Pylorus. GGG The Pancreas of a famous bigness. H The Spleen. TWO The right Kidney covered with the common Membrane. K The left Kidney in like manner covered. LLL The Mesenterium stretched abroad. MM etc. The Guts knit to the Mesenterium. aaaa Certain Lecteal veins stretched from the Sweetbread to the Liver, whereof few, and those the least of them are here expressed. bbb etc. Lacteal veins distributed from the Sweetbread to the Guts, and those bigger. ccc etc. The Meseraick branches of the Vena porta. dd etc. Branches of the Meseraick arteries. FIG. II. A The right Renal Glandula. B The right Kidney. C The left Glandula of the Reins. D The left Kidney. E The Vena Cava descending. FF It's internal Iliack branches. GG The external Iliack branches of the Vena Cava. HHH The great artery with its external Iliack branches. TWO The internal branches of the great artery. KK etc. Both umbilicar arteries bend downwards. L The bottom of the womb compressed. M The neck of the womb. N The bladder turned downwards. O The Urachos. P The node of the Navel cut off. a The vein of the right Renal Glandula. b The artery of the right Renal Glandula. c The right emulgent artery. d The right emulgent vein. e The right spermatical vein. f The right spermatical artery. g The left artery of the Renal Glandula. h The left vein of the Renal Glandula. i The left emulgent vein. k The left emulgent artery. l The left spermatical vein. m The left spermatical artery. nn The Vessels preparing the Seed. oo The testicles of a great magnitude. pp The broad Ligaments of the womb. qq etc. The Tubae of the womb bowed down. rr The round Ligaments of the womb cut off below. ss Portions of the ureters cut off. FIG. III. AA The Lungs diducted on both sides. B The Heart whole. C The trunk of the great artery coming from the Heart. D A portion of the same artery passing downwards. E The Vena Arteriosa stretched from the Heart. aa The channel between the Vena Arteriosa and the great Artery. b The beginning of the right subclavian artery. c The beginning of the right Carotides. d The beginning of the left Artery Carotides. FIG. iv AA The Lungs diducted. B The Heart cut towards the right Ventricle. C The Vena Cava opened near the Heart. D Anastomosis between the Vena Cava and Arteria Venosa. E The shutter in the Anastomosis. FIG. V A The Corpus Thymium separated from the Vessels of the Heart. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE TENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table represents the Muscles and bones of the Breast, its Membranes and Diaphragma. FIG. I. A The Pectoral Muscle in his situation. B The same Muscle out of his situation. C Serratus major anticus in its situation. D The same a little removed out of it. E Serratus anticus minor totally in its situation. F The subclavian Muscle in its situation. ● The Clavicula bowed back under the pectoral Muscle. gg Platysma myodes in the neck with their right strings. GG etc. The external intercostal muscles without their situation. HH etc. The internal intercostal muscles in their situation. TWO A portion of the Diaphragma in its situation. K Part of the great artery descending. L The hole for the Gula passing the Diaphragma. M The hole for the Vena Cava descending. NN The square muscles of the loins in their situation, of which Chap. 12. OO The muscles called Psoas in their situation, of which Chap. 19 FIG. II. Shows the bones of the breast as they are to be seen forwards. AA The Sternum. B The Mucronata, or sword-like Cartilege. CC etc. The cartilaginous part of the Ribs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The true Ribs. 8. 9 10. 11. 12. The bastard Ribs. FIG. III. Shows the Ribs, Vertebrae and processes on the back part. FIG. iv The Breast opened, in which AA The Mediastinum drawn to the side. BB The tunicle of the Mediastinum diducted under the Sternum. C The right lobe of the Lungs. FIG. V AA Part of the Pleura drawn at one side from the Ribs. BB The Ribs laid bare from the Pleura. CC The Ribs clothed with the Pleura. FIG. VI Shows the Diaphragma separated from the Ribs and Vertebrae. AAA The fleshy part of the Diaphragma covered with its Membrane. BB The Phrenical arteries. CC The Phrenical veins. D The passage of the Vena Cava. E The passage of the Gula. FFF The membranous part of the Diaphragma. G The hole between the fleshy portions of the descending of the great artery. FIG. VII. A The left nerve of the Diaphragma. B The right nerve of the same. C The superior membrane of the Diaphragma separated. D The fleshy substance of the Diaphragma. E The hole for the Gula. F The hole for the Vena Cava. GGG The Membranous part. HHH The fleshy parts between with the great artery descends. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE ELEVENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table chief represents the Heart, its Membranes, Vessels, Ventricles and shutters, than the Lungs and the Aspera Arteria separated from them. FIG. I. A The Pericardium compassing the Heart. BB The Lungs embracing the Heart in their Natural Situation. C The Vena Cava ascending above the Heart. D The beginning of the vein without a fellow. E The right subclavian vein. F The right Jugular vein. G The left Jugular vein. H The left subclavian vein. TWO The right and left Carotis Artery. KK The right and left subclavian Artery. LL The Nerves of the sixth pair descending to the Lungs. M The beginning of the great Artery descending. FIG. II. Shows particularly the vessels passing from the Heart to the Lungs; which are showed you separated in the third and sixth figure of the following Chapter. A The Pericardium taken from the Heart. B The Heart with the Coronal veins and arteries. C The trunk of the great Artery passing out of the Heart. D It's descending part turned upwards. EE The left branch of the Arterial vein distributed to the Lungs. F A channel between the arterial vein, and the great artery. G The right branch of the arterial vein. HH The right and left branch of the venal artery. I The Ear of the Heart. KK The Lungs about the Heart. L The proper tunicle of the Lungs separated. FIG. ●. The Heart of an Insant whole. A The proper Membrane of the Heart separated. B The substance of the Heart bare. CC The right and left Ears of the Heart. D The great Artery sticking out of the Heart. E A portion of the Vena Cava. FIG. * A Part of the Heart transversly cut. B The left ventricle. CC The right ventricle conspicuous. DD The Septum of the Heart. FIG. III. Shows the Vena Cava dissected with the right Ventricle. A The Orifice of the coronal Vein. B The Anastomosis between the Vena Cava and the venal artery. CCC The shutters called Tricuspides. DDD The right Ventricle of the Heart opened. aa The passages between the Membranes ending in the Septum. FIG. iv A The arterious vein dissected in the right ventricle. BBB The shutters called Sigmoides in the arterious vein. CCC The right Ventricle of the Heart opened. FIG. V A The great Artery diffected near the Heart. BBB The semilunar shutters of the great artery. CC The left Ventricle of the heart. D Part of the left Ventricle turned back. FIG. VI A The Venal artery dissected. B The beginning of the Anastomosis between the venal artery and the Vena Cava. bb The passages between the Membranes ending in the Septum. CC The two mitral shutters. DD The left Ventricle of the Heart opened. FIG. VII. Shows the backward part of the Lungs and windpipe, as they are joined to the Heart. A The right Nerve of the sixth pair which comes to the Lungs. B The left Nerve of the same. C The middle branch between each Nerve. D The branch which is carried to the Pericardium, EE The two greater branches of the windpipe which are Membranous behind. FF The hinder part of the Lungs. G The proper Membrane of the Lungs. HH A portion of the Pericardium left. I The heart left in his Situation. FIG. VIII. A The windpipe cut off under the Larynx. B The right branch thereof divided first into two parts. C The left branch thereof divided into greater and lesser branches. ddd etc. The extremity of the branches ending in membranous channels. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE TWELFTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. FIG. I. Shows the Vena Cava. A The beginning of the Vena Cava, with his large orifice about the Heart. BB The rise of the subclavian branches. C The beginning of the descending trunk. DD The right and left Iliack branches. aaa etc. The branches of the Azygus distributed to the Ribs. bb The superior intercostal. cc The internal mammary. * The Mediastina. dd The Vertebral Vein. ee The internal Jugular cut off under the skull. ff The external Jugular, from which the inferior branch riseth to the Organ of speech, and the Subcutaneus by the face and Temples, and backwards by another branch to the Ears. gg The Cervical Vein. hh The progress of the subclavian branches. two The internal scapular vein. KK The external scapulars. 3.3. The vein carried to the Muscle Deltois. ll The superior Breast-vein. mm The Cephalick vein cut off. nn The basilick vein cut off. oo The inferior Breast-vein. p The left phrenical vein. q The right phrenical vein. rr A famous branch distributed in the Liver. ss tt etc. The sprigs thereof distributed in the right and left side thereof. vu The Venae musculae, or superior Lumbals. yy The veins of the Renal Glandulae. xx The right and left emulgent. zz The right and left spermatical. αα The beginning of the Lumbals. ββ The Vena muscula of the interior Lumbal. γγ The Vena sacra. ΔΔ The external Iliack branch. EE The Epigastrick vein. ●● The internal Iliack branch. ●● Vena Glutea. ꝭꝭ The Hypogastrick veins. ●● The veins of the Privities. θθ The inguinal veins. KK etc. The branch of the crural vein. iii The Saphena. λλ The vein Ischias. FIG. II. Particularly describes the coronal vein of the heart. FIG. III. Show the Arterial Vein of the Heart. A The beginning by which it passeth out of the right ventricle. BB Its branches which pass to the right part of the Lungs. CC Its branches which pass to the left. FIG. iv Shows the great Artery. A It's beginning rising out of the heart. BB The beginning and progress of the subclavian branches. C The trunk descending. DD The right and left Iliack branches. aa The artery Carotis. bb Its external branch distributed to the Jaws, Face, and backwards to the Ears. cc The internal Carotis cut off under the skull. dd The vertebral artery in like manner cut off. ●● The cervical muscula. ee The internal Mammary. ff The branches of the superior intercostal artery. gg The internal scapular artery. hh The external scapular artery. two The superior breast-artery. kk The inferior breast-artery. lm The arteries distributed to the muscles of the Shoulder. nn The inferior intercostals. oo The phrenical arteries. p The famous artery called Coeliaca. q It's right branch divided into three parts; of which, the superior and inferior is distributed to the Liver, and the middle to the Gall. r The left branch of the Coeliacal. s The right Gastrical artery. t The splenical artery divided in small branches to the spleen. u The artery called Epiploica. ur The Gastroepiploica. x The artery carried to the Renal Glandula. yyy etc. The superior Mesenterical artery distributed into branches. zz The emulgent arteries. αα The rise of the Lumbal arteries. ββ The spermatical arteries. γγ The inferior Mesenterical artery derived into many branches. ● The Arteria sacra. ΔΔ The external Iliack artery. ●● The internal Iliack. ●● Arteria Glutaea. ꝭꝭ The Hypogastrick artery distributed to the right Gut and Privities. ♀ ♀ The Hypogastrick artery distributed to the womb distinguished from the former. ●● The umbilicar artery. EE The Epigastrick artery. θθ The Arteria Pudenda. two The Ischias. kk The inferior Arteria Muscula. λλ The artery which goes to the internal Iliack muscle. FIG. V Shows the Coronal Artery of the Heart. FIG. VI Shows the Venal Artery arising from the left Ventricle of the Heart. A It's Orifice. BB Its branches distributed to the right side of the Lungs. CC Its branches distributed to the left. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE THIRTEENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. In this Table is laid open to view, the Cartilages of the Larynx with their Muscles; the Os Hyois with its Muscles; the Tongue, its Nerves and Muscles; the Wula with its Muscles; the Tonsils, the Vertebrae of the Neck and its bowing Muscles. FIG. I. The external face of the Buckler-like Cartilege. FIG. II. The internal face of the Buckler-like Cartilege. FIG. III. The hinder view of the Ring-like Cartilege. FIG. iv A view of the foremost part of the same Cartilege. FIG. V VI The Cartilages called Arytaenoides. FIG. VII. The Epiglottis. FIG. VIII. A The Buckler-like Cartilege. BB The pair of Muscles Hyothyroides. CCCC The pair of Muscles Sternothyroides. DD The small Muscles called Cricothiroides. FIG. IX. A The external part of the Epiglottis joined to the Larynx. BB The Muscles Thyroarytaenoides. CC The lateral Muscles Cricoarytaenoides. D The Ring-like Cartilege. EE The fore part of the windpipe. FIG. X. A The internal face of the Epiglottis. aa The sticking out of the cartilages Arytaenoides. BB The Muscles Arytaenoides every where loosed. CC The Muscles Cricoaritaenoides postici. D The broad part of the Ring-like cartilege. EE The hinder and membranous part of the windpipe. FIG. XI. A The bast of the Os Hyois. BB The horns of the Os Hyois. CC The two cartilaginous Appendices. FIG. XII. A The internal face of the bast of the Os Hyois. BB The internal face of the horns. CC The two cartilaginous Appendices. FIG. XIII. A The sides of the Os Hyois. BB The muscles Geniohyoides turned downwards. CC The internal Geniohyoides commonly called Genioglossi. DDDD The muscles Sternohyoides. EE The muscles Styloceratohyoides. FFF The Muscles Coracohyoides. ff The middle tendinous part. FIG. XIV. A The inferior part of the top of the Tongue. BBBB The muscles Basioglossi. ssss The nervous substance between the muscles. CC The muscles Ceratoglossi. DD The muscles Styloglossi. EE The muscles Myloglossi. aa The Nerves of the Tongue from the fourth conjugation. bb The Nerves of the Tongue from the seventh conjugation. FIG. XV. A The Gargareon or Uuula. BB The external pair of Muscles. bb Its tendon which passeth the chink. CC The internal pair of muscles something compressed. D Part of the palate from which the Uuula hangs. FIG. XVI, and XVII. Shows the Glandulae called Tonsillae. FIG. XVIII. AA The long muscles bowing the neck. BB The muscles bowing the neck called Scaleni. aa Part of the Nerves tending to the arms. CC The muscles bowing the Head with the Mastoides. FIG. XIX. Shows the seven joints of the neck. FIG. XX. The first joint of the Neck, in which aa The two holes holding the hinder part of the Head. bb The holes on the sides which gives passage to the arteries to ascend. FIG. XXI. The second Vertebra of the Neck. a The tooth-like process. b The Spina Bifidia. FIG XXII. a The Spine: the rest is like the other joints. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FOURTEENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. It contains the Muscles which are conspicuous about the Shoulders, Back, Loins, and Neck, the Carcase being turned over upon the Belly. FIG. I. AA The muscles Trapezii in their situation. BB The Rhomboides laid a little to view. CC DD The broadest muscle of the back, in which CC Shows its fleshy part. DD Its membranous beginning. FIG. II. AA Trapezius pulled out of its situation. BB The Rhomboides laid open in its situation. C The same drawn out of his situation, as yet joined to the basis of the Scapula. DD Both the Levators of the Scapula. E Serratus posticus minor in his situation. F Serratus posticus major in his situation. G The same muscle out of his situation. HH The greatest part of the Musculi Splenii conspicuous in their situation. TWO A portion of the Musculi complexi. KK The Mastoides somewhat separated above. LL The Sacrolumbi not removed out of their place. MM The longest muscles of the back not separated. NN The beginnings of the Sacrolumbi and longest muscles united. OO The muscles Quadrati somewhat laid open. FIG. III. AA The beginnings of the muscles Sacrolumbi and the longest united. BBBB The Sacrolumbi something moved out of their place and distinguished in their tendons. CCCC The longest muscles of the back somewhat removed, and distinguished into their tendons. DD The Musculi Spinati not separated. E The Muscle Complexus in its situation. F The same separated from the Head, that so the rest may come to view. GG The Muscles extending the neck in their situation. H The fore part of the Mastoides loosed. I The greater right muscle of the Head, drawn a little out of his place, that so the lesser right muscle may appear. K The superior obliqne muscle of the Head. L The inferior obliqne Muscle. FIG. iv AA etc. The Musculus Spinatus pulled out of his place, that so the tendons may be beheld in their order; they are described at the biggest. BB The muscles of the Loins called Sacer in his place. CC A porrion of the muscles Quadrati in their place. DD The muscles Spinati in their place. EE The transverse muscles of the neck deciphored greater and longer than they should be, that so the tendons may be the better seen. FF The Mastoides separated from the Sternum, and turned back. GG The inferior obliqne muscles of the Head. HH The superior obliqne muscles of the head. TWO The greater right muscles of the head something drawn aside. KK The lesser right muscles of the head in their place. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FIFTEENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table contains the Muscles of the Face and inferior Jaw; also the bones of the Skull, and of both Jaws. FIG. I. AA The skin of the Head detracted. BB The fleshy Pannicle separated. CC The Pericranium detracted. DD The Skull bare. E The muscle of the Forehead. FF The muscle that shuts the Eyelids. G The first muscle of the Nose. H The second muscle of the Nose. I The muscle dilating the wings. K The muscle of the first pair lifting up the Lips. L The muscle drawing the Lip upwards. M The muscle drawing the Lip downwards. NN The muscle shutting the Lips. O The Buccinator. PP The temporal muscle in his place. Q The muscle lifting up the Ear. R The muscle drawing the Ear obliquely. S The muscle Masseter in his place. TT The muscle Digastricus moved from his beginning. FIG. II. AAA The temporal muscle out of his place, the Jaw● being dissected. aa It's acute insertion into the process of the Jaw. BB The Masseter separated. CC The Digastricus loosed at the end, and drawn aside. DD The internal Pterygoides. EEEE The external Pterygoides. F The Musculus Quadratus, or musculous Expansion separated. FIG. III. A The bone of the forehead. aaa The Coronal Suture. α The hole of the bone of the forehead for the Nerve of the third pair. B The right bone of the sore part of the Head. bb The Sagittal Suture. C The left bone of the sore part of the Head. D The bone of the Temples. cc The false Suture. d The Duglike process. e The process of the Os Jugalis. E The first bone of the upper Jaw. F The Jugal process. G The second bone of the Jaw hid with the shadow of the former. H The third bone. I The fourth bone of the Jaw. i The hole in it for the Nerve of the third pair. K The fist bone. L The lower Jaw. l The hole in it for the Nerve of the fourth pair to pass out. M The sharp process of the inferior Jaw. N The blunt process of the inferior Jaw. FIG. iv A The left bone of the sore part of the Head. aa The sagittal Suture. B The right bone of the fore part of the Head. bb The Suture Lambdois. C The bone of the hinder part of the Head. D The triangular bone. Φ A portion of the bone of the Temples with the Duglike process. FIG. V AA The cavity of the bone of the hinder part of the Head within the Skull, in which the Cerebellum lies. B The internal face of the Os Sphenois. CC The Os Ethmois. D The cavity of the bone of the forehead above the Nose. aa The first hole in the wedglike bone. αα The second hole. bb The third hole. cc The fixed hole. ♁ The seventh hole. dd The fift hole. ee The first hole of the bone of the Temples. ff The rocky process of the bones of the Temples. gg The third hole of the bones of the Temples. hh The fourth and ●f● hole of the hinder part of the Head. FIG. VI AA The lower part of the hone of the hinder part of the Head conspicuous. aa The process by which the hinder part of the Head is joined to the first Vertebra of the Neck. BB Part of the bone of the Temples. CC The duglike process. DD The bodkinlike appendix. EE The jugal process. F The External face of the Wedglike bone. G H G H The winglike processes. I The bone which distinguisheth the Nostrils. KK The sixth bone of the upper Jaw. kk The hole which passeth the Nerve of the fourth pair to the Pallat. LL Part of the fourth bone of the superior Jaw. m The four Teeth called Cutters. nn The two dog teeth. oo The rest of the Teeth called Grinders. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE SIXTEENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table shows, the Brain laid bare from the Skull, with the Dura and Pia Mater; also its Cavities and Processes. FIG. I. AA The Dura Mater covering the Brain. aa The Veins and Arteries distributed on it. B The Brain covered only with the Pia Mater. bb The Circumvolutions of the Brain. ccc The Vessels distributed to the Pia Mater from the third Cavity. C The Dura Mater drawn backwards. FIG. II. AA The longer Process of the Dura Mater called Falx, turned out of its Situation. aa The third cavity of the Dura Mater open. bb The lesser inferior cavity of the same. BB A portion of the callous body laid to view. CCCC The brain deduced a little to the sides. cccc The vessels in the fourth cavity, stretched over the callous body. DD The Dura Mater hanging down on each side. FIG. III. AA The substance of the Brain. BB The callous body drawn a little outwards. bb The two Legs of the Vault something uncovered. C The hooklike process drawn backwards. DD The right fore ventricle opened on the upper part. EE The left fore Ventricle opened on the upper part. FF The Plexus Choroides. G Part of the Speculum Lucidum. HH The Dura Meninx detracted on each side. FIG. iv AA The brain explained by equal Section. B The Fornix taken up and bowed downwards. CC The superior part of the right fore ventricle deducted. DD The superior part of the left fore ventricle in like manner explained. E The chink designing the third Ventricle. FF The Dura Mater. a The Glandula Pinealis. bb The Protuberances, called Buttocks. cc The Protuberances called Testicles d The Protuberance likened to a woman's Privities. These are better expressed in the first Figure of the following Table. FIG. V AA. BB. CC. The brain and foremost ventricles explained in their upper part. f A portion of the Plexus Choroides stretched upwards by the foremost ventricles D The shorter process of the Dura Mater. EEE The longer process thereof. F The Torcular of Herophilus. G The Dura Mater detracted. a The first cavity of the Dura Mater. b The second cavity of the Dura Mater. ccc The third cavity of the Dura Mater. ddd The lesser cavity in the hooklike process. e The fourth cavity of the Dura Mater. FIG. VI AA BB CC ff signify the same they did in the fift Figure. DD The Cerebellum conspicuous in his natural place. E The wormlike process of the Cerebellum. FF The Dura Mater hanging down. GG The same with the cavities rolled downwards. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE SEVENTEENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table presents in larger Figures the Cavities both of the Brain and Cerebellum, as they are showed by the Dissections of the Ancients. FIG. I. Shows the inferior Cavity of the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, the original of the optic Nerves, the fourth Ventricle with its Protuberances, the Legs of the Vault, and whatsoever Arantius compared by the Sea-horse, or Silkworm. AAAA The Dura Mater detracted. B The Process of the sievelike Bone like a christ. CC Part of the Os Sphenois, showing itself under the membrane, the Brain being taken away. DD The foremost process of the Os Sphenois, making the Cavity of the Saddle. EEEE A portion of the Brain left. F The foremost leg of the Vault bowed forewards. GG The hinder legs of the Vault. HH The Sea-horse, or Silkworms of Arantius. IIII The inferior Cavity of the foremost ventricles. K The extremity of the callous body sticking out like Buttocks. L The Glandula Pinealis. MM The Protuberances called Testicles. NN The cavity between the Brain and Cerebellum commonly called the fourth ventricle. OOOO Part of the Plexus Chorois bowed backwards, which is carried by the superior cavity of the ventricles. PP The foremost portion of the Basis of the Brain. Q The bottom of the third ventricle in which behind is the hole likened to the Fundament; it tends to the beginning of the marrow of the back; before is the hole compared to the womb, and is carried to the Funnel. RRRR A portion of the Plexus Chorois turned backwards, which is extended to the fourth inferior cavity. SS The roots of the optic Nerves. T The uniting of the optic Nerves. W The optic Nerves again severed and passing towards the Eyes. FIG. II. This Figure shows the proper Ventricle of the Cerebellum, which the best Anatomists call the fourth Ventricle. AAAA Each lobe of the Cerebellum whole. BBBB The internal face of the Cerebellum laid open by incision. CC The worm-like Process of the Cerebellum whose superior and round part is taken away. DD The proper Ventricle of the Cerebellum, with its two cavities. E The prominence conspicuous between the two cavities. F The passage from the third ventricle to the marrow of the back. G The Cavity of the marrow of the back like a pen. H The chink in the said cavity. I● The descending trunk of the marrow of the back cut off. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE EIGHTEENTH BRASS PLATE IN THIS BOOK. This Table shows the rise of the Nerves within the Skull, also the principal branches of the third and fourth pairs, the Glandula Pituitaria with the Funnel, the Rete Mirable, the fourth Ventricle and the most special Veins arising from the marrow of the Back. FIG. I. Shows the Brain a great portion of it being taken away above with the Cerebellum diducted to the side. A The Nerve of smelling. a Its process called Mamillaris. B The Optic Nerve or first pair. CC The Nerve of the second pair. DD The Nerve of the third pair. EE The Nerve of the fourth pair. FF The Nerve of the fift pair. GG The Nerve of the sixth pair. The Nerve of the seventh pair by reason of its deep rise appears not. F. I G. II. The side of the skull being broken off, together with the Eye whole, and the cheek divided, is showed. A The Nerve of the third pair. B Its branch which goes out at the hole of the bone of the forehead. C A branch of the same pair which goes out by the hole of the fourth bone of the upper Jaw. D The Nerve of the fourth pair. E Its branch which goes to the teeth and gums of the upper Jaw. F Its branch which is carried to the Tongue. G Its branch which enters the lower Jaw. H The same branch which passeth out at the hole of the lower Jaw. FIG. III. The Brain with the Marrow of the back being turned, these things come to view. AA The Nerves of swelling. aa Their Dug-like processes. BB The two legs of the Nerves of the first pair. CC The greater branch of the Artery Carotis, the interior being joined to the Vertebral Artery OO D The▪ Glandula Pituataria. E The Funnel. F The Protuberances of the Brain, set before the passage which carries the slegm to the Funnel. GG The Nerves of the second pair cut off. HH The beginnings of the Nervs of the third pair. TWO The beginning of the Nervs of the fourth pair. KK The beginning of the Nerves of the fift pair. LL The beginning of the Nervs of the sixth pair. MM The beginning of the Nervs of the seventh pair NNN The beginning of the marrow of the back, between the skull and the first Vertebra. OO The common branch of the Vertebral artery, which being divided after its union with the Carotis artery CC makes up the Rete mirabile with it, about the seat of the wedg-like bone. PPPP Small branches of Arteries called the Rete mirabile. FIG. iv AA The Cerebellum and his globes. B The wormlike process of the Cerebellum. CCCC The process of the Cerebellum, called the bridge. DD The beginning of the marrow of the back. E The cavity of the marrow of the back, called the pen. F The fourth Ventricle laid open. FIG. V A The trunk of the marrow of the back descending as it may be publicly showed being taken out of the body. BB The branches arising from the three pairs of Nerves of the Neck, and two of the Breast, to be distributed to the hands. bb The small branches running to the muscles of the shoulder. CC The first pair of Nerves of the hands. DD The second pair. EE The third pair. FF The fourth pair. GG The fift pair. HH The sixth pair called Subcutaneus. IIII The pairs of intercostal Nerves, the two lower most of which pertain to the Loins. K The first pair which is carried to the Foot. LL The second pair. MM The third pair. NN The fourth and greatest pair. O The small Nervs of the marrow of the back, which are carried to the bladder and muscles of the Fun dament, and to the Genitals of both Sexes. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE of the ninteenth Brass Plate in this Book. This Table comprehends the Eyelids with the Muscle called Levator; also the proper Muscles of the Eyes; the Membranes and the Humours included in the Membranes. FIG. I. AA The Levator muscle of the superior Eyelid. B Its tendon thinly opened. CC The Cartilages of the Eyelids. DD The Caruncle in the internal angle. dd The Puncta Lacrymalia. E The external angle of the Eyelid. FIG. II. AA The Fat behind the Eyes. BBB The muscles of the Eyes not separated. CC Part of the Eye covered with the tendons of the muscles. FIG. III. A The right muscle lifting up the Eye. aaa etc. Small Nerves carrying motion, sense, and spirit. B The right muscle depressing the Eye. C The right muscle drawing to the Eye. D The right muscle drawing the Eye from. E The inferior obliqne mascle, whose tendon is but only separated from the part of that which follows. F The superior oblick muscle. G The Trochlea of the same muscle. H The Sclerotes covering the hinder part of the Eye. TWO A portion of the Optic Nerve inserted into the Eye. FIG. iv Shows a Sheep's Eye, and in it the seventh muscle which Man needs not. A B C D The four right muscles. E The inferior oblick muscle, which here is large. F The superior oblick muscle which is slender. G The Trochlea of the superior oblick muscle. H The seventh muscle of Brutus' drawing the Eye to. I The hinder part of the Eye covered with the tendon of the seventh muscle. K A part of the optic Nerve included in the sevent●h muscle. FIG. V ABCD Show the am with the former, the oblick muscles being removed. aaaa The common membrane called Innominata. bb The Iris transparent through the Corns. FIG. VI AAA The Membrane Sclerotes dissected. B The Membrana Cornea. C A part of the optic Nerve. FIG. VII. A The Membrana Uvea. a The hole in the Uvea or Pupilla. BB The Ciliar Ligament with its strings. CC The Membrana Choroides looking black. FIG. VIII. AA The Net-like Membrane. aa A Rupture in it upon the Vitrial, which by reason of its softness is unavoidable in a Dissection. BBB The Membrana Choroides not yet separated. CCC The thickness of the Membrane Sclerotes. D Part of the optic Nerve. FIG. IX. The three humours of the Eyes received in a Vessel. A The Crystalline Humour posited in the Cavity of the Vitrial. BB Some appearance of the Ciliar strings. CC The Vitrial humour. DD The aqucal humour, being but little, and placed round about the Vitrial. AN EXPLANATION of the TABLE of the twenteth brass Plate in this Book. This Table represents the external Ear with his Muscles and Cartilages, as also the internal or chief Organ of Hearing, its Cavities, Bones, Passages and Nerves, as they are found out by Dissection of such Bodies as are grown up. FIG. I. Shows the external Ear whole, with its muscles and Cavities. AA The Helix of the Ear. BB The Anthelix. C The Tragus, or beard of the Ear. D The Antitragus. E The external lobe of the Ear. FF The external Concha of the Ear. GG The cavity between the Helices' called Innominata. H The muscle moving the Ear right upwards. III The threefold muscle with his tendon moving the Ear oblickly upwards, divided into so many parts. FIG. II. Shows the external Ear con spicuous behind. AA The skin with the Membrane stretched upwards and downwards. BB The Cartilege which makes the Ear. C The hole for the passage of heaving. D A portion of the Ligament of the external Ear. E Part of the Lobus of the Ear. FIG. III. Shows the fore part of the interna! Ear. A Part of the bone of the Temples containing the rocky process. B The passage of hearing. C The beginning of the passage or hive. D The duglike process. E The bodkinlike process broken off. FIG. iv The bone of the foregoing Figure is showed, in which the passage of hearing is cut off, that so the membrane of the Timpanum may be seen. AA The beginning of the passage of hearing. BB The membrane of the Timpanum. C The little foot of the Mallcus transparent by the membrane. D The duglike process. E The bodkinlike appendix. FIG. V Shows the Muscles of the internal Ear. A The muscle moving the membrane and Malcolus outwards. B The membrane of the Timpanum. CC The muscle moving the Malleolus and membrane inwards. E The head of the Malleolus. FIG. VI A Part of the passage of Hearing passing to the Timpanum. BC The cavity of the Timpanum, in which B The oval hole. C The round hole. FIG. VII Shows the rocky process with the small bones of the Timpanum in their situation. A The Mallcolus. B The Anvil. C The superior part of the stirrup conspicuous. DD The bowing of the Cochlea. FIG. 7. Shows the three small bones out of their situation. A The Malleolus with its two processes, its short and long. B The Anvil applied to the Malleolus. C The Stirrup. D The small bone joined to the Ligament of the stirrup. FIG. VIII. Shows the inferior face of the bone of the Temples. AA The extremity of a quill thrust through that passage of Hearing which is carried to the palate. BB Shows the same passage broke off from the next part. FIG. IX. AA The cavity of the Cochlea, whose broader part goes to the Labyrinth. BB The cavity of the Labyrinth, in which the oval hole is conspicuous: also four other holes which open themselves in the circles are obumbrated by a black colour: the fift in the extremity of the circle of the Cochlea, is broken off. If you would see how they are in Infants, look the eighth Table, and the seventh figure. FIG. X. AA The beginning of the passage of the first hole of the bone of the Temples, into which the Nerve of Hearing passeth. BB The rocky process of the bone of the Temples, in which the cavities are contained. FIG. XI. A B C D The end of the passage into which the Nerve of Hearing proceeds laid open, the bone being taken away. B The cavity in which the softer portion of the Nerve of Hearing lies in the Centre of the Cochlea. C The process between▪ each portion of the Nerve standing up like a bridge. D Another cavity called Caecum by the Ancients, Aquaeductus by Fallopius, by which the harder portion of the nerve of hearing obliquely descends. EE Two footsteps of the circles in the Labyrinth, which you may see whole, Table 8. figure 7, 8. FIG. XII. Contains a portion of the bone of the Temples, in which the Timpanum being taken away, and the passage which contains the Nerve of Hearing there appears. AA The softer portion of the nerve of Hearing. BB The harder portion of the nerve of Hearing, obliquely descending under the Timpanum, being thicker about the place it goes out. CC A small Nerve from the fourth pair ●oyning itself to the harder nerve of Hearing. An EXPLANATION of the TABLE of the one and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book. This Table exactly presents the Bones of Man to your view, so that the Composition of the Bones we mentioned before in the Abdomen, Breast, and Head are here seen, especially the Bones of the Hands and Feet are seen both before and behind; also the Ligaments of the Thigh and Tibia; last, the Bones called Sesamoides are curiously represented. FIG. I. Shows the Sceleton of a Body grown up. AA The internal side of each Scapula. BB Both the Claviculae. CC The bone of the shoulder, otherwise called the bone of the arm. aa The head of the shoulder produduced from the appendix. bb The external bunch of each shoulder. cc The internal bunch of the shoulder. DD The bone of the Cubit called Radius. EE The bone of the Cubit called Ulna. FF The eight bones of the Carpus. GG The thumb composed of three bones. HH The Metacarpus composed of four bones. TWO The four fingers composed of three bones. KK The thigh which some call Crus. LL The Mola, or Knee-pan. dd The head of the bone of the thigh, or superior appendix. ee The neck of the bone of the thigh. ff Trochanter, or Rotator major. gg Trochanter, or Rotator minor. hh The appendix, or infertor head of the thigh. MM The Tibia. NN The Fibula. two The internal ankle. kk The external ankle. OO The seven bones of the Tarsus conspicuous before. PP The five bones of the Metatarsus. QQ The bones of the toes, of which the great toe hath two, and the rest three apiece. ** etc. The appendices of the shoulder, Radius, Thigh, Tibia, distinguished by a small line from the rest of the bone. FIG. II. Contains the Scapula with the Clavicula, to which the bones of the Shoulder, Cubit, and Hand are joined. A The left Clavicula, in which a The head which is lightly finewous where it is committed to the Sternum. b The other extremity of the Clavicula, whereby it is joined to the process of the Scapula. B The Scapula. c The short process of the Scapula receiving the shoulder. d The process of the Scapula called Coracois. e The process of the Scapula called Spina. f The superior angle. g The inferior angle. bh The basis of the Scapula. C The notable hinder bone of the shoulder. f The greater or backward cavity of the bone of the shoulder. g The crooked process of the bone of the Ulna. D The bone Ulna. E The Radius. F The external face of the Wrist. G The Metacarpus consisting of four bones. H The Thumb consisting of three bones. TWO The orders of the fingers. FIG. III. Contains the eight bones of the Wrist expressed largely, that so they might be the better distinguished. FIG. iv Shows the Os Ischium, Ilium, and Pubis, and under them, the thigh leg, and Foot. A The external face of the Os Ilium B The Acetabulum which receives the head of the thigh. C The thigh conspicuius behind, in which a The superior appendix. b Trochanter major. 🜂 The rough line of the thigh. c Trochanter minor. d The posterior cavity of the inferior appendix. ee The heads of the inferior appendix. f The protuberances' distinguishing the cavities of the Tibia. D The Tibia conspicuous behind. g The internal ankle. E The Fibula. h The external ankle. ** The appendices of the Tibia. F The Tarsus. G The Metatarsus. H The great toe consisting of two bones. FIG. V Propounds the bones of the Tarsus distinctly, in which A Os Astragali. B Os Calcanei. C Os Cymbiforme. D Os Cubiforme. EEE The three other Wedlike bones. FIG. VI Show the four greater and four lesser bones called Sesamoides. FIG. VII. Shows the superior part of the thigh with the Acetabulum. aa A broad Ligament compassing the joint of the thigh dissected. b A round Ligament arising out of the Acetabulum. FIG. VIII. The inferior part of the Thigh and superior part of the Leg is showed. a A broad Ligament compassing the Joyat. b A Ligament produced out of the Sepiment. cc The cavities of the Tibia receiving the thigh. d The knee-pan with a portion of the tendon joined to it. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE of the two and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book. This Table comprehends the Muscles which move the Shoulder, Cubit, and Hand: of which the greater part stick to their beginnings and ends. FIG. I. A Musculus Deltoides separated from the beginning B Infrascapularis separated. C Rotundus minor. D Rotundus major. E The pectoral muscle separated from the breast, vide Chap. IX. F The fleshy portion of the broadest muscle of the back, vide Chap. XII. G Musculus Biceps. H The lesser muscle lifting up the shoulder in his Situation. TWO The Brachiaeus under the Biceps. K The muscle Palmaris hanging from its original. L A portion of the Supinator. M The external bower of the Wrist. N The internal bower of the Wrist. O The bower of the second Internodium of the fingers. P The bower of the third Internodium of the fingers. Q The bowers of the first Internodium of the thumb in their first situation. R The bowers of the second Internodium of the thumb in their situation. S The Abductor of the little finger. aa The internal face of the Scapula. b The tendon of the muscle Palmaris. c A portion of the tendon which bows the third Internodium of the thumb. d The Ligament of the urest in its situation. FIG. II. A The lesser muscle lifting up the shoulder. B The muscle Brachiaeus whole. C The round Pronator of the Radius. D The bower of the third Internodium of the thumb out of his situation. E The square Pronator of the Radius. F The bowers of the first Internodium of the thumb out of their situation. G The bowers of the second Internodium of the thumb out of their situation. aa The internal side of the Scapula. b Os Humeri. c Os Radii. d Os Ulnae. ee The membranous Ligament of the Ulna and Radius. ffff The muscles commonly called Adductors. h The Abductor of the little finger. FIG. III. A The first Suprascapularis removed out of his place. B The second Suprascapularis. C Rotundus minor. D Rotundus major. E The long muscle extending the Cubit. F The short extender of the Cubit. G The internal extender of the wrist. H The external extender of the wrist, having here but one tendon. I The special Abductor of the fore finger with but one tendon. K The extendors of the second and third Internodij of the fingers united. L The extendor of the third Internodium of the thumb. M The extendor of the first Internodium of the thumb, having here but one single body and tendon. aa The process of the Scapula called Spiniformis. a The muscle Anconeus. bb The bone of the shoulder. c The external knob of the shoulder. d The internal knob of the shoulder. e The tendines which extend the second and third Internodium gathered together. ff etc. The tendons of the same muscles applying to the Internodij. g The annular Ligament of the wrist loosed. FIG. iv A The external face of the Scapula. B The bone of the shoulder covered with the Periostinum. C Os Radij. D Os Ulnae. E The muscle of the Radius called Supinator longus. F The muscle of the Radius called Supinator brevis. G The muscle Anconeus. H The membranous Ligament of the Radius and Ulna. IIII The three interosseal muscles with their Auxiliary. K The Abductor of the thumb. FIG. V A The muscle bowing the second Internodium of the fingers called Perforatus. aa etc. Their tendons. B The muscle bowing the third internodium of the fingers called Perforans. bb Its tendines passing through the clefts of the tendines of the former. CCCC The muscles bowing the first Internodium, or Lumbricals. DD The bowers of the thumb in their situation. cc A portion of the tendon bowing the third internodium of the thumb. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE of the three and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book. This Table shows the Muscles produced by Nature for the various motions of the Thighs, Legs, and Feet. FIG. I. A The greater part of the muscle called Psoas, which you may see in Table x. figure 1. in its Natural situation, here it is separated from its beginning, and joined to the internal Iliack muscle, and descends to the thigh. B The internal Iliack muscle. CC The muscle Triceps something uncovered: you may see it whole in the ne●t Figure. D Musculus Lividus. E The membranous muscle conspicuous with a fleshy body about his beginning, whose broad tendon is separated from the parts under it. FF The right muscle. GG Musculus vastus externus. HH Musculus vastus internus. TWO Musculus facialis. K Musculus Tibialis anticus. LL Musculus Peroneus secundus. MM The Extendor of the third internodium of the toes. N The extender of the third internodium of the great toe. aa The appendix of the Os Ilium laid open before. b The extremity of the Os Pubis. cccc The tendon of the membranous Muscle. dd A portion of the muscle Gasterocnemius hanging out, the leg being depressed: the third Figure shows it hanging out of its situation under the character KK. e The membranous Ligament of the Tibia and Fibula. ffff The tendines of the muscles extending the third Internodium. g The transverse Ligament of the foot separated. FIG. II. A The internrl face of the Os Ilium. B A portion of the great muscle Glutaeus, which the following figure represents separated from the middle Glutaeus. CCC Musculus Triceps. DD A portion of the Gasterocnemius and Soleus' as yet joined. EE Tibialis posticus. FF Peroneus primus. G The extender of the second internodium of the toes in its situation. aaaa The interosseal muscles. FIG. III. A Glutaeus major separated and depressed to the side. B Glutaeus medius in his situation. C Musculus Pyriformis. D The fourth muscle moving the thigh about. E Obturator internus entering the fleshy purse. FF Musculus gracilis. GG Musculus Seminervosus. HH Musculus Semimembranosus elegantly expressed. III Musculus Biceps. KK The Gasterocnemius turned backwards, to whose beginnings two small bones called Sasamoides stick. LL Musculus soleus in his situation. M The little muscle called Plantaris. N The tendon spread abroad from the heel under the sole of the foot. O The Abductor of the great toe. P The Abductor of the little toe. Q The interosseal muscle pertaining to the little toe. aa The brim of the Os Ilium. b The fleshy purse. FIG. iv A The internal face of the Os Ilium. B Musculus Glutaeus minor in his situation. C Musculus Glutaeus medius out of his situation. D Musculus Pyriformis. E The fourth muscle moving the thigh about. ● The external Obturator. F The internal Obturator. G The fleshy purse. H Musculus Popliteus. TWO Musculus perforans. K The muscle bowing the third internodium of the great toe. L Musculus perforatus in his situation. M The Abductor of the little toe. N The Abductor of the great toe in his situation. FIG. V a The greater Adductor of the great toe. bb The Abductor of the great toe. c The Abductor of the little toe. dddd The internal interosseal Muscles. e The lesser Adductor of the great toe. FIG. VI A The muscle Perforatus which bows the second internodium. B The bower of the third internodium of the great toe. C Musculus perforans, or the bower of the third internodium. DD A portion of the musculous flesh joined to the beginnings of the lumbrical muscles. eeee The lumbrical muscles. ffff The interosseal muscles with the Abductors of the great and little toe. AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE of the four and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book. This last Table shows the Veins, Arteries, and Nerves of the extreme Parts, being not careful of the smallest branches, the huge multitude of which would obscure the greater, and dull the Brain of the Learner: The most famous are delineated, such as are showed publicly in the Theatre in Dissection of Men of perfect age. FIG. I. Shows the Veins distributed to the Hand. A The axillar branch of the Vena Cava. BBB Vena Cephalica. CCC Vena Basilica. a The external Scapular. b The branch of the Cephalica, which is carried to the Deltois. c d Branches of the Cephalica distributed to the bowers of the arm. e The deep branch of the Cephalica. ff The internal branch of the Cephalica making the Median. g The Median vein descending. h The Cephalica of the Hand. two The external branch of the Cephalica. ● The Salvatella of the Hand. k The internal Scapular. l The superior breast-vein. m The inferior breast-vein. nnn The Basilick branches carried to the Extendors of the Cubit. oo The deep branch of the Basilica. p A singular branch of the deep branch, which is carried out to the cubit, with the fourth pair of Nerves. q The external branch of the deep basilical. r The internal branch of the same. s The Subcutaneus branch of the basilica. tt The internal branch of the Subcutaneus branch, which with the cephalical, procureth the median. u Its branch joining itself to the common vein. x The external vein of the Subcutaneus branch of the Basilica. yy The greater branch of the external Subcutaneus. z The lesser branch of the same. FIG. II. The Arteries distributed to the Arm. A The axillar branch of the artery. a The internal scapular. b The external scapular. c The superior Breast-artery. d The inferior breast-artery. e f g Branches of the artery distributed to the muscles of the shoulder. hhh Branches of the artery distributed to the joint of the Elbow. B The external branch of the artery in the cubit. C The internal branch. two The branch which is carried to the muscles of the Radius. k The branch carried to the muscles of the Ulna. l m n o Branches carried from the internal branch to the wrist, little, ring and middle finger. pp Branches carried to the hands from the external branch. qq r s Branches pertaining to the thumb, fore, and middle finger. FIG. III. Designs the Nerves distributed to the hand. 4 5 6 7. The four Vertebrae of the Neck. 1. The first Verbra of the breast. a b c d The five Nerves proceeding out of the holes of the Vertebrae. ff The first pair of Nerves descending from the plexure *. ●. gg The second pair. hh The third pair. two The fourth pair bigger than the rest. kk The fift pair. ll The sixth pair which is subcutaneus. FIG. iv Contains the veins of the foot. A The crural branch of the Vena Cava. aaaa The Vein Saphena. bbb The branches of the Saphena distributed by the interior part of the thigh. cc The Vein Ischias. dd The internal Musculae. ee The external Muscula. fff The vein Poplitea consisting of a double beginning. gg The internal branch of the crural vein. hh The external branch of the same. i The first branch of the external crural. kk The second branch of the same. ll The remainder of the same. m The vein of the foot called Ischias. FIG. V Contains the Arteries of the Foot. AAA The crural Artery produced from the external Iliack branch of the great Artery. a The artery Pudenda. b The artery carried to the internal Iliack muscle. c The artery Ischias. dd The external Muscula. e The internal Muscula. ffff The arteries distributed to the membrane and fat. gg The artery Poplitea. hh The arteries called Surals. two The foremost branch of the crural artery. kk The first hindmost branch of the same. ll The second hindermost branch of the same. FIG. VI Represents the Nerves of the Foot. 2. 3. 4. 5. The four Vertebrae of the Loins. 66 The Os Sacrum. A A pair of Nerves pertaining to the tranverse muscles of the Abdomen. BB The first pair of Nerves of the foot. CC The second pair. aaa A branch of the same which accompanies the Saphena. bb The remainder of the same branch. DD The third pair of of the Nerves of the foot. EEE The fourth pair, which is the greatest. c Its Branch which turns back to the Buttocks and skin of the thigh. ddd Branches sent to the bowers of the leg. eeee Branches sent to the bowers of the Thigh. f A branch sent to the muscle Plantaris and the extenders of the Tarsus. g▪ h Two external branches sent to the toes and the muscles of the Fibula. i The internal branch carried to the great and second toe. k▪ l The internal branches sent to the sural muscles. m The remainder of the Nerve of the sixth pair, dispersed by a double branch under the foot to the toes. FIG. VII Shows the Basilica vein open, in which three shutters appear. FIG. VIII. Shows a branch of the crural vein open, and three double, and one single shutter. FIG. IX. and X. Show a portion of the Nerve of the fourth pair divided into small Nerves like threads, in gathering together of which, the wonderful power of Nature appear●.